Chapter 2 Material 2021 JAN

Chapter 2 – Material
January 2021
This latest edition incorporates all rule changes. The latest revisions are shown with a
vertical line. The section title is framed if the section is revised completely. Changes after
the publication of the rule are written in red colour.
Unless otherwise specified, these Rules apply to ships for which the date of contract for
construction as defined in TL PR 29 is on or after 1st of January 2021. New rules or
amendments entering into force after the date of contract for construction are to be applied
if required by those rules. See Rule Change Notices on TL website for details.
"General Terms and Conditions" of the respective latest edition will be applicable (see
Rules for Classification and Surveys).
If there is a difference between the rules in English and in Turkish, the rule in English is to
be considered as valid. This publication is available in print and electronic pdf version.
Once downloaded, this document will become UNCONTROLLED. Please check

www.turkloydu.org for the amended and valid version.
All rights are reserved by Türk Loydu, and content may not be reproduced, disseminated,
published, or transferred in any form or by any means, except with the prior written
permission of TL.
TÜRK LOYDU
Head Office Postane Mah. Tersaneler Cad. No:26 Tuzla 34944 İSTANBUL / TÜRKİYE
Tel : (90-216) 581 37 00
Fax : (90-216) 581 38 00
E-mail : info@turkloydu.org
http://www.turkloydu.org
Regional Offices
Ankara Eskişehir Yolu Mustafa Kemal Mah. 2159. Sokak No : 6/4 Çankaya - ANKARA / TÜRKİYE
Tel : (90-312) 219 56 34 - 219 68 25
Fax : (90-312) 219 69 72
E-mail : ankara@turkloydu.org
İzmir Atatürk Cad. No :378 K.4 D.402 Kavalalılar Apt. 35220 Alsancak - İZMİR / TÜRKİYE
Tel : (90-232) 464 29 88
Fax : (90-232) 464 87 51
E-mail : izmir@turkloydu.org
Adana Çınarlı Mah. Atatürk Cad. Aziz Naci İş Merkezi No:5 K.1 D.2 Seyhan - ADANA / TÜRKİYE
Tel : (90- 322) 363 30 12
Fax : (90- 322) 363 30 19
E-mail : adana@turkloydu.org
Contents
Material
Page
Section 1 – Manufacture, Testing and Certification
A. General ............................................................................................................................................................... 1- 2
B Manufacturer Approval ......................................................................................................................................... 1- 2
C. Manufacture and Material Quality ........................................................................................................................ 1- 2
D. Inspection and Testing ........................................................................................................................................ 1- 3
E. Identification and Marking .................................................................................................................................... 1- 5
F. Documentation and Certification ......................................................................................................................... 1- 6
Section 2 – Mechanical and Technological Testing Procedures

A. General ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-2
B. Tensile Tests ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-2
C. Bend Tests ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-6
D. Toughness Tests.................................................................................................................................................. 2-7
E. Ductility Tests for Pipes and Tubes ..................................................................................................................... 2-9
F. Hardness Tests .................................................................................................................................................... 2-11
G. Bend Tests on Pipes and Tubes .......................................................................................................................... 2-12
H. Non-Destructive Testings ..................................................................................................................................... 2-12
Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars
A. General ............................................................................................................................................................... 3- 4
B. Normal and Higher Strength Hull Structural Steels ............................................................................................. 3-12
C. High-Strength Steels for Welded Structures ....................................................................................................... 3-28
D. Steels for Boilers and Pressure Vessels ............................................................................................................. 3-36
E. Steels for Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases In Bulk And Ships Using Gases Or Other Low-
Flashpoint Fuels .................................................................................................................................................. 3-38
F. Stainless Steels................................................................................................................................................... 3-40
G. Clad Steel Plates................................................................................................................................................. 3-42
H. Steels with Specified Minimum Through Thickness Properties ........................................................................... 3-45
I. Unalloyed Steels for Welded Structures .............................................................................................................. 3-47
J. Requirements for Use of Extremely Thick Steel Plates on Container Carriers .................................................... 3-49
K. Approval of Manufacturing Scheme of Hull Structural Steels .............................................................................. 3-47
J. Requirements For Use of Extremely Thick Steel Plates on Container Carriers ........................................ ……...3-49
K. Approval of Manufacturing Scheme of Hull Structural Steels .............................................................................. 3-59
Annex 1 Measures for Extremely Thick Steel Plates
Annex 2 Manufacturing Approval Scheme for TL-EH47 Steels
Annex 3 Manufacturing Approval Scheme for Brittle Crack Arrest Steels
Annex 4 Test Method for Brittle Crack Arrest Toughness, K ca
Annex 5 Outline of Requirements for Undertaking Isothermal Crack Arrest Temperature (CAT) Test
Appendix A Manufacturing Approval Scheme of Hull Structural Steels
Appendix B Approval scheme for manufacturer of hull structural steels intended for welding with high heat input
Appendix C Procedure for Approval of Corrosion resistant steels for cargo oil Tanks - Approval Procedure for
Corrosion Resistant Steel
Appendix D Manufacturing Approval Scheme of the High Strength Steels for Welded Structures
Contents
Section 4 – Steel Pipes and Fittings

A. General .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
B. Pipes for General Purpose ............................................................................................................................. 4-7
C. Pipes for High Temperature Services ............................................................................................................ 4-10
D. Pipes for Low Temperature Services ............................................................................................................. 4-13
E. Stainless Steel Pipes ..................................................................................................................................... 4-18
F. Fittings............................................................................................................................................................ 4-19
Section 5 – Steel Forgings

A. General ............................................................................................................................................................... 5-3
B. Forgings for Hull and Machinery Construction ..................................................................................................... 5-10
C. Forgings for Crankshafts ...................................................................................................................................... 5-14
D. Forgings for Gears . ............................................................................................................................................. 5-16
E. Forgings for Boilers, Pressure Vessels and Systems........................................................................................... 5-20
F. Steel Forgings For Low Temperature Services .................................................................................................... 5-22
G. Non-Destructive Testing of Forged Components ................................................................................................. 5-25
H. List of Forged Components for Which Non-Destructive Tests are Required ........................................................ 5-32
I. Classifying of Inspection Zones For Magnetic Particle Testing (Mt) ..................................................................... 5-33
J. Classifying of Inspection Zones for Ultrasonic Testing (Ut) .................................................................................. 5-38
Section 6 – Steel Castings

A. General ................................................................................................................................................................ 6-3
B. Steel Castings for Hull And Machinery Construction ............................................................................................ 6-8
C. Steel Castings for Crankshafts and Connecting Rods ......................................................................................... 6-11
D. Steel Castings for Steam Boilers, Pressure Vessels and Pipelines .................................................................... 6-12
E. Steel Castings for Low Temperature Services ..................................................................................................... 6-14
F. Stainless Steel Castings ...................................................................................................................................... 6-17
G. Non-Destructive Testing of Cast Steel Components ............................................................................................ 6-20
H. List of Cast Steel Components for Which Non-Destructive Tests are Required ................................................... 6-33
I. Testing Instructions for Hull Structural Parts ........................................................................................................ 6-34
J. Testing Instruction for Diesel Engine Parts .......................................................................................................... 6-42
Section 7 – Iron Castings

A. Spheroidal or Nodular Graphite Iron Castings...................................................................................................... 7-2
B. Grey Iron Castings ............................................................................................................................................... 7-10
Section 8 – Aluminium Alloys

A. Wrought Aluminium Alloys ................................................................................................................................... 8-2
B. Aluminium Alloy Castings ..................................................................................................................................... 8-8
C. Rivets ................................................................................................................................................................... 8-10
D. Transition Joints ................................................................................................................................................... 8-11
Section 9 – Copper Alloys

A. Pipes of Copper And Wrought Copper Alloys. ..................................................................................................... 9-2
B. Copper Alloys Castıngs ........................................................................................................................................ 9-9
Contents
Section 10 – Materials for Equipment

A. Anchors ................................................................................................................................................................ 10-2
B. Anchor Chain Cables and Accessories ................................................................................................................ 10-8
C. Offshore Mooring Chains and Accessories .......................................................................................................... 10-20
D. Wire Ropes .......................................................................................................................................................... 10-43
E. Fibre Ropes.......................................................................................................................................................... 10-46
Section 11 – Materials for Propeller

A. Cast Copper Alloy Propellers ............................................................................................................................... 11-2
B. Cast Stainless Steel Propellers ............................................................................................................................ 11-12
Annex A. Welding Procedure and Welder’s Qualification Tests for Propellers Made of Cast Copper Alloys .............. 11-19
Annex B. Welding Procedure Qualification Test for Propellers Made of Cast Stainless Steel .................................... 11-22
Section 12 – Wooden Materials

A. General ................................................................................................................................................................ 12-2
B. Types of Wood and Classifications ...................................................................................................................... 12-2
C. Boatbuilding Plywood ........................................................................................................................................... 12-4
D. Plywood for Aircraft .............................................................................................................................................. 12-11
E. Joining of Wood Materials .................................................................................................................................... 12-18
F. Wood Protection................................................................................................................................................... 12-19
G. Requirement for the Core Materials of Sandwich Laminates Cross-Cut Balsa Wood ......................................... 12-19
Section 13 – Fibre Reinforced Plastics

A. Requirements for Materials and Production ......................................................................................................... 13-2
B. Inspection and Testing of Fibre Composite Materials .......................................................................................... 13-10
C. Repair of Components ........................................................................................................................................ 13-19
Section 14 – Fittings and Pressed Parts, Bolts and Nuts

A. Pressed Parts....................................................................................................................................................... 14-1
B. Pipe Fittings ......................................................................................................................................................... 14-5
C. Bolts and Nuts ..................................................................................................................................................... 14-8
AMENDMENTS
Revision RCS No. EIF Date*
Section 03 04/2022 01.07.2022
Section 02 05/2021 01.01.2022
Section 05 05/2021 01.01.2022
Section 06 05/2021 01.01.2022
Section 10 05/2021 01.01.2022
Section 13 05/2021 01.01.2022
Section 03 03/2021 01.07.2021
Section 05 03/2021 01.07.2021
Section 11 03/2021 01.07.2021
* Entry into Force (EIF) Date is provided for general guidance only, EIF dates given in Rule Change Summary
(RCS) are considered valid. In addition to the above stated changes, editorial corrections may have been made.
Section 1 – Manufacture, Testing and Certification 1- 1
SECTION 1
MANUFACTURE, TESTING AND CERTIFICATION
Page
A. GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................. 1- 2
1. Scope
2. Other Relevant Specifications
3. Information to be Supplied by the Purchaser
B MANUFACTURER APPROVAL ............................................................................................................................. 1- 2
C. MANUFACTURE AND MATERIAL QUALITY ....................................................................................................... 1- 2
1. Manufacture
2. Chemical Composition
3. Condition of Supply
4. Defects
5. Weldability
D. INSPECTION AND TESTING ................................................................................................................................ 1- 3
1. General
2. Test Material
3. Mechanical Tests
4. Retesting
5. Visual and Non-Destructive Examinations
E. IDENTIFICATION AND MARKING ......................................................................................................................... 1- 5
1. Identification of Materials and Products
2. Marking
3. Use of the TL Stamps
4. Stamping of Specimens by the Works
F. DOCUMENTATION AND CERTIFICATION .......................................................................................................... 1- 6
1. TL Certificate
2. Works’ Certificates
3. Alternative Verification
TÜRK LOYDU - MATERIAL – JANUARY 2021

1- 2 Section 1 –Manufacture, Testing and Certification A,B,C
A. General other relevant rules. Optional or additional conditions

are also to be indicated.
1. Scope
1.1 This section specifies the requirements for the B. Manufacturer Approval
manufacture, testing and certification of materials and
products used for the construction, repair and equipping 1. All materials and products for hull construction
of vessels classed or intended to be classed by TL. and equipment are to be manufactured at works
approved by TL. (See Section 3 Appendixes A, A1, A2
1.2 The scope of these Rules includes all those and B (Reference TL- R W 11.Appendixes A, A1, A2
materials and products whose use is referred to in the and B)).
Rules for Construction. TL reserve the right to extend
the scope of these Rules to materials and products not
specifically mentioned in the Rules for Construction. C. Manufacture and Material Quality
1.3 Materials, test specimens and mechanical 1. Manufacture

testing procedures having characteristics differing from
those prescribed herein may be approved upon 1.1 All materials are to be manufactured by
application, due regard being paid to established sufficiently well proven techniques, which ensure that
practices in the country in which the material is the required properties are achieved. Where new
produced. processes are to be employed, preliminary proof of their
suitability is to be submitted to TL. According to the
2. Other Relevant Specifications decision of TL, this shall take the form of special
procedure tests and/or the presentation of works
2.1 Materials and products complying with documentation of tests performed or of expert
international, national and proprietary specifications assessments by independent testing bodies.
may be accepted by TL provided such specifications
give reasonable equivalence to the requirements of 1.2 In the case of steel, the well proven techniques
these rules or are otherwise specially approved. referred to in 1.1 include basic oxygen or electric
furnace steel-making and continuous, ingot and mould
2.2 Unless otherwise agreed, inspection and casting.
certification of materials and products complying with
other specifications are to be carried out in accordance 2. Chemical Composition
with the requirements of these rules and other relevant
rules. 2.1 The chemical composition of samples taken
from each ladle of each cast is to be determined by the
2.3 Should differences exist between these Rules manufacturer in sufficiently equipped laboratory and is
and the relevant standards or specifications with regard to satisfy the requirements relating to chemical
to their requirements, the tests shall take account of the composition and properties specified in these Rules.
more stringent requirements.
2.2 The chemical analysis declared by the
3. Information to be Supplied by the manufacturer is to be accepted subject to occasional
Purchaser checks if required by the surveyor.
The purchaser is to supply the manufacturer with all 3. Condition of Supply

information necessary to ensure that materials and
products are tested in accordance with these rules and 3.1 Unless otherwise agreed, all materials and

C,D Section 1 –Manufacture, Testing and Certification 1- 3
products are to be supplied in the finished condition D. Inspection and Testing

according to these rules, including heat treatment if
required. 1. General
3.2 Heat treatment is to be carried out in suitable 1.1 As far as practicable, the inspections and tests
and efficient furnaces, equipped with appropriate means are to be carried out at the manufacturer’s works before
for control and recording of temperature. The delivery.
manufacturer is to maintain records of heat treatment
identifying the furnace used, furnace charge, date and 1.2 If the necessary facilities are not available at
temperature. The records are to be presented to the the manufacturer’s works, the testing is to be carried out
surveyor on request. at a recognised testing laboratory.
3.3 The furnace dimensions are to be such as to 1.3 Interested parties are to apply for inspection in
allow the material to be uniformly heated to the adequate time.
specified temperature.
Prior to inspection and testing, the manufacturer is to
3.4 In the case of very large parts, alternative provide the surveyor with details of the orders, technical
methods for heat treatment are to be specially specs and any special condition additional to the rule
considered. requirements.
4. Defects 1.4 The surveyor is to be given the opportunity to

inspect and check at any time all plants and equipment
4.1 All materials and products are to be free from used in the manufacture and testing.
cracks, injurious surface flaws, injurious laminations and
similar defects. The surveyor is to be supplied with the information
necessary to assess whether production and tests are
4.2 Insignificant surface defects may be removed performed according to the rule requirements.
mechanically provided that the dimensional tolerances
permitted for these products are not exceeded. 1.5 All tests and inspections required by the rules
are to be carried out in the presence of the surveyors, or
4.3 Repair of defects by welding is only to be when expressly agreed with TL, in the presence of the
carried out when permitted by the appropriate specific person responsible for internal control.
requirements. Proposal to repair a defective material by
welding is to be submitted to the surveyor for approval 1.6 The tests required are to be performed by
before repair work is commenced. qualified personnel in accordance with the procedures
stated by TL.
5. Weldability
The testing and measuring equipment is to be
Materials intended for the manufacture of welded adequate, maintained in proper condition and regularly
structures are to be weldable by standard workshop calibrated. The records of calibration is to be kept up to
techniques. Where welding is possible only in special date and made available to the surveyor.
conditions, these shall be determined in agreement with
TL and shall be validated by a procedure test. 2. Test Material
2.1 For the purpose of test sampling the following

definitions apply:
TÜRK LOYDU - MATERIAL - JANUARY 2021

1- 4 Section 1 – Manufacture, Testing and Certification D
2.1.1 Unit, single plate, pipe, forging, casting or the presence of the surveyor, unless otherwise agreed.
other single product.
3.2 For checking of the mechanical properties of
2.1.2 Batch, number of similar units presented as a the material, test methods and specimens in compliance
group for acceptance testing, on the basis of the tests to with the requirements of Section 2 are to be used.
be carried out on the test sample.
3.3 The type of tests, the number and direction of
2.1.3 Test Sample, a sufficient quantity of material the test specimens and the results of tests are to
taken from the sample product for the purpose of comply with the requirements relevant to the type of
producing one or more test specimen. (See Figure 1.1) material or product.
2.1.4 Test specimen, part of sample with specified 4. Retesting

dimensions and conditions for submission to a given
test. (See Figure 1.1) 4.1 When the result of any test, other than impact
test, fails to meet the requirements, two further tests
2.2 Test material sufficient for the required tests may be made from the same sample. If both of these
and also for possible retests purposes is to be provided. additional tests are satisfactory, the unit may be
accepted.
2.3 The test material is to be representative of the
unit or sample product and is not to be seperated until 4.2 When the results from a set of three impact
all the specified heat treatment has been completed. test specimens fail to the requirements, three additional
test specimens from the same sample may be tested
2.4 Where TL’s certification is required, all the test and the results added to those previously obtained to
samples are to be selected and marked by the surveyor, form a new average. If this new average complies with
unless otherwise agreed. the requirements and if not more than two individual
results are lower than the required average and, of
3. Mechanical Tests these, not more than one result is below 70% of the
specified average value, the unit may be accepted.
3.1 The mechanical tests are to be carried out in
Figure 1.1 Test sample and test specimen to be taken for a welding test

D,E Section 1 – Manufacture, Testing and Certification 1- 5
4.3 If unsatisfactory results are obtained from 5.4 Non-destructive examination

retests representative of a batch, the unit from which the
tests were made is to be rejected. The remaining Non-destructive examination is to be performed by
material in the batch may be accepted provided that two skilled and qualified personnel, using calibrated
further units are tested with satisfactory result. equipment according to approved procedures,
recognized standards and requirements of TL.
4.4 When a batch is rejected, the remaining units
in the batch may be resubmitted individually for test, The manufacturer or other organization responsible for
and those which give satisfactory results may be non-destructive examination is required to issue a
accepted. certificate indicating the results.
4.5 If any test specimen fails, because of faulty The various steps of non-destructive examinations are
preparation, visible defects or because of fracturing to be witnessed by the surveyor, when required.
outside the range permitted for the appropriate gauge
length (in the case of tensile test), the defective test
specimen may be disregarded and replaced by an E. Identification and Marking
additional test specimen of the same type.
1. Identification of Materials and Products
5. Visual and Non-Destructive Examinations
The manufacturer is to introduce a system of
5.1 General identification which enables all finished material and
product to be traced to the original cast. The surveyor is
The materials and products are to be subjected to visual to be given full facilities for tracing the materials when
examination, dimensional check and, when applicable, required.
non-destructive examination.
2. Marking
The above mentioned examinations are to be carried out
on materials and products in appropriate conditions under 2.1 Before acceptance, all materials and products
the responsibility of the manufacturer and are to be which have been tested and inspected with satisfactory
witnessed by the surveyor, when require by the rules. results are to be clearly marked by the manufacturer at
least at one position with the necessary marking as
5.2 Visual examination described in the following Sections. The marking shall
agree with the details given in the works certificates or
Unless otherwise specified, visual examination is delivery documents.
performed by the surveyor on each unit, for products
tested on individual units and randomly, for products 2.2 The marking is normally to be impressed with a
tested by lot. punch, unless such marking is precluded by materials
with a sensitive surface or which are too thin. In such
5.3 Verification of compliance with approved cases marking may be done with low-stress stamps,
plans paint, rubber stamps, adhesive stickers or electro-
engraving.
Verification of compliance with approved plans is the
responsibility of the manufacturer. All marks are to be so applied that their legibility cannot
be impaired by the transportation or storage of the
Some checks are to be made in presence of the products. Where the further processing of the products
surveyor, as deemed necessary or where expressly entails the removal of existing marks, the manufacturer
required in these rules. concerned is to apply these to a different spot and shall

1- 6 Section 1 – Manufacture, Testing and Certification E,F
arrange for the transfer of the TL stamp, unless another of Classification, are to be marked, irrespective of the
solution is adopted. extent of the tests prescribed, with the special stamp in
the presence of the surveyor, provided that, when
2.4 As a general rule, every product is to be tested, the products have met the requirements
marked. In the case of small parts of the same type and stipulated in the specifications or supply conditions:
size which are securely packed in crates, drums or
similar containers, and also in the case of steel rods and 3.5 Should it be shown during subsequent tests or
sections weighing up to 25 kg/m and packed together in during further processing of the tested products that
bundles, marking of the uppermost unit is sufficient or these have defects or in some way no longer meet the
by a securely fastened, strong tag. requirements, the TL stamping shall be cancelled in a
suitable manner.
2.5 Wherever possible, marks should be enclosed
by a painted surface. In the case of forgings and 4. Stamping of Specimens by the Works
castings, the area to be marked should be bright
machined. Manufacturers of materials who have an independent
quality control department may, with the consent of TL
3. Use of the TL Stamps surveyor, allow members of this department to apply the
specimen stamp. The surveyor is to be notified of the
3.1 Specimens and the product from which names of the persons authorized for stamping and of
specimens have been taken are to be marked with the the marks identifying their personal stamps.
TL cold stamp, unless otherwise agreed in accor-
dance with 4.
F. Documentation and Certification
3.2 Products which have been tested in
accordance with these Rules are to be marked with TL 1. TL Certificate
cold stamp, provided that all requirements of the TL
Rules have been satisfied. For materials or products tested with satisfactory results,
TL issues a certificate stating that the materials or
As an exception, shipbuilding steels of grades E and F products have been tested in accordance with TL Rules.
which are subject to individual testing as well as the
non-alloy pipes R 360, R 410 and R 490 may also be A certificate issued by the manufacturer is to be
stamped in accordance with 3.3. attached to TL’s certificate and is to include, as
applicable, manufacturer’s name, purchaser’s name,
3.3 Plates, sections and rods of steel which are order and hull number, description of product,
grouped into test batches for testing, are to be marked dimensions and weight, results of inspection and tests,
with the "batch stamp", provided that all the identification and testing marks stamped on the
requirements have been satisfied: materials or products.
This stamp may be applied by approved materials 1.1 Material certificate according to TL Rules
manufacturers and suppliers themselves.
Materials and products intended for use within the
In exceptional cases, e.g. series-produced steel scope of classification have to be delivered with a
castings, the letters "TL" may be either cast or stamped material certificate according to TL Rules.
in.
To obtain this material certificate the TL Rules relevant
3.4 Products which have to be tested in for the material/product are to be satisfied. The
accordance with other specifications or supply manufacturer is to be approved by TL for the
conditions, i.e. which shall not be used within the scope material/product.

F Section 1 – Manufacture, Testing and Certification 1- 7
1.2 Material certificate according to other - Application and drawing number, where
rules necessary,
For materials and products which are not to be tested - Weight of products,
according to TL Rules but to other rules a material
certificate may be issued. In this case TL will carry out - Manufacturing process,
an acceptance test on behalf of the orderer as neutral
third party. - Heat numbers and chemical composition,
The rules which are to be met for the acceptance test - Condition of supply,
have to be named in the material certificate, whereat
here the TL Rules shall not be named. If the test - Details of heat treatment, where necessary,
requirements are fulfilled a material certificate will be
issued. - Marking,
Materials and products with this certificate shall not be - Results of non-specific material testing of current
used within the scope of Classification. production.
2. Works’ Certificates 2.2 Manufacturer's inspection certificate
Where, in accordance with the Rules or special Where, in accordance with the Rules or special
agreements, the task of material testing is left to the arrangements, a certificate of the manufacturer for the
manufacturer, the latter is to issue a relevant certificate. material at hand and product respectively is required,
the manufacturer shall issue a relevant inspection
2.1 Test report of the manufacturer certificate (e.g. 3.1 according to EN 10204). Also in
such cases the manufacturer shall be approved for the
Where, in accordance with the Rules or special material/product.
agreements, a certificate of the manufacturer,
independent of the material/product at hand, is required, The inspection certificate is to specify the following:
the manufacturer shall issue a relevant test report
(e.g.2.2 according to EN 10204). The manufacturer is to - Name of purchaser together with order number,
be approved for the material/product.
- Newbuilding and project number respectively,
The test report is to specify the following: where known
- Name of purchaser together with order number, - Item numbers and quantities,
- Newbuilding and project number respectively, - Dimension and indication of product,

where known,
- Material grade, type and specification,
- Item numbers and quantities,
- Application and drawing number, where
- Dimension and indication of product, necessary,
- Material grade, type and specification, - Weight of products,
- Manufacturing process,

1- 8 Section 1 – Manufacture, Testing and Certification F
- Heat number and chemical composition, 3.1 Confirmation of the test results on a commonly
issued certificate of manufacturer and TL (e.g.
- Condition of supply, inspection certificate 3.2 according to EN 10204).
- Details of heat treatment, where necessary, 3.2 In the case of products produced in large
quantities and subjected to testing by heat or batch, by
- Test pressures, where necessary, confirmation of the surveyor who appends his stamp
and signature to the manufacturer's certificate in token
- Results of special tests to be undertaken, where that the tests carried out on the consignment in
necessary, accordance with the Rules have satisfied the
requirements. In addition, the manufacturer shall add by
- Results of mechanical tests of the delivery at printing in the certificate an appropriate remark and
hand. shall also confirm that the products listed in the
documents have been manufactured in accordance with
3. Alternative Verification TL Rules.
By agreement, the results may also be attested using

the following alternatives:

Section 2 – Mechanical and Technological Testing Procedures 2- 1
SECTION 2
MECHANICAL AND TECHNOLOGICAL TESTING PROCEDURES
Page
A. GENERAL............................................................................................................................................................... 2- 2
1. Scope
2. Preparation of Test Specimens
3. Testing Machines
B. TENSILE TESTS .................................................................................................................................................... 2- 2
1. Tensile Test Specimens
2. Tensile Properties at Ambient Temperature
3. Tensile Retest Procedure
C. BEND TESTS ......................................................................................................................................................... 2- 6
1. Bend Test Specimen
2. Bend Test Procedure
D. TOUGHNESS TESTS ............................................................................................................................................. 2- 7
1. Charpy V-Notch Impact Test
2. Drop Weight Test
E. DUCTILITY TESTS FOR PIPES AND TUBES ...................................................................................................... 2- 9
1. Flattening Test
2. Drift Expanding Test
3. Flanging Test
4. Ring Expanding Test
5. Ring Tensile Test
F. HARDNESS TESTS .............................................................................................................................................. 2-11
1. General
2. Purpose
G. BEND TESTS ON PIPES AND TUBES ................................................................................................................. 2-12
1. Test Specimen
2. Test Procedure
H. NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTINGS .......................................................................................................................... 2-12
1. General
2. Standards and Regulations
3. Requirements Applicable to the Inspection Body
4. Inspection Personnel, Supervisors
5. Test Methods, Equipment and Test Media
6. Preparation and Performance of Tests
7. Certification of Test Results
8. Visual Testing (VT)
9. Magnetic Particle Testing (MT)
10. Penetrant Testing
11. Ultrasonic Testing (UT)
12. Radiographic Testing

2- 2 Section 2 – Mechanical and Technological Testing Procedures A,B
A. General be calibrated in accordance with ISO 7500-1 or other

recognized standard.
1. Scope
3.4 Impact testing machines are to be calibrated in
1.1 This section gives the requirements for testing accordance with ISO 148-2 or other recognized
machines, testing procedures and test specimens when standard.
testing ferrous and non-ferrous metals.
3.5 The accuracy of tensile test machines is to be
1.2 Alternative test specimens, such as those within minus or plus one per cent.
complying with recognized national standards, may be
accepted subject to special approval by TL. The same
applies to the given testing procedures. B. Tensile Tests
2. Preparation of Test Specimens 1. Tensile Test Specimens
2.1 Test samples from which test specimens are 1.1 Designations
cut are to have undergone the same treatment as the
material from which they have been taken (e.g. heat The following designations are used (see Figure 2.1 and
treatment). 2.2):
2.2 If test samples are cut from material by flame d0 = Diameter of round specimen
cutting or shearing, a reasonable margin is required to
enable sufficient material to be removed from the cut a = Thickness of flat specimen
edges during final machining.
b = Width of flat specimen
2.3 The preparation of test specimens is to be
done in such a manner that test specimens are not L0 = Original gauge length
subjected to any significant straining or heating.
Lc = Parallel length
2.4 Any of the test specimens referred to as
'alternative' may be used except as otherwise stated or S0 = Original cross sectional area
agreed.
r = Transition radius
3. Testing Machines
D = External tube diameter
3.1 All tests are to be carried out by competent
personnel. t = Plate thickness
3.2 Testing machines are to be maintained in a

satisfactory and accurate condition and are to be
recalibrated at approximately annual intervals. This
calibration is to be traced to a nationally recognized
authority and is to be to the satisfaction of TL. The
calibration records are to be made available to the
surveyor.
Figure 2.1 Round specimen
3.3 Tensile/compression testing machines are to

B Section 2 – Mechanical and Technological Testing Procedures 2- 3
L0 = 200 mm
LC ≥ 212.5 mm
r = 25 mm
Figure 2.2 Flat specimen When the capacity of the available testing machine is
insufficient to allow the use of test specimen of full
1.2 Dimensions thickness, this may be reduced by machining one of the
rolled surfaces.
1.2.1 General
1.2.2.3 Round specimen
Proportional test specimens with a gauge length
Alternatively, for materials over about 40 mm thick,
L o  5.65 So
proportional round test specimens with dimensions as
or L0 = 5 d0 should preferably be used as the minimum specified below may be used.
percentage elongation values specified in the following
sections refer to this gauge length, L0 should preferably d0 ≥ 10 mm to 20 mm, preferably 14 mm
be greater than 20 mm. The gauge length may be
rounded off to the nearest 5 mm provided that the L0 = 5 d0
difference between this length and Lo is less than 10%
of L0. Lc ≥ L0 + d/2
1.2.2 Plates, strips and sections r = 10 mm (for nodular cast iron and materials with a
specified elongation less than 10 %, r ≥ 1.5 d0).
Flat specimens are usually to be used with dimensions
as specified below. The axes of the round test specimens are to be located
at approximately one quarter of the thickness from one
1.2.2.1 Proportional flat specimen of the rolled surfaces.
a=t 1.2.3 Aluminium alloys
b = 25 mm Flat tensile test specimens are to be used for specified

thicknesses up to and including 12.5 mm. The tensile
L o  5.65 So
test specimen is to be prepared so that both rolled
surfaces are maintained. For thicknesses exceeding
L  L o  2 So 12.5 mm round tensile test specimens are to be used.
c
For thicknesses up to and including 40 mm, the
r = 25 mm longitudinal axis of the round tensile test specimen is to
be located at a distance from the surface equal to half of
1.2.2.2 Non-proportional flat specimen the thickness. For thicknesses over 40 mm, the
longitudinal axis of the round tensile test specimen is to
a=t be located at a distance from one of the surfaces equal
to one quarter of the thickness.
b = 25 mm

2- 4 Section 2 – Mechanical and Technological Testing Procedures B
1.2.4 Forgings, castings (excluding grey cast The parallel test length is not to be flattened, but the
iron) enlarged ends may be flattened for gripping in the
testing machine.
Proportional round test specimens with dimensions as
specified in 1.2.2.3 are usually to be used.
For small size bars and similar products, the test

specimens may consist of a suitable length of bar or
other product tested in the full cross-section.
1.2.5 Tubes
Figure 2.4 Specimen taken from the tube wall
The test specimen is to conform the following:
Round test specimens may also be used provided that
1.2.5.1 Full cross-section specimen with plugged ends the wall thickness is sufficient to allow the machining of
(see Figure 2.3): such specimens to the dimensions given in 1.2.2.3, with
their axes located at the mid-wall thickness.
L o  5.65 So
1.2.6 Wires
L  5.65 So  D/2
c Full cross-section test specimen with the following
dimension is to be used:
where Lc is the distance between the grips or the plugs,
whichever is the smallest. L0 = 200 mm.
LC = L0 + 50 mm
1.2.7 Grey cast iron
Round non-cylindrical machined test specimen is to be

used (see Figure 2.5):
Figure 2.3 Full cross-section specimen
1.2.5.2 Strips cut longitudinally (see Figure 2.4):
a=t
b ≥ 12 mm
L o  5.65 So
Figure 2.5 Test specimen for grey cast iron
LC = L0 + 2b

B Section 2 – Mechanical and Technological Testing Procedures 2- 5
1.2.8 Weldings 1.2.9 Through thickness tensile test specimen
1.2.8.1 Deposited metal tensile test Round test specimens including built-up type by welding
are to be prepared in accordance with a recognized
Round specimen with the following dimensions is to be standard.
used:
1.2.10 Tolerances
d0 = 10 mm
The tolerances on specimen dimensions are to be in
L0 = 50 mm accordance with ISO 6892-1 or other recognized

standards as appropriate.
LC ≥ 55 mm
2. Tensile Properties at Ambient Temperature
r ≥ 10 mm 2.1 Yield stress (yield point)
For specially small or large dimensions other specimens The value of stress measured at the commencement of
may be used after agreement with TL, provided them to plastic deformation at yield, or the value of stress
conform the geometrical relationship given in 1.2.2.3. measured at the first peak obtained during yielding even
when that peak is equal to or less than any subsequent
1.2.8.2 Butt weld tensile test peaks observed during plastic deformation at yield.
The test is to be carried out with an elastic stress within
Flat specimen, the weld to be machined (or ground) the limits shown in Table 2.1.
flush with the surface of the plate, with the following
dimensions is to be used (see Figure 2.6): Table 2.1 Stress rate within elastic range
a = t Rate of stressing
Modulus of elasticity of
[N/mm2 s-1]
b = 12 mm for t≤ 2 mm the material (E) [N/mm2]
Min. Max.
b = 25 mm for t > 2 mm < 150 000 2 20
≥ 150 000 6 60
LC = width of weld + 60 mm
2.2 Proof stress (yield strength)

R ≥ 25 mm
When no well defined yield phenomenon exists, the

0.2% proof stress (Rp0.2) is to be determined according
to the applicable specification. For austenitic and duplex
stainless steel products, the 1 % proof stress (Rp1.0)
may be determined in addition to Rp0.2.
The rate of loading is to be as stated in 2.1 above.
2.3 Tensile strength (Rm)
Figure 2.6 Specimen for tensile test on butt weld

After reaching the yield or proof load, for ductile material
the machine speed during the tensile test is not to
exceed that corresponding to a strain rate of 0.008s-1.

2- 6 Section 2 – Mechanical and Technological Testing Procedures B,C
For brittle materials, such as cast iron, the elastic stress C. Bend Tests
2 per
rate is not to exceed 10 N/mm second.
1. Bend Test Specimen

2.4 Fracture elongation (A)
1.1 Flat bend test specimen, as given in Figure 2.7

The elongation value is, in principle, valid only if the is to be used. Edges on tension side to be rounded to a
distance between the fracture and the nearest gauge radius of 1 to 2 mm.
mark is not less than one third of the original gauge
length. However, the result is valid irrespective of the
location of the fracture if the percentage elongation after
fracture is equal to or greater than the expected value.
The elongation generally means elongation A5

determined on a proportional gauge length
5.65 So  5d , but may also be given for other
specified gauge lengths.
Figure 2.7 Flat bend test specimen

If the material is a ferritic steel of low or medium
strength and not cold worked and the elongation as 1.2 Forgings, castings and semi-finished
products
measured on a non-proportional gauge length, the
required elongation A0 on that gauge length L0 may
a = 20 mm
after agreement be calculated from the following
formula: b = 25 mm
2/5
 S0  1.3 Plates, structural sections, sheets
A  2 A  
0 5  L 
 0  a=t
For tables and graphs see ISO 2566.

b = 30 mm
3. Tensile Retest Procedure 1.4 Butt welds, transverse specimen
When the tensile test fails to meet the requirements, two 1.4.1 Face and root bend
further tests may be made from the same piece. If both
of these additional tests are satisfactory the item and/or a=t
batch (as applicable) is acceptable. If one or both of

b = 30 mm
these tests fail, the item and/or batch is to be rejected.
The additional tests detailed above are to be taken,
If the as rolled thickness t is greater than 25 mm, it may
preferably from material taken adjacent to the original
be reduced to 25 mm by machining on the compression
tests, but alternatively from another test position or
side of the bend specimen.
sample representative of the item/batch.
The surfaces of the weld are to be machined (ground)

flush with the surface of the plate.

C,D Section 2 – Mechanical and Technological Testing Procedures 2- 7
1.4.2 Side bend 1.1.2 The axis of the V-notch is to be perpendicular

to the faces of the plate, section or piece.
a = 10 mm
The position of the V-notch is not to be nearer than 25
b=t mm to a flame cut or sheared edge.
If t ≥ 40 mm, the side bend specimen may be 1.1.3 For rolled products with thickness less than or
subdivided, each part being at least 20 mm wide. equal to 40 mm, the test specimen are to be taken
retaining the original raw surface of the product or within
1.5 Butt welds, longitudinal specimen 2 mm from it.
The test specimens, for longitudinal face and root test, For rolled products with thickness higher than 40 mm,
are to be in accordance with an appropriate recognized the test specimens are to be taken with their longitudinal
standard. axis located at ¼ of the product thickness from one of

the rolled surface, or as close as possible to such
2. Bend Test Procedure position.
1.2 Charpy V-notch impact test specimens

2.1 The bend test is to be performed by applying a
continuous mechanical compressive action on one of
1.2.1 The test specimens are to comply with the
the surfaces of the test specimen.
requirements shown in Table 2.2 (see Figure 2.8):
2.2 The required mandrel diameter and the

Table 2.2 Charpy V-notch test specimen
minimum bend angle are specified in the applicable
recognized standards.
Dimensions Nominal Tolerance
Length 55 mm ± 0.60 mm
D. Toughness Tests
Width
- standard test specimen 10 mm ± 0.11 mm
1. Charpy V-Notch Impact Test - sub size test specimen 7.5 mm ± 0.11 mm
- sub size test specimen 5.0 mm ± 0.06 mm
1.1 Sampling
Thickness 10 mm ± 0.06 mm
1.1.1 The charpy V-notch impact test is performed Depth below notch 8 mm ± 0.06 mm
on a set of 3 test specimens.
Angle of notch 45º ± 2º
The longitudinal axis of the test specimens can be:

Root radius 0.25 mm ± 0.025mm
- Parallel to the rolling direction of the plate, Distance of notch from 27.5 mm ± 0.42 mm
end of test specimen
section or piece
Angle between plane of 90º ±2º

- Perpendicular to the rolling direction of the symmetry of notch and
plate, section or piece longitudinal axis of test
specimen
- Parallel to other directions.

2- 8 Section 2 – Mechanical and Technological Testing Procedures D
the range of 18 ÷ 27 ºC), the temperature of the test

specimen at the moment of breaking is to be the
specified test temperature within ± 2 ºC.
The test temperature is to be clearly stated in the test

documents.
1.4.2 The unit used to report the energy values is to

be clearly stated in the testing documents and should
Figure 2.8 Charpy V-notch impact test specimen be preferably joule [J].
1.2.2 Test specimens with the largest possible size, The average of the three results from the test of the set
reduced sectional area 10x7.5 or 10x5 are to be used if is to comply with the value required for the product.
the thickness of the product does not allow taking test Only one individual value may be less than the required
specimens of the standard size with sectional area average value, provided it is not less than 70 % of that
10x10. value.
The minimum average energy values for sub sized 1.5 Charpy V-notch retest procedure
specimens are given in Table 2.3.
When the average value of the three initial Charpy V-
Table 2.3 Minimum average values for sub sized notch impact specimens fails to meet the stated
test specimens requirement, or the value for more than one specimen is
below the required average value, or when the value of
Charpy V-notch Minimum energy, any one specimen is below 70% of the specified
specimen size average of 3 specimens average value, three additional specimens from the
10 mm x 10 mm E same material may be tested and the results added to
10 mm x 7.5 mm 5E/6 those previously obtained to form a new average. If
10 mm x 5.0 mm 2E/3 these new average complies with the requirements and
if not more than two individual results are lower than the
E= The values of energy specified for full thickness 10
mm x 10 mm specimens. required average and of these, not more than one result
All other dimensions and tolerances are to be as specified is below 70 % of the specified average value the piece
in Table 2.2 or batch may be accepted.
In all cases, the largest size Charpy specimens possible for
the material thickness shall be machined 2. Drop Weight Test
1.3 Testing machines 2.1 Drop weight specimens for determination of

no-break performance according to ASTM standard (E-
All impact tests are to be carried out on Charpy 208) are to comply with this ASTM standard and have
machines complying with the requirements of ISO 148-1 one of the following dimensions:
or other national and international recognized
standards, and having a striking energy of not less than Type P-1 : 25 x 90 x 360 [mm]
150 J.
Type P-2 : 19 x 50 x 130 [mm]
1.4 Charpy V-notch test procedure
Type P-3 : 16 x 50 x 130 [mm]
1.4.1 Where the test temperature is lower than
ambient (ambient temperature is any temperature within

D,E Section 2 – Mechanical and Technological Testing Procedures 2- 9
2.2 Unless otherwise agreed, the following is to be

applied:
- The specimen sides are to be saw-cut or

machined (minimum 25 mm to flame cut
surfaces)
- The machining of the plate to prescribed

specimen thickness is to be on one side only.
- The specimen may be of any orientation, but

the orientation is to be the same for all Figure 2.9 Pipe flattening test
specimens.
2. Drift Expanding Test
E. Ductility Tests for Pipes and Tubes 2.1 The test specimen consists of a tube section
having the ends perpendicular to the tube axis; the
1. Flattening Test edges of the end to be tested may be rounded by filing.
The length L of the drift expanding test specimen is to
1.1 The test specimen consists of a ring cut with be as shown in Figure 2.10 and Table 2.4
smoothed ends perpendicular to the tube axis.
2.2 The rate of penetration of the mandrel is not to
The length of the specimen is to be from 10 mm to 100 exceed 50 mm/min.
mm.
1.2 The test consists of compression the test

specimen between two rigid and parallel flat plates in a
direction perpendicular to its longitudinal axis; the plates
are to cover the whole test specimen after flattening.
The test specimen is flattened between two plates to the

prescribed distance H or until fracture occurs, see
Figure 2.9. In the case of welded pipes, the specimen
shall be placed in the press in such a manner that the Figure 2.10 Drift expanding test
seam is set at 90° to the direction of the pressure,
unless agreed otherwise. Table 2.4 Drift expanding test
Examples of applicable standards: EN ISO 8492 Pipe

Length of
Flattening Test. Material Taper angle β
specimen L
≤2D 30º
1.3 After the test, the specimens are to be thor- Steel
≤ 1.5 D; min. 50 mm 45º, 60º or 120º
oughly examined for defects with normal visual acuity.
The test shall be satisfactory if the specimen, having Copper and
2D 45º
been flattened to the prescribed distance, is free from copper alloys
cracks and did not fracture. Aluminium
≥ 2 D min. 50 mm. 60º
alloys

2- 10 Section 2 – Mechanical and Technological Testing Procedures E
2.3 After the test, the specimens are to be thor- The cylindrical and flanged portion of the test specimen
oughly examined for defects with normal visual acuity. is not to present any cracks or other flaws.
The test shall be satisfactory if the prescribed expansion
has been effected without cracks. After testing, the remaining cylindrical portion is to be
not less than half the external diameter of the tube.
C = Diameter after the prescribed expansion.
Examples of standards to be applied: EN ISO 8494
The dimensions of the pipe section, the outer diameter Flanging Test on Pipes.
C of the expanded part of the pipe section or the relative
expansion [%], as well as the taper angle are to be Pre-forming
stated.
Examples of standards to be applied: EN ISO 8493 Drift

Expanding Test on Pipes.
3. Flanging Test
3.1 The test specimen consists of a tube section

cut with the ends perpendicular to the tube axis; the
edges of the end to be tested may be rounded by filing.
3.2 The flanging test specimen is to be of length L

equal to approximately 1.5D. The test specimen may be
shorter provided that after testing the remaining
cylindrical portion is not less than 0.5D.
Flanging
The radius r shall match that prescribed for the product.
3.3 The test is carried out in two stages and

consists of symmetrical forming a flange at one end of
the test specimen by means of a special mandrel of
hardened steel.
The rate of penetration of the forming tool is not to

exceed 50 mm/min.
During the first stage of flanging, the end of the test

specimen is expanded by means of truncated-cone
shaped mandrel having an included angle of 90º; the
test is then continued during the second stage using a
special forming mandrel to complete the flange. Figure 2.11 Flanging test
The test is to be continued until the expanded zone 4. Ring expanding test
forms a flange perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of
the test specimen, with an increase in the external 4.1 The test specimen consists of a tube section
diameter of the end of the test specimen not less than cut with ends perpendicular to the tube axis and the
the value specified (see Figure 2.11). length between 10 and 16 mm (Reference is made to
ISO 8495).

E,F Section 2 – Mechanical and Technological Testing Procedures 2- 11
4.2 The rate of penetration of the mandrel is not to The rate is not to exceed 5 mm/s.
exceed 30 mm/s.
In the case of welded pipes, the weld seam is to be at
4.3 The test specimen is to be expanded to the 90º to the direction of the tensile load.
prescribed diameter or until fracture occurs (see Figure
2. 12). 5.3 The test specimen after fracture is not to reveal
defects such as cracks, grooves or laminations and is to
The expanded test specimen is not to reveal defects show visible deformation at the point of fracture.
such as cracks, grooves or laminations and is to reach
the prescribed expansion. The dimensions of the pipe sections are to be stated.
Figure 2.13 Ring tensile test
Example of standards to be applied: EN ISO 8496 Ring

Tensile on Pipes.
F. Hardness Tests
1. General
Figure 2.12 Ring expanding test The tests are to be performed, according to
specification, to determine the Brinell, Vickers or
5. Ring Tensile Test Rockwell hardness using standardized methods, see for
example:
5.1 The test specimen consists of a tube section
with plain and smoothed ends cut perpendicular to the ISO 6506-1 Brinell Hardness Test
tube axis and with a length of about 15 mm.
EN ISO 6507-1 Vickers Hardness Test
5.2 The test specimen is to be drawn to fracture in
a tensile test machine by means of two mandrels having ISO 6508-1 Rockwell Hardness Test
diameter equal to at least three times the wall thickness
of the pipe (see Figure 2.13).

2- 12 Section 2 – Mechanical and Technological Testing Procedures F,G,H
2. Purpose H. Non-Destructive Testings
Hardness tests are not to be considered a substitute 1. General

for the tensile test. Brinell hardness tests may,
however, be permitted for the purpose of comparing 1.1 This Section contains general Rules applicable
mechanical properties provided that, of several to the performance of non-destructive tests at semi-
products of the same shape, grade of material and finished products and components intended for the
heat treatment, at least one has been subjected to installation in ships classed with TL.
the tensile test.
1.2 Type and scope of the non-destructive testing

prescribed for the individual products are stated in the
G. Bend Tests on Pipes and Tubes appropriate sections.
1. Test Specimen 2. Standards and Regulations
1.1 Where feasible, the test specimen consists of 2.1 The standards and regulations indicated in the
full thickness strip not less than 40 mm in width cut specific sections are integral part of these Rules and
perpendicular to the pipe axis. have to be observed when performing the non-
destructive testing.
The edges of the test specimen may be rounded to 1.5
mm radius. 2.2 Testing according to other comparable stan-
dards or regulations require prior consent of TL. For this
The result is considered satisfactory if, after being bent they shall be submitted to TL for assessment and
through the required angle in the direction of the original approval before starting the testing.
curvature, the test specimen is free from cracks and
laminations; however, small cracks on the edges may 2.3 The manufacturer or purchaser shall state all
be disregarded. details of the testing in a testing instruction or specifi-
cation and deliver it to the TL Surveyor before starting
1.2 For smaller diameter tubes, in general not the testing.
exceeding 50 mm, the test specimen consists of a tube
section of sufficient length. 3. Requirements Applicable to the Inspection
Body
The test specimen is to be bent on a cylindrical mandrel
with appropriate procedures as stated below, depending 3.1 For performing non-destructive testing the
on the specification of the product: manufacturer shall set up a qualified inspection body
which is independent of the manufacturing departments
- On a mandrel having a diameter 12 times the and part of a manufacturing site certified according to
nominal diameter of the tube until an angle of ISO 9001, or which is accredited according to ISO/IEC
90˚ is reached 17025.
- On a mandrel having a diameter 8 times the 3.2 The inspection body shall have available the
nominal diameter of the tube, until an angle of necessary regulations, testing specifications, testing
180˚ is reached. equipment, accessories and, if required, comparators
for the surface finish of castings.
The test specimen after bending is not to present any
cracks or other flaws. 3.3 If the manufacturer has no inspection body

H Section 2 – Mechanical and Technological Testing Procedures 2- 13
available, he shall demonstrate which external inspec- ployed in dependence of the material, the geometry of
tion body will perform the testing on his behalf if the component, the expected service condition and the
necessary. possible flaw position.
This external inspection body shall be accredited ac- 5.2 Equipment and test media
cording to ISO/IEC 17025 or shall be part of a manu-
facturing site certified according to ISO 9001. 5.2.1 The equipment and test media used shall
conform to the state of art and the relevant standards
4. Inspection Personnel, Supervisors and shall be in perfect, serviceable condition.
4.1. Inspection personnel The Surveyor shall be presented by request proof of

internal and/or external monitoring of the equipment and
4.1.1 The inspection personnel charged with the the test media.
non-destructive testing shall be familiar with the test
method concerned and shall be qualified and certified to Table 2.5 Test methods
ISO 9712.
Short
Testing of Method
4.1.2 For the evaluation of results of nondestructive name (1)
tests only such inspection personnel shall be charged External Visual testing VT
that holds level-2 certificates for the test method condition Magnetic particle testing
MT
concerned which were issued:
Eddy current testing ET
Penetrant testing PT
- By an independent certification authority
Internal Ultrasonic testing UT
according to ISO 9712
condition Radiographic testing RT
Leakage testing LT
- By the employer of the inspection personnel
according to ASNT "Recommended Practice (1) Definition according to ISO 9712.
No. SNT-TC-1A"
5.2.2 If testing facilities, equipment and inspection
4.2 Inspection supervisors personnel of external inspection bodies are engaged the
workshop in question has to ensure that the conditions
For scheduling and monitoring the testing and for according to 3. and 4. are fulfilled.
evaluating the results an inspection supervisor qualified
at least according to 4.1.2 shall be available. 6. Preparation and Performance of Tests
The inspection supervisor shall hold as far as possible a 6.1 Preparation of tests
level-3 certificate for the test method concerned
according to the Rules indicated in 4.1.2. The surfaces that will be tested shall be free of rem-
nants of the moulding material, scale, grease, dirt,
5. Test Methods, Equipment and Test Media protective coatings and other contaminations which may
affect the indication sensitivity of the specific test
5.1 Test methods methods.
For detecting surface and/or volumetric discontinuities 6.2 Performance of tests

in the components indicated in 1.1. the test methods
from Table 2.5 or combinations of them shall be em 6.2.1 As a rule the prescribed tests shall be per-
formed by the inspection personnel of the inspection

2- 14 Section 2 – Mechanical and Technological Testing Procedures H
body of the manufacturer or of the external body Specifications concerning testing criteria are contained
charged with the inspection. in the appropriate specific sections.
The specific components that will be tested shall be 8.4 The manufacturer or the company performing
subjected to the Surveyor in final machined condition for further processing shall arrange that testing can be
the visual testing. performed with adequate illumination.
6.2.2 In case ultrasonic (UT) and or surface crack The viewing conditions shall be in accordance with the
detecting (MT, PT) shall be performed by the TL requirements of ISO 3059 or EN 13018.
Surveyor a special agreement is required.
Light and surface reflections shall be avoided by ap-
6.2.3 The Surveyor shall be informed by the manu- propriate means.
facturer of the works performing the further processing
about the planned non-destructive testing in time. He 9. Magnetic Particle Testing (MT)
will attend the testing in his discretion.
9.1 Magnetization equipment and method
7. Certification of Test Results
9.1.1 The surfaces of the components that shall be
7.1 Inspection reports shall be prepared on all subjected to testing shall be at least in the condition
performed tests, and these shall be submitted to the specified in 6.1. or in the final machined condition.
Surveyor together with the further documentation (e.g.
NDT plans, film position plans, radiographs). 9.1.2 The stationary or portable equipment for
magnetic particle testing shall be in accordance with the
The inspection reports shall contain all the necessary state of art for testing and with the standards ISO 9934-
details according to I. to L. relating to the particular test 1, ISO 9934-2 and ISO 9934-3 or with other standards
method used, the position at which the test was which are equivalent to these standards.
performed and the results obtained.
9.1.3 The choice of the method of magnetization and
7.2 The inspection department shall attest the test of the current for magnetization depends on the
results by means of inspection certificate according to geometry of the component and on the type of surface
EN 10204-3.1. defect to be detected (cracks, inclusions that are lying
open towards the surface or inclusions close towards
8. Visual Testing (VT) the surface).
8.1 The surfaces of the components that shall be 9.1.4 If possible, magnetization shall be effected by
subjected to testing shall be at least in the condition passing a current through the workpiece and/or by yoke
specified in 6.1. or in the final machined condition. magnetization using alternating or direct current.
8.2 Of the components that shall be tested the 9.1.5 Where a current is passed through the work-
entire surfaces shall be visually tested. In doing so piece, alternating, direct, impulse or surge current may
internal surfaces such as e.g. bore holes shall be in- be used. A combination of the aforementioned methods
cluded in the tests. for the detection of variously orientated defects is
allowed.
8.3 For performing visual testing optical magnifying
devices, endoscopes or surface comparators shall be 9.2 Test media
employed if necessary.
9.2.1 Suspensions consisting of a carrier liquid (test

oils or water with inhibitors) and dispersed magnetic 9.3.1 shall be proved by the manufacturer by means of
particles (black or fluorescent) shall be used as test measurement of the effective tangential field strength or
media. by means of "Berthold" test blocks.
Only such test media shall be used that conform to the 9.4 Applying of test media, magnetization
requirements of ISO 9934-2.
The suspension containing the magnetic particles shall
9.2.2 Before magnetic particle testing is commenced be applied on the surface to be tested by spraying or
the inspector shall verify the test media by means of wetting. When doing so the magnetization shall last at
suitable reference blocks according to ISO 9934-2 and least that long as the surface to be tested is sprayed
shall prove this to the Surveyor by request. with the magnetic particle suspension; subsequently
magnetization shall be performed (at least 5 seconds)
Note: until no movement of the magnetic particle suspension
- Reference blocks 1 and 2 according to ISO 9934-2 can be detected. Testing when remanence is present
- JIS-test block according to JIS Z 2343-1 (residual magnetism in the component) is not allowed.
9.3 Performance of magnetic particle testing 9.5 Illumination of testing surfaces
9.3.1 Manual testing In order to obtain an adequate contrast of test surface

and indication the following requirements according to
In order to reveal variously orientated defects the ISO 3059 for the light intensity and the UV intensity
magnetization shall be effected in a crosswise manner shall be fulfilled and shall be proved on the test surface
in two different directions. The angle of the both di- with adequate and verified measuring devices, e.g.
rections for magnetization should be in the range from luxmeter or UV intensity meter.
60° to 90°. The magnetizing field strength (effective
tangential field strength) should be at least 2 kA/m but The UV intensity on the test surface shall be not less
should not exceed 6 kA/m. than 10 W/m2, the maximum ambient light intensity shall
be 20 Lux.
9.3.2 Mechanized testing
9.6 Certification of testing results
When mechanized testing is performed the conditions
stated in 9.3.1 shall be provided by an adequate choice The manufacturer or the inspection body charged by
or combination of magnetization currents and methods. him shall issue a certificate concerning the performed
magnetic particle test containing at least the following
9.3.3 When burn marks on final machined surfaces information:
have to be avoided then for the magnetization by means
of prods with alternating current only fusible supply - Name and address of the inspection body (for
electrodes made of tin-aluminum alloys shall be external inspection bodies)
employed.
- Details concerning the accreditation or the ap-
9.3.4 Testing of machinery components in the final proval of the inspection body
machined condition shall preferably be performed by
stationary appliances. The appliances for magnetizing - Testing specification to be applied and/or testing
employed for this shall fulfill the requirements of ISO instructions
9934-3 or another equivalent standard. On demand of
the Surveyor the parameters of magnetization stated in - Details of the component such as:
 Order no.

 Material designation other recognized standards. The employed equipment

 Heat no. for this shall fulfill the criteria of ISO 3452-4.
 Specimen no.
 Machining condition 10.2 Test media and their verification
- Surface condition 10.2.1 The testing agent system required for

penetrant testing shall fulfill the requirements of ISO
- Testing scope, inspection zones, severity levels 3452-4 or of another recognized standard.
- Type of magnetization, e.g. according to ISO 10.2.2 Before penetrant testing is commenced the
9934-3 suitability of the testing agent system is to be verified by
means of test blocks e.g. according to ISO 3452-4 and
- Test equipment, test media, test blocks is to be proven on demand to the Surveyor.
- Proof of the magnetization by means of meas- 10.3 Performing penetrant testing

urement of the effective tangential field strength
10.3.1 Before testing is commenced the manufacturer
- Declaration of the inspection zones and accep- or orderer shall submit to the Surveyor test instructions
tance criteria fulfilling at least the requirements listed in the following.
- Time of testing 10.3.2 Pre cleaning of test surface
- Evaluation of test results The surface to be tested shall correspond to the re-
quirements specified in 6.1. and shall be cleaned com-
- Place and date of testing pletely with a cleaner adequate for the testing agent
system before testing is commenced.
- Name of the inspector, the inspection supervisor
and their qualifications Specifications concerning the surface areas for which
testing is required are contained in the appropriate
The aforementioned details may also be certified by specific sections.
means of works instructions of the manufacturer.
10.3.3 Testing temperature
They above and the test certificate shall be submitted to
the Surveyor together for assessment and acknowl- As a rule the temperature of the surfaces to be tested
edgement. shall be between + 5 °C and + 50 °C. For lower tem-
peratures pre heating of the test area shall be per-
Specifications for the aforementioned acceptance and formed on an extensive surface by which the test area
assessment criteria are contained in the appropriate achieves the permitted temperature range from + 5 °C
specific sections. and + 50 °C.
10. Penetrant Testing 10.3.4 Applying the penetrant
10.1 Testing is to be performed with a testing agent The penetrant may be applied by spraying, brushing or
system consisting of penetrant remover, pene- electrostatic spraying depending on the shape and size
trant and developer in accordance with EN 571-1 or of the surface or of the geometry of the component to
be tested. The test surface shall be completely wetted
throughout the entire penetration time.

10.3.5 Penetration time 10.6 Cleaning of the test surfaces
The penetration time depends on the properties of the After completion of penetrant testing any residuals of
penetrant, testing temperature, the material of the the test media shall be removed of the test surfaces.
component to be tested and the type of discontinuities For this a cleaning agent shall be used that corresponds
that are to be detected and should last from 5 to 60 to the prior employed testing agent system and which
minutes. will not have any effect on the further processing of the
component.
10.3.6 Intermediate cleaning
10.7 Certification of test results
Following penetration, the surplus penetrant shall be
completely removed in an appropriate manner from the The manufacturer or the inspection body charged by
test surface in such a way as to leave behind the him shall issue a certificate concerning the performed
penetrant lodged in any defects present. penetrant test containing at least the following infor-
mation:
10.3.7 Developing process
- Name and address of the inspection body (for
The developer is to be applied evenly and as thinly as external inspection bodies),
possible immediately after intermediate cleaning and
drying. The test surface should just be completely - Details concerning the accreditation or the ap-
covered. proval of the inspection body,
The developing time should be at least of the same as - Testing specification to be applied and/or testing
the time allowed for penetration. instructions,
The evaluation of the indications shall not start before - Details of the component such as:
the developing time has expired.
 Order no.
10.4 Illumination of the test surfaces  Material designation
 Heat no.
The test surfaces shall be illuminated adequately and  Specimen no.
reflection of light from already machined surfaces are to  Machining condition
be avoided.
- Surface condition,
Precondition for an adequate evaluation of the indica-
tions are the requirements for illumination specified in - Testing scope, testing areas, severity levels,
9.5.
- Employed testing agent systems according to EN
10.5 Testing criteria, evaluation of indications 571-1, test blocks according to ISO 3452-3,
Discontinuities exceeding the prescribed acceptance - Declaration of the inspection zones and accep-
criteria by size and quantity as well as cracks of every tance criteria,
type are not permitted.
- Time of testing,
Specifications for the evaluation of indications are
contained in the appropriate specific sections. - Evaluation of test results,

- Place and date of testing, - Calibration of equipment,
- Name of the inspector, the inspection supervisor - Surface condition depending on the manufactur-
and their qualifications. ing stage, surface roughness (if necessary),
The aforementioned details may also be certified by - Position of incidences, if necessary explained by
means of works instructions of the manufacturer. means of sketches,
They and the test certificate shall be submitted to the - Heat treatment condition depending on the
Surveyor together for assessment and acknowledge- manufacturing stage,
ment.
- Determination of testing areas in accordance with
11. Ultrasonic Testing (UT) the requirements specified in related Sections,
11.1 Methods - Evaluation criteria for the specific testing areas

and severity levels, respectively,
11.1.1 Ultrasonic testing is to be performed with the
impulse echo technique in accordance with recognized - Indication of other applicable standards and
standards. Such are e.g. EN 12223, EN ISO 7963, ISO regulations.
22232-3, ISO 16810, EN 10228-3, EN 10160 and EN
12680-1. 11.3 Test appliances and accessories
Other national or international standards may be applied Ultrasonic testing appliances and probes shall comply
if they provide an equivalent method. with the state of the art and with recognized standards
(e.g. ISO 22232-1, ISO 22232-2 and ISO 22232-3) and
11.1.2 The methods described here relate to the shall fulfill at least the following requirements:
testing of components and machinery constructions
made of ferritic steels. For testing of components made 11.3.1 Requirements for the test equipment
of austenitic or austenitic-ferritic steels special
agreements are to be made. - The ranges of adjustment shall enable the range
of at least 20 mm up to 2 m without any inter-
11.1.3 Alternatively ultrasonic testing may be per- vening gap for longitudinal and transverse waves
formed according to the test instructions of the manu- in steel.
facturer or of the orderer on condition that an equivalent
test can be achieved. - The amplification shall be adjustable for a range
up to at least 80 dB with switching stages of 2 dB,
11.2 Test specification the accuracy shall be 1 dB.
11.2.1 The manufacturer or the orderer shall prepare - The linearity of the time sweep and the vertical
a test specification which shall contain at least the linearity shall be better than 5 % of the adjustment
following information: range or of the screen.
- State of machining for pre and final testing, - The test equipment shall be applicable for probes
from 1 to 6 MHz nominal frequency for impulse
- Test method, type of test equipment, type of echo technique with straight or SE (twin
probes, testing frequencies, transducer) probes.

11.3.2 Requirements for the probes The inspection range shall be selected in such a way
that the back wall echo of the component thickness to
11.3.2.1 The selection of the probes concerning the be tested will appear at 80 % of the screen width.
nominal frequency and the transducer size depends on
the size of the disc-shaped reflector to be detected, the
11.6.1.2 Calibration of sensitivity
sound path travel distance and the sound attenuation of
the material to be tested.
Calibration of sensitivity shall be adjusted in such a way
that indications to be registered are not smaller than 2/5
11.3.2.2 Depending on the geometry of the component
of the screen height at the end of the inspection range.
and the type and position of discontinuity to be detected
straight beam probes and/or angle probes are to be
employed; for testing of regions close to the surface SE The signal-to-noise ratio based on the registration level
straight beam probes shall be employed. shall be at least 6 dB.
11.3.2.3 For oblique scanning probes with angle of Deviations of these specifications may be agreed on by
incidence between 35° and 70° shall be employed. the orderer and/or manufacturer and TL in technically
Their nominal frequency shall be between 1 and 6 MHz. justified exceptional cases.
11.4 Calibration blocks 11.6.2 Scanning of the test area and testing
velocity
For verification of the inspection system calibration
blocks type 1 according to ISO 2400 and calibration
11.6.2.1 Scanning of the test area
blocks type 2 according to EN ISO 7963 or other
adequate calibration blocks with reference reflectors are
In case scanning of test surfaces without any interven-
to be used.
ing gap is required, e.g. in case of 100 % volumetric
11.5 Coupling media inspection, the test paths shall overlay each other with
at least 15 %.
For inspection the oils, greases or other adequate cou-
pling media recommended by the manufacturer of the 11.6.2.2 Testing velocity
equipment shall be used preferably.
If ultrasonic testing is performed manually then with
For calibration of the equipment the same coupling regard to optimal localization of the indications the
medium shall be used. testing velocity shall not exceed 100 mm/s.
11.6 Performing ultrasonic testing

11.7 Evaluation of indications
Ultrasonic testing of machinery parts is to be performed

11.7.1 Indications without extension
in accordance with the method, standards and
regulations specified in 11.1.1 and/or according to
specifications of the manufacturer or the order. The evaluation of indications without extension is to be
performed according to the AVG-method (=DGS
11.6.1 Calibration of the inspection system method = distance gain size method). In doing so the
reference reflector size shall be specified as diameter of
11.6.1.1 Calibration of the distance the equivalent disc shaped reflector (KSR) [mm].
The calibration of the distance is to be performed at the 11.7.2 Indication with extension
calibration block type 1 in accordance with EN 12223 or
at the component. If not otherwise agreed, the determination of the re-
flector extension shall be performed according to the
half-amplitude technique.

Specifications concerning the aforementioned evalua- recorded by means of sketches, the size of KSR,
tion and acceptance criteria are contained in related its extension in length, width and depth as well
Sections. as the back-wall echo attenuation,
11.8 Certification of test results - Place and date of testing,
The manufacturer or the inspection body charged by - Name of the inspector, the inspection supervisor
him shall compile a report concerning the test which and their qualifications.
shall contain at least the following information:
- Name and address of the inspection body (for
external inspection bodies), 12.1 Method
- Details concerning the accreditation or the ap- 12.1.1 If necessary radiographic testing is to be
proval of the inspection body, performed in addition to ultrasonic testing in case
doubts exist concerning the evaluation of indications of
- Testing standards to be applied and/or testing ultrasonic testing.
specifications,
Radiographic testing can be performed depending on
- Details of the component such as: the type of the component to be inspected, its material
grade and wall thickness, either with x-rays or gamma
 Material rays.
 Dimensions
 Component no. 12.1.2 As a rule radiographic testing is to be per-
 Heat no. formed in accordance with recognized standards such
 Drawing no. as ISO 5579, EN ISO 17636 for the radiographic
 Condition of supply examination of welded joints or EN 12681 for the testing
of cast components.
- Time of testing, testing scope, inspection zones,
severity levels, 12.2 Scope of validity
- The manufacturer and type of the employed The following specifications apply for radiographic
testing equipment, testing of components indicated in Section 6.
- Manufacturer, type, nominal frequency and angle 12.3 Performing radiographic testing
of incidence of the employed probes,
As a rule radiographic testing is to be performed in
- Type of calibration of distance and sensitivity, accordance with EN 12681, test category A. Thereby
the image quality category A according to EN ISO
- Specifications concerning the suitability for 19232-3 shall be fulfilled.
- ultrasonic testing, surface preparation, correc- Testing in accordance with other national or
tion, values (transfer correction and sound at- international standards may be agreed on with TL on
tenuation) coupling media, condition that the conditions of the standards indicated
in 12.1.2 will be fulfilled.
- Description of the position of reflectors to be

12.4 Testing specification selection of the intensifying screens depends on the

maximum permissible tube voltage of the X-rays or the
12.4.1 The orderer or the manufacturer shall prepare type of isotopes, see Table 2.6.
a testing specification which shall contain the test
method and all relevant details. Especially the following In case intensifying screens are used close contact
information shall be specified: between film and screen has to be ensured.
- Radiation source, focal spot size or dimensions of 12.6.2 For the selection of the film class ISO 5579 is
the employed gamma-ray source, to be observed. A comparison of comparable
international standards for film system classes is
- Radiation energy, contained in Table 2.7.
- Film system class and screens, 12.7 Film density
- Test category, 12.7.1 The parameters for the exposure shall be

selected in such a way that in the entire region to be
- Thickness range to be penetrated, evaluated the density S of the radiographs according to
ISO 5579 is larger than S > 2,0 for test category A and
- Type and position of the image quality indicator, larger than S > 2,3 for test category B.
- Distances between the film and the focal point, Reduction of the minimum required density to 1,5 for
test category A or to 2,0 for test category B is only
- Image quality, density, permitted on condition that an appropriate agreement
between the orderer and the manufacturer is made and
- Test arrangement explained by means of that the multiple film technique is employed. This
sketches or drawings. agreement is to be submitted to TL.
12.4.2 For cast components where a large amount of 12.7.2 The upper limit for density depends on the
radiographing is required the manufacturer shall brightness of the film illuminator which is employed for
prepare a film position plan. the evaluation.
The specification as well as the film position plan shall 12.7.3 In order to depict different wall thickness
be submitted to TL for evaluation. regimes of cast components without loss of quality
within the density limits specified in 12.7.1 on one
12.5 Selection of radiation source screen, the procedures for multiple film technique as
indicated in EN 12681 shall be employed.
The selection of the radiation source depends on the
thickness co of the tested component to be penetrated, 12.7.4 For evaluation of radiographs the density shall
the required test category and the selected radiographic be verified with a densitometer.
arrangement according to EN 12681.
12.8 Verification of image quality
12.6 Selection of film system and intensifying
screens 12.8.1 The image quality is to be verified by means of
image quality indicators such as e.g. wire indicators in
12.6.1 The selection of the film class depends on the accordance with EN 462-1.
test category and the thickness to be penetrated. The

In case image quality indicators cannot be positioned - Details concerning the accreditation or the ap-
conforming to standards, i.e. away from the film, the proval of the inspection body,
image quality value shall be verified at least once by
means of comparative radiographs prepared under the - Details of the cast component such as:
corresponding conditions.
 Material
12.8.2 In general, for steel castings of test category A,  Heat no.
the image quality class A and for test category B the  Pattern no.
image quality class B according to EN ISO 19232-3  Drawing no.
shall be achieved.  Condition of supply
12.9 Evaluation of radiographs, evaluation criteria - Number and name of the testing specification,
The inspection department shall submit to the Surveyor - Testing standards to be applied and regulations,
for evaluation all radiographs and evaluation reports
prepared by the inspector. It is up to the Surveyor to - Method of radiographing and test categories,
evaluate all radiographs or only a specific number of
them. - Film position plans, method of marking,
The radiographs evaluated by him are to be stamped by - Type of radiation source: tube/isotope, size of
him. focal spot or of the radiation source, respectively,
The testing and acceptance criteria applicable for the - Tube voltage and anode current or activity of the
evaluation of the radiographs are contained in Section radiation source,
6, G.9.
- Exposure time and distance between radiation
12.10 Certification of the test results source and film,
The manufacturer shall compile a report concerning the - Selected film systems, screens and filters,
evaluation of the radiographs which shall contain at
least the following information: - Type and position of image quality indicator,
- Name and address of the inspection body (for - Film density,

external inspection bodies),
- Place and date of testing,
Name of the inspector, the inspection supervisor and

their qualifications.

Table 2.6 Film System classes and metal screens in accordance with ISO 5579 and EN 12681
Film system class Type and thickness of metal

Penetrated thickness
Radiation source (1) screens

Class A Class B Class A Class B
None, or front and rear lead screens
X-ray potentials ≤100kV up to max. 0,03 mm
C3 Front and rear lead screens up to
X-ray potentials >100 kV
to 150 kV C5 max. 0,15 mm
X-ray potentials Front and rear lead screens from 0,02
C4
> 150 kV to 250 kV to0,15 mm
None, or front and rear lead screens
 < 5 mm. C3
Yb 169 up to max. 0,03 mm
Tm 170 Front and rear lead screens from 0,02
 ≥ 5 mm. C4
to 0,15 mm
Front lead screens from 0,02 to 0,2
 ≤ 50 mm. C4
mm
X- ray potentials
C5 Front lead screens from 0,1 to 0,2 mm
> 250 kV to 500 kV (2)
 > 50 mm. C3
Rear lead screens from 0,02 to 0,2
mm
Front and rear lead screens from 0,1
Se-75  > 5 mm. C5 C4
to 0,2 mm
Front lead Front lead
screens from screens from 0,1
Ir 192 C5 C4 0,02 to 0,2 mm to 0,2 mm
Rear lead screens from 0,1 to 0,2
mm.
 ≤ 100 mm. C4 Front and rear screens of steel or
Co 60 C5
 > 100 mm. C5 copper from 0,25 to 0,7 mm (3)
X- ray equipment with  ≤ 100 mm. C3
Front and rear screens of steel or
energy from C5
copper from 0,25 to 0,7 mm
1 MeV to 4 MeV  > 100 mm. C5
 ≤ 100 mm. C4 C4 Front screens of steel, copper or

tantalum up to max. 1 mm (4)
X- ray equipment with 100 mm. <  ≤ 300 mm. C4
Rear screens of steel or copper up to
energy from
C5 max. 1 mm and tantalum up to max.
4 MeV to 12 MeV 0,5 mm (4)
 > 300 mm. C5
 ≤ 100 mm. C4 Front screens of tantalum up to max.

1 mm (5)
X- ray equipment with 100 mm. <  ≤ 300 mm. C4

energy above 12 MeV No rear screens
C5
Front screens of tantalum up to max.
 > 300 mm. C5 1 mm (5) Rear screens of tantalum up
to max. 0,5 mm
(1) Film system classes of higher quality may be used, too.
(2) Film packaged by the manufacturer with front screens up to max. 0,03 mm may be used if in addition a0,1 mm lead screen is
placed between the component to be tested and the film
(3) For class A 0,1 to 0,5 mm lead screens may be used, too.
(4) For class A 0,5 to 1 mm lead screens may be used if agreed on by the contracting partners.
(5) Tungsten screens may be used if agreed on.

Table 2.7 Comparison of international comparable recognized film system classes
Manufacturer/film
ASTM (1) DIN (3) EN (3) ISO (2) RCC-M (4)
type
AGFA (5)
Structurix D2 Special G1 C1 GI 1
Structurix D3 1 G1 C2 GI 1
Structurix D3 s.c. 1 G1 C2 GI 2
Structurix D4 1 G2 C3 GI 3
Structurix D5 1 G2 C4 GII 3-4
Structurix D7 2 G3 C5 GIII 4
Structurix D8 2 G4 C6 GIII 5
Fuji (5)
IX 25 1 G2 C3 GI 3
IX 50 Special G1 C1 GI 1
IX 80 1 G2 C3 GI 3
IX 100 1 G2 C4 GII 3-4
IX 150 2 G4 C6 GIII 4-5
Kodak (5)
DR Special G1 C1 GI
M 1 G1 C2 GI
MX 125 1 G2 C3 GI
T 200 1 G2 C4 GII
AA 400 2 G3 C5 GIII
CX 3 G4 C6 GIII
B W-B GIII
(1) ASTM E 94/E94M
(2) ISO 5579
(3) Classification according to EN ISO 11699-1
(4) French standard
(5) Equivalent film types from other manufacturers may also be considered, provided that appropriate proof
has been furnished.

Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars 3- 1
SECTION 3
ROLLED STEEL PLATES, SECTIONS AND BARS
A. GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................. 3- 4
1. Scope
2. Manufacture
3. Approval
5. General Characteristics of Products
6. Thickness Tolerances of Steel Plates and Wide Flats
7. Rectification of Surface Defects
8. Test Material and Tests
9. Marking of Products
10. Certification
B. NORMAL AND HIGHER STRENGTH HULL STRUCTURAL STEELS ................................................................ 3-12
1. Scope
2. Approval
3. Method of Manufacture
6. Mechanical Properties
7. Surface Quality
8. Internal Soundness
9. Tolerances
10. Identification of Materials
11. Testing and Inspection
12. Test Material
13. Mechanical Test Specimens
14. Number of Test Specimens
15. Retest Procedures
16. Branding
17. Documentation
C. HIGH-STRENGTH STEELS FOR WELDED STRUCTURES................................................................................ 3-28
1. Scope
2. Approval
5. Delivery Condition – Rolling Process and Heat Treatment
7. Tolerances
8. Surface Quality
10. Stress Relieving Heat Treatment vand Other Heat Treatments
11. Facilities for Inspection
13. Branding
14. Documentation of Inspection Tests
TÜRK LOYDU – MATERIAL - JANUARY 2021

3- 2 Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars
D. STEELS FOR BOILERS AND PRESSURE VESSELS ......................................................................................... 3-36

1. Scope
2. Approved Steel Grades
3. Condition of Supply and Heat Treatment
4. Dimensions, Dimensional and Geometrical Tolerances
5. Testing
6. Marking
E. STEELS FOR SHIPS CARRYING LIQUEFIED GASES IN BULK AND SHIPS USING GASES OR OTHER
LOW-FLASHPOINT FUELS .................................................................................................................................. 3-38
1. Scope
2. Material Requirements
F. STAINLESS STEELS ............................................................................................................................................ 3-40
1. Scope
2. Selection of Steels
4. Dimensional Tolerances
5. General Condition of Products
6. Requirements Applicable to the Material Properties
7. Testing
G. CLAD STEEL PLATES ......................................................................................................................................... 3-42
1. Scope
2. Suitability of Cladding Process
3. Suitable Materials
4. Method of Manufacture and Condition of Supply
5. Dimensions and Tolerances
6. Surface Finish
7. Repair of Defects
9. Testing
10. Marking
H. STEELS WITH SPECIFIED MINIMUM THROUGH THICKNESS PROPERTIES ................................................. 3-45
1. Scope
2. Manufacture
4. Test Procedure
5. Retest Procedure
6. Ultrasonic Tests
7. Marking
8. Certification

I. UNALLOYED STEELS FOR WELDED STRUCTURES........................................................................................ 3-47

1. Scope
2. Suitable Steels
5. Testing and Scope of Tests
J. REQUIREMENTS FOR USE OF EXTREMELY THICK STEEL PLATES ON CONTAINER CARRIERS..............3-49
1. Application of TL-EH47 Steel Plates
2. Requirements for Use of Extremely Thick Steel Plates in Container Ships
K. APPROVAL OF MANUFACTURING SCHEME OF HULL STRUCTURAL STEELS ........................................... 3-59
Annex 1 Measures for Extremely Thick Steel Plates

Annex 2 Manufacturing Approval Scheme for TL-EH47 Steels
Annex 3 Manufacturing Approval Scheme for Brittle Crack Arrest Steels
Annex 4 Test Method for Brittle Crack Arrest Toughness, Kca
Annex 5 Outline of Requirements for Undertaking Isothermal Crack Arrest Temperature (CAT) Test
Appendix A Manufacturing Approval Scheme of Hull Structural Steels
Appendix B Approval scheme for manufacturer of hull structural steels intended for welding with high heat input
Appendix C Procedure for Approval of Corrosion resistant steels for cargo oil Tanks
Appendix D Manufacturing Approval Scheme of the High Strength Steels for Welded Structures

3- 4 Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars A
A. General critical temperature, Ac3 and in the lower end of the

austenite recrystallization region for a specific period of
1. Scope time followed by air cooling. The process improves the
mechanical properties of as- rolled steel by refining the
1.1 The requirements of this section apply to grain size and homogenising the microstructure.
hot-rolled steel plates, sections and bars intended for use
in hull construction, boilers, pressure vessels and 2.2.3 Controlled Rolling, CR (Normalizing Rolling,
machinery parts. NR)
1.2 Where stated in the following items of this A rolling procedure in which the final deformation is
Section, steels conforming to national or international carried out in the normalizing temperature range, allowed
standards may be used, provided that they satisfy the to cool in air, resulting in a material condition generally
minimum requirements of these Rules. equivalent to that obtained by normalizing.
2. Manufacture 2.2.4 Quenching and Tempering, QT
2.1 Method of manufacture

Quenching involves a heat treatment process in which
steel is heated to an appropriate temperature above the
2.1.1 Steel is to be manufactured by the basic
Ac3, held for a specific period of time, and then cooled
oxygen process, the electric furnace process or open
with an appropriate coolant for the purpose of hardening
hearth process.
the microstructure. Tempering subsequent to quenching
is a process in which the steel is reheated to an
The use of other processes may be approved by TL.
appropriate temperature not higher than the Ac1,
maintained at that temperature for a specific period of
2.1.2 The deoxidation practice used for each grade
time to restore toughness properties by improving the
is to comply with the appropriate requirements of Tables
microstructure and reduce the residual stress caused by
3.3 and 3.4.
the quenching process..
2.1.3 The rolling practice applied for each grade is

2.2.5 Thermo-Mechanical Rolling, TM (Thermo-
to comply with the appropriate condition of supply of
Mechanical Controlled Processing, TMCP)
Tables 3.6 and 3.7.
2.2 Definitions This is a procedure which involves the strict control of

both the steel temperature and the rolling reduction.
The definitions of applicable rolling procedures are given Generally a high proportion of the rolling reduction is
as follows.
carried out close to Ar3 temperature and may involve the
rolling in the dual phase temperature region.
2.2.1 As-Rolled, AR
This procedure involves steel being cooled as it is rolled Unlike controlled rolled (normalized rolling) the
with no further heat treatment. . The rolling and finishing properties conferred by TM (TMCP) cannot be
temperatures are typically in the austenite reproduced by subsequent normalizing or other heat
recrystallization region and above the normalizing treatment.
temperature. The strength and toughness properties of
steel produced by this process are generally less than The use of accelerated cooling on completion of
steel heat treated after rolling or than steel produced by TM-rolling may also be accepted subject to the special
advanced processes. approval of TL. The same applies for the use of
tempering after completion of the TM-rolling. See Table
2.2.2 Normalising, N
3.1.
Normalizing involves heating rolled steel above the

A Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars 3- 5
2.2.6 Accelerated Cooling, AcC When deviation from the programmed rolling schedules
or normalizing or quenching and tempering procedures
Accelerated cooling is a process, which aims to improve occurs, the manufacturer shall take further measures to
mechanical properties by controlled cooling with rates the surveyor’s satisfaction. See Table 3.1.
higher than air cooling immediately after the final
TM-rolling operation. Direct quenching is excluded from 3. Approval
accelerated cooling.
3.1 All materials are to be manufactured at works
The material properties conferred by TM and AcC cannot which have been approved by TL for the type and grade
be reproduced by subsequent normalizing or other heat of steel which is being supplied. The suitability of each
treatment. Where NR (CR) and TM with/without AcC are grade of steel for forming and welding is to be
applied, the programmed rolling schedules are to be verified demonstrated during the initial approval tests at the
by TL at the time of the steel works approval, and are to be steelworks. Approval of the steel works is to follow a
made available when required by the attending surveyor. scheme given in the Appendix A. For the steels intended
On the manufacturer’s responsibility, the programmed for high heat input welding over 50 kJ/cm, the approval of
rolling schedules are to be adhered to during the rolling the manufacturer is to follow a scheme given in the
operation. To this effect, the actual rolling records are to be Appendix B. For steels intended for a corrosion resistant
reviewed by the manufacturer and occasionally by the designation, the approval of the manufacturer is to
surveyor. additionally follow the scheme given in Appendix C.
Table 3.1 Schematic Diagrams of Thermo-Mechanical and Convertional Processes

Type of Processing
Conventional Processes Thermo-Mechanical Processes

Structure Temperature
CR
AR N QT TM
(NR)
Normal Slab
Heating Temp.
Recrystallized
Austenite
Normalizing or
Quenching
Non-recreystallized Temp.
Autsenite
Autsenite + Ferrite Ar3 or Ac3
Ferrite+Perlite Ar1 or Ac1

or
Ferrite + Bainite
Temperating
Temp.
Notes :
AR : As Rolled
N : Nomallizing
CR(NR) : Controlled Rolling (Normalizing Rolling)
QT : Quenching and Tempering
TM : Thermo-Mechanical Rolling (thermo-Mechanical Controlled Process)
R : Reduction
(*) : Sometings rolling in the dual-phase temperature region of austenite and ferrite
AcC : Accelerated Cooling

3.2 It is the manufacturer’s responsibility to processes have been checked and approved by TL on
assure that effective process and production controls in the manufacturer's premises.
operation are adhered to within the manufacturing
specifications. Where control imperfection inducing 5. General Characteristics of Products
possible inferior quality of product occurs, the
manufacturer is to identify the cause and establish a 5.1 All products shall have a smooth rolled surface
countermeasure to prevent its recurrence. Also, the and shall be free from any defects liable to have more
complete investigation report is to be submitted to the than an insignificantly adverse effect on their workability
Surveyor. For further use, each affected piece is to be and intended use, e.g. laminations, cracks, blow holes,
tested to the Surveyor’s satisfaction. scabs and seams.
The frequency of testing for subsequent products offered 5.2 Unless otherwise stipulated by the purchaser or
may be increased to gain confidence in the quality at the prescribed by TL, hot-rolled plates, wide flats and
discretion of TL sections shall be subject to the delivery conditions
stipulated in EN 10163.
3.3 When steel is not produced at the works at
which it is rolled, a certificate is to be supplied to the 5.3 Unless otherwise specified or agreed, surface
Surveyor at the rolling mill stating the process by which it defects may only be removed by grinding within the
was manufactured, the name of the manufacturer who permitted tolerance on the minimum thickness. The
supplied it, the number of the cast from which it was depressions caused by grinding shall have a smooth
madeand the ladle analysis. The Surveyor is to have transition to the surrounding surface of the product.
access to the works at which the steel was produced.
6. Thickness Tolerances of Steel Plates and
Wide Flats
Note:
1. The attention of the users must be drawn to the fact
6.1 Scope
that when fatigue loading is present, the effective
fatigue strength of a welded joint of higher strength 6.1.1 These requirements apply to the tolerance on
steel may not be greater than that of a welded joint in thickness of steel plates and wide flats with widths 600 mm
normal strength steels. or greater (hereinafter referred to as: product or products)
with thicknesses of 5 mm and over covering normal and
2. Before subjecting steels produced by higher strength hull structural steels according to Section 3
thermo-mechanical rolling to further heating for B (TL- R W11), high strength steels for welded structures
forming or stress relieving, or using high heat-input according to Section 3 C (TL- R W16) and steels for
welding, special consideration must be given to the machinery structures according to Türk Loydu Material
possibility of a consequent reduction in mechanical Rules.
properties.
The thickness tolerances for products below 5 mm are to
4. Condition of Supply be in accordance with a national or international
standard, e.g. Class B of ISO 7452. However, the minus
4.1 All products are to be supplied in the heat tolerance shall not exceed 0.3 mm.
treated conditions described in the following individual
Sections, unless supply in the as-rolled condition is Note:
allowed. This may be the case if, for instance, the Tolerances for length, width, flatness and over thickness may
product is to undergo further hot forming. be taken from national or international standards.
4.2 If the material is suitable, products may also 6.1.2 These requirements do not apply to products
be supplied in normalizing rolled (controlled rolled) or intended for the construction of lifting appliances which
thermo-mechanically rolled condition, provided that the are subject to decision by the TL.

6.1.3 These requirements do not apply to products 6.3.3 The minus tolerances for products for
intended for the construction of boilers, pressure vessels machinery structures are to be in accordance with Table
and independent tanks, e.g. for the transportation of 3.2.
liquefied gases or chemicals.
6.3.4 The tolerances on nominal thickness are not
6.1.4 Class C of ISO 7452-2013 or equivalent applicable to areas repaired by grinding. For areas
repaired by grinding the TL- R W11 7.4.1 requirements
according to national or international standards may be
are to be applied, unless stricter requirements as per a
applied in lieu of 6.3, in which case the requirements in
recognized standard are considered by the TL or
6.4 and 6.5 need not be applied.
purchaser.
Additionally, if Class C of ISO 7452-2013 is applied, it is

Table 3.2 Minus tolerances on nominal thickness
required that the steel mill demonstrates to the satisfaction
for products for machinery structures
of the TL that the number of measurements and
measurement distribution is appropriate to establish that
the mother plates produced are at or above the specified Minus tolerance on
nominal thickness. Nominal thickness (t) [mm] nominal thickness
[mm]
6.2 Responsibility 3≤t<5 -0.3
5≤t<8 -0.4
6.2.1 The responsibility for verification and
8 ≤ t < 15 -0.5
maintenance of the production within the required
15 ≤ t < 25 -0.6
tolerances rests with the manufacturer. The surveyor
may require witnessing some measurements. 25 ≤ t < 40 -0.7
40 ≤ t < 80 -0.9
6.2.2 The responsibility for storage and 80 ≤ t < 150 -1.1
maintenance of the delivered product(s) with acceptable 150 ≤ t < 250 -1.2
level of surface condition rests with the fabricator before
6.3.5 The plus tolerances on nominal thickness are
the products are used in fabrication.
to be in accordance with a recognized national or
6.3 Thickness tolerances international standard unless required otherwise by the
TL or purchaser.
6.3.1 The tolerances on thickness of a given
product are defined as: 6.4 Average thickness
- Minus tolerance is the lower limit of the 6.4.1 The average thickness of products is defined
acceptable range below the nominal thickness. as the arithmetic mean of the measurements made in
accordance with the requirements of 6.5.
- Plus tolerance is the upper limit of the
acceptable range above the nominal thickness. 6.4.2 The average thickness of the normal and higher
strength hull structural steels (TL- R W11) or high strength
Note: steels for welded structures (TL- R W16) is not to be less
Nominal thickness is stated by the purchaser at the time of than the nominal thickness.
enquiry and order.
6.5 Thickness measurements
6.3.2 The minus tolerance on nominal thickness
of normal and higher strength hull structural steels and 6.5.1 The thickness is to be measured at locations
high strength steels for welded structures is 0.3 mm of products as defined in 6.6.
irrespective of nominal thickness.
6.5.2 Automated method or manual method is
applied to the thickness measurements.

6.5.3 The procedure and the records of 7. Rectification of Surface Defects

measurements are to be made available to the surveyor
and copies provided on request. 7.1 Rectification of surface defects by
grinding
6.6 Thickness measuring locations
Defects which required to be repaired may be removed
6.6.1 Scope of application by grinding.
This item applies to the thickness measuring locations for The repaired areas are to be ground smooth to the
adjacent surface of the plate. The surveyor may request
the thickness tolerance and the average thickness of the
that the complete removal of defects is verified by suitable
product.
non-destructive examination.
6.6.2 Measuring locations

7.2 Rectification of surface defects by welding
At least two lines among line1, line 2 or line 3 as shown in Surface defects which cannot be removed as stated in
Figure 3.1a, are to be selected for the thickness 7.1 may be repaired by chipping or grinding followed by
measurements and at least three points on each welding subject to the surveyor’s consent and under his
selected line as shown in Figure 3.1a are to be selected supervision.
for thickness measurement. If more than three points are
taken on each line the number of points is to be equal on 8. Test Material and Tests
each line.
8.1 General
Note:
8.1.1 All products are to be presented for testing in
The measurement locations apply to a product rolled directly
the final supply condition in batches or units.
from one slab or steel ingot even if the product is to be later cut
by the manufacturer. Examples of the original measurements 8.1.2 Sampling
relative to later cut products are shown in Figure 3.1b. It is to
be noted that the examples shown are not representative of all The samples required for the preparation of test
possible cutting scenarios. specimens are to be cut from:
For automated methods, the measuring points at sides 8.1.2.1 The end of the plate or section corresponding to
are to be located not less than 10 mm but not greater the top position of the ingot, in the case of casting in ingot
than 300 mm from the transverse or longitudinal edges of moulds.
the product.
8.1.2.2 Any end of the plate or section, where such
product are rolled from blooms or billets manufactured by
For manual methods, the measuring points at sides are
continuous casting,
to be located not less t han 10 mm but not greater than
100 mm from the transverse or longitudinal edges of the 8.1.2.3 Both the ends of the coil for plates fabricated
product. in coils.
8.1.2.4 Unless otherwise agreed the test samples are

6.6.3 Local depressions due to flaws and grinding
to be taken from the following positions:
marks arising from the remedying of defects are not
taken into account, provided that they do not exceed the 8.1.2.4.1 Plates and flats with a width ≥ 600 mm
tolerances.
The test samples are to be taken from one end at a
position approximately midway between the axis in the
6.6.4 For sections and bars, the dimensions and the
direction of the rolling and the edge of the rolled product
dimensional tolerances specified in the standards apply.
(see Figure 3.2). Unless otherwise agreed the tensile test
specimens are to be prepared with their longitudinal axes
transverse to the final direction of rolling.

Figure 3.1a - Locations of thickness measuring points for the original steel plates
Figure 3.1b - Locations of thickness measuring points for the cut steel products

perpendicular (transverse test) to the direction of rolling.

For the preparation of test specimens and their testing
procedures, see Section 2.
Figure 3.2 Plates and flats
8.1.2.4.2 Flats with a width < 600 mm, bulb flats and
other sections
The test samples are to be taken from one end at a

Figure 3.4 Angles
position approximately one third from the outer edge (see
Figure 3.3, 3.4, 3.5 and 3.6) or in the case of small
sections, as near as possible to this position.
Figure 3.3 Bulb flats
In the case of channels, beams or bulb angles, the test

samples may be alternatively be taken from a position
approximately one quarter of the width from the web
centre line or axis (see Figure 3.5). The tensile test
specimen may be prepared with their longitudinal axes Figure 3.5 Channel
either parallel or transverse to the final direction of rolling.
8.1.2.4.3 Bars and other similar products
The test samples are to be taken so that the longitudinal

axes of the test specimens are parallel to the direction of
rolling and are as near as possible to the following:
- For non-cylindrical sections, at one third of the

half diagonal from the outside,
- For cylindrical sections, at one third of the

radius from the outside (see Figure 3.7).
8.1.3 Preparation of test specimens
The test specimens are to be cut from the samples with

their principal axis parallel (longitudinal test) or Figure 3.6 H-Section

Manufacturer's mark,
- Heat number, manufacturing serial number,
- Specimen number (where necessary).
Plates and sections shall be marked with punches.

Products with sensitive surfaces or with wall thicknesses
of ≤10 mm may be marked by a different method, e.g.
with a colored impression or with a low-stress or a rubber
stamp. Following agreement with the Surveyor, products
may also be marked with code numbers, the meaning of
which is explained in the covering certificate.
9.2 In the case of shapes and bars weighing < 25 kg

Figure 3.7 Bars or less per meter which are bundled together, the
marking specified in 9.1 may be applied on a tag.
8.1.4 Tensile test
9.3 Where individually tested rolled lengths (plates)
The results of the tensile test are to comply with the are cut up into sections, each section shall be marked in
values specified in the tables relevant to products. a manner identifying its relationship to the original rolled
length (plate).
If during the tensile test there is no marked yield stress
ReH , the 0.2% proof stress Rp0.2 , may be taken as an 10. Certification
alternative.
10.1 The Surveyor is to be given the test certificates or
8.1.5 Impact test consignment lists for all the materials tested by him in at
least three copies. The documents shall be issued
The average value is to comply with the minimum average separately for each grade or type of steel if necessary. The
value specified in the tables relevant to products and only documents shall at least contain the following details:
one individual value may be less than the average
required provided that it is not less than 70 % of it. - Purchaser and order number,
8.1.6 Retest procedure - Where known, the newbuilding and project

number respectively,
For details see Section 1.

- Item number and quantities,
For tensile re-test procedure see Section 2, B.3, for

- Size and indication of products,
Charpy V-notch retest procedure see Section 2, D.1.5.
- Steel grade, type or brand name,

9. Marking of Products
-
- Steel making process,
9.1 With the exception of the products with small
dimensions specified in 9.2, every item shall be clearly - Heat number,
identified by the manufacturer in at least one place with
the following marks: - Chemical composition of the heat,
- Steel grade, - Condition in which supplied if other than the

- as-rolled condition,

3- 12 Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars A, B
- Product identifying marks, For greater thicknesses certain variations in the re-
quirements may be allowed or required in particular
- Specimen number, where applicable. cases after consideration of the technical circumstances
involved.
The certificate shall also state the results of the special
tests carried out by the manufacturer, e.g. ultrasonic 1.3 Provision is made for four grades of normal
tests and tests of resistance to inter crystalline corrosion, strength steel based on the impact test requirements. For
together with details of the test method used. higher strength steels provision is made for three
2
strength levels (315, 355 and 390 N/mm ) each
10.2 Before the test certificates or consignment subdivided into four grades based on the impact test
lists are countersigned by the Surveyor, the temperature.
manufacturer shall confirm to the Surveyor in writing that
the material was manufactured by an approved process 1.4 Steels differing in chemical composition
and tested in accordance with TL Rules for Material, and deoxidation practice, condition of supply and mechanical
the requirements were satisfied. The name "Türk Loydu" properties may be accepted, subject to the special approval
(TL) shall be mentioned in the test certificate. The of TL. Such steels are to be given a special designation.
following wording of the declaration is adequate for this
purpose if it is stamped or printed on every test certificate 1.5 These requirements also apply to normal and
and/or consignment list together with the manufacturer's higher strength Corrosion Resistant steels when such steel
name and is certified on the manufacturer's behalf by a is used as the alternative means of corrosion protection for
works employee appointed by him. cargo oil tanks as specified in the performance standard
MSC.289 (87) of Regulation 3-11, Part A-1, Chapter II-1 of
"We hereby declare that the material has been produced the SOLAS Convention (Corrosion protection of cargo oil
by an approved method and has satisfied Rules of TL for tanks of crude oil tankers). Corrosion Resistant steels as
testing." defined within this subsection, are steels whose corrosion
resistance performance in the bottom or top of the internal
10.3 Where the steels are not produced and rolled by cargo oil tank is tested and approved to satisfy the
the same manufacturer, a certificate issued by the requirements in MSC.289 (87) in addition to other relevant
steelmaker specifying at least the heat numbers and the requirements for hull structural steels, structural strength
chemical compositions shall be handed to the Surveyor. and construction. It is not intended that such steels be used
for corrosion resistant applications in other areas of a vessel
that are outside of those specified in the performance
B. Normal and Higher Strength Hull Structural standard MSC.289 (87) of Regulation 3-11, Part A-1,
Steels Chapter II-1 of the SOLAS Convention. These
requirements apply to plates, wide flats, sections and bars
1. Scope in all grades up to a maximum thickness of 50 mm.
1.1 These requirements apply to weldable normal 2. Approval

strength and higher strength hot-rolled plates, wide flats,
sections and bars. Intended for use in hull construction. See A.3.
1.2 The requirements are primarily intended to
apply to steel products with the following thicknesses: See, A.2.
- For steel plates and wide flats: 4. Chemical Composition

all grades up to 100 mm thick
4.1 The chemical composition of samples taken
- For sections and steel bars: from each heat is to be determined by the manufacturer
all grades up to 50 mm thick in an adequately equipped and competently staffed

B Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars 3- 13
laboratory and is to comply with the appropriate 4.3 The following special rules apply to TM rolled
requirements of Tables 3.3 and 3.4. steels:
For plates and wide flats more than 50 mm thick, slight 4.3.1 The carbon equivalent value is to be calculated
variations in the prescribed chemical composition may from the ladle analysis using the following formula and to
be allowed as approved by TL.
comply with the requirements of Table 3.4;
4.2 The manufacturer's declared analysis will be
Cr + Mo + V Ni + Cu
accepted subject to occasional checks if required by the C Eq = C +
Mn
+ + [%]
6 5 15
Surveyor.
Table 3.3 Chemical composition and deoxidation practice for normal strength steels
Grade TL-A TL-B TL-D TL-E
For t ≤ 50 mm For t ≤ 50 mm
For t ≤ 25 mm
Any method except Any method except
Killed,
rimmed steel (1) rimmed steel Killed and fine grain
Deoxidation practice
treated
For t > 25 mm
For t > 50 mm For t > 50 mm
Fully killed and fine grain
Killed Killed
treated
Chemical composition (%)
Carbon plus 1/6 of the manganese content is not to exceed 0.40%
(Ladle analysis)(4),(7),(8)
Cmax. 0.21 (2) 0.21 0.21 0.18
Mnmin 2.5xC 0.80 (3) 0.60 0.70
Simax. 0.50 0.35 0.35 0.35
Pmax. 0.035 0.035 0.035 0.035
Smax. 0.035 0.035 0.035 0.035
Al (acid soluble)min - - 0.015 (5) (6) 0.015 (6)
t = Material thicness
(1) Grade TL-A sections up to a thickness of 12.5 mm may be accepted in rimmed steel subject to the special approval of TL.
(2) Max. 0.23 % for sections.
(3) When Grade TL-B steel is impact tested the minimum manganese content may be reduced to 0.60 %
(4) When any grade of steel is supplied in the thermo-mechanically rolled condition variations in the specified chemical
composition may be allowed or required by TL.
(5) For Grade TL-D steel over 25 mm thick.
(6) For Grade TL-D steel over 25 mm thick and for Grade TL-E steel, the total aluminium content may be determined instead
of the acid soluble content. In such cases, the total aluminium content is not be less than 0.020 %. TL may also specify a
maximum limit for aluminium. Other suitable grain refining elements may also be permitted subject to the special approval
of TL.
(7) In the melt, the maximum values of the following elements may not be exceeded:
- Cu : 0.30%
- Cr : 0.20%
- Ni : 0.40%
- Mo : 0.08%
(8) Where additions of any other element have been made as part of the steel making practice, the content is to be indicated.

3- 14 Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars B
4.3.2 The following formula may be used for Test specimen 10x5 mm: 2/3 of the energy given in
evaluating weldability instead of the carbon equivalent at the table
the discretion of TL.
6.4 The average notch impact energy value ob-
Si Mn Cu Ni tained from one set of three tests is to comply with the
Pcm = C + + + + +
30 20 20 60 requirements given in Tables. 3.8 and 3.9. One individual
Cr
+
Mo
+
V
+ 5B % [ ] value may only be below the specified average value
20 15 10 provided it is not less than 70 % of that value.
In such cases, the Pcm value is to be agreed with TL. 6.5 Notch impact tests are generally not required if
the product is less than 6 mm thick.
7. Surface Quality
All materials are to be supplied in a condition complying
with the appropriate requirements of Tables 3.6 and 3.7. 7.1 The steel is to be free from surface defects
prejudicial to the use of the material for the intended
6. Mechanical Properties application.
6.1 For tensile testing the upper yield strength ReH The finished material is to have a surface quality in
or, where this is not stipulated, the 0.2 per cent proof accordance with a recognized Standard such as EN
stress Rp0.2 is to be determined and the material is 10163 parts 1, 2 and 3, or an equivalent standard
considered to satisfy the requirements if one of these accepted by TL, unless otherwise specified in this
values meets or exceeds the prescribed minimum value section.
for the yield strength Re.
7.2 The responsibility for meeting the surface finish
6.2 The results obtained from tensile tests are to requirements rests with the manufacturer of the material,
comply with the appropriate requirements of Tables 3.8 who is to take the necessary manufacturing precautions
and 3.9.
and is to inspect the products prior to delivery. At that
stage, however, rolling or heat treatment scale may
6.3 The minimum impact energy requirements
conceal surface discontinuities and defects. If, during the
relate to Charpy V-notch impact test specimens, which
subsequent descaling or working operations, the
are taken in either the longitudinal or transverse direc-
material is found to be defective, TL may require
tions (See TL- R W11.12.2). Generally only longitudinal
materials to be repaired or rejected.
test specimens need be prepared and tested. For special
applications, if required by TL or the purchaser,
7.2.1 The surface quality inspection method shall be
transverse specimens are to be tested. The
in accordance with recognized national or international
requirements in respect of the transverse test specimens
shall be guaranteed by supplier. standards agreed between purchaser and manufacturer,
accepted by TL.
The tabulated values are for standard specimens 10 mm

x 10 mm. For plate thicknesses less than 10 mm, impact 7.2.2 If agreed by the manufacturer and purchaser,
test may be waived at the discretion of TL or subsize steel may be ordered with improved surface finish over
specimens, as specified in Section 2, may be used: and above these requirements.
Test specimen10x7,5 mm: 5/6 of the energy given in

the table

Table 3.4 Chemical composition and deoxidation practice for higher strength steels
TL-A 32, TL-D 32, TL-E 32 TL-F 32

Grade (1) TL-A 36, TL-D 36, TL-E 36 TL-F 36
TL-A 40, TL-D 40, TL-E 40 TL-F 40
Deoxidation practice Killed and fine grain treated
Chemical composition (%)

(5),(7)
(Ladle analysis)
Cmax. 0.18 0.16
Mn 0.90 – 1.60 (2) 0.90 – 1.60
Simax. 0.50 0.50
Pmax. 0.035 0.025
Smax. 0.035 0.025
Al (Acid soluble)min 0.015 (3) (4) 0.015 (3) (4)
Nb 0.02-0.05 (4)
0.02-0.05 (4)
Total 0.12 max.
0.05-0.10 (4) Total 0.12 max.
V 0.05-0.10 (4)
Timax. 0.02 0.02
Cumax. 0.35 0.35
Crmax. 0.20 0.20
Nimax. 0.40 0.80
Momax. 0.08 0.08
Nmax. — 0.009 (0.012 where Al is present)
Carbon equivalent value (6)
(1) The letter "H" may be added to the steel grade designation, e.g. TL-AH 36
(2) Up to a thickness of 12.5 mm the minimum manganese content may be reduced to 0.70 %.
(3) The total aluminium content may be determined instead of the acid-soluble content. In such cases the total aluminium content
may is to be not less than 0.020 %.
(4) The steel is to contain aluminium, niobium, vanadium or other suitable grain refining elements, either singly or in any
combination. When used singly the steel is to contain the specified minimum content of the grain refining element. When used in
combination, the specified minimum content of the refining element is not applicable.
(5) Where a higher strength steel is supplied in a thermo-mechanically rolled condition, variations in the chemical composition may
be allowed or required by TL.
(6) When required, the carbon equivalent value is to be calculated from the ladle analysis using the following formula and to comply
with the requirements of Table 3.5:
Mn Cr + Mo + V Ni + Cu
C Eq = C + + + %[ ]
6 5 15
This formula is applicable only to steels which are basically of the carbon-manganese type and gives a general indication of the
weldability of the steel.
(7) Where additions of any other element have been made as part of the steelmaking practice, the content is to be indicated.

3-16 Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars B
Table 3.5 Carbon equivalent for higher strength steels up to 100 mm in thickness produced by TM
Carbon equivalent value (%) max. (1)
Grade Thickness of product (t) [mm]
t ≤ 50 50 < t ≤100
TL-A 32, TL-D 32, TL-E 32, TL-F 32 0.36 0.38
TL-A 36, TL-D 36, TL-E 36, TL-F 36 0.38 0.40
TL-A 40, TL-D 40, TL-E 40, TL-F 40 0.40 0.42
(1) It is a matter for the manufacturer and shipbuilder to mutually agree in individual cases as to whether they wish to specify a
more stringent carbon equivalent.
Table 3.6 Condition of supply for normal strength steels
Grades Thickness [mm] Condition of supply
≤50 Any
TL-A
>50 ≤100 Normalised, controlled rolled or TM-rolled (1)
≤50 Any
TL-B
≤35 Any
TL-D
TL-E ≤100 Normalised, or TM-rolled (2)
(1) These conditions of supply and the requirements for impact tests are summarised in Table 3.10.
(2) Subject to the special approval of TL, plates in Grade TL-A and TL-B steel may also be supplied in the as-rolled condition. See
B.14.2.2.
(3) Subject to the special approval of TL, sections in Grade TL-D steel may be supplied in the as-rolled condition provided
satisfactory results are consistently obtained from notch impact tests. Similarly sections in Grade TL-E steel may be supplied
in the as rolled or controlled rolled condition. The frequency of impact tests is to be determined in accordance with B.14.2.2
and B.14.3.3. respectively.

Table 3.7 Condition of supply for higher strength steels
Grain refining elements Thickness t

Grades Condition of supply
used [mm]
≤ 12.5 Any
Nb and/or V
12.5 < t ≤100 Normalised, controlled rolled or TM-rolled (3)
TL-A 32 ≤ 20 Any
TL-A 36 Any, but as-rolled subject to special approval of TL
20 < t ≤35 (2)
Al alone or with Ti
35 < t ≤100 Normalised, controlled rolled or TM-rolled (3)
≤ 12.5 Any
12.5 < t ≤50 Normalised, controlled rolled or TM-rolled

TL-A 40 Any
50 < t ≤100 Normalized ,TM rolled or quenched and tempered
≤ 12.5 Any
Nb and/ or V
12.5 < t ≤100 Normalised, controlled rolled or TM-rolled (3)
TL-D 32
≤ 20 Any
TL-D 36
Any, but as-rolled subject to special approval of TL
20 < t ≤25 (2)
Al alone or with Ti
25 < t ≤100 Normalised, controlled rolled or TM-rolled (3)
≤ 50 Normalised, controlled rolled or TM-rolled

TL-D 40 Any
50 < t ≤100 Normalised, TM rolled or quenched and tempered
≤ 50 Normalised or TM rolled (3)

TL-E 32
Any
TL-E 36
50 < t ≤100 Normalised, TM rolled
≤ 50 Normalised, TM rolled or quenched and tempered

TL-E 40 Any
≤ 100 Normalised, TM rolled or quenched and tempered
Normalised, TM rolled or quenched and tempered
TL-F 32 ≤ 50
(4)
TL-F 36 Any
TL-F 40 50 < t ≤ 100 Normalised, TM rolled or quenched and tempered
(1) These conditions of supply and the requirements for impact tests are summarised in Table 3.11.
(2) The frequency of impact tests is to be in accordance with B.14.2.2.
(3) Subject to the special approval of TL, sections in Grade TL-A 32, TL-A 36, TL-D 32 and TL-D 36 steels may be supplied in
as-rolled condition provided satisfactory results are consistently obtained from notch impact tests. Similarly sections in grade
TL-E 32 and TL-E 36 steels may be supplied in as-rolled or controlled rolled condition. The frequency of notch impact tests is
to be in accordance with B.14.2.2 .and B.14.3.3. respectively.
(4) Subject to special approval of TL, sections in Grade TL-F 32 and TL-F 36 steels with thickness ≤ 50 may be supplied in
controlled rolled condition. The frequency of notch impact tests is to be in accordance with B.14.3.3.

Table 3.8 Mechanical properties for normal strength steels
Yield Impact test

Tensile Elongation
strength Average impact energy(KV) [J] min.
strength L 0 = 5.65 ⋅ S 0 Test
Grade ReH t ≤ 50 mm 50 < t ≤ 70 mm 70 < t ≤ 100 mm
Rm A5 [%] temp.
[N/mm2] Long. Transv. Long. Transv. Long. Transv.
[N/mm2] min. [°C]
min. (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3)
TL-A +20 - - 34 (5) 24 (5) 41 (5) 27 (5)

TL-B 400-520 0 27 (4) 20 (4) 34 24 41 27
235 22 (2)
TL-D (1) -20 27 20 34 24 41 27
TL-E -40 27 20 34 24 41 27
t = Thickness of product [mm]

(1) For all thicknesses of Grade TL-A sections the upper limit for the specified tensile strength range may be exceeded at the
discretion of TL.
(2) For full thickness flat tensile test specimens with a width of 25 mm and a gauge length of 200 mm the elongation is to comply
with the following minimum values:
>5 > 10 > 15 > 20 > 25 > 30 > 40

Thickness t [mm] ≤5
≤ 10 ≤ 15 ≤ 20 ≤ 25 ≤ 30 ≤ 40 ≤ 50
Elongation [%] 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
(3) See B,6.3.

(4) Notch impact tests are generally not required for Grade TL-B steels with thickness of 25 mm or less.
(5) Impact tests for Grade TL-A over 50 mm thick are not required when the material is produced using fine grain practice and
furnished normalised. TM rolling may be accepted without impact testing at the discretion of TL.
7.3 Acceptance Criteria 7.3.2 Defects
7.3.1 Imperfections Affected areas with imperfections with a depth exceeding

the limits of Class A of EN 10163-2 or the maximum
Imperfections of a harmless nature, for example pitting, permissible limits specified in a recognized equivalent
rolled-in scale, indentations, roll marks, scratches and standard accepted by TL, shall be repaired irrespective
grooves, regarded as being inherent of the of their number.
manufacturing process, are permissible irrespective of
their number, provided the maximum permissible limits of Cracks, injurious surface flaws, shells (over lapping
Class A of EN 10163-2 or limits specified in a recognized material with non-metallic inclusion), sand patches,
equivalent standard accepted by TL, are not exceeded laminations and sharp edged seams (elongated defects)
and the remaining plate or wide flat thickness remains visually evident on surface and/or edge of plate are
within the average allowable minus thickness tolerance considered defects, which would impair the end use of
specified in TL- R W13. the product and which require rejection or repair,
irrespective of their size and number.
Total affected area with imperfection not exceeding the
specified limits are not to exceed 15 % of the total
surface in question.

7.4 Repair (a) Any single welded area shall not exceed 0,125
2
m and the sum of all areas shall not exceed 2%
7.4.1 Grinding repair
of the surface side in question.
Grinding may be applied provided all the conditions

(b) The distance between two welded areas shall
below are adhered to:
not be less than their average width.
(a) The nominal product thickness will not be

reduced by more than 7 % or 3 mm, whichever (c) The weld preparation must not reduce the
is the less, thickness of the product below 80% of the

nominal thickness. For occasional defects with
(b) Each single ground area does not exceed 0.25 depths exceeding the 80% limit, special
2
m consideration at the surveyor’s discretion will be
necessary.
(c) All ground areas do not exceed 2 % of the total
surface in question.
(d) If weld repair depth exceeds 3 mm, UT may be
(d) Ground areas lying in a distance less than their requested by TL. If required, UT shall be carried
average breadth to each other are to be out in accordance with an approved procedure.
regarded as one single area.
(e) The repair shall be carried out by qualified

(e) Ground areas lying opposite each other on both
welders using an approved procedure for the
surfaces shall not decrease the product
appropriate steel grade. The electrodes shall be
thickness by values exceeding the limits as
of low hydrogen type and must be dried in
stated under 7.4.1 (a).
accordance with the manufacturer’s
requirements and protected against
Defects or unacceptable imperfections are to be
rehumidification before and during welding.
completely removed by grinding and the remaining plate
or wide flat thickness shall remain within the average
allowable minus thickness tolerance specified in TL- R 7.5 The surface quality and condition requirement
W13. The ground areas shall be a smooth transition to herein are not applied to products in forms of bars and
the surrounding surface of the product. Complete tubulars, which will be subject to manufacturers’
elimination of the defect is to be verified by magnetic conformance standards.
particle or by liquid penetrant testing.
7.4.2 Welding repair
8.1 If plates and wide flats are ordered with
Weld repair procedures and the method are to be ultrasonic inspection, this is to be made in accordance
reported and be approved by TL. Repair of defects such with an accepted standard at the discretion of TL.
as unacceptable imperfections, cracks, shells or seams

shall be followed by magnetic particle or liquid penetrant 8.2 Verification of internal soundness is the
testing. responsibility of the manufacturer. The acceptance of

internal soundness by TL’s surveyor shall not absolve
Local defects which cannot be repaired by grinding as the manufacturer from this responsibility.
stated under 7.4.1 may be repaired by welding with the

agreement of TL subject to the following conditions:

Table 3.9 Mechanical properties for higher strength steels
Yield Impact test

Tensile Elongation
strength Average impact energy (KV) [J] min.
strength
ReH L 0 = 5.65 ⋅ S 0 Test
Grade Rm t ≤ 50 mm 50 < t ≤ 70 mm 70 < t ≤ 100 mm
[N/mm2] A5 [%] min. temp.
[N/mm2] Long. Transv. Long. Transv. Long. Transv.
min. [°C]
(2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2)
TL-A 32 0 31(3) 22(3) 38 26 46 31

TL-D 32 -20 31 22 38 26 46 31
TL-E 32 -40 31 22 38 26 46 31
TL-F 32 315 440-570 22 -60 31 22 38 26 46 31
(1)
TL-A 36 0 34(3) 24(3) 41 27 50 34
TL-D 36 21 -20 34 24 41 27 50 34
355 490-630
TL-E 36 (1) -40 34 24 41 27 50 34
TL-F 36 -60 34 24 41 27 50 34
TL-A 40 0 39 26 46 31 55 37
TL-D 40 20 -20 39 26 46 31 55 37
390 510-660
TL-E 40 (1) -40 39 26 46 31 55 37
TL-F 40 -60 39 26 46 31 55 37
t = Thickness of product [mm]

(1) For full thickness flat tensile test specimens with a width of 25 mm and a gauge length of 200 mm the elongation is to comply
with the following minimum values:
>5 > 10 > 15 > 20 > 25 > 30 > 40
Thickness t [mm]
≤5 ≤ 10 ≤ 15 ≤ 20 ≤ 25 ≤ 30 ≤ 40 ≤ 50
TL-A 32,-D 32,-E 32,-F 32 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Elogation [%] TL-A 36,-D 36,-E 36,-F 36 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
TL-A 40,-D 40,-E 40,-F 40 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
(2) See B,6.3.
(3) For grades TL-A 32 and TL-A 36 steels a relaxation in the number of impact tests for acceptance purposes may be permitted
by special agreement with TL, provided that satisfactory results are obtained from occasional check tests.

9. Tolerances 11.4 Dimensions
9.1 Unless otherwise agreed or specially required Verification of dimensions are the responsibility of the
the thickness tolerances in TL- R W13 "Thickness steel maker. The acceptance by TL’ssurveyor shall not
absolve the steel maker from this responsibility.
tolerances of steel plates and wide flats" are applicable.
12. Test Material

12.1 Definitions
10.1 The steelmaker is to adopt a system for the
identification of ingots, slabs and finished pieces which
(a) "Piece" denotes the rolled product from a
will enable the material to be traced to its original cast. single slab, billet or ingot if this is rolled directly
into plates, sections or bars.
10.2 The surveyor is to be given full facilities for so
tracing the material when required. (b) "Batch" denotes a number of similar pieces
presented as a group for acceptance tests.
12.2 Test samples
11.1 Facilities for inspection
(a) All materials in a batch presented for
acceptance tests are to be of the same product
The manufacturer is to afford the surveyor all necessary
form e.g. plates, flats, sections, etc. from the
facilities and access to all relevant parts of the works to
same cast and in the same condition of supply.
enable him to verify that the approved process is
adhered to, for the selection of test materials, and the
(b) The test samples are to be fully representative
witnessing of tests, as required by the rules, and for
of the material and, where appropriate, are not
verifying the accuracy of the testing equipment.
to be cut from the material until heat treatment
has been completed.
11.2 Testing procedure
(c) The test specimens are not to be separately

The prescribed tests and inspections are to be conducted heat treated in any way.
at the place of manufacture prior to dispatch of products.
The test specimens and procedures are to comply with the (d) The test samples are to be taken according to
information given in Section 2. Unless otherwise agreed A,8.1.2.4.
with TL, the specimens are to be selected by the
Surveyor, marked and tested in his presence. 13. Mechanical Test Specimens
13.1 Tensile test specimens

11.3 Through thickness tensile testing
The dimensions of the tensile test specimens are to be

Where plates and wide flats with thicknesses ranging
selected from those given in Section 2. Full thickness flat
from 15 to 150 mm are ordered with through thickness
tensile test specimens should generally be selected as the
properties, the through thickness tensile test in
test thickness for plates, wide flats and sections. Round
accordance with H (Reference TL- R W14 “Steel Plates tensile test specimens may be used where the thickness
and Wide Flats with Improved Through Thickness of the product exceeds 40 mm or in the case of bars and
Properties” is to be carried out. similar products. By way of an alternative to these
specimens, full section specimens of a suitable length may
also be tested in the case of small bars and sections.

13.2 Impact test specimens from each batch of 50 tonnes or fraction thereof. For
those in QT condition, one set of impact test specimens
Impact test specimens shall comply with the Charpy V is to be taken from each length as heat treated.
specimen shape and be taken horizontally with the long
side of the specimen 2 mm below the rolling surface. They 14.2.3 When, subject to the special approval of TL,
shall be positioned so that their axes are either material is supplied in the as-rolled condition, the
"longitudinal" or "transverse" to the main direction of rolling frequency of impact tests is to be increased to one set
as shown in Tables 3.8 and 3.9. The notch is to be cut in a from each batch of 25 tonnes or fractions thereof. The
face of the test specimen which was originally perpendicular same applies when plates of grade TL-A steel are
to the rolled surface. The position of the notch is not be less supplied in thicknesses greater than 50 mm in the
than 25 mm from one flame-cut edge or one shear edge. as-rolled condition. In this case, one set of three impact
Where the thickness of the product exceeds 40 mm, the test specimens shall be taken for each 50 tonnes or
impact test specimens are to be taken with their longitudinal fractions thereof.
axis at a quarter thickness position.
14.2.4 The piece selected for the preparation of the
14. Number of Test Specimens test specimens is to be the thickest in each batch.
14.1 Number of tensile tests

14.3 Number of impact tests (for Grades TL-E,
TL-E 32, TL-E 36, TL-E 40, TL-F 32, TL-F 36 and TL-F
For each batch presented, except where specially
40), see Tables 3.9 and 3.10
agreed by TL, one tensile test specimen is to be taken
from one piece (max. weight 50 t from the same heat).
14.3.1 For plates supplied in the normalized or
Where the weight of finished material is greater than 50
TM-rolled condition, one set of specimens is to be taken
tonnes, one extra test specimen is to be taken from a
different piece from each 50 tonnes or fraction thereof. from each piece. In the case of quenched and tempered
Provision shall be made for additional specimens for plates, one set of specimens is to be taken from each
every variation of 10 mm in the thickness or diameter of heat treatment length.

products from the same heat.
14.3.2 For sections one set of specimens is to be taken
14.2 Number of impact tests (except for Grades from each batch of 25 tonnes or fractions thereof.
TL-E, TL-E 32, TL-E 36, TL-E 40, TL-F 32, TL-F 36 and
TL-F 40), see Tables 3.9 and 3.10 14.3.3 When, subject to the special approval of TL,
sections other than those in grade TL-E 40 and TL-F 40,
14.2.1 Except where otherwise specially agreed by
are supplied in the as-rolled or controlled rolled condition,
TL, for each batch presented (max. 50 t from the same
one set of test specimens is to be taken from each batch
heat), at least one set of three Charpy V-notch test
of 15 tonnes or fractions thereof.
specimens is to be made from one piece. Where the
weight of finished material is greater than 50 tonnes,
14.3.4 The specimens taken as described in 14.3.2
one extra set of three test specimens is to be made from
and 14.3.3 above are to be taken from the thickest piece
a different piece from each 50 tonnes or fractions
thereof. When steel plates except for grade TL-A steel in each batch.
over 50 mm in thickness is supplied in the controlled

rolled condition, the frequency of impact test is to be 15. Retest Procedures
made from a different piece from each 25 tonnes or
fraction thereof. 15.1 When the tensile test from the first piece
selected in accordance with 14.1 falls to meet the
14.2.2 For steel plates of grades TL-A 40 and, TL-D 40 requirements, re-test requirements for tensile test are to
with thickness over 50 mm in normalized or TM be in accordance with Section 2.
condition, one set of impact test specimens is to be taken

15.2 If one or both of the additional tests referred to 15.5 If any test specimen fails because of faulty
above are unsatisfactory, the piece is to be rejected, but preparation, visible defects or (in the case of tensile test)
the remaining material from the same batch may be because of fracturing outside the range permitted for the
accepted provided that two of the remaining pieces in the appropriate gauge length, the defective test piece may,
batch selected in the same way, are tested with at the surveyor’s discretion, be disregarded and replaced
satisfactory results. If unsatisfactory results are obtained by an additional test piece of the same type.
from either of these two pieces than the batch of material
is to be rejected. 15.6 At the option of steelmaker, when a batch of
material is rejected, the remaining pieces in the batch
15.3 Re-test requirements for Charpy impact tests may be resubmitted individually for test and those pieces
are to be in accordance with Section 2. which give satisfactory results may be accepted.
15.4 When the initial piece, representing a batch, 15.7 At the option of steelmaker, rejected material
gives unsatisfactory results from the additional Charpy may be resubmitted after heat treatment or reheat
V-notch impact tests referred to above, this piece is to be treatment, or may be resubmitted as another grade of
rejected but the remaining material in the batch may be steel and may then be accepted provided the required
accepted provided that two of the remaining pieces in the tests are satisfactory.
batch are tested with satisfactory results. If
unsatisfactory results are obtained from either of these 15.8 In the event of any material proving
two pieces than the batch of material is to be rejected. unsatisfactory during subsequent working or fabrication,
The pieces selected for these additional tests are to be such material may be rejected, notwithstanding any
the thickest remaining in the batch. previous satisfactory testing and/or certification.
Table 3.10 Required condition of supply and number of impact tests for normal strength steels
Condition of supply (1) (2)

(Test Batches for Impact Tests)
Grade Deoxidation practice Products Thickness t [mm]
10 12.5 25 35 50 100
Rimmed Sections A (-) Not applicable

For t ≤ 50 mm N(-)
Any method except Plates A (-) TM(-) (3)
TL-A
rimmed CR(50), AR*(50)
Sections A (-) Not applicable

For t > 50 mm killed
For t ≤ 50 mm N (50)
Any method except Plates A (-) A (50) TM (50)
TL-B rimmed CR(25),AR*(25)
For t > 50 mm killed Sections A (-) A (50) Not applicable

Plates,
Killed A (50) Not applicable
Sections
N (50) N (50)
Plates A (50) CR(50) TM (50)
TL-D TM (50) CR(25)
Fully killed and fine
N (50)
grain treated
CR(50)
Sections A (50) Not applicable
TM (50)
AR*(25)
N (each piece)
Plates
TM (each piece)
Fully killed and fine
TL-E N (25)
grain treated
Sections TM (25) Not applicable
AR*(15),CR*(15)
(1) Condition of supply:
A : Any
N : Normalised condition
CR : Controlled rolled condition
TM : Thermo-mechanically rolled condition
AR* : As rolled condition subject to special approval of TL
CR* : Controlled rolled condition subject to special approval of TL
(2) Number of impact tests:
One set of test specimens is to be taken from each test batch or parts thereof, the weight of the test batch being stated in ( ).
Sign (-) means that the impact test is omitted.
(3) See Table 3.8 (5).

Table 3.11 Required condition of supply and number of impact tests for higher strength steels
Condition of supply (Batches for Impact Tests) (1) (2)

Thickness t [mm]
Deoxidation Grain refining
Grade Products
practice elements
10 12.5 20 25 35 50 100
N (50) N (50), CR (50)

Plates A (50)
CR (50), TM (50) TM (50)
Nb and/or V
N (50), CR (50), TM (50)
Sections A (50) Not applicable
AR* (25)
Fully killed and
TL-A 32
fine grain AR*(25) Not applicable
TL-A 36
treated Plates A(50) N (50), CR (50), N (50), CR (25),
Al only or with Ti TM (50) TM (50)
N (50),CR (50),
Sections A(50) Not applicable
TM (50),AR* (25)
TL-A 40 Fully killed and Plates N (50), TM (50)

N (50),CR (50)
fine grain A (50) QT ( each length as heat
TM (50)
treated treated)
Any
Sections N (50),CR (50)
A (50) Not applicable
TM (50)
TL-D 32 Fully killed and N (50),CR (50), N (50), CR (25),

TL-D 36 fine grain Plates A (50)
TM (50) TM (50)
treated Nb and/or V
Sections N (50), CR (50), TM (50)
A (50) Not applicable
AR* (25)
A(50) AR*(25) Not applicable
Plates N (50), CR (50), N (50), CR (25),
Al only or withTi TM (50) TM (50)
N (50),CR (50),
Sections A(50) Not applicable
TM (50),AR* (25)
TL-D 40 Fully killed and Plates N (50), CR (50) N (50), TM (50)

fine grain TM (50) QT ( each length as heat
treated Any treated)
Sections N (50), CR (50)

Not applicable
TM (50)
TL-E 32 Fully killed and N (each piece)

Plates
TL-E 36 fine grain TM (each piece)
treated Any N (25)
AR*(15), CR*(15)

Table 3.11 Required condition of supply and number of impact tests for higher strength steels (continued)
Condition of supply (Batches for Impact Tests) (1) (2)
Thickness t [mm]
Deoxidation Grain refining
Grade Product
practice elements
10 12.5 20 25 35 50 100
N (each piece)
Plates TM (each piece)
Fully killed and QT ( each length as heat treated)

TL-E 40 Any
fine grain treated N (25)
QT (25)
N (each piece)

TL-F 32 Fully killed and
Any QT ( each length as heat treated)
TL-F 36 fine grain treated
N (25),TM (25)
Sections Not applicable
QT (25), CR*(15)
N (each piece)
Fully killed and QT ( each length as heat treated)
TL-F 40 Any
fine grain treated N (25)
QT (25)
(1) Condition of supply:
A : Any
N : Normalised condition
CR : Controlled rolled condition
TM : Thermo-mechanically rolled condition
QT : Quenched and tempered condition
AR* : As rolled condition subject to special approval of TL
CR* : Controlled rolled condition subject to special approval of TL
(2) Number of impact tests:
One set of impact test specimens is to be taken from each test batch or parts thereof, the weight of the test batch being stated in ( ).
For grades TL-A 32 and TL-A 36 steels a relaxation in the number of impact tests may be permitted by special agreement with TL
provided that satisfactory results are obtained from occasional check tests.

16. Branding embossed on finished products, are to be encircled with

paint or otherwise marked so as to be easily recognisable.
16.1 Every finished piece is to be clearly marked
by the maker in at least one place with TL's brand and 16.4 Where a number of light materials are securely
the following particulars: fastened together in bundles the manufacturer may, subject
to the agreement of TL, brand only the top piece of each
- Identification mark for the grade steel (e.g. bundle, or alternatively, a firmly fastened durable label
TL-A, TL-A 36), containing the brand may be attached to each bundle.
- Steels which have been specially approved by 16.5 In the event of any material bearing TL’s brand
TL and which differ from these requirements failing to comply with the test requirements, the brand is
(see 1.4) are to have the letter "S" after the to be unmistakably defaced by the manufacturer.
above identification mark (e.g. TL-A36 S, TL-E
S), 17. Documentation
- Material supplied in the thermo-mechanically 17.1 The Surveyor is to be supplied with the number
controlled processed condition is to have the of copies as required by the TL, of the test certificates or
letters TM added after the identification mark shipping statements for all accepted materials. The TL
(e.g. TL-E 36 TM), may require separate documents of each grade of steel.
- Name or initials to identify the steelworks,

These documents are to contain, in addition to the
description, dimensions, etc., of the material, at least the
- Cast or other number to identify the piece,
following particulars:
- If required by the purchaser, his order number

- Purchaser's order number and if known the hull
or other identification mark.
number for which the material isintended.
16.2 Steel plates that have complied with the
requirements for corrosion resistant steel will be - Identification of the cast and piece including,
identified by adding a corrosion designation to the unified where appropriate, the test specimen number.
identification mark for the grade of steel.
- Identification of the steelworks.
The corrosion resistant steel is to be designated
according to its area of application as follows: - Identification of the grade of steel.
- Lower surface of strength deck and surrounding - Ladle analysis (for elements specified in Tables
structures; RCU 3.3 and 3.4).
- Upper surface of inner bottom plating and - For steel with a corrosion resistant steel
surrounding structures; RCB designation the weight percentage of each
element added or intentionally controlled for
- For both strength deck and inner bottom plating; improving corrosion resistance.
RCW
- Condition of supply when other than as rolled i.e.
Example of designation: normalised, controlled rolled or
thermomechanically rolled.
A36 TM RCB Z35
- State if rimming steel has been supplied for grade
16.3 The above particulars, but excluding the A sections, up to 12,5 mm thick.
manufacturer's name or trade mark, where this is

3-28 Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars B,C
- Test results 1.3 Steels covered by the scope may be delivered

in Normalized (N) / Normalized rolled (NR);
17.2 Before the acceptance test certificates or Thermo-mechanical controlled rolled (TM) or Quenched
dispatch documents are signed by the Surveyor, the and Tempered (QT) condition.
manufacturer shall hand over written confirmation that
the steel has been produced by an approved method has Note:
successfully passed the tests prescribed in the presence TM is a generic delivery condition that may or may not include
of the Surveyor or his representative appointed by TL. In accelerated cooling, and may or may not include direct
this regard, the following text may be also accepted, quenching followed by tempering after TM-rolling.
either stamped or printed on the certificate or dispatch
documents, and shall be verified by one of the 1.4 Product forms include plates, wide flats,
manufacturer's authorized agents: sections, bars and seamless tubulars.
“ We hereby certify that the material has been made by 1.5 Steels with a thickness beyond the maximum
an approved process and has been satisfactorily tested thicknesses as given in Table 3.14 may be approved at
in accordance with TL Rules”. the discretion of TL.
1.6 Steels differing in chemical composition,

C. High Strength Steels for Welded Structures deoxidation practice, delivery condition and mechanical
properties may be accepted, subject to the special
1. Scope approval of TL. Such steels are to be given a special
designation.
1.1 These requirements apply to hot-rolled,
fine-grain, weldable high strength structural steels, 2. Approval
intended for use in marine and offshore structural
applications. These requirements do not apply to steels 2.1 For applications subjected to Classification, all
intended for hull structure of commercial ships whose steels are to be manufactured at steel works which have
requirements are specified in B.. been approved by TL for the type and grade of steel
which is being supplied. The procedure for approval is
1.2 Steels covered by the scope of these shown in Appendix D
requirements are specified in yield strength levels of 420, .
2
460, 500, 550, 620, 690, 890 and 960 N/mm . For each 2.2 It is the steelmaker’s responsibility to assure
yield strength level grades A, D, E and F are specified, that effective quality, process and production controls
based on the impact test temperature, except for yield during manufacturing are adhered to within the
2
strength level of 890 and 960 N/mm for which grade F is manufacturing specification. The manufacturing
not applicable. specification shall be submitted to TL at the time of initial
approval.
The full list of grades are:
2.3 Where non-conformities arise, the
TL-AH420 TL-DH420 TL-EH420 TL-FH420 manufacturer is to identify the root cause and establish
TL-AH460 TL-DH460 TL-EH460 TL-FH460 countermeasures to prevent its recurrence. The
TL-AH500 TL-DH500 TL-EH500 TL-FH500 non-conformities and the countermeasures are to be
TL-AH550 TL-DH550 TL-EH550 TL-FH550 documented and reported to TL.
TL-AH620 TL-DH620 TL-EH620 TL-FH620
TL-AH690 TL-DH690 TL-EH690 TL-FH690 2.4 When the semi-finished products were not
TL-AH890 TL-DH890 TL-EH890 manufactured by the approved manufacturer of the finish
TL-AH960 TL-DH960 TL-EH960 rolled and heat treated products, the manufacturer of the
semi-finished product shall also be subject to approval by
TL.

C Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars 3- 29
Note 1: 4. Chemical Composition

The attention of the users must be drawn to the fact that when
fatigue loading is present, the effective fatigue strength of a 4.1 The chemical composition is to be determined
welded joint of high strength steel may not be greater than that by the steelmaker in an adequately equipped and
of a welded joint in normal strength steels. competently staffed laboratory. The method of sampling
is to follow that carried out for the initial approval tests,
Note 2: either from the ladle, the tundish or the mould in the case
Before subjecting steels produced by both thermo-mechanical of continuous casting. The aim analysis is to be in
rolling or quenched and tempered after rolling to further accordance with the manufacturing specification. All the
heating for forming or stress relieving, or using high elements listed in Table 3.12 are to be reported.
heat-input welding, special consideration must be given to the
possibility of a consequent reduction in mechanical properties. 4.2 Elements used for alloying, nitrogen binding,
and fine grain treatment, and as well as the residual
3. Method of Manufacture elements are to be as detailed in the manufacturing
specification, e.g. when boron is deliberately added for
3.1 Steel making process enhancement of hardenability of the steels, the
maximum content of the boron content shall not be
3.1.1 The steel is to be manufactured, by the basic higher than 0,005%; and the analysis result shall be
oxygen, basic electric arc furnace or by processes reported.
specially approved by the TL.
4.3 The carbon equivalent value is to be calculated
3.1.2 Vacuum degassing shall be used for any of the from the ladle analysis. Maximum values are specified in
following: Table 3.13.
3.1.2.1 All steels with enhanced through-thickness 4.3.1 For all steel grades the following formula of IIW
properties, and may be used:
3.1.2.2 All steels of grade H690, H890 and H960.

𝐌𝐧 𝐂𝐫 + 𝐌𝐨 + 𝐕 𝐍𝐢 + 𝐂𝐮
𝐂𝐞𝐪 = 𝐂 + + + (%)
𝟔 𝟓 𝟏𝟓
3.2 Deoxidation
3.2.1 The steel is to be fully killed.

4.3.2 For steel grades H460 and higher, CET may be
3.3 Grain size used instead of Ceq at the discretion of the

manufacturer, and is to be calculated according to the
3.3.1 The steel is to be fine grain treated, and is to following formula:
have a fine grain structure. The fine grain practice is to be

as detailed in the manufacturing specification.
(𝐌𝐧 + 𝐌𝐨) (𝐂𝐫 + 𝐂𝐮) 𝐍𝐢
𝐂𝐄𝐓 = 𝐂 + + + (%)
𝟏𝟎 𝟐𝟎 𝟒𝟎
Note:
A fine grain structure has an equivalent index ≥ 6 determined
Note:
by micrographic examination in accordance with ISO 643 or
The CET is included in the standard EN 1011-2:2001 used as
alternative test method.
one of the parameters for pre-heating temperature
determination which is necessary for avoiding cold cracking.
3.4 Nitrogen control
4.3.3 For TM and QT steels with carbon content not

3.4.1 The steels shall contain nitrogen binding
more than 0.12%, the cold cracking susceptibility Pcm for
elements as detailed in the manufacturing specification.
evaluating weldability may be used instead of carbon
Also see note 4 in Table 3.12.

3-30 Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars C
equivalent of Ceq or CET at manufacturer’s discretion 6.1 Tensile test

and is to be calculated using the following formula:
6.1.1 Test specimens are to be cut with their
longitudinal axes transverse to the final direction of
𝐒𝐢 𝐌𝐧 𝐂𝐮 𝐍𝐢 𝐂𝐫 𝐌𝐨 𝐕
𝐏𝐜𝐦 = 𝐂 + + + + + + + + 𝟓𝐁 (%) rolling, except in the case of sections, bars, tubulars and
𝟑𝟎 𝟐𝟎 𝟐𝟎 𝟔𝟎 𝟐𝟎 𝟏𝟓 𝟏𝟎
rolled flats with a finished width of 600 mm or less, where
the tensile specimens may be taken in the longitudinal
5. Delivery Condition - Rolling Process and
direction.
Heat Treatment
6.1.2 Full thickness flat tensile specimens are to be

5.1 Steel is to be delivered in accordance with the
prepared. The specimens are to be prepared in such a
processes approved by TL. These processes include:
manner as to maintain the rolling scale at least at one
side. When the capacity of the test machine is exceeded
• Normalized (N)/Normalized rolled (NR)
by the use of a full thickness specimen, sub-sized flat
• Thermo-mechanical controlled rolled (TM)/with
tensile specimens representing either the full thickness
accelerated cooling (TM+AcC)/with direct
or half of the product thickness retaining one rolled
quenching followed by tempering (TM+DQ), or
surface are to be used. Alternatively, machined round
• Quenched and Tempered condition (QT)
test specimens may be used. The specimens are to be
located at a position lying at a distance of t/4 from the
The definition of these delivery conditions are defined in
surface and additionally at t/2 for thickness above 100
B.
mm or as near as possible to these positions.
Note:
6.1.3 The results of the tests are to comply with the
Direct quenching after hot-rolling followed by tempering is
appropriate requirements of Table 3.15. In the case of
considered equivalent to conventional quenching and
product forms other than plates and wide flats where
tempering.
longitudinal tests are agreed, the elongation values are
to be 2 percentage units above those transverse
5.2 Rolling reduction ratio
requirements as listed in Table 3.15.
5.2.1 The rolling reduction ratio of slab, billet, bloom

6.2 Impact test
or ingot should not be less than 3:1 unless agreed at the
time of approval.
6.2.1 The Charpy V-notch impact test specimens for
plates and wide flats over 600 mm in width are to be
5.3 Thickness limits for approval
taken with their axes transverse to the final rolling
direction and the results should comply with the
5.3.1 The maximum thickness of slab, billet or bloom
appropriate requirements for transverse direction of
from the continuous casting process shall be at the
Table 3.15. For other product forms, the impact tests are
manufacturer’s discretion.
to be in the longitudinal direction, the results of the tests
are to comply with the appropriate requirements for
5.3.2 Maximum thickness of plates, sections, bars
longitudinal direction of Table 3.15.
and tubulars over which a specific delivery condition is
applicable are shown in Table 3.14.
6.2.2 Sub-surface test specimens will be taken in
such a way that one side is not further away than 2 mm
from a rolled surface, however, for material with a
thickness in excess of 50 mm, impact tests shall be taken
Test specimens and test procedures for mechanical
at the quarter thickness (t/4) location and mid-thickness
properties are in accordance with B. and Section 2.
(t/2).

Table 3.12 Chemical composition
Delivery condition (1) N/NR TM QT

AH420 EH420 AH420 EH420 AH420 EH420
Steel grade
DH420 EH460 DH420 FH420 DH420 FH420
AH460 EH460 AH460 EH460
AH460
DH460 FH460 DH460 FH460
DH460 AH500 EH500 AH500 EH500
DH500 FH500 DH500 FH500
AH550 EH550 AH550 EH550
DH550 FH550 DH550 FH550
AH620 EH620 AH620 EH620
DH620 FH620 DH620 FH620
AH690 EH690 AH690 EH690
DH690 FH690 DH690 FH690
AH890 DH890 AH890 DH890
EH890 AH960 EH890
Chemical
DH960
Composition (2) EH960
Carbon % max 0,20 0,18 0,16 0,14 0,18
Manganese % 1,0 ÷ 1,70 1,0 ÷ 1,70 1,70
Silicon % max 0,60 0,60 0,80
Phosphorus % max (3) 0,030 0,025 0,025 0,020 0,025 0,020
Sulphur % max (3) 0,025 0,020 0,015 0,010 0,015 0,010
Aluminiumtotal % min (4) 0,02 0,02 0,018
Niobium % max (5) 0,05 0,05 0,06
Vanadium % max (5) 0,20 0,12 0,12
Titanium % max (5) 0,05 0,05 0,05
Nickel % max (6) 0,80 2,00 (6) 2,00 (6)
Copper % max 0,55 0,55 0,50
Chromium % max (5) 0,30 0,50 1,50
Molybdenum % max (5) 0,10 0,50 0,70
Nitrogen % max 0,025 0,025 0,015
Oxygen ppm max (7) Not applicable Not applicable 50 Not applicable 30
Notes:
(1) See item 5.1 for definition of delivery conditions.
(2) The chemical composition is to be determined by ladle analysis and shall meet the approved manufacturing
specification at the time of approval.
(3) For sections the P and S content can be 0.005% higher than the value specified in the table.
(4) The total aluminium to nitrogen ratio shall be a minimum of 2:1. When other nitrogen binding elements are used, the
minimum Al value and Al/N ratio do not apply.
(5) Total Nb+V+Ti ≤ 0.26% and Mo+Cr ≤ 0.65%, not applicable for QT steels.
(6) Higher Ni content may be approved at the discretion of TL.
(7) The requirement on maximum Oxygen content is only applicable to DH890; EH890; DH960 and EH960.

Table 3.13 Maximum Ceq, CET and Pcm values
Steel Carbon equivalent

grade and Ceq CET Pcm
delivery Plates Sections Bars Tubulars All All
t ≤ 250
condition t ≤ 50 50 < t ≤ 100 100 < t ≤ 250 t ≤ 50 t ≤ 65
or d ≤ 250
All All
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
[mm]
H420N/NR 0.46 0.48 0.52 0.47 0.53 0.47 N.A N.A

H420TM 0.43 0.45 0.47 0.44 N.A N.A N.A N.A
H420QT 0.45 0.47 0.49 N.A N.A 0.46 N.A N.A
H460N/NR 0.50 0.52 0.54 0.51 0.55 0.51 0.25 N.A
H460TM 0.45 0.47 0.48 0.46 N.A N.A 0.30 0.23
H460QT 0.47 0.48 0.50 N.A N.A 0.48 0.32 0.24
H500TM 0.46 0.48 0.50 N.A N.A N.A 0.32 0.24
H500QT 0.48 0.50 0.54 N.A N.A 0.50 0.34 0.25
H550TM 0.48 0.50 0.54 N.A N.A N.A 0.34 0.25
H550QT 0.56 0.60 0.64 N.A N.A 0.56 0.36 0.28
H620TM 0.50 0.52 N.A N.A N.A N.A 0.34 0.26
H620QT 0.56 0.60 0.64 N.A N.A 0.58 0.38 0.30
H690TM 0.56 N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A 0.36 0.30
H690QT 0.64 0.66 0.70 N.A N.A 0.68 0.40 0.33
H890TM 0.60 N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A 0.38 0.28
H890QT 0.68 0.75 N.A N.A N.A N.A 0.40 N.A
H960QT 0.75 N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A 0.40 N.A
Note : N.A. = Not applicable
Table 3.14 Maximum thickness limits
Maximum thickness [mm]

Delivery condition
Plates Sections Bars Tubulars
N 250 (2) 50 250 65

NR 150 (1)
TM 150 50 Not applicable Not applicable
QT 150 (2) 50 Not applicable 50
Notes:
(1) The maximum thickness limits of sections, bars and tubulars produced by NR process route are less than those
manufactured by N route, and shall be at the discretion of TL.
(2) Approval for N steels with thickness larger than 250 mm and QT steels with thickness larger than 150 mm is subject to the
special consideration of TL.

Table 3.15 Tensile properties at ambient temperature for all steel grades
Mechanical Minimum yield strength Ultimate tensile

Charpy V-notch
properties ReH (1) strength Rm Minimum
2 2 percentage impact test
[N/mm ] [N/mm ]
elongation after
Nominal thickness Nominal thickness fracture [%] Test Minimum
[mm] (4) [mm] (4) 𝑳𝟎 = 𝟓, 𝟔𝟓 √𝑺𝟎 (2) temp. energy
[°C] [Joules]
≥3 > 50 > 100 ≥3 > 100

Steel grade T L (3) T L
≤ 50 ≤ 100 ≤ 250 ≤ 100 ≤ 250
and delivery
condition
H420N/NR A 0
H420TM D -20
420 390 365 520~680 470~650 19 21 28 42
H420QT E -40
F -60
H460N/NR A 0
H460TM D -20
460 430 390 540~720 500~710 17 19 31 46
H460QT E -40
F -60
H500TM A 0
H500QT D -20
500 480 440 590~770 540~720 17 19 33 50
E -40
F -60
H550TM A 0
H550QT D -20
550 530 490 640~820 590~770 16 18 37 55
E -40
F -60
H620TM A 0
H620QT D -20
620 580 560 700~890 650~830 15 17 41 62
E -40
F -60
H690TM A 0
H690QT D -20
690 650 630 770~940 710~900 14 16 46 69
E -40
F -60
H890TM
A 0
H890QT Not Not
D 890 830 applicable 940~1100 applicable 11 13 -20 46 69
E -40
H960QT
A Not
0
Not Not
D 960 980~1150 applicable
10 12 -20 46 69
applicable applicable
E -40
Notes:
(1) For tensile test either the upper yield stress (ReH) or where ReH cannot be determined, the 0,2 percent proof stress (Rp0.2) is to
be determined and the material is considered to comply with the requirement if either value meets or exceeds the specified
minimum value of yield strength.
(2) For full thickness flat test specimens with a width of 25 mm and a gauge length of 200 mm the elongation is to comply with
the minimum values shown in Table 3.16.
(3) In the case that the tensile specimen is parallel to the final rolling direction, the test result shall comply with the requirement
of elongation for longitudinal (L) direction.
(4) For plates and sections for applications, such as racks in offshore platforms etc, where the design requires that tensile
properties are maintained through the thickness, a decrease in the minimum specified tensile properties is not permitted with
an increase in the thickness.

Table 3.16 Elongation minimum values for a width of 25 mm and a 200 mm gauge length (1)
Thickness [mm]
Strength
≤ 10 > 10 > 15 > 20 > 25 > 40 > 50
level
≤ 15 ≤ 20 ≤ 25 ≤ 40 ≤ 50 ≤ 70
H420 11 13 14 15 16 17 18
H460 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
H500 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
H550 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
H620 9 11 12 12 13 14 15
H690 9 (2) 10 (2) 11 (2) 11 12 13 14
Notes:
(1) The tabulated elongation minimum values are the requirements for testing specimen in transverse direction. H890 and 960
specimens and specimens which are not included in this table shall be proportional specimens with a gauge length of
L =5.65√S .
0 0
(2) For H690 plates with thickness ≤ 20 mm, round specimen in accordance with Section 2 may be used instead of the flat
tensile specimen. The minimum elongation for testing specimen in transverse direction is 14%.
6.2.3 Impact test for a nominal thickness less than 6 Note 2:

mm are normally not required. For continuous heat treated product special consideration
may be given to the number and location of test specimens
6.3 Test frequency required by the manufacturer to be agreed by TL.
6.3.1 Tensile test sample is to be randomly selected 6.4 Traceability

from each batch, as defined in B., that is to be less than
or equal to 25 tonnes, and to be from the same cast, in Traceability of test material, specimen sampling and test
the same delivery condition and of the same thickness. procedures including test equipment with respect to
mechanical properties testing, is to be in accordance with
6.3.2 Impact test B.
6.3.2.1 For steels plates in N/NR or TM condition test 6.5 Re-test procedures
sample is to be taken from each piece.
Re-test procedures for tensile tests and Charpy impact
6.3.2.2 For steels in QT condition test sample is to be tests are to be in accordance with Section 2.
taken from each individually heat treated part thereof.
6.6 Through thickness tensile test
6.3.2.3 For sections, bars and tubulars, test sample is
to be taken from each batch of 25 tonnes or fraction 6.6.1 For steels designated with improved through
thereof. thickness properties, through thickness tensile tests are
to be performed in accordance with H, “Steels with
Note 1: specified minimum through thickness properties” .
If the mass of the finished material is greater than 25
tonnes, one set of tests from each 25 tonnes and/or 6.6.2 Subject to the discretion of TL, through
fraction thereof is required. (e.g. for consignment of 60 thickness tensile strength may be required to be not less
tonnes would require 3 plates to be tested). than 80% of the specified minimum tensile strength.

7. Tolerances for stress relieving heat treatment such as post-weld heat

treatment and stress relieving heat treatment after cold
Unless otherwise agreed or specially required, the forming for the purpose of reducing the risk of brittle
thickness tolerances in A.6 “Thickness Tolerances of fracture, increasing the fatigue lifetime and dimensional
Steel Plates and Wide Flats” are applicable stability for machining.
8. Surface Quality Note:

Products can be susceptible to deterioration in mechanical
8.1 All materials are to be free from cracks, strength and toughness if they are subjected to incorrect
injurious surface flaws, injurious laminations and similar post-weld heat treatment procedures or other processes
defects. involving heating such as flame straightening, rerolling, etc.
where the heating temperature and the holding time exceed the
8.2 The surface quality inspection method shall be limits given by the manufacturer.
in accordance with recognised national or international
standards agreed between purchaser and manufacturer. 11. Facilities for Inspection
8.2.1 Welding repair procedures and the method for 11.1 Testing is to be carried out under the witness of
reporting repairs are to be approved by TL. the Surveyor, or an authorised deputy, in order to verify
whether the test results meet the specified requirements.
8.2.2 Where repair by grinding is carried out then the
remaining plate thickness below the ground area must be 11.2 The manufacturer is to afford the Surveyor all
within the allowable under thickness tolerance. necessary facilities and access to all relevant parts of the
steel works to enable him to verify the approved process
8.3 Surface finish requirement shall be in is adhered to, for the selection of test materials, and the
accordance with the relevant requirements in B. witnessing of tests, as required by this item also for
verifying the accuracy of the testing, calibration of
8.4 Surface inspection is the responsibility of the inspection equipment and traceability of materials.
manufacturer. The acceptance by TL’s Surveyor of
material later found to be defective shall not absolve the 12. Identification of Materials
manufacturer of this responsibility.
12.1 The manufacturer is to adopt a system for the
9. Internal Soundness identification of ingots, slabs, billet or bloom and finished
products, which will enable the material to be traced to its
9.1 Verification of internal soundness is the
original cast. The Surveyor is to be given full facilities for
responsibility of the manufacturer. The acceptance by
so tracing the material when required.
TL’s Surveyor shall not absolve the manufacturer of this
responsibility.
13. Branding
9.2 Ultrasonic examination

13.1 Each finished piece is to be clearly marked by
9.2.1 If required by TL, ultrasonic examination should the manufacturer with the following particulars:
be carried out in accordance with B. for the requirement
of internal soundness, and is to be performed in 13.1.1 TL’s brand mark
accordance with an approved standard.
13.1.2 Unified identification mark for the grade of steel
10. Stress Relieving Heat Treatment and Other (e.g. TL-EH620)
Heat Treatments
13.1.3 Name or initials to identify the steelworks
10.1 Steels approved by the procedures given in
Appendix D with respect to Heat Treatment are suitable

3-36 Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars C,D
13.1.4 Cast number/Heat number, plate number or following form of declaration will be accepted if stamped
equivalent identification mark or printed on each test certificate with the name of the
steelworks and signed by an authorised representative of
13.1.5 Delivery condition (N/NR, TM/TM+AcC/TM+DQ
the manufacturer:
or Q&T)
“We hereby certify that the material has been made by an

The entire markings are to be encircled with paint or
approved process and has been satisfactorily tested in
otherwise marked so as to be easily recognised. Steels
which have been specially approved by TL and which accordance with the Rules of TL”.
differ from these requirements are to have the letter “S”

after the identification mark (e.g. TL-EH620S)
D. Steels for Boilers and Pressure Vessels
14. Documentation of Inspection Tests
1. Scope
14.1 The Surveyor is to be supplied with two copies,
of the test certificates or shipping statements for all
These Rules apply to flat products made from
accepted materials. In addition to the description,
high-temperature ferritic steels, which are intended for
dimensions, etc., of the material, the following particulars
the manufacture of boilers, pressure vessels and
are to be included:
process equipment.
a) Purchaser's order number

2. Approved Steel Grades
b) Identification of the cast and piece

The materials listed below may be used:
c) Manufacturer’s identification
2.1 Flat products made of steels used for pressure
d) Identification of the grade of steel vessels conforming to EN 10028-2 "Alloyed and

Unalloyed High Temperature Steels".
e) Chemical analysis, Ceq, CET or Pcm value

2.2 Flat products made of steels used for pressure
f) Delivery condition with heat treatment vessels conforming to EN 10028-3, "Weldable fine-
temperatures grained structural steels, normalized".
2.3 Flat products made of TL-steels used for

g) Mechanical properties test results, including
pressure vessels according to Table 3.15 and 3.16. For
traceable test identification
the 0.2 % proof stress at elevated temperatures, Table
3.17 applies.
h) Surface quality and inspection results
2.4 Flat products made of other steels, provided

i) UT result, where applicable
that their suitability for the intended purpose and their
properties have been proved to TL. For this, the following
14.2 Before the test certificates are signed by the
requirements are to be satisfied:
Surveyor, the steelmaker is required to provide a written
declaration stating that the material has been made by
2.4.1 The elongation (A) shall have the minimum
an approved process, and that it has been subjected to
values which characterize the grade of steel, as specified
and has withstood satisfactorily the required tests in the
in the TL report, but is to be not less than 16 %.
presence of the Surveyor, or an authorised deputy. The
D Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars 3- 37
Table 3.15 Mechanical and technological properties of flat products made of TL-steels used for pressure
vessels (1)
Yield strength Notched bar impact energy

Normal Tensile Elongation A
ReH and Rp0.2
Steel grade delivery strength [%]
respectvely Test temp. KV [J] min.
Rm [N/mm ]
2
condition min.
[N/mm ] min.
2
[°C] transv.
TL-P235 W N 235 360 ÷ 480 25 0 34
TL-P265 W N 265 410 ÷ 530 23 0 34
TL-P295 W N 295 460 ÷ 580 22 0 34
TL-P355 W N 355 510 ÷ 650 21 0 34
(1) N = Normalized
Table 3.16 Chemical composition of TL steels used for pressure vessels
Steel Chemical composition [%]

grade C Si Mn P S Aℓtop Cr Mo
All ≤ 0.23 ≤ 0.55 0.60 - 1.70 ≤ 0.025 ≤ 0.015 ≥ 0.020 ≤ 0.30 ≤ 0.08
Table 3.17 0.2% Proof stress at elevated temperatures for flat products made of TL steels used for
pressurevessels
Rp0.2 – Yield strength [N/mm ] min.

2
Steel grade Temperature [°C]

50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
TL-P235 W 227 214 198 182 167 153 142 133
TL-P265 W 256 241 223 205 188 173 160 150
TL-P295 W 285 268 249 228 209 192 178 167
TL-P355 W 343 323 299 275 252 232 214 202
2.4.2 The impact energy is to meet or exceed the elevated temperature is to be verified by the
requirements of EN 10028-2 and -3 respectively for flat manufacturer if they are different from EN-10028-2, see
products of the same strength, see Table 3.15. In the case Table 3.17.
of plates to be used for shell rings and heads, the

manufacturer and the steel user is to ensure that the values
The products is to be delivered in the heat-treated

2.4.3 required for the final condition can be complied
conditions specified in the standards and/or in the
with.
expert's report, unless they are to be further processed at
elevated temperature.
2.4.4 Proof of weldability is to be furnished by the
manufacturer. Details of preheating, temperature control 4. Dimensions, Dimensional and Geometrical
during welding and heat treatment after welding is to be Tolerances
furnished by the manufacturer.
The yield strength at elevated temperature and, where A.6 applies if lower minus tolerances are required for
necessary, the long-time rupture stress properties at technical reasons, this is to be stated in the order.

3-38 Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars D,E
5. Testing tested using Charpy V-notch specimens at the test

temperature of 0 °C. The specimens is to be taken from
The following tests are to be performed: the products transverse to the direction of rolling. The
number of sets (each of 3 specimens) required for this
5.1 Testing of chemical composition
purpose is to be determined in the same way as the
number of tensile test specimens prescribed in 5.2.
The manufacturer is to determine the chemical com-
position of each heat and issue a relevant certificate.
The test temperatures for flat products complying with
EN 10025 are given in the standard. For other steels as
5.2 Tensile test
per 2.4, the test temperature will be stipulated in the TL
approval.
The mechanical properties are to be verified by tensile
testing. Test specimens is to be taken from the products
5.5 Testing of surface finish and dimensions
transverse to the direction of rolling in the following
quantity:
The surface finish and dimensions of all products are to
be checked by the manufacturer. The products are also
5.2.1 For sheet and plate, the specimens is to be
to be submitted to the Surveyor for final inspection; as
taken as follows:
far as possible, the undersides of the products are to be
inspected at the same time.
- Unalloyed steel sheet ≤ 50 mm thick:
one specimen from one end of each rolled length
6. Marking
- Unalloyed steel plate > 50 mm thick:

The manufacturer is to mark the products in the pre-
one specimen from one end if the rolled length is
scribed manner, see EN 10028-1. In the case of plates
≤ 15 m, one specimen from each end if the rolled
which are not supplied in bundles, the marking is to be
length is > 15 m.
applied 200 to 400 mm from the bottom end in such a
way that, looked at from the bottom end of the plate, the
- Alloy steels with rolled length ≤ 7 m:
characters are upright and therefore indicate the
one specimen from one end,
direction of rolling.
- Alloy steels with rolled length > 7 m:

one specimen from each end
E. Steels for Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases
In Bulk And Ships Using Gases Or Other
5.2.2 For sheets made from hot-rolled wide strip, at
Low-Flashpoint Fuels
least one specimen shall be taken from the outer end of
each coil.
1. Scope
5.3 Tensile test at elevated temperature

1.1 This sub-section gives additional requirements
to the ones prescribed in Part C, Chapter 10 – Liquefied
The 0.2 % proof stress is to be verified at elevated
Gas Tankers or Part D, Chapter 78 – Rules for
temperature. A tensile test at elevated temperature shall
Classification of Ships Using Gases or Other
be performed for each heat. The test temperature is to
Low-flashpoint Fuel.
be 300 °C, unless no other temperature is specified in
the order.
1.2 The manufacture, testing, inspection and
documentation shall be in accordance with the general
5.4 Notched bar impact test
practice of TL.
All products with thicknesses ≥ 6 mm is to be impact

E Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars 3- 39
2. Material Requirements
In addition to Part C, Chapter 10 Table 6.1 or Part D, Chapter 78 Table 7.1 for design temperature not lower than 0°C, the
following applies.
Table 3.18 Plates, pipes (seamless and welded), sections and forgings for cargo tanks, fuel tanks and
process pressure vessels for design temperatures not lower than 0°C.
CHARPY V-NOTCH IMPACT TEST

Test temperature Thickness t [mm] Test temperature [°C]
40 < t ≤ 50 (1) - 20 (2)
40 < t ≤ 50 (1) - 30 (3)
Notes:
(1) A further set of impact test at mid thickness for products with t>40mm is required except rolled steels specified in
TL-R W11 or W16.
(2) Applies to type C independent tanks and process pressure vessels. In addition, post-weld stress relief heat treatment
shall be performed. Exemption to post-weld stress relief heat treatment based on alternative approach (e.g.
Engineering Critical Assessment) shall be approved by TL or shall be to recognized standards.
(3) Applies to cargo tank or fuel tank other than type C.
In addition to Part C, Chapter 10 Table 6.2 or Part D, Chapter 78 Table 7.2, the following applies:
Table 3.19a Plates, sections and forgings for cargo tanks, fuel tanks, secondary barriers and
process pressure vessels for design temperatures below 0°C and strictly down to – 10°C

5°C below design temperature
40 < t ≤ 50 (1) or –20°C, whichever is lower
(2)
25 °C below design
40 < t ≤ 45 (1)
temperature(3)
30 °C below design
45 < t ≤ 50 (1)
temperature (3)
Notes:
TL-R W11 or W16.
(2) Applies to type C independent tanks and process pressure vessels. In addition, post-weld stress relief heat treatment
shall be performed. Exemption to post-weld stress relief heat treatment based on alternative approach (e.g.
Engineering Critical Assessment) shall be approved by TL or shall be to recognized standards.

3-40 Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars E,F
Table 3.19b Plates, sections and forgings for cargo tanks, fuel tanks, secondary barriers and process
pressure vessels for design temperatures below -10°C and down to -55°C

5°C below design temperature
40 < t ≤ 50 (1) or –20°C, whichever is lower
(2)
25 °C below design
40 < t ≤ 45 (1)
temperature(3)
30 °C below design
45 < t ≤ 50 (1)
temperature (3)
Notes:
TL-R W11 or W16.
(2) Part C, Chapter 10 item 6.6.2.2 applies with regards to post-weld stress relief heat treatment. Exemption to post-weld
stress relief heat treatment based on alternative approach (e.g. Engineering Critical Assessment) shall be approved by
TL or shall be to recognized standards.
In addition to Part C, Chapter 10 Table 6.3 or Part D, Chapter 78 Table 7.3, the following applies:
Table 3.20 Plates, sections and forgings for cargo tanks, fuel tanks, secondary barriers and process
pressure vessels for design temperatures below – 55°C and down to – 165°C

Material thickness Test temperature
40 < t ≤ 45 mm 25°C below design temperature
45 < t ≤ 50 mm 30°C below design temperature

TL-R W11 or W16.
F. Stainless Steels e.g. by welding, the required chemical stability in

relation to the respective cargo or operating fluid is
1. Scope ensured.
These Rules are applicable to flat products, sections 2.2 In the light of 2.1 and 2.2 above, suitable steels
and bars made of stainless steels which are intended for may be selected e.g. in accordance with EN 10088
the fabrication of cargo tanks of chemical tankers, relating to stainless steels, where the products are not
pressure vessels and other vessels, for which chemical required to be supplied in accordance with a
stability in relation to the cargo or operating fluid is specification which has been examined by TL.
required, and also for sleeves of rudderstocks, rudder
pintles, propeller shafts etc. which are required to be 2.3 TL reserves the right to demand an approval
seawater resistant. test for the grade of steel in question.
2. Selection of Steels 3. Condition of Supply and Heat Treatment
2.1 Steels are to be selected in accordance with the All products are to be presented in the heat-treated
operator's list of cargoes, which provides information on condition appropriate to the material, i.e. ferritic steels
the nature of the substances to be transported or stored. are to be annealed or quenched and tempered, while
austenitic and austenitic-ferritic steels are to be solu-
Furthermore, steels are to be selected in such a way tion-treated.
that also depending upon their further processing,

F Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars 3- 41
4. Dimensional Tolerances 7.2 Testing of resistance to intercrystalline

corrosion
Unless otherwise stipulated in the order specification,
plates are to be supplied in accordance with A.6. For all All products are to be tested for resistance to
other products the values stated in the relevant intercrystalline corrosion. For this purpose, at least 2
standards is to apply. specimens are to be taken from each heat. The test is
to be performed in accordance with EN ISO 3651-2 on
5. General Condition of Products specimens in the following condition:
The provisions of A.5. are to apply. Surface defects may - Stabilized steels and steels with a carbon
generally only be repaired by grinding. content ≤ 0.03 %: sensitized (annealed at
700°C for 30 minutes and quenched in water)
In doing so, the relevant minus tolerance is not to be
exceeded at any point. - All other steels: in the condition in which they
are supplied
6. Requirements Applicable to Material
Properties
7.3 Tensile test
6.1 Chemical composition

7.3.1 At least one tensile test specimen is to be taken
from each test batch and tested. A test batch comprises:
6.1.1 The limit values for the chemical composition
stated in the standards or in the specifications approved
by TL are to apply. - Plates > 20 mm thick: the rolled length
- Plates ≤ 20 mm thick: max. 40 rolled plates of

6.1.2 For welded structures which cannot be heat
approximately the same thickness (deviation
treated after welding, only steels which are resistant to
max. 20 %) originating from the same heat and
intercrystalline corrosion in this condition may be used,
the same heat treatment batch with a total
e.g. Ti or Nb stabilized austenitic steels or steels with
weight not exceeding 30 t.
carbon contents of C ≤ 0.03 %.
6.2 Mechanical properties - Strip and plates taken there from: one specimen
each from the beginning of the coil.
The requirements applicable to the mechanical proper-

ties which are stated in the recognized standard or the - All other product shapes: 5000 kg. for products
approved material specification is to be verified during of the same shape originating from the same
testing. heat and the same heat treatment batch
6.3 Impact energy 7.3.2 In the case of plates and wide flats with a width
of ≥ 600 mm, the specimens shall lie in the transverse
The requirements applicable to the impact energy which direction. For all other product shapes they may lie in the
are stated in the recognized standard or the approved longitudinal or transverse directions.
material specification is to be satisfied.
7. Testing
7.4.1 Unless otherwise required by TL or stipulated in

The following tests are to be performed:
the order, a notched bar impact test with Charpy V-notch
7.1 Testing of chemical composition specimens is required for
The manufacturer is to determine the chemical com- - Flat products with a thickness > 20 mm
position of each heat and issue a relevant certificate.

3-42 Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars F,G
properties of the base material are preserved after

- Rods and bars with diameters or thicknesses > cladding.
50 mm
3. Suitable Materials
- Flat products made of austenitic-ferritic steels

Steels conforming to B. and D. are to be used as base
with thicknesses ≥ 6 mm
materials. The stainless steels specified in F. and other
materials approved by TL for the purpose may be used
7.4.2 If the products are used for operating
as cladding materials.
temperatures below -10°C, the impact test temperature
is to be agreed with TL.
4. Method of Manufacture and Condition of
Supply
4.1 Cladding may be performed by rolling or
The surface finish and dimensions of all products are to explosive cladding or by a combination of the two
be checked by the manufacturer. The products are also methods.
to be submitted to the Surveyor for final testing. In the
case of flat products, the underside is also to be 4.2 Plates clad with austenitic materials is normally
inspected as far as possible. to be supplied in the as rolled condition. Where heat
treatment is required in special cases, this is governed by
7.6 Testing for use of correct material the base material. However, the treatment is not to impair
either the chemical stability or the bonding of the
The manufacturer shall test the products before delivery cladding material. The type of heat treatment is to be
by appropriate methods as to whether the correct notified to TL.
material has been used and shall confirm this in the
acceptance test certificate. 5. Dimensions and Tolerances
7.7 Other tests 5.1 The nominal thickness of the cladding material
shall be at least 2 mm. Where no closer thickness
If there are special requirements regarding resistance to tolerances are specified in the order, the minus toler-
pitting or crevice corrosion, appropriate corrosion tests ances for the thickness shall be as shown in Table 3.22.
are to be performed, e.g. to ASTM-G48. The scope of
these tests will be determined by TL from case to case. Table 3.22 Minus tolerances in relation to the
thickness of the cladding material
G. Clad Steel Plates

Nominal thickness Minus tolerance
[mm] [mm]
1. Scope
2.0 ≤ t < 2.5 -0.20
These Rules are applicable to steel plates clad with 2.5 ≤ t < 3.0 -0.25
cladding materials made of stainless steels and intended 3.0 ≤ t < 3.5 -0.35
for the manufacture of containers and tanks, e. g. for
3.5 ≤ t < 4.0 -0.45
chemical tankers. It may be agreed to apply these rules
t ≥ 4.0 -0.50
to plate clad with other materials, e. g. aluminium or
copper-nickel alloys.
5.2 The tolerances for the base materials are to be
2. Suitability of Cladding Process governed by the requirements for the respective steel
grades and product shapes.
The manufacturer shall demonstrate by means of an

initial test of product suitability that the clad products
satisfy the requirements stated in 8. and the required

G Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars 3- 43
6. Surface Finish 7.3.5 For each repair weld the manufacturer is to give
the Surveyor a report stating the dimensions and location
6.1 The cladding materials are to have a smooth of the defects, the details of the welding technique used,
surface consistent with their purpose. The surface is to the nature of any heat treatment applied and the results
be free from scale, impurities, annealing colour and such of the test.
defects as may impair the manufacturing processes
applied to the material, its application or its chemical 8. Requirements Applicable to the Material
stability. The surface finish of the base material is to Properties
comply with A.5. On the cladding material, the total
surface area of all defects, with the exception of shallow The clad steels are to satisfy the following requirements.
defects as per 7.1, shall not exceed 20 % of the surface
area of the cladding. 8.1 Elongation
7. Repair of Defects In the case of clad steels where the elongation of the
cladding material is less than that of the base material,
7.1 Shallow defects in the cladding material, e.g. the cladding material is to attain an elongation A5 of at
impressions, grooves and scratches, are to be removed least 12 % in a tensile test after the base metal has been
by grinding within the tolerance specified in 5. removed by machining.
7.2 In general points where bonding has not 8.2 Shear strength
2
occurred up to an area of 50 cm may be tolerated,
except where the purchaser requires that certain areas of The bond between the base and cladding materials are
the plate be repaired. to be adequate to ensure that the cladding material
cannot break away from the base material when proper
7.3 Deep defects in the cladding material which
manufacturing processes or service loads are applied. In
cannot be removed by grinding and lack of bonding in
the case of cladding materials with a tensile strength of
2
excess of 50 cm may be repaired by welding provided 2
< 280 N/mm , the shear strength is to be at least 50 % of
that the defects are isolated and separated from each
the minimum tensile strength of the cladding material and
2
other, do not exceed 1200 cm in area and do not total
for all other cladding materials it shall be not less than
more than 5 % of the clad surface. Welding is to be 2
140 N/mm , irrespective of the direction of testing, unless
subject to the following requirements:
otherwise agreed in the order.
7.3.1 All welds is to be made by qualified welders

8.3 Bonding
using a technique approved by TL.
The proportion of bonded surface is to be at least 95 %,

7.3.2 The welds are to be free from cracks, lack of
and the area of isolated points where bonding has not
fusion, undercuts, slag and other defects liable to impair 2
occurred is not to exceed 50 cm . For clad steels which
the characteristics of the cladding.
are severely stressed during processing, e.g. in the
manufacture of dished ends, or while in use, e.g. in
7.3.3 After welding, the repaired defect is to be
tubesheets, it may be necessary for the purchaser to
ground flush with the plate. Welding is to be followed by
impose more stringent requirements.
heat treatment if this was specified by the procedure
approval test or if called for in the order.
8.4 Mechanical properties
7.3.4 After final machining, the plates are to be

When subjected to the tensile test, the clad plate shall
submitted to the Surveyor for final testing, and a suitable
satisfy at least the following requirements:
non-destructive test technique, e.g. dye penetrant
σ G ⋅ SG + σ A ⋅ S A
inspection, is to be used to prove that the repairs are free σ PL =
SPL
from defects.

3-44 Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars G
σ = Specified minimum value of tensile strength or 9.1 Test of chemical composition

2
yield strength or 0.2 % proof stress [N/mm ],
S = Nominal thickness [mm] position of each heat of base and cladding material and
is to issue a relevant certificate.
G = Base material
9.2 Test of resistance to intercrystalline corro-
A = Cladding material sion
PL = Clad steel In the case of austenitic and austenitic-ferritic cladding

materials, the resistance to intercrystalline corrosion is to
If the tensile test gives a lower value than that calculated be verified for each test batch. For this purpose, those
by the formula, the requirements applicable to the base plates may be grouped together into a test batch which
material may be verified by means of specimens from have been clad in the same manufacturing cycle with
which the cladding material has been removed by cladding materials originating from the same heat. Under
machining.
test, the clad side is to be subjected to tensile stress.
The elongation specified for the base material concerned

9.3 Tensile test
is to be verified by tests performed on clad specimens.
The tensile test shall be performed on a transverse

8.5 Technological properties
specimen from each test batch. Unless otherwise
agreed, the cladding material is to be left on the test
When subjected to the side bend test, the clad plate is to
specimen. The gauge marks is to be applied to the base
be capable of being bent through 180° over a mandrel
material side.
with a diameter equal to four times the thickness of the
specimen without separation of the cladding material or
9.4 Shear test
formation of incipient cracks.
From each test batch a specimen is to be taken with its

Larger bending mandrel diameters may be agreed for
axis transverse to the rolling direction and this is to be
other cladding materials, e.g. aluminium.
subjected to the shear test.
8.6 Impact energy

The test shall be performed in accordance with a rec-
The requirements applicable to the base material are to ognized standard, e.g.. ASTM A 264.
be capable of being satisfied after cladding has been

9.5 Side bend test
carried out.
From each test batch a specimen is to be taken with its

8.7 Resistance to intercrystalline corrosion
axis transverse to the rolling direction and this is to be
For austenitic or austenitic-ferritic cladding materials, the subjected to the side bend test.
requirements applicable to the relevant grade of steel is

to be satisfied. 9.6 Notched bar impact test
9. Testing The notched bar impact test is to be performed in cases

where it is specified for the base material. The number of
The scope of the tests and the number and location of specimens, their orientation and the test temperature are
the test specimens are determined by the base material. subject to the same conditions as apply to the base
The following tests are to be performed. material.

G,H Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars 3- 45
9.7 Test of surface finish and dimensions steels are specified, Z 25 for normal ship applications
and Z 35 for more severe applications.
The surface finish and dimensions of all plates are to be
checked by the manufacturer and the thickness of the Through thickness properties are characterised by
cladding is to be measured at the edges and in the specified values for reduction of area in a through
middle of the plate. All plates is to be submitted to the thickness tensile test.
Surveyor for final testing and verification of the di-
mensions. 2. Manufacture
9.8 Non-destructive testing All the materials are to be manufactured at works

approved by TL for “Z” quality steels.
To ascertain the quality of the bond between the base
and cladding materials, the manufacturer shall carry out The approval should follow the procedure given in
100 % ultrasonic testing of the surfaces and edges of all Appendix A but take into account the improved
plates. steelmaking techniques of calcium treatment, vacuum

degassing and argon stirring as well as the control of
10. Marking centre-line segregation during continuous casting.
All plates are to be marked as follows: 3. Chemical Composition
- Manufacturer's mark, In addition to the requirements of the appropriate steel

specification B. and C. the maximum sulphur content is
- Abbreviated steel grade designation or material to be 0.008 % determined by the ladle analysis.
number of base and cladding material,

4. Test Procedure
- Heat numbers of base and cladding material,

In addition to the requirements of the appropriate steel
- Thickness of base and cladding material, specification B. and C. preparation of specimens and
testing procedures are to be as follows.
- Specimen no.
4.1 Test sampling
H. Steels with Specified Minimum through For plates and wide flats, one test sample is to be taken
Thickness Properties close to the longitudinal centreline of one end of each

rolled piece representing the batch. See Table 3.23 and
1. Scope Figure 3.9.
These rules are supplementary those given in B. and C. 4.2 Number of tensile test specimens
for material with a thickness greater than or equal to 15

mm and intended to have a specified minimum ductility in The test sample must be large enough to accommodate
the through thickness or “Z” direction (see Figure 3.8). the preparation of 6 specimens. 3 test specimens are to
Products with a thickness less than 15 mm may be be prepared while the rest of the sample remains for
included at the discretion of TL. possible retest.
The use of such material, known as “Z” quality steel, is 4.3 Tensile test specimen
recommended for structural details subject to strains in

the through thickness direction to minimise the possibility 4.3.1 Cylindrical tensile test specimens are to be
of lamellar tearing during fabrication. Two “Z” quality used having the following dimensions:

3-46 Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars H
Diameter: Parallel length: not less than 2 d.

- d = 6 mm for product thickness between 15 mm
Other dimensions are to be in accordance with
and 25 mm.
recognized standards.
- d = 10 mm for product thickness exceeding 25 mm.
Figure 3.8 Schematic of testing directions
Table 3.23 Batch size dependent on product and sulphur content
Product S > 0.005% S ≤ 0.005%

Plates Each piece (parent plate) Maximum 50 t of products
Wide flats of nominal Maximum 10 t of products of the same cast, thickness of the same cast,
thickness ≤ 25 mm and heat treatment thickness and heat
Wide flats of nominal Maximum 20 t of products of the same cast, thickness treatment
thickness > 25 mm and heat treatment
Figure 3.9 Plate and wide flat sampling position

H,I Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars 3- 47
4.3.2 The preparation of specimens are indicated in 5. Retest Procedure

Figure 3.10 and 3.11.
Figure 3.12 shows the three cases where a retest
situation is permitted. In these instances three more
tensile tests are to be taken from the remaining test
sample. The average of all 6 tensile tests is to be greater
than the required minimum average with no greater than
two results below the minimum average.
In the case of failure after retest, either the batch

represented by the piece is rejected or each piece within
the batch is required to be tested.
6. Ultrasonic Tests
Figure 3.10 Normal test specimen
Ultrasonic testing is required and is to be performed in
accordance with either EN 10160 Level S1/E1 or ASTM
A 578/A578M Level C.
Ultrasonic testing should be carried out on each piece in

the final supply condition and with a probe frequency of 4
MHz.
7. Marking
Products complying with these rules are to be marked in

Figure 3.11 Welded test specimen accordance with the appropriate steel requirement B or C
and in addition with the notation Z25 or Z35 added to the
4.4 Tensile test results material grade designation, e.g. TL-E32 Z35.
The test is considered invalid and further replacement 8. Certification

test is required if the fracture occurs in the weld or heat
affected zone. The following information is required to be included on
the certificate in addition to the appropriate steel
The minimum average value for the reduction of area of requirement given in B or C:
at least 3 tensile test specimens taken in the through
thickness direction must be that shown for the Through thickness reduction in area (%)
appropriate grade given in Table 3.24. Only one
individual value may be below the minimum average but - Steel grade with Z25 or Z35 notation.
not less than minimum individual value shown for the
appropriate grade. See Figure 3.12.
I. Unalloyed Steels for Welded Structures
A value less than the minimum individual value is a
cause for rejection. 1. Scope
Table 3.24 Reduction of area acceptable values

1.1 These Rules apply to flat products, sections and
bars made from unalloyed steels with minimum nominal
Grade Z 25 Z 35 2
yield strengths up to and including 355 N/mm which are
Minimum average 25 % 35 % to be used for welded structures, e.g. in machinery
Minimum individual 15 % 25 % manufacture or in shipbuilding.

3-48 Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars I
Figure 3.12 Diagram showing acceptance/rejection and retest criteria
1.2 Rolled bars for the manufacture of 2.3 Other steels after their suitability has been
shafts, shanks, studs, bolts and other rotating parts are determined by TL, provided that they satisfy the fol-
governed by B. lowing minimum requirements:
2. Suitable Steels 2.3.1 The chemical composition [%] of the ladle

analysis shall not exceed the following limit values:
The following steels may be used with the
requirements laid down in the relevant standards:
C Mn Si P S Cu Cr Ni Mo
2.1 Steels conforming to EN 10025, EN 10210 0.22 1.70 0.55 0.040 0.040 0.30 0.20 0.40 0.08
and EN 10219 grades as follows:

In addition, fine grain treated structural steels shall have
- S235: all grades an adequate content of grain refining elements, e.g. Al,
Nb, V or Ti.
Note:
The grades S235 JR and S235 JR G1 according to EN 2.3.2 The elongation A5 shall be at least 20 % in
10025 : 1990 + A1 : 1993 are excluded from application. tests with longitudinal specimens and 18 % in tests with
transverse specimens.
- S275: all grades
2.3.3 For fine grain treated structural steels,
- S355: all grades an impact energy of not less than 27 J (average value)
shall be achieved in tests with longitudinal Charpy V-
2.2 Weldable fine-grained structural steels notch specimens at a testing temperature of
conforming to EN 10025-3, in the grades:
- 20°C, for products supplied in normalised,
- S275 N, S 275 NL, S355 N, S355 NL normalising rolled or thermo-mechanically
(normalised or normalising rolled) rolled condition
and conforming to EN 10025-4 in the grades: 0 °C, for products supplied in as rolled condition.
- S275 M, S275 ML, S355 M, S355 ML 3. Condition of Supply and Heat Treatment
(thermo-mechanically rolled)
Flat products made of fine grain treated
structural steels are to be supplied in normalised, condition. For all other products, the data in the
normalising rolled or thermo-mechanically rolled standards apply, unless otherwise specified in the order.

I,J Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars 3- 49
4. Dimensions, Dimensional and Geometrical been agreed, a set of test specimens shall be taken from
Tolerances the thickest piece in the test batch in accordance with
5.2.1.
A.6. applies, with the following addition:
Testing shall be performed for products with a thick-

For the minus tolerance applicable to the nominal
ness of ≥ 6 mm.
thickness, the values stated Table 3.2 apply to plates,
strips and wide flats, unless otherwise specified in the
purchase order.
The surface finish and dimensions of all products shall

5. Testing and Scope of Tests
be checked by the manufacturers. At the request of the
The following tests shall be performed: Surveyor, the products shall then be submitted to him for
final inspection.
5.1 Test of chemical composition
The manufacturer shall determine the chemical com- J. Requirements for Use of Extremely Thick
position of each heat and shall issue a relevant Steel Plates on Container Carriers
certificate.
1. Application of TL-EH47 Steel Plates

5.2 Tensile test
1.1. Scope
5.2.1 The mechanical properties shall be verified by
tensile test.
1.1.1 General
For the purpose of taking specimens, products of the

1.1.1.1 This subsection defines the requirements on
same shape shall be formed according to heat and within
TL- EH47 steels and brittle crack arrest steels as
the thickness ranges relevant to the yield strength into
required by TL- R S33.
test batches of not more than 40 t. A tensile test
specimen shall be taken from the thickest item in the test
1.1.1.2 Unless otherwise specified in this subsection,
batch. In the case of plates and wide flats with a width of
TL- R W 11 is to be followed.
≥ 600 mm, this shall be positioned transverse to the
rolling direction. In other products, the test specimen
1.1.2 TL- EH47 steels
may lie transverse or parallel to the rolling direction.
1.2.1 Steel plates designated as TL-EH47, refer to

5.2.2 Where plates are to be tested individually,
steel plates with a specified minimum yield point of 460
this shall be specially stipulated in the order. 2
N/mm .

1.2.2 The TL-EH47 steel can be applied to
longitudinal structural members in the upper deck region
All products made of fine grain treated steels shall be
of container carriers (such as hatch side coaming, hatch
subjected to notched bar impact tests performed with
coaming top and the attached longitudinals). Special
longitudinal Charpy V-notch specimens at the test
consideration is to be given to the application of TL-EH47
temperatures specified in the standards or in 2.3.3.
steel plate for other hull structures.
Where, in the case of plates, individual testing has not

3-50 Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars J
1.1.2.3 This article gives the requirements for TL-EH accordance with the procedure approved by TL. Test
47 steels in thickness greater than 50mm and not specimens are to be taken from each piece (means “the
greater than 100 mm intended for the upper deck region rolled product from a single slab or ingot if this is rolled
of container carriers. For TL-EH 47 steels outside scope directly into plates” as defined in TL- R W11), unless
of said thickness range, special consideration is to be otherwise agreed by TL.
given by TL.
1.3. Manufacturing Approval Scheme
1.1.3 Brittle crack arrest steels
1.3.1 TL- EH 47 steels

1.1.3.1 The brittle crack designation can be assigned to
TL-EH 36 and TL-EH 40 steels specified in TL- R W11
Manufacturing approval scheme for TL- EH47 steels is to
and TL-EH 47 steels specified in this subsection, which
be in accordance with Annex 2 of this section.
meet the additional brittle crack arrest requirements and
properties defined in this subsection.
1.1.3.2 The application of brittle crack arrest steels is to

Manufacturing approval scheme for brittle crack arrest
comply with TL- R S33, which covers longitudinal
steels is to be in accordance with Annex 3 of this section.
structural members in the upper deck region of container
carriers (such as hatch side coaming, upper deck, hatch
1.4. Welding Procedure Qualification Test
coaming top and the attached longitudinals, etc.).

1.1.3.3 The thickness range of brittle crack arrest steels
is over 50 mm and not greater than 100mm as specified
1.4.1.1 General
in Table 3.27 of this subsection.
Approval test items, test methods and acceptance

1.2. Material Specifications
criteria not specified in this subsection are to be in
accordance with the TLs procedures.
1.2.1 TL- EH 47 steels
1.4.1.2 Approval range

Material specifications for TL-EH47 steels are specified
in Table 3.25 and Table 3.26.
Chapter 3 Welding Section 12.F is to be followed for
approval range.
1.4.1.3 Impact test

1.2.2.1 Brittle crack arrest steels are defined as steel
plate with the specified brittle crack arrest properties
Chapter 3 Welding Section 12.F is to be followed for
measured by either the brittle crack arrest toughness Kca
impact test. 64J at -20°C is to be satisfied.
or Crack Arrest Temperature (CAT).
1.4.1.4 Hardness
1.2.2.2 In addition to the required mechanical
properties of TL- R W11 for TL- EH36 and TL- EH40 and
HV10, as defined in Chapter 3 Welding Section 12.F, is
Table 3.26 of this subsection for TL- EH47, brittle crack
to be not more than 350. Measurement points are to
arrest steels are to comply the requirements specified in
include mid-thickness position in addition to the points
Table 3.27 and Table 3.28 of this subsection.
required by Chapter 3 Welding Section 12.F.
1.2.2.3 The brittle crack arrest properties specified in

Table 3.27 are to be evaluated for the products in

J Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars 3- 51
Table 3.25 Chemical composition and deoxidation practice for TL- EH 47 steels without specified brittle
crack arrest properties
Grade TL- EH 47
Chemical Composition %
(ladle samples) (6) (7)
C max. 0.18
Mn 0.90 – 2.00
Si max. 0.55
P max. 0.020
S max. 0.020
Al (acid soluble min) 0.015 (1) (2)
Nb 0.02 – 0.05 (2) (3)
V 0.05 – 0.10 (2) (3)
Ti max. 0.02 (3)
Cu max. 0.35
Cr max. 0.25
Ni max. 1.0
Mo max. 0.08
Ceq max.(4) 0.49
Pcm max.(5) 0.22
Notes:
1. The total aluminium content may be determined instead of the acid soluble content. In such cases the total aluminium
content is to be not less than 0.020%.
2. The steel is to contain aluminium, niobium, vanadium or other suitable grain refining elements, either singly or in any
combination. When used singly the steel is to contain the specified minimum content of the grain refining element.
When used in combination, the specified minimum content of a fine graining element is not applicable.
3. The total niobium, vanadium and titanium content is not to exceed 0.12%.
4. The carbon equivalent Ceq value is to be calculated from the ladle analysis using the following formula:
C eq = C + + + (%)
6 5 15
5. Cold cracking susceptibility Pcm value is to be calculated using the following formula:
Si Mn Cu Ni Cr Mo V
Pcm = C + + + + + + + + 5B(%)
30 20 20 60 20 15 10
6. Where additions of any other element have been made as part of the steelmaking practice subject to approval by TL, the content
is to be indicated on product inspection certificate.
7. Variations in the specified chemical composition may be allowed subject to approval of TL.

Table 3.26 Conditions of supply, grade and mechanical properties for TL-EH47 steels
without specified brittle crack arrest properties (1)
Tensile test Impact test
Yield Average Impact Energy

Supply Tensile Test
Grade Strength Elongation (J) min.
condition Strength Temp.
2
(N/mm ) 2
(%) min o 50 < t ≤ 70 70 < t ≤ 85 85 < t ≤ 100
(N/mm ) ( C)
min. longitudinal longitudinal longitudinal
o
TMCP (2) TL-EH47 460 570-720 17 -40 C 53 64 75
t: thickness (mm)
Notes:
1. The additional requirements for TL- EH 47 steel with brittle crack arrest properties is specified in 2.2 of this
subsection.
2. Other conditions of supply are to be in accordance with TL procedures.
Table 3.27 Requirement of brittle crack arrest properties for brittle crack arrest steels
Brittle crack arrest properties (2) (6)

Suffix to the Thickness range
Brittle crack arrest toughness Crackm arrest temperature
steel grade (1) (mm) 3/2
Kca at - 10°C (N/mm ) (3) CAT (°C) (4)
BCA 1 50 < t ≤ 100 6,000 min. -10 or below
BCA 2 80 < t ≤ 100 (7) 8,000 min. (5)
t : thickness
Notes:
1. Suffix “BCA1” or “BCA2” is to be affixed to the steel grade designation (e.g.TL- EH40-BCA1,TL- EH47-BCA1, TL-
EH47-BCA2, etc.).
2. Brittle crack arrest properties for brittle crack arrest steels are to be verified by either the brittle crack arrest toughness Kca
or Crack Arrest Temperature (CAT).
3. Kca value is to be obtained by the brittle crack arrest test specified in Annex 4 of this section.
4. CAT is to be obtained by the test method specified in Annex 5 of this section.
5. Criterion of CAT for brittle crack arrest steels corresponding to Kca=8,000 N/mm3/2 is to be approved by the TL.
6. Where small-scale alternative tests are used for product testing (batch release testing), these test methods are to be
approved by TL.
7. Lower thicknesses may be approved at the discretion of TL.

Table 3.28 Chemical composition and deoxidation practice for brittle crack arrest steels
Grade TL-EH36-BCA TL-EH40-BCA TL- EH47-BCA

Chemical Composition % (1)(7)(8)
(ladle samples)
0.18 0.18
C max.
0.90-2.00 0.90-2.00
Mn
0.50 0.55
Si max.
0.020 0.020
P max.
0.020 0.020
S max.
0.015 (2) (3) 0.015 (2) (3)
Al (acid soluble min)
0.02-0.05 (3) (4) 0.02-0.05 (3) (4)
Nb
0.05-0.10 (3) (4) 0.05-0.10 (3) (4)
V
0.02 (4) 0.02 (4)
Ti max.
0.50 0.50
Cu max.
0.25 0.50
Cr max.
2.00 2.00
Ni max.
0.08 0.08
Mo max.
0.47 0.49 0.55
Ceq max.(5)
- 0.24
Pcm max.(6)
Notes:
1. Chemical composition of brittle crack arrest steels shall comply with Table 3.28 of this subsection, regardless of chemical
composition specified in TL- R W11 and Table 3.25 of this subsection.
2. The total aluminium content may be determined instead of the acid soluble content. In such cases the total aluminium
content is to be not less than 0.020%.
3. The steel is to contain aluminium, niobium, vanadium or other suitable grain refining elements, either singly or in any
combination. When used singly the steel is to contain the specified minimum content of the grain refining element.
When used in combination, the specified minimum content of a fine graining element is not applicable.
4. The total niobium, vanadium and titanium content is not to exceed 0.12%.
5. The carbon equivalent Ceq value is to be calculated from the ladle analysis using the following formula:
C eq = C + + + (%)
6 5 15
6. Cold cracking susceptibility Pcm value is to be calculated using the following formula:
Si Mn Cu Ni Cr Mo V
Pcm = C + + + + + + + + 5B(%)
30 20 20 60 20 15 10
7. Where additions of any other element have been made as part of the steelmaking practice subject to approval by TL, the content is
to be indicated on product inspection certificate.
8. Variations in the specified chemical composition may be allowed subject to approval of TL.

1.4.1.5 Tensile test 1.5.1.2 Short bead
Tensile strength in transverse tensile test is to be not less Short bead length for tack and repairs of welds by
2
than 570 N/mm . welding are not to be less than 50mm.
1.4.1.6 Brittle fracture initiation test In the case where Pcm is less than or equal to 0.19, 25
mm of short bead length may be adopted with approval
Deep notch test or CTOD test may be required. of the Class TL.
Test method and acceptance criteria are to be 1.5.1.3 Preheating

considered appropriate by TL.
Preheating is to be 50°C or over when air temperature is
1.4.2 Brittle crack arrest steels 5°C or below.
1.4.2.1 General In the case where Pcm is less than or equal to 0.19 and
the air temperature is below 5°C but above 0°C,
Where Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) for the alternative preheating requirements may be adopted with
non-BCA steels has been approved by TL, the said WPS approval of TL.
is applicable to the same welding procedure applied to
the same grade with suffix “BCA1” or “BCA2” specified in 1.5.1.4 Welding consumable
Table 3.27 of this subsection except high heat input
processes over 50kJ/cm. Approval procedure, approval test items, test methods
and acceptance criteria not specified in this subsection
The requirements for welding procedure qualification test are to be in accordance with TL- R W17.
for brittle crack arrest steels is to be in accordance with
the relevant requirements for each steel grade excluding Specifications of welding consumables for TL- EH47
suffix “BCA1” or “BCA2” specified in Table 3.27 of this steel plates are to be in accordance with Table 3.29.
subsection, except for 4.2.2 below.
Table 3.29 Mechanical properties for deposited
1.4.2.2 Hardness metal tests for welding consumables
For TL- EH47 steels with brittle crack arrest properties, Mechanical properties Impact test
HV10, as defined in Chapter 3 Welding Section 12.F, is
Average
to be not more than 380. Measurement points are to Yield Tensile Test
Elongation impact
include mid-thickness position in addition to the points strength strength temp.
(%) min. energy
required by Chapter 3 Welding Section 12.F. (N/mm )
2 2
(N/mm ) (°C)
(J) min.
min.
1.5. Production Welding
460 570-720 19 -20 64
Consumable tests for butt weld assemblies are to be in

1.5.1.1 Welder
accordance with Table 3.30.
Welders engaged in TL- EH47 welding work are to

possess welder’s qualifications specified in Chapter 3
Welding Section 3.

Table 3.30 Mechanical properties for butt weld 2.1.1.3 This rule defines the following methods to
tests for welding consumables apply to the extremely thick plates of container ships for
preventing the crack initiation and propagation:
Charpy V-notch impact
Tensile test - Non-Destructive Testing (NDT) during
Bend test
strength Test Average construction detailed in 2.2,
2 ratio:
(N/mm ) temp. absorbed
D/t
(°C) energy - Periodic NDT after delivery detailed in 2.3,
(J) min.
- Brittle crack arrest design detailed in 2.4.
570-720 4 -20 64
The application of the measures specified in 2.2, 2.3 and

2.4 is to be in accordance with Annex 1.
1.5.1.5 Others
2.1.1.4 This rule gives the basic concepts for

Special care is to be paid to the final welding so that application of extremely thick steel plates to longitudinal
harmful defects do not remain. structural members in the upper deck region.
Jig mountings are to be completely removed with no 2.1.1.5 For the application of this sub section, the upper
defects in general, otherwise the treatment of the deck region means the upper deck plating, hatch side
mounting is to be accepted by TL. coaming plating, hatch coaming top plating and their
attached longitudinals.
2.1.2 Steel Grade

Welding work (such as relevant welder’s qualification,
short bead, preheating, selection of welding consumable, 2.1.2.1 This subsection is to be applied when any of
etc.) for brittle crack arrest steels is to be in accordance TL-EH36, TL-EH40 and TL-EH47 steel plates are used
with the relevant requirements for each steel grade for the longitudinal structural members in the upper deck
excluding suffix “BCA1” or “BCA2” specified in Table region.
3.27 of this subsection.
Note:
2. Requirements for Use of Extremely Thick TL-EH36, TL-EH40 and TL-EH47 refers to the minimum
Steel Plates in Container Ships specified yield strength of steel 355, 390 and 460 N/mm2,
respectively as defined in TL- R W11 and TL- R W31.
2.1 Application
2.1.2.2 In case TL-EH47 steel plates are used for

2.1.1 General longitudinal structural members in the upper deck region
the steel plates are to be as specified in Table 3.26(TL- R
2.1.1.1 This subsection is to be complied with for W31).
container ships incorporating extremely thick steel plates
having steel grade and thickness in accordance with 2.1.3 Thickness
2.1.2 and 2.1.3 respectively.
2.1.3.1 For steel plates with thickness of over 50 mm
2.1.1.2 This rule identifies when measures for the and not greater than 100 mm, the measures for
prevention of brittle fracture of extremely thick steel prevention of brittle crack initiation and propagation
plates are required for longitudinal structural members. specified in 2.2, 2.3 and 2.4 are to be taken.

2.1.3.2 For steel plates with thickness exceeding 100

mm, appropriate measures for prevention of brittle crack
initiation and propagation are to be evaluated by TL on
a case by case basis.
2.1.4 Hull structures (for the purpose of design)
2.1.4.1 Material factor k
Material factors of TL-EH36 and TL-EH40 steels are to

be taken as 0.72 or 0.68 as respectively.
The material factor of TL-EH47 steel for the Figure 3.14 Upper Flange Longitudinal Structural
assessment of hull girder strength is to be taken as Members
k=0.62.
2.2.2 Acceptance criteria of UT
2.1.4.2 Fatigue assessment
2.2.2.1 Acceptance criteria of UT are to be in
The fatigue assessment of the longitudinal structural accordance with TL-R W33.
members is to be evaluated by TL on a case by case
basis. 2.2.2.2 The acceptance criteria may be adjusted under
consideration of the appertaining brittle crack initiation
2.1.4.3 Details of construction design prevention procedure and where this is more severe
than that found in TL-R W33, the UT procedure is to be
Special consideration is to be paid to the construction amended accordingly to a more severe sensitivity.
details where extremely thick steel plates are applied to

structural members such as connections between 2.3. Periodic NDT after delivery (Measure No.2
outfitting and hull structures. Connections details are to of Annex 1)
be in accordance with TL’s requirements.

Where periodic NDT after delivery is required, the NDT
2.2 Non-Destructive Testing during is to be in accordance with 2.3.1, 2.3.2 and 2.3.3.
construction (Measure No.1 of Annex 1)

2.3.1 General
Where non-destructive testing (NDT) during
construction is required in Annex 1, the NDT is to be in 2.3.1.1 The procedure of the NDT is to be in
accordance with 2.2.1 and 2.2.2. Enhanced NDT as accordance with TL-R W33, irrespective of the
specified in 2.4.3.1(e) is to be carried out in accordance applicability clause for new building in paragraph 1.1 of
with the appropriate standard. TL-R W33.
2.2.1 General 2.3.2 Timing of UT
2.2.1.1 Ultrasonic testing (UT) in accordance with TL-R 2.3.2.1 Where UT is carried out, the frequency of
W33 is to be carried out on all block-to-block butt joints survey is to be in accordance with requirements of TL.
of all upper flange longitudinal structural members in the

cargo hold region. Upper flange longitudinal structural 2.3.3 Acceptance criteria of UT
members include the topmost strakes of the inner

2.3.3.1 Where UT is carried out, acceptance criteria of
hull/bulkhead, the sheer strake, main deck, coaming
UT are to be in accordance with TL- R W33, irrespective
plate, coaming top plate and all attached longitudinal
of the applicability clause for new building in paragraph
stiffeners. These members are defined in Figure 3.14.
1.1 of TL-R W33.

2.4. Brittle crack arrest design (Measure No.3, 4 where the brittle crack initiates from any other
and 5 of Annex 1) weld (see the figure below for definition of other
welds) and propagates into the plate.
2.4.1 General
***: “Other weld” includes the following (refer to Fig.

2.4.1.1 The brittle crack arrest steel method detailed in
2.4 may be used when the measures No.3, 4 and 5 of 3.15):
Annex 1 are applied and the steel grade material of the

upper deck is not higher than TL-EH40. Otherwise other 1. Fillet weld between hatch side coaming plating,
means for preventing the crack initiation and including top plating, and longitudinals;
propagation shall be agreed with TL.
2. Fillet weld between hatch side coaming plating,
2.4.1.2 Measures for prevention of brittle crack including top plating and longitudinals, and
propagation, are to be taken within the cargo hold attachments. (e.g., Fillet weld between hatch side top
region. A brittle crack arrest design means a design plating and hatch cover pad plating.);
using these measures.
3. Fillet weld between hatch side coaming top plating and
2.4.1.3 The measures given in item 2.4 generally apply hatch side coaming plating;
to the block-to-block joints but it should be noted that

4. Fillet weld between hatch side coaming plating and
cracks can initiate and propagate away from such joints.
upper deck plating;
Therefore, appropriate measures should also be
considered for the cases specified in2.4.2.1 (b) (ii). 5. Fillet weld between upper deck plating and inner
hull/bulkheads;
2.4.1.4 Brittle crack arrest steels are defined in item 1
6. Fillet weld between upper deck plating and
(TL- R W31).
longitudinal; and
2.4.2 Functional requirements of brittle crack 7. Fillet weld between sheer strakes and upper deck
arrest design
plating.
2.4.2.1 The purpose of the brittle crack arrest design is Attachement

to arrest propagation of a crack at a proper position and (e.g ped plate)
to prevent large scale fracture of the hull girder.
(a) The locations of most concern for brittle crack

Attachement
initiation and propagation are the block-to-block
butt weld joints either on hatch side coaming or
on upper deck plating. Other locations in block
fabrication where joints are aligned may also
present higher opportunity for crack initiation and
propagation along butt weld joints.
(b) Both of the following cases are to be considered:
(i) Where the brittle crack runs straight along the

butt joint, and
(ii) Where the brittle crack initiates in the butt joint but Figure 3.15 Other Weld Areas
deviates away from the weld and into the plate, or

2.4.3 Concept examples of brittle crack arrest (e) The application of enhanced NDT particularly
design time of flight diffraction (TOFD) technique using stricter
defect acceptance in lieu of standard UT technique
2.4.3.1 The following are considered acceptable specified in 2.2 can be an alternative to (b), (c) and (d).
examples of measures that can be used on a brittle
crack arrest-design to prevent brittle crack propagations. 2.4.4 Selection of brittle crack arrest steels
The detail design arrangements are to be submitted to 2.4.4.1 The brittle crack arrest steels fitted in the
TL for their approval. Other measures may be upper deck region of container ships are to comply
considered and accepted for review by TL. with Table 3.31 where suffixes BCA1 and BCA2 are
defined in TL-R W31.
Brittle crack arrest design for 4.2.1(b)(ii):
2.4.4.2 The brittle crack arrest steel property is to be
(a) Brittle crack arresting steel is to be used for the selected for each individual structural member with
upper deck plating along the cargo hold region in a way thickness above 50 mm according to Table 3.31.
suitable to arrest a brittle crack initiating from the
coaming and propagating into the structure below. Table 3.31 Brittle crack arrest steel requirement in
function of structural members and thickness
Brittle crack arrest design for 4.2.1(b)(i):
Structural Brittle crack
Thickness
(b) Where the block to block butt welds of the Members arrest steel
(mm)
hatch side coaming and those of the upper deck are plating (*) requirement
shifted, this shift is to be greater than or equal to 300mm. Steel grade
Brittle crack arrest steel is to be provided for the hatch TL-EH36 or 40
Upper deck 50 < t ≤ 100
side coaming plating. with suffix
BCA1
(c) Where crack arrest holes are provided in way Steel grade
of the block-to-block butt welds at the region where TL-EH40 or 47
hatch side coaming weld meets the deck weld, the 50 < t ≤ 80
with suffix
fatigue strength of the lower end of the butt weld is to be Hatch coaming BCA1
assessed. Additional countermeasures are to be taken side Steel grade
for the possibility that a running brittle crack may deviate TL-EH40 or 47
from the weld line into upper deck or hatch side 80 < t ≤ 100
with suffix
coaming. These countermeasures are to include the BCA2
application of brittle crack arrest steel in hatch side (*) Excluding their attached longitudinals
coaming plating.
2.4.4.3 When brittle crack arrest steels as specified

(d) Where Arrest Insert Plates of brittle crack arrest
in Table 3.31 are used, the weld joints between the
steel or Weld Metal Inserts with high crack arrest
hatch coaming side and the upper deck are to be
toughness properties are provided in way of the
partial penetration weld details approved by TL.
block-to-block butt welds at the region where hatch side
coaming weld meets the deck weld, additional
In the vicinity of ship block joints, alternative weld
countermeasures are to be taken for the possibility that
details may be used for the deck and hatch coaming
a running brittle crack may deviate from the weld line
side connection provided additional means for
into upper deck or hatch side coaming. These
preventing the crack propagation are implemented
countermeasures are to include the application of brittle
and agreed by TL in this connection area.
crack arrest steel in hatch side coaming plating.

K Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars 3- 59
K. Approval of Manufacturing Scheme of

Hull Structural Steels
1. Approval of manufacturing scheme of semi

finished products for hull structural steels should be
according to Appendix A1 (TL- R W11).
2. Approval of manufacturing scheme of hull

structural steels should be according to Appendix A2
(TL- R W11).
3. Approval scheme for manufacturer of hull

structural steels intended for welding with high heat
input should according to Appendix B (TL- R W11).

3-60 Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars
Annex 1
Measures for Extremely Thick Steel Plates
The thickness and the yield strength shown in the following table apply to the hatch coaming top plating and side plating,
and are the controlling parameters for the application of the countermeasures given in 2.4.3.1. These controlling
parameters are not applicable for the upper deck.
If the as built thickness of the hatch coaming top plating and side plating is below the values contained in the table,
countermeasures are not necessary regardless of the thickness and yield strength of the upper deck.
Yield Strength Thickness Measures

2 Option
(kgf/mm ) (mm)
1 2 3+4 5
50 < t ≤ 85 - N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.

36
85 < t ≤ 100 - X N.A. N.A. N.A.
50 < t ≤ 85 - X N.A. N.A. N.A.
40 A X N.A. X X
85 < t ≤ 100
B X* N.A.** N.A. X
A X N.A. X X
47 (FCAW) 50 < t ≤ 100
B X* N.A.** N.A. X
47 (EGW) 50 < t ≤ 100 - X N.A. X X
“X” means “To be applied”.

“N.A.” means “Need not to be applied”.
“A”, “B”:.selectable options
*: See J.2.4.3.1 (e).

**: may be required at the discretion of TL.
Measures:
1 NDT other than visual inspection on all target block joints (during construction) See J.2.2
2 Periodic NDT other than visual inspection on all target block joints (after delivery) See J.2.3.
3 Brittle crack arrest design against straight propagation of brittle crack along weldline to be taken (during
construction) See J.2.4.3.1 (b), (c) and (d).
4 Brittle crack arrest design against deviation of brittle crack from weldline (during construction) See J.2.4.3.1 (a).
5 Brittle crack arrest design against propagation of cracks from other welds *** such as fillets and attachment welds,
as defined in item J.2.4.2.1 (b), (during construction) See J.2.4.3.1 (a).

Annex 2
Manufacturing Approval Scheme for TL- EH47 Steels
1. Scope The test method is to be in accordance with recognized

national standards such as JIS Z 3158-2016 or CB/T
1.1 This Annex specifies, as given in J.3.1 of this 4364-2013. Acceptance criteria are to be in accordance
section, the manufacturing approval scheme for TL- EH with TL’s practice.
47 grade steels.
(b) Brittle fracture initiation test
1.2 Unless otherwise specified in this Annex,
Appendix A2 of TL- R W11 is to be followed. Deep notch test or CTOD test is to be carried out. Test
method and results are to be considered appropriate by
2. Approval Tests TL.
2.1 Extent of the approval tests 2.2.3 Other tests
3.1 (c) and (d), Appendix A2 of TL- R W11 are not In addition to the requirement specified in 2.2.1 and 2.2.2
applied to manufacturing approval of TL- EH47 steels. above, the approval tests required for steels specified in
Appendix A2 of TL- R W11 are to be carried out.
2.2 Type of tests Additional tests may be required when deemed
necessary by TL.
2.2.1 Brittle fracture initiation test
Deep notch test or Crack Tip Opening Displacement

(CTOD) test is to be carried out. Test method is to be in
accordance with TL’s practice.
2.2.2 Weldability test
(a) Y-groove weld cracking test (Hydrogen crack

test)

Annex 3
Manufacturing Approval Scheme for Brittle Crack Arrest Steels
1. Scope arrest properties of the steels intended for approval

specified in 2.1 a).
1.1 This Annex specifies, as given in J.3.2 of this
section, the manufacturing approval scheme for brittle 3.2 Type of tests
crack arrest steels.
3.2.1 Brittle crack arrest tests are to be carried out in
1.2 Unless otherwise specified in this Annex, accordance with 3.3 of this Annex in addition to the
Appendix A2 of TL- R W11 and/or Annex 2 of this section approval tests specified in Appendix A2 of TL- R W11
are to be followed. and/or Annex 2 of this section.
2. Approval Application 3.2.2 In the case of applying for addition of the

specified brittle crack arrest properties for TL- EH36, TL-
2.1 Documents to be submitted EH40 and TL- EH47 steels of which, manufacturing
process has been approved by TL (i.e. The aim
The manufacturer is to submit to TL the following analyses, method of manufacture and condition of supply
documents together with those required in 2.1, Appendix are similar and the steelmaking process, deoxidation and
A2 of TL- R W11: fine grain practice, casting method and condition of
supply are the same), brittle crack arrest tests, chemical
a) In-house test reports of the brittle crack arrest analyses, tensile test and Charpy V-notch impact test are
properties of the steels intended for approval to be carried out in accordance with Annex 3 of this
section and Appendix A2 of TL- R W11.
b) Approval test program for the brittle crack arrest
properties (see 3.1 below) 3.3 Test specimens and testing procedure of
brittle crack arrest tests
c) Production test procedure for the brittle crack
arrest properties. 3.3.1 The test specimens of the brittle crack arrest
tests are to be taken with their longitudinal axis parallel to
3. Approval Tests the final rolling direction of the test plates.
3.1 Extent of the approval tests 3.3.2 The loading direction of brittle crack tests is to
be parallel to the final rolling direction of the test plates.
3.1.1 The extent of the test program is specified in
3.2, 3.3 and 3.4 of this Annex. 3.3.3 The thickness of the test specimens of the
brittle crack arrest tests is to be the full thickness of the
If the manufacturing process and mechanism to ensure test plates.
the brittle crack arrest properties for the steels intended
for approval are same, 3.1, Appendix A2 of TL- R W11 is 3.3.4 The test specimens and repeat test specimens
to be followed for the extent of the approval tests. are to be taken from the same steel plate.
3.1.2 The number of test samples and test specimens 3.3.5 The thickness of the test specimen is to be the
may be increased when deemed necessary by TL, maximum thickness of the steel plate requested for
based on the in-house test reports of the brittle crack approval.

3.3.6 In the case where the brittle crack arrest 5. Approval and Certification
properties are evaluated by Kca, the brittle crack arrest
test method is to be in accordance with Annex 4 of this Upon satisfactory completion of the survey and tests,
section. In the case where the brittle crack arrest approval is granted by TL with the grade designation
properties are evaluated by CAT, the test method is to be having the suffix “BCA1” or “BCA2” (e.g. TL-EH40-BCA1,
in accordance with Annex 5 of this section. TL-EH47-BCA1, TL-EH47-BCA2, etc.).
3.4 Other tests 6. Renewal of Approval
Additional tests may be required when deemed The manufacturer is also to submit to TL actual
necessary by TL in addition to the tests specified in 3.3. manufacturing records of the approved brittle crack
arrest steels within the term of validity of the
4. Results manufacturing approval certificate.
Appendix A2 of TL- R W11 is to be followed for the Note: Chemical composition, mechanical properties, brittle
results. crack arrest properties (e.g. brittle crack arrest test results or
small-scale alternative test results) and nominal thickness are
Additionally, results of test items and the procedures to be described in the form of histogram or statistics.
shall comply with the test program approved by TL. In the
case where the brittle crack arrest properties are
evaluated by Kca or CAT, the manufacturer also is to
submit to TL the brittle crack arrest test reports in
accordance with Annex 4 for Kca and Annex 5 for CAT of
this section.

Annex 4
Test Method for Brittle Crack Arrest Toughness, Kca
Setting a temperature gradient in the width direction of a hydraulically applied.

test specimen, and applying uniform stress to the test
specimen, strike the test specimen to initiate a brittle The loading method to an integrated specimen using the
crack from the mechanical notch at the side of the test testing machine shall be of a pin type. The stress
specimen and causes crack arrest (temperature gradient distribution in the plate width direction shall be made
type arrest testing). Using the stress intensity factor, uniform by aligning the centres of the loading pins of both
calculate the brittle crack arrest toughness, Kca, from the sides and the neutral axis of the integrated specimen.
applied stress and the arrest crack length. This value is
the brittle crack arrest toughness at the temperature of 3.1.2 Loading directions
the point of crack arrest (arrest temperature). To obtain
Kca at a specific temperature followed by the necessary
The loading directions shall be either vertical or
evaluation, the method specified in Appendix A of this
horizontal. In the case of the horizontal direction, test
Annex 4 can be used.
specimen surfaces shall be placed either perpendicular
to the ground.
As a method for initiating a brittle crack, a secondary
loading mechanism can also be used (see Appendix B of
3.1.3 Distance between the loading pins
this Annex 4 “Double tension type arrest test”).
The distance between the loading pins shall be

1. Scope
approximately 3.4 W or more, where W is the width of the
Annex 4 specifies the test method for brittle crack arrest test specimen. Since the distance between the loading
toughness (i.e. Kca) of steel using fracture mechanics pins sometimes has an effect on the load drop
parameter. This Annex 4 is applicable to hull structural associated with crack propagation, the validity of the test
steels with the thickness over 50 mm and not greater results is determined by the judgment method described
than 100 mm specified in TL- R W11 or this section. in 7.1.
2. Symbols and Their Significance 3.2 Impact equipment
The symbols and their significance used in this Annex 3.2.1 Impact methods
are shown in Table A4-1.
Methods to apply an impact load to an integrated
3. Testing Equipment specimen shall be of a drop weight type or of an air gun
type.
The following specifies the testing machine needed for
conducting the brittle crack arrest test. Testing machine The wedge shall be hard enough to prevent significant
is used to apply tensile force to an integrated specimen, plastic deformation caused by the impact. The wedge
and impact equipment is used to generate a brittle crack thickness shall be equal to or greater than that of the test
on the test specimen. specimen, and the wedge angle shall be greater than
that of the notch formed in the test specimen and have a
3.1 Testing machine shape capable of opening up the notch of the test
specimen.
3.1.1 Loading method
Tensile load to an integrated specimen shall be

Table A-4-1 Symbols and their significance
Symbol Unit Significance
a mm Crack length or arrest crack length

2
E N/mm Modulus of longitudinal elasticity
Ei J Impact energy
Es J Strain energy stored in a test specimen
Et J Total strain energy stored in tab plates and pin chucks
F MN Applied load
3/2
K N/mm Stress intensity factor
3/2
Kca N/mm Arrest toughness
L mm Test specimen length
Lp mm Distance between the loading pins
Lpc mm Pin chuck length
Ltb mm Tab plate length
T °C Temperature or arrest temperature
t mm Test specimen thickness
ttb mm Tab plate thickness
tpc mm Pin chuck thickness
W mm Test specimen width
Wtb mm Tab plate width
Wpc mm Pin chuck width
Xa mm Coordinate of a main crack tip in the width direction
Xbr mm Coordinate of the longest branch crack tip in the width direction
ya mm Coordinate of a main crack tip in the stress loading direction
ybr mm Coordinate of the longest branch crack tip in the stress loading direction
2
σ N/mm Applied stress
2
σy0 N/mm Yield stress at room temperature

4. Test Specimens
4.1 Test specimen shapes
The standard test specimen shape is shown in Figure

A4-1. Table A4-2 shows the ranges of test specimen
thicknesses, widths and width-to-thickness ratios.
The test specimen length shall be, in principle, equal to

or greater than its width.
4.2 Shape of tab plates and pin chucks
The definitions of the dimensions of the tab plates and

pin chucks are shown in Figure A4-2. Typical examples Figure A4-1 Standard test specimen shape
are shown in Figure A4-3.
Table A4-2 Dimensions of test specimen
Test specimen thickness, t 50 mm ≤ t ≤ 100 mm

350 mm ≤ W ≤ 1000 mm
Test specimen width, W
(Standard width: W=500 mm)
Test specimen width/test specimen thickness, W/t W/t ≥ 5
Figure A4-2 Definitions of dimensions of tab plates and pin chucks

Figure A4-3 Examples of the shapes of tab plates and pin chucks

Figure A4-3 Examples of shapes of tab plates and pin chucks (cont’d)
Table A4-3 Tolerances of tab plate dimensions
Tab plate thickness, ttb 0,8 t ≤ ttb ≤ 1,5 t

Tab plate width, W tb W ≤ W tb ≤ 2,0 W
Total length of a test specimen and tab plates, L+ 2Ltb L+ 2 Ltb ≥ 3,0 W
(Total length of a test specimen and a single tab plate L+ Ltb) (L+ Ltb ≥ 2,0 W)
Tab plate length (Lt)/Tab plate width (W) Ltb / W ≥ 1,0

4.2.1 Tab plates Lp =L+ 2 Ltb + 2 Lpc ………………………………….(1)
The tolerances of tab plate dimensions are shown in

Table A4-3. When the lengths of the tab plates attached 4.3 Welding of test specimen and tab plates
to both ends of a test specimen are different, the shorter
length shall be used as the tab length, Ltb. Test specimen, tab plates, and pin chucks shall be
connected by welding. The welds shall have a sufficient
4.2.2 Pin chucks force bearing strength.
The pin chuck width, Wpc, shall be in principle equal to or As shown in Figure A4-4 (a), the flatness (angular
more than the tab plate width, Wtb. distortion, linear misalignment) of the weld between a
test specimen and a tab plate shall be 4 mm or less per 1
The pin chucks shall be designed to have a sufficient m. In the case of preloading, however, it is acceptable if
load bearing strength. When pin chucks attached to both the value after preloading satisfies this condition. As
ends of an integrated specimen are asymmetric, the shown in Figure A4-4 (b), the accuracy of the in-plane
length of the shorter one shall be used as the pin chuck loading axis shall be 0.5% or less of the distance
length, Lpc. between the pins, and the accuracy of the out-of-plane
loading axis shall be 0.4% or less of the distance
The distance between the pins, Lp, is obtained from the between the pins.
equation (1). In the case as shown in Figure A4-3 (e),
Example 5, Lp is obtained by setting Lpc = 0.
Figure A4-4 Dimensional accuracy of weld between test specimen and tab plate

5. Test Methods initiate a crack. However, if the energy is excessive, it

may influence on the test results. In that case, the
The following specifies methods for conducting the arrest results shall be treated as invalid data in accordance
toughness test. with the judgment criteria specified in 7.2. It is desirable
to use equation (2) and Figure A4-5 as guides for
5.1 Temperature control methods obtaining valid data.
A predetermined temperature gradient shall be ……………………..…(2)

established across a test specimen width by soldering at
least nine thermocouples to the test specimen for
temperature measurement and control. Where the variables have the following units: Ei [J], t
[mm], and σ [N/mm ], and min means the minimum of
2
Temperature gradient shall be established in accordance the two values.

with the following conditions (1) through (3).
(1) A temperature gradient of 0.25 - 0.35°C/mm shall

be established in a test specimen width range of
0.3W - 0.7W. When measuring the temperatures
at the centre position of the test specimen
thickness, it shall be kept within ±2°C for 10
minutes or more, whereas when measuring the
temperatures on the front and back surface
positions of the test specimen, it shall be kept
within ±2°C for (10＋0.1t [mm]) minutes or more
taking account of the time needed for soaking to
the centre. If the temperature gradient at 0,3W -
0,7W is less than 0.25°C/mm, crack arrest may
become difficult, and if the gradient is larger than Figure A4-5 Recommended range of impact energy
0.35°C/mm, the obtained arrest toughness may
be too conservative.
6. Test Procedures
(2) At the test specimen width centre position (i.e.,
0.5W), and in the range of ±100 mm in the test The following specifies the procedures for testing brittle
specimen length direction, the deviation from the crack arrest toughness.
temperature at the centre position in the length
direction shall be controlled within ±5°C.
6.1 Pretest procedures
However, when temperature measurement is not
performed at the centre position in the length
(1) Install an integrated specimen in the testing
direction, the average temperature at the closest
machine.
position shall be used as the temperature at the
centre position in the length direction.
(2) Mount a cooling device on the test specimen. A
(3) At the same position in the width direction, the heating device may also be mounted on the test
deviation of the temperature on the front and specimen.
back surfaces shall be controlled within ±5°C.
(3) Install an impact apparatus specified in 3.2, on
5.2 Crack initiation methods the testing machine. Place an appropriate reaction force
receiver as necessary.
Impact energy shall be applied to a test specimen to

Note: The above procedures (1) through (3) do not necessarily temperature record immediately before the further notch
specify the order of implementation, and they may be cooling.
completed, for example, on the day before the test.
(8) Record the force value measured by a force
(4) After checking that all measured values of the recorder.
thermocouples indicate room temperature, start cooling.
The temperature distribution and the holding time shall 6.2 Loading procedures
be as provided in the specifications in 5.1.
(1) After holding a predetermined force for 30
(5) Set an impact apparatus, as specified in 3.2 so seconds or more, apply an impact to the wedge using the
that it can supply predetermined energy to the test impact apparatus. If a crack initiates autonomously and
specimen. the exact force value at the time of the crack initiation
cannot be obtained, the test is invalid.
(6) Apply force to the test specimen until it reaches
the predetermined value. This force is applied after (2) After the impact, record the force value
temperature control to prevent autonomous crack measured by the force recorder.
initiation during force increase. Alternatively,
temperature control may be implemented after loading. (3) When the force after the impact is smaller than
The loading rate and applied stress shall satisfy the the test force, consider that crack initiation has occurred.
conditions (a) and (b) described below, respectively.
Note: An increase in the number of times of impact may cause
(a) Loading rate a change in the shape of the notch of the test specimen. Since
the number of impact has no effect on the value of brittle crack
There is no specification of loading rate, but it arrest toughness, no limit is specified for the number of impact.
shall be determined considering that an However, because the temperature gradient is often distorted
excessively slow loading rate may prolong the by impact, the test shall be conducted again, beginning from
temperature control period, thereby allowing the temperature control when applying repeated impact to the
temperature distribution to depart from the wedge.
desired condition and an excessively fast
loading rate may cause over-shooting of the (4) When crack initiation, propagation, and arrest
load. are observed, remove the force.
(b) Applied stress/yield stress ratio 6.3 Procedures after testing
Applied stress shall be within the range shown (1) Remove the impact apparatus.
by equation.
(2) Remove the cooling device, thermocouples,
………………………………(3) and strain gauges.
As a guide, a value equal to 1/6 of σY0 or more is (3) Return the temperature of the test specimen to
desirable. If applied stress is larger than that specified by room temperature. For that purpose, the test specimen
equation (3), the test may give a non-conservative result. may be heat-tinted using a gas burner or the like. If it is
necessary to prevent heating of the fracture surface, this
(7) To initiate a crack, the notch may be cooled method shall be avoided.
further immediately before impact on the condition that
the cooling does not disturb the temperature in the range (4) After gas-cutting an uncracked ligament, use
of 0.3W - 0.7W. The test temperature in this case shall be the testing machine to cause ductile fracture, as
the measured temperature obtained from the necessary. Alternatively, it is also possible to gas-cut the

uncracked ligament after using the testing machine to (3) Prepare a temperature distribution curve (line
develop a ductile crack to a sufficient length. diagram showing the relation between the temperature
and the distance from the test specimen top side) from
6.4 Observation of fracture surfaces the thermocouple measurement results, and obtain the
arrest temperature T corresponding to the arrest crack
(1) Photograph the fracture surfaces and length.
propagation path.
(2) Measure the longest length of the arrest crack

tip in the plate thickness direction, and record the result
as the arrest crack length. The arrest crack length shall
include the notch length. In the case where a crack
deviates from the direction vertical to the loading
direction, the length projected to the plane vertical to the
loading line is defined as the arrest crack length. In the
following cases, however, judge the results according to
the methods described for each case.
(a) Crack re-initiation.In the case where a brittle crack

has re-initiated from an arrested crack, the
original arrest position is defined as the arrest (a) Case of branching from notch
crack position. Here re-initiation is defined as the
case where a crack and re-initiated cracks are
completely separated by a stretched zone and
brittle crack initiation from the stretched zone can
be clearly observed. In the case where a crack
continuously propagates partially in the thickness
direction, the position of the longest brittle crack is
defined as the arrest position.
(b) Crack branching In the case where a crack

deviates from the direction vertical to the loading
direction, the length projected to the plane vertical
to the loading line is defined as the arrest crack
length. Similarly, in the case of crack branching,
the length of the longest branch crack projected to
the plane vertical to the loading line is defined as
the branch crack length. More specifically, from (b) Case of branching during brittle crack
the coordinates (xa, ya) of the arrest crack tip propagation
position and the coordinates (xbr, ybr) of the
branch crack tip position shown in Figure A4-6,
obtain the angle θ from the x-axis and define xa Figure A4-6 Measurement methods of main crack
as the arrest crack length, a. Here, x is the and branch crack lengths
coordinate in the test specimen width direction,
and the side face of the impact side is set as x = 0;
y is the coordinate in the test specimen length
direction, and the notch position is set as y = 0.

7. Determination of Arrest Toughness
7.1 Judgement of arrested crack
When an arrested crack satisfies all of the conditions (a)

through (d) below as shown in Figure A4-7, the length of
the arrested crack determined by 6.4 is valid. If any of the
conditions is not met, the arrest toughness calculated
from 7.3 is invalid.
Figure A4-8 Allowable range of main crack

propagation path
(b) Conditions for arrest crack length:
………………………..(5)
Figure A4-7 Necessary conditions of arrest crack

position
……………………………….(6)
(a) Conditions for crack propagation path:
All of the crack path from crack initiation to arrest shall be …………………………...(7)
within the range shown in Figure A4-8. However, in the
case where a main crack tip lies within this range but a
part of the main crack passes outside the range, the Note: Equation (7) ensures minimal influence of
arrest toughness may be assessed as valid if the force drop at the centre of the specimen which might
temperature at the most deviated position of the main be caused by crack propagation and reflection of
crack in the y direction is lower than that at y = 0, and also the stress wave at the two ends of the specimen.
K for the main crack falls within ± 5% of K for a straight However, application of equation (7) is not
crack of the same a. The calculation method of Ks for the necessarily required if the strain and the
main crack and a straight crack is obtained from equation crack length have been dynamically measured and
(4). the value of the strain at the time of arrest is 90% or
more of the static strain immediately before crack
initiation.
…………(4)

(c) Conditions for crack straightness:

…………………………………(11)
…………………………….(8)
………………………..(12)
In the case where 50 mm < ya ≤ 100 mm and θ ≤ 30°,

the result is valid only when the temperature at x = 0.5W …………(13)
and y = ±100 mm falls within ± 2.5°C of that at x = 0.5W
and y = 0.
where the variables have the following units: Es [J], Et [J],

(d) Conditions for crack branching: 2
F [MN], E [N/mm ], L [mm], W [mm], and t [mm].
……………………………(9) 7.3 Calculation of arrest toughness
The arrest toughness, Kca, at the temperature, T, shall be

7.2 Assessment of impact energy calculated from equation (14) using the arrest crack
length, a, and the applied stress, σ, judged by 7.1.
Impact energy shall satisfy equation (10). If it does not Calculate σ from equation (15).
satisfy the equation, the value of arrest toughness
calculated from the equations in 7.3 is invalid.
Conditions for impact energy: (14)
…
where … ….(15)
…………………………….(10) where the variables have the following units: F [MN], W

[mm], and t [mm].
where the variables have the following units: a [mm], and If the conditions specified in 7.1 and 7.2 are not satisfied,
W [mm]. Ei is impact energy calculated from the equation the Kca calculated from equation (14) is invalid.
(11). Es and Et are calculated from equations (12) and
(13), respectively. 8. Reporting
Note 1: If equation (10) is not satisfied, the Using Table A4-4, the following items shall be reported:
influence of impact energy on the stress intensity
factor is too large to obtain an accurate arrest (1) Test material: Steel type and yield stress at room
toughness. temperature
Note 2: In the case where the tab plates are (2) Testing machine: Capacity of the testing machine
multistage as shown in Figure A4-3 (b), calculate
the total strain energy of each tab plate using
equation (12).
Note 3: In the case where tab plate widths are

tapered as shown in Figure A4-3 (d), calculate the
strain energy based on elastostatics.

(3) Test specimen dimensions: Thickness, width, length, (7) Temperature distribution at moment of impact:
angular distortion, and linear misalignment Thermocouple position, temperature value, and
temperature distribution
(4) Integrated specimen dimensions: Tab plate
thickness, tab plate width, integrated specimen length (8) Test specimen photographs: Crack propagation path
including the tab plates, and distance between the (one side), and brittle crack fracture surface (both sides)
loading pins
(9) Dynamic measurement results: History of crack
(5) Test conditions: Applied force, applied stress, propagation velocity, and strain change at pin chucks
temperature gradient, impact energy, and the ratio of
impact energy to the strain energy stored in the Note: Item (9) shall be reported as necessary.
integrated specimen (sum of test specimen strain energy
and tab plate strain energy)
(6) Test results
(a) Judgment of arrest: Crack length, presence or

absence of crack branching, main crack
angle, presence or absence of crack
re-initiation, an arrest temperature
(b) Arrest toughness value

Table A4-4 Report sheet for brittle crack arrest test results
Item Details Symbol Conditions/ Unit Valid/

Results Invalid
Steel type - - -
(1) Test material 2
Yield stress at room temperature σY0 N/mm -
(2) Test - MN -
Testing machine capacity
equipment
Thickness t mm
(3) Test
Width W mm
specimen
Length L mm
dimensions
Angular distorsion + lineer misalignment - mm/m
Tab plate thickness ttb mm
(4) Integrated
Tab plate width Wtb mm
specimen
Test specimen length including a tab plate L+Ltb mm
dimensions
Distance between loading pins Lp mm
Applied force F MN
2
Applied stress σ N/mm
(5) Test Temperature gradient - °C/mm
conditions Impact energy Ei J
Ratio of impact energy to strain energy stored Ei/(Es+Et) -
in integrated specimen
Crack length a mm
Presence/absence of - - -
crack branching
Judgement of Ratio of branch crack length Xbr/Xa -
crack to main crack
(6) Test results propagation/ Main crack angle θ (°)
arrest Presence/absence of - -
crack re-initiation
Temperature at crack T °C
arrest position
3/2
Arrest toughness value Kca N/mm
(7) Temperature Temperature measurement position - Attached - -
distribution Temperature at each temperature - Attached °C -
at moment of measurement position
impact Temperature distribution curve - Attached -
(8) Test Crack propagation path - Attached -
specimen - Attached -
Brittle crack fracture surface (both sides)
photographs
(9) Dynamic History of crack propagation velocity - Attached -
measuremen - Attached -
Strain change at pin chucks
t results

Annex 4 - Appendix A
Method for Obtaining Kca at a Specific Temperature and the Evaluation
A.1 General (4) The value of K0 exp(c/TD) is defined as the

estimated value of Kca at TD. The estimated
This Appendix specifies the method for conducting value for the temperature corresponding to a
multiple tests specified in Annex 4 of this section to specific value of Kca can be obtained from TK
obtain Kca value at a specific temperature TD. = c/log(Kca/K0). If the condition specified in
paragraph (3) is not met, these estimated
A.2 Method values are treated as reference values.
A number of experimental data show dependency of Kca

on arrest temperature, as expressed by equation (A.1), A.3 Evaluation
where TK [K] (= T [°C]＋273), c and K0 are constants.
The straight-line approximation of arrhenius plot for valid
·····································(A.1) Kca data by interpolation method are to comply with
either the following (1) or (2):
The arrest toughness at a required temperature TD [K]
can be obtained by following the procedures. (1) The evaluation temperature of Kca (i.e. - 10
degree C) is located between the upper and
(1) Obtain at least four valid Kca data. lower limits of the arrest temperature, with the
Kca corresponding to the evaluation
(2) Approximating log Kca by a linear expression of temperature not lower than the required Kca
3/2 3/2
1/TK, determine the coefficients log K0 and c (e.g. 6,000 N/mm or 8,000 N/mm ), as
for the data described in paragraph (1) by using shown in Fig. A4-A.1.
the least square method.
(2) The temperature corresponding to the required
3/2 3/2
……… ……… (A.2) Kca (e.g. 6,000 N/mm or 8,000 N/mm ) is
located between the upper and lower limits of
the arrest temperature, with the temperature
(3) Obtain the value of (Kca/K0)exp(c/TK) for each corresponding to the required Kca not higher
data item. When the number of data outside the than the evaluation temperature (i.e. -10 degree
range of 0.85 through 1.15 does not exceed, C), as shown in Fig. A4-A.2.
the least square method used in paragraph (2)
is considered valid. Here is an integer obtained If both of (1) and (2) above are not satisfied, conduct
by rounding down the value of (number of all additional tests to satisfy this condition.
data divided by 6). If this condition is not met,
conduct additional tests to add at least two data
and apply the procedure in paragraph (2) to the
data.

Figure A4-A.1 Example for evaluation of Kca at – 10 °C
Figure A4-A.2 Example for evaluation of temperature corresponding to the required Kca

Annex 4 - Appendix B
Double Tension Type Arrest Test
B.1 Features of This Test Method
A double tension type arrest test specimen consists of a

main plate and a secondary loading tab. The main plate
is a test plate for evaluating brittle crack arrest
toughness. The secondary loading tab is a crack starter
plate for assisting a brittle crack to run into the main
plate. After applying a predetermined tension force and a
temperature gradient to the main plate, a secondary
force is applied to the secondary loading tab by a
secondary loading device to cause a brittle crack to Figure A4-B.1 Example of shape of
entire test specimen
initiate and run into the main plate. The arrest toughness
is evaluated from the arrest temperature and the crack
length in the main plate.
The narrow connection part of the main plate and the

secondary loading tab in this test suppress the flow of the
tension stresses of the secondary loading tab into the
main plate. The values of arrest toughness obtained by
this method can be considered the same as the results
obtained by the brittle crack arrest toughness test
specified in Annex 4 of this section.
Figure A4-B.2 Example of shape of secondary
loading tab
The specifications described in Annex 4 of this section
shall be applied to conditions not mentioned in this
B.3 Temperature Conditions and Temperature
Appendix B.
Control Methods
B.2 Test Specimen Shapes

Establish a temperature gradient in the main plate in
order to evaluate its brittle crack arrest toughness. The
The recommended shapes of the entire double tension
specifications for temperature gradients and methods for
type arrest test specimen and the secondary loading tab
establishing the temperature gradient are described in
are shown in Figures A4-B.1 and A4-B.2, respectively.
clause 5, Annex 4 of this section. In addition, in the
Clause 4.2 of Annex 4 of this section is applied to the
double tension type arrest test, the secondary loading
shapes of the tab plates and pin chucks.
tab must be cooled. The secondary loading tab is cooled
without affecting the temperature gradient of the main
Note: Because of the narrowness of the connection part, slight
plate. As in the cooling method for test specimens
crack deviation may lead to failure of the crack to enter the
described in Annex 4 of this section, cooling may be
main plate. The optimum shape design of the secondary
applied using a cooling box and a coolant. The
loading tab depends on the type of steel and testing conditions.
temperature of the secondary loading tab can be
measured using thermocouples as described in Annex 4
of this section.

B.4 Secondary Loading Method B.4.2 Loading system
A secondary loading device is used to apply force to the A hydraulic type loading system is most suitable for
secondary loading tab. The secondary loading device applying a force to the secondary loading tab. However,
shall satisfy the conditions below. other methods may be used. Clause 4.2 of Annex 4 of
this section is applied to the shapes of the tab plates and
B.4.1 Holding methods of secondary loading pin chucks.
device
B.4.3 Loading method
To avoid applying unnecessary force to the integrated
specimen, the secondary loading device must be held in The method of loading the secondary loading tab shall be
an appropriate way. Suspension type or floor type a pin type loading method. A loading method other than a
holding methods can be used. In the suspension type pin type may be used by agreement among the parties
method, the secondary loading device is suspended and concerned. The loading rate is not specifically specified
held by using a crane or a similar device. In the floor type because it does not have a direct influence on the crack
method, the secondary loading device is lifted and held arrest behavior of the main plate.
by using a frame or a similar device.

Annex 5
Outline of Requirements for Undertaking Isothermal Crack Arrest Temperature (CAT) Test
1. Scope of Application 3.4 The detailed requirements for testing

equipment are specified in 3 of Annex 4.
1.1 Annex 5 is to be applied according to the scope
defined in TL- R W31. 4. Test Specimens
1.2 Annex 5 specifies the requirements for test 4.1 Impact type crack initiation
procedures and test conditions when using the
isothermal crack arrest test to determine a valid test 4.1.1 Test specimens are to be in accordance with 4
result under isothermal conditions and in order to of Annex 4, unless otherwise specified in this Annex.
establish the crack arrest temperature (CAT). Annex 5 is
applicable to steels with thickness over 50 mm and not 4.1.2 Specimen dimensions are shown in Figure
greater than 100 mm. A5-1. The test specimen width, W shall be 500 mm. The
test specimen length, L shall be equal to or greater than
1.3 This method uses an isothermal temperature in 500 mm.
the test specimen being evaluated. Unless otherwise
specified in this Annex 5 , the other test parameters are 4.1.3 V-shape notch for brittle crack initiation is
to be in accordance with Annex 4. machined on the specimen edge of the impact side. The
whole machined notch length shall be equal to 29 mm
1.4 Table 3 of TL- R W31 gives the relevant with a tolerance range of ±1mm.
requirements for the brittle crack arrest property
described by the crack arrest temperature (CAT). 4.1.4 Requirements for side grooves are described in
4.4.
1.5 The manufacturer is to submit the test
procedure to TL for review prior to testing. 4.2 Double tension type crack initiation
2. Symbols and Their Significance 4.2.1 Reference shall be made to Appendix B in

Annex 4 for the shape and sizes in secondary loading tab
2.1 Table A5-1 supplements Table A4-1 in Annex 4 and secondary loading method for brittle crack initiation.
with specific symbols for the isothermal test.
4.2.2 In a double tension type test, the secondary
3. Testing Equipment loading tab plate may be subject to further cooling to
enhance an easy brittle crack initiation.
3.1 The test equipment to be used is to be of the
hydraulic type of sufficient capacity to provide a tensile 4.3 Embrittled zone setting
load equivalent to ⅔ of SMYS of the steel grade to be
approved. 4.3.1 An embrittled zone shall be applied to ensure
the initiation of a running brittle crack. Either Electron
3.2 The temperature control system is to be Beam Welding (EBW) or Local Temperature Gradient
equipped to maintain the temperature in the specified (LTG) may be adopted to facilitate the embrittled zone.
region of the specimen within ±2 °C from Ttarget.
4.3.2 In EBW embrittlement, electron beam welding
3.3 Methods for initiating the brittle crack may be of is applied along the expected initial crack propagation
drop weight type, air gun type or double tension tab plate path, which is the centre line of the specimen in front of
type. the machined V- notch.

Table A5-1 Nomenclature supplementary to Table A4-1
Symbol Unit Significance

t mm Test specimen thickness
L mm Test specimen length
W mm Test specimen width
aMN mm Machined notch length on specimen edge
LSG mm Side groove length on side surface from the specimen edge. LSG is defined as a groove
length with constant depth except a curved section in depth at side groove end.
dSG mm Side groove depth in section with constant depth
LEB-min mm Minimum length between specimen edge and electron beam re-melting zone front
LEB-s1, -s2 mm Length between specimen edge and electron beam re-melting zone front appeared on both
specimen side surfaces
LLGT mm Local temperature gradient zone length for brittle crack runway
aarrest mm Arrested crack length
Ttarget °C Target test temperature
Ttest °C Defined test temperature
Tarrest °C Target test temperature at which valid brittle crack arrest behaviour is observed
2
σ N/mm Applied test stress at cross section of W x t
2
SMYS N/mm Specified minimum yield strength of the tested steel grade to be approved
CAT °C Crack arrest temperature, the lowest temperature, Tarrest, at which running brittle crack is
arrested
Figure A5-1 Test specimen dimensions for an impact type specimen

4.3.3 The complete penetration through the 4.4.5 When side grooves would be introduced, the
specimen thickness is required along the embrittled side groove depth, the tip radius and the open angle are
zone. One side EBW penetration is preferable, but dual not regulated, but are adequately selected in order to
sides EB penetration may be also adopted when the avoid any shear lips over 1mm thickness in either side.
EBW power is not enough to achieve the complete An example of side groove dimensions are shown in
penetration by one side EBW. Figure A5-2.
4.3.4 The EBW embrittlement is recommended to be 4.4.6 Side groove end shall be machined to make a
prepared before specimen contour machining. groove depth gradually shallow with a curvature larger
than or equal to groove depth, dSG. Side groove length,
4.3.5 In EBW embrittlement, zone shall be of an LSG is defined as a groove length with constant depth
appropriate quality. except a curved section in depth at side groove end.
Note: EBW occasionally behaves in an un-stable manner at 4.5 Nominal length of embrittled zone
start and end points. EBW line is recommended to start from
the embrittled zone tip side to the specimen edge with an 4.5.1 The length of embrittled zone shall be nominally
increasing power control or go/return manner at start point to equal to 150 mm in both systems of EBW and LTG.
keep the stable EBW.
4.5.2 EBW zone length is regulated by three
4.3.6 In LTG system, the specified local temperature measurements on the fracture surface after test as
gradient between machined notch tip and isothermal test shown in Figure A5-3, LEB-min between specimen edge
region is regulated after isothermal temperature control. and EBW front line, and LEB-s1 and LEB-s2.
LTG temperature control is to be achieved just before
brittle crack initiation, nevertheless the steady 4.5.3 The minimum length between specimen edge
temperature gradient through the thickness shall be and EBW front line, LEB-min should be no smaller than 150
ensured. mm. However, it can be acceptable even if LEB-min is no
smaller than 150 mm-0.2t, where t is specimen
4.4 Side grooves thickness. When LEB-min is smaller than 150 mm, a
temperature safety margin shall be considered into Ttest
4.4.1 Side grooves on side surface can be machined (See 8.1.2).
along the embrittled zone to keep brittle crack
propagation straight. Side grooves shall be machined in 4.5.4 Another two are the lengths between specimen
the specified cases as specified in this section. edge and EBW front appeared on both side surfaces, as
denoted with LEB-s1 and LEB-s2. Both of LEB-s1 and LEB-s2
4.4.2 In EBW embrittlement, side grooves are not shall be no smaller than 150 mm.
necessarily mandatory. Use of EBW avoids the shear
lips. However, when shear lips are evident on the 4.5.5 In LTG system, LLTG is set as 150 mm.
fractured specimen, e.g. shear lips over 1mm in
thickness in either side then side grooves should be 4.6 Tab plate / pin chuck details and welding of
machined to suppress the shear lips. test specimen to tab plates
4.4.3 In LTG embrittlement, side grooves are 4.6.1 The configuration and size of tab plates and pin
mandatory. Side grooves with the same shape and size chucks shall be referred to 4.2 of Annex 4. The welding
shall be machined on both side surfaces. distortion in the integrated specimen, which is welded
with specimen, tab plates and pin chucks, shall be also
4.4.4 The length of side groove, LSG shall be no within the requirement in 4.3 of Annex 4.
shorter than the sum of the required embrittled zone
length of 150mm.

Figure A5-2 Side groove configuration and dimensions
Figure A5-3 Definition of EBW length

5. Test Method 5.2.3 For EBW embrittlement
5.1 Preloading 5.2.3.1 The temperatures of the thermocouples across

the range of 0.3W~0.7W in both width and longitudinal
5.1.1 Preloading at room temperature can be applied directions are to be controlled within ± 2°C of the target
to avoid unexpected brittle crack initiation at test. The test temperature, Ttarget.
applied load value shall be no greater than the test
stress. Preloading can be applied at higher temperature 5.2.3.2 When all measured temperatures across the
than ambient temperature when brittle crack initiation is range of 0.3W~0.7W have reached Ttarget, steady
expected at preloading process. However, the specimen temperature control shall be kept at least for 10 + 0.1 x t
shall not be subjected to temperature higher than 100 °C. [mm] minutes to ensure a uniform temperature
distribution into mid-thickness prior to applying test load.
5.2 Temperature measurement and control
5.2.3.3 The machined notch tip can be locally cooled to
5.2.1 Temperature control plan showing the number easily initiate brittle crack. Nevertheless, the local cooling
and position of thermocouples is to be in accordance with shall not disturb the steady temperature control across
this section. the range of 0.3W~0.7W.
5.2.2 Thermocouples are to be attached to both sides 5.2.4 For LTG embrittlement:
of the test specimen at a maximum interval of 50mm in
the whole width and in the longitudinal direction at the 5.2.4.1 In LTG system, in addition to the temperature
test specimen centre position (0.5 W) within the range of measurements shown in Figure A5-4, the additional
±100mm from the centreline in the longitudinal direction, temperature measurement at the machine notch tip, A0
refer to Figure A5-4. and B0 is required. Thermocouples positions within LTG
zone are shown in Figure A5-5.
Figure A5-4 Locations of temperature measurement Figure A5-5 Detail of LTG zone and additional
thermocouple A0

5.2.4.2 The temperatures of the thermocouples across decided from Table A5-2 based on the measured
the range of 0.3W~0.7W in both width and longitudinal temperatures from A0 to A3.
o
directions are to be controlled within ± 2 C of the
target test temperature, Ttarget. However, the
temperature measurement at 0.3W (location of A3 and
B3) shall be in accordance with 5.2.4.6 below.
5.2.4.3 Once the all measured temperatures across

the range of 0.3W~0.7W have reached Ttarget, steady
temperature control shall be kept at least for 10 + 0.1 x t
[mm] minutes to ensure a uniform temperature
distribution into mid-thickness, then the test load is
applied.
5.2.4.4 LTG is controlled by local cooling around the

machined notch tip. LTG profile shall be recorded by the Figure A5-6 Schematic temperature gradient profile
temperature measurements from A0 to A3 shown in in LTG zone
Figure A5-6.
Table A5-2 Acceptable LTG range
5.2.4.5 LTG zone is established by temperature
gradients in three zones, Zone I, Zone II and Zone III. Zone Location Acceptable range of
The acceptable range for each temperature gradient is from edge temperature gradient
listed Table A5-2. Zone I 29-50 mm 2,00-2,30 °C/mm
Zone II 50-100 mm 0,25-0,60 °C/mm
5.2.4.6 Two temperature measurements at A2, B2 and Zone III 100-150 mm 0,10-0,20 °C/mm
A3, B3 shall be satisfied the following requirements:
5.2.5 For double tension type crack initiation

T at A3, T at B3 < Ttarget – 2 °C
specimen:
T at A2 < T at A3 – 5 °C
T at B2 < T at B3 – 5 °C
5.2.5.1 Temperature control and holding time at steady
state shall be the same as the case of EBW
5.2.4.7 No requirements for T at A0 and T at A1
embrittlement specified in 5.2.3 or the case of LTG
temperatures when T at A3 and T at A2 satisfy the
embrittlement specified in 5.2.4.
requirements above. Face B is the same.
5.3 Loading and brittle crack initiation

5.2.4.8 The temperatures from A0, B0 to A3, B3 should
be decided at test planning stage refer to Table A5-2
5.3.1 Prior to testing, a target test temperature (Ttarget)
which gives the recommended temperature gradients in
shall be selected.
three zones, Zone I, Zone II and Zone III in LTG zone.
5.3.2 Test procedures are to be in accordance with 6

5.2.4.9 The temperature profile in LTG zone mentioned
of Annex 4 except that the applied stress is to be ⅔ of
above shall be ensured after holding time at least for 10 +
SMYS of the steel grade tested.
0.1 x t [mm] minutes to ensure a uniform temperature
distribution into mid-thickness before brittle crack
5.3.3 The test load shall be held at the test target load
initiation.
or higher for a minimum of 30 seconds prior to crack
initiation.
5.2.4.10 The acceptance of LTG in the test shall be

5.3.4 Brittle crack can be initiated by impact or 6.3 Fracture surface examination, crack length
secondary tab plate tension after all of the temperature measurement and their validation
measurements and the applied force are recorded.
6.3.1 Fracture surface shall be observed and
6. Measurements After Test and Test examined. The crack “initiation” and “propagation” are to
Validation Judgement be checked for validity and judgements recorded. The
crack “arrest” positions are to be measured and
6.1 Brittle crack initiation and validation recorded.
6.1.1 If brittle crack spontaneously initiates before the 6.3.2 When crack initiation trigger point is clearly
test force is achieved or the specified hold time at the test detected at side groove root, other than the V-notch tip,
force is not achieved, the test shall be invalid. the test shall be invalid.
6.1.2 If brittle crack spontaneously initiates without 6.3.3 In EBW embrittlement setting, EBW zone length
impact or secondary tab tension but after the specified is quantified by three measurements of LEB-s1, LEB-s2 and
time at the test force is achieved, the test is considered LEB-min, which are defined in 4.5. When either or both of
as a valid initiation. The following validation judgments of LEB-s1 and LEB-s2 are smaller than 150 mm, the test shall
crack path and fracture appearance shall be examined. be invalid. When LEB-min is smaller than 150 mm-0.2t, the
test shall be invalid.
6.2 Crack path examination and validation
6.3.4 When the shear lip with thickness over 1mm in
6.2.1 When brittle crack path in embrittled zone either side near side surfaces of embrittled zone are
deviates from EBW line or side groove in LTG system visibly observed independent of the specimens with or
due to crack deflection and/or crack branching, the test without side grooves, the test shall be invalid.
shall be considered as invalid.
6.3.5 In EBW embrittlement setting, the penetration
6.2.2 All of the crack path from embrittled zone end of brittle crack beyond the EBW front line shall be visually
shall be within the range shown in Figure A5-7. If not, the examined. When any brittle fracture appearance area
test shall be considered as invalid. continued from the EB front line is not detected, the test
shall be invalid.
6.3.6 The weld defects in EBW embrittled zone shall

be visually examined. If detected, it shall be quantified. A
projecting length of defect on the thickness line through
EB weld region along brittle crack path shall be
measured, and the total occupation ratio of the projected
defect part to the total thickness is defined as defect line
fraction (See Figure A5-8). When the defects line fraction
is larger than 10 %, the test shall be invalid.
6.3.7 In EBW embrittlement by dual sides’

penetration, a gap on embrittled zone fracture surface
Figure A5-7 Allowable range of main crack which is induced by miss meeting of dual fusion lines is
propagation path visibly detected at an overlapped line of dual side
penetration, the test shall be invalid.

Figure A5-8 Counting procedure of defect line fraction
7. Judgement of “Arrest” or “Propagate” can be judged as re-initiation behaviour. If so, the

maximum crack length of the part surrounded tear line
7.1 The final test judgment of “arrest”, “propagate” can be measured as aarrest. If re-initiation is not visibly
or “invalid” is decided by the following requirements of evident, the test is judged as “propagate”.
7.2 through 7.6.
7.6 The test is judged as “arrest” when the value of
7.2 If initiated brittle crack is arrested and the tested aarrest is no greater than 0.7W. If not, the test is judged as
specimen is not broken into two pieces, the fracture “propagate”.
surfaces should be exposed with the procedures
specified in 6.3 and 6.4 of Annex 4. 8. Ttest, Tarrest and CAT Determination
7.3 When the specimen was not broken into two 8.1 Ttest determination
pieces during testing, the arrested crack length, aarrest
shall be measured on the fractured surfaces. The length 8.1.1 It shall be ensured on the thermocouple
from the specimen edge of impact side to the arrested measured record that all temperature measurements
crack tip (the longest position) is defined as aarrest. across the range of 0.3W ~ 0.7W in both width and
longitudinal direction are in the range of Ttarget ±2°C at
7.4 For LTG and EBW, aarrest shall be greater than brittle crack initiation. If not, the test shall be invalid.
LLTG and LEB-s1, LEB-s2 or LEB-min. If not, the test shall be However, the temperature measurement at 0.3W
considered as invalid. (location of A3 and B3) in LTG system shall be exempted
from this requirement.
7.5 Even when the specimen was broken into two
pieces during testing, it can be considered as “arrest” 8.1.2 If LEB-min in EBW embrittlement is no smaller
when brittle crack re-initiation is clearly evident. Even in than 150 mm, Ttest can be defined to equal with Ttarget. If
the fracture surface all occupied by brittle fracture, when not, Ttest shall be equaled with Ttarget + 5˚C.
a part of brittle crack surface from embrittled zone is
continuously surrounded by thin ductile tear line, the test

8.1.3 In LTG embrittlement, Ttest can be equaled with plates, and distance between the loading
Ttarget. pins, angular distortion and linear
misalignment
8.1.4 The final arrest judgment at Ttest is concluded by
at least two tests at the same test condition which are (vi) Brittle crack trigger information: impact
judged as “arrest”. type or double tension. If impact type, drop
weight type or air gun type, and applied
8.2 Tarrest determination impact energy.
8.2.1 When at least repeated two “arrest” tests (vii) Test conditions; Applied load; preload
appear at the same Ttarget, brittle crack arrest behaviour stress, test stress
at Ttarget will be decided (Tarrest = Ttarget).When a
“propagate” test result is included in the multiple test - Judgements for preload stress
results at the same Ttarget, the Ttarget cannot to be decided limit, hold time requirement under
as Tarrest. steady test stress.
8.3 CAT determination (viii) Test temperature: complete temperature

records with thermocouple positions for
8.3.1 When CAT is determined, one “propagate” test measured temperatures (figure and/or
is needed in addition to two “arrest” tests. The target test table) and target test temperature.
temperature, Ttarget for “propagate” test is recommended
to select 5 °C lower than Tarrest. The minimum - Judgements for temperature
temperature of Tarrest is determined as CAT. scatter limit in isothermal region.
8.3.2 With only the “arrest” tests, without - Judgement for local temperature
“propagation” test, it is decided only that CAT is lower gradient requirements and holding
than Ttest in the two “arrest” tests, i.e. not deterministic time requirement after steady local
CAT. temperature gradient before brittle
crack trigger, if LTG system is
9. Reporting used.
The following items are to be reported: (ix) Crack path and fracture surface: tested
specimen photos showing fracture
(i) Test material: grade and thickness surfaces on both sides and crack path side
view; Mark at “embrittled zone tip” and
(ii) Test machine capacity “arrest” positions.
(iii) Test specimen dimensions: thickness t; - Judgment for crack path

width W and length L; notch details and requirement.
length aMN, side groove details if machined;
- Judgment for cleavage trigger
(iv) Embrittled zone type: EBW or LTG location (whether side groove edge
embrittlement or V-notch edge).
(v) Integrated specimen dimensions: Tab plate (x) Embrittled zone information:
thickness, tab plate width, integrated
specimen unit length including the tab When EBW is used: LEB-s1, LEB-s2
and LEB-min

- Judgement for shear lip When the specimen broke into two pieces
thickness requirement after brittle crack trigger,
- Judgment whether brittle - judgement whether brittle crack

fracture appearance area re-initiation or not.
continues from the EBW front
line If so, arrested crack length
aarrest:
- Judgement for EBW defects
requirement - Judgement for aarrest in the valid
range (0.3W < aarrest ≤ 0.7W)
- Judgement for EBW lengths,
LEB-s1, LEB-s2 and LEB-min - Final judgement either “arrest”,
requirements “propagate” or “invalid”
When LTG is used: LLTG (xi) Dynamic measurement results: History of

crack propagation velocity, and strain
- Judgment for shear lip change at pin chucks, if needed
thickness requirement
10. Use of Test for Material Qualification
Test results: Testing
When the specimen did not break into two Where required, the method can also be used for
pieces after brittle crack trigger, arrested determining the lowest temperature at which a steel can
crack length aarrest arrest a running brittle crack (the determined CAT) as the
material property characteristic in accordance with 8.3.

Appendix A
Manufacturing Approval Scheme of Hull Structural Steels
A1. Manufacturing Approval Scheme of Semi Finished Products for Hull Structural Steels
1. Scope of application - Origin and storage of raw materials

- Storage of finished products
This document specifies, as given in A.3.1, the scheme - Equipment for systematic control during
for the approval of the manufacturing process of fabrication
semi-finished products such as ingots, slabs, blooms and
billets for the structural steels. d) Details of inspections and quality control
facilities
The manufacturing approval scheme is valid for verifying - Details of system used for identification of
the manufacturer’s capability to provide satisfactory materials at the different stages of
products stably under effective process and production manufacturing
controls in which is required in A.3.2. - Equipment for chemical analyses and relevant
calibration procedures
2. Approval application - List of quality control procedures
2.1 Documents to be submitted e) Type of products (ingots, slabs, blooms, billets);

types of steel (normal or higher strength), range
The manufacturer has to submit to TL, request of of thickness and aim material properties as
approval, proposed approval test program (see 3.1) and follows:
general information relevant to: - Range of chemical composition and aim
analyses, including grain refining, micro alloying
a) Name and site address of the manufacturer, and residual elements, for the various grades of
location of the workshops, general indications steel; if the range of chemical composition
relevant to the background, dimension of the depends on thickness and supply condition, the
works, estimated total annual production of different ranges are to be specified, as
finished products for shipbuilding and for other appropriate
applications, as deemed useful. - Aim maximum carbon equivalent according to
ııw formula
b) Organization and quality: - Aim maximum Pcm content for higher strength
- Organizational chart grades with low carbon content C < 0.13 %
- Staff employed - Production statistics of the chemical
- Staff employed and organization of the quality composition and, if available at rolling mills,
control department mechanical properties (ReH, Rm, A% and KV).
- Qualification of the personnel involved in The statistics are intended to demonstrate the
activities related to the quality of the products capability to manufacture the steel products in
- Certification of compliance of the quality system accordance with the requirements.
with ISO 9001, if any
- Approval certificates already granted by other f) Steelmaking
classification societies, if any - Steel making process and capacity of furnace/s
or converter/s
c) Manufacturing facilities - Raw material used
- Flow chart of the manufacturing process - Deoxidation and alloying practice

- Desulphurisation and vacuum degassing product thicknesses and types to be tested or complete
installations, if any suppression of the approval tests may be accepted by TL
- Casting methods: ingot or continuous casting. taking into account:
In the case of continuous casting, information
relevant to type of casting machine, teeming a) Approval already granted by other Classification
practice, methods to prevent re-oxidation, Societies and documentation of approval tests
inclusions and segregation control, presence of performed.
electromagnetic stirring, soft reduction, etc., is
to be provided as appropriate. b) Types of steel to be approved and availability of
- Ingot or slab size and weight long term statistic results of chemical properties
- Ingot or slab treatment: scarfing and discarding and of mechanical tests performed on rolled
procedures products.
g) Approval already granted by other Classification c) Change of the approval conditions.

Societies and documentation of approval tests
performed. On the other hand, an increase of the number of casts
and thicknesses to be tested may be required in the case
2.2 Documents to be submitted for changing of newly developed types of steel or manufacturing
the approval conditions processes.
The manufacturer has to submit to TL the documents 3.2 Approval test program
required in 2.1 together with the request of changing the
approval conditions, in the case of the following a) Where the number of tests differs from those shown in
through c): 3.6, the program is to be confirmed by TL before the tests
are carried out.
a) Change of the manufacturing process (steel
making process, casting method, steel making 3.3 Approval survey
plant, caster)
The approval tests are to be witnessed by the Surveyor
b) Change of the thickness range (dimension) at the manufacturer’s plant and the execution of the plant
inspection in operation may be required by the Surveyor
c) Change of the chemical composition, added during the visit for the approval.
element, etc.
If the testing facilities are not available at the works, the
However, where the documents are duplicated by the tests are to be carried out at recognized laboratories.
ones at the previous approval for the same type of
product, part or all of the documents may be omitted 3.4 Selection of the test product
except the approval test program (see 3.1).
For each type of steel and for each manufacturing
3. Approval tests process (e.g. steel making, casting), one test product
with the maximum thickness and one test product with
3.1 Extent of the approval tests the minimum thickness to be approved are in general to
be selected for each kind of product (ingots, slabs,
The extent of the test program is specified in 3.6, it may blooms/billets).
be modified on the basis of the preliminary information
submitted by the manufacturer. The selection of the casts for the test product is to be
based on the typical chemical composition, with
In particular a reduction of the indicated number of casts, particular regard to the specified Ceq or Pcm values and

grain refining micro-alloying additions. b) Sulphur prints are to be taken from product
edges which are perpendicular to the axis of the
3.5 Position of the test samples ingot or slab. These sulphur prints are to be
approximately 600 mm long taken from the
The test samples are to be taken, unless otherwise centre of the edge selected, i.e. on the ingot
agreed, from the product (slabs, blooms, billets) centreline, and are to include the full product
corresponding to the top of the ingot, or, in the case of thickness.
continuous casting, a random sample.
4. Results
3.6 Tests on base material
All the results, which are in any case to comply with the
3.6.1 Type of tests requirements of the Rules, are evaluated for the
approval; depending on the results, particular limitations
The tests to be carried out for the approval of the or testing conditions, as deemed appropriate, may be
manufacturing process of semi-finished products are: specified in the approval document.
- Chemical analysis. The analysis is to be All the information required under Appendix A2.2,
complete and is to include micro alloying applicable to the products submitted to the tests, is to be
elements. collected by the manufacturer and put in the dossier
which will include all the results of the tests and operation
- Sulphur prints. records relevant to steel making, casting and, when
applicable, rolling and heat treatment of the test
In addition, for initial approval and for any upgrade of the products.
approval, TL will require full tests indicated in Appendix
A2.3 to be performed at rolling mill on the minimum 5. Certification
thickness semi finished product.
5.1 Approval
In case of a multi-caster work, full tests on finished
products shall be carried out for one caster and reduced Upon satisfactory completion of the survey, approval is
tests (chemical analysis and sulphur print) for the others. granted by TL.
The selection of the caster shall be based on the
technical characteristics of the casters to be evaluated On the approval certificate the following information is to
on case by case basis to be performed at rolling mill on be stated:
products manufactured from the minimum thickness
semi finished product. - Type of products (ingots, slabs, blooms, billets)
- Steelmaking and casting processes
3.6.2 Test specimens and testing procedure - Thickness range of the semi-finished products
- Types of steel (normal or higher strength)
The following tests and procedures apply:
It is also to be indicated that the individual users of the
a) Chemical analyses semi finished products are to be approved for the
Both the ladle and product analyses are to be manufacturing process of the specific grade of rolled
reported. In general the content of the following steel products they are going to manufacture with those
elements is to be checked: C, Mn, Si, P, S, Ni, semi finished products.
Cr, Mo, Al, N, Nb, V, Cu, As, Sn, Ti and, for steel
manufactured from electric or open-hearth 5.2 List of approved manufacturers
furnace, Sb and B.
The approved manufacturers are entered in a list

containing the types of steel and the main conditions of a) In service failures, traceable to product quality
approval.
b) Non conformity of the product revealed during
6. Renewal of approval fabrication and construction
The validity of the approval is to be a maximum of five c) Discovered failure of the Manufacturer’s quality
years. system
Renewal can be carried out by an audit and assessment d) Changes brought by the Manufacturer, without
on the result of satisfactory survey during the period (1). preliminary agreement of TL, to the extent of the
Where for operational reasons, the renewal audit falls approval defined at the time of the approval
outside the period of approval, the manufacturer will still
be considered as approved if agreement to this audit e) Evidence of major non conformities during
date is made within the original period of approval, in this testing of the products.
instance if successful, the extension of approval will be
back dated to the original renewal date.
Manufacturers who have not produced the approved

grades and products during the period between renewals
may be required to either carry out approval tests or, on
the basis of results of production of similar grades of
products, at the discretion of TL, be reapproved. (1) The provision for renewal of approval is also to be
applied to all grades and products which were approved by TL
7. Reconsideration of the approval prior to an implementation of revision 4 of TL- R W11
regardless of the validity of certificate in existing approvals.
During the period of validity the approval may be Such renewal is to be completed within five years after the
reconsidered in the following cases: revision 4 becomes effective.

A2. Manufacturing Approval Scheme of Hull Structural Steels
1. Scope of application d) Details of inspections and quality control

facilities
This document specifies, as given in A.3.1, the scheme - Details of system used for identification of
for the approval of the manufacturing process of normal materials at the different stages of
and higher strength hull structural steels. manufacturing
- Equipment for mechanical tests, chemical
The manufacturing approval scheme is valid for verifying analyses and metallography and relevant
the manufacturer’s capability to provide satisfactory calibration procedures
products stably under effective process and production - Equipment for non destructive examinations
controls in operation including programmed rolling, which - List of quality control procedures
is required in A.3.2 and A.3.3.
e) Type of products (plates, sections, coils),
2. Approval application grades of steel, range of thickness and aim
material properties as follows:
2.1 Documents to be submitted - Range of chemical composition and aim
analyses, including grain refining, micro alloying
The manufacturer has to submit to TL, request of and residual elements, for the various grades of
approval, proposed approval test program (see 3.1) and steel; if the range of chemical composition
general information relevant to: depends on thickness and supply condition, the
different ranges are to be specified, as
a) Name and site address of the manufacturer, appropriate
location of the workshops, general indications - Aim maximum carbon equivalent according to
relevant to the background, dimension of the ııw formula
works, estimated total annual production of - Aim maximum pcm content for higher strength
finished products for shipbuilding and for other grades with low carbon content c < 0.13 %
applications, as deemed useful. - Production statistics of the chemical
composition and mechanical properties (reh,
b) Organization and quality: rm, a% and kv). The statistics are intended to
- Organizational chart demonstrate the capability to manufacture the
- Staff employed steel products in accordance with the
- Staff employed and organization of the quality requirements.
control department
- Qualification of the personnel involved in f) Steelmaking
activities related to the quality of the products - Steel making process and capacity of furnace/s
- Certification of compliance of the quality system or converter/s
with ISO 9001, if any - Raw material used
- approval certificates already granted by other - Deoxidation and alloying practice
classification societies, if any - Desulphurisation and vacuum degassing
installations, if any
c) Manufacturing facilities - Casting methods: ingot or continuous casting.
- Flow chart of the manufacturing process In the case of continuous casting, information
- Origin and storage of raw materials relevant to type of casting machine, teeming
- Storage of finished products practice, methods to prevent re-oxidation,
- Equipment for systematic control during inclusions and segregation control, presence of
fabrication electromagnetic stirring, soft reduction, etc., is
to be provided as appropriate.

- Ingot or slab size and weight k) Where any part of the manufacturing process is
Ingot or slab treatment: scarfing and discarding assigned to other companies or other
procedures manufacturing plants, additional information
required by TL is to be included.
g) Reheating and rolling
- Type of furnace and treatment parameters l) Approval already granted by other Classification
- Rolling: reduction ratio of slab/bloom/billet to Societies and documentation of approval tests
finished product thickness, rolling and finishing performed.
temperatures
- Descaling treatment during rolling 2.2 Documents to be submitted for changing
- Capacity of the rolling stands the approval conditions
h) Heat treatment The manufacturer has to submit to TL the documents

- Type of furnaces, heat treatment parameters required in 2.1 together with the request of changing the
and their relevant records approval conditions, in the case of the following a)
- Accuracy and calibration of temperature control through e) as applicable:
devices
a) Change of the manufacturing process (steel
i) Programmed rolling making, casting, rolling and heat treatment)
For products delivered in the controlled rolling(CR) or b) Change of the maximum thickness (dimension)
thermo-mechanical rolling (TM) condition, the following
additional information on the programmed rolling c) Change of the chemical composition, added
schedules is to be given: element, etc.
- description of the rolling process
- normalizing temperature, re-crystallization d) Subcontracting the rolling, heat treatment, etc.
temperature and Ar3 temperature and the
- methods used to determine them e) Use of the slabs, blooms and billets
- control standards for typical rolling parameters manufactured by companies other than the
used for the different thickness and ones verified in the approval tests.
- grades of steel (temperature and thickness at
the beginning and at the end of the However, where the documents are duplicated by the
- passes, interval between passes, reduction ones at the previous approval for the same type of
ratio, temperature range and cooling speed of product, part or all of the documents may be omitted
accelerated cooling, if any) and relevant method except the approval test program (see 3.1).
of control
- calibration of the control equipment 3. Approval tests
j) Recommendations for working and welding in 3.1 Extent of the approval tests
particular for products delivered in the CR or TM
condition: The extent of the test program is specified in 3.6 and 3.7;
- Cold and hot working recommendations if it may be modified on the basis of the preliminary
needed in addition to the normal practice used information submitted by the manufacturer.
in the shipyards and workshops
- Minimum and maximum heat input if different In particular a reduction of the indicated number of casts,
from the ones usually used in the shipyards and steel plate thicknesses and grades to be tested or
workshops (15 - 50 kj/cm) complete suppression of the approval tests may be
accepted by TL taking into account:

a) Approval already granted by other Classification 3.6 and 3.7, the program is to be confirmed by TL before
Societies and documentation of approval tests the tests are carried out.
performed
3.3 Approval survey
b) Grades of steel to be approved and availability
of long term statistic results of chemical and The approval tests are to be witnessed by the Surveyor
mechanical properties at the manufacturer’s plant and the execution of the plant
inspection in operation may be required by the Surveyor
c) Approval for any grade of steel also covers during the visit for the approval.
approval for any lower grade in the same
strength level, provided that the aim analyses, If the testing facilities are not available at the works, the
method of manufacture and condition of supply tests are to be carried out at recognised laboratories.
are similar.
3.4 Selection of the test product
d) For higher tensile steels, approval of one
strength level covers the approval of the For each grade of steel and for each manufacturing
strength level immediately below, provided the process (e.g. steel making, casting, rolling and condition
steelmaking process, deoxidation and fine grain of supply), one test product with the maximum thickness
practice, casting method and condition of (dimension) to be approved is in general to be selected
supply are the same. for each kind of product.
e) Change of the approval conditions In addition, for initial approval, TL will require selection of
one test product of average thickness.
On the other hand, an increase of the number of casts
and thicknesses to be tested may be required in the case The selection of the casts for the test product is to be
of newly developed types of steel or manufacturing based on the typical chemical composition, with
processes. particular regard to the specified Ceq or Pcm values and
grain refining micro-alloying additions.
In case of multi-source slabs or changing of slab
manufacturer, the rolled steel manufacturer is required to 3.5 Position of the test samples
obtain the approval of the manufacturing process of
rolled steels using the slabs from each slab manufacturer The test samples are to be taken, unless otherwise
and to conduct approval tests in accordance with 3.6 and agreed, from the product (plate, flat, section, bar)
3.7. A reduction or complete suppression of the approval corresponding to the top of the ingot, or, in the case of
tests may considered by TL taking into account previous continuous casting, a random sample.
approval as follows:
The position of the samples to be taken in the length of
- The rolled steel manufacturer has already been the rolled product, "piece" defined in B.12.1(a), (top
approved for the manufacturing process using and/or bottom of the piece) and the direction of the test
other semi finished products characterized by specimens with respect to the final direction of rolling of
the same thickness, steel the material are indicated in Table A.1.
- grade, grain refining and micro-alloying
elements, steel making and casting process; The position of the samples in the width of the product is
- The semi finished products manufacturer has to be in compliance with A.8.1.2.4.
been approved for the complete manufacturing
process with the same conditions (steelmaking, 3.6 Tests on base material
casting, rolling and heat treatment) for the same
steel types. 3.6.1 Type of tests
3.2 Approval test program The tests to be carried out are indicated in the following
Table A.1.
Where the number of tests differs from those shown in

Table A.1 Test on base material
Position of the samples and

Type of test Remarks
direction of the test specimens (1)
ReH, Rm, A5(%), RA(%) are to be
Tensile test Top and bottom transverse (2)
reported
Tensile test (stress relieved)only for Stress relieving at 600 °C (2 min/mm
Top and bottom transverse (2)
TM steels with minimum 1 hour)
Impact tests (3) on non aged
Testing temperature (°C)
specimens for grades:
A, B, A32, A36, A40 +20 0 +20
Top and bottom - longitudinal
D, D32, D36, D40 0 -20 -40
E, E32, E36, E40 0 -20 -40 -60
F32, F36, F40 -20 -40 -60 -80
A, B, A32, A36, A40 +20 0 -20
D, D32, D36, D40 0 -20 -40
Top - transverse (4)
E, E32, E36, E40 -20 -40 -60
F32, F36, F40 -40 -60 -80
Impact test (3) on strain aged
Testing temperature (°C)
specimens (5) for grades:
A32, A36, A40 +20 0 -20
Top - longitudinal
D, D32, D36, D40 0 -20 -40
E, E32, E36, E40 -20 -40 -60
F32, F36, F40 -40 -60 -80
Complete analyses including micro
Chemical analyses (6) Top
alloying elements
Sulphur prints Top
Micro examination Top
Grain size determination Top only for fine grain steels
only for grades E, E32, E36, E40,
Drop weight test (4) Top
F32, F36, F40
Through thickness tensile only for grades with improved
Top and bottom
tests through thickness properties
(1) For hot rolled strips see 3.6.2.
(2) Longitudinal direction for sections and plates having width less than 600 mm.
(3) One set of 3 Charpy V-notch impact specimens is required for each impact test.
(4) Not required for sections and plates having width less than 600 mm.
(5) Deformation 5% + 1 hour at 250°C.
(6) Besides product analyses, ladle analyses are required.

3.6.2 Test specimens and testing procedure approximately 600 mm long taken from the
centre of the edge selected, i.e. on the ingot
The test specimens and testing procedures are to be, as centreline, and are to include the full plate
a rule, in accordance with W2 (TL Rules, Chapter 2, thickness.
Section 2).
e) Micrographic examination: the micrographs are
In particular the following applies: to be representative of the full thickness.
a) Tensile test For thick products in general at least three examinations

- For plates made from hot rolled strip one are to be made at surface, one quarter and mid-thickness
additional tensile specimen is to be taken from of the product.
the middle of the strip constituting the coil.
- For plates having thickness higher than 40 mm, All photomicrographs are to be taken at x100
when the capacity of the available testing magnification and where ferrite grain size exceeds ASTM
machine is insufficient to allow the use of test 10, additionally at x500 magnification. Ferrite grain size
specimens of full thickness, multiple flat should be determined for each photomicrograph.
specimens, representing collectively the full
thickness, can be used. f) Drop weight test: the test is to be performed in
- Alternatively two round specimens with the axis accordance with ASTM E208. The NDTT is to
located at one quarter and at midthickness can be determined and photographs of the tested
be taken. specimens are to be taken and enclosed with
the test report.
b) Impact test
- For plates made from hot rolled strip one g) Through thickness tensile test: the test is to be
additional set of impact specimens is to be performed in accordance with requirements in H
taken from the middle of the strip constituting (W14).
the coil.
- For plates having thickness higher than 40 mm The test results are to be in accordance, where
one additional set of impact specimens is to be applicable, with the requirements specified for
taken with the axis located at mid-thickness. the different steel grades in this section (TL- R
- İn addition to the determination of the energy W11).
value, also the lateral expansion and the
percentage crystallinity are to be reported. 3.6.3 Other tests
c) Chemical analyses Additional tests such as CTOD test, large scale brittle
fracture tests (Double Tension test, ESSO test, Deep
Both the ladle and product analyses are to be reported. Notch test, etc.) or other tests may be required in the
The material for the product analyses should be taken case of newly developed type of steel, outside the scope
from the tensile test specimen. In general the content of of this section (TL- R W11), or when deemed necessary
the following elements is to be checked: C, Mn, Si, P, S, by TL.
Ni, Cr, Mo, Al, N, Nb, V, Cu, As, Sn, Ti and, for steel
manufactured from electric or open-hearth furnace, Sb 3.7 Weldability tests
and B.
3.7.1 General
d) Sulphur prints are to be taken from plate edges
which are perpendicular to the axis of the ingot Weldability tests are required for plates and are to be
or slab. These sulphur prints are to be carried out on samples of the thickest plate. Tests are
required for normal strength grade E and for higher
strength steels.

3.7.2 Preparation and welding of the test c) Hardness tests HV 5 across the weldment. The
assemblies indentations are to be made along a 1 mm
transverse line beneath the plate surface on
The following tests are in general required: both the face side and the root side of the weld
as follows:
a) 1 butt weld test assembly welded with a heat - Fusion line
input approximately 15 kJ/cm - HAZ: at each 0.7 mm from fusion line into
unaffected base material (6 to 7 minimum
b) 1 butt weld test assembly welded with a heat measurements for each HAZ)
input approximately 50 kJ/cm.
The maximum hardness value should not be higher than
The butt weld test assemblies are to be prepared with the 350 HV.
weld seam transverse to the plate rolling direction, so
that impact specimens will result in the longitudinal A sketch of the weld joint depicting groove dimensions,
direction. number of passes, hardness indentations should be
attached to the test report together with
The bevel preparation should be preferably 1/2V or K. photomacrographs of the weld cross section.
The welding procedure should be as far as possible in 3.7.4 Other tests

accordance with the normal welding practice used at the
yards for the type of steel in question. Additional tests such as cold cracking tests (CTS,
Cruciform, Implant, Tekken, Bead-on plate), CTOD, or
The welding parameters including consumables other tests may be required in the case of newly
designation and diameter, preheating temperatures, developed type of steel, outside the scope of this section
interpass temperatures, heat input, number of passes, (TL- R W11), or when deemed necessary by TL.
etc. are to be reported.
4. Results
3.7.3 Type of tests
All the results, which are in any case to comply with the
From the test assemblies the following test specimens requirements of the Rules, are evaluated for the
are to be taken: approval; depending on the results, particular limitations
or testing conditions, as deemed appropriate, may be
a) 1 cross weld tensile test specified in the approval document.
b) a set of 3 Charpy V-notch impact specimens All the information required under Appendix 2.2,
transverse to the weld with the notch located at applicable to the products submitted to the tests, is to be
the fusion line and at a distance 2, 5 and collected by the manufacturer and put in the dossier
minimum 20 mm from the fusion line. which will include all the results of the tests and operation
records relevant to steel making, casting, rolling and heat
The fusion boundary is to be identified by etching the treatment of the test products.
specimens with a suitable reagent.
5. Certification
The test temperature is to be the one prescribed for the
testing of the steel grade in question. 5.1 Approval
Upon satisfactory completion of the survey, approval is

granted by TL.

5.2 List of approved manufacturers 7. Reconsideration of the approval
The approved manufacturers are entered in a list During the period of validity the approval may be
containing the types of steel and the main conditions of reconsidered in the following cases:
approval.
a) In service failures, traceable to product quality
6. Renewal of approval
b) Non conformity of the product revealed during
The validity of the approval is to be a maximum of five fabrication and construction
years.
c) Discovered failure of the Manufacturer’s quality
Renewal can be carried out by an audit and assessment system
on the result of satisfactory survey during the period (1).
d) Changes brought by the Manufacturer, without
Where for operational reasons, the renewal audit falls preliminary agreement of TL, to the extent of the
outside the period of approval, the manufacturer will still approval defined at the time of the approval
be considered as approved if agreement to this audit
date is made within the original period of approval, in this e) Evidence of major non conformities during
instance if successful, the extension of approval will be testing of the products.
back dated to the original renewal date.
(1) The provision for renewal of approval is also to be
Manufacturers who have not produced the approved applied to all grades and products which were approved by TL
grades and products during the period between renewals prior to an implementation of revision 4 of this TL- R W11
may be required to either carry out approval tests or, on regardless of the validity of certificate in existing approvals.
the basis of results of production of similar grades of Such renewal is to be completed within five years after the
products, at the discretion of TL, be reapproved. revision 4 becomes effective.

Appendix B
Approval scheme for manufacturer of hull structural steels intended for welding with high heat input
1. Scope c) Welding control points to improve joint

properties on strength and toughness, if any.
This document specifies the weldability confirmation
scheme of normal and higher strength hull structural 3. Confirmation tests
steels stipulated in this section (TL- R W11) intended for
welding with high heat input over 50kJ/cm. 3.1 Range of certification
The weldability confirmation scheme is to be generally

applied by manufacturer’s option and valid for certifying Range of certification for steel grades is to be the
that the steel has satisfactory weldability for high heat following a) through e) unless otherwise agreed by TL:
input welding concerned under testing conditions.
a) Approval tests on the lowest and highest
Demonstration of conformance to the requirements of toughness levels cover the intermediate
this document approves a particular steel mill to toughness level.
manufacture grade of steel to the specific chemical
composition range, melting practice, and processing b) Approval tests on normal strength level cover
practice for which conformance was established. The that strength level only.
approval scheme does not apply to qualification of
welding procedures to be undertaken by the shipyards. c) For high tensile steels, approval tests on one
strength level cover strength level immediately
2. Application of certification below.
The manufacturer is to submit to TL, request of d) Tests may be carried out separately subject to
certification, proposed weldability test program (see the same manufacturing process.
section 3.2) and technical documents relevant to:
e) Certification and documentation of confirmation
a) Outline of steel plate to be certified tests performed by other Classification Society
- Grade may be accepted at the discretion of TL.
- Thickness range
- Deoxidation practice 3.2 Weldability test program
- Fine grain practice
- Aim range of chemical composition Extent of the test program is specified in section 3.5 but it
- Aim maximum ceq and pcm may be modified according to the contents of
- Production statistics of mechanical properties certification. In particular, additional test assemblies
(tensile and charpy v-notch impact tests), if any and/or test items may be required in the case of newly
developed type of steel, welding consumable and
b) Manufacturing control points to prevent welding method, or when deemed necessary by TL.
toughness deterioration in heat affected zone
when welded with high heat input, relevant to Where the content of tests differs from those specified in
chemical elements, steel making, casting, section 3.5, the program is to be confirmed by TL before
rolling, heat treatment etc. the tests are carried out.

3.3 Test plate b) Macroscopic test
Test plate is to be manufactured by a process approved One macroscopic photograph is to be representative of

by TL in accordance with the requirements of this section transverse section of the welded joint and is to show
(TL- R W11 Appendix A). absence of cracks, lack of penetration, lack of fusion and
other injurious defects.
For each manufacturing process route, two test plates
with different thickness are to be selected. The thicker c) Microscopic test
plate (t) and thinner plate (less than or equal to t/2) are to
be proposed by the manufacturer. Along mid-thickness line across transverse section of the
weld, one micrograph with x100 magnification is to be
Small changes in manufacturing processing (e.g. within taken at each position of the weld metal centreline, fusion
the TMCP process) may be considered for acceptance line and at a distance 2, 5, 10 and minimum 20 mm from
without testing, at the discretion of TL. the fusion line. The test result is provided for information
purpose only.
3.4 Test assembly
d) Hardness test
One butt weld assembly welded with heat input over
50kJ/cm is to be generally prepared with the weld axis Along two lines across transverse weld section 1 mm
transverse to the plate rolling direction. beneath plate surface on both face and root side of the
weld, indentations by HV5 are to be made at weld metal
Dimensions of the test assembly are to be amply centreline, fusion line and each 0.7 mm position from
sufficient to take all the required test specimens specified fusion line to unaffected base metal (minimum 6 to 7
in section 3.5. measurements for each heat affected zone).
The welding procedures should be as far as possible in The maximum hardness value should not be higher than
accordance with the normal practices applied at 350 HV.
shipyards for the test plate concerned.
e) Transverse tensile test
Welding process, welding position, welding consumable
(manufacturer, brand, grade, diameter and shield gas) Two transverse (cross weld) tensile specimens are to be
and welding parameters including bevel preparation, taken from the test assembly.
heat input, preheating temperatures, interpass
temperatures, number of passes, etc. are to be reported. Test specimens and testing procedures are to comply
with the requirements of TL- R W2 (TL Rules, Chapter 2,
3.5 Examinations and tests for the test Section 2).
assembly
The tensile strength is to be not less than the minimum
The test assembly is to be examined and tested in required value for the grade of base metal.
accordance with the following a) through h) unless
otherwise agreed by TL. f) Bend test
a) Visual examination Two transverse (cross weld) test specimens are to be

taken from the test assembly and bent on a mandrel with
Overall welded surface is to be uniform and free from diameter of quadruple specimen thickness. Bending
injurious defects such as cracks, undercuts, overlaps, angle is to be at least 120°. Test specimens are to
etc. comply with the requirements of TL- R W2 (TL Rules,
Chapter 2, Section 2).

For plate thickness up to 20 mm, one face-bend and one 4. Results

root-bend specimens or two side-bend specimens are to
be taken. For plate thickness over 20 mm, two side-bend The manufacturer is to submit to TL the complete test
specimens are to be taken. report including all the results and required information
relevant to the confirmation tests specified in section 3.
After testing, the test specimens shall not reveal any
crack nor other open defect in any direction greater than The contents of the test report are to be reviewed and
3 mm. evaluated by TL in accordance with this weldability
confirmation scheme.
g) Impact test
5. Certification
Charpy V-notch impact specimens (three specimens for
one set) are to be taken within 2 mm below plate surface TL issues the certificate where the test report is found to
on face side of the weld with the notch perpendicular to be satisfactory.
the plate surface.
The following information is generally required to be
One set of the specimens transverse to the weld is to be included on the certificate:
taken with the notch located at the fusion line and at a
distance 2, 5 and minimum 20 mm from the fusion line. a) Manufacturer
The fusion boundary is to be identified by etching the
specimens with a suitable reagent. The test temperature b) Grade designation with notation of heat input
is to be the one prescribed for the testing of the steel (see section 6)
grade in question.
c) Deoxidation practice
For steel plate with thickness greater than 50 mm or one
side welding for plate thickness greater than 20 mm, one d) Fine grain practice
additional set of the specimens is to be taken from the
root side of the weld with the notch located at each the e) Condition of supply
same position as for the face side.
f) Plate thickness tested
The average impact energy at the specified test
temperature is to comply with the Table 3.8 or 3.9 g) Welding process
depending on the steel grade and thickness. Only one
individual value may be below the specified average h) Welding consumable (manufacturer, brand,
value provided it is not less than 70% of that value. grade), if desired
Additional tests at the different testing temperatures may i) Actual heat input applied.
be required for evaluating the transition temperature
curve of absorbed energy and percentage crystallinity at 6. Grade designation
the discretion of TL.
Upon issuance of the certificate, the notation indicating
h) Other test the value of heat input applied in the confirmation test
may be added to the grade designation of the test plate,
Additional tests such as wide-width tensile test, HAZ e.g. “E36-W300” (in the case of heat input 300 kJ/cm
tensile test, cold cracking tests (CTS, Cruciform, Implant, applied). The value of this notation is to be not less than
Tekken, and Bead-on plate), CTOD or other tests should 50 and every 10 added.
be required at the discretion of TL (see section 3.2).

Appendix C
Procedure for Approval of Corrosion Resistant Steels for Cargo Oil Tanks
1. Scope e) The welding processes and the brand name of

the welding consumables to be used for approval.
1.1 This appendix specifies, as given in A.3, the
scheme for the approval of corrosion resistant steels Table C.1 Designations for Corrosion Resistant
based upon corrosion testing. Steels Type of steel Location where steel is Effective
Corrosion Resistant Designation
1.2 The corrosion testing is to be carried out in
addition to the approval testing specified in Corrosion
Type of Location where steel is
Resistant
steel effective
Appendix A1 and A2 for the approval of normal and Designation
higher strength hull structural steels. For lower surface of
Rolled
strength deck and
steel for RCU
1.3 The corrosion tests and assessment criteria are surrounding structures
hull
to be in accordance with the Appendix of the Annex to (ullage space)
Performance Standard for Alternative Means of For upper surface of inner
Corrosion Protection for Cargo Oil Tanks of Crude Oil bottom plating and RCB
Tankers (MSC.289 (87)). surrounding structures
For both strength deck
RCW
2. Application for approval and inner bottom plating
2.1 The manufacturer is to submit to the Society a

3. Approval of test plan
request for approval, which is to include the following:
3.1 The test program submitted by the

a) Corrosion test plan and details of equipment
manufacturer is to be reviewed by the Society, if found
and test environments.
satisfactory, it will be approved and returned to the
manufacturer for acceptance prior to tests being carried
b) Technical data related to product assessment
out. Tests that need to be witnessed by the society
criteria for confirming corrosion resistance.
Surveyor will be identified.
c) The technical background explaining how the

3.2 Method for selection of test samples is to satisfy
variation in added and controlled elements improves
the following:
corrosion resistance. The manufacturer will establish a
relationship of all the chemical elements which affect the
3.2.1 The numbers of test samples is to be in
corrosion resistance. The chemical elements added or
accordance with the requirements of the Appendix of the
controlled to achieve the required level of corrosion
Annex to Performance Standard for Alternative Means of
resistance are to be specifically verified for acceptance.
Corrosion Protection for Cargo Oil Tanks of Crude Oil
Verification is to be based on the ladle analysis of the
Tankers (MSC.289 (87)).
steel.
3.2.2 The number of casts and test samples

d) The grades, the brand name and maximum
selected are to be sufficient to make it possible to confirm
thickness of corrosion resistant steel to be approved.
the validity of interaction effects and/or the control range
Designations for corrosion resistant steels are given in
(upper limit, lower limit) of the elements which are added
Table C.1
or intentionally controlled, for improving the corrosion

resistance. Where agreed, this may be supported with specified are to be generally within 1% in total.
data submitted by the manufacturer.
4. Carrying out the approval test
3.2.3 Additional tests may be required by the Society
when reviewing the test program against the paragraph 4.1 The manufacturer is to carry out the approval
3.2.2 test in accordance with the approved test plan.
Remarks: Considerations for additional tests may 5. Attendance of the Society's Surveyor for
include but not be limited to: Test
a) When the Society determines that the control 5.1 The Society's Surveyor is to be present, as a
range is set by the theoretical analysis of each element rule, when the test samples for the approval test are
based on existing data, the number of corrosion being identified and for approval tests, see also 3.1.
resistance tests conducted in accordance with the
Appendix of the Annex to Performance Standard for 6. Test Results
Alternative Means of Corrosion Protection for Cargo Oil
Tanks (MSC.289 (87)) is too few to adequately confirm 6.1 After completion of the approval test, the
the validity of the control range of chemical composition; manufacturer is to produce the report of the approval test
and submit it to the Society.
b) When the Society determines that the data of
the corrosion resistance test result obtained for setting 6.2 The Society will give approval for corrosion
the control range of chemical composition varies too resistant steel where approval tests are considered by
widely; the society to have given satisfactory results based on
the data submitted in accordance with the provisions of
c) When the Society determines that the validity this Appendix.
of the corrosion resistance test result for setting the
control range of chemical composition is insufficient, or 6.3 The certificate is to contain the manufacturer's
has some flaws; and name, the period of validity of the certificate, the grades
and thickness of the steel approved, welding methods
d) When the Society's surveyor has not attended and welding consumables approved.
the corrosion resistance tests for setting the control
range of chemical composition, and the Society 7. Assessment Criteria for Results of
determines that additional testing is necessary in Corrosion Resistance Tests of Welded Joint
order to confirm the validity of the test result data.
7.1 The results will be assessed by the
Remarks: The chemical composition of the corrosion Classification Society in accordance with the acceptance
resistant steel is to be within the range specified for rolled criteria specified in the Appendix of the Annex to
steel for hull. Elements to be added for improving the Performance Standard for Alternative Means of
corrosion resistance and for which content is not Corrosion Protection for Cargo Oil Tanks (MSC.289
(87)).

Appendix D
Manufacturing Approval Scheme of High Strength Steels for Welded Structures
1. Scope of application
2.1.3 Manufacturing facilities
This appendix specifies the procedure for the approval of

• Flow chart of the manufacturing process
the manufacturing process of high strength steels for
• Origin and storage of raw materials
welded structures.
• Storage of finished products
All materials are to be manufactured at works which have
• Equipment for systematic control during
been approved by TL for the type, delivery condition,
manufacturing
grade and thickness of steel which is being supplied. The
suitability of each grade of steel for forming and welding
2.1.4 Details of inspections and quality control
is to be demonstrated during the initial approval tests at
facilities
the steelworks.
The manufacturing approval scheme is valid for verifying
• Details of system used for identification of
the manufacturer’s capability to provide satisfactory
materials at the different stages of manufacturing
products stably under effective process and production
• Equipment for mechanical tests, chemical
controls in operation including programmed rolling, which
analyses and metallography and relevant
is required in C.6.2.2.
calibration procedures
• Equipment for non-destructive examinations
2. Approval application
(NDE)
• List of quality control procedures
2.1 Documents to be submitted
2.2 Manufacturing specification

The manufacturer is to submit to TL, a request for
approval, a proposed approval test program and general
2.2.1 Material to be approved, including type of
information relevant to:
products (plates, sections, bars and tubular), delivery
condition, grades of steel, range of thickness and aim
2.1.1 Name and site address of the manufacturer,
material properties as follows:
location of the workshops, general indications relevant to
the background, dimension of the works, estimated total
• Range of chemical composition, aim analyses
annual production of finished products, as deemed
and associated control limits, including grain
useful.
refining, nitrogen binding, micro alloying and
residual elements, for the various grades of steel;
2.1.2 Organisation and quality
if the range of chemical composition depends on
thickness and delivery condition, the different
• Organisational chart
ranges are to be specified, as appropriate.
• Number of staff employed
• In addition, where zirconium, calcium and rare
• Staff employed and organisation of the quality
earth metals have been used during steelmaking
control department
for grain refinement and, or inclusion
• Qualification of the personnel involved in
modification, the contents of these elements shall
activities related to the quality of the products
be specified in the manufacturing specification.
• Certification of compliance of the quality system
• Aim carbon equivalent Ceq according to IIW
with IS0 9001 or 9002, if any
formula or CET formula and/or aim Pcm content
• Approval certificates already granted by other
and associated control limits.
Classification Societies, if any

• Production statistics of the chemical composition 2.2.5 Programmed rolling

and mechanical properties (ReH, Rm, A% and
CVN). The statistics are intended to demonstrate For products delivered in the Normalised rolling (NR) or
the capability to manufacture the steel products. thermo-mechanical rolling (TM) condition, the following
additional information on the programmed rolling
2.2.2 Steelmaking (if applicable) schedules is to be given:
• Steel making process and capacity of furnace/s • Description of the rolling process
or converter/s • The methods used to determine austenitizing
• Raw material used temperature, re-crystallization temperature and
• Eoxidation, grain refining, nitrogen binding and Ar3 temperature
alloying practice • Control standards for typical rolling parameters
• Desulphurisation, dehydrogenation, sulphide used for the different thickness and grades of
treatment, ladle refining and vacuum degassing steel (temperature and thickness at the
installations, if any beginning and at the end of the passes, interval
• Casting methods: ingot or continuous casting. between passes, reduction ratio, temperature
In the case of continuous casting, information range and cooling speed of accelerated cooling,
relevant to type of casting machine, teeming if any) and relevant method of control
practice, methods to prevent re-oxidation, • Calibration of the control equipment
inclusions and segregation control, presence of
electromagnetic stirring, soft reduction, etc., is 2.2.6 Recommendations for fabrication and welding
to be provided as appropriate in particular for products delivered in the NR or TM
• Casting/solidification cooling rate control condition:
• Ingot or slab size and weight
• Ingot or slab treatment: scarfing and discarding • Cold and hot working recommendations if
procedures needed in addition to the normal practice used
in the shipyards and workshops
2.2.3 Reheating and rolling • Minimum and maximum heat input and
recommended pre-heat/interpass temperature
• Type of furnace and treatment parameters
• Rolling: reduction ratio of ingot/slab/bloom/billet 2.2.7 Where any part of the manufacturing process is
to finished product, rolling and finishing assigned to other companies or other manufacturing
temperatures for each grade/thickness plants, additional information required by TL is to be
combination included.
• Descaling treatment during rolling
• Capacity of the rolling stands 2.2.8 Approval already granted by other
Classification Societies and documentation of approval
2.2.4 Heat treatment tests performed.
• Type of furnaces, heat treatment parameters for 2.3 Documents to be submitted for changing
products to be approved the approval conditions
• Accuracy and calibration of temperature control
devices The manufacturer has to submit to TL the documents
• The methods used to determine austenitizing required in 2.1 together with the request of changing the
temperature, re-crystallization temperature and approval conditions, in the case of the following 2.3.1
Ar3 temperature through 2.3.5 as applicable:
• Description of quenching and tempering
process, if applicable

2.3.1 Change of the manufacturing process (steel 3.7. A reduction or complete suppression of the approval
making, casting, rolling and heat treatment). tests may be considered by TL taking into account
previous approval as follows:
2.3.2 Change of the maximum thickness (dimension).
2.3.3 Change of the chemical composition, added • the rolled steel manufacturer has already been
element, etc. approved for the rolling process and heat
treatment using approved other semi finished
2.3.4 Subcontracting the rolling, heat treatment, etc. products characterized by the same thickness
range, steel grade, grain refining and
2.3.5 Use of the ingots, slabs, blooms and billets micro-alloying elements, steel
manufactured by companies other than the ones verified making(deoxidation) and casting process.
in the approval tests.
• the semi finished products have been approved
However, where the documents are duplicated by the for the complete manufacturing process with
ones at the previous approval for the same type of the same conditions (steelmaking, casting,
product, part or all of the documents may be omitted rolling and heat treatment) for the same steel
except the approval test program (see 3.1). types.
3. Approval tests 3.2 Approval test program
3.1 Extent of the approval tests Where the number of tests differs from those shown in
3.6 and 3.7, the program is to be confirmed by TL before
The extent of the test program is specified in 3.6 and 3.7; the tests are carried out.
it may be modified on the basis of the preliminary
information submitted by the manufacturer. 3.3 Approval survey
In particular a reduction of the indicated number of casts, The approval tests are to be witnessed by the Surveyor
steel plate thicknesses and grades to be tested or at the manufacturer’s plant and the execution of the plant
complete suppression of the approval tests may be inspection in operation may be required by the Surveyor
accepted by TL taking into account: during the visit for the approval.
If the testing facilities are not available at the works, the
3.1.1 Approval already granted by other tests are to be carried out at accredited laboratories.
Classification Societies and documentation of approval
tests performed. 3.4 Selection of the test product
For each grade of steel and for each manufacturing

3.1.2 Grades of steel to be approved and where
process (e.g. steel making, casting, rolling and condition
available the long term statistical results of chemical and
of supply), one test product with the maximum thickness
mechanical properties.
(dimension) to be approved is in general to be selected
for each kind of product.
An increase of the number of casts and thicknesses to be
tested may be required in the case of newly developed
In addition, for initial approval, TL will require selection of
types of steel or manufacturing processes. one test product of representative thickness.
In case of multi-source slabs or changing of slab The selection of the casts for the test product is to be
manufacturer, the rolled steel manufacturer is required to based on the typical chemical composition, with
obtain the approval of the manufacturing process of particular regard to the aimed Ceq, CET or Pcm values
rolled steels using the slabs from each slab manufacturer and grain refining micro-alloying additions.
and to conduct approval tests in accordance with 3.6 and

3.5 Position of the test samples and specimens 3.7.1.1 1x butt weld test assembly welded with a heat
input 15±2 kJ/cm is to be tested as-welded.
The test samples are to be taken, unless otherwise
agreed, from the product (plate, flat, section, bar and 3.7.1.2 1x butt weld test assembly welded with a heat
tubular) corresponding to the top and bottom of the ingot input 50±5 kJ/cm for N/NR and TM and 35±3.5 kJ/cm for
as indicated in Table D.1, or, in the case of continuous QT steels is to be tested as-welded.
casting, a random sample.
3.7.1.3 1x butt weld test assembly welded with the
The position of the samples to be taken in the length of same heat input as given in 3.7.1.2 is to be post-weld
the rolled product, “piece” defined in B.11, (top and heat treated (PWHT) prior to testing.
bottom of the piece) and the direction of the test
specimens with respect to the final rolling direction of the Option: Steels intended to be designated as steels for
material are indicated in Table D.1. high heat input welding are to be tested with 1x butt weld
test assembly in the as-welded condition and 1x test
The position of the samples in the width of the product is assembly in the PWHT condition, both welded with the
to be in accordance with A.8. maximum heat input being approved.
The position of the tensile and Charpy impact test 3.7.2 For H550 to H960 grade steels:
samples with respect to the plate thickness is to be in
accordance with Section 2 of these rules. In general, the thickest plate with the highest toughness
grade for each strength grade is to be tested. Provided
3.6 Tests on base material the chemical composition of the higher grade is
representative to the lower grade, testing requirements
3.6.1 Type of tests on the lower grades may be reduced at the discretion of
TL.
The tests to be carried out are indicated in the following
Table D.1. 3.7.2.1 1x butt weld test assembly welded with a heat
input 10±2 kJ/cm is to be tested as-welded.
3.6.2 Test specimens and testing procedure
3.7.2.2 1x butt weld test assembly welded with a
The test specimens and testing procedures are to be in maximum heat input as proposed by the manufacturer is
accordance with Section 2, where applicable. to be tested as-welded. The approved maximum heat
input shall be stated on the manufacturer approval
3.6.3 Other tests certificate.
Additional tests such as CTOD test on parent plate, large Option: If the manufacturer requests to include the
scale brittle fracture tests (Double Tension test, ESSO approval for Post Weld Heat Treated (PWHT) condition,
test, Deep Notch test, etc.) or other tests may be required 1x additional butt weld test assembly welded with a
in the case of newly developed type of steel, outside the maximum heat input proposed by the manufacturer for
scope of TL- R W16, or when deemed necessary by TL. the approval same as test assembly 3.7.2.2 is to be
post-weld heat treated (PWHT) prior to testing.
3.7 Weldability tests - Butt weld test
3.7.3 Butt weld test assembly
3.7.1 For H420 to H500 grade steels: Weldability
tests are to be carried out on samples of the thickest The butt weld test assemblies of N/NR plates are to be
plate. Testing on higher grades can cover the lower prepared with the weld seam transverse to the final plate
strength and toughness grades. rolling direction.

The butt weld test assemblies of TM/TM+AcC/TM+DQ 3.7.6.1 1 cross weld tensile test - 1 full thickness test
and QT plates are to be prepared with the weld seam sample or sub-sized samples cover the full thickness
parallel to the final plate rolling direction. The butt weld cross section.
test assemblies of long products, sections and seamless
tubular in any delivery condition are to be prepared with 3.7.6.2 1 set of 3 Charpy V-notch impact specimens
the weld seam transverse to the rolling direction. transverse to the weld seam and 1-2 mm below the
surface with the notch located at the fusion line and at a
3.7.4 Bevel preparation distance 2, 5 and 20 mm from the straight fusion line. An
additional set of 3 Charpy test specimens at root is
The bevel preparation should be preferably 1/2V or K required for each aforementioned position for plate
related to thickness. thickness t ≥ 50 mm. The fusion boundary is to be
identified by etching the specimens with a suitable
The welding procedure should be as far as possible in reagent. The test temperature is to be the one prescribed
accordance with the normal welding practice used for the for the testing of the steel grade.
type of steel in question.
3.7.6.3 Hardness tests HV10 across the weldment. The
The welding procedure and welding record are to be indentations are to be made along a 1-2 mm transverse
submitted to TL for review. line beneath the plate surface on both the face side and
the root side of the weld as follows:
3.7.5 Post-weld heat treatment procedure
• fusion line
3.7.5.1 Steels delivered in N/NR or • HAZ: at each 0.7 mm from fusion line into
TM/TM+AcC/TM+DQ condition shall be heat treated for unaffected base material (6 to 7 minimum
a minimum time of 1 hour per 25 mm thickness (but not measurements for each HAZ)
less than 30 minutes and needs not be more than 150
minutes) at a maximum holding temperature of 580°C, The maximum hardness value should not be higher than
unless otherwise approved at the time of approval. 350HV for grade steels H420 to H460; not be higher than
420HV for H500 to H690; and not be higher than 450HV
3.7.5.2 Steels delivered in QT condition shall be heat for H890 and H960.
treated for a minimum time of 1 hour per 25 mm
thickness (but not less than 30 minutes and needs not be A sketch of the weld joint depicting groove dimensions,
more than 150 minutes) at a maximum holding number of passes, hardness indentations should be
temperature of 550°C with the maximum holding attached to the test report together with
temperature of at least 30°C below the previous photomacrographs of the weld cross section.
tempering temperature, unless otherwise approved at
the time of approval. 3.7.6.4 CTOD test
3.7.5.3 Heating and cooling above 300°C shall be CTOD test specimens are to be taken from butt weld test
carried out in a controlled manner in order to heat/cool assembly specified in 3.7.1.2 or 3.7.2.2 . CTOD test is to
the material uniformly. The cooling rate from the max. be carried out in accordance with EN ISO 15653 or
holding temperature to 300°C shall not be slower than equivalent.
55°C/hr.
• the specimen geometry (B = W) is permitted for
3.7.6 Type of tests plate thickness up to 50 mm. For plate thicker
than 50 mm, subsidiary specimen geometry
From the test assemblies the following test specimens (50x50 mm) is permitted, which is to be taken
are to be taken: 50 mm in depth through thickness from the

subsurface and 50 mm in width. See Figure D.1 casting, rolling and heat treatment, applicable to the
a) and b) for more details product submitted to the tests.
• the specimens shall be notched in through
thickness direction
5. Certification
• grain-coarsened HAZ (GCHAZ) shall be
targeted for the sampling position of the crack
5.1 Approval
tip
• the test specimens shall be in as-welded and Upon satisfactory completion of the survey, approval is
post-weld heat treated, if applicable granted by TL Society.
• three tests shall be performed at -10°C on each
butt weld test assembly 5.2 List of approved manufacturers
For grades H690 and above, dehydrogenation of The approved manufacturers are entered in a list
as-welded test pieces may be carried out by a low containing the types of steel and the main conditions of
temperature heat treatment, prior to CTOD testing. Heat approval.
treatment conditions of 200°C for 4 h are recommended,

and the exact parameters shall be notified with the CTOD 6. Renewal of approval
test results.
The validity of the approval is to be a maximum of five
years.
3.7.7 Crack susceptibility weld test (Hydrogen
crack test)
Renewal can be granted by a periodic inspection and
evaluation of the result of the inspection to the surveyor’s
Testing in accordance with national and international
satisfaction during the period (*).
recognised standards such as GB/T4675.1 and JIS Z
3158 for Y-groove weld crack test. Minimum preheat
Where for operational reasons, the renewal audit falls
temperature is to be determined and the relationship of
outside the period of approval, the manufacturer will still
minimum preheat temperature with thickness is to be be considered as approved if agreement to this audit
derived. date is made within the original period of approval, in this
instance if successful, the extension of approval will be
3.7.8 Other tests back dated to the original renewal date.
Additional tests may be required in the case of newly Manufacturers who have not produced the approved
developed types of steel, outside the scope of this grades and products during the period between renewals
Section (TL- R W16), or when deemed necessary by TL. may be required to either carry out approval tests or, on
the basis of the statistical data of results of production of
4. Results similar grades of products, at the discretion of TL, be
reapproved.
All the results are to comply with the requirements of the
scheme of initial approval. 7. Removal of the approval
The subject manufacturer shall submit all the test results During the period of validity the approval may be
together with the manufacturing specification containing reconsidered in the following cases:
all the information required under Appendix D, item 2,
and manufacturing records relevant to steel making, 7.1 In service failures, traceable to product quality.

Table D.1 Tests on base material
Position and direction of

test specimens
1 Chemical analysis (ladle Top a) Contents of C, Mn, Si, P, S, Ni, Cr, Mo, Al, N, Nb, V, Ti,
B, Zr, Cu, As, Sn, Bi, Pb, Ca, Sb, O, H are to be reported.
and product (1))
b) Carbon equivalent calculation, and/or
c) Pcm calculation, as applicable.
2 Segregation examination Top Sulphur prints (2) are to be taken from plate edges which
are perpendicular to the axis of the ingot or slab. These
sulphur prints are to be approximately 600 mm long taken
from the centre of the edge selected, i.e. on the ingot
centreline, and are to include the full plate thickness.
3 Micrographic Top a) Grain size determination. Ferrite and/or prior austenite

grain size should be determined.
examination (3)
b) All photomicrographs are to be taken at x 100 and 500
magnification.
c) Non-metallic inclusion contents/Cleanliness
The level of non-metallic inclusions and impurities in term
of amount, size, shape and distribution shall be controlled
by the manufacturer. The standards of the micrographic
examination methods ISO 4967 or equivalent standards
are applicable. Alternative methods for demonstrating the
non-metallic inclusions and impurities may be used by the
manufacturer.
4 Tensile test Top and bottom - Yield strength (ReH), Tensile strength (Rm), Elongation
longitudinal and transverse (A5), Reduction in Area (RA) and Y/T ratio are to be
direction reported.
5a Charpy Impact tests on Top and bottom Testing temperature [°C]

unstrained specimens for
grades (4)
TL-AH Longitudinal and +20 0 -20
transverse direction
TL-DH 0 -20 -40
TL-EH 0 -20 -40 -60
TL-FH -20 -40 -60 -80
5b Charpy Impact tests on Top Deformation of 5 % + 1 hour at 250 °C
strain aged specimens
for grades (4)(5)
TL-AH Either longitudinal or +20 0 -20
TL-DH transverse 0 -20 -40
TL-EH 0 -20 -40 -60
TL-FH -20 -40 -60 -80

Table D.1 Tests on base material (continued)
Position and direction of

test specimens
6 Drop weight test Top The test is to be performed only on plates in accordance
with ASTM E208. The NDTT is to be determined and
photographs of the tested specimens are to be taken and
enclosed with the test report.
7 Through thickness Top and bottom Optional for grades with improved through thickness
properties, testing in accordance with H.
tensile test
8 Weldability test (6)

a) Butt weld assembly Top Cross weld tensile, Charpy impact test on WM, FL, FL+2,
FL+5, FL+20 Macro examination and hardness survey,
as-welded
CTOD at -10°C on Grain-coarsened HAZ.
b) Butt weld assembly Top Cross weld tensile, Charpy impact test on WM, FL, FL+2,
FL+5, FL+20 Macro examination and hardness survey,
(PWHT),if applicable
CTOD at -10°C on Grain-coarsened HAZ.
c) Y-shape weld crack test Top

(Hydrogen crack test)
Notes :
(1) The product analyses should be taken from the tensile specimen. The deviation of the product analysis from the ladle
analysis shall be permissible in accordance with the limits given in the manufacturing specification.
(2) Other tests than Sulphur prints for segregation examination may be applied and subject to acceptance by TL.
(3) The micrographs are to be representative of the full thickness. For thick products in general at least three examinations are
to be made at surface, 1/4t and 1/2t of the product.
(4) In addition to the determination of the absorbed energy value, also the lateral expansion and the percentage crystallinity are
to be reported.
(5) Strain ageing test is to be carried out on the thickest plate.
(6) Weldability test is to be carried out on the thickest plate.

7.2 Non conformity of the product revealed during

fabrication and construction.
7.3 Discovered failure of the Manufacturer’s quality

system.
7.4 Changes brought by the Manufacturer, without

preliminary agreement of TL, to the extent of
invalidating the approval.
7.5 Evidence of major non conformities during

testing of the products.
(*) The provision for renewal of approval is also to be

applied to all grades and products which were approved
Figure D.1 a) - For plate thickness t ≤ 50 mm, CTOD by TL prior to an implementation of revision 3 of TL- R
test specimen is to be sampled in full thickness W16 regardless of the validity of certificate in existing
approvals. Such renewal is to be completed within five
years after the revision 3 becomes effective.
Figure D.1 b) - For plate thickness t > 50 mm,

subsidiary test specimen with a thickness of
maximum 50 mm in subsurface area is to be
sampled

Section 4 – Steel Pipes and Fittings 4- 1
SECTION 4
STEEL PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. GENERAL........................................................................................................................................................... 4- 2
1. Scope
2. Requirements to be met by Pipe Manufacturers
3. Manufacturing Process, Condition of Supply
4. General Characteristics of Pipes
6. Integrity of Pipes
7. General Requirements Applicable to the Material Properties
8. General Instructions for Testing
9. Marking
10. Certificates
B. PIPES FOR GENERAL PURPOSE .................................................................................................................... 4- 7
1. Scope
2. Heat Treatment
4. Testing
C. PIPES FOR HIGH TEMPERATURE SERVICES ............................................................................................. 4-10
1. Scope
2. Heat Treatment
3. Requirements Applicable to Material Properties
4. Testing
D. PIPES FOR LOW TEMPERATURE SERVICES ............................................................................................... 4-13
1. Scope
2. Heat Treatment
4. Testing
E. STAINLESS STEEL PIPES ............................................................................................................................. 4-18
1. Scope
2. Heat Treatment
4. Testing
F. FITTINGS ........................................................................................................................................................... 4-19
1. Scope
2. Steel Grades
5. Testing
6. Marking
7. Certification

4- 2 Section 4 – Steel Pipes and Fittings A
A. General 2. Requirements to be met by Pipe

Manufacturers
1. Scope
2.1 Pipe manufacturers wishing to supply pipes in
1.1 The general Rules contained in A. to be ob- accordance with these Rules are to be approved by TL.
served in the manufacture of seamless and welded Such approval is conditional upon their fulfilling the
steel pipes apply in conjunction with the following requirements stated in Section 1, B. and demonstrating
individual requirements B. to F. this to TL prior to the commencement of supplies.
The scope of these Rules embraces all pipes used in the 2.2 In addition, where welded pipes are manufac-
construction of steam boilers, pressure vessels and tured, the characteristics and the required quality of the
systems operating at ambient, high or low temperature. welded seam is to be subject to preliminary proof in the
form of a procedure approval test the extent of which
As regards steel pipes for structural applications, Section shall be determined by TL on a case to case basis.
3, B., C. and F. are to be applied respectively.
TL reserve the right to demand that a test of suitability be
1.2 As regards production and testing of products: carried out in the case of seamless pipes also where
these have to meet special requirements, e.g. in respect
Section 1, Manufacture, Testing and Certification of their impact energy at low temperatures or their
high-temperature strength characteristics.
Section 2, Mechanical and Technological Testing
Procedures 3. Manufacturing Process, Condition of Supply
are also to apply. 3.1 Pipe steels are to be made by basic oxygen
steelmaking processes, in an electric furnace or by other
1.3 Pipes conforming to national or international methods approved by TL. Unless otherwise specified,
standards or to manufacturers' specifications may be the steels are to be killed.
approved provided that their properties are equivalent to
the properties stipulated in these Rules or where special 3.2 Seamless pipes may be manufactured by hot or
approval has been granted for their use. References to cold rolling (cold pilger rolling), by hot pressing or by hot
standardized materials whose use is permitted are or cold drawing.
contained in the following individual Rules.
3.3 Welded ferritic steel pipes may be manufac-
1.4 Pipes conforming to these Rules may be tured by electrical induction or resistance pressure
designated either in accordance with the relevant stan- welding or by fusion welding of strip or plates, and may
dards or with the symbols shown in the Tables. In the be subjected to hot or cold reduction. For austenitic
latter case, pipes made up of carbon and steels tough at sub-zero temperatures and austenitic
carbon-manganese steels is to be identified by their stainless steels, only fusion welding processes may be
minimum tensile strength and, where applicable, by the used.
added letter W denoting high-temperature steel or T
denoting steel tough at sub-zero temperatures, while 3.4 All pipes are to be supplied in a properly
alloy pipes, with the exception of the austenitic grades, is heat-treated condition over their whole length according
to be identified by the symbols denoting their alloy con- to the requirements of B. to E.
tent.

A Section 4 – Steel Pipes and Fittings 4- 3
4. General Characteristics of Pipes 7. General Requirements Applicable to the

Material Properties
4.1 Pipes may not display any cracks. Defects liable
to have more than an insignificant effect on the use or 7.1 Chemical composition
further treatment of the pipes may be removed by
grinding within the minimum permissible wall thickness. The chemical composition of the pipe material (heat
Repair welds are not allowed. This Rule may be waived analysis) is to conform to the Tables contained in this
in the case of the seams of fusion-welded pipes. Section or, where applicable, in the relevant standards.
4.2 Pipes shall have a smooth inside and outside 7.2 Weldability
surface consistent with the method of manufacture.
Minor depressions or shallow longitudinal grooves due to Pipes in accordance with these Rules are to be weldable
the manufacturing process may be tolerated provided by established workshop methods. Wherever necessary,
that they do not impair the serviceability of the pipes and appropriate measures to safeguard quality are to be
the wall thickness remains within the permitted taken, e.g. preheating and/or subsequent heat
tolerances. treatments.
4.3 The upset metal on the outside of 7.3 Mechanical properties

pressure-welded pipes is to be removed. In pipes having
a bore of 20 mm or more, the height of the upset metal on The tensile strength, yield strength or proof stress,
the inside shall not exceed 0.3 mm. elongation and, where required, the 0.2 % or 1 % proof
stress at elevated temperatures and the impact energy is
4.4 On fusion-welded pipes, the inside and outside to conform to the Tables contained in this Section or,
weld reinforcement is not to exceed a value of 1 + 0.1 x where applicable, in the relevant standards. Irrespective
seam width (mm). of the provisions contained in the standards, pipes made
of steels tough at sub-zero temperatures is to at least
5. Dimensions, Dimensional and Geometrical meet the values specified in D. for the impact energy at
Tolerances the prescribed test temperature.
The dimensions and the dimensional and geometrical 7.4 Technological properties
tolerances of the pipes are to comply with the require-
ments specified in the standards. The relevant standards Pipes are to meet the requirements for the ring tests
are to be stated in the order and made known to the specified in 8.5.
Surveyor. The ends of pipes are to be cut off per-
pendicular to the pipe axis and are to be free from burrs. 8. General Instructions for Testing
Apart from pipes which are delivered in coils, all pipes
shall appear straight to the eye. 8.1 Test of chemical composition
6. Integrity of Pipes The pipe manufacturer - and, where appropriate, the

manufacturer of the starting material in the case of
All pipes are to be leak proof at the specified test pres- welded pipes - is to verify the composition of each heat
sures. and submit the relevant certificates to the Surveyor. All
the elements affecting compliance with the required
characteristics is to be specified in the certificates.

A product analysis is to be performed if there is any doubt characteristics, the 0.2 % or 1 % proof stress is to be
about the composition of pipes submitted for testing. proved by a hot tensile test performed on one test
specimen per heat and per pipe size. The test is to be
8.2 Test of mechanical properties performed at the temperature which approximates most
closely to the level of the operating temperature, rounded
8.2.1 For testing, pipes are to be grouped by steel off to the nearest 50 °C.
grades and dimensions - alloy steel pipes also by heats -
into test batches of 100 pipes for outside diameters ≤ 500 The test may be dispensed with in the case of pipes to
mm and into 50 pipes for outside diameters > 500 mm recognized standards, the high-temperature mechanical
Residual quantities of up to 50 pipes may be evenly properties of which are regarded as proven.
allocated to the various test batches. Where welded
pipes are concerned, a pipe is considered to be a cut 8.4 Notch bar impact test
length of not more than 30 m.
Where this test is specified for the individual types of
8.2.2 For the performance of the tensile tests, each pipe, the number of sets of specimens and the position of
two pipes are to be taken from the first two test batches the specimens is to be determined in the same way as
and one pipe each from every subsequent batch. Where the tensile test specimens called for in 8.2. The test is to
a consignment comprises only 10 pipes or less, it is to be be performed on Charpy V-notch specimens. In case of
sufficient to take one pipe. Normally, longitudinal test pipes with wall thickness above 30 mm, the longitudinal
specimens are to be taken from the sample pipes. Where axis of the specimens is to be located in a distance of 1/4
the diameter is 200 mm or more, test specimens may of the pipe wall from the outer surface or as close as
also be taken transverse to the pipe axis. From welded possible to this location.
pipes additionally test specimens are to be taken
transversely to the welded seam. The weld 8.5 Technological tests
reinforcement is to be machined off over the gauge
length. 8.5.1 The pipes selected for testing is to be subjected
to one of the ring tests specified in Table 4.1 provided
8.3 Determination of the 0.2% proof stress at that the wall thickness of the pipe does not exceed 40
elevated temperatures mm.
Where pipes are designed for use at elevated tempera- The number of test specimens depends on the applica-
tures on the basis of their high-temperature strength tion of the pipes and is stipulated in the requirements of
B. to E.
Table 4.1 Types of ring test
Nominal wall thickness t

Outside diameter of pipe [mm]
[mm]
t<2 2 ≤ t ≤16 16 < t ≤ 40
≤ 21.3 ring flattening test (1) (2) ring flattening test (1) (2) -
> 21.3 ≤ 146 ring flattening test (1) (2) ring expanding test (1) (2) ring flattening
> 146 - ring tensile test (3) ring tensile test (3)
(1) The drift expanding test may also be applied to welded pipes.
(2) The drift expanding test is applied to seamless and welded pipes in compliance with EN 10305-1 and -2 respectively.
(3) Instead of the ring tensile test, the flattening test is applied to pipes with bores of 100 mm.

A Section 4 – Steel Pipes and Fittings 4- 5
8.5.2 In the ring flattening test, the prescribed 8.6 Test of surface finish and dimensions
distance between the plates H is calculated by applying
the following formula: The finish of the inside and outside surface of each pipe
is to be inspected by the manufacturer. The diameters
(1 + C) a and wall thicknesses is also to be measured. The pipes
H=
C + a/D are then to be submitted to the Surveyor for final testing.
H = Distance between the platens [mm],

8.7 Non-destructive tests
a = Nominal wall thickness [mm],

8.7.1 The pipes are to be subjected to nondestructive
tests of the extent specified in B. to E. Where tests of
D = Outside diameter of pipe [mm],
greater scope are prescribed in the order or in the
relevant standards or specifications, these requirements
C = Constant determined by the steel grade (see
is to be complied with.
the provisions relating to technological tests
according to B. to E.).
8.7.2 Other test specifications require special ap-
proval by TL.
Where ring specimens of welded pipes are tested, the
weld is to be set at 90° to the direction of the compressive
8.7.3 The test equipment used for the continuous
load.
inspection of pipes is to be regularly calibrated using
pipes with artificial defects. The efficiency of the
8.5.3 In the ring expanding test, the change in the equipment is to be demonstrated to the Surveyor.
diameter of the specimen expanded to the point of
fracture is to at least equal the percentages shown in 8.8 Tightness test
Table 4.2 depending on the material.
8.8.1 All pipes are to be tested for leaks by the
Table 4.2 Diameter change in the ring expanding test manufacturer by applying the internal pressure test or,
where TL has given its consent, by a suitable non-
Minimum expansion [%] for ID/OD destructive testing method, e.g. eddy current or stray flux
Pipe ratios of techniques.

material ≥0.8 ≥0.7 ≥0.6 ≥0.5
≥0.9 <0.5 8.8.2 The internal pressure test shall normally be
<0.9 <0.8 <0.7 <0.6
performed at a standard hydraulic test pressure of 80
C and
8 10 12 20 25 30 bar. Where pipes are intended for an operating pressure
CMn-steels
of ≤ 25 bar, the test pressure may be reduced to a
Mo-CrMo-and standard value of 50 bar. In the case of thin-walled pipes
6 8 10 15 30 30
Ni-steels with large outside diameters, the test pressure is to be
Austenitic limited so as to ensure that the yield strength or 0.2 %
30
steels proof stress of the pipe material at room temperature is
not exceeded. Where, in exceptional cases, testing with
8.5.4 When the ring tensile test is applied to water is not possible, another testing medium may be
specimens of welded pipes, the weld is to be set at 90° to used after agreement with the Surveyor.
the direction of the tensile load.

8.8.3 Where a non-destructive method of testing is to
be used instead of the internal hydraulic pressure test it
8.5.5 In the drift expanding test applied to austenitic
is to be able to cover the whole circumference of the
steel pipes a 20 % expansion is to be achieved. Where
pipe. In addition, the method of testing is to conform to a
pipes are made of other steels, the requirements of the
recognized standard (e.g. EN ISO 10893) or to an
other relevant standards are to be achieved.
approved test specification. The efficiency of the method
is to be initially demonstrated to TL.

8.9 Retests in the event of failure of specimens - Heat numbers,
- Chemical composition of the heat,

If the requirements are not met by specimens subjected
to tensile, ring or notched bar impact tests or if, in the - Condition in which supplied or heat treatment
notched bar impact test, one individual value falls below applied,
70 % of the stipulated average value, then, before the
unit testing quantity is rejected, the procedure for retests - Marking,
described in Section 2 may be applied.
- Results of material testing.
9. Marking
10.2 The manufacturer is also to certify that all the
pipes have been successfully tightness tested and,
9.1 The manufacturer is to mark each pipe as
where applicable, have successfully undergone a non-
follows in at least one position about 300 mm from the
destructive test and a test of resistance to intercrystalline
end:
corrosion.
- Short designation or material number of the steel

10.3 If the steels of which the pipes are made are not
grade,
produced in the pipe works, a steelmaker's certificate is
to be handed to the Surveyor indicating the numbers and
- Manufacturer's mark,
analyses of the heats. The steelmaker shall have been
approved for the grades concerned. In case of doubt, the
- Additionally, the heat number or a heat code.
Surveyor is to be given facilities for carrying out a check.
9.2 Markings are to be applied with punches. Pipes
with sensitive surfaces or small wall thicknesses which 10.4 Where, in exceptional cases, pipes are tested
may be damaged by punches are to be marked by on the premises of a stockiest, the latter is to keep a clear
another method, e.g. by colored imprint, electrical record of the origin of the pipes, which shall bear the
engraving or rubber stamps. marking specified in 9. and, in the case of boiler tubes,
the stamp of the works inspector as well. In addition, the
10. Certificates Surveyor is to be furnished with a certificate issued by
the pipe manufacturer and containing the following
10.1 For each consignment the manufacturer is to details:
furnish the Surveyor with a certificate containing the
following details: - Number, dimensions and weight of the pipes
supplied,
- Purchaser and order number,
- Steel grade or material specification,
- Newbuilding and project number respectively,

- Method of pipe manufacture and condition in
where known,
which supplied or method of heat treatment,
- Quantity, dimensions and weight of delivered

- Heat numbers and analyses,
pipes,
- Confirmation that the tightness test and, where

- Strength category or pipe grade,
specified, the non-destructive test and test of re-
sistance to intercrystalline corrosion have been
- Steel grade or material specification,
carried out,
- Method of pipe manufacture,

- Marking.

B Section 4 – Steel Pipes and Fittings 4- 7
B. Pipes for General Purpose Subsequent heat treatment need not be applied to
hot-formed pipes if the hot forming operation ensures a
1. Scope corresponding structure of sufficient uniformity.
1.1 These Rules are applicable to seamless and 3. Requirements Applicable to the Material
welded pipes for use in pressure vessels, equipment, Properties
pipelines and pressure cylinders. Pipes conforming to
these rules are intended for use at normal ambient 3.1 Chemical composition
temperatures.
The chemical composition of the pipe steels is to conform
In general for these applications pipe grades according to the data given in Table 4.4 or, where appropriate, in
to Table 4.3 are to be used. the relevant standards or specifications.
If the pipes are intended for the manufacture of hydraulic 3.2 Mechanical properties
cylinders exposed to low service temperatures, minimum
impact energy of 41 J is to be proven on longitudinal The required values of tensile strength, yield strength
ISO-V specimens, which may lead to the application of and elongation specified in Table 4.5 or, where appro-
steels tough at sub-zero temperatures. priate, in the relevant standards or specifications is to be
met under test at room temperature.
1.2 Pipes conforming to these Rules may be used
for the cargo and processing equipment of gas tankers 3.3 Technological properties
provided that the relevant design temperatures are not
below 0 °C. When subjected to the ring tests, the pipes are to display
a capacity for deformation which meets the requirements
2. Heat Treatment specified in A.8.5.
The pipes are to be in a proper heat-treated condition. 3.4 Impact energy

This is generally to be achieved by normalizing.
The pipes shall at least satisfy the impact energy re-
quirements specified in Table 4.5.
Table 4.3 Standardized pipe grades
Corresponding pipe grade to

Strength category
EN 10216-1 (1) EN 10216-3 (1)
or pipe grade to
or or EN 10305-1 EN 10305-2
Table 4.5
EN 10217-1 (2) EN 10217-3 (2)
TL-R 360 P235 TR2 E 235+N E 235+N
TL-R 410 P265 TR2 P275 NL1 E275+N
TL-R 490 P355 N E 355+N E355+N
(1) Seamless.
(2) Welded.

4- 8 Section 4 – Steel Pipes and Fittings B
Table 4.4 Chemical composition of unalloyed steel pipes
Chemical composition [%]

Strength category or pipe
grade
C Simax. Mnmax. Pmax. Smax. Altot.
TL-R 360 0.17 0.35 1.20

TL-R 410 0.21 0.35 1.40 0.025 0.020 ≥ 0.020 (1)
TL-R 490 0.22 0.55 1.60
(1) This requirement does not apply if the steel contains a sufficient fraction of other nitrogen absorbing elements, which is to be
specified.
Table 4.5 Mechanical and technological properties of unalloyed steel pipes
Elongation Impact energy

Tensile strength Yield strength
at 0ºC
Strength category or pipe ReH
A KV (1)
grade Rm [N/mm²]
% min. J min.
[N/mm²] min.
Long. Transv. Long. Transv.
TL-R 360 360-500 235 25 23
TL-R 410 410-570 255 21 19 41 27
TL-R 490 490-650 310 19 17
(1) For pipes with wall thicknees >10 mm.
4. Testing Apart from that for fusion-welded pipes a weld seam

bend test in accordance with Chapter 3 - Welding may be
The following tests are to be performed: carried out, applying a bending mandrel diameter of 3 t.

4.3.2 To calculate the distance between the thrust
The manufacturer shall determine the chemical com- plates in the ring flattening test, the following values is to
position of each heat in accordance with A.8.1. be assigned to the constant C in the formula given in
A.8.5.2:
4.2 Tensile test
Pipes of strength category 360: C = 0.09
Specimens of the sample pipes selected in accordance
with A.8.2 shall be subjected to the tensile test. Other pipe grades: C = 0.07
4.3 Technological test 4.4 Notched bar impact test
4.3.1 Pipes with longitudinal weld seams and On the pipes selected in accordance with A.8.2, the
seamless pipes of grade TL-R490 are to be examined notched bar impact test is to be performed on transverse
according to one of the ring tests specified in A.8.5, Charpy V-notch specimens if the outside diameter is
namely two pipes of one test batch. ≥200 mm. If the outside diameter is < 200, longitudinal
specimens may be used.

B Section 4 – Steel Pipes and Fittings 4- 9
4.5 Test of surface finish and dimensions semi-automatic ultrasonic test in accordance with EN
ISO 10893-10, acceptance category U2, subcategory C
The tests specified in A.8.6 are to be performed. or shall be cut off.
4.6 Non-destructive tests 4.6.3 Non-destructive testing of fusion-welded

pipes
All pipes are to be subjected by the manufacturer to a
non-destructive test over their whole length in accor- TL-R 360 and TL-R 410:
dance with EN ISO10893.
The weld seam of SAW pipes of grades TL-R 360 and
4.6.1 Non-destructive testing of seamless pipes TL-R 410 is to be tested either according to EN ISO
10893-11, acceptance category U3 or EN ISO 10893-6
The pipes are to be subjected to a non-destructive test image quality class R2.
for detection of longitudinal defects according to EN ISO
10893-10, acceptance category U2, subcategory C or Areas in way of pipe ends which have not been tested
EN ISO 10893-3, acceptance category F2. Areas in way automatically, are to be subjected either to a manual or
of pipe ends which have not been tested automatically semi-automatic ultrasonic test in accordance with EN
are to be subjected either to a manual or semi-automatic ISO 10893-11, acceptance category U3 or are to be
ultrasonic test in accordance with EN ISO 10893-10, examined by means of radiographic testing according to
acceptance category U2, subcategory C or are to be cut EN ISO 10893-6, image quality class R2 or are to be cut
off. off.
4.6.2 Non-destructive testing of pressure- TL-R 490:

welded pipes
The weld seam of pipes of grade TL-R 490 is to be tested
TL-R 360 and TL-R 410: over its entire length according to EN ISO 10893-11,
acceptance category U2 or EN ISO 10893-6 image
The weld seam of pipe grades TL-R 360 and TL-R 410 is quality class R2.
to be tested over its entire length according to either EN
ISO 10893-2, acceptance category E3 or EN ISO Areas of the weld seam in way of pipe ends which have
10893-3, acceptance category F3 or EN ISO 10893-10, not been tested automatically are to be subjected either
acceptance category U3, subcategory C or EN ISO to a manual or semi-automatic ultrasonic test or to
10893-11, acceptance category U3, if applicable. radiographic testing as specified above or are to be cut
off.
Areas in way of pipe ends which have not been tested
automatically are to be subjected either to a manual or The base material is to be tested according to EN ISO
semi-automatic ultrasonic test in accordance with EN 10893-9, acceptance category U2.
ISO 10893-11, acceptance category U3 or shall be cut
off. The pipe ends have to be tested in accordance with EN
ISO 10893-8. Laminations in circumferential direction of
TL-R 490: more than 6 mm length are not permitted within the last
25 mm pipe length at each end.
Pipes of grade TL-R 490 are to be subjected to an ultra-
sonic test for detection of longitudinal defects according Plate or strip edges adjacent to the weld seam are to be
to EN ISO 10893-10, acceptance category U2, tested within a 15 mm wide zone along the weld seam in
subcategory C. accordance with EN ISO 10893-9 or EN ISO 10893-8,
acceptance category U2 in each case.
automatically, are to be subjected either to a manual or

4- 10 Section 4 – Steel Pipes and Fittings B,C
4.7 Tightness test 3. Requirements Applicable to the Material

Properties
All pipes are to be tightness tested by the manufacturer
in accordance with A.8.8 3.1 Chemical composition
The chemical composition shall conform to the data

C. Pipes for High Temperature Services
given in Table 4.7 or, where appropriate, the relevant
standards or specifications.
1. Scope

These Rules are applicable to seamless and welded
pipes made of carbon steel, carbon-manganese steel,
The required values of tensile strength, yield strength
Mo steel and Cr Mo steel and intended for steam boilers,
and elongation specified in Table 4.8 or, where appro-
pressure vessels, equipment and pipelines. Pipes
priate, in the relevant standards or specifications are to
conforming to these Rules are intended for application at
be met under test at room temperature.
both ambient and elevated temperatures.
3.3 Technological properties

For these applications, standardized pipe grades are
generally to be used. The appropriate pipe grades are
When subjected to the ring tests, the pipes shall display a
shown in Table 4.6.
capacity for deformation which meets the requirements
2. Heat Treatment specified in A.8.5.
Pipes are to be properly heat treated as follows: 3.4 Impact energy
2.1 Carbon steel, carbon-manganese steel and 0.3

The pipes shall at least satisfy the impact energy re-
Mo steel pipes: normalized
quirements specified in Table 4.8.
2.2 Pipes made of 1 Cr 0.5 Mo and 2.25 Cr 1 Mo

steels: quenched and tempered. 3.5 High-temperature characteristics
Subsequent heat treatment need not be applied to hot The 0.2 % proof stress at elevated temperatures is to
formed pipes covered by 2.1 if the hot forming operation satisfy the requirements specified in Table 4.9 or in the
ensures 2.1 corresponding structure of sufficient other relevant standards or specifications.
uniformity. Under these conditions, tempering may be

sufficient for the alloy pipes covered by 2.2.
Table 4.6 Standardized pipes made of high-temperature steel grades
Strength category Corresponding pipe grade to

or pipe grade EN 10216-2 EN 10217-2 ISO 9329-2 ISO 9330-2
TL-R 360 W P 235 GH P 235 GH PH 23 PH 23
TL-R 410 W P 265 GH P 265 GH PH 26 PH 26
TL-R 460 W - - PH 29 -
TL-R 510 W 20 Mn Nb 6 - PH 35 PH 35
0.3 Mo 16 Mo 3 16 Mo 3 16 Mo 3 16 Mo 3
1 Cr 0.5 Mo 13 Cr Mo 4-5 - 13 Cr Mo 4-5 13 Cr Mo 4-5
2.25 Cr 1 Mo 10 Cr Mo 9-10 - 11 Cr Mo 9-10 11 Cr Mo 9-10

C Section 4 – Steel Pipes and Fittings 4- 11
Table 4.7 Chemical compositions of high- temperature steel grades
Strength Chemical composition [%]

category or
pipe grade C Simax. Mn Pmax. Smax. Cr Mo Altot.
TL-R 360 W ≤ 0.16 0.35 ≤ 1.20
TL-R 410 W ≤ 0.20 0.40 ≤ 1.40 ≥ 0.020

≤ 0.30 ≤ 0.08
TL-R 460 W ≤ 0.22 0.40 ≤ 1.40 (1)
TL-R 510 W ≤ 0.23 0.55 0.80-1.50 0.025 0.020
0.3 Mo 0.12-0.20 0.35 0.40-0.90 - 0.25-0.35
1 Cr 0.5 Mo 0.10-0.17 0.35 0.40-0.70 0.70-1.15 0.40-0.60 ≤ 0.040
2.25 Cr 1 Mo 0.08-0.14 0.50 0.30-0.70 2.00-2.50 0.90-1.10
(1) This requirement does not apply if the steel contains a sufficient fraction of other nitrogen absorbing elements, which is to be
specified. If titanium is used, the manufacturer shall demonstrate that
(Al+Ti / 2) ≥ 0.20%.
Table 4.8 Mechanical and technological properties of pipes made of high-temperature steel at room
temperature
Elongation
Tensile strength Yield strength (L o = 5.65 ⋅ So ) Impact energy
Strength category or pipe ReH KV
A
grade Rm [N/mm²] [J] min.
[%] min.
[N/mm²] min.
TL-R 360 W 360-500 235 25 23
TL-R 410 W 410-570 255 21 19
TL-R 460 W 460-580 270 23 21
TL-R 510 W 510-650 355 19 17 41 27

0.3 Mo 450-600 270 22 20
1 Cr 0.5 Mo 440-590 290 22 20
2.25 Cr 1 Mo 480-630 280 20 18
3.6 Dimensional tolerances for collectors 0 % to + 25 % on the wall thickness
Seamless collector pipes and collectors with inside

- The lateral curvature of square pipes shall be as
diameters ≤ 600 mm are subject to the following di-
shown in Fig. 4.1.
mensional tolerances:
In square pipes, the inner corner radius r in relation to the

- On the inner or outer clear width: ± 1.0 % where
wall thickness s is to be at least:
the outer clear width is ≤ 225 mm, or ± 1.5 %
r ≥ s/3 ≥ 8 mm
where the outer clear width is > 225 mm.

4- 12 Section 4 – Steel Pipes and Fittings C
4.3 Technological test
4.3.1 The pipes, namely two pipes of one test batch,

is to undergo one of the ring tests specified in Table 4.1
as follows:
For fusion-welded pipes a weld seam bend test in

accordance with Chapter 3 - Welding, is to be carried out,
applying a bending mandrel diameter of 3 t.
301 and
b [mm] up to 100 101-200 201-300 4.3.2 To calculate the distance between the thrust
over
plates in the ring flattening test, the following values shall
f [mm] 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 be assigned to the constant C in the formula given in
A.8.5.2:
Figure 4.1 Tolerance on the lateral curvature of

Pipes of strength categories 360: C = 0.09
square pipes
Other pipe grades: C = 0.07
4. Testing

The test is to be carried out at room temperature on the
sample pipes selected in accordance with A.8.2, using
transverse Charpy V-notch specimens if the outside
diameter is ≥ 200 mm. If the outside diameter is < 200
mm, longitudinal specimens may be used.
position of each heat in accordance with A.8.1.
4.5 High-temperature tensile test

4.2 Tensile test
Where stipulated in A.8.3 or in the purchase order, the

Specimens of the sample pipes selected in accordance
0.2 % proof stress is to be determined by a
with A.8.2 are to be subjected to the tensile test.
high-temperature tensile test.
Table 4.9 Minimum values of yield strength RP0.2 at elevated temperatures
Minimum yield strength RP0.2 [N/mm ] at a temperature [C°] of

2
Steel grade
Material
Material code 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
number
TL-R 360 W 1.0345 198 187 170 150 132 120 112 108 -
TL-R 410 W 1.0425 226 213 192 171 154 141 134 128 -
TL-R 460 W - - - 235 215 175 155 145 135 -
TL-R 510 W 1.0471 312 292 264 241 219 200 186 174 -
0.3 Mo 1.5415 243 237 224 205 173 159 156 150 146
1 Cr 0.5 Mo 1.7335 264 253 245 236 192 182 174 168 166
2.25 Cr 1 Mo 1.7380 249 241 234 224 219 212 207 193 180

C,D Section 4 – Steel Pipes and Fittings 4- 13
4.6 Test of surface finish and dimensions 4.8 Tightness test
The tests specified in A.8.6 are to be performed. All pipes are to be tightness tested by the manufacturer
in accordance with A.8.8.
All pipes shall be subjected by the manufacturer to a D. Pipes for Low Temperature Services
non-destructive test according to EN ISO 10893 over
their whole length and cross section, see A.8.7. 1. Scope
4.7.1 Non-destructive testing of seamless and 1.1 These Rules are applicable to seamless or
pressure-welded pipes welded pipes made of carbon steel, carbon-manganese
steel, nickel alloy steel or austenitic steel tough at sub-
The pipes are to be subjected to a non-destructive test in zero temperatures and with wall thicknesses up to 25
order to detect longitudinal defects according to EN ISO mm which are intended for the cargo and processing
10893-10, acceptance category U2, subcategory C. equipment of gas tankers with design temperatures
below 0°C.
automatically are to be subjected either to a manual or For these applications, suitable standardized steel
semi-automatic ultrasonic test or shall are to be grades may also be used provided that they meet the
examined by means of radiographic testing according to requirements stated in these Rules, including especially
the procedures specified above or are to be cut off. those relating to impact energy at sub-zero tempera-
tures. For the appropriate pipe grades see Table 4.10.
4.7.2 Non-destructive testing of fusion-welded
pipes 1.2 Where the wall thickness of the pipes exceeds
25 mm, the requirements are subject to special agree-
The weld seam of the pipes is to be tested over its entire ment with TL.
length according to either EN ISO 10893-11, acceptance
category U2 or EN ISO 10893-6, image quality class R2. 1.3 If the pipes are used for cargo and process
equipment on gas tankers, the minimum design tem-
Areas in way of pipe ends which have not been tested peratures specified in Table 4.11 are applicable.
automatically are to be subjected either to a manual or
semi-automatic ultrasonic test or shall are to be 2. Heat Treatment
examined by means of radiographic testing according to
the procedures specified above or are to be cut off. Depending on the material, the pipes are to be supplied
in one of the heat treated conditions specified in Table
The base material is to be tested according to EN ISO 4.12.
10893-9, acceptance category U2.
For austenitic pipes, the heat treatment may be followed
The pipe ends have to be tested in accordance with EN by cold drawing entailing small degrees of deformation,
ISO 10893-8. Laminations in circumferential direction of provided that the required characteristics can be
more than 6 mm length are not permitted within the last maintained.
25 mm pipe length at each end. Plate or strip edges
adjacent to the weld seam are to be tested within a 15 Welded austenitic pipes may be delivered in the welded
mm wide zone along the weld seam in accordance with state without post-weld heat treatment provided that a
EN ISO 10893-9 or EN ISO 10893-8, acceptance test of the procedure has demonstrated that the
category U2 in each case.

4-14 Section 4 – Steel Pipes and Fittings D
characteristics of the material are satisfactory and that 3.2 Resistance of austenitic pipe grades to
the strips or plates used for their manufacture are intercrystalline corrosion
solution annealed. In addition, any scale, residual
slagand temper colours on the inner and outer surfaces Austenitic steel pipes shall be resistant to intercrystalline
are to be carefully removed, e.g. by pickling, grinding or
corrosion. Where welding is not followed by further heat
sand blasting.
treatment (quenching), only those pipe grades may be
used which are corrosion-resistant in the welded
3. Requirements Applicable to the Material
condition, e.g. steels stabilized with Ti or Nb or steels
Properties
with carbon contents of C ≤ 0.03 %, see Table 4.13.

The chemical composition of the pipe steels is to conform

The values for tensile strength, yield strength or 0.2 % or
to the data in Table 4.13 or, where appropriate, to the
1 % proof stress, and elongation specified in Table 4.14
other relevant standards or specifications.
or, where appropriate, in the other relevant standards or
specifications shall be satisfied under test at room
temperature.
Table 4.10 Comparably suitable pipe grades of steels for low temperature services according to standards
ASTM
Strength EN 10216-4 (1) EN 10216-3 (1) EN 10216-5 (1) ISO 9329-3 (1) ISO 9329-4 (1)
(3)
category or or or or or or
A 312/A
pipe grade EN 10217-4 (2) EN 10217-3 (2) EN 10217-7 (2) ISO 9330-3 (2) ISO 9330-6 (2)
312M
P 215 NL
TL-R 360 T PL 25
P 255 QL
P 275 NL 1
TL-R 390 T P 265 NL
P 275 NL 2
P 355 NL 1
TL-R 490 T
P 355 NL 2
TL-R 0.5 Ni 13 Mn Ni 6-3 13 Mn Ni 6-3
TL-R 3.5 Ni 12 Ni 14 12 Ni 14
TL-R 9 Ni X 10 Ni 9 X 10 Ni Mn 9
1.4306 X 2 Cr Ni 19-11 X 2 Cr Ni 1810 TP 304 L
1.4404 X 2 Cr Ni Mo 17-13-2 X 2 Cr Ni Mo 17-12 TP 316 L
1.4541 X 6 Cr Ni Ti 18-10 X 6 Cr Ni Ti 18-10 TP 321
1.4550 X 6 Cr Ni Nb 18-10 X 6 Cr Ni Nb 18-10 TP 347
1.4571 X 6 Cr Ni Mo Ti 17-12-2 X 6 Cr Ni Mo Ti 17-12
(1) Seamless pipes.

(2) Welded pipes.
(3) The notched bar impact energies according to Tablo 4.14 are to be demonstrated..

D Section 4 – Steel Pipes and Fittings 4- 15
Table 4.11 Minimum design temperatures 3.5 Low-temperature impact energy
Strength category or Minimum design The required impact energy values specified in Table
pipe grade temperature [° C] 4.14 for the pipe grade concerned is to be met at the
TL-R 360 T prescribed test temperatures. This requirement is also
TL-R 390 T -55 (1) applicable to comparable pipe grades conforming to the
TL-R 490 T
standards or specifications, irrespective of the values
TL-R 0.5 Ni -55
specified therein.
TL-R 3.5 Ni -90
TL-R 9 Ni -165 4. Testing
Austenitic pipes -165

(1) Only applicable if the required impact energy has
been demonstrated at the time of the approval tests.
Table 4.12 Heat treatment of steel pipes tough at The chemical composition of each heat is to be verified
sub-zero temperatures
by the pipe manufacturer, or, where appropriate in the
case of welded pipes, by the manufacturer of the starting
Strength category
Type of heat treatment material in accordance with A.8.1.
or pipe grade
TL-R 360 T
Normalized or quenched 4.2 Test of resistance to intercrystalline
TL-R 390 T
and tempered corrosion
TL-R 490 T
TL-R 0.5 Ni Normalized 4.2.1 The resistance to intercrystalline corrosion is to
Normalized and tempered be tested on austenitic steel pipes where this is called for
TL-R 3.5 Ni
or quenched and tempered in the order or where the pipes are made of materials
which do not meet the requirements in respect of the
Double normalized and
TL-R 9 Ni tempered or quenched and limited carbon content or sufficient stabilization with
tempered titanium or niobium, see 3.2.
Seamless austenitic Solution annealed and

4.2.2 The testing of resistance to intercrystalline
pipes quenched
corrosion is to be performed in accordance with ISO
Solution annealed and 3651-2 on at least two samples per heat. The test
Welded austenitic pipes quenched or in the welded specimens shall are to be treated as follows:
condition
- Steels with C ≤ 0.03 % and stabilized steels are to

undergo sensitizing heat treatment (700 °C, 30
3.4 Technological properties min., water quench).
In the ring tests, the pipes are to exhibit a capacity for - All other grades of steel are to be in the condition in
deformation which satisfies the requirements stated in which they are supplied.
A.8.5.

4-16 Section 4 – Steel Pipes and Fittings D
Table 4.13 Chemical composition of steel pipes for low temperature services
Strength Chemical composition [%]

category or
pipe grade Cmax. Si Mn Pmax. Smax. Cr Ni Mo N Others
TL-R 360 T 0.16 ≤ 0.40 0.40-1.20

Almet ≥
TL-R 390 T 0.16 ≤ 0.40 0.50-1.50 0.025 0.020 ≤ 0.3 ≤ 0.3 ≤ 0.08 - 0.015 (1)
(2)
TL-R 490 T 0.18 0.10-0.50 ≥ 0.90
Almet ≥
TL-R 0.5 Ni 0.16 ≤ 0.50 0.85-1.70 0.025 0.015 ≤ 0.15 0.30-0.85 ≤ 0.10 - 0.015 (1)
(3)
TL-R 3.5 Ni 0.15 0.025 3.25-3.75 -

0.15-0.35 0.30-0.85 0.010 - - V ≤ 0.05
TL-R 9 Ni 0.13 0.020 8.5-9.5 ≤ 0.10
1.4306 0.030 18.0-20.0 10.0-12.0 - ≤ 0.10

-
1.4404 0.030 16.5-18.5 10.0-13.0 2.0-2.5 ≤ 0.10
Ti ≥ 5x%C
1.4541 0.08 17.0-19.0 9.0-12.0 - -
≤ 0.70
≤ 1.00 ≤ 2.00 0.045 0.015
Nb ≥
1.4550 0.08 17.0-19.0 9.0-12.0 - - 10x%C ≤
1.00
Ti ≥ 5x%C
1.4571 0.08 16.5-18.5 10.5-13.5 2.0-2.5 -
≤ 0.70
(1) Al may be wholly or partly replaced by other fine grain elements.

(2) Residual elements: Cu ≤ 0.20; total Cr + Cu + Mo ≤ 0.45 %
(3) Residual elements: Nb ≤ 0.05; Cu ≤ 0.15; V ≤ 0.05; total ≤ 0.30
Table 4.14 Mechanical and technological properties of steel pipes for low temperature services
Elongation
Tensile Yield strength or proof Impact energy KV (2)
Strength A [%]
strength stress [J] min.
category or min.
Rm ReH or RP0.2, RP0.1 (1)
pipe grade
[N/mm²] [N/mm²] min. Test
temperature[C°]
TL-R 360 T 360-490 255 25 23 5°C below design

temperature,
TL-R 390 T 390-510 275 24 22
min. -20°C
TL-R 490 T 490-630 355 22 20
41 (29) 27 (19)
TL-R 0.5 Ni 490-610 355 22 20 -60
TL-R 3.5 Ni 440-620 345 22 20 -95
TL-R 9 Ni 690-840 510 20 18 -196
1.4306 460-680 215 40 35
1.4404 490-690 225 40 30
1.4541 500-730 235 35 30 -196 - 60

1.4550 510-740 240 35 30
1.4571 500-730 245 35 30
(1) RP0.2 or ReH applies to ferritic steels, RP0.1 austenitic steels.

(2) Average value of 3 specimens; the values in brackets are the indivudual minima.

D Section 4 – Steel Pipes and Fittings 4- 17
4.3 Tensile test 4.5 Notched bar impact test
The tensile test is to be performed on the sample pipes 4.5.1 On pipes with wall thicknesses ≥ 6 mm, the
selected in accordance with A.8.2. notched bar impact test is to be performed on Charpy
V-notch specimens taken from each sample pipe
4.4 Technological tests selected in accordance with A.8.2.
4.4.1 The pipes shall undergo one of the ring tests If the dimensions of the pipe are such that test speci-
specified in Table 4.1. For the performance of the tests, mens can be taken without straightening, these are to be
specimens shall be taken from one end of two pipes of a taken transverse to the pipe axis. In such cases an
test batch. additional (transverse) set of specimens are to be taken
from fusion-welded pipes so that the notch is located in
4.4.2 To calculate the distance between the platens the middle of the weld metal.
to be used in the ring flattening test, the values according
to Table 4.15 shall be assigned to the constant C in the In all other cases the specimens are to be taken parallel
formula given in A.8.5.2: to the pipe axis.
Table 4.15 4.5.2 If the wall thickness of the pipe does not allow
the preparation of specimens with the standard
Strength category or Constant dimensions (10 x 10 mm), specimens measuring 7.5 x 10
pipe grade C mm or 5 x 10 mm are to be used. The requirements
applicable to these specimens as compared with the
TL-R 360 T 0.09
standard specimens are shown in Table 4.16.
TL-R 390 T and
TL-R 490 T 0.07
4.6 Test of surface finish and dimensions
TL-R 0.5 Ni
TL-R 3.5 Ni 0.08 Tests are to be performed in accordance with A.8.6.

TL-R 9 Ni 0.06
Austenitic pipes 0.10
All pipes are to be subjected by the manufacturer to a

non-destructive test over their whole length according to
EN ISO 10893.
Table 4.16 Impact energy for specimens of reduced size
Required impact energy (1) in Required impact energy KV with specimens measuring
Table 4.14 (standard
specimens) 7.5 mm x 10 mm 5 mm x 10 mm
Minimum Minimum
[J] Average value Average value
individual value individual value
min. [J] min. [J] min.
[J] [J]
27 (19) 22 16 18 13
41 (29) 34 24 27 22
(1) Average value of 3 specimens; values in brackets apply to the min. individual value

4- 18 Section 4 – Steel Pipes and Fittings D,E
4.7.1 Non-destructive testing of seamless and supplied wit hout post-weld heat treatment provided that
pressure-welded pipes they continue to possess the required chemical stability
in this condition and that the conditions stated in D.2. are
The pipes are to be subjected to a non-destructive test complied with.
in order to detect longitudinal defects according to EN
ISO 10893-10, acceptance category U2, subcategory C 3. Requirements Applicable to the Material
or EN ISO 10893-3 (only for ferromagnetic pipe grades), Properties
acceptance category F2.
automatically, are to be subjected either to a manual or The chemical composition of the pipe steels is to conform
semi-automatic ultrasonic test according to EN ISO to recognized standards or specifications.
10893-10, acceptance category U2, subcategory C or
shall be cut off. 3.2 Resistance to intercrystalline corrosion
4.8 Tightness test In the condition in which they are supplied, the pipes are
to be resistant to intercrystalline corrosion.
All pipes are to be tightness tested by the manufacturer
in accordance with A.8.8. Where the welding is not to be followed by heat treatment
(solution annealing), only those pipe grades may be used
which are corrosion-resistant in the welded condition,
E. Stainless Steel Pipes e.g. steels stabilized with Ti or Nb or steels with carbon
contents of C ≤ 0.03 %.
1. Scope
1.1 These Rules are applicable to seamless and
welded austenitic and austenitic-ferritic stainless steel The required values of tensile strength, 1 % proof stress
pipes to be used for the cargo and processing equipment and elongation are to be satisfied in tests at room
on chemical tankers and for other lines, vessels and temperature in accordance with the standard or the
equipment where chemical stability is required. Suitable recognized specification.
pipe grades conforming to international or national
standards and to established and recognized 3.4 Technological properties
specifications together with the austenitic pipe grades
specified in D., Table 4.13 are appropriate to these In the ring tests, the pipes are to exhibit a capacity for
applications subject to the following conditions relating to deformation which satisfies the requirements stated in
manufacture and testing. A.8.5.
1.2 Pipe grades are to be so selected with regard to 3.5 High-temperature characteristics
subsequent manufacturing operations, e.g. welding, that
they possess the chemical stability demanded by the Where pipes are used at elevated temperatures, the
intended application. required values for the 0.2 % or 1 % proof stress pre-
scribed in the relevant standards or recognized specifi-
2. Heat Treatment cations are to be met at the corresponding temperature
level.
The pipes are to be supplied in solution-annealed and
quenched condition, although welded pipes may also be

E,F Section 4 – Steel Pipes and Fittings 4- 19
3.6 Impact energy is to be performed on one end of 2 % of the pipes. To

calculate the distance between the platens to be used in
The required impact energy values are to be satisfied in the ring flattening test, a value of 0.10 is to be assigned to
tests at room temperature in accordance with the rele- the constant C in the formula given in A.8.5.2.
vant standard or the recognized specification.
4.5 High-temperature tensile test
4. Testing
Where called for in A.8.3 or stipulated in the purchase
The following tests are to be performed: order, the 0.2 % or 1 % proof stress is to be determined
by a high-temperature tensile test.
The chemical composition of each heat is to be dem-
onstrated by the pipe manufacturer, or, where appro- Tests shall be performed in accordance with A.8.6.
priate in the case of welded pipes, by the manufacturer of
the starting material in accordance with A.8.1. 4.7 Non-destructive tests
4.2 Test of resistance to intercrystalline All pipes are to be subjected by the manufacturer to
corrosion non-destructive testing over their entire length according
to EN ISO 10893.
Depending on the application and grade of the pipes, a
test of resistance to intercrystalline corrosion is to be The pipes are to be subjected to a non-destructive test in
performed on the following pipes: order to detect longitudinal defects according to EN ISO
10893-10, acceptance category U2, subcategory C.
4.2.1 Pipes for use on chemical tankers irrespective
of the type of material Areas in way of pipe ends which have not been tested
automatically are to be subjected either to a manual or
4.2.2 Pipes which do not meet the requirements in semi-automatic ultrasonic test according to EN ISO
respect of stabilization or limited carbon content 10893-8, acceptance category U2, subcategory C or are
specified in 3.2 to be cut off.
4.2.3 Pipes made of stabilized steels or steels with 4.8 Tightness test
limited carbon contents intended for applications not
covered, where such testing is specially prescribed in All pipes are to be tightness tested by the manufacturer
view of the anticipated corrosive attack in accordance with A.8.8.
The test conditions shall be as prescribed in D.4.2.2.

F. Fittings
4.3 Tensile test
1. Scope
The tensile test is to be performed on specimens of the
sample pipes selected in accordance with A.8.2. These rules are applicable to seamless and welded
carbon, carbon manganese, low alloy and alloy steel
4.4 Technological tests fittings fabricated from pipes or plates and intended for
piping systems or pressure plants.
Unless more extensive testing is prescribed in the
standards, one of the ring tests specified in A., Table 4.1

4- 20 Section 4 – Steel Pipes and Fittings F
2. Steel Grades 5. Testing
2.1 Fittings fabricated from pipes are to meet the 5.1 Mechanical and technological tests
requirements of A. to E., depending on the applications,
with respect to manufacture, chemical composition and The fittings are to be presented for testing in batches
mechanical properties. Fittings may be hot or cold homogeneous for cast and in the number of each sample
formed from sections of pipes. selected in accordance with A.8.2.
2.2 Fittings fabricated from plates are to meet the A Brinell hardness test HB is to be performed on 10% of
requirements of Section 3, depending on the the fittings, with a minimum of 3 units, to verify the
applications, with respect to manufacture, chemical homogeneity of the batch. The difference in the hardness
composition and mechanical properties. value may not be greater than 30 units.
Fittings may be made from sections of plates formed in Two fittings per batch are to be selected for the
one or more shells and welded together. The relevant mechanical and technological tests stated in A. to E.
welding process is to be approved. depending on the application.
2.3 Unless otherwise required, the material used for The tensile tests are to be performed on the hardest and
the fabrication of the fittings is to have a work’s softest fittings.
certificate.
Unless otherwise specified during the approval
All fittings are to be in the heat treated or hot working procedure or in the order, checks with radiographic
condition specified for the corresponding material. examination are in general to be performed on welded
fittings with outside diameter greater than 75 mm, at the
Fittings in ferritic steel manufactured by hot forming may surveyor’s discretion.
be delivered in the normalized forming condition in lieu of
normalizing, provided that evidence is given of the 6. Marking
equivalence of such condition.
The requirements specified in A,9 are to be complied
Fittings manufactured by cold forming are in general to with.
be submitted to heat treatment after forming.
7. Certification
The heat treatment procedure of welded fittings is to be
defined during the approval tests. The requirements specified in A,10 are to be complied
with.
The mechanical properties of the finished fittings are to

comply with the values specified for the original materials
(plate or pipe).

Section 5 – Steel Forgings 5-1
SECTION 5
STEEL FORGINGS
Page
A. GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................................ 5- 3
1. Scope
2. Manufacture
3. Quality of Forgings
5. Heat Treatment (Including Surface Hardening and Straightening)
6. Dimensions; Dimensional and Geometrical Tolerances
7. Tightness
8. Mechanical and Technological Properties
9. Testing
10. Inspection
11. Non-Destructive Tests
12. Rectification of Defective Forgings
13. Identification of Forgings
14. Certification
B. FORGINGS FOR HULL AND MACHINERY CONSTRUCTION........................................................................ 5- 10
1. Scope
2. Steel Grades
6. Testing
C. FORGINGS FOR CRANKSHAFTS ................................................................................................................... 5- 14
1. Scope
2. Steel Grades
4. Manufacture and Condition of Supply
5. Testing
D. FORGINGS FOR GEARS ................................................................................................................................. 5- 16
1. Scope
2. Steel Grades
3. Welded Wheels
4. Heat Treatment
5. Dimensions, Dimensional and Geometric Tolerances
7. Testing
E. FORGINGS FOR BOILERS, PRESSURE VESSELS AND SYSTEMS ............................................................ 5- 20
1. Scope
2. Steel Grades
3. Heat Treatment and Condition of Supply
5. Testing

5-2 Section 5 – Steel Forgings
F. STEEL FORGINGS FOR LOW TEMPERATURE SERVICES .......................................................................... 5- 22

1. Scope
2. Steel Grades
6. Testing
G. NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING OF FORGED COMPONENTS ....................................................................... 5- 25
1. Scope
2. Testing
3. Visual Testing (VT)
5. Penetrant Testing (PT)
H. LIST OF FORGED COMPONENTS FOR WHICH NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTS ARE REQUIRED ................ 5- 32
I. CLASSIFYING OF INSPECTION ZONES FOR MAGNETIC PARTICLE TESTING (MT) ................................ 5- 33
J. CLASSIFYING OF INSPECTION ZONES FOR ULTRASONIC TESTING (UT) ............................................... 5- 38

A Section 5 – Steel Forgings 5-3
A. General 2.5.1 For forgings made from ingots or from forged

blooms or billets, 3:1 where L>D and 1.5:1 where L≤D.
1. Scope
2.5.2 For forgings made from rolled products, 4:1
1.1 These rules are applicable to steel forgings where L>D and 2:1 where L≤D.
intended for hull and machinery applications such as
rudder stocks, pintles, propeller shafts, crankshafts, 2.5.3 For forgings made by upsetting, the length
connecting rods, piston rods, gearing, etc. Where after upsetting is to be not more than one-third of the
relevant, these rules are also applicable to material for length before upsetting or, in the case of an initial
forging stock and to rolled bars intended to be machined forging reduction of at least 1.5:1 not more than one-half
into components of simple shape. of the length before upsetting.
1.2 These rules are applicable only to steel 2.5.4 For rolled bars, 6:1.
forgings where the design and acceptance tests are
related to mechanical properties at ambient L and D are the length and diameter of the part of the
temperature. For other applications, additional forging respectively under consideration.
requirements may be necessary especially when the
forgings are intended for service at low or high 2.6 The shaping of forgings or rolled slabs and
temperatures. billets by flame cutting, scarfing or arc-air gouging is to
be undertaken in accordance with recognized good
1.3 Alternatively, forgings which comply with practice and, unless otherwise approved, is to be
national or proprietary specifications may be accepted carried out before the final heat treatment.
provided such specifications give reasonable
equivalence to these rules or otherwise specially Preheating is to be employed when necessitated by the
approved or required by TL. composition and/or thickness of the steel. For certain
components, subsequent machining of all flame cut
2. Manufacture surfaces may be required.
2.1 Forgings are to be made at a manufacturer 2.7 When two or more forgings are joined by
approved by TL. welding to form a composite component, the proposed
welding procedure specification is to be submitted for
2.2 The steel used in the manufacture of forgings approval. Welding procedure tests may be required.
is to be made by a process approved by TL.
2.8 For crankshafts, where grain flow is required in
2.3 Adequate top and bottom discards are to be the most favourable direction having regard to the mode
made to ensure freedom from piping and harmful of stressing in service, the proposed method of
segregations in the finished forgings. manufacture may require special approval by TL. In
such cases, tests may be required to demonstrate that a
2.4 The plastic deformation is to be such as to satisfactory structure and grain flow are obtained.
ensure soundness, uniformity of structure and
satisfactory mechanical properties after heat treatment. 3. Quality of Forgings
2.5 The reduction ratio is to be calculated with All forgings are to be free from surface or internal
reference to the average cross-sectional area of the defects which would be prejudicial to their proper
cast material. Where the cast material is initially upset, application in service.
this reference area may be taken as the average
cross- sectional area after this operation. Unless 4. Chemical Composition
otherwise approved the total reduction ratio is to be at
least: 4.1 All forgings are to be made from killed steel
and the chemical composition is to be appropriate for

5-4 Section 5 – Steel Forgings A
the type of steel, dimensions and required mechanical Normalized and tempered
properties of the forgings being manufactured. Quenched and tempered
4.2 The chemical composition of each heat is to be 5.2.2 Alloy steels

determined by the manufacturer on a sample taken
preferably during the pouring of the heat. When multiple Quenched and tempered
heats are tapped into a common ladle, the ladle
analysis shall apply. For all types of steel the tempering temperature is to be
not less than 550ºC. Where forgings for gearing are not
4.3 The chemical composition is to comply with the intended for surface hardening, lower tempering
overall limits given in Tables 5.2 and 5.3 or, where temperature may be allowed.
applicable, the requirements of the approved
specification. 5.3 Alternatively, alloy steel forgings may be
supplied in the normalized and tempered condition, in
4.4 At the option of the manufacturer, suitable which case the specified mechanical properties are to
grain refining elements such as aluminium, niobium or be agreed with TL.
vanadium may be added. The content of such elements
is to be reported. 5.4 Heat treatment is to be carried out in properly
constructed furnaces which are efficiently maintained
4.5 Elements designated as residual elements in and have adequate means for control and recording of
the individual specifications are not to be intentionally temperature. The furnace dimensions are to be such as
added to the steel. The content of such elements is to to allow the whole furnace charge to be uniformly
be reported. heated to the necessary temperature. In the case of
very large forgings alternative methods of heat
4.6 Carbon equivalent (Ceq) values, when used in treatment will be considered specially by TL.
this section, are calculated using the following formula:
Sufficient thermocouples are to be connected to the
furnace charge to measure and record that its
Mn Cr  Mo  V Ni  Cu temperature is adequately uniform unless the
C eq  C   %
6 5 15 temperature uniformity of the furnace is verified at
regular intervals.
5. Heat Treatment (Including Surface
Hardening and Straightening) 5.5 If for any reasons a forging is heated
subsequently for further hot working the forging is to be
5.1 At an appropriate stage of manufacture, after reheat treated.
completion of all hot working operations, forgings are to
be suitably heat treated to refine the grain structure and 5.6 Where it is intended to surface harden
to obtain the required mechanical properties. forgings, full details of the proposed procedure and
specification are to be submitted for approval. For the
5.2 Except as provided in 5.7 and 5.8 forgings are purpose of this approval, the manufacturer may be
to be supplied in one of the following conditions: required to demonstrate by test that the proposed
procedure gives a uniform surface layer of the required.
5.2.1 Carbon and carbon-manganese steels Hardness and depth and that it do not impair the
soundness and properties of the steel.
Fully annealed
Normalized 5.7 Where induction hardening or nitriding is to be
carried out, forgings are to be heat treated at an

appropriate stage to a condition suitable for this 8.2 Notched bar impact test
subsequent surface hardening.
The impact energy values specified for the various steel
5.8 Where carburizing is to be carried out, forgings grades are to be met by the average result produced by
are to be heat treated at an appropriate stage (generally 3 specimens, one of which may give a result below the
either by full annealing or by normalizing and tempering) specified average value although not lower than 70% of
to a condition suitable for subsequent machining and the specified average value.
carburizing.
8.3 Other characteristics
5.9 If a forging is locally reheated or any

Where special characteristics are specified for particular
straightening operation is performed after the final heat
grades of steel, e.g. resistance to intercrystalline corro-
treatment consideration is to be given to a subsequent
sion or 0.2% proof stress at high temperatures, these
stress relieving heat treatment.
characteristics are to be verified by appropriate tests.
5.10 The forge is to maintain records of heat 9. Testing

treatment identifying the furnace used, furnace charge,
date, temperature and time at temperature. The records 9.1 Proof of chemical composition
are to be presented to the surveyor on request.
The manufacturer is to determine the chemical
6. Dimensions; Dimensional and Geometrical composition of each heat and present a corresponding
Tolerances certificate to the Surveyor. The certificate is to indicate
the chemical composition of the heat characteristic of
the steel grade concerned.
The dimensions and the dimensional and geometrical
tolerances are governed by the values given in the
Should there be any doubt as to the composition or
drawings accompanying the order or, where applicable,
where the connection between the certificate and the
in the relevant standards. Instructions on this point are
forgings cannot be proved, a product analysis is to be
to be given in the order documents and are to be made
performed.
known to the Surveyor.
9.2 Test of mechanical properties and selection

7. Tightness of specimens
Hollow forgings subjected to internal pressure by the 9.2.1 The mechanical properties are to be
operating medium are to be leak proof at the specified ascertained by tensile test to determine tensile strength,
test pressure. yield strength or 0.2% proof stress, elongation and
reduction in area.
9.2.2 Unless otherwise specified, the impact energy
is to be determined by notched bar impact tests on each
8.1 Tensile test
forging or each test batch, as appropriate.
The requirements indicated in the Tables contained in

9.2.3 Test material, sufficient for the required tests
these Rules or, where applicable, in the relevant
and for possible retest purposes, is to be provided with
standards or specifications are to be met under tensile
a cross-sectional area of not less than that part of the
test.
forging which it represents. This test material is to be
integral with each forging except as provided in 9.2.14

and 9.2.17. Where batch testing is permitted according Transverse: The longitudinal axis of the specimen
to 9.2.17, the test material may alternatively be a traverses the fibre pattern at right angles.
production part or separately forged. Separately forged Specimens with a longitudinal axis lying in
test material is to have a reduction ratio similar to that the direction of an additional compression
used for the forgings represented. (perpendicular to an expansion) of the
fibre pattern (so-called location "in the
9.2.4 For the purpose of these requirements a set of thickness direction") are not covered by
tests is to consist of one tensile test specimen and, the specimen positions termed
when required, three Charpy V-notch impact test "transverse".
specimens.
9.2.8 Normally, test specimens are to be taken
9.2.5 Test specimens are normally to be cut with from the test sections forged together with the work
their axes either mainly parallel (longitudinal test) or pieces. This test section may normally be separated
mainly tangential (tangential test) to the principal axial from the forging only after the latter has undergone final
direction of each product. heat treatment. In this context, subsequent heat
treatment for stress relief may be disregarded. Prior
9.2.6 Unless otherwise agreed, the longitudinal axis separation is permitted only where the manufacturing
of test specimens is to be positioned as follows: process makes this unavoidable. In these
circumstances, the forging and the test section are to be
- For thickness or diameter up to maximum 50 heat treated together.
mm, the axis is to be at the mid-thickness or the
center of the cross section. 9.2.9 The number of test sections required for the
tensile test and the notched bar impact test is as
- For thickness or diameter greater than 50 mm, follows:
the axis is to be at one quarter thickness (mid-
radius) or 80 mm, whichever is less, below any - Normalized forgings: one test section from
heat treated surface. one forging per test batch,
9.2.7 It may be necessary to distinguish between - Quenched and tempered forgings: per test
the geometrical position of the specimens in the forging batch one test section from two forgings.
and their location in relation to the direction of the With batches of 10 forgings or less, a test
fibre: section is required from only one forging.
For forgings, the references in the tables to longitudinal, At least 5% of all quenched and tempered forgings
tangential and transverse orientations refer to the which undergo batch wise testing are to be subjected to
position of the specimen in relation to the direction of a hardness test.
the fibre and should be understood as follows:
9.2.10 Depending on the conditions agreed on
Longitudinal: The longitudinal axis of the specimen is placing the order, the test sections are to be taken as
parallel to the main direction of elongation follows:
of the non-curved fibre pattern;
- From a forging (which is then destroyed in its
Tangential: The longitudinal axis of the specimen entirety),
traverses the curved fibre pattern in the
form of a chord (and thus "slopes", so to - From additional material provided on the
speak, in relation to it); forging,

- From a sample of similar dimensions from journals, are to be cut in a longitudinal direction.
the same heat, which has been forged in the
same way as the other forgings and heat This test material is to be machined to a diameter of D/4
treated together with them. or 60mm, whichever is less, where D is the finished
diameter of the toothed portion.
9.2.11 All test sections are to be forged with the
same degree of deformation to a cross section For preliminary tests at the forge one set of test material
corresponding to the relevant cross-section of the is to be given a blank carburizing and heat treatment
forging. The test sections are to be large enough to
cycle simulating that which subsequently will be applied
provide material not only for the specimens required for
to the forging.
the initial test but also for specimens needed for
possible retests.
For final acceptance tests, the second set of test
material is to be blank carburized and heat treated
All test sections and samples are to be so marked that
they can be clearly related to the forgings or test along with the forgings which they represent.
batches which they represent.
At the discretion of the forgemaster or gear manufacture
9.2.12 For forgings whose method of manufacture test samples of larger cross section may be either
are subject to special approval by TL, the number and carburized or blank carburized, but these are to be
position of the test sections shall be specially machined to the required diameter prior to the final
determined with regard to the method of manufacture. quenching and tempering heat treatment.
9.2.13 Forgings with similar dimensions which Alternative procedures for testing of forgings which are
originate from the same heat and have been heat
to be carburized may be specially agreed with TL.
treated together are to be grouped into a test batch.
9.2.17 Normalized forgings with mass up to 1000 kg

9.2.14 When a forging is subsequently divided into a
each and quenched and tempered forgings with mass up
number of components, all of which are heat treated
to 500 kg each may be batch tested. A batch is to consist
together in the same furnace charge, for test purposes
of forgings of similar shape and dimensions, made from
this may be regarded as one forging and the number of
the same heat of steel, heat treated in the same furnace
tests required is to be related to the total length and
mass of the original multiple forging. charge and with a total mass not exceeding 6 tonnes for
normalized forgings and 3 tonnes for quenched and
9.2.15 Except for components which are to be tempered forgings, respectively.
carburized or for hollow forgings where the ends are to
be subsequently closed, test material is not to be cut Unless otherwise agreed with TL, the size of the test
from a forging until all heat treatment has been batch shall be as detailed in Table 5.1.
completed.
Table 5.1 Heat treatment weight of individual
9.2.16 When forgings are to be carburized, sufficient
forging and number of forgings per test batch
test material is to be provided for both preliminary tests
at the forge and for final tests after completion of
Heat treatment weight
carburizing. Number of forgings per
of individual forging
test batch
[kg]
For this purpose duplicate sets of test material are to be
taken from positions as detailed in C.5.1.1, C.5.1.2 and up to 15 ≤ 300
D.7.2, except that irrespective of the dimensions or > 15 to 150 ≤ 100

mass of the forging, tests are required from one position > 150 to 300 ≤ 50
only and, in the case of forgings with integral
> 300 to 1000 ≤ 25

Surplus quantities up to 10% of the number of forgings lengths, these are all heat treated in the same
per test batch can be allotted to a test batch. furnace charge, or
Forgings with unit weights > 1000 kg (normalized) and > - Bars of the same diameter and heat, heat
500 kg (quenched and tempered) are to be tested treated in the same furnace charge and with a
individually. total mass not exceeding 2.5 tonnes.
9.2.18 A batch testing procedure may also be used 9.2.19 The preparation of test specimens and the
for hot rolled bars. A batch is to consist of either: procedures used for mechanical testing are to comply
with the relevant requirements of Section 2. Unless
- Material from the same rolled ingot or bloom otherwise agreed all tests are to be carried out in the
provided that where this is cut into individual presence of the Surveyor.
Table 5.2 Chemical composition limits (1) for hull steel forgings (6)
Steel C Si P S Total
Mn Cr Mo Ni Cu(4)
type max. max. max. max. residuals
0.23 (2), 0.30-
C, C-Mn 0.45 0.035 0.035 0.30 (4) 0.15 (4) 0.40 (4) 0.30 0.85
(3) 1.50
Alloy (5) 0.45 (5) 0.035 0.035 (5) (5) (5) 0.30 -
(1) Composition in percentage mass by mass maximum unless shown as a range.
(2) The carbon content may be increased above this level provided that the carbon equivalent (Ceq) is not more than 0.41%,
calculated using the following formula:
Mn Cr  Mo  V Ni  Cu
C eq  C    %
6 5 15
(3) The carbon content of C and C-Mn steel forgings not intended for welded construction may be 0.65 maximum.
(4) Elements are considered as residual elements.
(5) Specification is to be submitted for approval.
(6) Rudder stocks and pintles should be of weldable quality.
Table 5.3 Chemical composition limits (1) for machinery steel forgings
Steel Total
C Si Mn P S Cr Mo Ni Cu(3)
type residuals
0.30-
C, C-Mn 0.65 (2) 0.45 0.035 0.035 0.30 (3) 0.15 (3) 0.40 (3) 0.30 0.85
1.50
0.30- Min. Min. Min.
Alloy (4) 0.45 0.45 0.035 0.035 0.30 -
1.00 0.40 (5) 0.15 (5) 0.40 (5)
(1) Composition in percentage mass by mass maximum unless shown as a range or as a minimum.
(2) The carbon content of C and C-Mn steel forgings intended for welded construction is to be 0.23 maximum. The carbon content
may be increased above this level provided that the carbon equivalent (Ceq) is not more than 0.41%.
(3) Elements are considered as residual elements unless shown as a minimum.
(4) Where alloy steel forgings are intended for welded constructions, the proposed chemical composition is subject to approval by
TL.
(5) One or more of the elements is to comply with the minimum content.

9.3 Retests in the event of failure of specimens 11.2 Non-destructive tests are to be performed in
accordance with the specifications stated in G.
If the required values of tensile strength or notched bar
impact tests are not achieved or if a notched bar impact 12. Rectification of Defective Forgings
test produces an individual value which is lower than
70% of the required average value, then, before the 12.1 Defects may be removed by grinding or
forging or the unit test quantity is rejected, the
chipping and grinding provided the component
procedure for repeat tests prescribed in Section 2. may
dimensions are acceptable. The resulting grooves are to
be applied. The additional test specimens are to be
have a bottom radius of approximately three times the
taken either from the same test section as the original
groove depth and are to be blended into the
specimen or from other test sections or samples which
surrounding surface so as to avoid any sharp contours.
are representative of the test batch concerned.
Complete elimination of the defective material is to be
10. Inspection verified by magnetic particle testing or liquid penetrant

testing.
10.1 Before acceptance, all forgings are to be
presented to the surveyor for visual examination. Where 12.2 Repair welding of forgings except crankshaft
appropriate, this is to include the examination of internal forgings may be permitted subject to prior approval of
surfaces and bores. Unless otherwise agreed the TL. In such cases, full details of the extent and location
verification of dimensions is the responsibility of the of the repair, the proposed welding procedure, heat
manufacturer. treatment and subsequent inspection procedures are to
be submitted for the approval.
10.2 When required by the relevant construction
rules, or by the approved procedure for welded
12.3 The forging manufacturer is to maintain
composite components appropriate non-destructive
records of repairs and subsequent inspections traceable
testing is also to be carried out before acceptance and
to each forging repaired. The records are to be
the results are to be reported by the manufacturer.
presented to the surveyor on request.
The extent of testing and acceptance criteria are to be

agreed with TL. TL-G 68 is regarded as an example of 13. Identification of Forgings
an acceptable standard.
13.1 The manufacturer is to adopt a system of
10.3 When required by the conditions of approval identification, which will enable all finished forgings to
for surface hardened forgings (A.5.6), additional test be traced to the original cast and the surveyor is to be
samples are to be processed at the same time as the given full facilities for so tracing the forgings when
forgings which they represent. These test samples are required.
subsequently to be sectioned in order to determine the
hardness, shape and depth of the locally hardened zone
13.2 Before acceptance, all forgings which have
and which are to comply with the requirements of the
been tested and inspected with satisfactory results are
approved specification.
to be clearly marked by the manufacturer with the
following details:
10.4 In the event of any forging proving defective
during subsequent machining or testing, it is to be
rejected notwithstanding any previous certification. - Steel quality,
11. Non-Destructive Tests - Identification number, cast number or other

marking which will enable the full history of
11.1 Where non-destructive tests are called for, the forging to be traced,
these are to be performed by the manufacturer and/or
finishing plant. - Manufacturer’s name or trade mark,

5-10 Section 5 – Steel Forgings A,B
- TL’s name,initials or symbol, and machinery construction, e.g. shafts, piston rods,
connecting rods, rudderstocks and heel pintles.
- Abbreviated name of the TL's local office,
They are also applicable to rolled round bars for the
- Personal stamp of Surveyor responsible for manufacture of shafts, pins, tie-rods and similar
inspection, components which are given their final shape by
machining.
- Date of test and test pressure (where
applicable). 2. Steel Grades
13.3 Where small forgings are manufactured in On condition that they meet the requirements specified
large numbers, modified arrangements for identification in 4., the following steels may be used:
may be specially agreed with TL.
2.1 Suitable grades of forging steel conforming to
14. Certification recognized standards, e.g. ISO 683, EN 10250-2 and
EN 10250-3.
The manufacturer is to provide the required type of
inspection certificate giving the following particulars for 2.2 Other unalloyed and low alloy steels
each forging or batch of forgings which has been conforming to other standards or material specifications,
accepted: provided that their suitability has been confirmed by TL.
- Purchaser’s name and order number, An initial test of product suitability may be required for
this purpose.
- Description of forgings and steel quality,
3. Condition of supply and heat treatment
- Identification number,
3.1 All forgings are to be heat treated properly.
- Steelmaking process, cast number and Acceptable methods of heat treatment are:
chemical analysis of ladle sample,
- For carbon and carbon-manganese steels:
- Results of mechanical tests, Normalizing,
Normalizing and tempering (air quenching and
- Results of non-destructive tests, where tempering),
applicable,
Quenching and tempering
- Details of heat treatment, including temperature

- For alloy steels:
and holding times.
Quenching and tempering
3.2 Large forgings of complex shape made of

B. Forgings for Hull and Machinery carbon or carbon-manganese steel which are to be
Construction
supplied in normalized condition are to undergo
additional stress-relieving heat treatment if they have
1. Scope
been extensively machined subsequent to normalizing.
These Rules are applicable to forgings made of

4. Chemical composition
unalloyed and low alloy steels intended for the
manufacture of components and structural parts in hull
4.1 The chemical composition of the forging steels

B Section 5 – Steel Forgings 5-11
is subject to the limit values in Tables 5.2 and 5.3. The results of hardness tests are to be reported and,
forinformation purposes, typical Brinell hardness values
are given in Table 5.7.
4.2 Where forgings are to be used in welded
assemblies, the composition is to be specially
5.5 Hardness tests may also be required on
determined by reference to the welding method used forgings which have been induction hardened, nitrided
and is to be submitted to TL for approval. or carburized. For gear forgings these tests are to be
carried out on the teeth after, where applicable, they
5. Mechanical and technological properties have been ground to the finished profile. The results of
such tests are to comply with the approved
specifications (see A.5.6). Where a hardness test is
5.1 Tables 5.6 and 5.7 give the minimum
stipulated, the hardness values measured at different
requirements for yield stress, elongation, reduction of
points on the forging or on different units within a unit
area and impact test energy values corresponding to test quantity respectively may not differ by more than
different strength levels but it is not intended that these the amounts stated in Table 5.5
should necessarily be regarded as specific grades.
Where it is proposed to use a steel with a specified 5.6 Re-test requirements for tensile tests are to be
minimum tensile strength intermediate to those given, in accordance with Section 2.
corresponding minimum values for the other properties
may be obtained by interpolation. 5.7 Re-test requirements for Charpy impact tests
are to be in accordance with Section 2.
5.2 Forgings may be supplied to any specified
minimum tensile strength selected within the general 5.8 The additional tests detailed in 5.6 and 5.7 are
limits detailed in Tables 5.6 or 5.7 but subject to any to be taken, preferably from material adjacent to the
additional requirements of the relevant construction original tests, but alternatively from another test position
Rules. or sample representative of the forging or batch of
forgings.
5.3 The mechanical properties are to comply with
the requirements of Tables 5.6 or 5.7 appropriate to the 5.9 At the option of the manufacturer, when a
specified minimum tensile strength or, where applicable, forging or a batch of forgings has failed to meet the test
the requirements of the approved specification. requirements, it may be reheat treated and re-submitted
for acceptance tests.
5.4 At the discretion of TL hardness tests may be
required on the following: 5.10 If two test specimens are taken from forgings,
the difference between the measured tensile strength
- Gear forgings after completion of heat treatment values may not exceed the magnitudes stated in Table
and prior to machining the gear teeth. The 5.4.
hardness is to be determined at four positions
equally spaced around the circumference of the 5.11 The required impact energy values shown in
surface where teeth will subsequently be cut. Tables 5.6 and 5.7 in relation to the specified minimum
Where the finished diameter of the toothed tensile strength shall be met.
portion exceeds 2.5 m, the above number of test
positions is to be increased to eight. Where the Irrespective of this, for heel pintles and rudderstocks an
width of a gear wheel rim forging exceeds 1.25 impact energy of at least 27 J are to be attained with
m, the hardness is to be determined at eight longitudinal Charpy V-notch specimens measured at
positions at each end of the forging. 0°C for ships with ice class symbols ICE-B3 and ICE-B4
and at -20°C for ships with the arctic ice class symbols
- Small crankshaft and gear forgings which have ARC1 to ARC4. One individual value may be below the
been batch tested. In such cases at least one average value but shall not be less than 19 J.
hardness test is to be carried out on each forging.

5-12 Section 5 – Steel Forgings B
For propeller shafts intended for ships with ice class an For gear forgings these tests are to be carried out on
elongation of at least 22% (tensile specimen L0=5 d0) the teeth after, where applicable, they have been
and an impact energy of at least 27 J with longitudinal ground to the finished profile. The results of such tests
Charpy V-notch specimens measured at -10°C must be are to comply with the approved specifications in A.5.6.
attained.
Table 5.5 Differences permitted between hardness
Table 5.4 Differences permitted between tensile values
strength values
Minimum tensile Difference in hardness

Minimum tensile strength Brinell units
Difference in hardness
strength Rm [N/mm2]
Brinell units [N/mm2]
Rm [N/mm2]
< 600 Up to 25
< 600 70
≥ 600 < 900 Up to 35
≥ 600 < 900 100
≥ 900 Up to 42
≥ 900 120
Hardness tests may also be required on forgings which

have been induction hardened, nitrided or carburized.
Table 5.6 Mechanical properties for hull steel forgings
Tensile Elongation Reduction of area Charpy V- notch 2) 3)

Yield stress
strength 1) A5 min. Z min. Temperature Energy (J)
Steel type Re min.
Rm min. % % (°C)
N/mm2
N/mm2 Long. Tang. Long. Tang. Long. Tang.
400 200 26 19 50 35 0 27 18
440 220 24 18 50 35 0 27 18
C and 480 240 22 16 45 30 0 27 18
C-Mn 520 260 21 15 45 30 0 27 18
560 280 20 14 40 27 0 27 18
600 300 18 13 40 27 0 27 18
550 350 20 14 50 35 0 32 22
Alloy 600 400 18 13 50 35 0 32 22
650 450 17 12 50 35 0 32 22
1) The following ranges for tensile strength may be additionally specified:

specified minimum tensile strength: < 600 N/mm2 ≥ 600 N/mm2
tensile strength range: 120 N/mm2 150 N/mm2
2) Testing at +20°C may be accepted subject to compliance with a specified minimum average energy of 45 J longitudinal or
30 J transverse for all grades.
l = longitudinal, t = transverse
3) Test direction shall follow the requirements of 9.2.5.

B Section 5 – Steel Forgings 5-13
Table 5.7 Mechanical properties for machinery steel forgings 2)
Yield Elongation Reduction of area Charpy V- Hardness 3)

Tensile strength
Steel stress A5 min. Z min. notch 4) 5)
1) Rm min.
type % %
N/mm2
Long. Tang. Long. Tang. Long. Tang.
400 200 26 19 50 35 - - 110-150
440 220 24 18 50 35 - - 125-160
480 240 22 16 45 30 - - 135-175
520 260 21 15 45 30 - - 150-185
C and 560 280 20 14 40 27 - - 160-200
C-Mn 600 300 18 13 40 27 - - 175-215
640 320 17 12 40 27 - - 185-230
680 340 16 12 35 24 - - 200-240
720 360 15 11 35 24 - - 210-250
760 380 14 10 35 24 - - 225-265
600 360 18 14 50 35 41 24 175-215
700 420 16 12 45 30 32 22 205-245
800 480 14 10 40 27 32 22 235-275
Alloy
900 630 13 9 40 27 27 18 260-320
1000 700 12 8 35 24 25 16 290-365
1100 770 11 7 35 24 21 13 320-385
1) The following ranges for tensile strength may be additionally specified:
specified minimum tensile strength: < 900 N/mm2 ≥ 900 N/mm2
tensile strength range: 150 N/mm2 200 N/mm2
2) For propeller shafts intended for ships with ice class notation except the lowest one, Charpy V-notch impact
testing is to be carried out for all steel types at –10°C and the average energy value is to be minimum 27 J
(longitudinal test). One individual value may be less than the required average value provided that it is not less than 70%
of this average value.
3) The hardness values are typical and are given for information purposes only.
4) Testing shall be carried out at +20°C.
5) Test direction shall follow the requirements of 9.2.5.
6. Testing used. Where a forging exceeds both 4 tonnes in mass

and 3m in length, one set of tests is to be taken from
6.1 Mechanical testing each end. These limits refer to the 'as forged' mass and
length but excluding the test material.
Testing is to be accomplished by tensile tests and
notched bar impact tests in accordance with A.9.2. 6.2 Notched bar impact testing of propeller shafts,
Quenched and tempered forgings grouped into test rudderstocks and heel pintles for ships with ice class
batches are to be subjected to additional hardness symbols is to be carried out with Charpy V-notch
testing. specimens. For all other products, the selection of the
specimen shape is to be at the manufacturer's discretion.
Hull components such as rudder stocks, pintles etc.
General machinery components such as shafting,
connecting rods, etc.
One set of tests is to be taken from the end of each

forging in a longitudinal direction except that, at the
discretion of the manufacture, the alternative directions
or positions as shown in Fig. 5.1, 5.3 and 3 may be Figure 5.1 Plain shaft

5-14 Section 5 – Steel Forgings B,C
The specifications in G. do apply. The components

indicated in H. are to be tested according to the scope
prescribed there.
All forgings are to be presented to the Surveyor in the

condition in which they are delivered for testing of the Figure 5.2 Flanged shaft
surface finish and the dimensions.
Figure 5.3 Flanged shaft with collar
C. Forgings for Crankshafts 3. Requirements Applicable to the Material
1. Scope 3.1 With regard to the chemical composition,

mechanical properties and required impact energy and
These Rules are applicable to solid forged crankshafts hardness values of the steel, the data contained in the
and to the forged throws, webs and pins of semi-built approved specification or drawing is applicable.
crankshafts of unalloyed and low alloy steels.
3.2 The steel is to undergo vacuum degassing
2. Steel Grades following its production to ensure that the hydrogen
content of the heat does not exceed 2 ppm.
Only materials which have been approved by TL as
suitable for the intended application may be used. To 4. Manufacture and Condition of Supply
this end, the engine manufacturer is to submit to TL for
approval specifications and/or drawings containing all 4.1 Wherever possible, the throws of built
the data required for evaluating the material, e.g. crankshafts are to be preforged as a flat semi-finished
method of manufacture, chemical composition, heat product and then folded in a press to produce a rough
treatment and mechanical properties. The minimum forging having a fibre pattern with favourable loading
requirements as per Tables 5.6 and 5.7 are to be characteristics. However, other processes may be used
satisfied. if they achieve the required characteristics. TL is to be
advised of the method of manufacture.

C Section 5 – Steel Forgings 5-15
4.2 Where crankshaft webs are produced by from the material removed from the throw furthest from
thermal cutting from forged or rolled flat products, the the driven side, see Fig. 5.4.
heat-affected area at the cut faces is to be completely
removed by machining. This Rule does not apply to The test sections may not be removed prior to
webs which are cut out of the starting material before quenching and tempering.
the specified heat treatment is applied.
5.1.4 Crankshafts of the same dimensions up to a
4.3 Crankshafts are normally to be supplied in weight in heat-treated condition of 500 kg which
quenched and tempered condition. However, originate from the same heat and form part of the same
crankshafts and their components which are made of heat treatment batch may be grouped into test batches
carbon and carbon-manganese steels may also be in accordance with Table 5.1. For quenched and
normalized or normalized and tempered. Where tempered crankshafts, two tensile test specimens are to
crankshafts are to be surface-hardened, the nature of be taken from each test batch; for normalized shafts,
the heat treatment is to be stated in the manufacturer's one specimen is sufficient.
specification.
5. Testing
5.1 Tensile test

test. Test specimens are to be taken for this purpose in
accordance with 5.1.1 to 5.1.5.
5.1.1 Crankwebs: Fig. 5.4 Location of test specimens in crankshaft
One set of tests is to be taken from each forging in a 5.1.5 Transverse test specimens are to be taken
tangential direction. from forged throws. Unless otherwise agreed with TL, at
least one specimen is to be taken from each forging.
5.1.2 Solid open die forged crankshafts:
5.1.6 Where two test specimens are taken from large
One set of tests is to be taken in a longitudinal direction crankshafts, the difference between the measured
from the driving shaft end of each forging (test position tensile strength values may not exceed the magnitudes
A in Fig. 5.4). stated in B.5.3.
Where the mass (as heat treated but excluding test 5.1.7 For closed die crankshaft forgings and
material) exceeds 3 tonnes tests in a longitudinal crankshaft forgings where the method of manufacture
direction are to be taken from each end (test positions A has been specially approved in accordance with A.2.8 ,
and B in Fig. 5.4). Where, however, the crankthrows are the number and position of test specimens is to be
formed by machining or flame cutting, the second set of agreed with TL having regard to the method of
tests is to be taken in a tangential direction from manufacture employed.
material removed from the crankthrow at the end
opposite the driving shaft end (test position C in Fig. 5.2 Notched bar impact test
5.84).
Each forging or unit test quantity, as applicable, is to be
5.1.3 Where the throws are machined or flame cut subjected to the notched bar impact test. The number of
from a preforged crankshaft, a second set of test sets of specimens (each comprising 3 specimens) and
specimens are to be taken in the transverse direction their position are subject to the conditions stated in

5-16 Section 5 – Steel Forgings C,D
5.1.1 to 5.1.5 for tensile test specimens. for the gears of the main engine and auxiliary
equipment.
5.3 Hardness test
2. Steel Grades
5.3.1 Where testing is performed in test batches, at
least 10% of the crankshafts are to be subjected to On condition that they satisfy the requirements of 6., the
hardness tests. following grades of steel may be used:
The method of hardness testing and the position of the 2.1 Quenched and tempered steels conforming to
hardness testing impressions on the forgings are to be ISO 683-1, 2, case hardening steels conforming to ISO
agreed with TL. 683-3 and nitriding steels conforming to ISO 683-5,
provided that proof has been furnished of the suitability
Table 5.8 Suitable steel grades for gears of the individual grade of steel for the intended purpose.
Table 5.8 contains a selection of suitable steel grades.
Steel grade Standard

2.2 Steels conforming to other standards provided
42 Cr Mo 4 ISO 683-1, 2 that they are comparable with the steel grades specified
16 Mn Cr 5 in 2.1 and proof has been furnished of their suitability for
20 Mn Cr 5 ISO 683-3 the intended purpose.
18 Cr Ni Mo 7-6
2.3 Steels conforming to particular material
5.3.2 The differences in the hardness values specifications provided that TL has authorized their use.
measured at different points on the forging or on To this end, the gear manufacturer is to submit the
different units within a test batch may not exceed the corresponding specifications for approval. These
magnitudes stated in B. 5.5. specifications is to contain all the data required for their
evaluation, e.g. method of manufacture, chemical
5.4 Test of surface finish and dimensions composition, heat treatment, surface hardening and
The crankshaft manufacturer is to test the surface finish
and dimensions of the crankshafts and give the 3. Welded Wheels
measurement records to the Surveyor. He is also to
present the crankshafts to the Surveyor for final Where gear wheels are made up of components welded
inspection and hold in readiness the measuring together, full details of the welding process, the scope of
instruments required for checking the dimensions. non-destructive testing and the acceptability criteria for
welding defects is to be submitted to TL for approval.
5.5 Non-destructive testing The characteristics of the welds are first to be demon-
strated by a welding procedure specification test.
Crankshafts are to be subjected to non-destructive
testing according to the scope stipulated in G. 4. Heat Treatment
4.1 Forgings for which surface hardening after the

D. Forgings for Gears cutting of the teeth are not specified are to be quenched
and tempered. Carbon and carbon-manganese steels
1. Scope may also be normalized and tempered.
These Rules are applicable to forgings made of carbon, 4.2 In the case of forgings which undergo surface
carbon-manganese and low alloy steels which are hardening after the cutting of the teeth, the heat
intended for the manufacture of wheels and wheel rims treatment depends on the nature of the surface

D Section 5 – Steel Forgings 5-17
hardening process, as follows: 5. Dimensions, Dimensional and Geometrical

Tolerances
4.2.1 After carburization, case-hardening steels are
to be hardened and then tempered at low temperature. The data shown in the drawings relating to the order are
The depth of case hardening, the time-temperature
applicable.
cycle and the hardness range (min/max) is to be stated
in the specification.
4.2.2 Steels for induction hardening are normally to

be quenched and tempered prior to hardening. Carbon
and carbon-manganese steels may also be normalized
6.1.1 The chemical composition is subject to the limit
instead of quenching and tempering. The nature of the
values specified in the relevant standard or the
heat treatment, the depth of hardening, the hardening
approved specification.
temperatures, the quenching media and the hardness
range (min/max) is to be stated in the specification.
6.1.2 Where forgings are to be used for welded
wheel assemblies, their composition is to be determined
4.2.3 Nitriding steels are to be quenched and tem-
specially to suit the method of welding and shall be
pered prior to nitriding. Where possible, nitriding is to be
submitted to TL for approval.
effected by the action of gases. The nature of the heat
treatment, the nitriding depth and the hardness range
(min/max) is to be stated in a specification. 6.2 Mechanical and technological properties
4.3 The heat treatments and surface hardening For quenched and tempered steels, the minimum required
processes referred to in 4.2 are to be carried out in such values for the yield strength, elongation and reduction in
a way as to produce uniform hardening of the depth and area specified in Tables 5.6 and 5.7 is to be met in relation
hardness stipulated in the specification. TL reserves the to the prescribed minimum tensile strength.
right to require the manufacture of samples on which
the uniformity, depth and hardness of the surface layer For case-hardening steels, the requirements specified in
is to be demonstrated. Table 5.9 apply to specimens which have undergone
heat treatment together with the forging (coupons).
Table 5.9 Required values for mechanical and technological properties of specimens made of coupons
Elongation Reduction in Impact energy

Yield Tensile
Sample A (1) area Z (1)
strength strength
dia. [%] [%] KU (1) KV (1)
Steel grade ReH Rm
Φ min. min. [J] min.
[N/mm2] [N/mm2]
mm
min ℓ t, tr ℓ t, tr ℓ t, tr ℓ t, tr
16 Mn Cr 5 590 780-1080 10 8 40 27 24 18 22 16
20 Mn Cr 5 30 690 980-1280 8 6 35 27 20 15 18 13
18 Cr Ni Mo 7-6 785 1080-1320 8 6 35 27 20 15 18 13
16 Mn Cr 5 440 640-940 11 9 40 27 24 18 22 16
20 Mn Cr 5 63 540 780-1080 10 8 35 27 24 18 22 16
18 Cr Ni Mo 7-6 685 980-1280 8 6 35 27 20 15 18 13
(1) Orientation of specimen axis ℓ = longitudinal, t= tangential, tr = transverse

5-18 Section 5 – Steel Forgings D
6.3 Hardness
For all gear components, the hardness values

prescribed for the tooth area in the specification or
approval drawing are mandatory.
7. Testing

L = Length of tooth system

D = Diameter of tooth system
The material manufacturer is to determine the

d1, d2= Diameter of bearing journal
composition of each heat and issue a relevant
certificate.
Fig 5.5 Pinion

7.2 Tensile test on finally heat-treated,
induction-hardened and nitrided forgings
7.2.4 Gear wheel rims (made by expanding)

test. Test specimens are to be taken as follows: One set of tests is to be taken from each forging in a
tangential direction (test position A or B in Fig. 5.7).
7.2.1 Pinions Where the finished diameter exceeds 2.5 m or the mass
(as heat treated excluding test material) exceeds 3
Where the finished machined diameter of the toothed tonnes, two sets of tests are to be taken from
portion exceeds 200mm one set of tests is to be taken diametrically opposite positions(test positions A and B in
from each forging in a tangential direction adjacent to Fig. 5.7). The mechanical properties for longitudinal test
the toothed portion (test position B in Fig. 5.5). Where are to be applied.
the dimensions preclude the preparation of tests from
this position, tests in a tangential direction are to be
taken from the end of the journal (test position C in Fig.
5.5). If however, the journal diameter is 200mm or less
the tests are to be taken in a longitudinal direction (test
position A in Fig. 5.5). Where the finished length of the
toothed portion exceed 1.25 m, one set of tests is to be
taken from each end.
7.2.2 Small pinions
Where the finished diameter of the toothed portion is

200mm or less one set of tests is to be taken in a
Fig 5.6 Gear wheel
longitudinal direction (test position A in Fig. 5.5).
7.2.3 Gear wheels
One set of tests is to be taken from each forging in a


D Section 5 – Steel Forgings 5-19
in agreement with the surveyor a test specimen with

standardized dimensions may be used (e.g. 30 mm
diameter according to EN ISO 683-3).
Tensile test specimens are then to be taken from the

test sections and tested.
7.3.2 The gear manufacturer has the option of

producing test sections with a cross section greater than
that specified in 7.3.1. However, for the final hardening
and tempering the pieces are to be given the specified
dimensions.
7.4 Strength differences in the forging

Fig. 5.7 Wheel rim
Where two test specimens are taken from large

7.2.5 Pinion sleeves
forgings, the difference between the measured tensile
strength values may not exceed the magnitudes
One set of tests is to be taken from each forging in a
specified in B.5.3.
Where the finished length exceeds 1.25 m one set of
tests is to be taken from each end.
Each forging or unit test quantity, as applicable, is to be

subjected to the notched bar impact test. The number of
sets of specimens (each comprising 3 specimens), the
positions in the forgings or test sections from which the
specimens are taken and their heat treatment are
subject to the provisions of 7.2 and 7.3, as appropriate.
The test may be carried out on Charpy V- or Charpy U-
notch samples as chosen by the manufacturer.
Fig. 5.8 Hollow pinion 7.6 Hardness test
7.6.1 After heat treatment but before the cutting of
7.3 Tensile test on case-hardening steels the teeth, hardness tests are to be carried out on all
forgings at the points specified in the approval drawings.
7.3.1 The respective test sections are to be heat- Where the length L of the teeth of a gear component
treated together with the associated gear component or exceeds 500 mm, testing is to be performed at both
the test batch. For this purpose, the test sections are to ends of the tooth system.
be machined to a diameter corresponding to the smaller

of the following two values: 7.6.2 On all surface-hardened gear parts, additional
hardness tests are to be carried out on the teeth after
0.25 x diameter of tooth system or hardening and grinding. The number of measuring
Coupling end
points is to be such that compliance with the specified
63 mm diameter. hardness values can be verified over the periphery and

the width of the tooth system.
If the diameter of the test specimen is less than 63 mm,

7.6.3 The differences in the values measured at the

5-20 Section 5 – Steel Forgings D,E
prescribed points on a forging or on different units within housings, socket welding and welding neck
a test batch may not exceed the magnitudes specified in components. Steel forgings tough at sub-zero
B.5.5. temperatures are subject to F.
7.7 Test of surface finish and dimensions 2. Steel Grades
The gear manufacturer is to check the surface finish The following materials may be used:
and dimensions of the tooth system. The products are
then to be presented to the Surveyor for final inspection 2.1 Weldable unalloyed structural steels
and he is to be given the measurement records. For conforming to EN 10250-2 up to an operating
retests by the Surveyor, the gear manufacturer is to temperature of 300 °C.
hold the necessary measuring instruments in readiness.
2.2 Forgings made of ferritic and martensitic steels
7.8 Batchwise testing with specified properties at elevated temperatures
conforming to EN 10222-2.
Forgings with similar dimensions up to a weight in heat-
treated condition of 300 kg which originate from the 2.3 Forgings made of weldable fine-grained
structural steels conforming to EN 10222-4.
same heat and form part of the same heat treatment
batch may be grouped into test batches in accordance
2.4 Austenitic or austenitic-ferritic stainless steel
with Table 5.1. Two test sections are to be taken from
forgings conforming to EN 10222-5.
each test batch for the tensile test and the notched bar
impact test. Every forging is to be subjected to a 2.5 Steel flanges conforming to EN 1092-1.
hardness test.
2.6 Steels conforming to other standards or
7.9 Non-destructive tests material specifications, provided that they are
comparable to the steel grades listed in 2.1 to 2.5 and
7.9.1 The manufacturer is to carry out an ultrasonic proof has been furnished of their suitability for the
test on the tooth area of all forgings where the diameter intended application. An initial test of product suitability
of the tooth system exceeds 200 mm. may be requested for this purpose. Ferritic steels are
additionally to satisfy the following minimum
7.9.2 The entire tooth system of gear parts with requirements.
surface-hardened teeth is to be tested for cracks using
the magnetic particle or dye penetrant method. 2.6.1 The elongation (A) is to have the characteristic
minimum values for the respective steel grades as
The welds of gear wheels built up of separate parts are specified by TL; however, it is to be not less than 14%
to be subjected to non-destructive testing of the scope in transverse and tangential direction and not less than
specified at the time of the process approval. 16% in longitudinal direction.
The tests are to be performed in compliance with G. 2.6.2 The impact energy is to have the characteristic
minimum values for the respective steel grades as
specified by TL; however, it is to be not less than 27 J in
E. Forgings for Boilers, Pressure Vessels and transverse and tangential direction and 39 J in
Systems longitudinal direction at room temperature in tests
conducted with Charpy V-notch specimens. This value
1. Scope is an average value from three tests, in which one
individual value may be below the prescribed average
These Rules are applicable to unalloyed and alloy steel value but not less than 70% of the average value.
forgings for the manufacture of flanges, nozzles, valve

E Section 5 – Steel Forgings 5-21
3. Heat Treatment and Condition of Supply a tensile test. For preparing the test specimens, forgings
with similar dimensions and nominal weights up to 1000
All forgings are to be supplied in a heat treated kg which originate from the same heat and form part of
condition appropriate to the grade of steel. In the case the same heat treatment batch may be grouped into test
of unalloyed steel grades, normalizing may be replaced batches in accordance with Table 5.1.
by an equivalent method of temperature control during
or after forging or rolling, provided that TL has approved For normalized forgings, one specimen is to be taken
the method. from each test batch, while for forgings in other heat-
treated conditions, 2 specimens are to be taken from
If parts are manufactured from bars or plates by machining, each test batch. For quantities of ≤10 and ≤ 30 in the
heat treatment of the starting material is sufficient. case of nominal weights not exceeding 15 kg, one
specimen is sufficient.
5.1.2 For batchwise testing, the hardest and softest
4.1 General requirements forgings in each batch are to be selected for testing see
5.3.
The chemical composition, mechanical properties, and
impact energy and hardness values of the steel are to 5.1.3 In the case of forgings with unit weights of
conform to the standards stated in 2.1 to 2.5 or, where more than 1000 kg, a test specimen is to be taken from
applicable, the data contained in the approved every forging.
specifications.
4.2 Weldability
The forgings are to be subjected to the notched bar
Steels conforming to these Rules are to be weldable by impact test. The number of sets of test specimens (3
established workshop methods. Depending on the Charpy V-notch specimens per set) is to be determined
chemical composition, preheating and/or post-weld heat in the same way as the number of tensile test
treatments may be required for this purpose. specimens.
4.3 Resistance to intercrystalline corrosion 5.3 Hardness tests
Austenitic steel grades are to be resistant to intercrys- 5.3.1 In the case of quenched and tempered
talline corrosion in the condition in which they are supplied. forgings, with the exception of flanges with standardized
If forgings for welded assemblies (e.g. weld-on valves, dimensions, a hardness test is to be performed on each
flanges) are to be used without post-weld heat treatment, forging.
steel grades which are corrosion-resistant in this condition
as well are to be selected, e.g. steels stabilized with Ti or 5.3.2 Flanges with standardized dimensions are to
Nb or steels with carbon contents of C ≤ 0.03%. be subjected to the following scope of testing:
5. Testing - Normalized steels: at least 3%,
The forgings are to be presented for testing in finished - Quenched and tempered, and austenitic-ferritic
condition (condition of supply) and are to undergo the steels: at least 10% of the same test batch.
following tests.
5.3.3 In the case of parts not mentioned in
5.1 Tensile testing paragraphs 5.3.1 and 5.3.2, at least 20% of each test
batch is to be tested.
5.1.1 The mechanical properties are to be verified by

5-22 Section 5 – Steel Forgings E,F
5.4 Test of surface finish and dimensions cargo and processing equipment on gas tankers, e.g.
flanges, valve parts, weld-on and socket welding parts.
The manufacturer is to test the surface finish and
dimensions of the products and is then to present the 1.2 In the case of forgings which are intended for
parts to the Surveyor for final acceptance testing. pressure-liquefied ammonia at design temperatures not
lower than 0°C, e.g. forged flanges, rings and
5.5 Test for use of correct material connections, the boundary values given in Section 3,
E.8.1.1, Table 3.17 for chemical composition and in
Alloy steel forgings are to be subjected by the Section 3, E.8.2.2 for mechanical properties are to be
manufacturer to appropriate tests to ensure that the observed. The required values for impact energy given in
correct material has been used. Section 3, E.8.3 is also to apply.
5.6 Non-destructive testing 1.3 In the case of high-strength, quenched and

tempered fine-grained structural steel forgings having
Forgings with a nominal weight of over 300 kg are to be nominal yield strengths of between 420 and 690 N/mm2
subjected by the manufacturer to an ultrasonic test and, which are designed for gas tanks with design
where necessary, a supplementary test for surface temperatures no lower than 0°C, the requirements
cracks. The tests are to be performed in compliance according to 1.2 apply.
with G.
2. Steel Grades
5.7 Testing of resistance to intercrystalline
corrosion The following grades of steel may be used within the
minimum design temperature limits specified in Table
The manufacturer is to check the resistance to inter- 5.10 provided that they satisfy the requirements of 5.
crystalline corrosion of austenitic and austenitic-ferritic
steel forgings intended for welded assemblies and - 2.1 Standardized steels conforming to Table 5.10.
where stipulated in the order - of other austenitic steels
as well. Testing is to be carried out in the following 2.2 Other steels conforming to other standards or
conditions: material specifications, provided that they are
comparable with the steel grades specified in 2.1 and
- Steels containing C < 0.03% and stabilized proof has been furnished of their suitability for the
steels: after sensitizing heat treatment (700 °C, intended application. An initial approval test may be
30 min, quenching in water) required for this purpose.
- All other steels: in the condition of supply. At 3. Heat Treatment and Condition of Supply
least two specimens from each heat shall be
tested in accordance with a recognized standard All forgings are to be supplied in a heat-treated
(e.g. ISO 3651-2). condition appropriate to the grade of steel, i.e.
normalized, quenched and tempered, or solution-
annealed and quenched.
F. Steel Forgings for Low Temperature
Services If parts are manufactured from bars or plates by machining,
heat treatment of the starting material is sufficient.
1. Scope
4. Dimensions, Dimensional and Geometrical
1.1 These Rules are applicable to steel forgings for Tolerances
low temperature services and high-strength, quenched
and tempered steel forgings which are intended for The data in the standards or specifications are
applicable.

F Section 5 – Steel Forgings 5-23
Table 5.10 Approved grades of forging steels for low temperature services
Approved minimum Steel grade or

Type of steel Standard
design temperature Material No.
Weldable fine-grained P 285 NH
structural steels
P 285 QH
-20°C (1) EN 10222-4
P 355 N
P 355 QH
%0.5 nickel steel -55°C 13 Mn Ni 6-3 EN 10222-3
%2.25 nickel steel -65°C -
%3.5 nickel steel -90°C 12 Ni 14
%5 nickel steel -105°C 12 Ni 19 EN 10222-3
-165°C (2) X 12 Ni 5
%9 nickel steel -165°C X 8 Ni 9
1.4301 (304) (3)
1.4307 (304 L)
1.4401 (316)
Austenitic steel - 165°C EN 10222-5
1.4404 (316 L)
1.4541 (321)
1.4550 (347)
(1) Lower design temperatures may be established by means of an approval test.

(2) The minimum design temperature of -165°C is only valid if this has been demonstrated by an approval test.
(3) The numbers in brackets denote comparable steels conforming to AISI standards.
5. Requirements Applicable to the Material 5.4 Resistance to intercrystalline corrosion
5.1 General requirements Austenitic steel grades shall be resistant to

intercrystalline corrosion in the condition in which they
The chemical composition, the mechanical properties are supplied. If forgings are to be used for welded
and the hardness is to conform to the data contained in assemblies (e.g. weld-on valves, flanges) without post-
the relevant standards or approved specifications. weld heat treatment, steel grades which are corrosion-
resistant in this condition as well shall be selected, e.g.
5.2 Weldability steels stabilized with Ti or Nb or steels with carbon
contents of C ≤ 0.03%.
Steels conforming to these Rules are to be weldable by
established workshop methods. 6. Testing
5.3 Impact energy at low temperatures The forgings are to be presented for testing in the fin-
ished condition (condition of supply) and subjected to
The required impact energy values specified in Table the tests specified below.
5.11 for the grade of steel concerned are to be met at
the test temperatures specified in the table, using
Charpy V-notch specimens.

5-24 Section 5 – Steel Forgings F
Table 5.11 Required impact energy values for steel forgings for low temperature services
Impact Energy
KV [J] (1) min.
Type of steel Test temperature
Longitudinal Transverse
5°C below minimum design

Weldable fine-grained structural
temperature but at least 27 (19) 22 (15)
steels and%0.5 nickel steel
- 20 °C
%2.25 nickel steel -70°C
%3.5 nickel steel -95°C
% 5 nickel steel -110°C 34 (24) 24 (17)
% 5 nickel steel -196°C (2)
% 9 nickel steel -196°C
Austenitic steels -196°C 41 (27) 27 (19)
(1) Average value measured on 3 Charpy V-notch specimens; the figures in brackets indicate the minimum individual value.
(2) The test temperature of -196 °C applies if the 5% nickel steel has been approved for a minimum design temperature of
-165 °C.
6.1 Tensile test impact test using Charpy V-notch specimens. The
number of sets of test specimens (3 specimens per set)
6.1.1 The mechanical properties are to be tested by are to be determined in the same way as the number of
tensile test. For preparing the test specimens, forgings tensile test specimens. The tests are to be performed at
with similar dimensions and nominal weights up to 1000
the test temperatures specified in Table 5.11.
kg which originate from the same heat and form part of
the same heat treatment batch may be grouped into test
6.3 Hardness testing
batches in accordance with Table 5.1.
6.3.1 In the case of forgings in quenched and tem-

For normalized forgings, one specimen is to be taken
from each test batch, while for forgings in other heat- pered condition, with the exception of flanges with
treated conditions, 2 specimens are to be taken from standardized dimensions, a hardness test is to be per-
each test batch. For quantities of ≤ 10 - and ≤ 30 in the formed on every forging.
case of nominal weights not exceeding 15 kg - one
specimen is sufficient. 6.3.2 Flanges with standardized dimensions are to
be subjected to the following scope of testing:
6.1.2 For the batchwise testing, the hardest and
softest forgings in each batch are to be selected for - Normalized steels: at least 3%,
testing, see 6.3.
- Quenched and tempered, austenitic and

6.1.3 In the case of forgings with unit weights of
austenitic-ferritic steels: at least 10% of the
more than 1000 kg, a test specimen is to be taken from
same test batch.
every forging.
6.3.3 In the case of parts not mentioned in 6.3.1 and

6.3.2, at least 20% of each test batch is to be tested.
The forgings are to be subjected to the notched bar

F,G Section 5 – Steel Forgings 5-25
6.4 Test of surface finish and dimensions no other regulations or manufacturer specifications are
agreed upon.
The manufacturer is to test the surface finish and
dimensions of the products and then present the parts A list containing the forged components for which non-
to the Surveyor for final acceptance testing. destructive testing is required and the specific tests to
be performed is contained in H.
6.5 Test for use of correct material
1.2 The methods indicated in these Rules
Alloy steel forgings are to be subjected by the concerning the magnetic particle test and ultrasonic
manufacturer to appropriate tests to ensure that the tests are limited to the application of forged components
correct material has been used. made of ferritic steel grades.
6.6 Non-destructive testing For forged components made of austenitic or austenitic-

ferritic steel grades the methods and acceptance criteria
Forgings with a nominal weight of over 300 kg are to be for the ultrasonic and penetrant tests is to be agreed
subjected by the manufacturer to an ultrasonic test and, upon with TL individually. This may be performed based
where necessary, a supplementary test for surface on standards or specifications from the manufacturer or
cracks. The test shall be performed in compliance with the customer.
G.
1.3 Taking into account the prescriptions in 1.2 in
6.7 Test of resistance to intercrystalline corro- these Rules the following testing methods are
sion described, see Table 5.12.
The manufacturer is to check the resistance to inter- Table 5.12 Test methods
crystalline corrosion of austenitic steel forgings intended
for welded assemblies and - where stipulated in the Testing Short
order - other austenitic steels as well. Testing is to be Method
of name(2)
carried out in the following conditions:
Visual testing VT
External
- Steels containing C ≤ 0.03% and stabilized Magnetic particle testing (1) MT
condition
steels: after sensitizing heat treatment (700 °C, Penetrant testing PT
30 min, quenching in water) Internal
Ultrasonic testing UT
condition
- All other steels: in the condition of supply. At
(1) Only for forged components made of ferritic steel
least two specimens from each heat shall be
grades.
tested in accordance with a recognized
(2) Definition according to ISO 9712.
standard (e.g. ISO 3651-2).
1.4 The methods and testing criteria indicated in G.

G. Non-destructive Testing of Forged Com- are to be employed by the manufacturers and
ponents companies performing the further processing.
1. Scope In case the customer wants further regulations to be

applied on specific forged components e.g. for engines
1.1 These Rules apply to the non-destructive
and turbines, he is to state this in a test specification
testing of forged components for which in B. to F.
and make this known to the TL Surveyor.
appropriate requirements are prescribed, and for which

5-26 Section 5 – Steel Forgings G
Alternatively non-destructive testing may be performed prescribed tests, the final machined forged components
in accordance with test specifications from the are to be presented to the TL-Surveyor for visual
manufacturer or the customer on condition that the testing.
methods and acceptance criteria fulfil the following
requirements. 2.2 Concerning the tests it is to be differentiated
between pre-testing and acceptance testing. With pre-
1.5 For testing, the forged components shall be tests, where decisions concerning the testability and the
classified in inspection zones of type I, II and III, employability of the forged component are made, they
according to the possible effects of defects on the are in general the business of the manufacturer.
structural integrity. For magnetic particle testing there
will be the addition of type IV. In inspection zone I the Acceptance tests are to be performed preferably on the
allowable number and size of indications are the final machined component after the heat treatment
smallest. appropriate for the required properties has been
performed.
For classifying in inspection zones the following prin-
ciples are decisive: If necessary acceptance tests may be performed at a
production stage with little machining allowance, and for
- The operation loads to be expected, ultrasonic testing after pre-machining in a condition with
less contours.
- The effects of the defects on the reliability of the
component, Details for this issue are to be prescribed in a test
specification and to be made known to TL.
- Possible risk of damage if the component fails,
2.3 The Surveyor is to be informed by the
- Freedom of defects and surface condition after manufacturer or the company performing the further
the final machining. processing about the intended tests. It is up to the
discretion of the Surveyor to attend the tests.
For the most important forged components of the
propulsion plant the classifying in inspection zones is 2.4 The tests are to be performed for the zones
prescribed in I. and J. described for the forged components in H. and J., or for
those indicated in the test specification. In case the
1.6 For forgings where in I. for magnetic particle results indicate that further defects are present in the
testing and in J. for ultrasonic testing no classifying in forged component, the test scope is to be extended
inspection zones is indicated, the manufacturer or according to agreement with the Surveyor.
customer is to prescribe the inspection zones in a test
specification taking into consideration the principles in 2.5 Indications exceeding the allowable size,
1.5 and shall be make them known to the TL Surveyor. number and position indicated in the tables are to be
removed if technically possible. Excavated areas at the
Further, the test specification is to contain details surface are to be subjected to retesting.
concerning the required acceptance criteria (e.g. quality
class according to EN 10228-1, -2, -3). 2.6 In case internal defects or defects close to the
surface cannot be removed by grinding with satisfactory
2. Testing results, the manufacturer, the customer and the TL-
Surveyor is to decide on the employability of the forged
2.1 After the inspector of the internal or external component.
inspection body in charge of testing has performed the

G Section 5 – Steel Forgings 5-27
3. Visual Testing (VT) 4.3 Contact points visible on the surface are to be
ground and to be retested by yoke magnetization if they
3.1 The manufacturer is to verify for each will not be removed by the following machining.
production stage of the forged components the external
condition and the compliance of the dimensions. It is not allowed to employ prods on final machined
Forging defects are to be removed, unless they are surfaces.
removed by the following machining.
The testing of final machined forged components is to
3.2 For the acceptance test the forged components preferably be performed with stationary test appliances.
are to be presented to the Surveyor in final machined

4.4 In case deviant of 2.1, tests have to be per-
condition.
formed before final machining, e.g. before bore holes or
lubricating oil channels are realized. This is to be
If necessary an inspection of forged components in raw
indicated in the test instructions. The acceptance test
condition or in premachined condition by the TL
will be performed by the Surveyor after the final
Surveyor can be agreed on.
machining of the component.
3.3 Discontinuities of the material such as cracks,

4.5 The indications of magnetic particle testing are
forging laminations or inclusions open towards the
to be evaluated depending on the specific inspection
surface are not allowed and are to be repaired. The
zone I to IV concerning their size and number in
repaired areas are to be subjected to additional surface
accordance with Table 5.13. The reference area for this
crack detection. is to be a rectangle with 148 mm x 105 mm (size DIN
A6) and shall be placed on the specific most
3.4 The Surveyor certifies the visual inspection on unfavourable area for each case (area with the highest
the TL acceptance test certificate, e.g. the following text number of indications).
can be typed in the test certificate:
4.6 Concerning the evaluation it shall be
"The aforementioned forged components were visually tested. differentiated between isolated and aligned indications.
The prescribed requirements are fulfilled." These terms are explained in Fig 5.9.
3.5 On demand of the customer, the manufacturer 4.7 All indications exceeding the registration levels
is to issue an inspection certificate according to EN indicated in Table 5.13 are to be reported.
10204-3.1 containing the details of the tests and the test
results. Where indications concerning their size and number
exceed the indicated values for the appropriate
4. Magnetic Particle Testing (MT) inspection zone (or the appropriate class of quality
according to EN 10228-1, respectively), as well as
4.1 The surfaces to be tested are to be free of cracks, open forging laps and discontinuities are to be
scale, grease, dirt and protecting paint as well as other regarded as defects and are to be removed.
contaminations which may affect the detection of
indications. 4.8 For the circumferential surfaces of grooves and
oil bore holes of crankshafts indications of every type in
4.2 The roughness of the machined test areas zone I are not allowed.
shall not exceed an average roughness of Ra = 12.5 µm

for premachined surface, and Ra = 6.3 µm for final 4.9 In case doubts exist whether an indication is
machined surface. generated by a crack, additional penetrant testing is to
be performed.

Table 5.13 Acceptance criteria for magnetic particle testing according to EN 10228-1
Acceptance limits for inspection

zone
IV III II I
Parameter for evaluation
appropriate class of quality
according to EN 10228-1
1 2 3 (1) 4 (2) (3)
Recording level: length of indications [mm] ≥5 ≥2 ≥2 ≥1
max. allowed length Lg of aligned or isolated indications Ln [mm] 20 8 4 2
max. allowed cumulative length of indications Lk [mm] 75 36 24 5
max. allowed number of indications on the reference area 15 10 7 5

(1) Class of quality not applicable for testing of surfaces with machining allowance exceeding 3 mm.
(2) Class of quality not applicable for testing of surfaces with machining allowance exceeding 1 mm.
(3) Class of quality not applicable for surfaces of fillets and oil hole bores of crankshafts (cf. G.4.8).
Reference area = 148 mm × 105 mm (d.h. A6-Format)

d1 < 5 L1; d2 < 5 L2; d3 > 5 L3
L1, L2 and L3 = Individual lengths of aligned indications
Lg = Aligned total length o f L1, L2 and L3
L4, L5 and L6 = Lengths of isolated indications (Ln)
Lg + L4 + L5 + L6 = Cumulative length of indications on the reference area (Lk)
Number of indications on the reference area = 4 (identified as Lg, L4, L5, L6)
Figure 5.9 Reference area and type of indications for magnetic particle testing (MT) according to EN 10228-1

4.10 Repair of defects - Employed testing agent system,
Defects are to be removed by suitable measures. In - Qualification of the inspection personnel,

doing so it is to be ensured that the dimensions of the
forged component will not exceed the prescribed tol- - Surface areas to be tested,
erances. Removal of a defect by grinding is to be
performed perpendicular to the defect in such a way - Required surface condition,
that the end of the groove is prepared in a longitudinal
direction and smoothly blends to the adjacent surface. - Test criteria,
The transition radius is to be at least three times the
groove depth. - Type of testing report.
4.11 After the removal of defects by grinding the 5.4 Unless otherwise agreed the testing is to be
ground areas are to be subjected again to magnetic performed on the final machined forged component and
particle testing. is to be performed in the presence of the Surveyor.
4.12 The evaluation of excavated areas concerning 6. Ultrasonic Testing (UT)

their size and position in the specific inspection zones is
to be performed by means of manufacturer and/or 6.1 In the areas to be tested an appropriate
customer specifications. If the dimensions fall below the surface condition is to be achieved which enables a
minus tolerances the consent of the Surveyor is to be
faultless coupling of the probe. Forging fin, scale, paint,
requested.
dirt, unevenness and mechanical damages is to be
removed/corrected.
5. Penetrant Testing (PT)
6.2 For premachined surfaces the average value of

5.1 The surfaces to be tested is to be free of scale,
the roughness shall be Ra ≤ 25 m. It is recommended
grease, dirt and protecting paint as well as other
to agree on the appropriate class of quality for the
contaminations which may affect the detection of
surface roughness according to Table 5.14.
indications.
6.3 The tests may be performed according to ISO

5.2 Penetrant testing is to be performed on forged
16810, EN 10228-3, SEP 1923 and/or other equivalent
components made of austenitic or austenitic-ferritic
and recognized standards, manufacturer or customer
steel grades. It may be performed on forged
specifications.
components made of ferritic steel grades in addition to
magnetic particle testing (MT); nevertheless the results
6.4 Unless no other recording levels were agreed
of the magnetic particle tests are decisive concerning
on, all indications exceeding a disc shaped reflector with
the acceptance criteria.
diameter of 2 mm is to be registered and evaluated and
reported concerning their position, size, number and
5.3 The manufacturer is to prepare a test
acceptability.
instruction which shall contain at least the following
information:
6.5 For indications which are to be registered, the
amplitude of the back wall echo in the area of the
- Details of the forged component including the
indication is to be compared with the adjacent areas
material grade,
free of indications.
- Standards and specifications to be applied,

Attenuations of the back wall echo with ≥ 4 dB are to be
recorded in the testing report in dB.
- Description of the test method,

6.6 Cracks of any type, size and distribution are forged component by the Surveyor. If the tests are
not allowed. performed in accordance with a manufacturer or
customer specification approved by TL then the limiting
6.7 Indications exceeding the limiting values values indicated there are decisive and the procedure is
contained in Table 5.15 or 5.16 are to be regarded as accordingly.
defects and in the first instance result in rejection of the
Table 5.14 Recommendations for the surface quality
Class of quality and roughness Ra [m]

Surface quality 1 2 3 4
≤ 25 ≤ 12.5 ≤ 12.5 ≤ 6.3
Machined x x x x
Machined and heat treated x x x
Forged x
Note: “x” indicates the class of quality which can be achieved with the prescribed roughness.
Table 5.15 Acceptance criteria for ultrasonic testing of forged components
Size of the Max. allowable Min. distance

Total of all indication
Forged max. allowable length of between two
Zone lengths [mm] per "m"
component KSR (1) indications (3) indications (3)
component length
mm mm mm
Propeller shafts I (2) -

Intermediate
outside : 2 10 10 0.05  d
shafts II (2)
Thrust shafts inside: 4 15 10 0.10  d
Rudder stocks and
outside : 3 10 10 0.15  d
pintles III (2)
Piston rods (4) insider: 6 15 10 0.20  d
Connecting rods
I -
(5)
Piston rods II 2 10 10 0.05  d
Cross heads III 4 10 10 0.15  d (s) (5)
(1) KSR = disc shaped reflector.
(2) The classifying in inspection zones is depicted in Figure 5.15 to 5.20.
(3) For accumulations of 2 or more isolated indications to be recorded the minimum distance between 2 adjacent indications
shall be at least of length of the major indication.
This applies to distances in axial as well as in thickness direction.
Isolated indications with smaller distance are to be regarded as aligned indication.
(4) Piston rods with shaft diameter larger than 150 mm.
(5) For rectangular cross-section "d" corresponds to the smallest side length "s".

6.8 The acceptance of the forged component and distribution the defects have no considerable effect
which in the first instance had been rejected is possible on utilization of the forged component. In this case the
on condition that after further evaluation of the acceptance of the forged component is to be approved
indications performed by the customer and the Surveyor by an acceptance test certificate by both the customer
proof has been furnished that due to their size, position and the Surveyor.
Table 5.16 Acceptance criteria for ultrasonic testing of crank shafts
Total of all indication

Max. length mm (4) per pin
Size of the Min. distance Max. number of
allowable or journal, or per web or
max. allowable between two isolated
Zone (2) length of flange, respectively
KSR (1) indications (3) indications (3) (4)
indications
mm mm -
mm
I - - - - -
1
II 2 10 10 0.01  d(D)  0.20  d (D)
mm
1
III 4 15 10 0.02  d(D)  0.40  d (D)
mm
(1) KSR = Disc shaped reflector.

(2) The classifying in inspection zones is depicted in Fig. 5.21.
(3) For accumulations of 2 or more isolated indications to be recorded the minimum distance between 2 adjacent indications
shall be at least of length of major indication.
This applies to distance in axial as well as in thickness direction.
Isolated indications with smaller distance are to be regarded as aligned indication.
(4) Related to be diameter of crank pin "d" or to the diameter of main journal "D", respectively.

5-32 Section 5 – Steel Forgings H
H. List of Forged Components for which Non-destructive Tests are Required
Test method to be employed

Name of the forged component
VT MT UT
Structural parts concerning the hull:
rudder stocks and pintles X X X (1)
Parts for diesel engines:
- Crank shafts X X X (3)
- Connecting rods X X X (2)
- Piston rods X X X (2)
- Crossheads X X X
- Piston crowns X X (2) X
- Cylinder covers X X (2) X
- Piston pins X X (2)
- Tie rods X X (2)
- Bolts > M50 for:
- Main bearing X X (2)
- Connecting rod bearing X X (2)
- Cross heads X X (2)
- Cylinder covers X X (2)
- Camshaft drive gear wheels and chain wheels X X (2)
Main shafting and gears:
- Propeller shafts X X X (1)
- Intermediate shafts X X (1)
- Thrust shafts X X X (1)
- Gear wheels X X X (4)
- Gear shafts X X X (4)
- Pinions X X X (4)
Wheel rims X X X (4)
Turbo machinery (main drive):
- Rotors X X X
- Rotor discs X X
- Shafts X X X
- Blades guide vanes and blades X X (7) (8)
- Turbine casing bolt > M50 X X (7)
Other components:
X X
- Shafts for e-engines (main)
X X (5) (6) X (5)
- Forged components
- Made of steels for use at elevated temperatures
X X (5) (6) X (5)
- Made of steels tough at sub-zero temperatures
- Bolts for fixing of propeller blades ≥ M 50
X X (6)
- Bolts for superheated steam pipelines
X X (6)
(1) For diameters ≥ 250 mm.
(2) For diesel engines with cylinder diameter > 400 mm.
(3) For batchwise testing of small crankshafts ultrasonic testing of the prematerial is sufficient. Small crankshafts are those with
gross weights not exceeding 500 kg.
(4) For diameter of the gearing or of the shafts > 200 mm.
(5) For finished weights > 300 kg
(6) For austenitic or austenitic-ferritic steels penetrant testing (PT) instead of magnetic particle testing (MT).
(7) For main steam temperatures > 350°C.
(8) Instead of surface crack testing (MT, PT) eddy current testing may be considered, too.

I Section 5 – Steel Forgings 5-33
I. Classifying of Inspection Zones for Magnetic Particle Testing (MT)
Note:
- For principles for classifying in inspection zones I to IV see G.1.5.
- Acceptance criteria are contained in G. Table 5.13.
Fig. 5.10 Inspection zones for magnetic particle testing of shafts

5-34 Section 5 – Steel Forgings I
Fig. 5.11 Inspection zones for magnetic particle testing of rudder stocks and accessories

Fig. 5.12 Inspection zones for magnetic particle testing of machinery components

5-36 Section 5 – Steel Forgings I
Note :
Threads, oil bore holes and their radii are to be regarded as zone I in the regime of 2 ꞏ dB
dB = Bore hole diameter.
Fig. 5.13 Inspection zones for magnetic particle testing of machinery components

Fig. 5.14 Inspection zones for magnetic particle testing of crank shafts

5-38 Section 5 – Steel Forgings J
J. Classifying of Inspection Zones for Ultrasonic Testing (UT)
Fig. 5.15 Inspection zones for ultrasonic testing of shafts

J Section 5 – Steel Forgings 5-39
Fig. 5.16 Inspection zones for ultrasonic testing of rudder stocks and accessories

Fig. 5.17 Inspection zones for ultrasonic testing of rudder stocks and accessories

Fig 5.18 Inspection zones for ultrasonic testing of machinery components

Fig. 5.19 Inspection zones for ultrasonic testing of machinery components

Fig. 5.20 Inspection zones for ultrasonic testing of machinery components

Fig. 5.21 Inspection zones for ultrasonic testing of crankshafts

Section 6 – Steel Castings 6-1
SECTION 6
STEEL CASTINGS
Page
A. GENERAL............................................................................................................................................................ 6- 3
1. Scope
2. Manufacture
3. Quality of Castings
5. Heat Treatment (Including Straigthening)
7. Tightness
9. Testing
10. Inspection
12. Rectification of Defective Castings
13. Identification of Castings
14. Certification
B. STEEL CASTINGS FOR HULL AND MACHINERY CONSTRUCTION .............................................................. 6- 8
1. Scope
2. Cast Steel Grades
6. Testing
C. STEEL CASTINGS FOR CRANKSHAFTS AND CONNECTING RODS ............................................................ 6- 11
1. Scope
4. Method of Manufacture and Condition of Heat Treatment
5. Testing
D. STEEL CASTINGS FOR STEAM BOILERS, PRESSURE VESSELS AND PIPELINES ................................... 6- 12
1. Scope
3. Heat Treatnent and Condition of Supply
4. External and İnternal Condition
6. Testing
E. STEEL CASTINGS FOR LOW TEMPERATURE SERVICES ............................................................................. 6- 14
1. Scope
4. External and Internal Condition
6. Testing

6-2 Section 6 – Steel Castings
F. STAINLESS STEEL CASTINGS ......................................................................................................................... 6- 17

1. Scope
3. Selection of Grades of Cast Steel
4. Heat Treatnent and Condition of Supply
7. Testing
G. NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING OF CAST STEEL COMPONENTS .................................................................. 6- 20
1. Scope
2. Testing
3. Classifying in Severity Levels
4. Special Agreements For the Surface Roughness
5. Visual Testing
6. Magnetic Particle Testing
7. Penetrant Testing
8. Ultrasonic Testing
H. LIST OF CAST STEEL COMPONENTS FOR WHICH NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTS ARE REQUIRED ............ 6- 33
I. TESTING INSTRUCTIONS FOR HULL STRUCTURAL PARTS ........................................................................ 6- 34
J. TESTING INSTRUCTION FOR DIESEL ENGINE PARTS .................................................................................. 6- 42

A Section 6 – Steel Castings 6-3
A. General 2.4 For certain components including steel

castings subjected to surface hardening process, the
1. Scope
proposed method of manufacture may require special
approval by TL.
1.1 These rules are applicable to steel castings
intended for hull and machinery applications such as
stern frames, rudder frames, crankshafts, turbine 2.5 When two or more castings are joined by
casings, bedplates, etc. welding to form a composite component, the proposed

welding procedure is to be submitted for approval.
1.2 These rules are applicable only to steel Welding procedure qualification tests may be required.
castings where the design and acceptance tests are
related to mechanical properties at ambient
temperature. For other applications, additional
requirements may be necessary, especially when the
castings are intended for services at low or elevated All castings are to be free from surface or internal
temperatures. defects, which would be prejudicial to their proper

application in service. The surface finish is to be in
1.3 Alternatively, castings which comply with accordance with good practice and any specific
national or proprietary specifications may be accepted requirements of the approved plan.
equivalence to these rules or otherwise specially
approved or required by TL.
1.4 Specific rules are not given for alloy steel 4.1 All castings are to be made from killed steel
castings and where the use of such materials is and chemical composition is to be appropriate for the
proposed full details of the chemical composition, heat type of steel and mechanical properties specified for the
treatment, mechanical properties; testing, inspections castings.
and rectification are to be submitted for approval of TL.
4.2 The chemical composition of each heat is to be

2. Manufacture
determined by the manufacturer on a sample taken
2.1 Castings are to be made at a manufacturer preferably during the pouring of the heat. When multiple
approved by TL. heats are tapped into a common ladle, the ladle
analysis shall apply.
2.2 The steel is to be manufactured by a process
approved by TL. 4.3 For carbon and carbon-manganese steel
castings the chemical composition is to comply with the
2.3 All flame cutting, scarfing or arc-air gouging to
overall limits given in Table 6.1 or, where applicable, the
remove surplus metal is to be undertaken in accordance
requirements of the approved specification.
with recognised good practice and is to be carried out
before the final heat treatment. Preheating is to be
employed when necessitated by the chemical 4.4 Unless otherwise required suitable grain
composition and/or thickness of the castings. If refining elements such as aluminium may be used at
necessary, the affected areas are to be either machined the discretion of the manufacturer. The content of such
or ground smooth. elements is to be reported.

6-4 Section 6 – Steel Castings A
Table 6.1 Chemical composition limits for hull and machinery steel castings [%]
Total
Steel C Si S P Residual elements (max.)
Application Mn residuals
type (max.) (max.) (max.) (max.)
Cu Cr Ni Mo (max.)
Castings for
0.50-
non-welded 0.40(1) 0.60 0.040 0.040 0.30 0.30 0.40 0.15 0.80
1.60
construction
C, Castings for
C-Mn welded 1.60
0.23 0.60 0.015 0.020 0.30 0.30 0.40 0.15 0.80
construction max.
(1) For welded structures for machinery application C ≤ 0.23 or Ceq ≤ 0.49
5. Heat Treatment (Including Straightening) 5.4 If a casting is locally reheated or any

straightening operation is performed after the final heat
5.1 Castings are to be supplied in one of the treatment, a subsequent stress relieving heat treatment
following conditions: may be required in order to avoid the possibility of
harmful residual stresses.
Fully annealed
Normalized 5.5 The foundry is to maintain records of heat
Normalized and tempered treatment identifying the furnace used furnace charge,
Quenched and tempered date, temperature and time at temperature. The records
are to be presented to the surveyor on request.
The tempering temperature is to be not less than 550ºC.
6. Dimensions; Dimensional and Geometrical
5.2 Castings for components such as crankshafts Tolerances
and engine bedplates, where dimensional stability and
freedom from internal stresses are important, are to be The dimensions and the dimensional and geometrical
given a stress relief heat treatment. This is to be carried tolerances are governed by the values specified in the
out at a temperature of not less than 550ºC followed by drawings relating to the order or in the relevant
furnace cooling to 300ºC or lower. standards, as applicable. Appropriate details are to be
made known to the Surveyor.
5.3 Heat treatment is to be carried out in properly
constructed furnaces which are efficiently maintained 7. Tightness
and have adequate means for control and recording of
temperature. The furnace dimensions are to be such as All castings which are subjected to internal pressure by
to allow the whole casting to be uniformly heated to the the operating medium or for which special proof of
necessary temperature. In the case of very large impermeability is required are to be leak proof at the
castings alternative methods for heat treatment will be specified test pressures after being machined.
specially considered by TL. Sufficient thermocouples
are to be connected to the furnace charge to measure 8. Mechanical and Technological Properties
and record that its temperature is adequately uniform
unless the temperature uniformity of the furnace is 8.1 Tensile test
verified at regular intervals.
The tensile characteristics indicated in the Tables.
contained in this Section or, where applicable, in the

relevant standards or specifications are to be verified by of up to 4 500 kg. Residual quantities of up to 1250 kg
tensile test. are to be allocated to the preceding test batch. Parts
with unit weights > 1000 kg are to be tested individually.
8.2 Notch bar impact test
Where the casting is of complex design or where the
The impact energy specified for the various grades of finished mass exceeds 10 tonnes, two test samples are
cast steel is to be satisfied by the average value to be provided. Where large castings are made from two
measured on 3 Charpy V-notch or Charpy U-notch test or more casts, which are not mixed in a ladle prior to
specimens, one of which may give a result below the pouring, two or more test samples are to be provided
required average value although it may not be less than corresponding to the number of casts involved. These
70 % of the required average value. are to be integrally cast at locations as widely separated
as possible.
8.3 Other characteristics
9.2.1.3 For castings where the method of manufacture
Where special characteristics are specified for particular has been specially approved by TL in accordance with
grades of cast steel, e. g. resistance to intercrystalline 2.4, the number and position of test samples is to be
corrosion and mechanical characteristics at elevated agreed with the TL having regard to the method of
temperatures, these are, where necessary, to be proved manufacture employed.
by appropriate tests.
9.2.1.4 As an alternative to 9.2.1.1 , where a number
9. Testing of small castings of about the same size, each of which
is under 1000 kg in mass, are made from one cast and
9.1 Proof of chemical composition heat treated in the same furnace charge, a batch testing
procedure may be adopted using separately cast test
The manufacturer is to determine the chemical samples of suitable dimensions. At least one test
composition of each heat or, where necessary, of each sample is to be provided for each batch of castings.
ladle and present corresponding certificates to the
Surveyor. Should there be any doubt as to the chemical 9.2.1.5 The test samples are not to be detached from
composition of the products; a product analysis is to be the casting until the specified heat treatment has been
performed. completed and they have been properly identified.
9.2 Mechanical Tests and Mechanical Properties 9.2.1.6 The preparation of test specimens and the
procedures used for mechanical testing are to comply
9.2.1 Mechanical Tests
with the relevant requirements of Section 2. Unless
Test material, sufficient for the required tests and for otherwise agreed all tests are to be carried out in the
possible retest purposes is to be provided for each presence of the Surveyors.
casting or batch of castings.
9.2.2 Mechanical Properties
9.2.1.1 At least one test sample is to be provided for
each casting. Unless otherwise agreed these test 9.2.2.1 Table 6.4 gives the minimum requirements for
samples are to be either integrally cast or gated to the yield stress, elongation and reduction of area
castings and are to have a thickness of not less than 30 corresponding to different strength levels. Where it is
mm. proposed to use a steel with a specified minimum
tensile strength intermediate to those given,
9.2.1.2 The tests are to be performed on a heat-by corresponding minimum values for the other properties
heat basis. Castings from each heat that undergo the may be obtained by interpolation.
same heat treatment are to be grouped into test batches
9.2.2.2 Castings may be supplied to any specified

6-6 Section 6 – Steel Castings A
minimum tensile strength selected within the general dimensions is the responsibility of the manufacturer.
limits detailed in Table 6.4 but subject to any additional
requirements of the relevant construction Rules. 10.3 When required by the relevant construction
Rules, or by the approved procedure for welded
9.2.2.3 The mechanical properties are to comply with composite components, appropriate non-destructive
the requirements of Table 6.4 appropriate to the testing is also to be carried out before acceptance and
specified minimum tensile strength or, where applicable, the results are to be reported by the manufacturer. The
the requirements of the approved specification. extent of testing and acceptance criteria is to be agreed
with TL.
9.2.2.4 Re-test requirements for tensile tests are to be
in accordance with Section 2 (see 9.3) 10.4 When required by the relevant construction
Rules castings are to be pressure tested before final
9.2.2.5 The additional tests detailed in 9.2.2.4 are to acceptance. These tests are to be carried out in the
be taken, preferably from the same, but alternatively presence of the surveyor and are to be to their
from another, test sample representative of the casting satisfaction.
or batch of castings.
10.5 In the event of any casting proving to be
9.2.2.6 At the option of the manufacturer, when a defective during subsequent machining or testing it is to
casting or batch of castings has failed to meet the test be rejected notwithstanding any previous certification.
requirements, it may be reheat treated and re-submitted
for acceptance tests. 11. Non-Destructive Tests
9.3 Retests in the event of failure of specimens 11.1 Where non-destructive tests are required,
these are to be performed by the manufacturer of the
If tensile test specimens fail to meet the required values castings and/or the finishing plant.
under test, if the specified average value is not achieved
in a notched bar impact test or if an individual value is 11.2 Non-destructive tests are to be performed in
less than 70 % of the required average value, then, accordance with the specifications stated in G. to J.
before the unit test quantity or the casting is rejected,
the procedures for retests prescribed in Section 2, may 12. Rectification of Defective Castings
be applied. The additional test specimens shall be taken
either from the same test sample as the original 12.1 General
specimen or from other samples which are
representative of the casting or of the unit test quantity. 12.1.1 The approval of TL is to be obtained where
steel castings from which defects were removed are to
10. Inspection be used with or without weld repair.
10.1 All castings are to be cleaned and adequately Procedure of removal of defect and weld repair is to be
prepared for examination; suitable methods include in accordance with TL- G 69.
pickling, caustic cleaning, wire brushing, local grinding,
shot or sand blasting. The surface are not to be 12.1.2 Where the defective area is to be repaired by
hammered, peened or treated in any way which may welding, the excavation is to be suitably shaped to allow
obscure defects. good access for welding. The resulting grooves are to
be subsequently ground smooth and complete
10.2 Before acceptance all castings are to be elimination of the defective material is to be verified by
presented to the surveyor for visual examination. Where MT or PT.
applicable, this is to include the examination of internal
surfaces. Unless otherwise agreed, the verification of 12.1.3 Shallow grooves or depressions resulting from
the removal of defects may be accepted provided that

they will cause no appreciable reduction in the strength relieving heat treatment at a temperature of not less
of the casting. The resulting grooves or depressions are than 550 ºC.
to be subsequently ground smooth and complete
elimination of the defective material is to be verified by The type of heat treatment employed will be dependent
MT or PT. Small surface irregularities sealed by welding on the chemical composition of the casting and the
are to be treated as weld repairs. dimensions, position and nature of the repairs.
12.1.4 The manufacturer is to maintain full records 12.2.6 Subject to prior agreement of TL, special
detailing the extent and location of repairs made to each consideration may be given to the omission of post weld
casting and details of weld procedures and heat heat treatment or to the acceptance of local stress-
treatments applied for repairs. These records are to be relieving heat treatment where the repaired area is
available to the surveyor and copies provided on small and machining of the casting has reached an
request. advanced stage.
12.2 Weld repairs 12.2.7 On completion of heat treatment the weld

repairs and adjacent material are to be ground smooth
When it has been agreed that a casting can be repaired and examined by magnetic particle or liquid penetrant
by welding, the following requirements apply: testing. Supplementary examination by ultrasonic or
radiography may also be required depending on the
12.2.1 Before welding is started, full details of the dimensions and nature of the original defect.
extent and location of the repair, the proposed welding Satisfactory results are to be obtained from all forms of
procedure, heat treatment and subsequent inspection non-destructive testing used.
procedures are to be submitted for approval.
12.2.2 All castings in alloy steels and all castings for
crankshafts are to be suitably pre-heated prior to 13.1 The manufacturer is to adopt a system of
welding. Castings in carbon or carbon-manganese steel identification, which will enable all finished castings to
may also require to be pre-heated depending on their be traced to the original cast and the surveyor is to be
chemical composition and the dimensions and position given full facilities for so tracing the castings when
of the weld repairs. required.
12.2.3 Welding is to be done under cover in positions 13.2 Before acceptance, all castings which have
free from draughts and adverse weather conditions by been tested and inspected with satisfactory results are
qualified welders with adequate supervision. As far as to be clearly marked by the manufacturer with the
possible, all welding is to be carried out in the down following details:
hand (flat) position.
- Steel quality.
12.2.4 The welding consumables used are to be of an
appropriate composition, giving a weld deposit with - Identification number, cast number or other
mechanical properties similar and in no way inferior to marking which will enable the full history of the
those of the parent castings. Welding procedure tests casting to be traced.
are to be carried out by the manufacturer to
demonstrate that satisfactory mechanical properties can - Manufacturer's name or trade mark.
be obtained after heat treatment.
- TL's name, initials or symbol.
12.2.5 After welding has been completed the castings
are to be given either a suitable heat treatment in - Abbreviated name of the TL's local office.
accordance with the requirements of 5.1 or a stress

6-8 Section 6 – Steel Castings A,B
- Personal stamp of Surveyors responsible for 2. Cast Steel Grades

inspection.
On condition that they meet the requirements specified
- Where applicable, test pressure. in 4., the following grades of cast steels may be used:
13.3 Where small castings are manufactured in 2.1 General-purpose cast steels conforming to EN
large numbers, modified arrangements for identification 10293.
2.2 General-purpose cast steels with enhanced
14. Certification weldability and toughness conforming to EN 10293.
The manufacturer is to provide the required type of 2.3 Quenched and tempered cast steels conform-
inspection certificate giving the following particulars for ing to EN 10293.
each castings or batch of castings which has been
accepted: 2.4 Other grades of cast steel with minimum
impact energy values conforming to other standards or
- Purchaser’s name and order number, material specifications, provided that they are equivalent
to the grades described in 2.1 to 2.3 and their suitability
- Description of castingss and steel quality, has been confirmed by TL. An initial test of product
suitability may be required for this purpose
- Identification number,
- Steelmaking process, cast number and
chemical analysis of ladle sample, 3.1 All castings are to be properly heat treated.
- Results of mechanical tests, Acceptable methods of heat treatment are:
- Results of non-destructive tests, where - Normalizing,

applicable,
- Normalizing and tempering,
- Details of heat treatment, including
temperature and holding times, - Quenching and tempering.
- Where applicable, test pressure. 3.2 Where castings are subject to special re-
quirements with regard to their geometrical and di-
mensional stability or to the absence of internal
B. Steel Castings for Hull and Machinery stresses, e.g. diesel engine bedplates, stem and stern
Construction post parts, additional stress-relieving heat treatment is
required. For carbon and carbon-manganese steels, the
1. Scope heat treatment is to be performed at a temperature of at
least 550°C followed by cooling in the furnace to below
These Rules are applicable to castings made of unal- 300°C. For quenched and tempered steel castings, the
loyed and alloyed grades of cast steel which are in- heat treatment temperature is to be specially
tended for the manufacture of components and struc- determined. The stress-relieving heat treatment may be
tural parts in hull and machinery construction e.g. diesel dispensed with in the case of quenched and tempered
engine components (excluding crankshafts), gears, steel castings where tempering is followed by a cooling
couplings, and also stem and stern posts, stern tubes, rate of up to 15 °C/h.
shaft struts, rudder bearings and anchors.

B Section 6 – Steel Castings 6-9
4. Chemical Composition relation to specified minimum tensile strengths.
4.1 Carbon and carbon-manganese steel castings 5.4 Impact energy

including the grades of cast steel described in 2.1 and
2.4 are subject to the limits for the chemical composition All grades of cast steel are to meet the energy impact
of the heat specified in Table 6.1. values prescribed for the grade in question.
Where necessary, the manufacturer may add grain 6. Testing

refining elements, e. g. aluminium.
6.1 Tensile test
4.2 For grades of cast steel conforming to 2.2 and
2.3 the limits for the chemical composition specified in The mechanical properties shall be verified by tensile
the standards are applicable. test. The test specimens are to be prepared in
accordance with A.9.2.1.2.
4.3 For cast alloy steels conforming to 2.4 the
limits for the chemical composition specified in the
recognized standards or material specifications is to 6.2 Notched bar impact test
apply.
Notched bar impact testing is to be performed on each
4.4 Where the weldability of the casting is subject test batch or, where applicable, each casting. The test
to special requirements, the carbon equivalent is to be specimens are to be prepared in accordance with
calculated according to the following formula: A.9.2.1.2. The type of specimen is governed by the
relevant standard or specification.
C eq = C+ + + [%]
6 5 15 6.3 Non-destructive tests
5. Mechanical and Technological Properties 6.3.1 In case non-destructive tests are prescribed for
castings they are to be performed in accordance with G.
5.1 For grades of cast steel conforming to 2.1 to to J.
2.3, the requirements specified in the respective
standards is to apply, see Table 6.2 (grades of cast 6.3.2 Where castings are welded together, the welds
steel conforming to EN 10293) and Table 6.3 (grades of are to be subjected to magnetic particle and ultrasonic
cast steel conforming to EN 10293). or radiographic inspection. The extent of the inspection
is to be as specified on the approval drawing or will be
5.2 Other grades of cast steel as per 2.4 is to determined at the time of approval of the welding
have the characteristic properties of the respective procedure.
grade according to the standard or the specification. In
addition, the minimum requirements specified in Table 6.4 Tightness test
6.4 are applicable to castings made of C and CMn cast
steels. Castings subjected to internal pressure, e.g. stern
tubes, are to be subjected to a hydraulic pressure test.
5.3 The cast steels shown in Table 6.4 may be The test is to be performed with the casting in machined
supplied with any minimum tensile strength within the condition. The test pressure is to be 1.5 times of the
limits specified in the table. The values graduated in service pressure and for stern tubes uniformly 2 bars.
2
steps of 40 N/mm do not represent the minimum The test pressure is to be kept for at least 10 min.
tensile strengths of particular grades of cast steel but
are intended to provide means of determining the
required mechanical characteristics by interpolation in

6-10 Section 6 – Steel Castings B
Table 6.2 Mechanical properties of cast steels conforming to EN 10293
Yield strength Tensile strength Reduction in Impact energy KV (1)

Elongation A
Grade of cast ReH Rm area Z KV
2 2 [%]
steel [N/mm ] [N/mm ] [%] [J] (2) min.
min.
min. min. min. t ≤ 30 mm(3) t > 30mm(3)
GS-38 200 380 25 40 35 35
GS-45 230 450 22 31 27 27
GS-52 260 520 18 25 27 22
GS-60 300 600 15 21 27 20
(1) Testing temperature = Room temperature

For castings for welded structures in shipbuilding the requirements according to Table 6.3 do apply.
(2) Average value of 3 tests
(3) t = Sample thickness
Table 6.3 Mechanical properties of cast steels conforming to EN 10293
Yield Impact
Tensile
Heat-treated strength ReH Elongation A energy Transition
Grade of Wall thickness strength
condition (1) [%] KV temp. Tu
cast steel [mm] Rm
[27J] (4)
2
(5) [N/mm ] 2 min. [J] (2)
[N/mm ]
min. min.
up to 50 260 430 - 600 25 65 -25°C

GS-16 Mn 5 N
over 50 to 100 230 430 - 600 25 45 -15°C
up to 50 300 500 - 650 22 55 -20°C
over 50 to 100 260 500 - 650 22 40 -10°C

GS-20 Mn 5 N
over 100 to 160 (260) (3) 480 - 630 20 35 0°C
over 160 (240) (3) 450 - 600 20 27 RT
up to 50 360 500 - 650 24 70 -30°C
over 50 to 100 300 500 - 650 24 50 -20°C

GS-20 Mn 5 QT
over 100 to 160 (280) (3) 500 - 650 22 40 -10°C
over 160 (260) (3) 480 - 630 22 30 RT
(1) If there is no marked yield strength, the 0.2 % proof stress applies.
(2) Average value of 3 tests at room temperature (individual value at least 70 %).
(3) The values in brackets are only an approximate indication of the minimum yield strength in the casting.
(4) Requirements for welded structures for shipbuilding.
(5) N = Denotes normalizing
QT = Denotes quenching and tempering

B,C Section 6 – Steel Castings 6-11
Table 6.4 Mechanical properties of cast steels conforming to B.2.4
Minimum tensile Yield Elongation Reduction Impact energy (3)

strength (1) (2) strength ReH A in area Z KV KU
Grade of steel
Rm [N/mm²] [%] [%] [J] [J]
[N/mm²] min. min. min. min. min.
400 200 25 40 25 25
440 220 22 30 20 22
Ordinary quality 480 240 20 27 18 20
C-and CMn
520 260 18 25 15 17
cast steel
560 300 15 20 12 15
600 320 13 20 10 12
400 200 28 45 32 30
440 220 26 45 28 27
Special quality 480 240 24 40 25 25
C and CMn cast
520 260 22 40 20 22
steel
560 280 20 35 18 20
600 300 18 35 15 17
(1) Where the minimum tensile strength of a steel grade falls between two of the graduated values, the requirements may be
determined by interpolation.
(2) The tensile strength determined by testing may not exceed the specified minimum tensile strength by more than 150 N/mm2 in
case of the ordinary qualities and 120 N/mm2 in the case of the special qualities.
(3) Average value of 3 tests (individual value not less than 70 %).
C. Steel Castings for Crankshafts and Con-

necting Rods mechanical properties and required impact energy and
hardness values, the data in the approved specifications
1. Scope or drawings are applicable. However, the requirements
specified in B.2.4 and, for special quality steel castings,
These Rules are applicable to throws and webs of built Table 6.4 are to be satisfied as a minimum requirement.
crankshafts and connecting rods made of carbon,
carbon-manganese and low-alloy grades of cast steel. 3.2 The cast steel is to undergo vacuum degassing
or another suitable treatment after melting, so that the
2. Cast Steel Grades properties mentioned in the specification may be
achieved.
Only grades of cast steel which have been approved by
TL as suitable for the intended application may be used. 4. Method of Manufacture and Condition of
To this end, the engine manufacturer is to submit to TL Heat Treatment
for approval specifications or drawings containing all the
data required for evaluating the castings, e.g. method of 4.1 The method of manufacture is to be approved
manufacture, chemical composition, heat treatment and by TL. The details of the approval test are established
mechanical properties. by TL from case to case.
3. Requirements Applicable to the Material 4.2 All castings are to be in a heat treated
condition appropriate to the grade of steel. The following
3.1 With regard to the chemical composition, processes are acceptable:

6-12 Section 6 – Steel Castings C,D
- Normalizing, performed both at the foundry and at the manufacturer's

works.
- Normalizing and tempering,
- Quenching and tempering. D. Steel Castings for Steam Boilers, Pressure

Vessels and Pipelines
Where possible, heat treatment is to be carried out after
preliminary machining. If this is not possible, additional 1. Scope
stress-relieving heat treatment is to be performed after
preliminary machining with the minimum possible These Rules are applicable to castings made from
cutting allowance. unalloyed and alloyed grades of cast steel and used for
the manufacture of valve and pump housings,
4.3 Defects are normally to be removed by endplates, flanges, nozzles and pipe fittings.
grinding, gouging and/or machining. Care is to be taken
to ensure that the required minimum cross sections are 2. Cast Steel Grades
preserved.
The following grades of cast steel may be used:
The removal of defects by welding requires the consent
of TL as a matter of principle and may only be 2.1 Grades of cast steel for use at room temperature
considered if the defects cannot be eliminated by the and high temperatures conforming to EN 10213.
aforementioned measures.
The chemical composition of the commonly used
5. Testing grades of cast steel is given in Table 6.5 and the me-
chanical properties are stated in Table 6.6.
5.1 Tensile test
2.2 Ferritic grades of cast steel GS-38 and GS-45
The mechanical properties are to be verified by tensile conforming to EN 10293 up to a wall temperature of
test. For preparing the tensile specimens, test samples 300°C.
are to be cast integrally with the casting at a point
stipulated in the specification. Each casting is to be 2.3 Heat resistant ferritic, ferritic-austenitic and
tested individually. austenitic grades of cast steel as well as Nickel and
cobalt based alloys conforming to EN 10295.
2.4 Other grades of cast steel conforming to other
Notched bar impact specimens are to be taken from standards or material specifications, provided that they
every casting and tested. The location of the specimens are comparable with the grades of cast steel stated in
is to be as described in 5.1. The specimen shape items 2.1 to 2.3 and proof has been furnished of their
prescribed in the specification (Charpy V-notch or suitability for the intended application. An initial test of
Charpy U-notch specimen) is to be used. product suitability may be required for this purpose.
5.3 Non-destructive tests 2.4.1 In addition, ferritic grades of cast steel is to

satisfy the following minimum requirements:
Crank shafts and connecting rods are to be subjected to
non-destructive tests according to the requirements - The elongation A shall have the characteristic
stipulated in G. to J. minimum elongation values of the steel grade as
specified by TL, but is to be not less than 15 %.
By agreement between the foundry and the crankshaft
or connecting rod manufacturer, the tests may be

D Section 6 – Steel Castings 6-13
Table 6.5 Chemical composition (%) of the commonly used grades of cast steel conforming to EN 10213
Grade of cast Si P S
C Mn Cr Mo
steel max. Max. Max.
GP240GH 0.18 - 0.23 0.60 0.50 - 1.20 0.030 0.020 (1)
GP280GH 0.18 - 0.25(2) 0.60 0.80 - 1.20 (2) 0.030 0.020 (1)
G20Mo5 0.15 - 0.23 0.60 0.50 - 1.00 0.025 0.020 (1) 0.40 - 0.60
G17CrMo 5-5 0.15 - 0.20 0.60 0.50 - 1.00 0.020 0.020 (1) 1.00 - 1.50 0.45 - 0.65
G17 CrMo 9-10 0.13 - 0.20 0.60 0.50 - 0.90 0.020 0.020 (1) 2.00 - 2.50 0.90 - 1.20
(1) In the case of castings having a standard wall thickness of < 28 mm, 0.030 % is permissible.
(2) For each 0.01 % reduction in the specified maximum carbon content, a 0.04 % increase of Manganese above the specified
maximum content is permissible up to a maximum of 1.40 %.
Table 6.6 Mechanical properties of the commonly used grades of cast steel conforming to EN 10213
Notched bar
Tensile test
impact test
Heat treatment Thickness
Grade of cast steel Rp0.2 A
symbol (1) mm max. 2 Rm KV (2)
[N/mm ] 2 min.
[N/mm ] [J] min.
min. [%]
N 100 240 420-600 22 27

GP240GH
QT 100 240 420-600 22 40
N 100 280 480-640 22 27

GP280GH
QT 100 280 480-640 22 35
G20Mo5 QT 100 245 440-590 22 27
G17 CrMo5-5 QT 100 315 490-690 20 27
G17 CrMo9-10 QT 100 400 590-740 18 40
(1) N = Denotes normalizing

QT = Denotes quenching and tempering
(2) Testing temperature = Room temperature (individual value not less than 70 %)
- The impact energy is to be at least 27 J at room Proof of weldability is to be furnished by the

temperature in tests performed with Charpy V- manufacturer.
notch specimens. Ductile fracture behaviour is a
fundamental requirement. 3. Heat treatment and Condition of Supply
- Where necessary, the yield strength at elevated All steel castings shall be supplied in a heat-treated
temperature and the long-time rupture stress condition appropriate to the grade of cast steel.
properties at elevated temperature are to be
verified by the manufacturer, specifying the 4. External and Internal Condition
guide values for the chemical composition.
The requirements pertaining to the external and internal

6-14 Section 6 – Steel Castings D,E
condition are specified in TRD 103. For this purpose, test is to show that quenching and tempering has been
the cast steel is to be classed into quality levels carried out homogeneously (the difference in hardness
according to the intended working temperature and between the hardest and the softest tested component
pressure, see the Technical Rules for Steam Boilers in the test batch is not to exceed 30 HB).
TRD 103 and "AD-Merkblatt" W5.
The manufacturer is to ensure by non-destructive tests
5.1 General requirements on his products that the requirements are pertaining to
the external and internal condition according to 4. are
With regard to the chemical composition, mechanical met. Unless otherwise agreed, the scope of testing is to
and technological properties, required impact energy conform to TRD 103 or AD data sheet W5, whichever is
appropriate. Valves and fittings are subject to TRD 110.
5.2 Weldability
Grades of cast steel conforming to these Rules are to E. Steel Castings for Low Temperature
be weldable by established workshop methods. Services
Preheating and/or post-weld heat treatments may be

1. Scope
required for this purpose, depending on the chemical
composition.
These rules are applicable to steel castings which are to
be used for cargo and processing equipment on gas
6. Testing
tankers at design temperatures below 0 °C, e.g. flanges,
valve parts, weld-on and socket-welding pieces.
The castings are to be presented for testing in finished
condition (condition of supply) and are to undergo the 2. Cast Steel Grades
following tests.
The grades of cast steel stated in Table 6.7 may be used
6.1 Tensile test within the limits for the minimum design temperatures,
provided that they satisfy the requirements of 5.
test. The tests are to be performed on a heat-by-heat 2.1 Grades of cast steel for use at low
temperatures conforming to EN 10213. The chemical
basis, parts undergoing the same heat treatment being
composition of commonly used grades of cast steel is
grouped into test batches in accordance with A.9.2.1.2.
shown in Table 6.8 and the mechanical properties are
A tensile specimen is to be taken from each test batch
stated in Table 6.9.
and tested. Castings with unit weights > 1000 kg shall
be tested individually.
2.2 Other grades of cast steel
6.2 Notched bar impact test Other grades of cast steel conforming to other stan-
dards or material specifications, provided that they are
The castings shall be subjected to the notched bar comparable to the grades of cast steel described in 2.1,
impact test. The number of sets of specimens (3 Charpy that they meet the requirements of 3. to 5. and that
V-notch specimens per set) is to be determined in the proof has been furnished of their suitability for the
same way as the number of tensile specimens. intended application. An initial test of product suitability
may be required for this purpose.
6.3 Hardness test
All quenched and tempered steel castings which are

All steel castings are to be supplied in a heat-treated
tested on a heat-by-heat basis shall be subjected to a
condition appropriate to the grade of cast steel, see
comparative hardness test. The result of the hardness
Table 6.9.

E Section 6 – Steel Castings 6-15
Table 6.7 Approved grades of cast steels for use at low temperatures
Permitted minimum Designation or material

Grades of cast steel Standard
design temperature No.
Weldable cast carbon- -20°C(1) G17 Mn 5 EN 10213

manganese steel -40°C(1) G20 Mn 5 EN 10213
1.5 % cast nickel steel -40°C(1) GS-10 Ni 6 SEW 685
2.25 % cast nickel steel -65°C G9-Ni 10 EN 10213
3.5 % cast nickel steel -90°C G9 Ni 14 EN 10213
1.4308 (2) EN 10213
Austenitic grades of cast
-165°C 1.4408 EN 10213
steel
1.4581 (3) EN 10213
(1) A minimum design temperature down to - 55 °C is possible if this is verified by an approval test.
(2) In addition EN 10283 does apply.
(3) Unsuitable for carriage of ammonia.
Table 6.8 Chemical composition [%] of the commonly used grades of cast steel conforming to EN 10213
Grades of cast Si P S
C Mn Ni
steel max. max. max.
G17Mn5 0.15 - 0.20 0.60 1.00 - 1.60 0.020 0.020 (1) -
G20Mn5 0.17 - 0.23 0.60 1.00 - 1.60 0.020 0.020 (1) maks. 0.80
G9Ni10 0.06 - 0.12 0.60 0.50 - 0.80 0.020 0.015 2.00 - 3.00
G9Ni14 0.06 - 0.12 0.60 0.50 - 0.80 0.020 0.015 3.00 - 4.00
(1) For castings having a standard wall thickness of < 28 mm, 0.030 % S is permissible.
Table 6.9 Mechanical properties of the commonly used grades of cast steel conforming to EN 10213
Notched bar impact

Heat Tensile test at room temperature
Grades of cast Thickness test (2)
treatment
steel [mm]. max.
symbol (1) Rp0.2 Rm A KV Test temp.
2 2
[N/mm ] min. [N/mm ] [%] min. J min. °C
G17Mn5 QT 50 240 450-600 24 27 -40
N 30 300 480-620 20 27 -30

G20Mn5
QT 100 300 500-650 22 27 -40
G9Ni10 QT 35 280 480-630 24 34 -70
G9Ni14 QT 35 360 500-650 20 34 -95
(1) N = Denotes normalizing, QT = Denotes quenching and tempering.

(2) Required impact energy value shown in Table 6.11 is to be complied with.

6-16 Section 6 – Steel Castings E
4. External and Internal Condition at the test temperatures stated in the table, using
Charpy V-notch specimens.
The external and internal condition shall be subject to
quality levels in accordance with Table 6.10 depending 6. Testing
on the minimum design temperature.
The castings are to be presented for testing in finished
If the evaluation is carried out according to other condition (condition of supply) and are to undergo the
standards, the requirements are to be equivalent to following tests.
those specified in Table 6.10
6.1 Tensile test
Table 6.10 Assignment of quality levels
Minimum design test. The tests are to be performed on a heat-by-heat
Quality level according to:
temperature basis, parts undergoing the same heat treatment being
(1) (2) (3) (4)
t grouped into test batches. A tensile specimen is to be
SM4, LM4, AM4 (1), taken from each test batch and tested. Castings with
≥ -105°C SP4, CP3, LP4, AP4 (2),
unit weights > 1 000 kg are to be tested individually.
UV4 (3), RV4 (4)
SM3, LM3, AM3 (1),
< -105°C SP3, CP3, LP3, AP3 (2),
UV3 (3), RV3 (4)
The castings are to be subjected to the notched bar
SM 01 (1)
Welding edges (5) impact test in compliance with the prescribed test
CP 01 (2)
(1) EN 1369 temperature according to Table 6.11. The number of
(2) EN 1371-1 sets of test specimens (3 Charpy V-notch specimens
(3) EN 12680-2 per set) is to be determined in the same way as the
(4) EN 12681 number of tensile specimens.
(5) For surface crack detection linear indications are
not allowed.
The test may be dispensed with in the case of austenitic
steel castings with design temperatures of > - 105°C.
6.3 Hardness test
5.1 General requirements
All quenched and tempered steel castings which are
The chemical composition and the mechanical proper- tested on a heat-by-heat basis are to be subjected to a
ties are subject to the requirements specified in the comparative hardness test. The result of the hardness
standards or the approved specifications (see Tables test is to show that quenching and tempering has been
6.8 and 6.9). carried out homogeneously (the difference in hardness
between the hardest and the softest tested component
5.2 Weldability in the test batch shall not exceed 30 HB).
Grades of cast steel conforming to these rules are to be 6.4 Non-destructive testing
weldable by established workshop methods.
The manufacturer is to ensure by non-destructive tests
5.3 Impact energy at low temperatures on his products that the requirements are pertaining to
the external and internal condition according to 4. are
The required impact energy values specified in Table met.
6.11 for the relevant grades of cast steel are to be met

E,F Section 6 – Steel Castings 6-17
Table 6.11 Required impact energy values at low temperatures
Notched bar impact test
Grade of cast steel Impact energy

Test temp.
KV [J] (1)
[ºC]
min.
Weldable cast carbon manganese steel 27 (19)

5 K below minimum design temp., not
exceeding -20°C
1.5 % cast nickel steel 34 (24)
2.25 % cast nickel steel -70°C 34 (24)
3.5 % cast nickel steel -95°C 34 (24)
Austenitic grades of cast steel (2) -196°C 41 (27) (3)
(1) Average value for 3 specimens. Figures in parentheses indicate lowest individual value.
(2) For design temperatures of - 105 °C and above, verification of the impact energy may be dispensed with.
(3) Some austenitic grades of cast steel are subject to higher required impact energy values, see Table 6.13.
F. Stainless Steel Castings

properties are given in Table 6.13.
1. Scope
2.2 Other stainless steels conforming to other
These Rules are applicable to steel castings made from standards or specifications after their suitability has
austenitic and austenitic-ferritic grades of steel which been established by TL. An initial test of product
are intended for use in cargo and processing equipment suitability on the manufacturer's premises may be
for chemical tankers and other equipment for which required for this purpose.
chemical stability in relation to the cargo or the
operating fluid is required. These Rules also apply to 3. Selection of Grades of Cast Steel
sleeves and bushes for propeller shafts and rudder
stocks. 3.1 As regards their chemical resistance, the
grades of steel are to be selected in accordance with
The Rules are also applicable in conjunction with E. for the operator's list of substances, which provides
austenitic grades of cast steel which are designed for information on the nature of the substances to be
use in cargo and processing systems for gas tankers. transported or stored.
2. Cast Steel Grades 3.2 Where austenitic grades of cast steel are in-
tended for cargo and process equipment for gas tank-
The following grades of casting may be used, provided ers, the requirements applicable to castings as stated in
that they satisfy the requirements stated in 6. E., are to apply.
2.1 Austenitic and austenitic-ferritic grades of steel 4. Heat Treatment and Condition of Supply
conforming to EN 10213, as well as the grades
indicated in EN 10283, Corrosion resistant steel All steel castings are to be supplied in a heat-treated
castings. The chemical composition of these grades of condition appropriate to the grade of cast steel, i.e. the
cast steel is shown in Table 6.12 and the mechanical grades specified in Table 6.13 shall be solution-
annealed and quenched in water

6-18 Section 6 – Steel Castings E
Table 6.12 Chemical composition (%) of suitable grades of cast steel in dependence on EN 10213 and EN 10283
6-18
Designation
C Si Mn P S
Cr Mo Ni Cu Other elements
max. max. max. max. max.
Material
Grade of cast steel
no
GX2CrNi19-11 (1) 1.4309 (1) 0.030 1.50 2.00 0.035 0.025 18.00 to 20.00 9.00 to 12.00 N:max.0.20
GX5CrNi19-10 (1) 1.4308 (1) 0.07 1.50 1.50 0.040 0.030 18.00 to 20.00 8.00 to 11.00 -

Nb:8·C,
GX5CrNiNb19-11 (1) 1.4552 (1) 0.07 1.50 1.50 0.040 0.030 18.00 to 20.00 9.00 to 12.00
max.1.00
N: max.
GX2CrNiMo19-11-2 (1) 1.4409 (1) 0.030 1.50 2.00 0.035 0.025 18.00 to 20.00 2.00 to 2.50 9.00 to 12.00
0.20
GX5CrNiMo19-11-2 (1) 1.4408 (1) 0.07 1.50 1.50 0.040 0.030 18.00 to 20.00 2.00 to 2.50 9.00 to 12.00 -
Nb:8·C
GX5CrNiMoNb19-11-2 (1) 1.4581 (1) 0.07 1.50 1.50 0.040 0.030 18.00 to 20.00 2.00 to 2.50 9.00 to 12.00
max. 1.00
N: max.
GX2NiCrMo28-20-2 (1) 1.4458 (1) 0.030 1.00 2.00 0.035 0.025 19.00 to 22.00 2.00 to 2.50 26.00 to 30.00 max.2.00
0.20
GX2CrNiMoN22-5-3 1.4470 0.030 1.00 2.00 0.035 0.025 21.00 to 23.00 2.50 to 3.50 4.50 to 6.50 N: 0.12 to 0.20
GX2CrNiMoCuN25-6-3-3 1.4517 0.030 1.00 1.50 0.035 0.025 24.50 to 26.50 2.50 to 3.50 5.00 to 7.00 2.75 to 3.50 N: 0.12 to 0.22
GX2CrNiMoN26-7-4 (2) 1.4469 (2) 0.030 1.00 1.00 0.035 0.025 25.00 to 27.00 3.00 to 5.00 6.00 to 8.00 max.1.30 N: 0.12 to 0.22
(1) According to the intended purpose, e.g. at high or low temperatures, narrower limits may be specified for some elements by agreement between foundry and customer.
(2) For this grade of steel a minimum value for the "pitting factor" PI = Cr + 3.3 Mo + 16 N ≥ 40 may be called for.
F
F Section 6 – Steel Castings 6-19
Table 6.13 Mechanical properties of suitable grades of cast steel
Tensile test at room temperature Notched bar

Thick-
Heat treatment impact test
Material ness
Designation + AT (1)
No. [mm]
°C Rp1.0(4) A
max. 2 Rm KV(6) [J]
[N/mm ] 2 [%]
[N/mm ] min.
min. min.
GX2CrNi19-11 1.4309 1050 – 1150 150 210 440 – 640 30 80
GX5CrNi19-10 1.4308 1050 – 1150 150 200 440 – 640 30 60
GX5CrNiNb19-11 1.4552 1050 – 1150 150 200 440 – 640 25 40
GX2CrNiMo19-11-2 1.4409 1080 – 1150 150 220 440 – 640 30 80
GX5CrNiMo19-11-2 1.4408 1080 – 1150 150 210 440 – 640 30 60
GX5CrNiMoNb19-11-2 1.4581 1080 – 1150 150 210 440 – 640 25 40
GX2NiCrMo28-20-2 1.4458 1100 – 1180 150 190 430 – 630 30 60
1120 – 1150
GX2CrNiMoN22-5-3 1.4470 150 420 (5) 600 – 800 20 30
(2) (3)
1120 – 1150
GX2CrNiMoCuN25-6-3-3 1.4517 150 480 (5) 650 – 850 22 50
(2) (3)
1140 – 1180
GX2CrNiMoN26-7-4 1.4469 150 480 (5) 650 – 850 22 50
(2) (3)
(1) The heat treatment applicable to all grades of steel is + AT + QW (solution annealing + quenching in water).
(2) Following solution annealing at high temperature, the castings may be cooled to between 1040 °C and 1010 °C before
quenching in water to improve corrosion resistance and prevent cracks in the event of complex shapes.
(3) In the case of cast steel intended for pressure vessels, the precipitation-hardened condition is not applicable to austenitic-
ferritic steels.
(4) Rp0 2 may be estimated by reducing the Rp1.0 value by 25 N/mm2.
(5) Rp0.2
(6) Test temperature = room temperature RT (individual value not less than 70 %)

6.1.2 For steel castings for the cargo and processing
Requirements to the external and internal condition are equipment of chemical tankers, the composition is to be
to be agreed on by the customer and the manufacturer. selected so as to ensure the chemical stability required
Requirements to welding edges and special rim zones for the particular application, having regard to the
are to be agreed on separately. In case no agreements intended heat-treated condition of the material.
were made G.3. does apply. Furthermore, where steel castings are to be used for
welded structures, the composition is to be selected so
6. Requirements Applicable to the Material as to ensure that the material is suitable for the
proposed welding process and that it remains
6.1 Chemical composition chemically stable after welding and any post-weld heat
treatments which may be applied. In the case of
6.1.1 The limits stated in Table 6.12 and/or the austenitic and austenitic-ferritic grades of cast steel, 6.2
specifications approved by TL are applicable. are to be complied with. The manufacturer is to prove
the weldability of the material if requested to do so.

6-20 Section 6 – Steel Castings F,G
6.1.3 If compliance with a minimum value for the 7.3 Test of resistance to intercrystalline
aggregate effective chromium value W is required for a corrosion
particular application, this is calculated as follows:
Austenitic and austenitic-ferritic steel castings are to be
W [%] = [%] Cr + 3.3 · [%] Mo tested per heat and heat treatment batch for their resis-
tance to intercrystalline corrosion in accordance with
Note : ISO 3651-1 or -2. Austenitic-ferritic grades of cast steel
This formula is applicable for austenitic cast steel which has are to be tested in accordance with Iron and Steel Test
a molybdenum content of < 3 %. Specification SEP 1877, Method I, or an equivalent
method. The test shall be confirmed by the manu-
6.2 Resistance to intercrystalline corrosion facturer by means of a certificate.
Austenitic grades of cast steel are to be resistant to 7.4 Non-destructive testing

intercrystalline corrosion in the condition in which they
are supplied. If it is intended to weld castings without The manufacturer is to ensure by non-destructive tests
post-weld heat treatment, only grades of cast steel that on his products that the requirements are pertaining to
are corrosion-resistant in this condition as well are to be the external and internal condition according to 5. are
used, e.g. cast steels stabilized with Nb or containing met.
not more than 0.03 % C.
6.3 Mechanical properties and impact energy G. Non-destructive Testing of Cast Steel
Components
The requirements specified in Table 6.13 or in the
approved specifications are applicable. 1. Scope
7. Testing 1.1 These Rules apply to the non-destructive

testing of cast steel components for which in B. to F.
The castings are to be presented for testing in finished and H appropriate requirements are prescribed, and for
condition (condition of supply) and are to undergo the which no other regulations or manufacturer speci-
following tests: fications are agreed upon.
7.1 Tensile test 1.2 A list containing the cast steel components for
which non-destructive testing is required and the
The mechanical properties are to be verified by tensile specific tests to be performed is contained in H.
test. The tests are to be performed on a heat-by-heat
basis, parts undergoing the same heat treatment being 1.3 These Rules apply for the following testing
grouped into test batches. A tensile specimen is to be methods defined according to ISO 9712, see Table
taken from each test batch and tested. Castings with 6.14.
unit weights > 1000 kg shall be tested individually.
1.4 Methods and testing, criteria indicated in G.
7.2 Notched bar impact test are to be employed by the foundries, companies per-
forming the further processing and the TL Surveyors.
The castings are to be subjected to the notched bar
impact test. The number of sets of test specimens (3 1.5 For testing, the cast steel components are to
Charpy V-notch specimens per set) is to be determined be classified in inspection zones with different
in the same way as the number of tensile specimens. requirements for the severity levels.

G Section 6 – Steel Castings 6-21
For classifying one or several of the following principles treatment appropriate for the required properties has
is/are decisive: been performed. The Surveyor is to be informed in time
about the intended tests. It is up to the discretion of the
- The operating loads to be expected, Surveyor to attend the tests.
- The effects of the defects on the reliability of 2.3 The tests are to be performed for the zones
the component, described in the specification or in the test plan. In case
the results indicate that further defects are present in
- Possible risk of damage if the component fails, the cast steel component, the test scope is to be
extended according to agreement with the Surveyor.
- Required welding security for the welding
edges, 2.4 The cast steel components for which testing is
prescribed are listed in H. Concerning the test scope
- Freedom of defects and surface condition after and the severity level requirements for specific hull
machining. structural parts and for machinery parts test instructions
are prescribed in I. and J. which shall be observed in
For the most important cast steel components of the hull addition to the manufacturer specifications.
structure and of the propulsion plant the inspection
zones are prescribed in I. and J. 3. Classifying in Severity Levels
Table 6.14 Test methods 3.1 The classifying in severity levels for the inner
and outer condition is performed in accordance with the
Testing of (1) Symbol criteria indicated in the tables for the specific test
methods. Table 6.15 sums up the various severity
Visual testing VT
levels.
Magnetic particle testing MT
Penetrant testing PT 3.2 The selection of severity levels is to be agreed
Ultrasonic testing upon in accordance with EN 1559-1 and EN 1559-2

UT
within the order.
Radiography testing RT
(1) For testing of stainless austenitic cast steel only the As a rule this is business of the customer, in doing so
methods VT, PT and RT are applicable.
the inspection zones are to be specified in accordance
with 1.6 and the following requirements shall be
2. Testing observed:
2.1 After the inspector of the internal or external 3.2.1 Special rim zones such as welding edges are
inspection body in charge of testing has performed the to be classified in the severity levels SM1, LM1, AM1,
prescribed tests, the cast steel components are to be SP1, CP1, LP1, AP1, UV1 and RV1 over their entire
presented to the TL Surveyor for visual testing. length and over a width of 3 x wall thickness, but at
least of 50 mm.
2.2 Concerning the tests it is to be differentiated
between pre-testing and acceptance testing. With For welding edges with thickness larger than 50 mm the
pretests, where decisions concerning the testability and severity levels SM2, LM2, AM2, SP2, CP2, LP2, AP2,
the employability of the cast steel component are made, UV2 and RV2 are sufficient. For valve casings DIN
they are in general the business of the foundry. 1690 part 10 does apply.
Acceptance tests are to be performed preferably on the
final machined cast steel component after the heat

6-22 Section 6 – Steel Castings G
Table 6.15 Overview of the severity levels indication to be registered are listed in Tables 6.16 and
6.17 for the magnetic particle testing and for the
Description of penetrant testing. Concerning the surface roughness for
Testing of Test method
severity levels (1) non-destructive testing then the following applies:
VT V1, V2, V3, V4
SM1, SM2, SM3, SM4, - Cast steel components where requirements for
MT LM1, LM2, LM3, LM4, the surface roughness were specified are to be
Outer AM1, AM2, AM3, AM4,
tested visually in accordance with 5.
condition
SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4,
CP1, CP2, CP3,
PT - Cast steel components which are subjected to
LP1, LP2, LP3, LP4,
AP1, AP2, AP3, AP4, radiographic, magnetic particle or ultrasonic
UT UV1, UV2, UV3, UV4, testing shall comply at least with the
Inner
condition comparators 3 S1 or 4 S2.
RT RV1, RV2, RV3, RV4,
(1) According to EN 1370, EN 1369, EN 1371-1, EN
- Cast steel components which are subjected to
12680-2, EN 12681 and EN 1559-2
penetrant testing shall comply at least with the
comparators 3 S2.
3.2.2 For fabrication weldings as a basic principle the
same requirements as for the base material do apply.
Table 6.16 Recommended surface condition for
magnetic particle testing
3.2.3 For zones of steel castings for machinery
parts, for valve casings as well as for dynamically
Dimension of Surface comparators (1)
loaded hull structural parts where no higher
the smallest
requirements are prescribed at least the severity levels indication
BNIF (2) SCRATA (2)
SM3, LM3 and AM3 are to be met. [mm]
1S1 – 2S1
1.5 –
3.2.4 Apart from the specifications in 3.2.1 to 3.2.3, 3S2 – 4S2
and if in the purchasing documents no higher classifying 2S1 – 3S1 A2
2
is required, for not specified zones at least severity level 4S2 – 5S2 H2
V2 does apply. not specified A3 – A4
≥3
(rough surface) H3
3.2.5 For the inner and outer condition of cast steel (1) See EN 1370.
(2) See Annex A of EN 1369.
components equivalent severity levels as well as dif-
ferent severity levels may be determined.
5. Visual testing (VT)
3.3 Before testing is commenced the position and
dimension of the zones to be tested and the severity 5.1 The manufacturer is to verify for each pro-
levels to be met are to be specified in test plans, draw- duction stage of the cast steel components the external
ings or specifications taking into account 1.5, 3.1 and condition and the compliance of the dimensions. Minor
3.2. These documents are to be provided to TL. casting defects such as small sand and slag inclusions,
small cold shuts and small hot tears are to be cleaned
4. Special Agreements for the Surface Rough- out in case they may affect the testability.
ness
(1) Reference to standards:
For the surface roughness limit values such as e.g. - “Technische Empfehlung (technical recommendation) 359-1 des
comparators (1) may be agreed upon if requested by Bureau de Normalisation de l’ Industrie de la Fonderie”
the customer or necessary due to technical reasons. - “SCRATA comparators for the definiton of surface quality of
Requirements for the surface condition of surfaces of steel castings”; Steel castings Technology International; 7,
cast steel components depending on the smallest East Bank road, Sheffield, S2 3PL United Kingdom

Table 6.17 Recommended surface condition for roughness that is to be complied with may be agreed
penetration testing upon.
Dimension of 6.2 In case black magnetic particles are employed

the smallest Surface comparators (1) the surface to be tested is to be coated with a
indication permanent white paint, applied as thinly as possible
[mm] BNIF (2) SCRATA (2)
(max. 20 µm). A decrease of the test sensibility is to be
1S1 – 2S1 A1 observed.
1.5
3S2 – 4S2 H1
2S1 – 3S1 A2
2 6.3 In order to avoid burn marks on the surface of
4S2 – 5S2 H2
cast steel components in quenched and tempered con-
not specified A3 – A4
≥3 dition when magnetization is performed by means of
(rough surface) H3
(1) See EN 1370. prods with alternating current only fusible supply
(2) See Annex A of EN 1371-1. electrodes made of tin-aluminium alloys are to be
employed. Contact points visible on the surface are to
5.2 Discontinuities which may affect the be ground if necessary and to be retested by yoke
employability and the processability appropriate for the magnetization. On already machined surfaces of the
material more than irrelevant, such as larger non- cast steel component testing is only allowed with yoke
metallic inclusions, cavities, gas holes or cracks, are not magnetization.
allowed and are to be repaired.

6.4 The indications of magnetic particle testing are
5.3 After special agreement with TL or if specified to be evaluated concerning their type, size and number
in the order the evaluation of the surface condition may in accordance with Tables 6.19, 6.20 and 6.21. The
be performed by means of comparators in accordance reference area for this is to be a rectangle with 105 mm
with Table 6.18 (cf. EN 1370 "Visual examination of x 148 mm (size DIN A6) and is to be placed on the
surface discontinuities - Steel sand castings"). specific most unfavorable area for each case (area with
the highest number of indications). In addition for the
5.4 The Surveyor certifies the visual inspection on evaluation the reference figures according to EN 1369
the TL acceptance test certificate; e.g. the following text are to be consulted.
can be typed in the test certificate: "The aforementioned

cast steel components were visually tested. The 6.5 Definition of indications of magnetic parti-
prescribed requirements are fulfilled.” cle testing
5.5 On demand of the customer the manufacturer 6.5.1 Non-linear indications (SM)
is to issue a test report containing the details of the

tests, the prescribed severity levels and the test results. Indications are to be assessed as non-linear if the
length L is smaller than 3 times the width W.

The symbol for non-linear indications is SM (S for
6.1 The surfaces of the cast steel component to be surface and M for magnetic particle).
tested are to be free of oil, grease, and remnants of the

6.5.2 Linear indications (LM)
moulding material and the blackening, as well as scale,
dust and other contaminations.
Indications are to be assessed as linear if L is equal or
larger than 3 times W.
The required surface condition may be achieved by
shot-blasting, grinding or machining. A specific surface The symbol for linear indications is LM (L for linear and
M for magnetic particle).

Table 6.18 Allocation of severity levels to the selected comparators (1) for the surface condition
Severity Levels
Category V1 V2 V3 V4
Designation according to the "Technischen Empfehlung 359-1" (2)
Inclusions close to
B1 B2 B4 B5
the surface
Gas porosity C1 C2 C3 C4
Cold shuts D1 D2 D5 -
Hot tears E3 E5 - -
Inserts F1 F3 - -
Welds J1 J2 J3 J5
(1) The required severity level can be different for each category.
(2) See references to standards in 4.
Table 6.19 Nature of discontinuities and the corresponding indications for magnetic particle testing
Types of magnetic particle inspection indications

Nature of
Symbol
discontinuities non-linear SM linear LM aligned AM
Gas porosity A X - X
Sand and slag inclusions B X - X
Cracks D - X X
Chill cracks E - X X
Inserts F - X X
Cold shuts H - X X
Table 6.20 Severity levels for magnetic particle testing - non-linear indications isolated (SM)
Severity level
Characteristic
SM 1 SM 2 SM 3 SM 4
Inspection means eye

Magnification for observation of magnetic particle
1
indication.
Length Lj of the smallest indication to be considered
1.5 2 3 5
[mm].
Maximum total surface
2 10 35 70 200
Non-linear indications area allowed [mm ]
(SM) Maximum individual
2 (1) 4 (1) 6 (1) 10 (1)
length L2 allowed [mm]
(1) At maximum 2 indications of the designated maximum dimension are permitted.
Note: Only values expressed in this table are valid. The reference figures according to EN 1369 Annex B and C are for information
only.

Table 6.21 Severity levels for magnetic particle testing - linear (LM) and aligned (AM) indications
Severity level
Characteristic LM 1 LM 2 LM 3 LM 4
AM 1 AM 2 AM 3 AM 4
Magnification for observation of magnetic particle indication 1
Length L1 of the smallest indication to be considered [mm] 1.5 2 3 5
Arrangement of indications (1) isolated (I) or cumulative (C) I C I C I C I C
Wall thickness class a t ≤ 2 • ● • 4 ● 6 ● 10 ●

Maximum length of linear (LP) 16 mm • ● • 4 ● 6 ● 6 ● 18
and aligned (AP) indications Wall thickness class b 16 3 ● 6 ● 9 ● 18 ●
allowed depending on the wall mm <t ≤ 50 mm ● 6 ● 12 ● 18 ● 27
thickness t [mm] Wall thickness class c t > 5 ● 10 ● 15 ● 30 ●
50 mm ● 10 ● 20 ● 30 ● 45
Figure Figure Figure Figure
Following Annex C C.3 C.4 C.5 C. 6
Note : Only values expressed in this table are valid. The reference figures are according to EN 1369 annex C are for information.
(1) The linear and aligned indications shall be taken into consideration for the calculation of the cumulative length.
6.5.3 Aligned indications (AM) The symbol for aligned indications is AM (A for aligned
and M for magnetic particle).
In the following cases the indications are assessed as
aligned: Note :
The total length L equals the distance between the start of the
- Non-linear: the distance between the indications first indication and the end of the last indication.
is less than 2 mm and at least 3 indications are
registered, Example: L = ℓ1 + ℓ2 + ℓ3 + ℓ4 + ℓ5
- Linear: the distance between 2 indications is 6.6 Defects which concerning their size and
smaller than the length L of the longest number exceed the requirements for the prescribed
discontinuity in a line. severity levels as well as cracks are not allowed and are
to be removed. Repaired zones are to be retested.
Aligned indications are assessed as one single indica-
tion. Its length equals the total length L of this line, see 7. Penetrant Testing (PT)
Fig. 6.1.
7.1 Testing is to be performed with an inspection
system consisting of penetrant remover, penetrant and
developer.
7.2 The surface of the cast steel component to be

tested is to correspond to the requirements for the
surface condition specified in 6.1 and 4.
Fig. 6.1 Example for L

Table 6.22 Nature of discontinuities and type of corresponding indications for penetrant testing
Type of corresponding indications for penetrant testing

Nature of
Symbol Non-linear Linear Aligned
discontinuities
isolated SP clustered CP LP AP
Gas porosity A X X - X
Sand and slag
B X X - X
inclusions
Cracks D - - X X
Chill cracks E - - X X
Inserts F X - X X
Cold Shuts H - - X X
Table 6.23 Severity levels for penetrant testing – non-linear indications (1), isolated (SP) or clustered (CP)
Severity level
Characteristic SP 1 SP 2 SP 3
SP 4
CP 1 CP 2 CP 3
Magnification for observation of penetrant indication 1
Diameter of the smallest indication to be considered [mm] 1.5 2 3 5
Maximum number of non-linear indications allowed 8 8 12 20
Maximum size of discontinuity indication A, B and F [mm]
3 6 9 14
- Isolated indications SP
10 16 25 -
- Clustered indications CP
Note : Only values expressed in this table are valid . The reference figures according to EN 1371-1, Annex B and C are for
information only.
(1) Such that L ≤ 3 W where L is the length and W is the width of the indication.
Table 6.24 Severity Levels for penetrant testing - linear (LP) and aligned (AP) indications (1)
Severity level
Characteristic LP 1 LP 2 LP 3 LP 4
AP 1 AP 2 AP 3 AP 4
Magnification for observation of penetrant indication 1
Length L1 of the smallest indication to be considered [mm] 1.5 2 3 5
Arrangement of indications isolated (I) or cumulative (C) I C I C I C I C
2 O 4 O 6 O 10 O
Wall thickness class a t ≤ 16 mm 4 6 10 18
Maximum length of linear (LP) and O O O O
aligned (AP) indications allowed Wall thickness class b 3 O 6 O 9 O 18 O
depending on the wall thickness 16 mm < t ≤ 50 mm O 6 O 12 O 18 O 27
t [mm] 5 O 10 O 15 O 30 O
Wall thickness class c t > 50 mm 10 20 30 45
O O O O
Figure Figure Figure Figure
Following Annex D D.3 D.4 D.5 D.6
Note: The penetrant indications may grow over a period of time and this should be taken into account.
Only values expressed in this table are valid. The reference figures according to EN 1371-1 annex D are for information
only.
(1) The length L of an aligned indication is the distance between the starting point of the first discontinuity and the opposite end
of the last discontinuity (L ≥ 3 W).

7.3 The indications are to be evaluated concerning cast steel components with larger wall thickness and for
their type, size and number in accordance with Tables examination of fabrication weldings as well as in
6.22, 6.23 and 6.24. The reference area for this is to be addition to radiographic testing for determining the
a rectangle with 105 mm x 148 mm (size DIN A6) and is position in thickness and the dimension of defects.
to be placed on the specific most unfavorable area for
each case (area with the highest number of indications). 8.2 All cast steel components are to be presented
In addition for the evaluation the reference figures for testing in heat treated condition. As a rule ultrasonic
according to EN 1371-1 or another recognized testing may not be considered for austenitic and
standard, may be consulted. austenitic-ferritic cast steel grades.
7.4 Definition of indications of penetrant testing 8.3 In the areas to be tested an appropriate
condition of the surface of the cast steel component is
7.4.1 Linear indication (LP) to be achieved which enables a faultless coupling of the
probe. For this the surface is to be clear of remnants of
Indication where the largest dimension equals at least 3 the moulding material and the blackening, scale, dust
times the smallest dimension (i.e. L ≥ 3 W). and other contaminations which may affect the coupling.
7.4.2 Non-linear indication: Indication where the A specific surface roughness that is to be complied with
largest dimension is smaller than 3 times the smallest according to 4. may be agreed upon.
dimension (i.e. L < 3 W).
8.4 Ferritic cast steel components are to only then
- Isolated (SP), be subjected to ultrasonic testing if disc shaped
reflectors of 3 mm, 4 mm and 6 mm diameter can be
- Cumulative (CP): area with many indications, the verified definitely for the specific wall thickness regime,
distance between the indications can not be cf. Table 6.25. The echo height of these smallest disc
measured (seemingly they form only one single shaped reflectors to be verified is to be at least 6 dB
indication). higher than the spurious echo at the end of the
thickness regime to be evaluated. The fulfillment of the
7.4.3 Aligned indications (AP) aforementioned conditions is to be proven to the TL
Surveyor within the testing.
- Linear: the distance between 2 indications is
smaller than the length of the largest defect in 8.5 If possible zones to be tested are to be tested
the line; or from both sides. In case only one side is accessible
near resolving probes, SE probes, are to be used in
- Non-linear: the distance between 2 indications is order to detect inhomogeneities close to the surface.
less than 2 mm and at least 3 indications are Testing with SE probes is convenient only for
registered. thicknesses up to 50 mm.
7.5 Defects which concerning their size and 8.6 If not otherwise agreed on by the purchaser
number exceed the requirements for the prescribed and the manufacturer for all cast steel components in
severity levels as well as discontinuities in the material addition the following zones are to be tested with SE-
(cracks) are not allowed and are to be removed. straight beam and/or angle probes up to 50 mm depth:
Repaired zones are to be retested. For this the same
inspection system as before is to be employed. - Grooves, transitions in wall thickness, zones with
outer cooling webs,
- Fabrication weldings, welding edges and special
8.1 Ultrasonic testing is preferably performed for rim zones,

- Fabrication weldings with depths exceeding 50 testing if doubts exist concerning the evaluation of
mm shall be tested in addition with other ap- indications of ultrasonic testing.
propriate angle probes.
8.7 All echo indications and attenuations of the

back wall echo are to be registered which are equal to
the registration levels indicated in Table 6.26 or exceed
them.
8.8 Indications exceeding the acceptance limits
contained in Table 6.27 or Fig. 6.3 are not allowed and
will result in rejection of the cast steel component by the
Surveyor. Nevertheless acceptance of the cast steel
component is possible on condition that after further
(The classification of the wall refers to the dimensions of
evaluation of the indications performed by the customer the cast steel component ready for assembling.)
and TL proof has been furnished that in case no repair
will be performed the employability of the cast steel Fig 6.2 Deviation of wall section into zones
component will not be effected considerably, or repair
will be performed. In the later case the testing shall be 9.2 Indications which concerning their type and
repeated. dimension exceed the maximum permissible values
indicated in Table 6.29 for the required test category are
8.9 For determining the acceptance criteria ac- not allowed and will result in rejection of the cast steel
cording to Table 6.27 the cast wall is to be divided in component by the Surveyor. Nevertheless acceptance
rim and core zones according to Fig. 6.2. of the cast steel component is possible on condition that
9. Radiographic Testing (RT) after further evaluation of the indications performed by

the customer and TL proof has been furnished that in
9.1 Selection of radiation source depends on the case no repair is to be performed the employability of
required testing category and the wall thickness to be the cast steel component is to not be affected
penetrated, see Table 6.28 If necessary radiographic considerably, or repair is to be performed. In the later
testing is to be performed in addition to ultrasonic case the testing is to be repeated.
Table 6.25 Ultrasonic testability requirements according to EN 12680-1
Wall thickness
Smallest flat-bottom hole diameter detectable [mm]
[mm]
≤ 300 3
> 300 to ≤ 400 4
> 400 to ≤ 600 6

Table 6.26 Registration levels for ultrasonic testing of ferritic steel castings in accordance with EN 12680-1
Reflectors with
Reflectors without measurable measurable dimension Attenuation
Wall
Inspected dimension diameter of the diameter of the equivalent of back wall
thickness
area equivalent flat-bottomed hole (1) flat-bottomed hole (1) echo
[mm]
min. [mm] min. min. [mm]
[mm]
≤ 300 - 4 3
≤ 300 to ≤ 400 - 6 4 12
> 400 to ≤ 600 - 6 6
Severity level
- 3 3 6
1 areas
special rim
- 3 3 -
zone
(1) Formula for converting the flat-bottomed hole diameter into the side-drilled hole diameter, see EN 12680-1

6-30 Section 6 – Steel Castings
6-30
Table 6.27 Acceptance limits for ultrasonic testing for volumetric discontinuities following EN 12680-1
Zone Severity level

Characteristic Unit (see
UV 1 UV 2 UV 3 UV 4
figure 2)
>50 >100 >50 >100 >50 >100
Casting wall thickness at the examined area mm - ≤50 ≤50 ≤50
≤100 ≤600 ≤100 ≤600 ≤100 ≤600
Reflectors without measurable dimension
rim
Largest diameter of equivalent flat-bottomed hole mm 3 1
core

Number of discontinuities to be recorded in a frame rim 3 5 6 6
- 3 (2) Not used as criterion
100 mm • 100 mm core Not used as criterion
Reflectors with measurable dimension
rim
Largest diameter of equivalent flat-bottomed hole mm 3 1
core
Maximum values of dimension in through-wall direction rim 15 % of zone thickness
-
of discontinuities core 15 % of wall thickness
rim 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75
Maximum length without measurable width mm
core 75 75 100 75 75 120 100 100 150
2 rim Not 600 1000 1000 600 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
Largest individual area (3) (4) mm
core permitted 10000 10000 15000 15000 15000 20000 15000 15000 20000
2 rim 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 15000 15000
Largest total area for a reference area (3) mm
core 10000 15000 15000 15000 20000 20000 15000 20000 20000
150000 ≈
100000 ≈ (320 mm x 320 mm)
2
Reference area mm -
(390 mm x 390 mm)
(1) For wall thickness not greater than 50 mm, flat-bottomed holes exceeding 8 mm are unacceptable.
For wall thickness greater than 50 mm the acceptability of flat-bottomed holes exceeding 8 mm in the rim zone shall be agreed between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
G
(2) Accumulated in core zone and rim zone.
(3) Indications less than 25 mm apart shall be considered as one discontinuity.
(4) If the indication in the core zone is caused by an individual reflector the thickness of which does not exceed 10 % of the wall thickness, (e.g. centreline shrinkage) then, in case of severity
levels 2 to 4, values 50 % higher than those specified in this table, are acceptable and in case of severity level 5, no limit is specified.

Key
UV 2 Severity level 2
a Largest acceptable individual
indication area [mm ]
2
b Distance from test surface [mm]

Indications with measureable dimensions are
not allowed for severity level 1.
Fig 6.3 Acceptance criteria for ultrasonic testing for individual planar indications mainly orientated in through-
wall direction, detected with angle probes following EN 12680-1
Table 6.28 Radiation source in dependence of the test class and the penetrated thickness following ISO 5579
and EN 12681
Penetrated thickness ω [mm]

Radiation source
Class A Class B
TM 170 w≤5 w≤5
Yb 169 1 ≤ w ≤ 15 2 ≤ w ≤ 15
Se 75 10 ≤ w ≤ 40 14 ≤ w ≤ 40
Ir 192 20 ≤ w ≤ 100 20 ≤ w ≤ 90
Co 60 40 ≤ w ≤ 170 60 ≤ w ≤ 150
X-ray equipment with energy from 1 MeV to 4 MeV 30 ≤ w ≤ 200 50 ≤ w ≤ 180
X-ray equipment with energy from 4 MeV to 12 MeV w ≥ 50 w ≥ 80
X-ray equipment with energy above 12 MeV w ≥ 80 w ≥ 100

Table 6.29 Maximum permissible defects for radiographic testing
Defect
Maximum permissible defect for severity level
Code
letter Wall Assessment
Type as thickness as in ASTM RV 1 RV 2 (2) RV 3 (2) RV 4 (2)
ASTM [mm] (1)
(1)
Blowholes Up to 50
Over 50 up E 446 A1 A3 A3 A4
A to 115 E 186 A1 A3 A3 A4
Over 115 up E 280 (3) A3 A3 A4
to 300
Non- Up to 50
metallic Over 50 up E 446 B1 B3 B3 B4
inclusions B to 115 E 186 B1 B3 B3 B4
Over 115 up E 280 (3) B3 B3 B4
to 300
Shrinkage Ca2, Cb2 Ca3, Cb3 Ca4, Cb4
Up to 50 Ca1, Cb1
Cc2, Cd2 Cc3, Cd3 Cc4, Cd4
Over 50 up E 446 Cc1, Cd1
Ca2, Cb2, Ca3, Cb3, Ca4, Cb4,
C to 115 E 186 Ca1, Cb1,
Cc2 Cc3 Cc4
Over 115 up E 280 Cc1
Ca2, Cb2, Ca3, Cb3, Ca4, Cb4,
to 300 (3)
Cc2 Cc3 Cc4
Cracks Not Not Not
Not
D+E permitted permitted permitted
permitted
(4) (4) (4)
Chaplets Not Not Not
Up to 50
and iron permitted permitted permitted
Over 50 up E 446 F1 (5)
chills Not Not Not
F to 115 E 186 F1 (5)
permitted permitted permitted
Over 115 up E 280 F1 (5)
Not Not Not
to 300
permitted permitted permitted
(1) Caption: ASTM-E 446 — Reference radiographs for steel castings up to 2 in. (51 mm) in thickness,
ASTM-E 186 — Reference radiographs for heavy walled (2 to 4 1/2 in. (51 to 114 mm) steel castings
sowie
ASTM-E 280 — Reference radiographs for heavy walled (4 1/2 to 12 in. (114 to 305 mm) steel castings.
(2) If for example it is shown by ultrasonic testing that the defects are in the core zone (see Fig. 6.1), the specifications
for the next higher (numerical) severity level is to apply, unless otherwise specified in the material standard or in the
order.
(3) The values to be adhered are to be agreed.
(4) Unless the minor nature of the cracks is proved by fracture-mechanical tests.
(5) Chaplets may be present, but they are to be welded free from cracks at the surface.

H Section 6 – Steel Castings 6-33
H. List of Cast Steel Components for which Non-destructive Tests are Required
Table 6.30 Test methods to be employed
Test methods to be employed (1)

Name of the component
VT MT PT UT RT
Structural parts concerning the hull
Stern X X X (2) X X
Propeller shaft-nut X X X (2) X X
Rudder horn X X X (2) X X
Rudder bearing X X X (2) - -
Rudder coupling X X X (2) X X
Shaft bracket X X X (2) X -
Ruder shaft X X - X -
Tiller X X X (2) X -
Diesel engine parts
Piston crowns X X (4) - X (4) -
Cylinder covers X X (4) - X (4) -
Camshaft drive gear wheels and chain wheels X X (4) - X -
Crank webs and throws X X - X -
Connecting rods X X - X -
Bearing transverse girders X X - X -
Main bearings and bearing covers for main, crossheads and

X X - X -
piston rod bearings
Starting valve casings X X - - X
Further components of the propulsion plant
Turbine casings X X - X X
Gear wheels X X - X X
Valve casings
Valve casings for pipe class I with NW > 100 X X - - X (3)
(1) Testing in the prescribed areas.

(2) PT may be employed instead of MT.
(3) Random testing according to testing plan.
(4) For diesel engines with cylinder diameter > 400 mm

6-34 Section 6 – Steel Castings I
I. Testing Instructions for Hull Structural Parts
In the figures 6.4 to 6.11 the specifications for the non-destructive testing are prescribed.
Testing scope:
Visual testing : Entire surface
Magnetic particle testing : Welding edges (ooooooooo)
Radiographic testing : Welding edges (−⋅−⋅−)
Ultrasonic testing : Welding edges (−⋅−⋅−), if permitted by the geometry
Severity levels
Visual testing : VI for welding edges; V3 remaining areas
Magnetic particle testing : SMI; LM1; AMI for welding edges; SM2; LM2; AM2 remaining areas
Radiographic testing : RV1 up to thickness 50 mm and
RV2 for thickness > 50 mm (1)
Ultrasonic testing : UV2 instead of radiographic testing for thickness > 50 mm (1)
(1) Thickness - Thickness of the cast component at the area to be tested.
Fig. 6.4 Testing instruction for stern

I Section 6 – Steel Castings 6-35
Testing scope:
Magnetic particle testing : Areas marked with (ooooooooo)
Radiographic testing : Areas marked with ( )
Severity levels
Visual testing : V2 (ooooooooo)
Magnetic particle testing : SM2, LM2, AM2 (ooooooooo)
SM3, LM3, AM3 remaining areas
Ultrasonic testing : UV2
Fig. 6.5 Testing instruction for rudder stock

Testing scope:

Magnetic particle testing : Welding edges (−⋅−⋅−⋅−), (ooooo)
Radiographic testing : Welding edges (−⋅−⋅−⋅−)
Ultrasonic testing : Areas marked with (∧∧∧∧∧∧∧∧)
Severity levels:
Visual testing : V1 for areas marked with (−⋅−⋅−⋅−);
V2 for areas marked with ( ),
remaining areas V3
Magnetic particle testing : SM1, LM1, AM1 for (−⋅−⋅−⋅−); SM2, LM2, AM2,
for areas marked with (ooooo); SM3, LM3, AM3 for the remaining areas.
RV2 for thickness > 50 mm
Ultrasonic testing : UV2; further instead of radiographic testing for thickness > 50 mm
Fig. 6.6 Testing instruction for stern nut

Testing scope:

Ultrasonic testing : Areas marked with ( )
Severity levels:
Visual testing : V1 for areas marked with (−⋅−⋅−⋅−) and
remaining areas V3
Fig. 6.7 Testing instruction for rudder horn

Testing scope:

Severity levels:
Visual testing : V1 for areas marked with (−⋅−⋅−⋅−) and
V2 for remaining areas
Fig. 6.8 Testing instruction for upper rudder coupling

Testing scope:

Severity levels:
Visual testing : V1 for areas marked with (−⋅−⋅−⋅−); V2 remaining areas
Magnetic particle testing : SM1, LM1, AM1 for (−⋅−⋅−⋅−); SM2, LM2, AM2 for areas marked with (ooooo); SM3, LM3,
AM3 for the remaining areas.
Fig. 6.9 Testing instruction for lower rudder coupling

Testing scope:

Severity levels:
Visual testing : V1 for (−⋅−⋅−⋅−); V2 remaining areas
Magnetic particle testing : SM1, LM1, AM1 for (−⋅−⋅−⋅−); SM2, LM2, AM2 for areas marked with (ooooo); SM3, LM3,
AM3 for the remaining areas.
Fig. 6.10 Testing instruction for stern frame

Testing scope:

Magnetic particle testing : (ooooo)
Penetrant testing : (oooooo)
Ultrasonic testing : Areas marked with
Severity levels:
Visual testing : V1 Key way, bore: conical or cylindrical,

remaining areas V2
Magnetic particle testing : SM1, LM1, AM1 Tiller arms:
or Contact areas for slide piece and ground, lower and upper
Penetrant testing : SP1, CP1, LP1, AP1 plane areas
Magnetic particle testing : SP2, LM2, AM2 remaining areas
or
Penetrant testing : SP2, CP2, LP2, AP2 remaining areas
Ultrasonic testing : UV2 The indicated areas / zones of slide are to be tested before machining
the slide surface. remaining areas UV3
Cracks are not permitted. The machined areas shall not have open sand marks. Whether indications are left as they are,
ground or fabrication welded is decided by TL.
Fig. 6.11 Testing instruction for tiller

6-42 Section 6 – Steel Castings J
J. Testing Instruction for Diesel Engine Parts
In the figures 6.12 and 6.13 the specifications for the non-destructive testing are prescribed.
Testing scope:
Magnetic particle testing : Entire surface
Ultrasonic testing : Shaft and bearing areas
Penetrant testing : Machined bearing surfaces (ooooo)
Severity levels:
Visual testing : V1 for zone I and II; remaining areas V2
Magnetic particle testing : SM1, LM1, AM1 for zone I and II; remaining areas SM2, LM2, AM2
Ultrasonic testing : UV1 for zone I and II; remaining areas UV2
Penetrant testing : SP2, CP2, LP2, AP2 for areas marked with (OOOOO)
Fig. 6.12 Testing instruction for connecting rods

J Section 6 – Steel Castings 6-43
Testing scope:
Magnetic particle testing : Welding edges (−⋅−⋅−), (ooooo)
Ultrasonic testing : Marked areas with ( )
Penetrant testing : Marked areas with (xxxxxxxxxx)
Severity levels:
Visual testing : V1 for (−⋅−⋅−), remaining areas V2,
Magnetic particle testing : SM1, LM1, AM1 for the areas marked with (−⋅−⋅−);
SM2, LM2, AM2 for the areas marked with (oooooo)
Ultrasonic testing : UV1 for the areas marked with (−⋅−⋅−)
UV2 for the areas marked with ( )
Penetrant testing : SP2, CP2, LP2, AP2 for the areas marked with (xxxxxxxxxx)
Fig. 6.13 Testing instruction for main bearing support

Section 7 – Iron Castings 7-1
SECTION 7
IRON CASTINGS
Sayfa
A. SPHEROIDAL OR NODULAR GRAPHITE IRON CASTINGS ........................................................................... 7- 2
1. Scope
2. Manufacture
3. Quality of castings
5. Heat Treatment
7. Testing
8. Inspection
9. Metallographic Examination
10. Rectification of defective castings
11. Identification of castings
12. Certification
B. GREY IRON CASTINGS...................................................................................................................................... 7-10
1. Scope
2. Manufacture
5. Heat Treatment
7. Testing
8. Inspection
9. Rectification of Defective Castings
11. Certification

7-2 Section 7 – Iron Castings A
A. Spheroidal or Nodular Graphite Iron verify the continued efficiency of the manufacturing
Castings technique. The Surveyor is to be given the opportunity
to witness these tests.
1. Scope
3. Quality of castings
1.1 All important spheroidal or nodular graphite
iron castings are to be manufactured and tested in 3.1 Castings are to be free from surface or internal
accordance with the requirements of the following items. defects which would be prejudicial to their proper
application in service. The surface finish is to be in
1.2 These requirements are applicable only to accordance with good practice and any specific
castings where the design and acceptance tests are requirements of the approved plan.
related to mechanical properties at ambient
temperature. For other applications additional 4. Chemical Composition
requirements may be necessary, especially when
castings are intended for service at low or elevated 4.1 Unless otherwise specially required, the
temperatures. chemical composition of the iron used is left to the
discretion of the manufacturer, who is to ensure that it is
1.3 Alternatively, castings which comply with suitable to obtain the mechanical properties specified
national or proprietary specifications may be accepted for the castings. When required TL the chemical
provided such specifications give reasonable composition of ladle samples is to be reported.
equivalence to these requirements or otherwise
specially approved or required by TL. 5. Heat Treatment
1.4 Where small castings are produced in large 5.1 Apart from the exceptions provided for in 5.2,
quantities the manufacturer may adopt alternative the castings may be supplied in as cast or heat-treated
procedures for testing and inspection subject to the condition. The method of treatment is to be specified at
approval of TL. the time of the approval test.
2. Manufacture 5.2 Cast iron of grades EN-GJS-350-22-LT/-22-U-

LT to EN-GJS-400-18-LT/-18U-LT or the special
2.1 All important castings are to be made at qualities according to Table 7.1 with nominal strengths
2
foundries where the manufacturer has demonstrated to of 350 and 400 N/mm are to undergo ferritizing heat
the satisfaction of the TL that the necessary treatment.
manufacturing and testing facilities are available and
are supervised by qualified personnel. A programme of 5.3 Where it is proposed to locally harden the
approval tests may be required in accordance with the surfaces of a casting full details of the proposed
procedures of TL. procedure and specification are to be submitted for
approval by TL.
2.2 Suitable mechanical methods are to be
employed for the removal of surplus material from Where castings are subject to special requirements in
castings. Thermal cutting processes are not acceptable, respect of their dimensional or geometrical stability, any
except as a preliminary operation to mechanical heat treatment needed is to be carried out before the
methods. castings are machined.
2.3 Where castings of the same type are regularly Heat treatments to eliminate casting stresses or for
produced in quantity, the manufacturer is to make any straightening may only be carried out at temperatures
tests necessary to prove the quality of the prototype up to 550 °C because of the danger that the character-
castings and is also to make periodical examinations to istics might be changed.

A Section 7 – Iron Castings 7-3
6. Mechanical Properties 6.5 Nodular cast iron conforming to DIN EN

1563
6.1 Table 7.1 gives the minimum requirements for
0,2% proof stress and elongation corresponding to The requirements specified in the standard and given in
different strength levels. Typical Brinell hardness values Table 7.2 for separately cast samples and in Table 7.3
are also given in Table 7.1 and are intended for for integrally cast samples are applicable.
information purposes only.
In case of requirements regarding impact energy, the
6.2 Castings may be supplied to any specified minimum values specified in Tables 7.4 and 7.5 are to
minimum tensile strength selected within the general be proven.
limits detailed in Table 7.1 but subject to any additional
requirements of the relevant construction Rules In addition the requirements in 6.6 and 6.7 are applied
regarding graphite- or metallic matrix structure respec-
6.3 Unless otherwise agreed only the tensile tively.
strength and elongation need be determined. The
results of all tensile tests are to comply with the 6.6 Graphite structure
appropriate requirements of Table 7.1
The manufacturing process shall ensure that 90 % of
6.4 Re-test requirements for tensile tests are to be the graphite is precipitated in nodular form according to
in accordance with Section 2. Form VI of EN ISO 945-1. The remaining graphite shall
have a structure at least of form V according to the
above mentioned standard.
Table 7.1 Mechanical properties and structure of nodular cast iron
Minimum tensile
Rp0.2 A Hardness Impact energy
strength
Structure of
Rm (1) 2
[N/mm ] [%] HB 10 (2) KV (3) Test temp. metallic matrix
2 min. min. min. [J] min. [°C]
[N/mm ]
370 230 17 120-180 - - Ferrite
400 250 12 140-200 - - Ferrite
450 310 10 160-210 - - Ferrite
Ordinary 500 320 7 170-240 - - Ferrite/perlite

qualities 600 370 3 190-270 - - Ferrite/perlite
700 420 2 230-300 - - Perlite
Perlite/sorbite or
800 480 2 250-350 - - tempered structure
Special 350 220 22 (4) 110-170 17 (14) -20 Ferrite

qualities 400 250 18 (4) 140-200 14 (11) -20 Ferrite
(1) Where the minimum tensile strength of the casting falls between the graduated values indicated, the requirements may be
determined by interpolation
(2) The values are intended only as a guide and are not test requirements.
(3) The average value measured on 3 Charpy V-notch specimens. One result may be below the average value but not less than
the minimum shown in brackets.
(4) In the case of integrally cast samples, the elongation may be 2 percentage points less.

6.7 Structure of metallic matrix 7.1 Test of chemical composition
The metallic matrix shall have the structure indicated in The manufacturer is to determine and make known to
Table 7.1. the Surveyor the chemical composition of each heat
treatment batch. The analysis report is to cover at least
The proportion of perlite in the ferritic grades may not the following elements:
exceed 10 %. The graphite- and metallic matrix
structures are to be demonstrated by micrographs. C, Si, Mn, P, S and Mg together with Ni and Cu, where
these are added to achieve the required characteristics.
7. Testing
7.2 Mechanical tests
7.2.1 Test material, sufficient for the required tests
and for possible retest purposes, is to be provided for
each casting or batch for castings
Table 7.2 Mechanical properties determined from samples of separately cast test specimens
Tensile
0.2 proof stress Elongation
Material designation strength Main structure
Rp0.2 A
Rm of metallic
[N/mm ] [%]
2
[N/mm ]
2
matrix
Material code Number min. min.
min.
EN-GJS-350-22-LT (1) EN-JS1015 350 220 22 Ferrite
EN-GJS-350-22-RT (2) EN-JS1014 350 220 22 Ferrite
EN-GJS-350-22 EN-JS1010 350 220 22 Ferrite
EN-GJS-400-18-LT (1) EN-JS1025 400 240 18 Ferrite
EN-GJS-400-18-RT (2) EN-JS1024 400 250 18 Ferrite
EN-GJS-400-18 EN-JS1020 400 250 18 Ferrit
EN-GJS-500-7 EN-JS1050 500 320 7 Ferrite / Perlite
EN-GJS-600-3 EN-JS1060 600 370 3 Perlite / Ferrite
EN-GJS-700-2 EN-JS1070 700 420 2 Perlite
EN-GJS-800-2 EN-JS1080 800 480 2 Perlite
Note : The values for these materials apply to units cast in sand moulds with comparable temperature conductibility.
(1) LT = for low temperatures
(2) RT = for room temperature.

Table 7.3 Mechanical properties determined from samples of integrally cast test specimens
Tensile 0.2 %
Material designation Determining Elongation
strength Proff stress
wall thickness A
Rm Rp0.2
t [%]
[N/mm ] [N/mm ]
2 2
Material code Number [mm] min.
min. min.
t ≤ 30 350 220 22
EN-GJS-350-22U-LT (1) EN-JS1019 30 < t ≤ 60 330 210 18
60 < t ≤ 200 320 200 15
t ≤ 30 350 220 22
EN-GJS-350-22U-RT (2) EN-JS1029 30 < t ≤ 60 330 220 18
60 < t ≤ 200 320 210 15
t ≤ 30 350 220 22
EN-GJS-350-22U EN-JS1032 30 < t ≤ 60 330 220 18
60 < t ≤ 200 320 210 15
t ≤ 30 400 240 18
EN-GJS-400-18U-LT (1) EN-JS1049 30 < t ≤ 60 390 230 15
60 < t ≤ 200 370 220 12
t ≤ 30 400 250 18
EN-GJS-400-18U-RT (2) EN-JS1059 30 < t ≤ 60 390 250 15
60 < t ≤ 200 370 240 12
t ≤ 30 400 250 18
EN-GJS-400-18U EN-JS1062 30 < t ≤ 60 390 250 15
60 < t ≤ 200 370 240 12
t ≤ 30 400 250 15
EN-GJS-400-15U EN-JS1072 30 < t ≤ 60 390 250 14
60 < t ≤ 200 370 240 11
t ≤ 30 450 310 10
EN-GJS-450-10U EN-JS1132 30 < t ≤ 60
To be agreed
60 < t ≤ 200
t ≤ 30 500 320 7
EN-GJS-500-7U EN-JS1082 30 < t ≤ 60 450 300 7
60 < t ≤ 200 420 290 5
t ≤ 30 600 370 3
EN-GJS-600-3U EN-JS1092 30 < t ≤ 60 600 360 2
60 < t ≤ 200 550 340 1
t ≤ 30 700 420 2
EN-GJS-700-2U EN-JS1102 30 < t ≤ 60 700 400 2
60 < t ≤ 200 660 380 1
t ≤ 30 800 480 2
EN-GJS-800-2U EN-JS1112 30 < t ≤ 60
To be agreed
60 < t ≤ 200
(1) LT = for low temperatures.

Table 7.4 Minimum values for impact energy determined from samples with V-notch from separately cast test
specimens
Minimum values for impact energy [J]

Material designation at RT at at
(23 ±5)°C (-20 ±2)°C (-40 ±2)°C
Average Average Average
Individual Individual Individual
Material code Number value from 3 value from value from
value value value
tests 3 tests 3 tests
EN-GJS-350-22-LT (1) EN-JS1015 - - - - 12 9
EN-GJS-350-22-RT (2) EN-JS1014 17 14 - - - -
EN-GJS-400-18-LT (1) EN-JS1025 - - 12 9 - -
EN-GJS-400-18-RT (2) EN-JS1024 14 11 - - - -
Note : The values for these materials apply to units cast in sand moulds with comparable temperature conductibility
Table 7.5 Minimum values for impact energy determined from samples with V-notch from integrally cast test
specimens
Minimum values for impact energy [J]

Material designation Determining at RT at at
wall thickness (23 ±5)°C (-20 ±2)°C (-40 ±2)°C
t Average Average Average
Individual Individual Individual
Material code Number [mm] value from 3 value from value from
value value value
tests 3 tests 3 tests
EN-GJS-350- t ≤ 60 12 9
EN-JS1019 - - - -
22U-LT (1) 60 < t ≤ 200 10 7
EN-GJS-350- t ≤ 60 17 14
EN-JS1029 - - - -
22U-RT (2) 60 < t ≤ 200 15 12
EN-GJS-400- 30 < t ≤ 60 12 9
EN-JS1049 - - - -
18U-LT (1) 60 < t ≤ 200 10 7
EN-GJS-400- 30 < t ≤ 60 14 11
EN-JS1059 - - - -
18U-RT (2) 60 < t ≤ 200 12 9
Note : The values for these materials apply to units cast in sand moulds with comparable temperature conductibility.
7.2.2 The test samples are generally to be one of the may be provided integral with the casting.
standard types detailed in Figs. 7.1, 7.2 and 7.3 with a
thickness of 25 mm. Test samples of other dimensions, 7.2.4 For large castings where more than one ladle
as detailed in Figs. 7.1, 7.2 and 7.3 may, however, be of treated metal is used, additional test samples are to
specially required for some components. be provided so as to be representative of each ladle
used.
7.2.3 At least one test sample is to be provided for 7.2.5 As an alternative to 8.2.3, a batch testing
each casting and unless otherwise required may be procedure may be adopted for castings with a fettled
either gated to the casting or separately cast. mass of 1 ton or less. All castings in a batch are to be of
Alternatively test material of other suitable dimensions similar type and dimensions, cast from the same ladle of

treated metal. One separately cast test sample is to be together with the castings which they represent.
provided for each multiple of 2 ton of fettled castings in
the batch. 7.2.9 One tensile test specimen is to be prepared
from each test sample and is to be machined to the
7.2.6 Where separately cast test samples are used, dimensions given in Section 2.
they are to be cast in moulds made from the same type
of material as used for the castings and are to be taken 7.2.10 All tensile tests are to be carried out using test
towards the end of pouring of the castings. The samples procedures in accordance with Section 2. Unless
are not to be stripped from the moulds until the otherwise agreed all tests are to be carried out in the
temperature is below 500 ºC. presence of the surveyor.
7.2.7 All test samples are to be suitably marked to 7.2.11 Impact tests may additionally be required and
identfy them with the castings which they represent. in such cases a set of three test specimens of agreed
typeis to be prepared fron each sample. Where Charpy
7.2.8 Where castings are supplied in the heat treated V-notch test specimens are used, the dimensions and
condition, the test samples are to be heat treated testing procedures are to be in accordance with Section
2.
Dimensions Standard Alternative samples

Sample when specially required
u(mm) 25 12 50 75
v (mm) 55 40 90 125
x (mm) 40 30 60 65
y (mm) 100 80 150 165
z To suit testing machine
RS Approximately 5 mm
Figure 7.1 Type A test samples (U-type)

Dimensions Standard sample

u(mm 25
v (mm) 90
x (mm) 40
y (mm) 100
RS Approximately 5 mm
Figure 7.2 Type B test samples (double U-type)
Dimensions Standard Alternative samples

Sample when specially required
u(mm) 25 12 50 75
v (mm) 55 40 100 125
x (mm) 40 25 50 65
y (mm) 140 135 150 175
Thickness of mould 40 mm 40 mm 80 mm 80 mm
surrounding test min. min. min. min.
sample
Figure 7.3 Type C test samples (Y-type)

8. Inspection 10. Rectification of defective castings
8.1 All castings are to be cleaned and adequately 10.1 At the discretion of the Surveyor, small surface
prepared for examination. The surfaces are not to be blemishes mat be removed by local grinding.
hammered, peened or treated in any way which may
obscure defects. 10.2 Subject to the prior approval of the Surveyor,
castings containing local porosity may be rectified by
8.2 Before acceptance, all castings are to be impregnation with a suitable plastic filler, provided that
visually examined including, where applicable, the the extent of the porosity is such that it does not
examination of internal surfaces. Unless otherwise adversely affect the strength of the casting.
agreed the verification of dimensions is the
responsibility of the manufacturer. 10.3 Repairs by welding are generally not
permitted.
8.3 Supplementary examination of castings by
suitable nondestructive testing procedures is generally 11. Identification of castings
not required except in circumstances where there is
reason to suspect the soundness of the casting. 11.1 The manufacturer is to adopt a system of
identification which will enable all finished castings to be
8.4 When required by the relevant construction traced to the original ladle of treated metal and the
Rules, castings are to be pressure tested before final Surveyor is to be given full facilities for so tracing the
acceptance. castings when required.
8.5 In the event of any casting proving defective 11.2 Before acceptance, all castings which have
during subsequent machining or testing is to be rejected been tested and inspected with satisfactory results are
notwithstanding any previous certification. to be clearly marked by the manufacturer. At the
discretion of TL any of the following particulars may be
8.6 Cast crankshaft are to be subjected to a required.
magnetic particle inspection. Crack like indications are
not allowed. - Quality of cast iron.
9. Metallographic Examination - Identification number or other marking which will

enable the full history of the casting to be traced.
9.1 For crankshafts the metallographic
examination will be mandatory. - Manufacturer's name or trade mark.
9.2 When required, a representative sample from - TL's name, initials or symbol.
each ladle of treated metal is to be prepared for
metallographic examination. These samples may - Abbreviated name of TL's local office.
conveniently be taken from the tensile test specimens
but alternative arrangements for the provision of the - Personal stamp of Surveyor responsible for
samples may be adopted provided that they are taken inspection.
from the ladle towards the end of the casting period.
- Where applicable, test pressure.
9.3 Examination of the samples is to show that at
least 90% of the graphite is in a dispersed spheroidal or - Date of final inspection.
nodular form. Details of typical matrix structures are
given in Table 7.1 and are intended for information 11.3 Where small castings are manufactured in
purposes only. large numbers, modified arrangements for identification

7-10 Section 7 – Iron Castings A,B
12. Certification satisfaction of TL that the necessary manufacturing and

testing facilities are available and are supervised by
12.1 The manufacturer is to provide the Surveyor qualified personnel. A programme of approval tests may
with a test certificate or shipping statement giving the be required in accordance with the procedures of
following particulars for each casting or batch of individual TL.
castings which has been accepted:
2.2 Suitable mechanical methods are to be employed
- Purchaser's name and order number. for the removal of surplus material from castings. Thermal
cutting processes are not acceptable, except as a
- Description of castings and quality of cast iron. preliminary operation to mechanical methods.
- Identification number. 2.3 Where castings of the same type are regularly
produced in quantity, the manufacturer is to make any
- Results of mechanical tests. tests necessary to prove the quality of the prototype
castings and is also to make periodical examinations to
- Where applicable, general details of heat verify the continued efficiency of the manufacturing
treatment. technique. The Surveyor is to be given the opportunity
to witness these tests.
- Where specifically required, the chemical
analysis of ladle samples. 3. Quality of castings
- Where applicable, test pressure. 3.1 Castings are to be free from surface or internal
defects which would be prejudicial to their proper
application in service. surface finish is to be in
B. Grey Iron Castings accordance with good practice and any specific
requirements of the approved plan.
1. Scope
4. Chemical composition
1.1 All major grey iron castings, as defined in the
relevant construction Rules, are as be manufactured 4.1 The chemical composition of the iron used is
and tested in accordance with the requirements of the left to the discretion of the manufacturer, who is to
following items. ensure that it is suitable to obtain the mechanical
properties specified for the castings. When required by
1.2 Alternatively, castings which comply with individual, TL the chemical composition of ladle
national or proprietary specifications may be accepted samples is to be reported.
equivalence to these requirements or otherwise are 5. Heat Treatment
specially approved or required by TL.
5.1 Except as required by 5.2 castings may be
1.3 Where small castings are produced in large supplied in either the as cast or heat treated condition.
quantities, the manufacturer may adopt alternative
procedures for testing and inspection subject to the 5.2 For some applications, such as high
approval of TL. temperature service or where dimensional stability is
important, castings may require to be given a suitable
2. Manufacture tempering or stress relieving heat treatment.
2.1 All major castings are to be made at foundries 6. Mechanical Properties

where the manufacturer has demonstrated to the
6.1 Only the tensile strength is to be determined and

B Section 7 – Iron Castings 7-11
the results obtained from tests are to comply with the 7.2.4 With the exception 7.2.7, at least one test
minimum value specified for the castings being supplied. sample is to be cast with each batch.
The value selected for the specified minimum tensile
2
strength is to be not less than 200 N/mm but subject to 7.2.5 With the exception 7.2.6, a batch consists of
any additional requirements of the relevant construction the castings poured from a single ladle of metal,
Rules. The fractured surfaces of all tensile test provided that they are all of similar type and
specimens are to be granular and grey in appearance. dimensions. A batch should not normally exceed 2 tons
of fettled castings and a single casting will constitute a
6.2 Re-test requirements for tensile tests are to be batch is its mass is 2 tons or more.
in accordance with Section 2.
7.2.6 For continuous melting of the same grade of
7. Testing cast iron in large tonnages the mass of a batch may be
increased to the output of 2 hours of pouring.
7.2.7 If one grade of cast iron is melted in large
7.1 Test of chemical composition quantities and if production is carefully monitored by
systematic checking of the melting process, such as
The manufacturer is constant to monitor the chemical chill testing, chemical analysis or thermal analysis, test
composition and the saturation level of each treatment samples may be taken at longer intervals.
unit (ladle) and is to pass this information on to the
Surveyor on request. Determination of at least the 7.2.8 All test samples are to be suitably marked to
following elements is required: C, Mn, Si, P and S. identify them with the castings which they represent.
7.2 Mechanical tests 7.2.9 Where castings are supplied in the heat treated
condition, the test samples are to be heat treated
7.2.1 Test material sufficient for the required tests together with the castings which they represent. For
and for possible retests is to be provided for each cast-on-test samples the sample shall not be cut off
casting or batch of castings. from the casting until after the heat treatment.
7.2.2 Separately cast test samples are to be used 7.2.10 One tensile test specimen is to be prepared
unless otherwise agreed between the manufacturer and from each test sample and for 30 mm diameter samples
purchaser and generally are to be in the form of bars 30 is to be machined to the dimensions given in Section 2.
mm in diameter and of a suitable length. They are to be Where test samples of other dimensions are specially
cast from the same ladle as the castings in moulds of the required the tensile test specimens are to be machined
same type of material as the moulds for the castings and to agreed dimensions.
are not to be stripped from the moulds until the metal
temperature is below 500 ºC. When two or more test 7.2.11 All tensile tests are to be carried out using test
samples are cast simultaneously in a single mould, the procedures in accordance with Section 2. Unless
bars are to be at least 50 mm apart as given in Fig. 7.4. otherwise agreed all tests are to be carried out in the
presence of the surveyor.
7.2.3 Integrally cast samples may be used when a
casting is more than 20 mm thick, and its mass exceeds 8. Inspection
200 kg, subject to agreement between the manufacturer
and the purchaser. The type and location of the sample 8.1 All castings are to be cleaned and adequately
are to be selected to provide approximately the same prepared for examination. The surfaces are not to be
cooling conditions as for the casting it represents and hammered, peened or treated in any way which may
also subject to agreement. obscure defects.

7-12 Section 7 – Iron Castings B
Table 7.6 Tensile strength of grey iron casting
Tensile strength
Determining wall thickness
Material designation Rm
[mm]
values to comply with
in separately cast test

in separately cast
specimens
Material code Number over up to test specimens
[N/mm ]
2
[N/mm ]
2
min.
2.5 (2) 5 -
5 10 -
10 20 -
EN-GJL-200 EN-JL1030 20 40 200 – 300 (3) 170
40 80 150
80 150 140
150 300 130 (1)
5 (2) 10 -
10 20 -
20 40 210
EN-GJL-250 EN-JL1040 250 – 350 (3)
40 80 190
80 150 170
150 300 160 (1)
10 (2) 20 -
20 40 250
EN-GJL-300 EN-JL1050 40 80 300 – 400 (3) 220
80 150 210
150 300 190 (1)
10 (2) 20 -
20 40 290
EN-GJL-350 EN-JL1060 40 80 350 – 450 (3) 260
80 150 230
150 300 210 (1)
(1) These values are guidance.

(2) This value is included as lower limit of the range of determining wall thickness.
(3) The values refer to test specimens with 30 mm diameter of rough casting. This corresponds to a determining wall thickness
of 15 mm

B Section 7 – Iron Castings 7-13
Dimensions in millimeters 9.2 Subject to the prior approval of the Surveyor,

castings containing local porosity may be rectified by
impregnation with a suitable plastic filler, provided that
the extent of the porosity is such that it does not
adversely affect the strength of the casting.
9.3 Repairs by welding are generally not permitted.
10.1 The manufacturer is to adopt a system of

identification, which will enable all finished castings to
be traced to the original ladle of metal. The Surveyor is
to be given full facilities for so tracing the castings when
required.
10.2 Before acceptance, all castings which have

been tested and inspected with satisfactory results are
to be clearly marked by the manufacturer. At the
discretion of individual TL any of the following
particulars may be required:
Figure 7.4 Test sample for grey cast iron
- Quality of cast iron.
8.2 Before acceptance, all castings are to be - Identification number or other marking which
visually examined including, where applicable, the will enable the full history of the casting to be
examination of internal surfaces. Unless otherwise traced.
agreed, the verification of dimensions is the
responsibility of the manufacturer. - Manufacturer's name or trade mark.
8.3 Supplementary examination of castings by - TL's name, initials or symbol.

suitable nondestructive testing procedures is generally
not required except in circumstances where there is - Abbreviated name of TL's local office.
reason to suspect the soundness of the casting.
- Personal stamp of Surveyor responsible for
8.4 When required by the relevant construction inspection.
Rules, castings are to be pressure tested before final
acceptance. - Where applicable, test pressure.
8.5 In the event of any casting proving defective - Date of final inspection
during subsequent machining or testing it is to be
rejected notwithstanding any previous certification. 10.3 Where small castings are manufactured in
large numbers, modified arrangements for identification
9. Rectification of Defective Castings may be specially agreed with TL.
9.1 At the discretion of the Surveyor, small surface

blemishes may be removed by local grinding.

7-14 Section 7 – Iron Castings B
11. Certification - Identification number.
The manufacturer is to provide the Surveyor with a test - Results of mechanical tests.
certificate or shipping statement giving the following
particulars for each casting or batch of castings which - Where applicable, general details of heat
has been accepted: treatment.
- Purchaser's name and order number. - When specially required, the chemical analysis
of ladle samples.
- Description of castings and quality of cast iron.
- Where applicable, test pressure.

Section 8 – Aluminium Alloys 8- 1
SECTION 8
ALUMINIUM ALLOYS
Page
A. WROUGHT ALUMINIUM ALLOYS ..................................................................................................................... 8-2
1. Scope
2. Approval
3. Aluminium Alloys and Their Temper Conditions
6. Freedom of Defects
7. Tolerances
9. Test Material
10. Mechanical Test Specimens
11. Number of Test Specimens
13. Branding
14. Documentation
B. ALUMINIUM ALLOY CASTINGS ........................................................................................................................ 8-8
1. Scope
2. Requirements to be Met by Aluminium Foundries
3. Permitted Grades of Casting
4. Requirements
5. Tests
6. Branding
7. Documentation
C. RIVETS ................................................................................................................................................................ 8-10
1. Scope
3. Heat Treatment
4. Test Material
5. Mechanical Tests
6. Branding
7. Documentation
D. TRANSITION JOINTS ......................................................................................................................................... 8-12
1. Scope
2. Manufacturing Process
3. Tests and Inspections
4. Branding
5. Documentation

8-2 Section 8 – Aluminium Alloys A
A. Wrought Aluminium Alloys With the hereunder temper conditions: O,H 111, H 112,
H 116, H 321
1. Scope
3.2 Extruded products (sections, shapes,
1.1 These rules apply to wrought aluminium alloys bars and closed profiles)
used in the construction of hulls, superstructure and
other marine structures. The following aluminium alloys are covered by these
rules:
They are not applicable to the use of aluminium alloys
at low temperature for cryogenic applications. 5083, 5383, 5059 and 5086
1.2 These rules are applicable to wrought with the hereunder temper conditions:
aluminium alloy products within a thickness range of 3
mm and 50 mm inclusive. O, H111, H112
The application of aluminium alloy products apart from and:

this thickness range requires prior agreement of TL. 6005A, 6061, 6082
1.3 The numerical designation (grade) of with the hereunder temper conditions:
aluminium alloys and the temper designation are based
on those of the Aluminium Association. T5 or T6
1.4 Temper conditions (delivery heat treatment) Note:

are defined in EN 515 or ANSI H35.1/H35.1M. The alloy grades 6005A, 6061, of the 6000 series should not
be used in direct contact with sea water unless protected by
1.5 Consideration may be given to aluminium anodes and/or paint system.
alloys not specified in these rules, and to alternative
temper conditions, subject to prior agreement with TL 4. Chemical Composition
further to a detailed study of their properties, including
corrosion resistance, and of their conditions of use (in 4.1 The manufacturer is to determine the chemical
particular welding procedures). composition of each cast.
2. Approval 4.2 The chemical composition of aluminium alloys

is to comply with the requirements given in Table 8.1.
All materials, including semi finished products, are to be
manufactured at works which are approved by TL for 4.3 The manufacturer’s declared analysis will be
the grades of alloy supplied. accepted subject to occasional checks if required by the
surveyor, in particular, product analysis may be required
3. Aluminium Alloys and Their Temper where the final product chemistry is not well
Conditions represented by the analysis from the cast.
3.1 Rolled products (sheets, strips and plates) 4.4 When the aluminium alloys are not cast in the
same works in which they are manufactured into semi
The following aluminium alloys are covered by these finished products, TL surveyor is to be given a
rules: 5083, 5086, 5383, 5059, 5754 and 5456 certificate issued by the works in question which
indicates the reference numbers and chemical
composition of the heats.

Table 8.1 Chemical composition (1)
Other elements (2)

Grade Si Fe Cu Mn Mg Cr Zn Ti
Each Total
5083 0.40 0.40 0.10 0.4-1.0 4.0-4.9 0.05-0.25 0.25 0.15 0.05 0.15
5383 0.25 0.25 0.20 07-1.0 4.0-5.2 0.25 0.40 0.15 0.05 (5) 0.15 (5)
5059 0.45 0.50 0.25 0.6-1.2 5.0-6.0 0.25 0.4-0.9 0.20 0.05 (6) 0.15 (6)
5086 0.40 0.50 0.10 0.2-0.7 3.5-4.5 0.05-0.25 0.25 0.15 0.05 0.15
5754 0.40 0.40 0.10 0.50 (3) 2.6-3.6 0.30 (3) 0.20 0.15 0.05 0.15
5456 0.25 0.40 0.10 0.5-1.0 4.7-5.5 0.05-0.20 0.25 0.20 0.05 0.15
6005A 0.5-0.9 0.35 0.30 0.5 (4) 0.4-0.7 0.30 (4) 0.20 0.10 0.05 0.15
6061 0.4-0.8 0.70 0.15-0.40 0.5 0.8-1.2 0.04-0.35 0.25 0.15 0.05 0.15
6082 0.7-1.3 0.50 0.10 0.4-1.0 0.6-1.2 0.25 0.20 0.10 0.05 0.15
(1) Composition in percentage mass by mass maximum unless shown as a range or as a minimum.
(2) Includes Ni, Ga, V and listed elements for which no specific limit is shown. Regular analysis need not be made.
(3) Mn + Cr : 0.10-0.60
(4) Mn + Cr : 0.12-0.50
(5) Zr : maximum 0.20. The total for other elements does not include Zr.
(6) Zr : 0.05-0.25. The total for other elements does not include Zr.
5. Mechanical Properties 7. Tolerances
The mechanical properties are to comply with the 7.1 The under thickness tolerances for rolled
requirements given in Tables 8.2 and 8.3 products given in Table 8.4 are minimum requirements.
Table 8.4
Note:
It should be recognized that the mechanical properties of the 7.2 The under thickness tolerances for extruded
welded joint are lower for strain hardened or heat treated products are to be in accordance with the requirements
alloys, when compared with those of the base material, in of recognized international or national standards.
general. For reference, see the TL- R for Aluminium
consumables(Türk Loydu Rules Chapter 3 Section 5 .J) 7.3 Dimensional tolerances other than under
thickness tolerances are to comply with a recognized
6. Freedom of Defects national or international standard.
6.1 The finished material is to have a workmanlike 8. Testing and Inspection

finish and is to be free from internal and surface defects
prejudicial to the use of concerned material for the 8.1 Tensile test
intended application.
The test specimens and procedures are to be in
6.2 Slight surface imperfections may be removed accordance with Section 2.
by smooth grinding or machining as long as the
thickness of the material remains within the tolerances 8.2 Non-destructive examination
given in 7.
In general, the non-destructive examination of material
is not required for acceptance purposes.

Note: 8.4 Verification of proper fusion of press welds

Manufacturers are expected, however, to employ suitable for closed profiles
methods of non-destructive examination for the general
maintenance of quality standards. 8.4.1 The manufacturer has to demonstrate by
macro section tests or drift expansion tests of closed
8.3 Dimensions profiles performed on each batch of closed profiles that
there is no lack of fusion at the press welds.
It is the manufacturer’s responsibility to check the
materials for compliance with the tolerances given in 7.
Table 8.2 Mechanical properties for rolled products, 3 mm ≤ t ≤ 50 mm
Yield strength Tensile strength Elongation, % min. (1)

Temper
Grade Thickness, t Rp0.2 min.or range Rm min. or range
condition (3) 2 2
N/mm N/mm A 50 mm A 5d
O 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 125 275-350 16 14
H111 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 125 275-350 16 14
5083 H112 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 125 275 12 10
H116 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 215 305 10 10
H321 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 215-295 305-385 12 10
O 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 145 290 - 17
H111 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 145 290 - 17
5383
H116 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 220 305 10 10
H321 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 220 305 10 10
O 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 160 330 24 24
H111 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 160 330 24 24
3 ≤ t ≤ 20 mm 270 370 10 10
5059 H116
20 < t ≤ 50 mm 260 360 - 10
3 ≤ t ≤ 20 mm 270 370 10 10
H321
20 < t ≤ 50 mm 260 360 - 10
O 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 95 240-305 16 14
H111 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 95 240-305 16 14
5086 3 ≤ t ≤ 12.5 mm 125 250 8 -
H112
12.5 < t ≤ 50 mm 105 240 - 9
H116 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 195 275 10 (2) 9
5754 O 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 80 190-240 18 17
H111 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 80 190-240 18 17
3 ≤ t ≤ 6.3 mm 130-205 290-365 16 -
O
6.3 < t ≤ 50 mm 125-205 285-360 16 14
3 ≤ t ≤ 30 mm 230 315 10 10
H116 30 < t ≤ 40 mm 215 305 - 10
5456
40 < t ≤ 50 mm 200 285 - 10
3 ≤ t ≤ 12.5 mm 230-315 315-405 12 -
H321 12.5 < t ≤ 40 mm 215-305 305-385 - 10
40 < t ≤ 50 mm 200-295 285-370 - 10
(1) Elongation in 50 mm applies for thicknesses up to and including 12.5 mm and in 5d for thicknesses over 12.5 mm.
(2) 8 % for thicknesses up to and including 6.3 mm.
(3) The mechanical properties for the O and H111 tempers are the same. However, they are separated to discourage dual
certification as these tempers represent different processing.

A Section 8 – Aluminium Alloys 8-5
8.4.2 Drift expansion tests 8.4.2.3 The test specimens are to be cut with the
ends perpendicular to the axis of the profile. The edges
8.4.2.1 Every fifth profile is to be sampled after final of the end may be rounded by filling.
heat treatment. Batches of five profiles or less is to be
sampled one profile. Profiles with lengths exceeding 6 8.4.2.4 The length of the specimen is to be in
mshall be sampled every profile in the start of the accordance with Section 2.
production. The number of tests may be reduced to
every fifth profile if the results from the first 5 profiles are 8.4.2.5 Testing is to be carried out at ambient
found acceptable. temperature and is to consist of expanding the end of
the profile by means of a hardened conical steel
8.4.2.2 Each profile sampled will have two samples cut mandrel having an included angle of at least 60˚.
from the front and back end of the production profile.
Table 8.3 Mechanical properties for extruded products, 3 mm ≤ t ≤ 50 mm
Yield strength Tensile strength

Elongation, % min. (1) (2)
Grade Temper Thickness, t Rp0.2 min. Rm min. or range
2 2
N/mm N/mm A 50 mm A 5d
O 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 110 275-350 14 12
5083 H111 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 165 275 12 10
H112 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 110 270 12 10
O 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 145 290 17 17
5383 H111 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 145 290 17 17
H112 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 190 310 - 13
5059 H112 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 200 330 - 10
O 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 95 240-315 14 12
5086 H111 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 145 250 12 10
H112 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 95 240 12 10
T5 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 215 260 9 8
6005A 3 ≤ t ≤ 10 mm 215 260 8 6

T6
10 < t ≤ 50 mm 200 250 8 6
6061 T6 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 240 260 10 8
6082 T5 3 ≤ t ≤ 50 mm 230 270 8 6
T6 3 ≤ t ≤ 5 mm 250 290 6 -
5 < t ≤ 50 mm 260 310 10 8
(1) The values are applicable for longitudinal and transverse tensile test specimens as well
(2) Elongation in 50 mm apply for thicknesses up to and including 12.5 mm and in 5d for thicknesses over 12.5 mm.

Table 8.4 Under thickness tolerances for rolled products
Thickness tolerances for nominal width (w), mm

Nominal thickness (t), mm
w ≤ 1500 1500 < w ≤ 2000 2000 < w ≤ 3500
3.0 ≤ t < 4.0 0.10 0.15 0.15
4.0 ≤ t < 8.0 0.20 0.20 0.25
8.0 ≤ t < 12.0 0.25 0.25 0.25
12.0 ≤ t < 20.0 0.35 0.40 0.50
20.0 ≤ t < 50.0 0.45 0.50 0.65
8.4.2.6 The sample is considered to be unacceptable if 8.5.3 For batch acceptance of 5xxx-alloys, in the H 116
the sample fails with a clean split along the weld line and H321 tempers, metallographic examination of one
which confirms lack of fusion. sample selected from mid width at one end of a coil or
random sheet or plate is to be carried out. The
8.5 Corrosion testing microstructure of the sample is to be compared to the
reference photomicrograph of acceptable material in the
8.5.1 Rolled 5xxx-alloys of type 5083, 5383, 5059, presence of the surveyor. A longitudinal section
5086 and 5456 in the H116 and H321 tempers intended perpendicular to the rolled surface is to be prepared for
for use in marine hull construction or in marine metallographic examination, under the conditions specified
applications where frequent direct contact with seawater in ASTM B928, Section 9.6.1. If this microstructure shows
is expected are to be corrosion tested with respect to evidence of continuous grain boundary network of
exfoliation and intergranular corrosion resistance. aluminium-magnesium precipitate in excess of the
reference photomicrographs of acceptable material, the
8.5.2 The manufacturers are to establish the batch is either to be rejected or tested for exfoliation-
relationship between microstructure and resistance to corrosion resistance and intergranular corrosion resistance
corrosion when the above alloys are approved. A subject to the agreement of the surveyor. The corrosion
reference photomicrograph taken at 500x,under the tests are to be in accordance with ASTM G 66 and G 67 or
conditions specified in ASTM B928, Section 9.4.1, is to equivalent standards. Acceptance criteria are that the
be established for each of the alloy-tempers and sample shall exhibit no evidence of exfoliation corrosion
thickness ranges relevant. The reference photographs and a pitting rating of PB or better when test subjected to
are to be taken from samples which have exhibited no ASTM G66 ASSET test, and the sample shall exhibit
evidence of exfoliation corrosion and a pitting rating of resistance to intergranular corrosion at a mass loss no
2
PB or better, when subjected to the test described in greater than 15mg/cm when subjected to ASTM G67
ASTM G 66 (ASSET). The samples are also have NAMLT test. If the results from testing satisfy the
exhibited resistance to intergranular corrosion at a mass acceptance criteria stated in item 8.5.2 the batch is
2
loss no greater than 15 mg/cm , when subjected to the accepted, else it is to be rejected.
test described in ASTM G 67 (NAMLT). Upon
satisfactory establishment of the relationship between As an alternative to metallographic examination, each
microstructure and resistance to corrosion, the master batch may be tested for exfoliation-corrosion resistance
photomicrographs and the results of the corrosion tests and intergranular corrosion resistance, in accordance with
are to be approved by TL. Production practices are not ASTM G 66 and G 67 under the conditions specified in
to be changed after approval of the reference ASTM B928, or equivalent standards. If this alternative is
micrographs. used, then the results of the test must satisfy the
acceptance criteria stated in 8.5.3.
Other test methods may also be accepted at the discretion
of TL.

A Section 8 – Aluminium Alloys 8-7
9. Test Material 11. Number of Test Specimens
9.1 Definition of batches 11.1 Tensile Test
Each batch is made up of products: 11.1.1 Rolled products
- Of the same alloy grade and from the same cast One tensile test specimen is to be taken from each
batch of the product. If the weight of one batch exceeds
- Of the same product form and similar dimensions 2000 kg, one extra tensile test specimen is to be taken
(for plates, the same thickness) from every 2000 kg of the product or fraction thereof, in
each batch.
- Manufactured by the same process
For single plates or for coils weighting more than 2000
- Having been submitted simultaneously to the kg each, only one tensile test specimen per plate or coil
same temper condition. is to be taken.
9.2 The test samples are to be taken 11.1.2 Extruded products
- At one third of the width from a longitudinal edge For the products with a nominal weight of less than 1
of the rolled products kg/m, one tensile test specimen is to be taken from
each 1000 kg, or fraction thereof, in each batch. For
- In the range 1/3 to 1/2 of the distance from the nominal weights between 1 and 5 kg/m, one tensile test
edge to the centre of the thickest part of extruded specimen is to be taken from each 2000 kg or fraction
products. thereof, in each batch. If the nominal weight exceeds 5
kg/m, one tensile test specimen is to be taken for each
9.3 Test samples are to be taken so that the 3000 kg of the product or fraction thereof, in each batch.
orientation of test specimens is as follows:
11.2 Verification of proper fusion of press welds
9.3.1 Rolled products
For closed profiles, verification of proper fusion of press
Normally, tests in the transverse direction are required. If welds is to be performed on each batch as indicated in 8.4.
the width is insufficient to obtain transverse test specimen,
or in the case of strain hardening alloys, tests in the 11.3 Corrosion tests
longitudinal direction will be permitted.
For rolled plates of grade 5083, 5383, 5059, 5086 and
9.3.2 Extruded products 5456 delivered in the tempers H116 or H321, one
sample is to be tested per batch.
The extruded products are tested in longitudinal direction.
9.4 After removal of test samples, each test
specimen is to be marked in order that its original identity, 12.1 When the tensile test from the first piece
location and orientation is maintained. selected in accordance with item 11 fails to meet the
requirements, two further tensile tests may be made
10. Mechanical Test Specimens from the same piece. If both of these additional tests are
satisfactory. This piece and the remaining pieces from
The type and location of tensile test specimen are to be in the same batch may be accepted.
accordance with Section 2.

8-8 Section 8 – Aluminium Alloys A,B
12.2 If one or both the additional tests referred to - Purchaser and order number,
above are unsatisfactory, the piece is to be rejected, but
the remaining material from the same batch may be - Construction project number, when known,
accepted provided that two of the remaining pieces in
the batch selected in the same way, are tested with - Number dimensions and weight of the product,
satisfactory results If unsatisfactory results are obtained
from either of these two pieces then the batch of - Designation of the aluminium alloy (grade) and
material is to be rejected. of its temper condition (delivery heat
treatment),
12.3 In the event of any material bearing the TL’s
mark failing to comply with the test requirements, the - Chemical composition
mark is to be unmistakably defaced by the
manufacturer. - Manufacturing batch number or identifying
mark
13. Branding
- Mechanical Test Results.
13.1 The manufacturer is to mark each product at
least one place with the following details: - Corrosion Test results (if any).
- Manufacturer’s mark,
B. Aluminium Alloy Castings
- Abbreviated designation of aluminium alloy
according to item 3, 1. Scope
- Abbreviated designation of temper condition These rules are applicable to aluminium casting alloys
according to item 3, which are intended for hull construction, as well as
machine construction parts and also other shipbuilding
- Tempers that are corrosion tested in components.
accordance with item 8.5 are to be marked “M”
after the temper condition, e.g. 5083 H321 M, 2. Requirements to be Met by Aluminium
Foundries
- Number of the manufacturing batch enabling
the manufacturing process to be traced back. 2.1 Foundries wishing to supply castings
conforming to these Rules are to be approved by TL for
13.2 The product is also to bear TL’s mark. the grades of castings concerned. TL reserves the right
to call for performance tests to be carried out on
13.3 When extruded products are bundled together castings selected for the purpose
or packed in crates for delivery, the marking specified in
item 13.1 should be affixed by a securely fastened tag 2.2 If castings are required to be weldable, this is
or label. to be stated in the order and proof of suitability
furnished to TL.
14. Documentation
3. Permitted Grades of Casting
For each tested batch, the manufacturer must supply to
TL’s surveyor a test certificate, or a shipping statement 3.1 Suitable grades of castings to international or
containing the following details: national standards, e.g. to EN 1706 are generally to be
used. Where castings conforming to manufacturer’s

B Section 8 – Aluminium Alloys 8-9
specifications are to be used, these are to be submitted Use may be made of other alloys provided these are
to TL for examination and approval. suitable for the intended application and their use have
been approved by TL.
3.2 Castings such as fittings, housings and fan
rotors which are exposed without protection to the 4. Requirements
action of seawater or salty atmosphere should be made
of alloys suitable for this kind of use. AISi-, AISiMg- and 4.1 The chemical composition of the castings is to
AIMg-alloys with a maximum copper content of 0.1 % correspond to the standards or to recognized
should normally be used. AISi- and AISiMg-alloys shall manufacturer’s specifications and is to be demonstrated
not come into direct contact with seawater, where by the manufacturer of the castings for each charge.
necessary, they are to be protected by anodes or
coatings. 4.2 With regard to mechanical properties, the
requirements stated in the standards or the
3.3 For the applications mentioned in 1, use may manufacturer’s specifications are applicable.
be made of the casting alloys conforming to EN 1706
listed in Table 8.5. Specimens taken from integrally cast test pieces are to
meet the requirements for separately cast sample bars.
Table 8.5 Aluminium alloy castings
Designation of alloy Cast procedure Material condition Sea water suitability

EN AC-41000
S, K F, TG Good
(AISi2MgTi)
EN AC-42100
S, K, L TG, TG4 Good
(AISi7Mg0.3)
EN AC-42200
S, K, L TG, TG4 Good
(AISi7Mg0.6)
EN AC-43100
S, K, L F, TG, TG4 Good / moderate
(AISi10Mg(b))
EN AC-44100
S, K, L, D F Good / moderate
(AISi12(b))
EN AC-51000
S, K, L F Very good
(AlMg3(b))
EN AC-51300
S, K, L F Very good
(AlMg5)
EN AC-51400
S, K, L F Very good
(AlMg5(Si))
S = Sand casting
K = Permanent mould casting
L = Investment casting
D = Pressure die casting
F = Cast condition
TG = Solution annealed and completely artificially aged
TG4 = Solution annealed and not completely artificially aged-under aged (only for permanent mould casting)

8-10 Section 8 – Aluminium Alloys B,C
4.3 All castings are to be free from internal and the following marks on the castings:
external defects which could have more than just a
slight adverse effect on the application and any - Manufacturer’s mark,
appropriate further manufacturing processes carried out
on the castings. - Short designation of the casting alloys,
Where defects are to be repaired by welding, a welding - Short designation of the condition of the
specification is to be produced by the manufacturer for material,
this purpose and the approval of the Surveyor sought.
- Charge number or some other mark to permit
5. Tests identification of the casting
5.1 Castings which form part of the ship’s hull or 7. Documentation

are designed as structural components of the propulsion
system are to be presented to the Surveyor for testing. For each delivery, the manufacturer is to present the
A tensile test is to be performed on the castings in his Surveyor with a certificate or delivery specification
presence to establish their mechanical properties. giving the following minimum details:
5.2 For the tensile test, one test specimen is to be - Purchaser and order number,
provided from each charge or each heat treatment
batch. For unfinished castings weighing 300 kg. and - Type of casting and grade of casting,
over, a tensile test specimen is required for each
castings. - Item numbers and quantities,
5.3 Specimens for tensile testing are normally to - Method of manufacture,

be taken from integrally cast sample bars which may
only be separated from the casting when the final heat - Heat numbers and chemical composition,
treatment has been performed.
- Details of heat treatment,
The use of separately cast sample pieces are to be
subject to special agreement with TL with regard to their - Test pressures, where applicable,
casting and the requirements applicable to the
mechanical properties of the tensile test specimens - Weight of the delivery.
taken from them.
5.4 Where stipulated following examination of the C. Rivets

drawings or in the order, and also where there is some
doubt as to whether the castings are free from defects, 1. Scope
the manufacturer of the castings is to perform non-
destructive tests at the places specified for the purpose, The requirements of these rules apply to aluminium
and the results are to be certified by him. Critical areas alloy rivets intended for use in the construction of
of casting and repaired defects are also to be marine structures.
incorporated in the test.
6. Branding
2.1 For rivets or rivet bars which are made up of
As a minimum requirement, the manufacturer is to apply magnesium alloys, the magnesium content is not to
exceed a maximum of 3.9%.

C Section 8 – Aluminium Alloys 8-11
In particular, the chemical composition of bars used for 5.2 The tensile test specimen is to be a short
the manufacture of rivets is to comply with the length of bar having the original diameter of the product.
requirements of Table 8.6.
5.3 The flattening test consists of compressing the
Table 8.6 Chemical composition of rivets (%) specimen between two rigid and parallel plates in a
direction perpendicular to its longitudinal axis; the plates
Element 5154A 6082 are to cover the whole specimen after flattening.
Copper 0.10 max 0.10 max

The flattening test specimen is to consist of a full
Magnesium 3.10-3.90 0.60-1.20 section of bar having the original diameter of the
Silicon 0.50 max 0.70-1.30 product and a length of 1.5 times the diameter cut from
Iron 0.50 max 0.50 max the bar.
Manganese 0.10-0.50 0.40-1.00

The test is to be continued until the distance between
Zinc 0.20 max 0.20 max the two plates, measured under load, reaches a value
Chromium 0.25 max 0.25 max corresponding to one half of the original length of the
Titanium 0.20 max 0.10 max specimen.
Other elements: each 0.05 max 0.05 max

The test is to be performed at ambient temperature.
total 0.15 max 0.15 max
Aluminium remainder remainder The result of the test is satisfactory if, after
compression, the specimen is free from cracks.
3. Heat Treatment
5.4 The results of tensile tests are to comply with
Rivets are to be supplied in the following conditions: the appropriate requirements of Table 8.7.
5154A-annealed
5.5 At least three samples are to be selected from
6082-solution treated. each consignment of manufactured rivets. Flattening
tests as detailed in 5.3 are to be carried out on each
4. Test Material sample.
Bars intended for the manufacture of rivets are to be Table 8.7 Mechanical properties of rivets
presented for testing in batches of no more than 250 kg.
Mechanical properties 5154A 6082

The material in each batch is to be of the same alloy,
2
0.2% proof stress (N/mm ) min 90 120
manufacturing process and final heat treatment and
2
have the same or a comparable diameter. One test Tensile strength (N/mm ) min 220 190
sample is to be taken from each batch and, prior to
Elongation (%) on 5.65 So min 18 16
testing, heat treated in full cross-section and in a
manner simulating the heat treatment applied to the
6. Branding
finished rivets.
Each package of manufactured rivets is to be identified

5. Mechanical Tests
with attached labels giving the following details:
5.1 At least one tensile specimen and one

- Manufacturer’s name or trade mark,
flattening test specimen are to be prepared from each
test sample.
- Alloy grade,

8-12 Section 8 – Aluminium Alloys C,D
- Rivet size. with a relevant national standard to determine the extent

of any unbounded areas. The latter are unacceptable
7. Documentation and any such area plus 25 mm of surrounding sound
material is to be discarded.
The test certificate for each consignment of
manufactured rivets is to include the following 3.2 The series of tests includes, from each end of
particulars: one plate in a batch of three plates:
- Purchaser’s name and order number, - One through thickness tensile test,
- Description and dimensions, - One shear test,
- Specification of the alloy. - One bend test.
3.3 Tests are made on specimens equivalent to

D. Transition Joints those specified at the approval.
1. Scope The results of these tests are to comply with the

requirements of the manufacturing specification.
The requirements of this Article apply to explosion
bonded composite aluminium/steel transition joints used 4. Branding
for the connection of aluminium structures to steel
plating. Each package of manufactured rivets is to be identified
with attached labels giving the following details:
2. Manufacturing
Manufacturer’s name or trade mark, grade and size of
Transition joints are to be manufactured at works which the product.
are approved by TL. The specification of the
manufacturer is to be submitted for approval. The 5. Documentation
maximum temperature allowable at the interface during
welding is to be indicated; approval tests are required. The test certificate for each consignment of
manufactured transition joints is to include the following
2.2 The aluminium material is to comply with the particulars:
requirements of A and the steel is to be of an
appropriate grade complying with the requirements of - Purchaser’s name and order number,
Section 3
- Description and dimensions,
3. Tests and Inspections
- Specification of the alloy.
3.1 Each composite plate is to be subjected to
100% visual and ultrasonic examination in accordance

Section 9 – Copper Alloys 9-1
SECTION 9
COPPER ALLOYS
Page
A. PIPES OF COPPER AND WROUGHT COPPER ALLOYS......……………..…………………………………….9- 2
1. Scope
2. Requirements to be Met by Pipe Manufacturers
4. Suitable Grades of Pipe
5. Surface Finish
7. Resistance to Leakage
9. Testing
10. Marking
11. Certificates Issued by the Manufacturers
12. Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Fittings
B. COPPER ALLOYS CASTINGS………………………………………………………………………………………9- 9
1. Scope
2. Requirements to be Met by Foundries
3. Manufacture
4. Suitable Grades of Cast Alloy
5. Characteristics of Castings
6. Dimensional and Geometrical Tolerances
9. Testing
10. Identification and Marking
11. Test Certificates

9-2 Section 9 – Copper Alloys A
A. Pipes of Copper and Wrought Copper Alloys 4.2 Copper and wrought copper alloy pipes for
condensers and heat exchangers according to EN
1. Scope 12451, preferably in the grades of pipe shown in Table
9.1.
These Rules are applicable to pipes and fittings made of
copper and wrought copper alloys and intended for use 4.3 Pipes conforming to other standards or speci-
in pressurized lines and for condensers and heat fications, provided that they are comparable to the
exchangers. In the case of finned pipes, specifications grades specified in 4.1 and 4.2 and their suitability has
are to be submitted to TL for approval. been confirmed by TL.
2. Requirements to be Met by Pipe 5. Surface Finish

Manufacturers
5.1 Pipes are to have a smooth surface compatible
Manufacturers wishing to supply products in accordance with the method of manufacture. The surface is to be
with these Rules are to be approved by TL. free from impurities, e.g. pickling residue or burnt
drawing lubricants, and may not be cracked or have
suffered mechanical damage. Die marks and lamina-
tions which may impair further manufacturing operations
3.1 The pipes are generally to be manufactured by
or the use of the material are not allowed.
seamless methods, e.g. by hot pressing followed by
rolling and cold drawing.
5.2 Surface defects may be repaired by grinding
provided that a gradual transition is made to the surface
3.2 Where welded pipes or fittings are to be used,
the characteristics of these and the method of manu- of the pipe and that the dimensional tolerances are not
facture employed is to be made known to TL. TL exceeded. Repairs by welding or soldering are not
reserves the right to demand a procedure approval test permitted.

in these cases.
6. Dimensions; Dimensional and Geometrical
3.3 Cold-formed pipes and fittings are to be Tolerances
subjected to recrystallization annealing. Notwithstanding
this, copper pipes which are to be supplied in the "half The tolerances on wall thickness and diameter are to be
hard" to "hard" condition (e.g. conditions R250 and those prescribed in EN 12449, see on this also Tables
R290, EN 12449) may be cold formed after annealing.
9.4 to 9.9. Pipe ends are to be cut off at right angles to
CuNi2Si-pipes are cold formed in the solution annealed
the pipe axis and are to be free from burrs.
condition or hot formed with simultaneous solution
annealing and subsequent quenching. After cold
forming hardening occurs.
Pipes are not to leak when submitted to the hydraulic

4. Suitable Grades of Pipe
pressure test at the prescribed test pressures
All pipes are to be suitable for the intended application

and satisfy the requirements specified in 8. Subject to 8. Requirements Applicable to the Material
these conditions, the following grades of pipe may be
used: 8.1 Chemical composition
4.1 Copper and wrought copper alloy pipes ac- The chemical composition shall conform to Table 9.1.
cording to EN 12449 in the grades shown in Table 9.1.

Section 9 – Copper Alloys 9-3
A
A
Table 9.1 Suitable grades of pipe
Material designation Composition : Weight fraction [%]
Eleme Others
Material code Number Cu Al As C Co Fe Mn Ni P Pb S Si Sn Zn
nt total
Cu-DHP min. 99.9(1) - - - - - - - 0.015 - - - - - -

CW024A
max. - - - - - - - - 0.040 - - - - - -
TÜRK LOYDU - MATERIAL JANUARY 2021

min. - - - - - - 1.6 - - - 0.4 - - -
CuNi2Si CW111C Remainder
max. - - - - 0.2 0.1 2.5 - 0.02 - 0.8 - - 0.3
min. - - - - 1.0(3) 0.5 9.0 - - - - - - -

CuNi10Fe1Mn(4) CW352H Remainder
max. - - 0.05 0.1(2) 2.0(3) 1.0 11.0 0.02 0.02 0.05(4) - 0.03 0.5(4) 0.2
min. - - - - 0.4 0.5 30.0 - - - - - - -

CuNi30Mn1Fe(4) CW354H Remainder
max. - - 0.05 0.1(2) 1.0 1.5 32.0 0.02 0.02 0.05 - 0.03 0.5 0.2
min. 76.0 1.8 0.02 - - - - - - - - - - Residue -

CiUm20A12As CW702R
max. 79.0 2.3 0.06 - - 0.07 0.1 0.1 0.01 0.05 - - - - 0.3
(1) Including Ag up to max.0.015%.

(2) Co max. 0.1 is counted as Ni.
(3) For applications exposed to seawater : 1.5 ≤ Fe ≤ 1.8.
(4) When the product is for subsequent welding applications and so specified by the purchaser, the following maximum limits apply:
Zinc 0.50%, Lead 0.02%, Phosphorus 0.02%, Sulphur 0.02% and Carbon 0.05%.
9- 3
8.2 Mechanical properties occur, for example, in gas welding, soldering and hot
forming.
The mechanical properties are to conform to the rele-
vant standards. Table 9.2 gives an extract from EN 8.6 Grain size
12449 for the grades of pipe specified in 4.1.
The average grain diameter of the materials specified in

8.3 Formability Table 9.2 in the conditions mentioned in the Table is to
be between 0.01 and 0.05 mm. An exception is material
With the exception of pipes made of copper Cu-DHP in Cu-DHP in condition R290.
condition R290 and CuNi2Si in condition R460, all pipes
are to be capable of being cold formed with the degrees 9. Testing
of deformation customary in workshop practice, e.g. by
bending and expansion. 9.1 For the purpose of testing, the pipes are to
be grouped into test batches in accordance with Table
8.4 Absence of stresses 9.3.
Pipes made of copper zinc alloys are to be free from A test batch is to comprise pipes which have been
manufactured by the same method, are made of the
stresses liable to cause stress cracks.
same material, and are in the same condition and of the
same thickness. It is not necessary for a test batch to
8.5 Resistance to hydrogen embrittlement
originate from a single heat or heat treatment.
Copper pipes may not become brittle due to the effect of Where two or more test specimens are required, they
hydrogenous gases and elevated temperatures such as are to be taken from different pipes in the test batch.
Table 9.2 Condition and mechanical properties of pipes made of copper and wrought copper alloys to EN 12449
Wall Tensile Elongation

Yield strength
Material thickness strength A5
Material condition Rp0.2
designation t Rm [%]
[N/mm ]
2
[mm] [N/mm ]
2
min.
Soft R200 ≤20 ≤110 ≥200 40
Cu-DHP Half -hard R250 ≤10 ≥150 ≥250 20
Hard (1) R290 ≤5 ≥250 ≥290 5
CuZn20Al2 Annealed R340 ≤10 ≥120 ≥340 45
CuNi10Fe1Mn Annealed R290 ≤20 ≥90 ≥290 30
CuNi30Mn1Fe Annealed R370 ≤10 ≥120 ≥370 35
Solution annealed R260 ≥60 ≥260 30
Solution annealed (1)
and precipitation ≥300 ≥460 12
hardened R460
CuNi2Si Solution annealed ≤10
≥260 ≥380 6
cold formed R380
Solution annealed
cold formed and ≥480 ≥600 8
precipitation hardened R600
(1) Without former annealing, cold forming is not possible.

A Section 9 – Copper Alloys 9-5
If pipes are supplied in rings, a test specimen is to be manufacturer is to determine the average grain
taken from every fifth ring; if there are less than five diameter on at least one specimen from each test batch
rings, however, at least one specimen is to be taken. according to ISO 2624.
Table 9.3 Test batches 9.4 Tensile test
Pipes are to be subjected to tensile test to determine

Test batch No. of specimens
the tensile strength, the 0.2 % proof stress and the
[kg] for testing
elongation.
according to 9.3 to
Over Up to 9.8 9.5 Ring flattening test
500 1 each
Pipes are to be submitted to the ring flattening test. The
500 1000 2 each
test specimens are to be flattened until the inner
1000 2000 3 each
surfaces touch. This shall not cause cracks visible to the
2000 3000 4 each eye. Cu-DHP copper pipes in condition R290 are to be
Each subsequent 1000 1 more each annealed before testing. CuNi2Si-pipes are to be
solution annealed beforehand.
9.6 Expanding test

Pipes with an outside diameter of up to 76 mm are to be
position of each manufacturing batch and pass this
subjected to the expanding test using a drift with a 45°
information on to the Surveyor.
taper. The expansion shall equal at least 30 % of the
original inside diameter and no cracks may appear. Cu-
9.3 Determination of grain size
DHP copper pipes in condition R290 are annealed
before testing. CuNi2Si-pipes have to be in the solution
In the case of condenser and heat exchanger tubes, the
annealed condition.
Table 9.4 Limiting sizes for the diameter
Diameter (nominal)
Limiting size for the diameter[mm]
[mm]
Applicable to every diameter
Applicable to the average
Over Up to including ovality in case of linear
diameter
lengths (1), (2)
3 (3) 10 ±0.06 ±0.12
10 20 ±0.08 ±0.16
20 30 ±0.12 ±0.24
30 50 ±0.15 ±0.30
50 100 ±0.20 ±0.50
100 200 ±0.50 ±1.0
200 300 ±0.75 ±1.5
300 450 ±1.0 ±2.0
(1) The limiting sizes in this column are not applicable for:
- coiled pipes (limiting sizes for coiled pipes, see Table 9.8)
- pipes with OD/t > 50 (OD = outside diameter, t = wall thickness)
- pipes in annealed condition
(2) If not otherwise agreed, the outside diameter sizes in way of the pipe ends, i.e. within a distance of 100 mm or one time the
nominal outside diameter whichever is the lesser, may be increased by a factor of 3.
(3) Including 3.

Table 9.5 Limiting sizes for the wall thickness
Outside diameter (nominal)

Limiting sizes for the wall thickness t (nominal)
[mm]
Over Up to > 0.3 ≤ 1 >1≤3 >3≤6 > 6 ≤ 10 > 10
3 (1) 40 ±15 ±13 ±11 ±10 -
40 120 ±15 ±13 ±12 ±11 ±10
120 250 - ±13 ±13 ±12 ±11
250 450 - - ±15 ±15 ±15
(1) Including 3.
9.7 Testing for absence of internal stresses 9.10 Tightness test

(CuZn pipes)
The manufacturer is to subject all pipes to a tightness
The manufacturer is to prove that CuZn alloy pipes are test. Preferably, this is to be done by applying an eddy-
free from internal stresses by carrying out the ammonia current test carried out in accordance with a recognized
test according to DIN 50916-1 or ISO 6957 and then standard (e.g. EN 1971) or test specification. Instead of
present the specimens to the Surveyor. At the express the eddy-current test, another equivalent non-
request of the purchaser, this test may be replaced by destructive test method may be agreed, or a hydraulic
the mercurous nitrate test according to ISO 196. pressure test is to be performed. Each pipe is to be
subjected for at least 5 s to an inner water pressure,
Should a specimen reveal cracks when tested, the which shall be calculated according to the following
manufacturing batch is to be rejected. The manufacturer formula:
is to be free to submit the batch to renewed heat 2⋅S⋅t
p=
treatment before presenting it for retesting. D
9.8 Test of resistance to hydrogen p = Inner water pressure,

embrittlement (Cu pipes)
t = Wall thickness (nominal) of the pipe,
For this purpose, pipe specimens 10 to 20 mm. in length
are to be annealed for 30 minutes at 800 to 850 °C in a D = Outer diameter (nominal) of the pipe,
reducing atmosphere (hydrogen or fuel gas), cooled and
flattened between two parallel plates until the inner S = Half of the minimum value for the 0.2% proof
surfaces touch. In the case of thick-walled and large- stress.
diameter pipes, flattening test specimens may comprise
approx. 10 mm wide strips taken from the sample pipe. The pipes need not to be tested with a water pressure
The points of folding shall neither reveal cracks nor above 6.9 MPa, if not otherwise agreed.
fracture.
9.11 Retests in the event of failure
If the required values are not met in the mechanical and
The manufacturer is to inspect the finish of the inner technological tests, then, before the manufacturing
and outer surfaces of every pipe and also check the batch is rejected, the procedures for retests prescribed
diameters and wall thicknesses. The pipes are then to in Section 2. may be applied.
be submitted to the Surveyor for final inspection.

A Section 9 – Copper Alloys 9-7
Table 9.6 Limiting sizes for fixed lengths of linear pipes
Outside diameter (nominal)

Limiting sizes for fixed lengths
[mm]
Over Up to ≤ 250 > 250 ≤ 1000 > 1000 ≤ 4000 > 4000
+1 +3 +5
3 (1) 25
0 0 0
+2 +5 +7
25 100 Upon agreement
0 0 0
+3 +5 +10
100 450
0 0 0
(1) Including 3.
Table 9.7 Limiting sizes for fixed lengths of coiled pipes (non-helical coiled)
Nominal length[m] Deviation limit [%]

+2
Up to 50
0
Over 50 +3
Up to 100 0
+2
Over 100
0
Table 9.8 Limiting sizes for the diameter including ovality of coiled pipes
Outside diameter (nominal) Limiting sizes for the nominal Applicable for the inner ring diameter
[mm] diameter including ovality of
Over Up to [mm] [mm]
3 (1) 6 ±0.30 400
6 10 ±0.50 600
10 20 ±0.70 800
20 30 ±0.90 1000
(1) Including 3.
Table 9.9 Straightness tolerance
Ratio of outside diameter /

wall thickness Depth (1) [mm]
[mm]
h1 h2
Over Up to per 1000 mm length ℓ1 per 400 mm length ℓ2
max. max.
- 5 2 0.8
5 10 3 1.2
10 20 4 1.6
20 40 5 2.0
40 - 6 2.5
(1) See Figure 9.1.

- Results of the analysis, of the mechanical and

technological tests, the tightness test and, if
specified for the type of pipe concerned or spe-
cially stipulated, of the tests to determine ab-
sence of internal stresses, resistance to
hydrogen embrittlement and average grain size
12. Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Fittings
Figure 9.1 Measuring of straightness

12.1 Scope
These Rules are applicable to saddles, T-shaped fit-

10. Marking
tings, tapered transition pieces and pipe elbows. Fittings
conforming to recognized standards are to be used.
10.1 The following marks are to be applied by the
manufacturer to each pipe with an outside diameter ≥
12.2 Approval
25 mm using an indelible and weatherproof dye:
Fitting manufacturers are to prove the suitability of their

products as an initial measure by means of an approval
test. The scope of testing is determined by the relevant
- Designation of material or material number
standards, e.g. DIN 86086 to DIN 86090 for fittings
manufactured from pipes by cold or hot forming. For
- Test batch number or another mark enabling
welded fittings the testing scope will be stipulated by TL.
the pipe to be clearly identified
In the case of pipes with an outside diameter < 25 mm, 12.3 Properties
the marking is to be in a form which enables the pipe to

be matched up with the test certificate. The chemical composition and mechanical properties of
the fittings are to correspond to those of the grades of
10.2 Where pipes are supplied in bundles or packed pipe used for their manufacture.
in crates, the marks specified in 10.1 may be affixed by

means of securely fastened tags or labels; however, 12.4 Testing
pipes with an outside diameter ≥ 25 mm are to be

marked individually. If testing is required under the TL Rules for
Construction, the procedure is to be as follows:
11. Certificates issued by the manufacturers

12.4.1 The manufacturer is to furnish proof of the
For each consignment the manufacturer is to supply to chemical composition of the starting materials by means
the Surveyor a certificate giving the following details: of certificates issued by the manufacturer of the starting
material.
- Purchaser and order number,

12.4.2 For testing, the fittings are to be grouped into
- Number, size and weight of pipes, test batches. A test batch is to comprise units of the
same shape and size, made of the same grade of mate-
- Material designation, rial in the same condition and produced in a single

manufacturing cycle. Two specimens are to be taken
- Test batch number or identification mark, from each test batch for the following tests:

A,B Section 9 – Copper Alloys 9-9
- Tensile test, where the nominal bore is 100 mm or 4.1 Grades conforming to EN 1982, see Table 9.11
over for applications exposed to sea water.
- Ring flattening test 4.2 Grades conforming to other standards or

specifications, provided that their suitability has been
- Test for absence of internal stresses where fit- confirmed by TL.
tings are made of CuZn alloys
5. Characteristics of Castings
Where the number of units is 10 or less, one test
specimen is sufficient. 5.1 All castings are to be supplied in a clean fettled
condition. They are to be free from shrinkage cavities,
The manufacturer is to inspect the fittings for their pores, blow holes, cracks, inclusions and other defects
dimensional accuracy and surface finish. which impair their use and the further course of
manufacture.
12.5 Marking and certification
Small surface defects may be removed by grinding
The marking and the certification of the characteristics provided that the dimensional tolerances are not ex-
of the material are subject, in analogous manner, to the ceeded.
provisions of 10. and 11.
5.2 Where defects are to be repaired by welding,
the details of the process are to be submitted to the
B. Copper Alloy Castings Surveyor for approval before the repair work begins and
the Surveyor is to be notified of the location, nature and
1. Scope extent of the defects. Bearing bushes and liners of cast
CuPbSn alloys may not be welded. Welds aimed solely
These Rules are applicable to cast copper alloys for the at improving the appearance of the casting are
manufacture of valve and pump housings, shaft liners, unacceptable.
bushes and similar parts.
6. Dimensional and Geometrical Tolerances
2. Requirements to be Met By Foundries
The dimensional and geometrical tolerances are to be
Foundries wishing to supply products in accordance those specified in the relevant standards. The standards
with these Rules are to be approved by TL. are to be stated in the order and made known to the
Surveyor.
3. Manufacture
The method of manufacture is to be chosen to suit the
shape of the casting. Sand casting, chill casting, cen- Castings subjected to internal pressure by the operating
trifugal casting and continuous casting may be used. medium are to be tight at the prescribed test pressure.
Castings may be supplied in the as cast or heat-treated
condition at the manufacturer's option unless this is 8. Requirements Applicable to the Material
specified in the order.
The chemical composition and mechanical properties
4. Suitable Grades of Cast Alloy are to conform to Table 9.10 and 9.11, the relevant
standards or the approved specifications.
The grades of cast alloy are to be suitable for the in-
tended application. Subject to these conditions, the
following grades may be used.

9-10 Section 9 – Copper Alloys B
9. Testing 9.2.3 Where castings are supplied in the heat-

treated condition, the test specimen is to be subjected
The following tests are to be performed: to the same heat treatment.
9.1 Test of chemical composition 9.3 Test of surface finish and dimensions
The manufacturer is to determine the chemical com- The manufacturer is to inspect each casting with regard
position of each heat and issue a relevant certificate. to its surface finish and compliance with the dimensional
and geometrical tolerances, after which the casting is to
Where castings are made of remelting ingots of starting be presented to the Surveyor for final inspection.
material of the same grade without further additions to
the heat, the certificate of the manufacturer of the start- 9.4 Tightness test
ing material can be accepted as proof of the chemical
composition. Minor additions to compensate for melting Where this is called for in the Rules for Construction,
losses may be disregarded. In case of doubt the compo- the castings are to be subjected to a hydraulic pressure
sition is to be determined by analyzing the casting. test in the presence of the Surveyor. Shaft liners are to
be tested at a pressure of at least 2 bar. For all other
9.2 Tensile test components the test pressure is normally 1.5 times the
operating pressure.
For this purpose a specimen is to be taken from each
heat and subjected to test. If the weight of the heat 10. Identification and Marking
exceeds 1000 kg, a second test specimen is required.
The specimens are to be taken as follows: 10.1 The manufacturer is to employ a monitoring
system which enables all castings to be traced back to
9.2.1 In the case of sand and chill casting, the their heat. On request, the Surveyor is to be given proof
specimens are to be taken from integrally cast sample of this.
bars or from separately cast sample pieces. Separately
cast sample pieces are to have the dimensions shown 10.2 Prior to final inspection by the Surveyor, each
in Fig. 9.2, originate from the same heat and are to be casting is to be marked by the manufacturer as follows:
cast using the same mould material.
- Short designation of the alloy,
- Charge number or a code marking enabling the

manufacturing process to be traced back,
- Specimen number,
- Date of test,
Figure 9.2 Sample piece - Test pressure, where applicable.
9.2.2 In the case of centrifugal and continuous At the request of the Surveyor, the test certificate
casting, the specimen is to be taken from the cast part. number is also to be stamped on. In the case of small
castings produced in series, e.g. valve housings, the
marking are to be in a form which enables the casing to
be matched up with the test certificate.

B Section 9 – Copper Alloys 9-11
11. Test Certificates - Composition of the heat (or of the starting

material, where applicable)
For each consignment the manufacturer is to supply to
the Surveyor a test certificate or delivery specification - Method of manufacture
containing the following details:
- Results of mechanical tests if performed by the
- Purchaser and order number manufacturer
- Number and weight of the castings - Test pressure, where applicable.
- Designation of the material and condition in

which supplied

11-12 Section 11 – Copper Alloys A,B
Table 9.10 Suitable cast copper alloys
9-12
Material designation Composition [%]
TL – Material Material no./code Elemen
Al B Bi C Cd Cr Cu Fe Mg Mn Nb Ni P Pb S Sb Se Si Sn Te Zn
code acc. to EN 1982 t
TL-CuAl10Ni CC333G/ min. 8.5 - - 76.0 4.0 - - 4.0 - - - -
(1) CuAl10Fe5Ni5-C max. 10.5 0.01 0.05 83.0 5.5 0.05 3.0 6.0 0.03 0.10 0.1 0.5
TL -CuAl11Ni CC334G/ min. 10.0 72.0 4.0 - - 4.0 - - - -

(2) CuAl11Fe6Ni6-C max. 12.0 82.5 7.0 0.05 2.5 7.5 0.05 0.10 0.2 0.5
CC380H/ min. - - 84.5 1.0 1.0 - 9.0 - - -
TL -CuNi10
CuNi10Fe1Mn1-C max. 0.01 0.10 - 1.8 1.5 1.0 11.0 0.03 0.10 0.5
Remainder
CC383H/
min. - - - - - 0.5 - 0.6 0.5 29.0 - - - - 0.30 - -
TL -CuNi30 CuNi30Fe1Mn1NbS
max. 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.03 0.02 1.5 0.01 1.2 1.0 31.0 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.70 0.01 0.5

i-C
TL -CuSn10 CC480K/ min. - 88.0 - - - - - - - - 9.0 -

(3) CuSn10-C max. 0.01 90.0 0.2 0.1 2.0 0.20 1.0 0.05 0.2 0.02 11.0 0.5
TL -CuSn12 CC483K/ min. - 85.0 - - - - - - - - 11.0 -
(4) CuSn12-C max. 0.01 88.5 0.2 0.2 2.0 0.60 0.7 0.05 0.15 0.01 13.0 0.5
CC484K/ min. - 84.5 - - 1.5 0.05 - - - - 11.0 -
TL -CuSn12Ni
CuSn12Ni2-C max. 0.01 87.5 0.2 0.2 2.5 0.40 0.3 0.05 0.1 0.01 13.0 0.4
TL -
CC491K/ min. - 83.0 - - - 4.0 - - - 4.0 4.0
CuSn5ZnPb
CuSn5Zn5Pb5-C max. 0.01 87.0 0.3 2.0 0.10 6.0 0.10 0.25 0.01 6.0 6.0
(3)
TL -
CC493K/ min. - 81.0 - - - 5.0 - - - 6.0 2.0
CuSn7ZnPb
CuSn7Zn4Pb-7-C max. 0.01 85.0 0.2 2.0 0.10 8.0 0.10 0.3 0.01 8.0 5.0
(3), (5)
(1) For permanent mould castings minimum iron content shall be 3.0% and minimum nickel content shall be 3.7%.
(2) For permanent mould castings minimum iron content shall be 3.0%, and minimum aluminium content shall be 9.0%. In this case maximum copper content shall be 84.5%.
(3) Nickel included (For copper).
(4) For continuous and centrifuge castings, minimum tin content shall be 10.5% and maximum copper content shall be 89%.
B
(5) For continuous and centrifuge castings minimum tin content shall be 5.2%, maximum copper content shall be 86%.
B Section 9 – Copper Alloys 9-13
Table 9.11 Mechanical properties of cast copper alloys acc. to 4.1
Proof stress Tensile strength Elongation

Hardness
TL material Rp0.2 Rm A5
Condition of supply [%] HB 10
[N/mm ] [N/mm ]
2 2
code
min. min. min. min.
TL-CuSn10 Sand cast 130 270 18 70

Permanent mould cast 160 270 10 80
Centrifugally cast 160 270 10 80
Continuously cast 170 280 10 80
TL-CuSn7ZnPb Sand cast 120 240 15 65
TL-CuSn5ZnPb Sand cast 90 240 18 60
TL-CuSn12 Sand cast 140 260 12 60
TL-CuSn12Ni Sand cast 160 280 14 90
TL-CuAl10Ni Sand cast 270 600 13 140
TL-CuAl11Ni Sand cast 320 680 5 170
TL-CuCuNi10 Sand cast 150 310 20 100
TL-CuNi30 Sand cast 230 440 18 115

Section 10 – Materials for Equipment 10-1
SECTION 10
MATERIALS FOR EQUIPMENT
Page
A. ANCHORS..........................................................................................................................................................10- 2
1. General Requirements
2. Design
3. Materials
4. Testing of Materials
5. Manufacture of Anchors
6. Testing and Certification of Anchors
7. Marking
8. Certification
9. Painting
B. ANCHOR CHAIN CABLES AND ACCESSORIES.............................................................................................10- 8
2. Materials
3. Design and Manufacture of Chain Cables and Accessories
4. Testing and Certification of Finished Chain Cables
5. Testing and Certification of Accessories
6. Chafing Chains for Emergency Towing Arrangements
C. OFFSHORE MOORING CHAINS AND ACCESSORIES..................................................................................10-20
2. Materials
3. Design and Chain Manufacture
4. Testing and Inspection of Finished Chain
5. Testing and Inspection of Accessories
6. Chafing Chain for Single Point Mooring Arrangements
D. WIRE ROPES...................................................................................................................................................10-43
1. Scope
2. Requirements to be Met by the Manufacturers of Wire Ropes
3. Manufacture
4. Requirements Applied to Wire Ropes
5. Testing of Wire Ropes
6. Verification of Characteristics
7. Marking
E. FIBRE ROPES..................................................................................................................................................10-46
1. Scope
2. Requirements to be Met by the Manufacturers of Fibre Ropes
3. Manufacture
4. Required Properties
5. Testing the Breaking Load of Ropes
7. Marking

10-2 Section 10 – Materials for Equipment A
A. Anchors with SHHP anchors only in conjunction with TL-K3

chains.
2.4 HHP anchors and SHHP anchors and also
1.1 Scope swivel shackles which are regarded as part of the
anchor are to be subjected to a type test in the
These rules apply to the materials, manufacture, testing presence of the Surveyor. In the case of swivel
and certification of anchors, shanks and anchor shackles, the proof and breaking loads are to also be
shackles produced from cast or forged steel, or demonstrated in accordance with Table 10.11.
fabricated by welded rolled steel plate and bars.
3. Materials
1.2 Types of Anchor
3.1 Materials for anchors
The types of anchor covered include:
All anchors are to be manufactured from materials
- Ordinary anchors (Refer to TL- R A1.4.1.1) meeting the requirements indicated below.
• Stockless anchors
• Stocked anchors 3.1.1 Cast steel anchor flukes, shanks, swivels and
shackles are to be manufacture and tested in
- HHP (high holding power) anchors(Refer to TL- accordance with the requirements of Section 6 and
R A1.4.1.2) comply with the requirements for castings for welded
construction. The steel is to be fine grain treated with
- SHHP (Super high holding power) anchors, not aluminium. If test program B is selected in item 6.3, then
exceeding 1500 kg in mass. (Refer to TL- R Charpy V notch impact testing of cast material is
A1.4.1.3) required. Special consideration is to be given to the use
of other grades of steels for the manufacture of swivels.
Any changes to the design made during manufacture
are to have prior written agreement from TL. 3.1.2 Forged steel anchor pins, shanks, swivels and
shackles are to be manufactured and tested in
2. Design accordance with the requirements of Section 5. Shanks,
swivels and shackles are to comply with the
2.1 The design of the anchors is to be approved by requirements for carbon and carbon-manganese steels
TL. for welded construction. Special consideration is to be
given to the use of other grades of steels for the
To this end, the anchor manufacturer is to submit to TL manufacture of swivels.
for approval drawings and/or data sheets containing all

3.1.3 Rolled billets, plate and bar for fabricated steel
the details necessary for carrying out an evaluation of
anchors are to be manufactured and tested in
the anchor and its associated components (anchor
accordance with the requirements of Section 3, B.
shackles and swivel shackles).
3.1.4 Rolled bar intended for pins, swivels and

2.2 Connecting components, such as shackles and
shackles are to be manufactured and tested in accordance
swivel shackles are to be designed to withstand at least
with the requirements of Section 3, B or Section 5.
the test loads of the appropriate anchors.
3.2 Materials for SHHP anchors

2.3 Anchors with HHP anchors may only be used
in conjunction with TL-K2 or TL-K3 chains and those The base steel grades in welded SHHP anchors are to

A Section 10 – Materials for Equipment 10-3
be selected with respect to the material grade 5. Manufacture of Anchors

requirements for Class II in Chapter 1, Hull, Section 3,
Table 3.2. The welding consumables are to meet the 5.1 Tolerance
toughness for the base steel grades in accordance with

If not otherwise specified on standards or on drawings
Chapter 3, Welding, Section 5 and Section 12 E.
demonstrated to be appropriate, the following assembly
and fitting tolerance are to be applied.
In addition to the requirements of 3.1, SHHP anchors
are to be produced in accordance with the material The clearance either side of the shank within the
toughness requirements mentioned below(Refer to TL- shackle jaws is to be no more than 3 mm for small
R A1.4.5): anchors up to 3 tons weight, 4 mm for anchors up to 5
tons weight, 6 mm for anchors up to 7 tons weight and
The toughness of the anchor shackles for SHHP is not to exceed 12 mm for larger anchors.
anchors is to meet that for grade TL-K3 anchor chain.

The shackle pin is to be a push fit in the eyes of the
The toughness of steel castings for SHHP anchors is to
shackle, which are to be chamfered on the outside to
be not less than a Charpy V-notch energy average of 27
ensure a good tightness when the pin is clenched over
J at 0ºC.
on fitting. The shackle pin to hole tolerance is to be no
more than 0.5 mm for pind up to 57 mm and 1.0 mm for
4. Testing of Materials pins of larger diameter.
4.1 For all anchor components, the anchor manu- The trunnion pin is to be a snug fit within the chamber
facturer is to provide the Surveyor with certificates, and be long enough to prevent horizontal movement.
issued by the manufacturer of the material or fittings, The gap is to be no more than 1% of the chamber
indicating the chemical composition, the heat treatment length.
condition or the condition on delivery, the heat number

The lateral movement of the shank is not to exceed 3
and the results of the mechanical tests performed on
degrees, see Figure 10.1.
the components.
4.2 All cast steel parts are to be subjected, in the

presence of the Surveyor, to a material test as set out in
Section 6.
4.3 Contrary to Section 6, A.9.2.3 the dimensions

of integrally cast specimens are to be adjusted to the
determining wall thickness as described in the following
4.4 On anchor shanks and palms two integrally

cast specimens each are to be provided, having a width
of 1/4 t, max. 100 mm and 250 mm length, where t is
the anchor shank or palm root cross section
4.5 If anchors are made from forged parts, these

are to be subjected to a material test in the presence of
the Surveyor. Figure 10.1 Allowable lateral movement of shank

5.2 Welding of anchors the design details.
Welded construction of fabricated anchors is to be done Securing of the anchor pin, shackle pin or swivel nut by
in accordance with procedures approved by TL. welding is to be done in accordance with an approved
Welding is to be carried out by qualified welders, procedure.
following the approved welding procedures(Refer to TL-
R W28 ,Türk Loydu Welding Rules Section 12 F and 6. Testing and Certification of Anchors
Section 4) using consumables manufactured in
accordance with the requirements of Product tests(see Proof load tests are to be carried out by an approved
6.3). NDT is to be carried out in accordance with the testing facility.
requirements of 6.3 product tests.
Proof load testing for Ordinary, HHP and SHHP anchors
5.3 Heat treatment is to be carried out in accordance with the pertinent
requirements of TL- R A1.4.4.
Components for cast or forged anchors are tp properly
heat treated, fully annealed, normalised or normalised 6.1 Condition in which tested
and tempered in accordance with Sections 5 (TL- R W7)
and 6 (TL- R W8).
Anchors are to be submitted for testing in the fully
assembled condition and may not be coated with paint
Fabricated anchors may require stress relief after
or preservatives.
welding depending upon weld thickness. Stress relief is
to be carried out as indicated in the approved welding
procedure. Stress relief temperatures are not to exceed 6.2 Load test
the tempering temperature of the base material.
6.2.1 Anchors with a total weight (including the
5.4 Freedom from defects stock) of 75 kg. and over are to be subjected in the
presence of a Surveyor to a load test at the appropriate
All parts are to have a clean surface consistent with the loads shown in Table 10.1 using a calibrated testing
method of manufacture and be free from cracks, machine approved by TL.
notches, inclusions and other defects that would impair
the performance of the product.
6.2.2 In the case of large anchors weighing 15000
kg and over, other tests may be substituted for the load
5.5 Repairs
tests, if the available testing machine is incapable of
Any necessary repairs to forged and cast anchors are to producing the specified test load. The nature of these
be agreed by the surveyor and carried out in tests is to be agreed with TL.
accordance with the repair criteria indicated in Sections
5 and 6. Repairs to fabricated anchors are to be agreed 6.2.3 The test load is to be applied at a point on the
by the surveyor and carried out in accordance with weld arm or palm which, measured from the point of the
procedures, by qualified welders, following the palm, is located at one third of the distance from the
parameters of the welding procedures used in
point of the palm to the centre of the anchor crown. With
construction.
stockless anchors, both arms are to be tested
simultaneously in both end positions. In the case of
5.6 Anchor assembly
stocked anchors, the test load is to be applied alter-
nately to each arm.
Assembly and fitting are to be done in accordance with

Table 10.1 Test loads for anchors (1)
Weight (2) Test load Weight (2) Test load Weight (2) Test load
[kg] [kN] [kg] [kN] [kg] [kN]
50 23.2 2200 376 7800 861
55 25.2 2300 388 8000 877
60 27.1 2400 401 8200 892
65 28.9 2500 414 8400 908
70 30.7 2600 427 8600 922
75 32.4 2700 438 8800 936
80 33.9 2800 450 9000 949
90 36.3 2900 462 9200 961
100 39.1 3000 474 9400 975
120 44.3 3100 484 9600 987
140 49.0 3200 495 9800 998
160 53.3 3300 506 10000 1010
180 57.4 3400 517 10500 1040
200 61.3 3500 528 11000 1070
225 65.8 3600 537 11500 1090
250 70.4 3700 547 12000 1110
275 74.9 3800 557 12500 1130
300 79.5 3900 567 13000 1160
325 84.1 4000 577 13500 1180
350 88.8 4100 586 14000 1210
375 93.4 4200 595 14500 1230
400 97.9 4300 604 15000 1260
425 103 4400 613 15500 1280
450 107 4500 622 16000 1300
475 112 4600 631 16500 1330
500 116 4700 638 17000 1360
550 124 4800 645 17500 1390
600 132 4900 653 18000 1410
650 140 5000 661 18500 1440
700 149 5100 669 19000 1470
750 158 5200 677 19500 1490
800 166 5300 685 20000 1520
850 175 5400 691 21000 1570
900 182 5500 699 22000 1620
950 191 5600 706 23000 1670
1000 199 5700 713 24000 1720
1050 208 5800 721 25000 1770
1100 216 5900 728 26000 1800
1150 224 6000 735 27000 1850
1200 231 6100 740 28000 1900
1250 239 6200 747 29000 1940
1300 247 6300 754 30000 1990
1350 255 6400 760 31000 2030
1400 262 6500 767 32000 2070
1450 270 6600 773 34000 2160
1500 278 6700 779 36000 2250
1600 292 6800 786 38000 2330
1700 307 6900 794 40000 2410
1800 321 7000 804 42000 2490
1900 335 7200 818 44000 2570
2000 349 7400 832 46000 2650
2100 362 7600 845 48000 2730
(1) Intermediate values can be determined by linear interpolation.
(2) In order to establish the test load of HHP anchors, SHHPanchors and mooring anchors, the weight stated in the table is to
be multiplied by the factors given in.6.2.4.

6.2.4 The following anchor weights are to be applied Table 10.3 Product test requirements for program
in establishing the test loads in accordance with Table A and B
10.1:
Program A Program B
- Stockless anchors: the total weight; Drop test -
- Stocked anchors: the weight without the stock; Hammering test -
- Anchors with high holding power (HHP): Visual inspection Visual inspection
a weight equal to 1.33 times the actual weight; General NDT General NDT
- Anchors with very high holding power SHHP - Extended NDT
(VHHP): a weight equal to 2.0 times the actual
weight of the anchor; 6.3.3 Hammering test
- Mooring anchors: weight equal to 1.33 times the
actual weight, unless specified otherwise. After a drop test, hammering tests are carried out on
each anchor fluke and shank, which is slung clear of the
6.2.5 After the load test, anchors are to be submitted ground, using a non-metallic sling, and hammered to
to the Surveyor for verification of their delivery condition. check the soundness of the component. A hammer of at
Verification comprises visual inspection according to least 3 kg mass is to be used.
6.3 as well as surface crack testing. In case of anchors
of composite construction the freedom of movement of 6.3.4 Visual inspection
the arms is to be demonstrated.
After proof loading visual inspection of all accessible
6.3 Product tests surfaces is to be carried out.
6.3.1 Product test programs 6.3.5 General non-destructive test
TL can request that either program A or program B be After proof loading general NDT is to be carried out as
applied (see Table 10.2 and 10.3). indicated in the Tables 10.4 and 10.5.
Table 10.2 Applicable programs for each product Table 10.4 General NDT for ordinary and HHP
form anchors
Location Method of NDT

Product form
Feeders of castings PT or MT
Product Fabricated/
Cast Forged Risers of castings PT or MT
test welded
components components
components Weld repairs PT or MT
Not Not Forged components Not required
Prog. A Applicable
applicable applicable
Fabrication welds PT or MT
Applicable
Prog. B Applicable Applicable
(1)
(1) Charpy V-notch impact tests are to be carried out to 6.3.6 Extended non-destructive test
demonstrate at least 27 J average at 0ºC.
After proof loading general NDT is to be carried out as

6.3.2 Drop test indicated in Table 10.6.
Each anchor fluke and shank is individually raised to a 6.3.7 Repair criteria
height of 4 m and dropped on to a steel slab without
fracturing. The steel slab is to be suitable to resist the If defects are detected by NDT, repairs are to be carried
impact of the dropped component. out in accordance with 5.5. For fracture and

unsoundness detected in a drop test or hammering test, 7. Marking

repairs are not permitted and the component is to be
rejected. Anchors which meet the requirements are to be
stamped on the shank and the fluke. The markings on
Table 10.5 General NDT for SHHP anchors the shank are to be approximately level with the fluke
tips. On the fluke, these markings are to be
Location Method of NDT approximately at a distance of two thirds from the tip of
Feeders of castings PT or MT and UT the bill to the centre line of the crown on the right hand
Risers of castings PT or MT and UT fluke looking from the crown towards the shank. The
All surfaces of castings PT or MT markings are to included:
Weld repairs PT or MT
- Mass of anchor
Forged components Not required
- Identification, e.g. test no or certification no.
Note:
TL- G 69 “Guidelines for NDT of marine steel casting” is - TL’s stamp
regarded as example of an acceptable standard for surface
and volumetric examination - Manufacturer’s mark
Additionally the unique cast identification is to be cast

Table 10.6 Extended NDT for ordinary, HHP and on the shank and the fluke.
SHHP anchors
8. Certification
Location Method of NDT
Feeders of castings PT or MT and UT Anchors which meet the requirements are to be certified
Risers of castings PT or MT and UT by TL at least with the following items:
All surfaces of castings PT or MT
Random areas of castings UT - Manufacturer’s name
Weld repairs PT or MT
Forged components Not required
- Type
Note:
- Mass
TL- G 69 “Guidelines for NDT of marine steel casting” is
regarded as example of an acceptable standard for surface and
- Fluke and shank identification numbers
volumetric examination.
- Grade of materials
6.4 Mass and dimensional inspection
- Proof test loads

Unless otherwise agreed, the verification of mass and
dimensions is the responsibility of the manufacturer.
- Heat treatment
The surveyor is only required to monitor this inspection.
The mass of the anchor is to exclude the mass of the
- Marking applied to anchor.
swivel, unless this is an integral component.
9. Painting
6.5 Retests
All types of anchor are not to be painted until all tests

Mechanical retests are permitted in accordance with the
and inspections have been completed.
requirements of Section 2.

10-8 Section 10 – Materials for Equipment B
B. Anchor Chain Cables and Accessories anchor chain cables and accessories may only be
supplied by manufacturers approved by TL.
TL approval is not required for grade TL-K1 steel bars.
1. 1 Scope
Material suppliers or chain cable manufacturers are to
These Rules apply to the materials, design, submit specifications for Grade 3 steel bars. These
manufacture and testing of stud link chain cables and specifications should contain all necessary details, such
accessories used for ships. Where, in exceptional as manufacturing procedure, deoxydation practice,
cases, studless short-linked chain cables are used with specified chemical composition, heat treatment and
TL's approval, they must comply with recognized
national or international standard. For connecting
components fixed to the anchor, A. is applicable.
2.3 Rolled steel bars
The requirements for chafing chain for Emergency

2.3.1 Condition of supply
Towing Arrangements (ETA) are given in the B.6
1.2 Chain cable grades Unless otherwise specified, the steel bars are to be
supplied in as rolled condition.
Depending on the nominal tensile strength of the steel
used to manufacture the chain cable, stud link chain cables 2.3.2 Chemical composition
are classified into the grades TL-K1, TL-K2 and TL-K3.
The chemical composition of the steel bars is to
1.3 Approval of chain cable manufacturers conform to the data in Table 10.7.
1.3.1 Anchor chain cables and accessories may only

Rolled steel bars are to be supplied with a certificate of
be manufactured by works approved by TL. For this
the manufacturer about the chemical composition of
purpose approval tests are to be carried out, the scope
each heat.
of which is to be agreed with TL.
2.3.3 Mechanical tests

1.3.2 Applications for approval are to be made to TL,
stating the method of manufacture used, the grades of
2.3.3.1 Mechanical tests representing the steel bars
materials, the nominal dimensions and, where
are normally to be carried out by the steel mill, and the
applicable, the material specification. A procedure test
results are to meet the requirements in Table 10.8. The
carried out on a high-strength chain cable may cover
test coupons are to be in a heat treatment condition
approval of lesser grades, provided that the material
equivalent to that of the finished chain cable and
type, method of manufacture and the nature of the heat
accessories.
treatment are the same.
2.3.3.2 For performance of the mechanical tests the

2. Materials
steel bars are to be sorted according to heats and
diameters into test units not exceeding 50 tons each.
2.1 Scope
From each test unit a test sample is to be taken for the

These Rules apply to rolled steels, forgings and cast
tests mentioned in 2.3.3.4 and 2.3.3.5. Prior to
steels for the manufacture of anchor chain cables and
sampling, the test samples must be subjected to the
accessories.
heat treatment provided for the finished chain cable.
2.2 Requirements for material manufacturers

Details of the heat treatment must be indicated by the
chain cable manufacturer.
2.2.1 All materials used for the manufacture of

B Section 10 – Materials for Equipment 10-9
2.3.3.3 Tensile and Charpy V-notch impact test individual value only may be below the specified average
specimens are to be taken from the test sample in the value provided it is not less than 70 % of that value.
longitudinal direction at a distance of 1/6 diameter from
the surface or as close as possible to this position, as 2.3.3.6 Re-test requirements for tensile tests are to be
shown in Figure 10.2. in accordance with Section 2 with the specimens taken
drom the same sample. Failure to meet the specified
requirements of either both additional tests will result in
rejection of the test unit represented unless it can be
clearly attributable to improper simulated heat treatment
(See 2.3.3.8).
2.3.3.7 Re-test requirements for charpy impact tests

are to be in accordance with Section 2. Specimens are
to be selected from the same sample. Failure to meet
the requirements will result in rejection of the test unit
represented unless it can be clearly attributable to
improper simulated heat treatment (See 2.3.3.8).
2.3.3.8 If failure to pass the tensile test or the Charpy

Figure 10.2 Sampling locations V-notch impact test is definitely attributable to improper
heat treatment of the test sample, a new test sample
2.3.3.4 For the tensile test, one specimen is to be may be taken from the same piece and reheat treated.
taken from each test unit and tested, all in accordance The complete test (both tensile and impact test) is to be
with Section 2. repeated, and the original results obtained may be
disregarded.
2.3.3.5 One set of longitudinal Charpy V-notch test
specimens is to be taken from each test unit and tested at 2.3.4 Dimensional tolerances
the temperature prescribed in Table 10.8, all in
accordance with Section 2. The specimen transverse axis The diameter and oval shape of rolled steels shall lie
is to be radial to the steel bar. The average value within the permitted dimensional tolerances shown in
obtained from one set of three impact specimens is to Table 10.9, unless otherwise agreed.
comply with the requirements given in Table 10.8. One
Table 10.7 Chemical composition of rolled steel bars
Chemical composition in maximum percent, unless specified

Grade
Altot (1)
C Si Mn P S
min.
TL-K1 0.20 0.15-0.35 min. 0.40 0.040 0.040 --
TL-K2 (2) 0.24 0.15-0.55 max. 1.60 0.035 0.035 0.020
TL-K3 (3) According to the approved specification
(1) Aluminium may be partly replaced by other grain refining elements.
(2) With TL approval, additional alloying constituents may be added
(3) To be killed and fine grain.

Table 10.8 Mechanical properties of chain cable materials
Charpy V-notch impact test

A5 Z
ReH Rm
2
Grade [N/mm ] Test KV (1)
2 [%] [%]
min. [N/mm ] temperature [J]
min. min.
[°C] Min.
TL-K1 -- 300-490 25 - -- -
TL-K2 295 490-690 22 - 0 27 (1)
TL-K3 410 min. 690 17 40 0 (2) 60

(-20) (35)
(1) The impact test of Grade TL-K2 materials may be waived, if the chain cable is to be supplied in a heat treated condition as
per Table 10.12.
(2) Testing is normally to be carried out at 0ºC.
Table 10.9 Permitted tolerances applicable to the diameter and oval shapes of rolled chain cable steel
Nominal diameter Diameter tolerance Oval shape (dmax.- dmin)

[mm] [mm] [mm]
Below 25 -0 +1.0 0.6
25 - 35 -0 +1.2 0.8
36 - 50 -0 +1.6 1.1
51 - 80 -0 +2.0 1.5
81 - 100 -0 +2.6 1.95
101 - 120 -0 +3.0 2.25
121 - 160 -0 +4.0 3.00
Table 10.10 Condition of supply of chain cables and accessories
Grade Chain cables Accessories
TL-K1 As welded or normalized Not applicable
TL-K2 As welded or normalized (1) Normalized
TL-K3 Normalized, normalized and tempered Normalized, normalized and tempered

or quenched and tempered or quenched and tempered
(1) Grade TL-K2 chain cables made by forgings or castings are to be supplied in the normalized condition.

2.3.5 Freedom from defects - Number of test specimens (where applicable).
The materials are to be free from internal and surface 2.4 Forged steels for chain cables and
defects which have more than an insignificant adverse accessories
effect on their proper working and use. Surface defects
may be removed by grinding provided that the permitted 2.4.1 General requirements
tolerances are not exceeded
Forgings intended for the manufacture of chain cables
2.3.6 Identification of material and accessories are to satisfy the requirements
specified in Section 5, unless otherwise prescribed
The manufacturers are to have an identification system below.
which enables the material to be traced back to its
manufacture.
2.4.2 Chemical composition
2.3.7 Marking
The chemical composition is to comply with the
specification approved by TL. The steel manufacturer
The steels shall be marked, as a minimum requirement,
must determine and certify the chemical composition of
with the manufacturer's symbol, the grade and an
every heat.
abbreviated designation for the heat. Steel bars up to 40
mm in diameter which are collected into bundles may be
2.4.3 Heat treatment
marked by means of a permanently attached tag.
The stock material may be supplied in the as-rolled

2.3.8 Material certification
condition. Finished forgings are to be properly heat
treated, i.e. normalized, normalized and tempered or
Bar material for Grade TL-K2 or TL-K3 is to be certified
quenched and tempered, whichever is specified for the
by TL. For each consignment manufacturers are to
relevant steel grade in Table 10.10.
forward to the surveyor a certificate containing at least
the following data:
2.5 Cast steels for chain cables and
accessories
- Manufacturer’s name and/or purchaser’s order
number,
2.5.1 General requirements
- Number and dimensions of bars and weight of

Steel castings intended for the manufacture of chain
consignment,
cables and accessories are to satisfy the requirements
specified in Section 6, unless otherwise prescribed
- Steel specification and chain grade,
below.
- Heat number,
2.5.2 Chemical composition
- Manufacturing procedure,
The chemical composition is to comply with the
specification approved by TL. The foundry must
- Chemical composition,
determine and certify the chemical composition of every
heat.
- Details of heat treatment of the test sample
(where applicable),
2.5.3 Heat treatment
- Results of mechanical tests (where applicable),

All steel castings are to be properly heat treated, i.e.
normalized, normalized and tempered or quenched and

tempered, whichever is specified for the relevant steel 3.2.2.2 Diameter measured at locations other than the
grade in Table 10.10. crown:
2.6 Material for studs The diameter is to have no negative tolerance. The plus
tolerance may be up to 5% of the nominal diameter. The
The studs of chain links are to be made of a type of approved manufacturer’s specification is applicable to
steel which correspond to the chain cable or of unal- the plus tolerance of the diameter at the flush-butt weld.
loyed rolled, forged or cast mild steels. The use of other
materials such as grey or nodular cast iron is not 3.2.2.3 The maximum allowable tolerance on
permitted. assembly measured over a length of 5 links may equal
+ 2.5%, but may not be negative (measured with the
3. Design and Manufacture of Chain Cables chain under tension after proof load test).
and Accessories
3.2.2.4 All other dimensions are subject to a
3.1 Design manufacturing tolerance of ± 2.5%, provided always that
all of the final link parts of the chain cable fit together
Chain cables must be designed according to a standard properly.
recognized by TL, such as ISO 1704. A length of chain
cable must comprise an odd number of links. Where 3.2.2.5 Studs must be located in the links centrally and
designs do not comply with this and where accessories at right angles to the sides of the link, although the
are of welded construction, drawings giving full details studs at each end of any length may also be located off-
of the design, the manufacturing process and heat centre to facilitate the insertion of the joining shackle.
treatment are to be submitted to TL for approval. The following tolerances are regarded as being inherent
in the method of manufacture and will not be objected to
3.2 Dimensions and dimensional tolerances provided that the stud fits snugly and its end lie
practically flush against the inside of the link.
3.2.1 The shape and proportion of links and
accessories must conform to a recognized standard, Maximum off-centre distance “X” :10% of the nominal
diameter d
such as ISO 1704 or the designs specially approved.
Maximum deviation “α” from the : 4º

3.2.2 The following tolerances are applicable to 90º - position
links:
The tolerances are to be measured in accordance with
3.2.2.1 Diameter measured at the crown (two Figure 10.3
measurements are to be taken at the same location;
one in the plane of the link –see dp in Figure 10.3- and 3.2.3 The following tolerances are applicable to
one perpendicular to the plane of the link): accessories:
up to 40 mm nominal diameter : - 1 mm Nominal diameter : + 5 %, - 0 %
over 40 up to 84 mm nominal diameter : - 2 mm Other dimansions : ± 2.5 %.
3.3 Manufacturing process

over 84 up to 122 mm nominal diameter : - 3 mm
3.3.1 Stud link chain cables should preferably be

over 122 mm nominal diameter : - 4 mm
manufactured by flush butt welding using Grade TL-K1,
TL-K2 or TL-K3 bar material. Manufacture of the links
The plus tolerance may be up to 5 % of the nominal
by drop forging or castings is permitted. On request,
diameter. The cross sectional area of the crown must
pressure butt welding may also be approved for
have no negative tolerance.

studless, Grade TL-K1 and TL-K2 chain cables, accessories are to be supplied in one of the conditions
provided that the nominal diameter of the chain cable specified in Table 10.10. The heat treatment is, in every
does not exceed 26 mm. case, to be performed before the proof load test, the
breaking load test, and all mechanical testing. The
mechanical properties of finished chain cables and
accessories are to be in accordance with Table 10.13.
3.6 Freedom from defects
3.6.1 All individual parts must have a clean surface

consistent with the method of manufacture and be free
from cracks, norches, inclusions and other defects
impairing the performance of the product. The flashes
produced by upsetting or drop forging must properly be
Figure 10.3 Manufacturing tolerances removed.
3.3.2 Accessories such as shackles, swivels and 3.6.2 Minor surface defects may be ground off so as
swivel shackles are to be forged or cast in steel of at to leave a gentle transition to the surrounding surface.
least Grade TL-K2. The welded construction of these Remote from the crown local grinding up to 5% of the
parts may also be approved. nominal link diameter may be permitted.
3.4 Welding of studs 4. Testing and Certification of Finished Chain

Cables
The welding of studs is to be in accordance with an
approved procedure subject to the following conditions:
4.1 Proof and breaking load tests
3.4.1 The studs must be of weldable steel (See B.

4.1.1 Finished chain cables are to be subjected to
2.6).
the proof load test and the breaking load test in the
presence of the surveyor, and shall not fracture or
3.4.2 The studs are to be welded at one end only,
exhibit cracking. Special attention is to be given to the
i.e. opposite to the weldment of the link. The stud ends
visual inspection of the flash-butt weld if present. For
must fit the inside of the link without appreciable gap.
this purpose, the chain cables must be free from paint
and anti-corrosion media.
3.4.3 The welds, preferably in the horizontal position,
are to be executed by qualified welders using suitable
welding consumables. 4.1.2 Each chain cable length (27.5 m) is to be
subjected to a loading test at the proof load appropriate
3.4.4 All welds must be carried out before the final to the particular chain cable as given by Table 10.11
heat treatment of the chain cable, and using an approved testing machine.
3.4.5 The welds must be free from defects liable to 4.1.3 For the breaking load test, one sample
impair the proper use of the chain. Under-cuts, end craters comprising at least of three links is to be taken from
and similar defects are, where necessary to be ground off. every four lengths or fraction of chain cables and tested
at the breaking loads given by Table 10.11. The
TL reserves the right to call for a procedure test for the breaking load is to be maintained for a minimum of 30
welding of chain studs. seconds. The links concerned shall be made in a single
manufacturing cycle together with the chain cable and
3.5 Heat treatment must be welded and heat treated together with it. Only
after this issue, they may be separated from the chain
According to the grade of steel, chain cables and cable in the presence of the surveyor.

Table 10.11 Proof and breaking loads for stud link chain cables
Chain Grade TL-K1 Grade TL-K2 Grade TL-K3

diameter Weight
[mm] Proof load Breaking load Proof load Breaking load Proof load Breaking load [kg/m] (1)
[kN] [kN] [kN] [kN] [kN] [kN]
11 35,8 51 51 71,7 71,7 102 -
12.5 46 65,7 65,7 92 92 132 3.40

14 57,9 82 82 116 116 165 4.30
16 75,5 107 107 150 150 216 5.60
17.5 89 127 127 179 179 256 6.70
19 105 150 150 211 211 301 7.90
20.5 123 175 175 244 244 349 9.2
22 140 200 200 280 280 401 10.6
24 167 237 237 332 332 476 12.6
26 194 278 278 389 389 556 14.8
28 225 321 321 449 449 642 17.2
30 257 368 368 514 514 735 19.7
32 291 417 417 583 583 833 22.4
34 328 468 468 655 655 937 25.3
36 366 523 523 732 732 1050 28.4
38 406 581 581 812 812 1160 31.6
40 448 640 640 896 896 1280 35.0
42 492 703 703 981 981 1400 38.6
44 538 769 769 1080 1080 1540 42.4
46 585 837 837 1170 1170 1680 46.3
48 635 908 908 1270 1270 1810 50.4
50 696 981 981 1370 1370 1960 54.8
52 739 1060 1060 1480 1480 2110 59.2
54 794 1140 1140 1590 1590 2270 63.8
56 851 1220 1220 1710 1710 2430 68.7
58 909 1290 1290 1810 1810 2600 73.6
60 969 1380 1380 1940 1940 2770 78.8
62 1030 1470 1470 2060 2060 2940 84.2
64 1100 1560 1560 2190 2190 3130 89.7
66 1160 1660 1660 2310 2310 3300 95.4
68 1230 1750 1750 2450 2450 3500 101.3
(1) For footnotes, see end of table.

Table 10.11 Proof and breaking loads for stud link chain cables (continued)
Grade TL-K1 Grade TL-K2 Grade TL-K3

Chain
diameter Breaking Weight
Proof load Breaking load Proof load Proof load Breaking load
[mm] load [kN] [kg/m] (1)
[kN] [kN] [kN] [kN]
[kN]
70 1290 1840 1840 2580 2580 3690 107.3
73 1390 1990 1990 2790 2790 3990 116.7

76 1500 2150 2150 3010 3010 4300 126.5
78 1580 2260 2260 3160 3160 4500 133.2
81 1690 2410 2410 3380 3380 4820 143.7
84 1800 2580 2580 3610 3610 5160 154.5
87 1920 2750 2750 3850 3850 5500 165.8
90 2050 2920 2920 4090 4090 5840 177.4
92 2130 3040 3040 4260 4260 6080 185.4
95 2260 3280 3280 4510 4510 6440 197.6
97 2340 3340 3340 4680 4680 6690 206.1
100 2470 3530 3530 4940 4940 7060 219.0
102 2560 3660 3660 5120 5120 7320 227.8
105 2700 3850 3850 5390 5390 7700 241.4
107 2790 3980 3980 5570 5570 7960 250.7
111 2970 4250 4250 5940 5940 8480 269.8
114 3110 4440 4440 6230 6230 8890 284.6
117 3260 4650 4650 6510 6510 9300 299.8
120 3400 4850 4850 6810 6810 9720 315.4
122 3500 5000 5000 7000 7000 9990 326.0
124 3600 5140 5140 7200 7200 10280 336.7

127 3750 5350 5350 7490 7490 10710 353.2
130 3900 5570 5570 7800 7800 11140 370.1
132 4000 5720 5720 8000 8000 11420 381.6
137 4260 6080 6080 8510 8510 12160 411.0

142 4520 6450 6450 9030 9030 12910 441.6
147 4790 6840 6840 9560 9560 13660 473.2

152 5050 7220 7220 10100 10100 14430 506.0
157 5320 7600 7600 10640 10640 15200 539.8
162 5590 7990 7990 11170 11170 15970 574.7
(1) Approximate weight data calculated according to the formula kg/m = 0.0219 · d2 (d in mm).

4.1.4 If the tensile loading capacity of the testing to be taken from every four lengths in accordance with
machine is insufficient to apply the breaking load for 4.3.2. For forged or cast chain cables where the batch
chain cables of larger diameter, another equivalent size is less than four lengths, the sampling frequency
testing method is to be agreed with TL. will be by heat and heat treatment charge. Mechanical
tests are to be carried out in the presence of the
4.1.5 Design and/or standard breaking loads BL surveyor. For the location of the test specimens see
and proof load PL [kN] of stud link chain cables are as 2.3.3.3 and Figure 10.2. Testing is to follow 2.3.3.4 and
follows: 2.3.3.5. Retesting is to follow 2.3.3.6 and 2.3.3.7.
4.3.2 An additional link (or where the links are small,

For grade K1 :
several links) for mechanical test specimen removal is
(are) to be provided in a length of chain cable not
BL1 = 9.80665 ⋅ 10 ⋅ [d (44-0.08d)] ; PL1 = 0.7 BL1
-3 2
containing the specimen for the breaking test. The

specimen link must be manufactured and heat treated
For Grade K2:
together with the length of chain cable.
BL2 = 1.4 BL1 ; PL2 = BL1

4.3.3 The mechanical properties must be in
accordance with the values indicated in Table 10.13.
For Grade K3:
4.4 Marking
BL3 = 2 BL1 ; PL3 = 1.4 BL1
Chain cables which have met the requirements are to

4.1.6 The test load values, rounded off from the
be stamped on both end links of each length of chain
loads in 4.1.5 above to be used for testing and
cable with the following identifying marks, see Fig. 10.4:
acceptance of chain cables, are given in Table 10.11.
- Grade of chain cable,

4.2 Retests
- Certificate number,
4.2.1 Should a breaking load test fail, a further test
specimen may be taken from the same length of chain
- Surveyor's stamp,
cable and tested. The test is to be considered
successful if the requirements are then satisfied.
- Month and year of test
If the retest fails, the length of chain cable concerned is

to be rejected. If the manufacturer so wishes, the
remaining three lengths belonging to the unit test quality
may then be individually subjected to test at the
breaking load. If one such test fails to meet the
requirements, the entire unit test quantity is rejected.
4.2.2 Should a proof load test fail, the defective

link(s) is (are) to be replaced. A local heat treatment to
Figure 10.4 Marking of chain cables
be carried out on the new link(s) and the proof load test
is to be repeated. In addition, an investigation is to be
4.5 Certification
made to identify the cause of the failure.
Chain cables which meet the requirements are to be

4.3 Mechanical tests on grade TL-K2 and TL-K3
certified by TL at least with the following items:
chain cable
- Manufacturer’s name,
4.3.1 For Grade TL-K2 and TL-K3 chain cables,
mechanical test specimens required in Table 10.12 are
- Grade,

- Chemical composition (including total

aluminium content), - Marks applied to chain,
- Nominal diameter/weight, - Length,
- Proof/break loads,
- Mechanical properties, where applicable.
- Heat treatment,
Table 10.12 Number of mechanical test specimens for finished chain cables and accessories
Number of test specimens

Grade Manufacturing Condition Tensile test for Charpy V-notch impact test
method of supply (1) base metal Base metal Weldment
AW
TL-K1 Flush-butt welded NR NR NR
N
AW 1 3 3
Flush-butt welded
TL-K2 N NR NR NR
Forged or cast N 1 3 (2) NA
N
Flush-butt welded NT 1 3 3
QT
TL-K3
N
Forged or cast NT 1 3 NA
QT
(1) AW= As welded, N=Normalized, NT=Normalized and tempered, QT=Quenched and tempered
(2) For chain cables, Charpy V-notch impact test is not required.
NR= Not required
NA= Not applicable
Table 10.13 Mechanical properties of finished chain cables and accessories
ReH A5 Z Charpy V-notch impact test

2 Rm
Grade N/mm 2 % % Test temp. Absorbed energy, J, min.
N/mm
min. min. min. ºC Base metal Weldment
1 NR NR NR NR NR NR NR
2 295 490-690 22 NR 0 27 27
3 410 690 min. 17 40 0 (1) 60 50
-20 35 27
(1) Testing is normally to be carried out at 0 º C.
NR= Not required.
5. Testing and Certification of Accessories provisions of 4.1, as appropriate.
5.1 Proof load test 5.2 Breaking load test
All accessories are to be subjected to the proof load test 5.2.1 From each manufacturing batch (same
at the proof load specified for the corresponding chain accessory type, grade, size and heat treatment charge,
given by Table 10.11 and in accordance with the

but not necessarily representative of each heat of steel originating from the same heat treatment charge and
or individual purchase order) of 25 units or less of the same heat of steel are to be combined into one test
detachable links, shackles, swivels, swivel shackles, unit. Mechanical tests are to be carried out in the
enlarged links, and end links, and from each presence of the surveyoe depending on the type and
manufacturing batch of 50 units or less of kenter
grade of material used. From each test unit, one tensile
shackles, one unit is to be subjected to the breaking
test specimen and three Charpy V-notch impact test
load test at the break load specified for the
specimens are to be taken in accordance with Table
corresponding chain given by Table 10.11 and in
10.12 and tested in accordance with Section 2. For the
accordance with the provisions of 4.1, as appropriate.
location of the test specimens see 2.3.3.3 and Figure
Parts tested in this way may not be put to further use. 10.2. Testing is to follow 2.3.3.4 and 2.3.3.5. Retesting
Enlarged links and end links need not be tested is to follow 2.3.3.6 and 2.3.3.7. Enlarged links and end
provided that they are manufactured and heat treated links need not be tested provided that they are
together with the chain cable. manufactured and heat treated together with the chain
cable.
5.2.2 TL may waive the breaking load test, if:
5.4 Marking
5.2.2.1 The breaking load has been demonstrated on
the occasion of the approval testing of parts of the same Accessories which meet the requirements are to be
design, and stamped as follows:
5.2.2.2 The mechanical properties of each - Chain cable grade,
manufacturing batch are proved, and

- Certificate number,
5.2.2.3 The parts are subjected to suitable non-

- Surveyor's stamp,
destructive testing.
- Month and year of test.

5.2.3 Notwithstanding the above, the accessories,
which have been successfully tested at the prescribed
5.5 Certification
breaking load appropriate to the chain, may be used in
service at the discretion of TL where the accessories
Chain accessories which meet the requirements are to
are manufactured with the following:
be certified by TL at least with the following items:
5.2.3.1 The material having higher strength

- Manufacturer’s name,
characteristics than those specified for the part in
question (e.g. Grade TL-K3 material for accessories for
- Grade,
Grade TL-K2 chain).
- Heat number,
5.2.3.2 Or alternatively, the same grade material as
the chain but with increased dimensions subject to the - Chemical composition (including total
successful procedure tests that such accessories are so aluminium content),
designed that the breaking strength is not less than 1.4
times the prescribed breaking load of the chain for - Nominal diameter/weight,
which they are intended.
- Proof/break loads,
5.3 Mechanical properties and tests
- Heat treatment,
Unless otherwise specified, the forging or casting must
at least comply with the mechanical properties given in - Marks applied to accessories,
Table 10.13, when properly heat treated. For test
sampling, forgings or castings of similar dimensions - Mechanical properties, where applicable.

6. Chafing Chains for Emergency Towing 6.4.2 The arrangement at the end connected to the
Arrangements strongpoint and the dimensions of the chafing chain are
determined by the type of emergency towing arrange-
6.1 Scope ment. The other end of the chafing chain is to be fitted
with a pear-shaped open link allowing connection to a
These requirements apply to the chafing chains for shackle corresponding to the type of emergency towing
chafing gear of two types of emergency towing arrangement and chain cable grade. A typical arrange-
arrangements (ETA) with specified working load of 1000 ment of this chain end is shown in Fig. 10.5.
kN (ETA 1000) and 2000 kN (ETA 2000).
6.4.3 The common link is to be of stud link type
Chafing chains other than those specified here can be grade TL-K2 or TL-K3.
used subject to special agreement with TL.
6.4.4 The chafing chain is to be able to withstand a

6.2 Approval of manufacturing
breaking load not less than twice the working load.
The chafing chain is to be manufactured by works

For each type of emergency towing arrangement, the
approved by TL (See B.18.1.3).
nominal diameter of common link for chafing chains is to
comply with the value indicated in Table 10.14.
6.3 Materials
The materials used for the manufacture of the chafing Table 10.14 Nominal diameter of common link
chain are to satisfy the requirements mentioned herein.
Nominal diameter of common link,
Type of
6.4 Design, manufacture, testing and d min.
ETA
certification of chafing chain Grade TL-K 2 Grade TL-K3
ETA 1000 62 mm 52 mm
6.4.1 The chafing chain is to be designed, manu-
ETA 2000 90 mm 76 mm
factured, tested and certified in accordance with the
requirements B.3 to B.5.
Figure 10.5 Typical outboard chafing chain end

10-20 Section 10 – Materials for Equipment C
C. Offshore Mooring Chains and Accessories 1.3 Approval of chain manufacturers
1. General Requirements 1.3.1 Offshore mooring chains are to be

manufactured only by works approved by TL. For this
1.1 Scope purpose approval tests are to be carried out, the scope
of which is to include proof and breaking load tests,
1.1.1 These rules apply to the materials, design, measurements and mechanical tests including fracture
manufacturing and testing of offshore mooring chains mechanics tests.
and accessories intended to be used for applications
such as; mooring of mobile offshore units, mooring of 1.3.2 Manufacturers are to submit for review and
floating production units, mooring of offshore loading approval the sequence of operations from receiving
systems and mooring of gravity based structures during inspection to shipment and details of the following
fabrication. manufacturing process:
1.1.2 Mooring equipment covered are common stud 1.3.2.1 Bar heating and bending including method,
and studless links, connecting common links (splice temperatures, temperature control and recording.
links), enlarged links, end links, detachable connecting
links (shackles), end shackles, subsea connectors, 1.3.2.2 Flash welding including current, force, time and
swivels and swivel shackles. dimensional variables as well as control and recording
of parameters, maintenance procedure and programme
1.1.3 Studless link chain is normally deployed only for welding machine.
once, being intended for long-term permanent mooring
systems with pre-determined design life. 1.3.2.3 Flash removal including method and inspection.
1.1.4 Requirements for chafing chain for single point 1.3.2.4 Stud insertion method, for stud link chain.
mooring arrangements are given in C.6
1.3.2.5 Heat treatment including furnace types, means
1.2 Chain grades of specifying, controlling and recording of temperature
and chain speed and allowable limits, quenching bath
1.2.1 Depending on the nominal tensile strength of and agitation, cooling method after exit.
the steels used for manufacture, chains are to
subdivided into five grades, i.e.: TL-R3, TL-R3S, TL-R4, 1.3.2.6 Proof and break loading including
TL-R4S and TL-R5. method/machine, means of horizontal support (if
applicable), method of measurement and recording.
1.2.2 Manufacturers propriety specifications for R4S
and R5 may vary subject to design conditions and the 1.3.2.7 Non-destructive examination procedures.
acceptance of TL.
1.3.2.8 The manufacturer’s surface quality
1.2.3 Each grade is to be individually approved. requirement of mooring components is to be submitted.
Approval for a higher grade does not constitute approval
of a lower grade. If it is demonstrated to the satisfaction 1.3.2.9 The manufacturer’s procedure for removing
of TL, that the higher and lower grades are produced to and replacing defective links without heat treatment of
the same manufacturing procedure using the same the entire chain.
chemistry and heat treatment, consideration will be
given to qualification of a lower grade by a higher. The 1.3.3 For initial approval CTOD (Crack Tip Opening
parameters applied during qualification are not to be Displacement) tests are to be carried out on the
modified during production. particular mooring grade of material. CTOD tests are to
be tested in accordance with a recognized

C Section 10 – Materials for Equipment 10-21
Standard such as BS 7448 Part 1 and BS EN ISO test pieces in hydrated environments. Reports indicating
15653:2010. The CTOD test piece is to be a standard 2 the results of experimental tests are to be submitted.
x 1 single edge notched bend piece, test location as
shown in Figure 10.6. The notch of the CTOD specimen 1.4 Approval of quality system at chain and
is to be located as close to the surface as accessory manufacturers
practicable.The minimum cross section of the test piece
shall be 50 x 25mm for chain diameters less than 120 Chain and accessory manufacturers are to have a
mm, and 80 x 40 mm for diameters 120 mm and above. documented and effective quality system approved by
CTOD specimens are to be taken from both the side of TL. The provision of such a quality system is required in
the link containing the weld and from the opposite side. addition to, and not in lieu of, the witnessing of tests by
Three links are to be selected for testing, a total of six a surveyor as specified in 2 to 5.
CTOD specimens. The tests are to be taken at minus
20ºC and the lowest CTOD of each set of 3 specimens 1.5 Approval of steel mills for rolled bars
shall meet the minimum values indicated below, Table
10.15 1.5.1 Bar materials intended for chain and
accessories are to be manufactured only by works
1.3.4 Calibration of furnaces shall be verified by approved by TL. The approval is limited to a nominated
measurement and recording of a calibration test piece supplier of bar material. If a chain manufacturer wishes
with dimensions equivalent to the maximum size of link to use material from a number of suppliers, separate
manufactured. The manufacturer shall submit a approval tests must be carried out for each supplier.
procedure for furnace temperature surveys which shall
include the following requirements: The temperature 1.5.2 Approval will be given only after successful
uniformity of furnaces is to be surveyed whenever testing of the completed chain. Each Grade is to be
approval of manufacturer is requested and at least individually approved. Approval for a higher grade does
annually during normal operating conditions. Furnaces not constitute approval of a lower grade. If it is
are to be checked by conveying a monitoring link demonstrated to the satisfaction of TL, that the higher
instrumented with two thermocouples through the and lower grades are produced to the same
furnaces at representative travel speed. One manufacturing procedure using the same chemistry and
thermocouple shall be attached to the surface of the heat treatment, consideration will be given to
straight part and one thermocouple shall be imbedded qualification of a lower grade by a higher. The
in a drilled hole located at the mid thickness position of parameters applied during qualification are not to be
the straight part of the calibration block. The time- modified during production.The approval will normally
temperature curves shall show that the temperatures be limited up to the maximum diameter equal to that of
throughout the cross section and the soaking times are the chain diameter tested. The rolling reduction ratio is
within specified limits as given in the heat treatment to be recorded and is to be at least 5:1 for TL-R3, TL-
procedure. R3S, TL-R4, TL-R4S and TL-R5. The rolling reduction
ratio used in production can be higher, but should not
1.3.5 For R4S and R5 chain and accessories, prior to be lower than that qualified.
approval, the manufacturer is to have undertaken
experimental tests or have relevant supporting data to 1.5.3 The steelmaker is to submit a specification of
develop the chain and accessory material. The tests and the chemical composition of the bar material, which
data may include: fatigue tests, hot ductility tests (no must be approved by TL and by the chain manufacturer.
internal flaws are to develop whilst bending in the link The steel maker is to confirm by analysis and testing
forming temperature range), welding parameter research, that the specification is met.For grades TL-R4, TL-R4S
heat treatment study, strain age resistance, temper and TL-R5 chain the steel shall contain a minimum of
embrittlement study, stress corrosion cracking (SCC) data 0.20 percent molybdenum.
and hydrogen embrittlement (HE) study, using slow strain

Figure 10.6 Location of CTOD test specimens for chain
Table 10.15.a Minimum CTOD test values for chain type
Chain Type R3 in mm R3S in mm R4 in mm R4S & R5 in mm
BM WM BM WM BM WM BM WM
Stud link 0.20 0.10 0.22 0.11 0.24 0.12 0.26 0.13
Studless 0.20 0.14 0.22 0.15 0.24 0.16 0.26 0.17
1.5.4 A heat treatment sensitivity study simulating processes and process controls is to be submitted to
chain production conditions is to be applied in order to TL. The scope of approval is to be agreed with TL. The
verify mechanical properties and establish limits for approval is to be limited to a nominated supplier of
temperature and time combinations. All test details and forged or cast material. If an accessory manufacturer
results are to be submitted to TL. wishes to use material from a number of suppliers, a
separate approval must be carried out for each supplier.
1.5.5 The bar manufacturer is to provide evidence
that the manufacturing process produces material that is 1.6.2 Approval will be given only after successful
resistant to strain ageing, temper embrittlement and for testing of the completed accessory. Approval for a higher
TL-R3S, TL-R4, TL-R4S and TL-R5, hydrogen grade does not constitute approval of a lower grade. If it
embrittlement. All test details and results are to be is demonstrated to the satisfaction of TL, that the higher
submitted to TL. and lower grades are produced to the same
manufacturing procedure using the same steel
1.6 Approval of forges and foundries for specification, supplier and heat treatment, consideration
accessories will be given to qualification of a lower grade by a
higher. The approval will normally be limited to the type of
1.6.1 Forges and foundries intending to supply accessory and the designated mooring grade of material
finished or semi-finished accessories are to be up to the maximum diameter or thickness equal to that of
approved by TL. A description of manufacturing the completed accessory used for qualification

unless otherwise agreed by TL. However for the Subsized specimens can be used subject to approval of
different accessories that have the same geometry, the TL. For circular geometries, the minimum cross section
tests for initial approval are to be carried out on the one of the test piece shall be 50 x 25mm for accessory
having the lowest reduction ratio. Qualification of diameters less than 120 mm, and 80 x 40 mm for
accessory pins to maximum diameters is also required. diameters 120mm and above. The notch of the CTOD
Individual accessories of complex geometries will be specimen is to be located as close to the surface as
subject to TL requirements. practicable. The tests are to be taken at minus 20º C
and the results submitted for review. The minimum
1.6.3 For forgings, forgings are to have wrought values of each set of three specimens are to at least
microstructure and the minimum reduction ratio is to be meet the requirements as indicated in table 10.15.b
3 to 1. The forging reduction ratio, used in the (same as that of the studless chain material shown in
qualification tests, from cast ingot/slab to forged table 10.15.a).
component is to be recorded. The forging reduction ratio
Table 10.15.b Minimum CTOD test values for
used in production can be higher, but should not be
accessories
lower than that qualified. The degree of upsetting during
qualification is to be recorded and maintained during TL-
TL-
Grade of TL-R3 TL-R4 R4S &
production. Heat cycling during forging and reheating is R3S in
Accessory in mm in mm TL-R5
mm
to be monitored by the manufacturer and recorded in in mm
the forging documentation. The manufacturer is to have CTOD 0.20 0.22 0.24 0.26
a maintenance procedure and schedule for dies and
tooling which shall be submitted to TL. The geometry of accessories can vary. Figure 10.7
shows the CTOD location for circular and rectangular
1.6.4 The forge or foundry is to submit a cross sections such as those of the D-shackle and
specification of the chemical composition of the forged accessories fabricated from rectangular sections. The
or cast material, which must be approved by TL. For orientation of the specimen shall consider the direction
grades TL-R4, TL-R4S and TL-R5 chain, the steel of the grain flow. Figure 10.7(b) shows two possible
should contain a minimum of 0.20 percent molybdenum. sampling positions for CTOD test specimens with notch
orientation for rectangular type accessories.
1.6.5 Forges and foundries are to provide evidence
that the manufacturing process produces material that is 1.6.7 Calibration of furnaces is to be verified by
resistant to strain ageing, temper embrittlement and for measurement and recording of a calibration test piece
TL-R4S and TL-R5 grades, hydrogen embrittlement. with dimensions equivalent to the maximum size of link
manufactured. Thermocouples are to be placed both on
A heat treatment sensitivity study simulating accessory
the surface and in a drilled hole located to the mid
production conditions is to be applied in order to verify
thickness position of the calibration block. The furnace
mechanical properties and establish limits for
dimensions shall be such as to allow the whole furnace
temperature and time combinations (Cooling after
charge to be uniformly heated to the necessary
tempering shall be appropriate to avoid temper
temperature. Temperature uniformity surveys of heat
embrittlement) All test details and results are to be
submitted to TL. treatment furnaces for forged and cast components
shall be carried out according to API Spec 6A/ISO
1.6.6 For initial approval CTOD tests are to be 10423 Annex M or ASTM A991. The initial survey shall
carried out on the particular mooring grade of material. be carried out with maximum charge (load) in the
Three CTOD tests are to be tested in accordance with a furnace. Subsequent surveys shall be carried out
recognized standard such as BS 7448 Part 1 and BS annually and may be carried out with no furnace charge.
EN ISO 15653:2010. For rectangular accessories, the
CTOD test piece is to be a standard 2 x 1 single edge The quench bath maximum temperature and the
notched bend specimen of thickness equal to full maximum heat treatment transfer times from furnace to
thickness of material to be tested. quench are to be established and documented. During

production the established quenching parameters are to accordance to ISO 643. Measurements for circular
be followed and records are to be maintained of bath sections are to be taken at 1/3 radius
temperatures and transfer times.
2.2.1.2 Steels for bars intended for TL-R4S and TL-R5
1.6.8 For TL-R4S and TL-R5 refer to additional chain is to be vacuum degassed. The austenitic grain
requirements in 1.3.5. size is to be 6 or finer in accordance with ASTM E112 or
equivalent grain size index in accordance to ISO 643.
1.7 Approval of quality system at accessory Measurements for circular sections are to be taken at
manufacturers
1/3 radius.
1.7.1 Refer to 1.4.

2.2.1.3 For TL-R4S and TL-R5 the following
information is to be supplied by the bar manufacturer to
2. Materials
the mooring chain manufacturer and the results
2.1 Scope included in the chain documentation:
These rules apply to rolled steels, forgings and castings - Each heat is to be examined for non-metallic
used for the manufacture of offshore mooring chain and inclusions. The level of micro inclusions is to
accessories. be quantified and assessed in accordance to
the national/international standards; to be sure
2.2 Rolled steel bars inclusion levels are acceptable for the final
product.
2.2.1 Steel manufacture
- A sample from each heat is to be macro etched

2.2.1.1 The steels are to be manufactured by basic
according to ASTM E381 or equivalent, to be
oxygen, electric furnace or such other process as may
sure there is no injurious segregation or
be specially approved. All steels are to be killed and fine
porosity.
grain treated. The austenitic grain size for TL-R3, TL-
R3S and TL-R4 is to be 6 or finer in accordance with
- Hardenability data, according to ASTM A255,
ASTM E112 or equivalent grain size index in
or equivalent, is to be supplied with each heat.
Figure 10.7 Location of CTOD test specimens: a) Circular type accessory and b) rectangular type accessory,
B corresponds to the thickness of material, the grain flow is considered in the longitudinal direction X

2.2.2 Chemical composition Z1 / Z2 ≥ 0.85
For acceptance tests, the chemical composition of ladle Where;

samples of each heat is to be determined by the
steelmaker and is to comply with the approved Z1 = reduction of area without baking
specification.
Z2 = reduction of area after baking.
If the requirement Z1 / Z2 ≥ 0.85 is not achieved, the bar
2.2.3.1 Bars of the same nominal diameter are to be material may be subjected to a hydrogen degassing
presented for test in batches of 50 tons or fraction treatment after agreement with TL. New tests are to be
thereof from the sane heat. Test specimens are to be performed after degassing.
taken from material heat treated in the same manner as
intended for the finished chain. 2.2.3.3 For all grades, one tensile and three Charpy V-
notch specimens are to be taken from each sample
2.2.3.2 Each heat of grade TL-R3S, TL-R4, TL-R4S selected. The test specimens are to be taken approx.
and TL-R5 is to be tested for hydrogen embrittlement. In One-third radius below the surface, as shown in Figure
case of continuous casting, test samples representing 10.8 and prepared in accordance with Section 2. The
both the beginning and the end of the charge are to be results of all tests are to be in accordance with the
taken. In case of ingot casting, test samples appropriate requirements of Table 10.16.
representing two different ingots are to be taken.
2.2.3.4 Re-test requirements for tensile and Charpy
2.2.3.2.1 Two tensile test specimens are to be taken impact tests are detailed in Section 2.
from the central region of bar material which has been
subjected to the heat treatment cycle intended to be 2.2.3.5 Failure to meet the requirements will result in
used in production. A specimen with a diameter of 20 rejection of the batch represented unless it can be clearly
mm is preferred (consideration will be given to a attributable to improper simulated heat treatment.
diameter of 14 mm).
2.2.4 Dimensional tolerances
2.2.3.2.2 One of the specimens is to be tested with a
maximum of 3 hours after machining (for a 14 mm The diameter and roundness is to be within the
diameter specimen, the time limit is 1½ hours). Where tolerances specified in Table 10.17, unless otherwise
this is not possible, the specimen is to be immediately agreed.
cooled to -60 ºC after machining and kept at that
temperature for a maximum period of 5 days.
2.2.3.2.3 The second specimen is to be tested after

baking at 250 ºC for 4 hours, alternatively 2 hours for 14
mm diameter specimen.
-1
2.2.3.2.4 A slow strain rate < 0.0003 s must be used
during the entire test, until fracture occurs (this is
approximately 10 minutes for the 20 mm diameter
specimen). Tensile strength, elongation and reduction of
area are to be reported.
2.2.3.2.5 The acceptance requirement for the test is: Figure 10.8 Sampling of steel bars, forgings and
castings

2.2.5 Non-destructive examination and repair All bars supplied in a machined (peeled) condition shall
be 100% visually inspected. TL may also require: 10%
2.2.5.1 Non-destructive examination is to be inspected with magnetic particle testing (MT) or eddy
performed in accordance with recognized standards current testing (ET) or Magnetic Leakage Flux Testing
such as those indicated below or equivalent. Non- (MLFT), for longitudinal imperfections. The maximum
destructive examination procedures, together with depth of peeling is to be agreed and documented in the
rejection/acceptance criteria are to be submitted to TL. approval of each supplier.
Magnetic particle testing (MT) of bars: 2.2.5.5 The frequency of NDT may be reduced at the
- ASTM E1444 and ISO 9934 discretion of TL provided it is verified by statistical
means that the required quality is consistently achieved.
Magnetic Leakage Flux Testing (MLFT)-JIS Z2319

2.2.5.6 Weld repair of bar is not permitted.
Eddy current testing (ET) of bars:
- ISO 15549
2.2.6 Marking
2.2.5.2 Manufacturers shall prepare written procedures

Each bar is to be stamped with the steel grade
for NDE. NDE personnel shall be qualified and certified
designation and the charge number (or a code
according to ISO 9712, ACCP or equivalent. Personnel
indicating the charge number) on one of the end
qualification to an employer or responsible agency
surfaces. Other marking methods may be accepted
based qualification scheme as SNT-TC-1A may be
subject to agreement.
accepted if the employer's written practice is reviewed
and found acceptable and the Level III is ASNT Level
2.3 Forged steel
III, ISO 9712 Level III or ACCP Professional Level III
and certified in the applicable method. NDE operators
2.3.1 Manufacture
shall be qualified to at least level II.
2.3.1.1 Forged steels used for the manufacture of

2.2.5.3 The manufacturer shall ensure that 100
accessories must be in compliance with approved
percent of bar material intended for either chain or
specifications and the submitted test reports approved
fittings is subjected to ultrasonic examination at an
by TL. Steel is to be manufactured by basic oxygen,
appropriate stage of the manufacture to procedures
electric furnace or such other process as may be
approved by TL and to the acceptance criteria required.
specially approved. All steel is to be killed and fine grain
The bars are to be free of pipe, cracks and flakes. If the
treated. The austenitic grain size for TL-R3, TL-R3S and
end length of the delivered bars is not subjected to UT
TL-R4 is to be 6 or finer in accordance with ASTM E112
then it must be agreed between the bar supplier and the
or equivalent grain size index in accordance to ISO 643.
chain manufacturer of what length of bar is to be
Measurements for circular sections are to be taken at
removed from the ends. The details are to be
1/3 radius. Measurements for non-circular sections are
documented in the approval of each bar supplier.
to be taken at 1/4t.
Phased array UT procedures may be applied, subject to
approval by TL.
2.3.1.2 Steel for forgings intended for TL-R4S and TL-
R5 chain is to be vacuum degassed. The austenitic
2.2.5.4 100 percent of bar material is to be examined
grain size is to be 6 or finer in accordance with ASTM
by magnetic particle (MT) or eddy current (ET) or
E112 or equivalent grain size index in accordance to
Magnetic Leakage Flux Testing (MLFT) methods. The
ISO 643. Measurements for circular sections are to be
bars are to be free of injurious surface imperfections
taken at 1/3 radius. Measurements for non-circular
such as seams, laps and rolled-in mill scales. Provided
sections are to be taken at 1/4t.
that their depth is not greater than 1 % of the bar
diameter, longitudinal discontinuities may be removed
2.3.1.3 For steel intended for TL-R4S and TL-R5
by grinding and blending to a smoothy contour.

accessoies the following information is to be supplied by 2.3.3 Heat treatment

the steel manufacturer to the mooring accessory
manufacturer and the results included in the accessory Finished forgings are to be properly heat treated in
documentation: compliance with specifications submitted and approved.
- Each heat is to be examined for non-metallic 2.3.4 Mechanical properties

inclusions. The level of micro inclusions is to
be quantified and assessed in accordance with The forgings must comply with the mechanical
the national/international standards; to be sure properties given in Table 10.16, when properly heat
inclusion levels are acceptable for the final treated.
product.
- A sample from each heat is to be macroetched
according to ASTM E381 or equivalent, to be 2.3.5.1 For test sampling, forgings of similar
sure there is no injurious segregation or dimensions (diameters do not differ by more than 25
porosity. mm) originating from the same heat treatment charge
and the same heat of steel are to be combined into one
- Hardenability data, according to ASTM A255, test
or equivalent, is to be supplied with each heat. unit. From each test unit one tensile and three impact
test specimens are to be taken and tested in
2.3.2 Chemical composition accordance with Section 2. For the location of the test
specimens see Figure 10.8.
See 2.2.2.
Table 10.16 Mechanical properties of offshore mooring chain and accessories
Charpy V-notch impact tests

Tensile Reduction
Yield stress Elongation Average
2 strength of area (3) Test Avg. energy
Grade N/mm 2 % energy
N/mm % temperature, flash weld J
min. (1) min. J
min. (1) min. º C (2) min.
min.
TL-R3 410 690 17 50 0 60 50

-20 40 30
TL-R3S 490 770 15 50 0 65 53

-20 45 33
TL-R4 580 860 12 50 -20 50 36
TL-R4S (4) 700 960 12 50 -20 56 40
TL-R5 (4) 760 1000 12 50 -20 58 42
(1) Aim value of yield to tensile ratio: 0.92 max.

(2) At the option of TL the impact test of grade TL-R3 and TL-R3S may be carried out at either 0ºC or -20 ºC.
(3) Reduction of area of cast steel is to be for grades TL-R3 and TL-R3S : min. 40 %, for TL-R4, TL-R4S and TL-R5: min. 35 %.
(4) Aim maximum hardness for TL-R4S is HB 330 and TL-R5 is HB 340.

Table 10.17 Dimensional tolerance of bar stock 2.3.5.2.5 The acceptance requirement for the test is:
Tolerance on Z1/Z2 ≥ 0.85

Nominal Tolerance on
roundness
diameter diameter where:
(dmax – dmin)
mm mm
mm
Z1 = Reduction of area without baking
Less than 25 -0 + 1.0 0.60
25-35 -0 + 1.2 0.80 Z2 = Reduction of area after baking

36-50 -0 + 1.6 1.10
51-80 -0 + 2.0 1.50 If the requirement Z1/Z2 ≥ 0.85 is not achieved, the bar
-0 + 2.6 material may be subjected to a hydrogen degassing
81-100 1.95
treatment after agreement with TL. New tests shall be
101-120 -0 + 3.0 2.25
performed after degassing.
121-160 -0 + 4.0 3.00
161-222 -0 + 5.0 4.00 2.3.6 Non-destructive examination and repair
2.3.6.1 Non-destructive examination is to be
2.3.5.2 Each heat of Grade TL-R3S, TL-R4, TL-R4S performed in accordance with recognized standards,
and TL-R5 is to be tested for hydrogen embrittlement. In such as those indicated below, or equivalent. The non-
case of continuous casting, test samples representing destructive examination procedures, together with
both the beginning and the end of the charge shall be rejection/acceptance criteria are to be submitted to TL.
taken. In case of ingot casting, test samples

representing two different ingots shall be taken. Magnetic particle testing (MT) of forgings:
- EN 10228-1, ASTM A275, using wet continuous
2.3.5.2.1 Two (2) tensile test specimens shall be taken magnetization technique
from the central region of forged material which has

been subjected to the heat treatment cycle intended to Ultrasonic testing (UT) of forgings:
be used in production. A specimen with a diameter of 20 - EN 10228-3, ASTM A388, ISO 13588
mm is preferred (consideration will be given to a

diameter of 14 mm). 2.3.6.2 Manufacturers shall prepare written
procedures for NDE. NDE personnel shall be qualified
2.3.5.2.2 One of the specimens is to be tested within a and certified according to ISO 9712, ACCP or
maximum of 3 hours after machining (for a 14 mm equivalent. Personnel qualification to an employer or
diameter specimen, the time limit is 1½ hours). Where responsible agency based qualification scheme as SNT-
this is not possible, the specimen is to be immediately TC-1A may be accepted if the employer's written
cooled to -60°C after machining and kept at that practice is reviewed and found acceptable and the Level
temperature for a maximum period of 5 days. III is ASNT Level III, ISO 9712 Level III or ACCP
Professional Level III and certified in the applicable
2.3.5.2.3 The second specimen is to be tested after
method. NDE operators shall be qualified to at least
baking at 250°C for 4 hours, alternatively 2 hours for 14
level II.
mm diameter specimen.
-1 2.3.6.3 The forgings are to be subjected to one

2.3.5.2.4 A slow strain rate < 0,0003 s must be used
hundred percent ultrasonic examination at an
during the entire test, until fracture occurs (This is
approximately 10 minutes for the 20 mm diameter appropriate stage of manufacture and in compliance
specimen). Tensile strength, elongation and reduction of with the standard submitted and approved.
area are to be reported.

2.3.6.4 Defects on non-machined surfaces may be - A sample from each heat is to be macro etched
removed by grinding to a depth of 5% of the nominal according to ASTM E381 or equivalent, to be
diameter. Grinding is not permitted on machined sure there is no injurious segregation or
surfaces, except for slight inspection grinding on plane porosity.
surfaces to a maximum depth of 0.8 mm in order to
investigate spurious indications. Welding repairs are not - Hardenability data, according to ASTM A255,
permitted. or equivalent, is to be supplied with each heat.
2.3.7 Marking 2.4.2 Chemical composition
Marking is to be similar to that specified in 2.2.6. See 2.2.2.
2.4 Cast steel 2.4.3 Heat treatment
2.4.1 Manufacture All castings are to be properly heat treated in

compliance with specifications submitted and approved.
2.4.1.1 Cast steels used for the manufacture of
accessories must be in compliance with approved 2.4.4 Mechanical properties
specifications and the submitted test reports approved
by TL. Steel is to be manufactured by basic oxygen, The castings must comply with the mechanical
electric furnace or such other process as may be properties given in Table 10.16. The acceptance
specially approved. All steel is to be killed and fine grain requirement for reduction of area is, however, reduced
treated. The austenitic grain size for TL-R3, TL-R3S and to 40% for grades TL-R3 and TL-R3S and 35% for
TL-R4 is to be 6 or finer in accordance with ASTM E112 grades TL-R4, TL-R4S and TL-R5.
or equivalent grain size index in accordance to ISO 643.
Measurements for circular sections are to be taken at 2.4.5 Mechanical tests
1/3 radius. Measurements for non-circular sections are
to be taken at 1/4t. For test sampling, castings of similar dimensions
originating from the same heat treatment charge and
2.4.1.2 Steel for casting intended for TL-R4S and TL- the same heat of steel are to be combined into one test
R5 accessories are to be vacuum degassed. The unit. From each test unit one tensile and three impact
austenitic grain size is to be 6 or finer in accordance test specimens are to be taken and tested. For the
with ASTM E112 or equivalent grain size index in location of the test specimens see Figure 10.8.
accordance to ISO 643. Measurements for circular
sections are to be taken at 1/3 radius. Measurements 2.4.6 Non-destructive examination and repair
for non-circular sections are to be taken at 1/4t.
2.4.6.1 Non-destructive examination is to be
2.4.1.3 For steel intended for TL-R4S and TL-R5 performed in accordance with recognized standards,
accessories the following information is to be obtained such as those indicated below, or equivalent. The non-
and the results included in the accessory destructive examination procedures, together with
documentation: rejection/acceptance criteria are to be submitted to TL.
- Each heat is to be examined for non-metallic Magnetic particle testing (MT) of castings:
inclusions. The level of micro inclusions is to - ASTM E709, using wet continuous magnetisation
be quantified and assessed in accordance to technique
the national/international standards; to be sure
inclusion levels are acceptable for the final Ultrasonic testing (UT) of castings:
product. - ASTM A609, ISO 13588

2.4.6.2 Manufacturers shall prepare written 2.4.6.9 All weld repairs shall be done by qualified
procedures for NDE. NDE personnel shall be qualified welders using qualified procedures. Welders shall be
and certified according to ISO 9712, ACCP or qualified according to ISO 9606, ASME IX, ASTM A488
equivalent. Personnel qualification to an employer or or equivalent. Procedures shall be qualified according to
responsible agency based qualification scheme as SNT- ISO 15614, ASME IX, ASTM A488 or equivalent with
TC-1A may be accepted if the employer's written the following additional requirements: Charpy V notch
practice is reviewed and found acceptable and the Level impact tests with notch locations in weld metal, fusion
III is ASNT Level III, ISO 9712 Level III or ACCP line and heat affected zone + 2 mm and + 5 mm from
Professional Level III and certified in the applicable fusion line, respectively. Test results shall meet the
method. NDE operators shall be qualified to at least requirements specified for the parent metal.
level II.
2.4.7 Marking
2.4.6.3 The castings are to be subjected to one
hundred percent ultrasonic examination in compliance See 2.3.7.
with the standard submitted and approved.
2.5 Materials for studs
2.4.6.4 Defects on non-machined surfaces may be
removed by grinding to a depth of 5% of the nominal Studs intended for stud link chain cable are to be made
diameter. Grinding is not permitted on machined of steel corresponding to that of the chain or in
surfaces, except for slight inspection grinding on plane compliance with specifications submitted and approved.
surfaces to a maximum depth of 0.8 mm in order to In general, the carbon content should not exceed 0.25
investigate spurious indications. percent if the studs are to be welded in place.
2.4.6.5 Where the repair entails removal of more than 3. Design and Manufacture
5% of the diameter or thickness, the defective area shall
be repaired by welding. The excavations shall be 3.1 Design
suitably shaped to allow good access for welding. The
resulting grooves shall be subsequently ground smooth 3.1.1 Drawings accompanied by design calculations,
and complete elimination of the defective material shall giving detailed design of chain and accessories made
be verified by NDE. by or supplied through the chain manufacturer are to be
submitted for approval. Typical designs are given in ISO
2.4.6.6 Weld repairs are classified as major or minor. 1704. For Studless chain the shape and proportions are
A weld repair is considered major when the depth of the to comply with the requirements of C. Other studless
groove prepared for welding exceeds 25% of the proportions are to be specially approved. It should be
diameter/thickness or 25 mm, whichever is smaller. All considered that new or non-Standard designs of chain,
other weld repairs are considered minor. shackles or fittings, may require a fatigue analysis and
possible performance, fatigue or corrosion fatigue
2.4.6.7 Major weld repairs require approval before the testing.
repair is commenced. Proposals for major repairs shall
be accompanied by sketches or photographs showing 3.1.2 In addition, for stud link chain, drawings
the extent and positions of the repairs. A grain refining showing the detailed design of the stud are to be
heat treatment shall be given to the whole casting prior submitted for information. The stud is to give an
to major repairs. A post weld heat treatment or repeat of impression in the chain link which is sufficiently deep to
original heat treatment of castings shall be carried out. secure the position of the stud, but the combined effect
of shape and depth of the impression is not to cause
2.4.6.8 Minor and major weld repairs must be recorded any harmful notch effect or stress concentration in the
on sketches or photographs showing the extent and chain link.
positions of the repairs.

3.1.3 Machining of Kenter shackles is to result in - Current as a function of time,

fillet radius min. 3 percent of nominal diameter.
- Hydraulic pressure.
3.2 Chain cable manufacturing process
3.2.4.2 The controls are to be checked at least every 4
3.2.1 General hours and records made.
3.2.1.1 Offshore mooring chains are to be 3.2.5 Heat treatment of chain cable
manufactured in continuous lengths by flash butt
welding and are to be heat treated in a continuous 3.2.5.1 Chain is to be austenitized, above the upper
furnace, batch heat treatment is not permitted, except in transformation temperature, at a combination of
special circumstances where short lengths of chain are temperature and time within the limits established.
delivered, such as chafing chain. See item 6.
3.2.5.2 When applicable, chain is to be tempered at a
3.2.1.2 The use of joining shackles to replace combination of temperature and time within the limits
defective links is subject to the written approval of the established. Cooling after tempering is to be appropriate
end purchaser in terms of the number and type to avoid temper embrittlement.
permitted. The use of connecting common links is
restricted to 3 links in each 100 m of chain. 3.2.5.3 Temperature and time or temperature and
chain speed is to be controlled and continuously
3.2.2 Chain cable manufacturing process records recorded.
Records of bar heating, flash welding and heat 3.2.5.4 Grain determination shall be made for the final
treatment are to be made available for inspection by the product. The austenitic grain size for TL-R3, TL-R3S,
surveyor. TL-R4, TL-R4S and TL-R5 is to be 6 or finer in
accordance with ASTM E112 or equivalent grain size
3.2.3 Bar heating index in accordance to ISO 643. Measurements for
circular sections are to be taken at surface, 1/3 radius
3.2.3.1 Bars for links shall be heated by electric and centre for the base material, HAZ and weld.
resistance, induction or in a furnace.
3.2.6 Mechanical properties
3.2.3.2 For electric resistance heating or induction
heating, the heating phase is to be controlled by an The mechanical properties of finished chain and
optical heat sensor. The controller is to be checked at accessories are to be in accordance with Table 10.16.
least once every 8 hours and records made. For the location of test specimens see Figures 10.7 and
10.8.
3.2.3.3 For furnace heating, the heat is to be
controlled and the temperature continuously recorded 3.2.7 Proof and breaking test loads
using thermocouples in close proximity to the bars. The
controls are to be checked at least once every 8 hours Chains and accessories are to withstand the proof and
and records made. break test loads given in Table 10.18.
3.2.4 Flash welding of chain cable 3.2.8 Freedom from defects
3.2.4.1 The following welding parameters are to be All chains are to have a workmanlike finish consistent
controlled during welding of each link: with the method of manufacture and be free from
defects. Each link is to be examined in accordance with
- Platen motion, item 4.5 using approved procedures.

Figure 10.9 Sampling of chain links
Table 10.18 Formulas for proof and break test loads, weight and length over 5 links
Test load, Grade TL-R3 Grade TL-R3S Grade TL-R4 Grade TL-R4S Grade TL-R5
in kN stud link stud link stud link stud link stud link
2 2 2 2 2
Proof 0.0148 d 0.0180 d 0.0216 d 0.0240 d 0.0251 d
(44-0.08 d) (44-0.08 d) (44-0.08 d) (44-0.08 d) (44-0.08 d)
2 2 2 2 2
Break 0.0223 d 0.0249 d 0.0274 d 0.0304 d 0.0320 d
(44-0.08 d) (44-0.08 d) (44-0.08 d) (44-0.08 d) (44-0.08 d)
Test load, Grade TL-R3 Grade TL-R3S Grade TL-R4 Grade TL-R4S Grade TL-R5
in kN studless studless studless studless studless
2 2 2 2 2
Proof 0.0148 d 0.0174 d 0.0192 d 0.0213 d 0.0223 d
(44-0.08 d) (44-0.08 d) (44-0.08 d) (44-0.08 d) (44-0.08 d)
2 2 2 2 2
Break 0.0223 d 0.0249 d 0.0274 d 0.0304 d 0.0320 d
(44-0.08 d) (44-0.08 d) (44-0.08 d) (44-0.08 d) (44-0.08 d)
Chain weight, 2
Stud link = 0.0219 d
in kg/m
Chain weight, Studless chain

in kg/m Weight calculations for each design are to be submitted
Pitch length Five link measure
Minimum 22 d
Maximum 22.55 d

3.2.9 Dimensions and dimensional tolerances manufacturing tolerance of ± 2.5 percednt, provided
always that all parts fit together properly.
3.2.9.1 The shape and proportion of links and
accessories must conform to ISO 1704 or the designs 3.2.9.1.5 The tolerances for stud link and studless
specially approved. common links are to be measured in accordance with
Figure 10.10.
3.2.9.2 The following tolerances are applicable to
links: 3.2.9.1.6 For stud link chains studs must be located in
the links centrally and at right angles to the sides of the
3.2.9.1.1 The negative tolerance on the nominal link. The following tolerances in Figure 10.10 are
diameter measured at the crown: acceptable provided that the stud fits snugly and its
ends lie flush against the inside of the link.
up to 40 mm nominal diameter : - 1 mm
over 40 up to 84 mm nominal dia. : - 2 mm 3.2.10 Stud link chain – welding of studs
over 84 up to 122 mm nominal dia. : - 3 mm
over 122 up to 152 mm nominal dia. : - 4 mm 3.2.10.1 A welded stud may be accepted for grade TL-
over 152 up to 184 mm nominal dia. : - 6 mm R3 and TL-R3S. Welding of studs in grades TL-R4, TL-
over 184 up to 222 mm nominal dia. : - 7.5 mm R4S and TL-R5 chain is not permitted unless specially
approved.
Note 1:
3.2.10.2 Where studs are welded into the links this is to
The cross sectional area at the crown must have no negative
be completed before the chain is heat treated.
tolerance. For diameters of 20 mm or greater, the plus
tolerance may be up to 5 percent of the nominal diameter.
3.2.10.3 The stud ends must be a good fit inside the link
For diameters less than 20 mm the plus tolerance is to be
and the weld is to be confined to the stud end opposite
agreed with TL at the time of approval. to the flash butt weld. The full periphery of the stud end
is to be welded unless otherwise approved.
Note 2:
The cross sectional area at the crown is to be calculated 3.2.10.4 Welding of studs both ends is not permitted
using the average of the diameters with negative tolerance unless specially approved.
and plus tolerance, measurements are to be taken from at

3.2.10.5 The welds are to be made by qualified welders
least 2 locations approximately 90 degrees apart.
using an approved procedure and low-hydrogen
3.2.9.1.2 Diameter measured at locations other than approved consumables.
the crown:
3.2.10.6 The size of the fillet weld is as a minimum to
The diameter is to have no negative tolerance. The plus be as per API Specification 2F.
tolerance may be up to 5 percent of the nominal
diameter except at the butt weld where it is to be in 3.2.10.7 The welds are to be of good quality and free
accordance to manufacturer’s specification, which is to from defects such as cracks, lack of fusion, gross
be agreed with TL. For diameters less than 20 mm, the porosity and undercuts exceeding 1 mm.
plus tolerance is to be agreed TL at the time of
approval. 3.2.10.8 All stud welds are to be visually examined. At
least 10 percent of all stud welds within each length of
3.2.9.1.3 The allowable manufacturing tolerance on a chain is to be examined by dye penetrant or magnetic
length of five links is + 2.5 percent, but may not be particles after proof testing. If cracks or lack of fusion
negative. are found, all stud welds in that length are to be
examined.
3.2.9.1.4 All other dimensions are subject to a

Stud link – The internal link radii (R) and external radii should be uniform
Nominal
Minus Plus
Designation (1) Description dimension of
tolerance tolerance
the link
a Link length 6d 0.15 d 0.15 d
b Link half length a*/2 0.1 d 0.1 d
c Link width 3.6 d 0.09 d 0.09 d
Stud angular
e 0 degrees 4 degrees 4 degrees
misalignment
R Inner radius 0.65 d 0 -
( 1). Dimension designation is shown in above figure
d= nominal diameter of chain, a* = actual link length
Studless – The internal link radii (R) and external radii should be uniform
Nominal
Minus Plus
Designation (1) Description dimension of
tolerance tolerance
the link
a Link length 6d 0.15 d 0.15 d
b Link width 3.35 d 0.09 d 0.09 d
R Inner radius 0.60 d 0 -
(1). Dimension designation is shown in above figure
d= nominal diameter of chain
Other dimension ratios are subject to special approval.
Figure 10.10 Stud link and studless common link, proportions dimensions and tolerances

3.2.11 Connecting common links (splice links) inspection the chain is to be free from scale, paint or
other coating and is to have a suitably prepared surface
3.2.11.1 Single links to substitute for test links or as per the applied NDE testing standard. The chain is to
defective links without the necessity for re-heat be sand-or shot blast to meet this requirement.
treatment of the whole length are to be made in
accordance with an approved procedure. Separate 4.2 Proof and break load tests
approvals are required for each grade of chain and the
tests are to be made on the maximum size of chain for 4.2.1 The entire length of chain is to withstand the
which approval is sought. proof load specified in Table 10.18 without fracture and
is not to crack in the flash weld. The load applied is not
to exceed the proof load by more than 10% when
3.2.11.2 Manufacture and heat treatment of connecting
stretching the chain. Where plastic straining is used to
common link is not to affect the properties of the
set studs, the applied load is not to be greater than that
adjoining links. The temperature reached by these links
qualified in approval tests.
is nowhere to exceed 250 ºC.
4.2.2 A break-test specimen consisting of at least 3

3.2.11.3 Each link is to be subjected to the appropriate links is to be either taken from the chain or produced at
proof load and non-destructive examination as detailed the same time and in the same manner as the chain.
in Table 10.18 and item 4.5. A second link is to be made The test frequency is to be based on tests at sampling
identical to the connecting common link, the link is to be intervals according to Table 10.19 provided that every
tested and inspected per item 4.4 and 4.5. cast is represented. Each specimen is to be capable of
withstanding the break load specified without fracture
3.2.11.4 Each connecting common link is to be marked and is not to crack in the flash weld. It is to be
either; on the stud for stud link chain or, on the outer considered acceptable if the specimen is loaded to the
straigth length on the side opposite the flash butt weld specified value and maintained at that load for 30
for studless chain. This marking is to be in accordance seconds.
with item 4.7 plus a unique number for the link. The
adjoining links are also to be marked on the studs or 4.2.3 For chain diameters over 100 mm, alternative
straigth length as above. break-test proposals to the above break-tests will be
considered whereby a one link specimen is used.
4. Testing and Inspection of Finished Chain Alternatives are to be approved by TL, every heat is to
be represented, the test frequency is to be in
4.1 General accordance with Table 10.19, and it is to be
demonstrated and proven that the alternative test
4.1.1 This item applies to but not is limited to represents an equivalent load application to the three
finished chain cables such as common stud and link test.
studless links, end links, enlarged end links and
connecting common links (splice links). 4.2.4 If the loading capacity of the testing machine is
insufficient, an alternative load testing machine is to be
4.1.2 All chain is to be subjected to proof load tests, used that does have sufficient capacity (e.g. two loading
sample break load tests and sample mechanical tests machines in parallel) provided the testing and
after final heat treatment in the presence of a syrveyor. calibration procedure are agreed with TL.
Where the manufacturer has a procedure to record
proof loads and the surveyor is satisfied with the 4.3 Dimensions and dimensional tolerances
adequacy of the recording system, the Surveyor needs
not to witness all proof load tests. The surveyor is to 4.3.1 After proof load testing measurements are to
satisfy himself that the testing machines are calibrated be taken on at least 5 percent of the links in accordance
and maintained in a satisfactory condition. Prior to with item 3.2.9.

Table 10.19 Frequency of break and mechanical weld. Three impact specimens are to be taken across
tests the flash weld with the notch centred in the middle.
Three impact specimens are to be taken across the
Nominal chain Maximum sampling unwelded side and three impact specimens are to be
diameter (mm) interval (m) taken from the bend region.
Min-48 91
49-60 110 4.4.2 The test frequency is to be based on tests at

sampling intervals according to Table 10.19 provided
61-73 131
that every cast is represented. Mechanical properties
74-85 152
are to be as specified in Table 10.16.
86-98 175
99-111 198 4.4.3 The frequency of impact testing in the bend

112-124 222 may be reduced at the discretion of TL provided it is
125-137 250 verified by statistical means that the required toughness
138-149 274 is consistently achieved.
150-162 297
4.4.4 Hardness tests are to be carried out on
163-175 322
finished chain. The frequency and locations are to be
176-186 346 agreed with TL. The recorded values are for information
187-198 370 only and used as an additional check to verify that the
199-210 395 heat treatment process has been stable during the
chain production.
211-222 420
4.5 Non-destructive examination after proof

4.3.2 The entire chain is to be checked for the
load testing
length, five links ar a time. By the five link check the first
five links are to be measured. From the next set of five
4.5.1 All surfaces of every link are to be visually
links, at least two links from the previous five links set
examined. Burrs, irregularities and rough edgesw are to
are to be included. This procedure is to be followed for
the entire chain length. The measurement are to be be contour ground. Links are to be free from mill
taken preferably while the chain is loaded to 5-10% of defects, surface cracks, dents and cuts, especially in
the minimum proof load. The tolerances for the 5 link the vicinity where gripped by clamping dies during flash
measurements are indicated in Table 10.18, any welding. Studs are to be securely fastened. Chain is to
deviations from the 5 link tolerances are to be agreed by be positioned in order to have good Access to all
the client and TL. The links held in the end blocks may surfaces. In order to allow optimal access to the surface
be excluded from this measurement. area it is recommended that chain be hung in the
vertical position, however access to inspect the interlink
4.3.3 Chain dimensions are to be recorded and the area may only be possible with the chain in the
information retained on file.
horizontal position.
4.4 Mechanical tests

4.5.2 Testing is to be performed in accordance with
a recognized Standard and the procedures, together
4.4.1 Links of samples detached from finished, heat with acceptance/rejection criteria are to be submitted to
treated chain are to be sectioned for determination of TL for review. Manufacturers shall prepare written
mechanical properties. A test unit is to consist of one procedures for NDE. NDE personnel shall be qualified
tensile and nine impact specimens. The tensile and certified according to ISO 9712, ACCP or
specimen is to be taken in the side opposite the flash equivalent. Personnel qualification to an employer or
responsible agency based qualification scheme as SNT-

TC-1A may be accepted if the employer's written Single probe technique has limitations as far as testing
practice is reviewed and found acceptable and the Level of the central region is concerned and the flash weld
III is ASNT Level III, ISO 9712 Level III or ACCP imperfections such as flat spots may have poor
Professional Level III and certified in the applicable reflectivity. Where it is deemed necessary, detectability
method. NDE operators shall be qualified to at least of imperfections may need to be carried out by using a
level II. tandem technique, TOFD or phased array.
4.5.3 Magnetic particles are to be employed to 4.5.5 Stud welds, if used, shall be visually inspected.
examine the flash welded area including the area The toes of the fillets shall have a smooth transition to
gripped by the clamping dies. Procedures are to be the link with no undercuts exceeding 1.0 mm.
submitted to TL for approval. Procedures and Additionally, at least 10% of the stud welds distributed
equipment in accordance with those approved are to be through the length shall be dye penetrant tested
used. Frequency of examination is to be every link. according to ASTM E1417 or magnetic particle tested
Additionally, 10% of links are to be tested on all according to ASTM E1444 or equivalent. Cracks, lack of
accessible surfaces. Link surfaces and the surface at fusion or gross porosity are not acceptable. If defects
the flash weld are to be free from cracks, lack of fusion are found, testing shall be extended to all stud welds in
and gross porosity. Testing shall be performed in that length.
accordance with ASTM E709 or another recognized
standard (e.g. ISO 9934) using wet continuous 4.6 Retest, rejection and repair criteria
fluorescent magnetization technique. Non fluorescent
techniques can be accepted in special cases where the 4.6.1 If the length over 5 links is short, the chain may
standard inspection procedures are impractical. be stretched by loading above the proof test load
specified provided that the applied load is not greater
Links shall be free from: than that approved and that only rabdom lengths of the
chain need stretching. If the length exceeds the
- Relevant linear indications exceeding 1.6 mm specified tolerance, the over length chain links are to be
in transverse direction cut out and item 4.6.2 shall apply.
- Relevant linear indications exceeding 3.2 mm 4.6.2 If single links are found to be defective or not
to meet other applicable requirements, defective links
in longitudinal direction
may be cut out and a connecting common link inserted
in their place. The individual heat treatment and
- Relevant non-linear indications exceeding 4.8
inspection procedure of connecting common links is
mm.
subject to TL’s approval. Other methods for repair are
subject to the written approval of TL and the end
4.5.4 Ultrasonics are to be employed to examine the
purchaser. Weld repair of chain is not permitted.
flash weld fusion. Procedures are to be submitted to TL
for approval. Procedures and equipment in accordance 4.6.3 If a crack, cut or defect in the flash weld is
with those approved are to be used. On-site calibration found by visual or magnetic particle examination, it is to
standards for chain configurations are to be approved. be ground down no more than 5% of the link diameter in
Frequency of examination is to be every link. The flash depth and streamlined to provide no sharp contours.
weld is to be free from defects causing ultrasonic back The final dimensions must still conform to the agreed
reflections equal to or greater than the calibration standard.
standard. The flash butt welds shall be ultrasonic tested
(UT) in accordance with ASTM E587 or another 4.6.4 If indications of interior of flash weld defects, in
reference to the accepted calibration standards are
recognized standard using single probe, angle-beam
detected during ultrasonis examination, 4.6.2 shall
shear waves in the range from 45 to 70°.
apply.

4.6.5 If link diameter, length, width and stud If the investigation identifies defects in the flash butt
alignment do not conform to the required dimensions, weld or a lower strength flash weld “a glue-weld” is
these are to be compared to the dimensions of 40 more found, additional NDT such as phased array UT is to be
links, 20 on each side of the affected link. If a single carried out to identify if other links are affected. A full
particular dimensions fails to meet the required assessment of the flash butt welding machine is to be
dimensional tolerance in more than 2 of the sample carried out, together with assessment of the condition of
links all links are to be examined. Item 4.6.2 shall apply. the bar ends prior to welding.
4.6.6 If a break load test fails, a thorough 4.6.9 Re-test requirements for tensile tests are to be
examination with the surveyor informed in a timely in accordance with Section 2. Failure to meet the
manner is to be carried out to identify the cause of specified requirements of either or both additional tests
failure. Two additional break test specimens will result in rejection of the sampling length of chain
representing the same sampling length of chain are to represented and item 4.6.2 shall apply.
be subjected to the break load test. Based upon
satisfactory results of the additional tests and the results 4.6.10 Re-test requirements for Charpy impact tests
of the failure investigation, it will be decided what are to be in accordance with Section 2. Failure to meet
lengths of chain can be accepted. Failure of either or the requirements will result in rejection of the sampling
both additional tests will result in rejection of the length represented and item 4.6.2 shall apply.
sampling length of chain represented and item 4.6.2
shall apply. 4.7 Marking
4.6.7 If a link fails during proof load testing, a 4.7.1 The chain is to be marked at the following
thorough examination with the surveyor informed in a places:
timely manner is to be carried out to identify the
probable cause of failure of the proof test. In the event - At each end.
that two or more links in the proof loaded length fail, that
section of proof loaded length is to be rejected. The - At intervals not exceeding 100 m.
above failure investigation is to be carried out especially
with regard to the presence in other lengths of factors or - On connecting common links.
conditions thought to be causal to failure.
- On links next to shackles or connecting
4.6.8 In addition to the above failure investigation, a common links.
break test specimen is to be taken from each side of the
one failed link, and subjected to the breaking test. 4.7.2 All marked links are to be stated on the
Where multiple chains are produced simultaneously it is certificate, and the marking is to make it possible to
recognised that the preceding flash butt welded link and recognize leading and tail end of the chain. In addition
subsequent flash butt welded link will be on an to the above required marking, the first and last
alternative chain length or the other end of the chain common link of each individual charge used in the
length. In such cases the TL may require that two continuous length is to be traceable and adequately
additional break tests are to be taken from the lengths marked.
of chain that include the preceding and subsequent The marking is to be permanent and legible throughout
welded links. Based upon satisfactory results of both the expected lifetime of the chain.
break tests and the results of the failure investigation, it
will be decided what length of chain can be considered 4.7.3 The chain is to be marked on the studs as
for acceptance. follows:
Failure of either or both breaking tests will result in - Chain grade

rejection of the same proof loaded length. Replacement
of defective links is to be in accordance with item 4.6.2. - Certificate no.

- TL’s stamp. satisfied with the adequacy of the recording system, he

need not witness all proof load tests. The surveyor is to
4.7.4 The certificate number may be exchanged satisfy himself that the testing machines are calibrated
against an abbreviation or equivalent. If so, this is to be and maintained in a satisfactory condition.
stated in the certificate.
Prior to testing and inspection the chain accessories are
4.7.5 The chain certificate is to contain information to be free from scale, paint or other coating.
on number and location of connecting common links.
The certificate number and replacement link number 5.1.3 For accessory production a Manufacturing
may be exchanged against an abbreviation or Procedure Specification (MPS) is to be submitted to TL
equivalent. If so, this is to be stated in the certificate. that details all critical aspects of accessory production,
casting, forging, heat treating (including arrangement
4.8 Documentation and spacing of components in the heat treatment
furnaces), quenching, mechanical testing, proof and
4.8.1 A complete chain inspection and testing report break loading and NDE.
in booklet form are to be provided by the chain
manufacturer for each continuous chain length. This 5.2 Proof and break load tests
booklet is to include all dimensional checks, test and
inspection reports, NDT reports, process records, 5.2.1 All accessories are to be subjected to the proof
photographs as well as any nonconformity, corrective load specified for the corresponding stud link chain.
action and repair work.
5.2.2 Chain accessories are to be tested ar the
4.8.2 Individual certificates are to be issued for each break load prescribed for the grade and size pf chain for
continuous single length of chain. which they are intended. At least one accessory out of
every batch or every 25 accessories, whichever is less,
4.8.3 All accompanying documents, appendices and is to be tested.
reports are to carry reference to the original certificate
number. 5.2.2.1 For individual produced, individual heat
treated, accessories or accessories produced in small
4.8.4 The manufacturer will be responsible for batches (less than 5), alternative testing will be subject
storing, in a safe and retrievable manner, all to special consideration. Alternative testing is to be
documentation produced for a period of at least 10 approved by TL and the following additional conditions
years. may apply.
5. Testing and inspection of accessories (a) Alternative testing is described in a written

procedure and manufacturing procedure specification
5.1 General (MPS).
5.1.1 This item applies to but is not limited to (b) A finite element analysis is provided at the break
mooring equipment accessories such as detachable load and demonstrates that the accessory has a safety
connecting links (shackles), detachable connecting margin over and above the break load of the chain.
plates (triplates), end shackles, swivels and swivel
shackles and subsea connectors. (c) Strain age testing (as per approved procedure by
TL) is carried out on the material grade produced to the
5.1.2 All accessories are to be subjected to proof same parameters at the time of qualification.
load tests, sample break load tests and sample
mechanical tests after final heat treatment in the (d) If an accessory is of a large size that will make heat
presence of a surveyor. Where the manufacturer has a treating in batches unfeasible or has a unique design,
procedure to record proof loads and the surveyor is strain gauges are to be applied during the proof and

break load tests during initial qualification and during These tolerances do not apply to machined surfaces.
production. The strain gauge results from production are
to be comparable with the results from qualification. 5.4 Mechanical tests
5.2.3 A batch is defined as accessories that originate 5.4.1 Accessories are to be subjected to mechanical
from the same heat treatment charge and the same testing as described in item 2.3 and 2.4. Mechanical
heat of steel.Reference section 2.3 and 2.4 tests are to be taken from proof loaded full size
accessories that have been heat treated with the
5.2.4 The accessories which have been subjected to production accessories they represent. At least one
the break load test are to be destroyed and not used as accessory out of every batch or every 25 accessories,
part of an outfit, with the exceptions given in 5.2.5. whichever is less, is to be tested. Hardness tests are to
be carried out on finished accessories. The frequency
5.2.5 Where the accessories are of increased and locations are to be agreed with TL. The recorded
dimension or alternatively a material with higher values are for information only and used as an
strength characteristics is used, they may be included in additional check to verify that the heat treatment
the outfit at the discretion of TL, provided that : process has been stable during the accessory
production.
5.2.5.1 The accessories are successfully tested at the
prescribed breaking load appropriate to the chain for The use of separate representative coupons is not
which they are intended, and permitted except as indicated in 5.4.5 below.
5.2.5.2 It is verified by precedure tests that such 5.4.2 Forged shackle bodies and forged Kenter
accessories are so designed that the breaking strength shackles are to have a set of three impact tests and a
is not less than 1.4 times the prescribed breaking load tensile test taken from the crown of the shackle.
of the chain for which they are intended.
Tensile test on smaller diameter shackles can be taken
5.2.5.3 Strain age properties have been carried out on from the straight part of shackle, where the geometry
the material grade produced to the same parameters. does not permit a tensile specimen from the crown.
5.2.5.4 Strain gauges are to be applied during the The tensile properties and impact values are to meet
break load test in the high stress locations to monitor the requirements of Table 10.16 in the locations
that the strains stay within allowable limits specified in Figure 10.8, with the Charpy pieces on the
outside radius.
5.3 Dimensions and dimensional tolerances
5.4.3 The locations of mechanical tests of cast
5.3.1 At least one accessory (of the same type, size shackles and cast Kenter shackles can be taken from
and nominal strength) out of 25 is to be checked for the straight part of the accessory. The tensile properties
dimensions after proof load testing. The manufacturer is and impact values are to meet the requirements of
to provide a statement indicating compliance with the Table 10.16 in the locations specified in Figure 10.8.
purchaser’s requirements.
5.4.4 The locations of mechanical tests of other
5.3.2 The following tolerances are applicable to accessories with complex geometries are to be agreed
accessories: with TL.
- Nominal diameter : + 5 %, -0 % For non-circular sections, 1/4t (thickness) from the

surface is considered appropriate.
- Other dimensions : ± 2 ½ %
Rolled plates are to be tested to the Standard to which
they are produced.

5.4.5 For individually produced (heat treated) 5.5 Non-destructive examination after proof
accessories or accessories produced in small batches load testing
(less than 5), alternative testing can be proposed to TL.
Each proposal for alternative testing is to be detailed by 5.5.1 All chain accessories are to be subjected to a
the manufacturer in a written procedure and submitted close visual examination. Special attention is to be paid
to TL and the following additional conditions may apply: to machined surfaces and high stress regions. Prior to
inspection, chain accessories are to have a suitably
5.4.5.1 If separately forged or cast coupons are used, prepared surface as per the applied NDE testing
they are to have a cross-section and, for forged coupon, standard. All non-machined surfaces are to be sand or
a reduction ratio similar to that of the accessories shot blasted to permit a thorough examination. Where
represented, and are to be heat treated in the same applicable, accessories shall be dismantled for
furnace and quenched in the same tank at the same inspection of internal surfaces. All accessories are to be
time, as the actual forgings or castings. Thermocouples checked by magnetic particles or dye penetrant. UT of
are to be attached to the coupon and to the accessories may be required by TL. The acceptance
accessories. /rejection criteria of UT established for the design is to
be met.
5.4.5.2 If separately forged or cast coupons are
agreed, it is to be verified by procedure test that coupon 5.5.2 Testing is to be performed in accordance with
properties are representative of accessory properties. a recognized Standard such as those indicated below,
or equivalent. The procedures, together with
5.4.6 A batch is defined as accessories that originate acceptance/rejection criteria are to be submitted to TL
from the same heat treatment charge and the same for review. Manufacturers shall prepare written
heat of steel. Reference sections 2.3 and 2.4. procedures for NDE. NDE personnel shall be qualified
and certified according to ISO 9712, ACCP or
5.4.7 Mechanical tests of pins are to be taken as per equivalent. Personnel qualification to an employer or
Figure 10.8 from the mid length of a sacrificial pin of the responsible agency based qualification scheme as SNT-
same diameter as the final pin. For oval pins the TC-1A may be accepted if the employer's written
diameter taken is to represent the smaller dimension. practice is reviewed and found acceptable and the Level
Mechanical tests may be taken from an extended pin of III is ASNT Level III, ISO 9712 Level III or ACCP
the same diameter as the final pin that incorporates a Professional Level III and certified in the applicable
test prolongation and a heat treatment buffer method. NDE operators shall be qualified to at least
prolongation, where equivalence with mid length test level II.
values have been established.
Magnetic particle testing (MT) of forgings:
The length of the buffer is to be at least equal to 1 pin - EN 10228-1, ASTM A275, using wet continuous
diameter dimension which is removed after the heat magnetization technique or equivalent standards such
treatment cycle is finished. The test coupon can then be as ISO 4986, TL- G 69
removed from the pin.
Ultrasonic testing (UT) of forgings:
The buffer and test are to come from the same end of - EN 10228-3, ASTM A388, ISO 13588
the pin as per Figure 10.11.
Magnetic particle testing (MT) of castings:
Pin Test Buffer - ASTM E709, using wet continuous magnetization
technique
Ultrasonic testing (UT) of castings:

- ASTM A609, ISO 13588
Figure 10.11 Buffer and test piece location

All surfaces shall be magnetic particle tested (MT). 5.8 Documentation

Testing shall be performed in accordance with
standards referenced using the fluorescent technique. 5.8.1 A complete inspection and testing report in
As a minimum surfaces shall be free from: booklet form is to be provided by the manufacturer for
each order. This booklet is to include all dimensional
- Relevant linear indications exceeding 1.6 mm checks, test and inspection reports, NDT reports,
in transverse direction process records and example photographs of
components positioned in furnaces, as well as any
- Relevant linear indications exceeding 3.2 mm nonconformity, corrective action and repair work.
in longitudinal direction
5.8.2 Each type of accessory is to be covered by
- Relevant non-linear indications exceeding 4.8 separate certificates.
mm.
5.8.3 All accompanying documents, appendices and
When required by TL, ultrasonic testing is to be carried reports are to carry reference to the original certificate
out on 100% of cast or forged accessories. The number.
acceptance/rejection criteria established for the design
is to be met. 5.8.4 The manufacturer will be responsible for
storing, in a safe and retrievable manner, all
5.5.3 The manufacturer is to provide a statement documentation produced for a period of at least 10
that non-destructive examination has been carried out years.
with satisfactory results. This statement should include
a brief reference to the techniques and to the operator’s 6. Chafing Chain for Single Point Mooring
qualification. Arrangements
5.5.4 Weld repairs of finished accessories are not 6.1 Scope

permitted.
These requirements apply to short lengths
5.6 Test failures (approximately 8 m) of 76 mm diameter chain to be
connected to hawsers for the tethering of oil carriers to
In the event of a failure of any test the entire barch single point moorings, FPSO’s and and similar uses.
represented is to be rejected unless the cause of failure
has been determined and it can be demonstrated to the 6.2 The chafing chain is to be manu to factured by
surveyor’s satisfaction that the condition causing the works approved by TL according to C. 1.3
failure is not present in any of the remaining
accessories. 6.3 Materials
5.7 Marking The materials used for the manufacture of the chafing
chain are to satisfy the requirements of C.2
5.7.1 Each accessory is to be marked as follows:
6.4 Design, Manufacturing, Testing and
- Chain grade Certification
5.7.2 The certificate number may be exchanged 6.4.1 The chafing chain is to be designed,
against an abbreviation or equivalent. If so, this is to be manufactured, tested and certified in accordance with
stated in the certificate. C.3, C.4 and C .5, except that batch heat treatment is
permitted.

C, D Section 10 – Materials for Equipment 10-43
6.4.2 The arrangement of the end connections is to - Type, composition and strengths of the ropes
be of an approved type. concerned,
6.4.3 The common link is to be of stud link type – - Manufacturing facilities,

Grade TL-R3 or TL-R4.
- Testing equipment: copies of the last
6.4.4 The chafing chain is to be capable of calibration reports on the testing machines are
withstanding the breaking test loads of 4884 kN (Grade to be attached
TL-R3) and 6001 kN (Grade TL-R4)(Documented
evidence of satisfactory testing of similar diameter By a works inspection, the manufacturer is to demon-
mooring chain in the prior 6 month period may be used strate the availability of the equipment required for the
in lieu of break testing subjecy to agreement TL). proper manufacture and testing of wire ropes. TL
reserves the right to call for a preliminary test of suit-
6.4.5 The chain lengths are to be proof load tested in ability to be carried out on samples of the rope.
accordance with item 4.2. The test load for Grade TL-
R3 is 3242 kN and for Grade TL-R4 is 4731 kN. 2.3 If the wire rope manufacturer wishes to be
approved by TL for the independent testing of wire ropes,
Note 1: this is also to be applied for. TL will allocate to the
Documented evidence of satisfactory testing of similar manufacturer a special identification number if the
diameter mooring chain in the prior 6 month period may be conditions for approval stated in 2.1 and 2.2 are satisfied.
used in lieu of break testing subject to agreement with TL.
3. Manufacture
Note 2:
The requirements herein are also applicable to other 3.1 The ropes are to conform to recognized
diameter chafing chains, such as 84 mm and 96 mm, subject national or international standards and should, wherever
to compliance with the proof and break load requirements possible, comply with Table 10.20. Ropes of a different
specified for the chain grade and diameters in Table 10.18. construction and ropes with high nominal breaking
2
strengths, e.g. 1960 N/mm , or containing austenitic
stainless steel wires may be approved on application
D. Wire Ropes provided that they are suitable for the proposed
application.
1. Scope
3.2 With the exception of wire ropes made of
These Rules apply to wire ropes for use as hawsers austenitic stainless steel wires, wire ropes are normally
(towlines, mooring lines) and as standing and running to be manufactured from individually galvanized wires.
rigging for cargo handling gear and other lifting tackle
on board sea-going vessels. The use of ungalvanized wires requires the special
consent of TL.
2. Requirements to be Met by the Manufac-
turers of Wire Ropes 4. Requirements Applied to Wire Ropes
2.1 With regard to their production and quality 4.1 Nominal breaking strength
control, wire rope manufacturers are to meet the re-
quirements stated in Section 1, B. and are to be Wire ropes are to have the nominal breaking strengths
2
approved by TL. of 1570 and 1770 N/mm specified in Table 10.20.
These values are not to be exceeded by more than the
- 2.2 Applications for approval are to be values shown in Table 10.21.
submitted to TL in writing with a description
containing at least the following details:

10-44 Section 10 – Materials for Equipment D
Table 10.20 Usual types of wires approved by TL
Structure of rope
Nominal
Number Construction of breaking Galvanizing
Use Number Type of
of wires strands strength method
of rope
per [N/mm ]
2
strands core
strand
1570
Standing 6 7 1 fibre or
Standard and Fully galvanized
rigging 6 19 (1) steel core
1770
6 19 1 fibre
6 37 core
Standard
Hawsers
6 24 (7 fibre Seale or
(towlines, 1570 Fully galvanized
cores) Warrington.
mooring lines)
6 19
6 36 1 steel Warrington-Seale
core
} 1 fibre or
6 36 Warrington-Seale 1570
steel core
Running Normally
6 37 Standard and
rigging galvanized
7 fibre
6 24 Standard 1770
cores
(1) This rope may also be used as a single reeved span rope not moved under load.
Table 10.21 Positive tolerances for nominal Table 10.22 Zinc coatings
breaking strengths
Minimum mass per unit area
Nominal wire 2
of zinc coating g/m for type
Nominal wire diameter Limiting deviations diameter
2 d [mm] Normally Fully
d [mm] [N/mm ] galvanized Galvanized
0.20 up to < 0.50 +390 0.2 up to < 0.25 15 -
0.50 up to < 1.00 +350 0.25 up to < 0.4 20 -

0.4 up to < 0.5 30 75
1.00 up to < 1.50 +320
0.5 up to < 0.6 40 90
1.50 up to < 2.00 +290
0.6 up to < 0.7 50 110
2.00 up to ≤ 6.00 +260
0.7 up to < 0.8 60 120
0.8 up to < 1.0 70 130
4.2 Ductility
1.0 up to < 1.2 80 150
Individual wires are to possess sufficient ductility, 1.2 up to < 1.5 90 165
measured by their ability to withstand a fixed number of 1.5 up to < 1.9 100 180
reverse bends and/or twists without starting to crack. 1.9 up to < 2.5 110 205
These requirements are regarded as fulfilled if the
2.5 up to < 3.2 125 230
values specified in EN 10264, or in an equivalent
3.2 up to < 3.7 135 250
standard recognized by TL are achieved.
3.7 up to < 4.0 135 260
4.3 Tolerance on diameter 4.0 up to < 4.5 150 270
4.5 up to < 5.5 165 280
The tolerance on the diameter of rope wires is to lie
5.5 up to ≤ 6.0 180 280
within the limits specified in recognized standards, e.g.
in EN 10264.

D Section 10 – Materials for Equipment 10-45
4.4 Galvanizing method standard, e.g. ISO 7801 or ISO 7800. All the wires
constituting a strand taken from the rope are to be
Hawsers and standing rigging are to be manufactured subjected to this test. The test is considered successful
from fully galvanized wires. Normally galvanized wires if at least 95 % of the wires withstand the bend or twist-
may be used for all other ropes. The zinc coating is to ing test specified in the relevant standard without
conform to the data shown in Table 10.22. breaking
5. Testing of Wire Ropes 5.3 Tensile test
The following tests are to be performed. 5.3.1 From every manufactured length of rope up to
10000 m a test sample is to be tensile tested in its
5.1 Testing the zinc coating entirety to destruction. The test length is to be equal to
30 times the diameter of the rope, subject to a minimum
5.1.1 The specified weight of the zinc coating is to be of 600 mm. The minimum breaking load is to achieve
determined and certified by the manufacturer by the value specified for the rope in question in the
stripping the coating chemically and measuring the standard. In the case of manufactured lengths of more
weight loss of the stripped wires according to a recog- than 10000 m, a second test sample is to be taken and
nized method, e.g. in accordance with EN 10244-2. tested.
Wires of the various diameters are to be removed from
the rope for this purpose. 5.3.2 Where the tensile loading capacity of the
testing machine is insufficient to test the rope in its
TL reserves the right to repeat this test in case of doubt entirety, the breaking load of the rope is to be deter-
mined from the results of tests performed on the indi-
5.1.2 The adhesion of the zinc coating is to be vidual wires. For this purpose a strand is to be taken
verified by the winding test, e.g. to ISO 7802. For this from every manufactured length of rope of 5000 m or
purpose, the wires are to be wound as follows on to a less, and its constituent wires are to be individually
test mandrel of the diameter specified in Table 10.23 so subjected to the tensile test, e.g. to EN 12385. The wire
as to form at least 10 adjacent turns. test specimens are to have an initial measured length of
100 or 200 mm. The tensile strength is determined on
The zinc coating is to continue to adhere firmly to the the basis of the nominal wire diameter. The test is to be
substrate after winding. At least 5 wires of each size are deemed successful if at least 95 % of the rope wires
to be tested. meet the requirements stated in item 4. and the
calculated breaking load achieves the values specified
Table 10.23 Winding test in the relevant standard. For this purpose, the individual
test values are to be applied to the total number of wires
Diameter of test mandrel in the rope and multiplied by the realization factor
expressed as a multiple of shown in Table 10.24.
Method of
the wire diameter of
galvanizing
<1.5 mm ≥ 1.5 mm 5.4 Dimensional check
Fully galvanized 4 6 The diameter of each rope is to be measured at two

Normally galvanized 2 3 points located at least 1 m apart in two directions
approximately perpendicular to each other. The differ-
ence between the smallest and the largest results may
5.2 Ductility test
not be more than 4 %.
At the option of the manufacturer, the ductility of the

rope wires is to be tested either by the reverse bend test
or by the twisting test specified in a recognized

10-46 Section 10 – Materials for Equipment D,E
Table 10.24 Realization factors companies approved by TL for independent testing, the
identification number allocated by TL.
Rope Ropes with Ropes with

construction fibre core steel core The colored distinguishing thread may be dispensed
with if the tape designating the company is of the color
6x7 0.9000 0.8379
specified in 7.1.
6x19 0.8600 0.8007
6x24 0.8700 -
Ropes which have been tested in the presence of the
6x36 0.8400 0.7821
Surveyor are also (to) be marked with a seal bearing the
6x37 0.8250 0.7681 TL stamp.
The average value of the four measurements is to be

considered to be the actual rope diameter and is to lie E. Fibre Ropes
within the permitted tolerances. The number and
diameter of the individual wires are also to be verified. 1. Scope
These Rules apply to fibre ropes made from natural and

synthetic fibres and used as towlines and mooring lines
as well as for cargo handling gear and other lifting
6.1 Companies which have been approved by TL
tackle on board sea-going vessels.
for the independent performance of tests may test wire
ropes at their own responsibility. The result of the test is 2. Requirements to be Met by the Manufac-
to be certified on a form prescribed by TL turers of Fibre Ropes
6.2 Notwithstanding the provisions contained in 2.1 With regard to their production and quality
6.1, the test is to be performed in the presence of the control, fibre rope manufacturers are to meet the re-
Surveyor in the case of wire ropes of special construc- quirements stated in Section 1, B. and are to be
tion in accordance with 3.1 or if the company concerned approved by TL.
has not been approved for independent testing, or if the
purchaser has expressed a wish to this effect. 2.2 Applications for approval are to be submitted to
TL in writing with a description containing at least the
7. Marking following details:
7.1 Wire ropes are to be provided with worked-in - Type, composition and material of the ropes
colored threads as follows for the purpose of concerned
distinguishing the nominal strength of the wires:
- Manufacturing facilities
2
Nominal strength 1570 N/mm : white
2 - Testing equipment: copies of the last
Nominal strength 1770 N/mm : green
2 calibration reports on the testing machines are
Nominal strength 1960 N/mm : yellow
to be attached
For special rope constructions in accordance with 3.1

By a work's inspection, the manufacturer is to demon-
the color of the distinguishing thread is to be specially
strate the availability of the equipment necessary for the
designated. proper manufacture and testing of fibre ropes. TL
reserves the right to call for a preliminary test of suit-
7.2 A tape is also to be worked into the ropes ability to be carried out on samples of the rope.
bearing the manufacturer's name and, in the case of

E Section 10 – Materials for Equipment 10-47
2.3 If the manufacturer wishes to be approved by The realization factors for (monofilament) polypropylene
TL for the independent testing of fibre ropes (see 5.), are applicable to ropes with these outside layers.
this is also to be applied for.
4. Required Properties
3. Manufacture
The properties of fibre ropes are to fulfill the require-
3.1 The type, material and structure of the ropes ments specified in the standards recognized by TL.
are to conform to a national or international standard These include for example:
recognized by TL and should, wherever possible,
comply with Table 10.24. Ropes of a different type may EN ISO 9554 and the complementary DIN and ISO
be approved on application provided that they are standards mentioned therein, see Table 10.25
suitable for the proposed application
5. Testing the Breaking Load of Ropes
3.2 Fibre ropes are to be made either of natural
fibres (manila, sisal and hemp) or of synthetic fibres 5.1 Test method
(polyamide, polyester and polypropylene). Only new
yarns may be used to manufacture the rope. If it is The breaking load of ropes is to normally be determined
intended to use other materials, their suitability is to be by applying a tensile test to destruction to entire test
specially demonstrated to TL. sections of the rope in accordance with 3. If such a test
is impossible for technical reasons, the breaking load of
3.3 Ropes may normally comprise only one ma- the rope may be calculated from the tensile values
terial. Exception from this rule, and approved by TL, are established in testing the individual yarns in accordance
for example those rope constructions in which the with 4. This applies, however, only to those ropes
outside layers are reinforced with polyester yarns in whose maximum loading capacity exceeds 30000 daN
order to increase their resistance to abrasion. and for which reduction factors are given in Table.
10.26.
Table 10.25 Construction of customary rope types approved by TL
Rope construction (DIN 83307)

Rope standards Material
Form Construction
Manila A, B Hawser laid

EN ISO 1181
Sisal A, B Hawser laid

EN ISO 1181
Hawser laid
DIN-EN 1261 Hemp A, B, C
Cable laid
Polyamide A Hawser laid

EN ISO 1140
Polyester A Hawser laid

EN ISO 1141
EN ISO 1346 (1) Polypropylene A,B Hawser laid
(1) Data only for "3-strand hawser laid" with the same values.

10-48 Section 10 – Materials for Equipment E
Table 10.26 Reduction factors
Reduction factors r for ropes

Nominal Of natural fibres Of synthetic fibres
diameter of Polyester rope
Manila, sisal or hemp rope Polyamide rope Polypropylene rope
rope acc.to EN ISO
acc. to EN ISO 1181 or DIN- acc. to EN ISO acc. to EN ISO 1346
1141
EN 1261 Form 1140 Form Form
[mm] Form
A B C A A A
44 - - - 0.68 - -
48 - - - 0.68 0.51 0.82
52 - - - 0.68 0.51 0.82
56 - - - 0.68 0.50 0.82
60 - - - 0.68 0.49 0.82
64 - - - 0.67 0.48 0.81
72 0.58 - 0.67 0.48 0.81
80 0.58 - 0.66 0.48 0.80
88 0.57 - 0.66 0.48 0.80
96 0.57 0.65 0.47 0.80
5.2 Sampling 5.3.2 The breaking load established by the

tensile test is to correspond to the data given in the
For the purpose of sampling, ropes of the same con- relevant standard. If a test section of rope breaks at the
struction, the same material and the same nominal clamp or at the splice, the test requirements are
diameter which have been manufactured in an uninter- considered to have been met if the result equals at least
rupted production run are to be grouped into test 90 % of the specified breaking load.
lengths. The following number of test sections meas-
uring about 2500 mm in length are to be taken from the Note :
test lengths: Adding 10 % to the actual value when breakage occurs at the
clamp or in the splice to determine the breaking load of the
- Test lengths up to 2200 m (or 10 ropes up to rope is not permitted
220 m long): 1 test section
5.4 Calculation of the breaking load of rope
- Excess test lengths up to 30000 m: 1 additional
test section per 5500 m 5.4.1 In order to determine the breaking load by
calculation, a number of yarns are to be taken from the
- Excess test lengths over 30000 m: 1 additional test test sections specified in 5.2. which are to be equal to
section per 11000 m half the numerical value of the rope diameter in mm,
and these are to be subjected to a tensile test. In taking
5.3 Tensile testing of test section the test specimens, attention is to be paid to the
following:
5.3.1 To perform the tensile test, the test sections
are to be clamped in the testing machine as required by The yarns are to be taken evenly from the outside,
the standard and are to be loaded at a prescribed middle and inside positions of the strands of the rope.
testing rate until breakage occurs

E Section 10 – Materials for Equipment 10-49
When taking the yarns, care is to be taken not to alter 6.2 If a manufacturer intends to determine the
the twist of the yarns. strength of rope by calculation based on the strength of
the yarn, then the manufacturer is to demonstrate at
5.4.2 The yarns are to be tested individually by the least once a year in the presence of a Surveyor of TL
tensile test in accordance with ISO 2062.
that the Surveyor is capable of manufacturing rope with
the specified reduction factors. This is to be demon-
5.4.3 The breaking load of the rope is to be deter-
strated by the tensile test on a test section described in
mined from the results of the tests performed on the
5.3.
individual yarns by applying the formula:
6.3 Rope manufacturers who have been approved

FSR = FG ⋅ n ⋅ r
by TL for the independent performance of tests may
FG = Average breaking load of yarn [daN] themselves test the breaking load using the methods
described in 5.
n = Number of rope yarns in specimen
7. Marking
r = Reduction factor in accordance with Table
10.26. 7.1 A tape indicating the rope standard designation
and the manufacturer's, mark is to be worked into the
The breaking load of the rope determined in this way is ropes, each ~ 1m apart. Where companies have been
at least to satisfy the data contained in the relevant
approved for the independent performance of tests, this
standard.
tape is additionally to bear the identification number
allocated to the company by TL. In addition, a coloured
5.5 The certification shall state which method was
distinguishing thread denoting the yarn material in
used to test the breaking load of the rope and whether
accordance with Table 10.27 is also to be worked into
the specimen broke at the clamp.
the rope.
5.6 When required by the purchaser, and in the

7.2 The colored distinguishing thread may be
case of all companies which have not been approved
omitted where the tape has the color code stipulated in
for the independent performance of tests, the breaking
7.1.
load is to be tested in the presence of a Surveyor who
will certify the results.
Table 10.27 Distinguishing threads for fibre ropes
6. Verification of the Characteristics

Material Colour code
6.1 The manufacturers of yarn and rope are to Manila Black
constantly monitor the characteristics of their products Sisal Red

and are to ensure that the products meet the require- Hemp Green
ments specified in the standards. The manufacturers
Polyamide Green
are to keep records of their quality control and are to
Polyester Blue
present these to TL on request.
Polypropylen Brown

Section11 – Materials for Propeller 11-1
SECTION 11
MATERIALS FOR PROPELLER

Page
A. CAST COPPER ALLOY PROPELLERS .......................................................................................................... 11-2
1. Scope
2. Foundry Approval
3. Moulding and Casting
6. Chemical Composition and Metallurgical Characteristics
7. Mechanical Properties and Tests
8. Definition of Skew, Severity Zones
9. Non-Destructive Testing
10. Acceptance Criteria for Liquid Penetrant Testing
12. Welding Repair Procedure
13. Straightening
14. Identification and marking
15. Manufacturer’s certificates
B. CAST STAINLESS STEEL PROPELLERS ................................................................................................ 11-12
1. Scope
2. Foundry Approval
3. General Characteristics of Castings
6. Heat Treatment
8. Definition Of Skew, Severity Zones
10. Acceptance Criteria For Liquid Penetrant Testing And Magnetic Particle Testing
14. Document and Certification
Annex A. Welding Procedure and Welder’s Qualification Tests for Propellers Made of Cast Copper Alloys .. 11-19
1. General
2. Test Piece and Welding of Sample
3. Examination and Tests
4. Test Record
5. Range Of Approval
Annex B. Welding Procedure Qualification Test for Propellers Made of Cast Stainless Steel .......................... 11-22
1.General
2. Test Piece And Welding of Sample
3. Examinations And Tests
4. Test Record
5. Range of Approval

11-2 Section 11 – Materials for Propeller A
A. Cast Copper Alloy Propellers composition and the mechanical properties of these
materials comply with these rules.
1. Scope
2.4 Inspection facilities
These Rules are applicable to the manufacture, testing
and to the method for repairing of propellers, propeller The foundry is to have a suitably equipped laboratory,
blades and propeller bosses made of cast copper staffed by qualified personnel to perform tests on
alloys. moulding materials, chemical analyses, mechanical
tests, microstructural examinations of metallic materials
Where the use of alternative alloys is proposed, and non-destructive tests.
particulars of chemical composition, mechanical
properties and heat treatment are to be submitted for Where testing activities are assigned to other
approval. companies or other laboratory, additional information
required by TL is to be included.
By agreement with TL, these Rules may also be applied
to the repair and testing of propellers which have been 3. Moulding and Casting
damaged in service.
3.1 Pouring
2. Foundry Approval
Pouring must be carried out in dry moulds using de-
2.1 Approval gassed liquid metal. The pouring process is to be
controlled as to avoid turbulences of flow. Special
All propellers and propeller components are to be devices and/or procedures must prevent slag flowing
manufactured by foundries approved by TL or an IACS into the mould.
Member Classification Society. The castings are to be
manufactured and tested in accordance with these 3.2 Stress-relieving heat treatment
Rules.
Stress-relieving heat treatment may be required as
2.2 Application for approval appropriate to reduce residual stress. For this purpose,
the manufacturer of the castings shall submit a speci-
It is the manufacturer’s responsibility to assure that fication containing details of the heat treatment to TL for
effective quality, process and production controls during approval. Annealing temperatures and holding times are
manufacturing are adhered to within the manufacturing given in Tables 11.4 and 11.5.
specification. The manufacturing specification shall be
submitted to TL at the time of initial approval, and shall 4. Quality of Castings
at least include the following particulars: description of
the foundry facilities, copper alloy material specification, 4.1 Freedom from defects
runner and feeder arrangements, manufacturing
procedures, non-destructive testing and repair All castings must have a workmanlike finish and must
procedures. be free from defects which would be prejudicial to their
proper application in service. Minor casting defects
2.3 Scope of the approval test which are still visible after machining, such as small
sand and slag marks, small cold shuts and scabs shall
The scope of the approval test is to be agreed with TL. be removed by the manufacturer in accordance with
This should include the presentation of cast test item 11.
coupons of the propeller materials in question for
approval testing in order to verify that the chemical

A Section11 – Materials for Propeller 11-3
4.2 Removal of defects Important operational characteristics, such as

toughness and resistance to corrosion fatigue, are very
Casting defects which may impair the serviceability of heavily affected by the proportion of beta phase. (A high
the castings, such as major non-metallic inclusions, proportion of beta phase has a detrimental effect on
shrinkage cavities, blow holes and cracks are not per-
these characteristics). To ensure adequate cold
mitted. They are to be removed by one of the methods
deformability and resistance to corrosion fatigue, the
described in 11. within the limits applicable for the
proportion of beta phase is to be kept low. The concept
endangered zone in question. A comprehensive report
of the zinc equivalent should be used as control since it
on the repairs carried out is to be made available to the
summarizes the effect of the tendency of various
Surveyor.
chemical elements to produce beta phase in the
5. Dimensions, Dimensional and Geometrical structure."The structure of CU1 and CU2 type alloys
Tolerances must contain an alpha phase component of atleast 25 %
as measured on a test bar by the manufacturer. To
5.1 The verification of dimensions and the ensure adequate ductility and corrosion fatigue
dimensional and geometrical tolerances is the resistance, the proportion of beta phase is to be kept
responsibility of the manufacturer. low. For this purpose, the zinc equivalent defined by the
following formula shall not exceed a value of 45 %:
The report on the relevant examinations is to be
submitted to the Surveyor, who may require checks to
be made in his presence. 100 x % Cu
100 −
Zinc equivalent [%] = 100 + A
5.2 All propellers are to be statically balanced in
accordance with specified ISO 484 tolerance class (or In which:
equivalent) as specified in the approved drawings in
presence of a surveyor. Dynamic balancing is required A= %Sn + 5x% Al -0.5x% Mn -0.1x% Fe -2.3x% Ni
for propellers with an operating speed of more than 500
rpm or propellers with tip speed exceeding 60 m/s. Note :
The minus sign preceding the elements Mn, Fe and Ni
For further details see Part B, Chapter 4, Section 8, F.
signifies that these elements tend to reduce the proportion of
beta phase.
6. Chemical Composition and Metallurgical
Characteristics
The micro structure of alloy types CU 1 and CU 2 shall
be verified by determining the proportion of alpha
phase. For this purpose, at least one specimen shall be
taken from each heat. The proportion of alpha phase
The commonly used standard cast copper alloys for
shall be determined as the average value of 5 counts.
propellers are subdivided into the grades CU1, CU2,
CU3 and CU4 depending on their chemical composition,
as shown in Table 11.1. Cast copper alloys whose
chemical composition differ from the standard alloys
shown in Table 11.1 must specially be approved by TL. 7.1 Standardized alloys
The manufacturer is to maintain records of the chemical The mechanical properties are to comply with the
analyses of the production casts, which are to be made
values given in Table 11.2. These values are applicable
available to the Surveyor.
to test specimens manufactured from cast samples
separately in accordance with Fig. 11.1 or in
6.2 Metallurgical characteristics
accordance with specifications of a recognized
Note: The main components of the microstructure of the CU1 standard.
and CU2 grades of copper alloy are the alpha and beta
phases.

Table 11.1 Chemical composition of cast copper alloys for propellers
Alloy type Cu% Al% Mn% Zn% Fe% Ni% Sn% Pb%
CU1 52-62 0.5-3.0 0.5-4.0 35-40 0.5-2.5 max.1.0 max. 1.5 max. 0.5
CU2 50-57 0.5-2.0 1.0-4.0 33-38 0.5-2.5 3.0-8.0 max. 1.5 max. 0.5
CU3 77-82 7.0-11.0 0.5-4.0 max. 1.0 2.0-6.0 3.0-6.0 max. 0.1 max. 0.03
CU4 70-80 6.5-9.-0 8.0-20.0 max. 6.0 2.0-5.0 1.5-3.0 max. 1.0 max. 0.05
Note : Table11.2 Mechanical properties of cast copper

These characteristics represent a standard for the mechanical alloys for propellers (separately cast sample pieces)
properties of each heat; they are not, however, a binding
requirement for the mechanical properties of the casting itself Proof Tensile
Elongation
stress strength
which may be up to 30 % lower than in the separately cast Alloy A5
Rp0.2 Rm
type 2 2 [%]
sample piece. [N/mm ] [N/mm ]
min.
min. min.
The mechanical properties of integrally cast sample bars are CU1 175 440 20
to be subject to special agreement by TL. CU2 175 440 20
CU3 245 590 16
CU4 275 630 18
7.3 Tensile tests and specimens
Tensile tests and specimens are to be in accordance

with Section 2.
Tensile test specimens are normally to be taken from

separately cast sample pieces, see 7.1. The sample
pieces are to be cast in moulds of the same moulding
material as is used for the propeller casting. They must
be cooled under the same conditions as the propeller
itself. At least one tensile test specimen shall be taken
from each ladle.
Figure 11.1 Test sample casting If propellers are subjected to heat treatment, the sample
pieces are to be heat treated in the same way.
7.2 Other alloys
Where test specimens are to be taken from integrally
cast sample bars, this is to be the subject of special
The mechanical properties of other alloys not meeting
agreement with TL. Wherever possible, the sample bars
the minimum values of Table 11.2 are to comply with
are to be located on the blades at a point lying between
the requirements set out in a specification which has
0.5 and 0.6 R, where R is the radius of the propeller.
been approved by TL.

A Section 11 – Materials for Propeller 11-5
The test sample material must be removed from the residual stresses often lead to fatigue cracks during
casting by non thermal procedures. subsequent operation so weld sites have to be
subjected to heat treatment to reduce stress
8. Definition of Skew, Severity Zones
Welding in Zone "A" is normally not permitted.
8.1 Definition of skew Exceptions to this rule are only possible where TL has
given its approval based on a special consideration. In
The skew of a propeller is defined as the skew angle as this area, every attempt is to be made to repair a
follows: defective or damaged propeller without resorting to
welding, even where this results in the cross-section
The maximum skew angle of a propeller blade is the being reduced, provided that this possibility can be
angle which, in a projected view on to the blade, is authorized. If approval is given for repair by welding this
formed between one connecting line from the tip of the
is to be followed by a stress-relieving heat treatment.
blade to the centre of the bore of the boss and a
second line from the centre of the bore of the boss as
a tangent to the curve of the half widths of the blade Zone "B" is the area where operating stresses can be
(cf. Fig. 11.2). High-skew propellers have a skew high. In this case, repairs by welding are to be avoided
angle of more than 25° and low-skew propellers an wherever possible but may, in general, be performed if
angle up to 25°. TL has given prior approval. For approval to be granted,
details about the defects or damage are to be notified
8.2 Severity zones for each case.
In order to relate the scope of the tests to the effect of Zone "C" is the area in which the operating stresses are
defects in propeller blades and avoid the risk of fatigue low and where the propeller blades are comparatively
fractures following repairs, the blades are divided into thin, in which case repair by welding may be regarded
three severity zones designated "A", "B" and "C". as fairly safe. Repairs of this nature are permitted
provided they are executed using an approved method.
8.2.1 Low skew propellers
Zone "A" is the area of the driving face of the blade

between the fillet and the radius 0.4 R and is bounded
on both sides by 0.15 x length of the chord Cr from the
leading edge and 0.20 x Cr from the trailing edge, see
Fig. 11.3.
Figure 11.2 Definition of skew angle
Zone "A" is the area subjected to the greatest operating

stress and requiring the most extensive testing. The
blades in this area are normally at their thickest and
produce the greatest resistance to expansion for
welding, with the result that this leads to the highest Figure 11.3 Severity zones for integrally cast low-
residual stresses in and around the repair welds. High skew propellers

If the radius of the boss Rb is greater than 0.27 R, the Zone "B" is the remaining area of the driving face up to
limit of Zone "A" shall be increased to a value of 1.5 x the radius 0.7 R and on the suction face the area
Rb. between the fillet and the radius 0.7 R (See Fig.11.3).
Zone "A" also incorporates the areas of individually cast Zone "C" is the area outside the radius 0.7 R on both faces
propeller bosses which are located in the area of the of the blade. This also incorporates the surface of a fixed-
window shown in Fig. 11.5 and also the areas of flange pitch propeller(Monobloc propeller) boss and the
and blade fillets of fixed or controllable pitch propellers, controllable-pitch propeller boss, provided this has not
as described in Fig. 11.6. Further the inner taper been classed as Zone "A".
surface of the boss is classed as Zone "A".
Figure 11.4 Severity zones in blades with skew angles greater than 25 º
8.2.2 High skew propellers 9. Non-destructive testing
Zone A is the area on the pressure face contained within 9.1 Qualification of personnel involved in NDT
the blade root-fillet and a line running from the junction of
the leading edge with the root fillet to the trailing edge at Refer to Chapter 3 – Welding, Section 10 items J.2.3,
0.9 R and at passing through the mid-point of the blade 2.4 and, 2.5.
chord at 0.7 R and a point situated at 0.3 of the chord
length from the leading edge at 0.4 R. It also includes an 9.2 Visual testing
area along the trailing edge on the suction side of the blade
from the root to 0.9 R and with its inner boundary at 0.15 of All finished castings are to be 100% visually inspected
the chord lengths from the trailing edge. by the manufacturer. Castings are to be free from
cracks, hot tears or other imperfections which, due to
Zone B constitutes the whole of the remaining blade their nature, degree or extent, will interfere with the use
surfaces. of the castings. A general visual examination is to be
carried out by the Surveyor.
Zone "A" and Zone "B" are shown in Fig. 11.4.
9.3 Liquid penetrant testing
Note:
The remaining surface of the propeller blades is are to be Liquid penetrant testing procedure is to be submitted to
divided into the severity zones as given for solid cast TL and is to be in accordance with ISO 3452-1 or a
propellers (cf. Fig. 11.3 and Fig.11. 4) recognized standard. The acceptance criteria are
specified in item 10.

Linear indication: an indication with a largest dimension

The severity zone A is to be subjected to a liquid three or more times its smallest dimension (i.e. l ≥ 3 w).
penetrant testing in the presence of the Surveyor.
Aligned indications:
In zones B and C the liquid penetrant testing is to be
performed by the manufacturer and may be witnessed a) Non-linear indications form an alignment when
by the Surveyor upon his request. the distance between indications is less than
2mm and at least three indications are aligned.
If repairs have been made either by grinding,
An alignment of indications is considered to be a
straightening or by welding the repaired areas are
unique indication and its length is equal to the
additionally to be subjected to the liquid penetrant
overall length of the alignment.
testing independent of their location and/or severity
zone.
b) Linear indications form an alignment when the
distance between two indications is smaller than
9.4 Radiographic and ultrasonic testing
the length of the longest indication.
When required by TL or when deemed necessary by
the manufacturer, further non-destructive testing (e.g. Illustration of liquid penetrant indication is given in
radiographic and/or ultrasonic testing) are to be carried Figure 11.7.

out. The acceptance criteria or applied quality levels
are to be agreed between the manufacturer and TL in
accordance with a recognized standard.
Note: due to the attenuating effect of ultrasound within

cast copper alloys, ultrasonic testing may not be
practical in some cases, depending on the
shape/type/thickness, and grain-growth direction of the
casting.
In such cases, effective ultrasound penetration into the

casting should be practically demonstrated on the item.
This would normally be determined by way of back-wall
reflection, and/or target features within the casting.
Figure 11.5 Severity zones for controllable pitch
10. Acceptance Criteria for Liquid Penetrant propeller boss
Testing
10.2 Acceptance standard
10.1 Definitions of liquid penetrant indications
The test surface is to be subdivided into reference
Indication: In the liquid penetrant testing, an indication 2
areas, each being 100 cm . Each reference area may
is classed as when bleeding of the indicating fluid is
be square or rectangular with the major dimension not
clearly visible from discontinuities in the material at least
exceeding 250mm.
10 minutes after the developer has been applied.
The area is to be taken in the most unfavourable location

Relevant indication: Only indications which have any
relative to the indication being evaluated.
dimension greater than 1.5mm shall be considered
relevant for the categorization of indications.
The relevant indications detected shall, with respect to their
size and number, not exceed the values given in the Table
Non-linear indication: an indication with a largest
11.3.
dimension less than three times its smallest dimension
(i.e. l < 3 w).

For welding purposes prepared areas are always to be 11.2 Repair methods
evaluated as Zone "A" regardless of their location. The
same applies for weld sites when they have been finish Defects are normally to be removed by mechanical
machined and/or ground. methods such as grinding, chipping or milling. By
consent of TL, repairs by welding may be performed
11. Repair of Defects provided that the specifications given in 11.3, 11.4 and
11.5 have been complied with.
11.1 Definition
After milling or chipping grinding is to be applied for
Indications which exceed the maximum values of the such defects which are not to be welded. Grinding is to
acceptance standard specified in Table 11.3, such as be carried out, in such a manner that the contour of the
cracks, shrinkage cavities, scabs, sand and slag ground depression is as smooth as possible in order to
inclusions or other non-metallic inclusions and also avoid stress concentrations or to minimise cavitation
other discontinuities, where they might impair the safe corrosion. Complete elimination of the defective material
operation of the propeller, is to be regarded as defects is to be verified by liquid penetrant testing.
and is to be repaired.
2
Weld sites smaller than 5 cm are to be avoided.
Note :
A reference area is classed as an area of 100 cm2 and may be
either square or rectangular, the maximum edge length being
no greater than 25 cm.
Figure 11.6 Severity zones for controllable pitch and built-up propeller

Defects with a depth greater than the figure permitted

for grinding may be repaired by welding.
11.5 Repair of defects in Zone "C"
Repair by welding is normally permitted in Zone "C".
11.6 Repair documentation
The foundry is to maintain records of inspections,

welding, and any subsequent heat treatment, traceable
to each casting.
Before welding is started, full details of the extent and

location of the repair, the proposed welding procedure,
heat treatment and subsequent inspection procedures
are to be submitted to TL for approval.
Figure 11.7 Forms of indication 12.1 General
11.3 Repair of defects in Zone "A" Before welding is started, manufacturer shall submit to
TL a detailed welding procedure specification covering
Repairs by welding in Zone "A" are generally not the weld preparation, welding parameters, filler metals,
permitted unless specially approved by TL preheating and post weld heat treatment and inspection
procedures.
In some cases the propeller designer may submit
technical documentation to propose a modified zone A All weld repairs are to be carried out in accordance with
based on detailed hydrodynamic load and stress qualified procedures, and, by welders who are qualified
analysis for consideration by TL. to a recognized standard. Welding Procedure

Qualification Tests are to be carried out in accordance
with Annex A and witnessed by the Surveyor.
Grinding is permitted to the extent that the blade
thickness specified in the drawing is maintained.
12.2 Preparation of weld sites
Where grinding has to be carried out more deeply than

Defects to be repaired by welding are to be ground to
described above, this is to be inspected and approved
on a case by case basis by TL. sound material according to 11.2.
11.4 Repair of defects in Zone "B" The weld grooves shall be prepared so as to ensure
that the base of the groove is fully fused.
Defects with a depth dB no more than dB = t/40 mm (t =
local minimum thickness as specified in the Rules) or The resulting ground areas are to be examined in the
not deeper than 2 mm. whichever is greatest below the presence of the Surveyor by liquid penetrant testing in
local thickness as specified in the Rules are to be re- order to verify the complete elimination of defective
moved by grinding. material.

2
Table 11.3 Permitted number and size of relevant indications in a reference area of 100 cm as a function of
the severity zones
Maximum number
Maximum
for each type of Maximum permitted dimension
Severity zones number of Type of indication
indicaiton “a” or “I” of indications [mm]
indications
(1) (2)
non-linear 5 4
A 7 linear 2 3
aligned 2 3
non-linear 10 6
B 14 linear 4 6
aligned 4 6
non-linear 14 8
C 20 linear 6 6
aligned 6 6
(1) Individual, non-linear indications with a diameter of less than 2 mm in Zone "A" and with a diameter of less than 3 mm in the
other Zones are not considered relevant..
(2) All or some of the total number of non-linear indications may be increased to the maximum permitted number of all indications
where there are no linear/aligned indications.
12.3 Welding repair procedure Slag, undercuts and other welding defects are to be
removed before the next run is performed.
Metal arc welding is to be used for all types of welding
repair on cast alloy propellers. All welding work is for preference to be performed in the
workshop, shielded from draughts and the effects of the
Arc welding with coated electrodes and gas-shielded weather.
metal arc process (GMAW) are generally to be applied.
Argon-shielded tungsten welding (GTAW) should be With the exception of CU3 alloys, all repair welds are to
be subjected to a stress-relieving treatment to avoid
used with care due to the higher specific heat input of
stress corrosion cracking. Stress-relieving treatment for
this process. The recommendations applicable to filler
grade CU3 castings may, however, be required where
metals, reheating and stress-relieving treatment
major repairs have to be carried out in Zone "B" (and in
temperatures are given in Table 11.4. Zone "A" subject to special approval) or where the filler
metals used are susceptible to stress corrosion
All propellers are normally to be welded in the cracking. In these instances, depending upon the extent
downhand (flat) position. Where this is not possible, of the repair required, the propeller shall either be
subjected to a stress-relieving heat treatment following
inert gas shielding arc welding methods is to be
welding, at temperatures ranging from 450 °C to 500 °C,
employed.
or be annealed within the temperature range 650 °C
and 800 °C (cf. Table 11.4).
Weld sites are to be clean and dry. Covered welding
rods are to be dried before use according to the The methods normally employed are manual arc weld-
manufacturer's specifications. ing using covered electrodes and metal inert gas (MIG)
welding. Tungsten inert gas (TIG) welding is to be
To limit the risk of distortion and crack formation, the employed with care owing to the greater specific build-
up of heat.
interpass temperatures are to be kept low. This is
particularly applicable in the case of CU3 alloys.

Table 11.4 Recommended filler metals and heat treatments
Preheating Interpass- Stress relieving

temperature temperature heat treatment Hot straightening
Alloy type Filler metal
[°C] [°C] temperature temperature [°C]
min. min.- max. [° C]
Al bronze (1)
CU1 150 300 350-500 500-800
Mn bronze
Al bronze
CU2 150 300 350-550 500-800
Ni Mn bronze
Al bronze
CU3 Ni Al bronze (2) 50 250 450-500 700-900
Mn Al bronze
CU4 Mn Al bronze 100 300 450-600 700-850
(1) Ni-Al-Bronze and Mn-Al-Bronze may also be used.

(2) Stress relieving heat treatment is not necessary if Ni-Al-Bronze filler metals are used.
process is to be slow and be performed under controlled

The soaking times for the stress-relieving treatment of conditions. The rate of cooling following any stress-
copper alloys for propellers shall conform to the values relieving treatment may not exceed 50 °C/h down to a
given in Table 11.5. The heating up and cooling down temperature of 200 °C.
Table 11.5 Holding times [h] for the stress-relieving heat treatment of copper alloy propellers
Alloy grade CU1 and CU2 Alloy grade CU3 and CU4
Stress relieving
heat treatment Maximum Hours for each 25 Maximum
Hours for each 25
temperature [°C] recommended total mm. of thickness recommended total
mm. of thickness [h]
hours[h] [h] hours[h]
350 5 15 - -
400 1 5 - -
450 1/2 2 5 15
500 1/4 1 1 5
550 (1) 1/4 1/2 1/2 2
600 (1) - - 1/4 1
(1) Temperatures within the range 550 °C and 600°C shall only be employed for CU4 alloys.
13. Straightening straightening, provided it can be demonstrated that weld

properties are not impaired by the hot straightening
13.1 Application load operations.
Only static loads are to be employed for hot and cold When straightening a deformed propeller or changing
straightening operations. the pitch of the propeller, the working area, together
with a 500 mm zone on either side of the area, is to be
13.2 Hot straightening heated up to the recommended hot straightening tem-
perature specified in Table 11.4.
Weld repaired areas may be subject to hot

11-12 Section 11 – Materials for Propeller A,B
The heating up process is to be performed slowly and Description of the casting with drawing number
uniformly and point sources of heat such as oxy- - Diameter, number of blades, pitch, direction of
acetylene or oxy-propane should not be used. Sufficient turning
time is to be allowed to ensure that the entire thickness of - Grade of alloy and chemical composition of
the blade section is uniformly soaked. The temperature is
each heat
to be maintained within the recommended temperature
- Heat or casting number
range throughout the entire straightening process.
- Final weight
Thermocouple elements or temperature indicating
- Results of non-destructive tests and details of
crayons are to be used to measure temperature.
test procedure where applicable
13.3 Cold straightening - Portion of alpha-structure for CU 1 and CU 2

alloys
Cold straightening should only be used where minor - Results of the mechanical tests
repairs are required to blade tips and edges. Stress- - Casting identification No.
relieving treatment is to be performed following the cold - Skew angle for high skew propellers, see 8.1
straightening of blades made from the CU1, CU2 and
CU4 grades of casting, see Table 11.4.
B. Cast Stainless Steel Propellers
1. Scope
14.1 Identifications
1.1 These rules are applicable to the manufacture,

The manufacturer is to adopt a system for the identification
inspection and repair procedures of cast stainless steel
of all castings, which enable the material to be traced to its
propellers, blades and bosses.
original cast. The Surveyor is to be given full facilities for so
tracing the castings when required.
1.2 Where the use of alternative alloys is
14.2 Marking proposed, particulars of chemical composition,
mechanical properties and heat treatment are to be
Each finished casting propeller shall be marked by the submitted for approval.
manufacturer at least with the following particulars:
1.3 These rules may also be used for the repair of
- Grade of cast material or corresponding propellers damaged in service, subject to prior
abbreviated designation agreement with TL.
- Manufacturer’s mark
- Heat number, casting number or another mark 2. Foundry Approval
enabling the manufacturing process to be
traced back 2.1 All propellers, blades and bosses are to be
- Date of final inspection manufactured by foundries approved by TL or an IACS
- Number of TL test certificate Member Classification Society. The castings are to be
- Ice class symbol, where applicable manufactured and tested in accordance with the
- Skew angle for high skew propellers. requirementsof these rules
15. Manufacturer’s certificates 2.2 Application for approval
For each casting propeller the manufacturer is to supply to It is the manufacturer’s responsibility to assure that
the Surveyor a certificate containing the following details: effective quality, process and production controls during
manufacturing are adhered to within the manufacturing
- Purchaser and order number specification. The manufacturing specification shall be
- Shipbuilding project number, if known submitted to TL at the time of initial approval, and shall
at least include the following particulars: description of
B Section 11 – Materials for Propeller 11-13
the foundry facilities, steel material specification, runner the castings, e.g. major non-metallic inclusions,
and feeder arrangements, manufacturing procedures, shrinkage cavities, blow holes and cracks, are not
non-destructive testing and repair procedures. permitted. They may be removed by one of the methods
described in item 11 and repaired within the limits and
2.3 Scope of the approval test restrictions for the severity zones. Full description and
documentation must be available for the surveyor.
The scope of the approval test is to be agreed with TL.
This should include the presentation of cast test
4. Dimensions, Dimensional and Geometrical
coupons of the propeller materials in question for
Tolerances
approval testing in order to verify that the chemical
composition and the mechanical properties of these
4.1 The verification of dimensions, the dimensional
materials comply with these rules.
and geometrical tolerances is the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
2.4 Inspection facilities
The report on the relevant examinations is to be

The foundry is to have an adequately equipped
submitted to the surveyor, who may require checks to
laboratory, manned by experienced personnel, for the
be made in his presence.
testing of moulding materials chemical analyses,
mechanical testing, microstructural testing of metallic
4.2 Static balancing is to be carried out on all
materials and non-destructive testing. Where testing
propellers in accordance with specified ISO 484
activities are assigned to other companies or other
tolerance class (or equivalent) and the approved
laboratory, additional information required by TL is to be
drawings in presence of a surveyor.
included.
.
Dynamic balancing is necessary for propellers running
above 500 rpm or propellers with tip speed exceeding
3.1 Freedom from Defects 60 m/s.
All castings are to have a workmanlike finish and are to For further details see Part B, Chapter 4, Section 8, F.
be free from imperfections defects which would be
prejudicial to their proper application in-service. Minor 5. Chemical Composition
casting defects which may still be visible after
machining such as small sand and slag inclusions, 5.1 Typical cast steel poropeller alloys are
small cold shuts and scabs shall be trimmed off by the groupped into four types depending on their chemical
manufacturer in accordance with item 11. composition as given in Table 11.6. Cast steel whose
chemical composition deviate from the typical values of
3.2 Removal of defects Table 11.6 must be specially approved by TL.
Casting defects which may impair the serviceability of

Table 11.6 Typical chemical composition for steel propeller castings
Alloy type C Mn Cr Mo (1) Ni

Max. Max. [%] Max. [%]
[%] [%] [%]
Martensitic
0.15 2.0 11.5 - 17.0 0.5 Max. 2.0
(12 Cr 1 Ni)
Martensitic
0.06 2.0 11.5 - 17.0 1.0 3.5 - 5.0
(13 Cr 4 Ni)
Martensitic
0.06 2.0 15.0 - 17.5 1.5 3.5 - 6.0
(16 Cr 5 Ni)
Austenitic
0.12 1.6 16.0 - 21.0 4.0 8.0 - 13.0
(19 Cr 11 Ni)
(1) Minimum values are to be in accordance with recognised national or international standards.

11-14 Section 11 – Materials for Propeller B
5.2 The manufacturer is to maintain records of the R, where R is the radius of the propeller.
chemical analyses of the production casts, which are to
be made available to the Surveyor so that he can satisfy 7.3 The test bars are not to be detached from the
himself that the chemical composition of each casting is casting until the final heat treatment has been carried
within the specified limits. out. Removal is to be by non-thermal procedure.
6. Heat Treatment 7.4 Separately cast test bars may be used subject
to prior approval of TL. The test bars are to be cast from
Martensitic castings are to be austenitized and the same heat as the castings represented and heat
tempered. Austenitic castings should be solution treated with the castings represented.
treated.
7.5 At least one set of mechanical tests is to be
7. Mechanical Properties and Tests made on material representing each casting in
accordance with Section 2.
7.1 The mechanical properties are to meet the
requirements in Table 11.7. These values refer to the 7.6 As an alternative to 7.5, where a number of
test specimens machined from integrally cast test bars small propellers of about the same size, and less than 1
attached to the hub or on the blade. The thickness of m in diameter, are made from one cast and heat treated
test coupon is to be in accordance with a recognized in the same furnace charge, a batch testing procedure
standard. may be adopted using separately cast test samples of
suitable dimensions. At least one set of mechanical
7.2 Where possible, the test bars attached on tests is to be provided for each multiple of five casting in
blades are to be located in an area between 0.5 to 0.6 the batch.
Table 11.7 Mechanical properties for steel propeller castings
Proof stress Tensile strength Elongation Red. of area Charpy V-notch

Alloy type Rp0.2 min. Rm min. A5 min. Z min. Energy min. (1)
2 2
[N/mm ] [N/mm ] [%] [%] [J]
12 Cr 1 Ni 440 590 15 30 20
13 Cr 4 Ni 550 750 15 35 30
16 Cr 5 Ni 540 760 15 35 30
19 Cr 11 Ni 180 (2) 440 30 40 -
(1) Not required for general service and the lowest ice class notations. For other ice class notations, tests are to be made -10 ºC.
(2) Rp1.0 value is 205 N/mm2 .
8. Definition of skew, severity zones 9. Non-Destructive Tests
8.1 In order to relate the degree of inspection to 9.1 Qualification of personnel involved in NDT
the criticality of imperfections in propeller blades and to
Refer to Chapter 3 – Welding, Section 10 items J.2.3,
help reduce the risk of failure by fatigue cracking after
2.4 and, 2.5.
repair, propeller blades are divided into three severity
zones designated A, B and C. Definition of skew, and,
9.2 Visual Inspection
severity zones are given in item A.
All finished castings are to be 100% visually inspected

by the manufacturer. Castings are to be free from

cracks, hot teats or other imperfections which, due to Note: due to the attenuating effect of ultrasound within
their nature, degree or extent, will interfere with the use austenitic steel castings, ultrasonic testing may not be
of the castings. A general visual examination is to be practical in some cases, depending on the
carried out by the Surveyor. shape/type/thickness, and grain-growth direction of the
casting.
9.3 Liquid penetrant testing
10. Acceptance criteria for liquid penetrant
Liquid penetrant testing procedure is to be submitted to testing and magnetic particle testing
TL and is to be in accordance with ISO 3452-1 or a
recognized standard. The acceptance criteria are 10.1 Definitions of liquid penetrant indications
specified in item10.
Indication: In the liquid penetrant testing an indication is
For all propellers, separately cast blades and hubs, the the presence of detectable bleed-out of the penetrant
surfaces covered by severity zones A, B and C are to liquid from the material discontinuities appearing at least
be liquid penetrant tested. Testing of zone A is to be 10 minutes after the developer has been applied.
undertaken in the presence of the Surveyor, whilst
testing of zone B and C may be witnessed by the Relevant indication: only indications which have any
Surveyor upon his request. dimension greater than 1.5mm shall be considered
relevant for the categorization of indications.
If repairs have been made either by grinding or by
welding, the repaired areas are additionally to be Non-linear indication: an indication with a largest
subjected to the liquid penetrant testing independent of dimension less than three times its smallest dimension
their location and/or severity zone. Weld repairs are, (i.e. l < 3 w).
independent of their location, always to be assessed
according to zone A. Linear indication: an indication with a largest dimension
three or more times its smallest dimension (i.e. l ≥ 3 w).
9.4 Magnetic particle testing
Aligned indications:
Magnetic particle testing may be used in lieu of liquid
penetrant testing for examination of martensitic a) Non-linear indications form an alignment when
stainless steels castings. the distance between indications is less than
2mm and at least three indications are aligned.
Magnetic particle testing procedure is to be submitted to An alignment of indications is considered to be
TL and is to be in accordance with ISO 9934-1 or a a unique indication and its length is equal to
recognized standard. the overall length of the alignment.
9.5 Radiographic and ultrasonic testing b) Linear indications form an alignment when the
distance between two indications is smaller
When required by TL or when deemed necessary by than the length of the longest indication.
the manufacturer, further non-destructive testing (e.g.
radiographic and/or ultrasonic testing) are to be carried Illustration of liquid penetrant indications is given in Fig.
out. The acceptance criteria or applied quality levels are 11.8.
then to be agreed between the manufacturer and TL in
accordance with a recognized standard.

10.2 Acceptance standard
The surface to be inspected is to be divided into

reference areas of 100 cm2. Each reference area may
be square or rectangular with the major dimension not
exceeding 250mm.
The area shall be taken in the most unfavourable

location relative to the indication being evaluated.
The relevant indications detected shall with respect to

their size and number, not exceed the values given in
the Table 11.8.
Areas which are prepared for welding are independent

of their location always to be assessed according to
zone A. The same applies to the welded areas after
being finished machined and/or grinded.
Figure 11.8 Shape of indications
Table 11.8 Allowable number and size of relevant indications in a reference area of 100
cm², depending on severity zones
Severity zone Max. total number Indication type Max. number for Max. dimension of
of indications each type (1) (2) indication [mm]
Non-linear 5 4
A 7 Linear 2 3
Aligned 2 3
Non-linear 10 6
B 14 Linear 4 6
Aligned 4 6
Non-linear 14 8
C 20 Linear 6 6
Aligned 6 6
(1) Single non-linear indications less than 2 mm in Zone A and less than 3 mm for other zones are not considered relevant.
(2) The total number of non-linear indications may be increased to the maximum total number, or part thereof, represented by
the absence of linear or aligned indications.
11. Repair of Defects surrounding surface so as to avoid any sharp contours.

Complete elimination of the defective material is to be
11.1 Defective castings are to be repaired in verified by liquid penetrant testing, or magnetic particle
accordance with the requirements given in 11.2 to 11.7 testing if applicable.
and, where applicable, the requirements of item 12.
11.3 Weld repairs are to be undertaken only when
11.2 In general the repairs are to be carried out by they are considered to be necessary and have prior
mechanical means, e.g. by grinding, chipping or milling. approval of the surveyor.
The resulting grooves are to be blended into the

11.4 The excavation are to be suitably shaped to 12.2 All weld repairs are to be carried out in
allow good access for welding. The resulting grooves accordance with qualified procedures, and, by welders
are to be subsequently ground smooth and complete who are qualified to a recognized standard. Welding
elimination of the defective material is to be verified by Procedure Qualification Tests are to be carried out in
liquid penetrant testing. Welds having an area less than accordance with Annex B and witnessed by the
2
5 cm are to be avoided. Surveyor.
11.5 Grinding in severity zone A may be carried out Defects to be repaired by welding are to be ground to
to an extent that maintains the blade thickness. Repair sound material according to item 10.
welding is generally not permitted in severity zone A
and will only be allowed after special consideration by The welding grooves are to be prepared in such a
TL. manner which will allow a good fusion of the groove
bottom.
In some cases the propeller designer may submit
technical documentation to propose a modified zone A The resulting ground areas are to be examined in the
based on detailed hydrodynamic load and stress presence of the Surveyor by liquid penetrant testing in
analysis for consideration by TL. order to verify the complete elimination of defective
material.
11.6 Defects in severity zone B that are not deeper
than t/40 mm (“t” is the minimum local thickness 12.3 Welding is to be done under controlled
according to the rules) or 2 mm, whichever is greatest, conditions free from draughts and adverse weather.
are to be removed by grinding. Those defects that are
deeper may be repaired by welding subject to prior 12.4 Metal arc welding with electrodes or filler wire
approval from TL. used in the procedure tests is to be used. The welding
consumables are to be stored and handled in
11.7 Repair welding is generally permitted in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
severity zone C.
12.5 Slag, undercuts and other imperfections are to
11.8 Repair documentation be removed before depositing the next run.
The foundry is to maintain records of inspections, 12.6 The martensitic steels are to be furnace re-
welding, and any subsequent heat treatment, traceable tempered after weld repair. Subject to prior approval,
to each casting. however, local stress relieving may be considered for
minor repairs.
Before welding is started, full details of the extent and
location of the repair, the proposed welding procedure, 12.7 On completion of heat treatment the weld
heat treatment and subsequent inspection procedures repairs and adjacent material are to be ground smooth.
are to be submitted to TL for approval. All weld repairs are to be liquid penetrant tested.
12. Welding Repair Procedure 13. Identification and marking
12.1 Before welding is started, manufacturer shall 13.1 The manufacturer is to adopt a system for the
submit to TL a detailed welding procedure specification identification of all castings, which enable the material to
is to be submitted covering the weld preparation, be traced to its original cast. The Surveyor is to be given
welding positions, welding parameters, welding full facilities for so tracing the castings when required.
consumables, preheating, post weld heat treatment and
inspection procedures. Each finished casting propeller shall be marked by the
manufacturer at least with the following particulars:

- Heat number or other marking which will Purchaser’s name and order number,
enable the full history of the casting to be
traced, - Vessel identification, where known,
- Grade of cast material or corresponding - Description of the casting with drawing

abbreviated designation number,
- TL’s certificate number, - Diameter, number of blades, pitch, direction of

turning,
- Ice class symbol, where applicable,
- Skew angle for high skew propellers,
- Skew angle for high skew propellers,
- Final weight,
- Date of final inspection.
- Alloy type, heat number and chemical
13.2 TL’s stamp is to be put on when the casting composition,
has been accepted.
- Casting identification number,
14. Document and Certification
- Details of time and temperature of heat
14.1 The manufacturer is to provide the surveyor treatment,
with an inspection certificate giving the following
particulars for each casting which has been accepted: - Results of the mechanical tests.
- Results of non-destructive tests and details of

test procedure where applicable.

Annex A Section 11 – Materials for Propeller 11-19
ANNEX A
WELDING PROCEDURE AND WELDER’S QUALIFICATION TESTS FOR PROPELLERS MADE OF
CAST COPPER ALLOYS
1. General A test sample of minimum 30mm thickness is to be

used.
1.1 This document gives requirements for
qualification tests of welding procedures intended for 2.2 Preparation and welding of test pieces are to
the repair of cast copper alloy propellers. be carried out in accordance with the general condition
of repair welding work which it represents.
1.2 For the welding procedure approval the
welding procedure qualification tests are to be carried 2.3 Welding of the test assemblies and testing of
out with satisfactory results. The qualification tests are test specimens are to be witnessed by the Surveyor.
to be carried out with the same welding process, filler

3. Examination and Tests
metal, preheating and stress-relieving treatment as
those intended applied by the actual repair work.
3.1 Test assembly is to be examined non-
Welding procedure specification (WPS) is to refer to the
destructively and destructively in accordance with the
test results achieved during welding procedure
Table 11.A.1 and Fig. 11.A.2:
qualification testing.
Table 11.A.1 Type of tests and extent of testing

1.3 Welding procedures qualified at a
manufacturer are valid for welding in workshops under
Type of test (1) Extent of testing
the same technical and quality management.
Visual testing 100% as per article 3.2
2. Test Piece and Welding of Sample Liquid penetrant
100% as per article 3.2
testing
2.1 The test assembly, consisting of cast samples, Transverse tensile Two specimens as per article
test 3.3
is to be of a size sufficient to ensure a reasonable heat
Three specimens as per
distribution and according to Fig. 11.A.1 with the Macro examination
article 3.4
minimum dimensions:
(1) bend or fracture test are at the discretion of TL
Figure 11.A.1 Test piece for welding repair

procedure Figure 11.A.2 Test spiceman

11-20 Section 11 – Materials for Propeller Annex A
3.2 Non-destructive test 3.5 Re-testing
Test assembly is to be examined by visual and liquid If the test piece fails to comply with any of the
requirements of this Appendix, reference is made to re-
penetrant testing prior to the cutting of test specimen. In
test procedures given in Chapter 3 – Welding, Section
case, that any post-weld heat treatment is required or
12 item F.2.11.
specified, non-destructive testing is to be performed
after heat treatment.
4. Test record
Cracks are not allowed. Imperfections detected by liquid 4.1 Welding conditions for test assemblies and test
penetrant testing are to be assessed in accordance with results are to be recorded in welding procedure
item A.10. qualification record. Forms of welding procedure
qualification records can be taken from TL’s rules or
3.3 Macroscopic examination from relevant standards.
Three test specimens are to be prepared and etched on 4.2 A statement of the results of assessing each
one side to clearly reveal the weld metal, the fusion line test piece, including repeat tests, is to be made for each
and the heat affected zone (see Figure11.A.2). welding procedure qualification records. The relevant
items listed for the WPS are to be included.
An etching medium with the following constitule would
be suitable for this purpose: 4.3 The welding procedure qualification record is
to be signed by the Surveyor witnessing the test and is
5 g. Ferric (III) – Chloride to include TL´s identification.
30 ml. Hydrochloride acid 5. Range of approval
100 ml. Distilled water 5.1 General
The test specimens are to be examined for All the conditions of validity stated below are to be met
imperfections present in the weld metal and the heat independently of each other. Changes outside of the
affected zone. Cracks and lack of fusion are not ranges specified are to require a new welding procedure
permitted. Imperfections such as pores, or slag test.
inclusions, larger than 3 mm. are not permitted.
A qualification of a WPS obtained by a manufacturer is
3.4 Tensile test valid for welding in workshops or sites under the same
technical and quality control of that manufacturer.
Two tensile tests specimen are to be prepared as
shown in Chapter 2 material Rules Section 2 Figure 5.2 Base metal
2.6. Alternatively tensile test specimens according to
recognized standards acceptable to TL. The tensile The range of qualification related to base metal is given
strength shall meet the values given in Table 11.A.2. in Table 11.A.3.
Table 11.A.2 Tensile strength requirements Table 11.A.3 Range of qualification for base metal
Tensile strength Copper alloy material grade

Alloy type Range of approval
2
[N/mm ] min. used for qualification
CU1 370 CU1 CU1

CU2 CU1; CU2
CU2 410
CU3 CU3
CU3 500
CU4 CU4
CU4 550

Annex A Section 11 – Materials for Propeller 11-21
5.3 Thickness 5.6 Filler metal
The qualification of a WPS carried out on a weld The approval is only valid for the filler metal used in the
assembly of thickness t is valid for the thickness range welding procedure test.
given in Table 11.A.4.
5.7 Heat input
Table 11.A.4 Range of qualification for thickness The upper limit of heat input approved is 25% greater
than that used in welding the test piece. The lower limit
Thickness of the test piece, t of heat input approved is 25% lower than that used in
Range of approval
(mm)
welding the test piece.
30≤ t ≥3 mm
5.8 Preheating and interpass temperature

5.4 Welding position
Approval for a test made in any position is restricted to The minimum preheating temperature is not to be less
that position. than that used in the qualification test. The maximum
interpass temperature is not to be higher than that used
5.5 Welding process in the qualification test.
5.5.1 The approval is only valid for the welding 5.9 Post-weld heat treatment
process used in the welding procedure test. Single run
is not qualified by multi-run butt weld test used in item The heat treatment used in the qualification test is to be
A. specified in pWPS. Soaking time may be adjusted as a
function of thickness.

11-22 Section 11 – Materials for Propeller Annex B
ANNEX B
WELDING PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION TEST FOR PROPELLERS MADE OF CAST STAINLESS STEEL
1. General The dimensions and shape of the groove shall be

representative of the actual repair work.
1.1 This document gives requirements for
qualification tests of welding procedures intended for 2.2 Preparation and welding of test pieces are to
the repair of cast steel propellers.
be carried out in accordance with the general condition
of repair welding work which it represents.
1.2 For the welding procedure approval the
welding procedure qualification tests are to be carried
2.3 Welding of the test assemblies and testing of
out with satisfactory results. The qualification tests are
test specimens are to be witnessed by
to be carried out with the same welding process, filler
metal, preheating and stress-relieving treatment as the Surveyor.
those intended applied by the actual repair work.

Welding procedure specification is to refer to the test 3. Examinations and tests
results achieved during welding procedure qualification
testing. 3.1 Test assembly is are to be examined non-
destructively and destructively in accordance with Table
1.3 Welding procedures qualified at a 11.B.1 and Fig. 11.B.2:
manufacturer are valid for welding in workshops under
the same technical and quality management. Table 11.B.1 Type of tests and extent of testing
2. Test piece and welding of sample

Type of test Extent of testing
2.1 The test assembly, consisting of cast samples, Visual testing 100% as per article 3.2
is to be of a size sufficient to ensure a reasonable heat
Liquid penetrant
distribution and according to Fig. 11.B.1 with the 100% as per article 3.2
testing (1)
minimum dimensions: Transverse tensile Two specimens as per article
test 3.3
Two root and two face
Bend test (2)
specimens as per article 3.4
Three specimens as per
Macro examination
article 3.5
Two sets of three specimens
Impact test
as per article 3.6
Hardness test As per article 3.7
(1) Magnetic particle testing may be used in lieu of liquid
penetrant testing for martensitic stainless steels.
(2) For t≥12mm, the face and root bend may be substituted
by 4 side bend test specimens.
3.2 Non-Destructive Testing
The test assembly is to be examined by visual and

liquid penetrant testing, or magneticparticle tasting if
applicable, prior to the cutting of test specimen. In case,
that any post-weld heat treatment is required or
Figure 11.B.1 Test piece for welding repair specified, non-destructive testing is to be performed
procedure after heat treatment.

Annex B Section 11 – Materials for Propeller 11-23
No cracks are permitted. İmperfections detected by (i.e. the mid-point of the notch shall be at 1mm to 2mm
liquid penetrant testing, or magnetic particle testing if from the fusion line), respectively.
applicable, are to be assessed in accordance with B.10.
The test temperature and impact energy are to comply
3.3 Tensile Testing with the requirement specified for the base material.
Two flat transverse tensile test specimens are to be 3.7 Hardness Test
prepared. Testing procedures are to be in accordance
with Section 2 item B.1.2.8.2. Alternatively tensile test The macro-section representing the start of welding is
specimens according to recognized standards to be used for HV10 hardness testing. Indentations are
acceptable to TL may be used. to traverse 2 mm below the surface. At least three
individual indentations are to be made in the weld metal,
The tensile strength is to meet the specified minimum the heat affected zone (both sides) and in the base
value of the base material. The location of fracture is to material (both sides). The values are to be reported for
be reported, i.e. weld metal, heat affected zone or base information.
material.
3.8 Re-testing
3.4 Bend Testing
If the test piece fails to comply with any of the
Transverse bend tests for butt joints are to be in requirements of this Appendix, reference is made to re-
accordance with Section 2, or, according to a test procedures given in Chapter 3 – Welding, Section
recognized standard. The mandrel diameter is to be 4 x 12 item F.2.11.
thickness except for austenitic steels, in which case the
mandrel diameter is to be 3 x thickness.
The bending angle is to be 180°. After testing, the test

specimens are not to reveal any open defects in any
direction greater than 3 mm. Defects appearing at the
corners of a test specimen during testing are to be
investigated case by case.
Two root and two face bend specimens are to be tested.

For thickness 12 mm and over, four side bend
specimens may alternatively be tested.
3.5 Macro-Examination
Two macro-sections are to be prepared and etched on

one side to clearly reveal the weld metal, the fusion line
and the heat affected zone. Cracks and lack of fusion
are not permitted. Imperfections such as slag inclusions
and pores greater than 3 mm are not permitted.
3.6 Impact test
Figure 11.B.2 Weld test assembly

Impact test is required, where the base material is
impact tested. Charpy V-notch test specimens are to be
4. Test record
in accordance with Section 2. Two sets are to be taken,
one set with the notch positioned in the center of the
4.1 Welding conditions for test assemblies and test
weld and one set with the notch positioned in the HAZ
results are to be recorded in welding procedure
qualification record. Forms of welding procedure
11-24 Section 11 – Materials for Propeller Annex B
qualification records can be taken from TL’s rules or 5.4 Welding position
from relevant standards.
Approval for a test made in any position is restricted to
4.2 A statement of the results of assessing each that position.
test piece, including repeat tests, is to be made for each
welding procedure qualification records. The relevant
5.5 Welding process
items listed for the WPS are to be included.
5.5.1 The approval is only valid for the welding

4.3 The welding procedure qualification record is
process used in the welding procedure test. Single run
to be signed by the Surveyor witnessing the test and is
to include TL´s identification. is not qualified by multi-run butt weld test used in item
B.
5. Range of approval
5.6 Filler metal
5.1 General
The approval is only valid for the filler metal used in the
All the conditions of validity stated below are to be met welding procedure test.
independently of each other. Changes outside of the
ranges specified are to require a new welding procedure 5.7 Heat input
test.
The upper limit of heat input approved is 15% greater

A qualification of a WPS obtained by a manufacturer is
than that used in welding the test piece.
valid for welding in workshops or sites under the same
technical and quality control of that manufacturer.
The lower limit of heat input approved is 15% lower than
5.2 Base metal that used in welding the test piece.
Range of approval for steel cast propeller is limited to 5.8 Preheating and interpass temperature
steel grade tested.
The minimum preheating temperature is not to be less
5.3 Thickness than that used in the qualification test. The maximum
The qualification of a WPS carried out on a weld interpass temperature is not to be higher than that used
assembly of thickness t is valid for the thickness range in the qualification test.
given in Table 11.B.2.
5.9 Post-weld heat treatment
Table 11.B.2 Range of qualification for thickness
The heat treatment used in the qualification test is to be
Thickness of the test specified in pWPS. Holding time may be adjusted as a
Range of approval
piece, t (mm)
function of thickness.
15<t≤30 3mm to 2t
0,5t to 2t or 200mm,
t>30
whichever is the greater

Section 12 –Wooden Materials 12-1
SECTION 12
WOODEN MATERIALS
Page
A. GENERAL............................................................................................................................................................. 12- 2
1. Classification According to the Field of Application
2. Quality
3. Drying
B. TYPES OF WOOD AND CLASSIFICATIONS...................................................................................................... 12- 2
1. Solid Wood
2. Plywood
C. BOATBUILDING PLYWOOD............................................................................................................................... 12- 4
1. General
2. Structure
3. Veneer Joints
4. Strength Groups
5. Plywood Grades
6. Defects
7. Repairs
8. Surface Treatment
9. Panel Dimensions
10. Testing
11. Marking and Stamping
12. Certificates
13. Storage of the Plywood Panels
D. PLYWOOD FOR AIRCRAFT................................................................................................................................ 12-11
1. General
2. Structure
3. Veneer Joints
4. Strength Groups
5. Plywood Grades
6. Defects
7. Testing
8. Marking and Stamping
9. Certificates
10. Storage of the Plywood Panels
E. JOINING OF WOOD MATERIALS........................................................................................................................12-18
1. Laminated and Multilayered Components
2. Scarf Jointing
F. WOOD PROTECTION........................................................................................................................................... 12-19
G. REQUIREMENT FOR THE CORE MATERIALS OF SANDWICH LAMINATES
CROSS-CUT BALSA WOOD ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 12-19
1. General
2. Specification

12-2 Section 12 –Wooden Materials A,B
A. General B. Types of Wood and Classifications
1. Classification According to the Field of 1. Solid Wood

Application
1.1 Radially sawn timber is mainly to be used for
1.1 Only proven boatbuilding wood is to be used boatbuilding. The angle of the annual rings to the lower
for all timber components exposed to water and sawn edge is not to be less than 45°.
weather, i. e. timber with good resistance to water and
weather, fungal attack and insect infestation, as well as 1.2 Table 12.2 shows the number of different types
with good mechanical properties that are also suitable of timber and their most important properties, such as
for the particular application. Furthermore, it shall have durability, specific gravity, as well as bending, tensile
a low swelling and shrinkage properties and compressive strength. Since these properties can
vary in the case of timber of the same type, or even
1.2 For components not exposed to water or within the same trunk, no absolute values are indicated
weather, and not requiring strength, timber of lower in the table, but rather reference values. The timber
durability may be used. listed is divided into durability groups from I to V,
whereby:
2. Quality
I = Very good
The timber used in boatbuilding is to be straight and of
the best quality, i. e. be free from sap, shakes, II = Good
objectionable knots and other defects. Twisted-grown or
rough saw cut wood is not to be used. III = Average
3. Drying IV = Moderate
3.1 The timber used is to be well seasoned and V = Poor

sufficiently dried, or is to be correctly dried in a suitable
drying kiln. 1.3 The timber used in boatbuilding shall, if
exposed to the weather or used for the primary struc-
3.2 For this purpose, the timber is to be stacked in tural components of a boat, belong to at least durability
piles which are as small as possible, so that uniform group III.
drying is guaranteed.
1.4 In place of the timber listed in Table 12.2, other
3.3 In the case of forced drying, the residual types can be used if the durability and the technological
moisture content is not to be more than 10 %. When values are verified and are equivalent. The
processing, this content is not to exceed a maximum of manufacturer is always to be responsible for the correct
15 % as a result of hygroscopic behaviour. selection of the quality and type of wood.
3.4 The moisture content is to be determined by 1.5 Since wood has anisotropic material
establishing the loss of mass of a sample between its properties, these are to be taken into account during the
state at the time of draw-off and its state after drying, design of the components. It is to be ensured that the
based on constant weight at 103 ±2 °C and the main direction of stress lies in the direction of the
calculation of the weight loss as a percentage of the dry greatest strength of wood, and that no impairment of
mass. This is to be done in accordance with ISO 16979. function of the component is caused through the
directional moisture coefficient of expension.

B Section 12 –Wooden Materials 12-3
1.6 The safety factors used in the strength over 3 mm : ±5 %, but maximum ±0.5 mm.
calculations is to be agreed on in each case with TL.
2.4 Bonding
2. Plywood
2.4.1 The plywood panels are to be bonded without
2.1 General flaws For this purpose, compliance with all decisive
factors such as wood moisture content, pressing power,
2.1.1 Plywood consists of individual layers which are pressing temperature, pressing duration, glue
bonded together. In general, the layers can comprise characteristics, charging etc. is to be observed
veneers, wooden slats or small wooden slats. The continually and carefully.
panels described in these rules as plywood are to
consist exclusively of veneer layers. At present, the following synthetically-based adhesives
are approved by TL for plywood production:
2.1.2 The plywood panels consist of at least three
veneers bonded transversely to each other (Table - Phenolic adhesive (including phenolic adhesive
12.1) by means of curable synthetic resin adhesives. film),
The resistance of the adhesives to water and weather is
to be demonstrated by long-term and outdoor testing. - Melamine resin adhesives,
The number of veneer layers is dependent on the
thickness and is defined in C. and D. - Resorcinol resin adhesives.
2.2 Grades 2.4.2 If a new glue is used, then faultless, error-free

handling and bonding is to be demonstrated to TL as
2.2.1 The plywood panels are divided into two well as absolute resistance to water and boiling.
grades TL 1 and TL 2.
2.5 Structure and requirements
2.2.2 Both grades are identical with regard to re-
quired strengths, including resistance to adhesives. The Different requirements apply to the structures and
only distinction is that the panels of grade TL 1 are plywood panels used in boatbuilding and aviation, as
suitable for use in one piece, whilst those of grade TL 2 listed in C. and D. respectively.
may, because of non-permissible defects in the middle
and outer layers, only be used separately after removal 2.6 Certificates
of the defects.
2.6.1 TL issues certificates for tested and approved
2.3 Panel dimensions plywood panels, and these are handed over to the
manufacturer and/or customer.
2.3.1 The dimensions of the plywood panels are to
be specified by the customer, if standard dimensions in 2.6.2 The certificate specifies, among other things,
accordance with DIN EN 313-1 are not used. the plywood type, the number of plywood panels
inspected, the stamping and, if requested, the average
2.3.2 The length of the panels is measured parallel values of the test results.
to the grain of the outer layer, and is always specified
first. The longitudinal and transversal tolerances are ±5 2.6.3 Independent of the testing by TL, the
mm. manufacturer is obliged to continually carry out his own
shop-based quality control during all working steps, the
2.3.3 The permissible thickness deviation is: selection of the wood and its processing during
production of the plywood panels.
up to 3 mm : ±10 %

12-4 Section 12 –Wooden Materials B,C
2.7 Storage of the plywood panels 1.5 The points listed under B.2 are to be taken into
account.
2.7.1 Finished plywood panels which are placed in
storage are to be kept in closed rooms and stored hori- Table 12.1 Minimum number and thickness of the
zontally. veneer layers
2.7.2 The plywood panels are only to be placed in Greatest

Minimum
horizontal stores that are at least 30 cm above the Plywood Minimum thickness
thickness
ground and from the walls, in order to avoid the effects thickness number of of the
of the outer
of moisture. [mm] veneer layers inner
layers
layers
2.7.3 The individual piles are to be protected against Up to 6 3
moisture from one side by covering panels. Over 6 to 10 5 1.5 mm 2.6 mm
Over 10 to 15 7
2.7.4 Non-compliance with these storage Over 15 to 20 7
requirements can lead to previous tests being declared Over 20 to 26 9
invalid. Over 26 to 34 11
1.5 mm 3.8 mm
Over 34 to 40 13
2.8 Strength calculations Over 40 to 48 15
Over 48 to 55 17
The safety factors used in the strength calculations are

to be agreed on, in each case, with TL. 2. Structure
2.1 The selection of timber and the structure of the

C. Boatbuilding Plywood panels (number of veneer layers) are to be appropriate
for the field of application. Depending on the application,
1. General strong, durable timber - e.g. makoré and the hard,
durable mahogany types of strength group F1 (Table
1.1 All plywood components exposed to water and 12.2) - with several thin inner layers of veneer is to be
weather, or used in primary structural components selected for load-carrying components subject to high
(such as the deck, shell and bulkheads), are to be pro- stresses. On the other hand, plywood panels of lighter,
duced from boatbuilding plywood that has been tested
less strong, and less durable timber of strength group
and in compliance with 10.6.
F2 - e.g. khaya mahogany, okumé - with thicker and
fewer inner layers of veneer and good surface
1.2 Boatbuilding plywood consists of at least three
protection are suitable for linings.
veneers bonded crosswise together (Table 12.1) by
means of curable synthetic-resin adhesives. The
resistance of these adhesives to water and weather is to 2.2 In general, veneers of 1.5 mm thickness are
be demonstrated by long-term and outdoor testing. used for the outer layers. However, efforts are to be
made to use thicker outer layers because of the later
1.3 As plywood can also be destroyed in suitable reworking necessary in boatbuilding. However, their
conditions by animal or plant pests, timber is to be used thickness is not to exceed 2.6 mm because of increased
which offers a natural resistance. danger of shakes in the veneers. In the case of inner
layers, veneer layers in plywood panels up to 15 mm
1.4 Independent of the testing by TL, the thick may not have a thickness in excess of 2.6 mm
manufacturer is obliged to continually carry out his own because of potential defects. For plywood panels thicker
shop-based quality control of all working steps, the
than 15 mm, veneer layers thicker than 3.8 mm may not
selection of the wood and its processing during
be used.

C Section 12 –Wooden Materials 12-5
Table 12.2 Plywood strength groups
Mean tensile strength of

Density, air- plywood
Timber type Botanical name dried approx. Durability
3
[g/cm ] Longitudinal Transverse
2 2
[N/mm ] [N/mm ]
Strength group: F1 (for load bearing components)
Teak Tectona grandis 0.64 I ≥ 40 ≥ 30
Macore Dumoria hekelii 0.62 I ≥ 40 ≥ 30
Douka Dumoria africana 0.62 I ≥ 40 ≥ 30
Utile Entandrophragma utile 0.57 II ≥ 40 ≥ 30
Entandrophragma
Sapele-Mahogany 0.59 III ≥40 ≥ 30
cylindricum
Oak Quercus sp. 0.63 II ≥ 40 ≥ 30
Strength group F2 (1)
Echtes Mahagoni Switenia macrophylla 0.49 II < 40, but > 30 < 30, but > 20
Khaja Mahagoni Khaja ivorensis 0.45 II - III < 40, but > 30 < 30, but > 20
Okume (Gaboon) Aucoumea - Klaineana 0.41 IV - V < 40, but > 30 < 30, but > 20
(1) Only for non-load bearing components.
2.3 Only in special cases and with the explicit 3. Veneer Joints
permission by TL this restriction can be waived. Such
plywood panels are then assigned to the strength group 3.1 The joints are to be sealed perfectly and bond
F2 and marked accordingly in the TL stamp. the veneers to each other by butt joints. The joints are
to be glued on a suitable joint bonding machine.
2.4 A list of the required minimum number and
thickness of the veneer layers is given in Table 12.3. 3.2 The strips of veneer of the outer layers are to
be put together so that they match with regard to timber
2.5 The veneer layers are to be symmetrical and color.
around the middle layer, both with respect to the grain

3.3 Sealed joints between all layers are a precon-
as well as to the thickness of the layers.
dition for boatbuilding plywood panels.
2.6 The strength of the plywood panel can be

3.4 Paper or plastic adhesive strips may not be
increased, or its property adapted to specific
used to secure or repair inner veneer layers.
requirements, through an increased number of veneer
layers, addition of extra glue and increased pressing
3.5 The joints of the different veneer layers are to
power, as well as through insertion of fabric layers.
be staggered.
2.7 For the production of boatbuilding plywood

3.6 Metal clamps used for securing purposes may
panels, only wood which is of the best quality, flawless,
only be positioned on the edges of the panels. They are
healthy, free from sap and spring wood is to be used for
on no account to remain on the panels when they are
the outer and inner layers.
cut to standard dimensions.

12-6 Section 12 –Wooden Materials C
4. Strength Groups furthermore, the quality, color and grain is to be com-

bined in such a manner that they match. The hidden
4.1 With regard to their suitability for the production surface may have small color differences or slight
of boatbuilding plywood, the types of timber listed in blemishes which do not influence the strength of the
Table 12.2 are currently approved. The timber is panel.
subdivided into two strength groups. Also shown is the

natural durability and weathering resistance of the 6. Defects
mentioned types of timber.

6.1 The following wood and production defects are
not permissible in the outer and inner veneer layers:
4.2 The plywood panels may be manufactured
from one or several of the approved kinds of timber. If
6.1.1 Any bonding defects,
panels comprise different types of timber of both
strength groups, then all panels are assigned to the
6.1.2 Loose contra-shaving wood; strongly curly-
group with the lower strength.
grained, short-fibred wood growth at right angles to the
run of the grain; cross-cut timber,
4.3 All boatbuilding plywood panels which are
manufactured according to special specifications and
6.1.3 Larger, more prominent wood discoloration or
conditions of the customer, or deviate from TL
mould stains which tend to cause rot and all other
requirements, are assigned to the appropriate group
defects which could have a noticeable affect on the
and stamped according to the plywood type.
strength of the panel,
4.4 Other types of wood may only be used for 6.1.4 Wood discoloration on both sides, or strong
making plywood panels upon agreement with TL. The glue bleeding on both sides,
manufacturer is always to remain responsible for the
correct selection of the quality and type of wood. 6.1.5 Loose black (dead) knots, holes, loose joints or
blocking cracks in the veneer layers,
5. Plywood Grades
6.1.6 Overlapping of the veneer layers (folding).
5.1 Boatbuilding plywood of the two strength
groups is subdivided into two grades after inspecting its The following can be permitted:
external and internal quality. In relation to their
respective groups, grades I and II are identical with 6.1.7 Up to three healthy tight knots of 15 mm
regard to type of wood, strength, production and diameter maximum for each side of the panel,
bonding. They differ insofar that the panels of grade I
can be used completely, while the panels of grade II are 6.1.8 Up to three knots of 25 mm diameter maximum
restricted to partial use because of local manufacturing on each side of the panel which have been perfectly
defects or timber flaws. repaired,
5.2 The defects of grade II are to be limited to one 6.1.9 Up to three cracks of the veneer edge which
have been perfectly repaired. The cracks may be up to
third of the area of the panel. Two thirds of the panel is
1/10 of the panel length and on each side of the panel,
to be free of defects and suitable for use. The defects
are identified during inspection by marking.
6.1.10 Small local edge flaws up to 3 cm length do not
have to be considered.
5.3 The visible side of the plywood panel is to be
manufactured virtually without any defects and,

Only one of the defects mentioned in 6.1.7, 6.1.8 and shop by surveyor of TL.
6.1.9 can be present.
10.1.2 The inspection of finished plywood panels
7. Repairs outside of the manufacturing shop is carried out by TL
only by way of exception and under stricter test condi-
7.1 Repairs may be carried out on the finished, tions.
pressed boatbuilding plywood panels to a limited extent,
provided that the quality of the panel is not impaired in 10.1.3 TL reserves the right to also monitor the
any way. The repairs are to be carried out at the production of the plywood panels in the manufacturing
appropriate temperature under pressing power with a shop.
glue which is resistant to water and weather.
10.2 Inspection of the plywood panels

7.2 Shakes of up to 1/10 of the panel length and 1
mm width, and small knot holes up to 5 mm, may be
10.2.1 The condition of all boatbuilding plywood
repaired with wood putty of the same color.
panels is inspected and tested by TL surveyors after
their completion. In particular, attention is paid to
7.3 Wider shakes and defects of up to 1/10 of the
bonding. The panels are allocated to the appropriate
panel length are to be bonded so that they are weather-
plywood strength group and grade, depending on the
resistant. In doing so, care is to be taken when fitting
type of plywood and the quality and stamped.
and selecting the strips such that they are from appro-
priate timber and have the same color. The repair work
10.2.2 The plywood panels submitted to TL for
is to be carried out under pressure in accordance with
DIN 68705-2 BFU 100. inspection is to be examined, pre-graded, finished and
then divided into test batches or orders by the manu-
8. Surface treatment facturer prior to inspection by the TL surveyor. Panels
with faulty gluing are examined more closely to de-
8.1 After pressing, the plywood panels are to be termine whether the faults are locally or present over
subjected to sufficient soaking to ensure that their the whole panel. If the latter is true, the entire test batch
moisture content again rises to 6 - 12 %. The plywood is tested with special care. If there are several such
panels may either remain unsanded or be lightly panels in a test batch, then the entire batch is rejected.
sanded. If leaky joints or blocking cracks are found at the
plywood edges of the inner layers, then these defects
8.2 The outer layers of the plywood panels cut to are not to be plugged before the TL inspection. The TL
their final dimensions are to be at least 1.0 mm (after surveyor will decide whether these defects can be
the pressing and sanding) at the thinnest point. When corrected, or whether the panel is to be rejected or
sanding the panels, special care is to be taken to en- assigned to grade II.
sure that this requirement is met.
10.3 Grading of the plywood panels
9. Panel dimensions
Grading of the panels are to be in accordance with the
9.1 The dimensions of the plywood panels are differences between grades I and II stipulated in C,5.
specified by the customer if standard dimensions are The panels are marked with the appropriate grade
not used (see B.2.3). stamp.
10. Testing 10.4 Sampling
10.1 General 10.4.1 For the inspection of boatbuilding plywood

panels, sample panels are taken from test batch
10.1.1 In general, the finished boatbuilding plywood intended for inspection and provided with a sample
panels are tested and approved at the manufacturing number.

10.4.2 Test pieces of approx. 25 cm length and 100 10.5 Sample type and quantity
cm width are removed from these sample panels and
provided with the sample number of the test panel. From every test panel (or test strip) to be tested, the
following samples are to be taken and prepared:
10.4.3 The required samples are prepared from
these sample pieces, and again provided with the 10.5.1 Two samples for the delamination test in
sample numbers of the test panel. order to determine, in accordance with DIN 53255, the
bonding strength of the glue.
10.4.4 If only a few panels of a particular plywood
type, or very thick and large panels, are submitted for 10.5.2 Eight samples in accordance with DIN 53255
inspection, and if the effort involved in cutting these for the adhesive tensile lap-shear test to check the
panels appears to be too great, then samples can also delamination test. Simple tensile lap-shear samples are
be taken from pieces cut off the edge of these panels. to be used in accordance with Fig. 12.1.
For this purpose, it is necessary, when trimming these
panels, to put the edge cuttings aside.
10.4.5 The number of test panels is determined

according to the following factors:
10.4.5.1 If continuous inspections by TL in the

manufacturing shop show that the production of the
boatbuilding plywood panels appears to be reliable, and
if the production is monitored continuously by suitable,
automatic facilities or supervision, then it is not neces-
sary to take test panels from each test batch.
10.4.5.2 It is sufficient to select approximately 2 % (by

number) of the panels from the current production to be
used as samples.
10.4.5.3 It is to be ensured that the test panels cover

all plywood thicknesses and types.
10.4.5.4 If production problems occur, or if the TL

surveyor has the impression that the production is not
always reliable, then the surveyor can insist on the
selection a greater number of test panels.
10.4.5.5 If one or several test panels should exhibit

inadequate values during the inspection, then an
additional two panels from the same test batch are to be Fig. 12.1 Typical representation of a 3-ply longi-
tested. If, once again, the minimum requirements are tudinal and a 5-ply transverse tensile lap-shear
not satisfied during this inspection, then the complete sample
test batch is to be rejected.

10.5.3 Six samples for the longitudinal strength test 10.6.2 Plywood strength test
and six samples for the transverse strength test to
determine the plywood tensile strengths in accordance 10.6.2.1 The six longitudinal tensile-strength samples
with DIN 52377. and the six transverse tensile-strength samples are to
undergo acclimatization prior to testing in the testing
10.5.4 Two kiln-dried samples for the determination equipment and their moisture content is to be adjusted
of the moisture content of the plywood and the specific to 12 - 15 %.
weight (apparent density) in accordance with ISO
16979. 10.6.2.2 From each of the six samples, three
longitudinal and three transverse samples are to be
10.6 Pre-treatment and testing of the samples tested in the testing machine and the average strength
value determined for these three samples.
10.6.1 Glue bonding strength samples
10.6.2.3 The two batches of three remaining samples
10.6.1.1 Two delamination samples and eight tensile serve as replacement samples for those samples which
lap-shear samples are used for testing the bonding exhibit fractures at the clamping device with insufficient
strength of the glue. values. The fractured samples are then not to be used
for evaluation purposes.
10.6.1.2 Before testing, these samples are to be
subject to a boiling/drying alternation test and a short- 10.6.2.4 The samples are to have the minimum ply-
time test BFU 100 in accordance with DIN 68705-2 and wood strengths as specified in Table 12.2.
is to satisfy the following test conditions.
10.6.2.5 Plywood made from other types of timber is
10.6.1.3 Storage of the samples in boiling water with to be included in the strength group with which its
intermediate drying at 60 °C in the following cycle: properties comply.
4 hours boiling 10.6.2.6 If the production and the plywood strength at

16 hours drying a manufacturing shop is continually monitored by TL
4 hours boiling and if the determination of the plywood strength of
2 hours cooling under water at 20°C individual test batches is considered to be irrelevant,
then the inspection and determination of the plywood
10.6.1.4 The two delamination samples are to be strengths of these test batches can be waived.
subjected to a delamination test after this pre-treatment.
The bonding is to offer considerable resistance to the 10.6.2.7 If plywood panels of the timber and strength
forceful delamination of the veneers by means of a group F1 do not achieve the required minimum plywood
delamination tool, and the fracture area is to exhibit strength values of this group, then these panels can be
wood fracture and flawless bonding. assigned to the plywood strength group F2 and
stamped accordingly.
10.6.1.5 The eight tensile lap-shear samples are to be
tested in a wet condition in the testing machine and 10.6.2.8 All boatbuilding plywood panels which are
shall satisfy the following minimum values: manufactured according to special specifications and
conditions of the customers, or which deviate from TL
For timber of the strength group F1: rules, are stamped according to their plywood type and
2
at least 1.5 N/mm strength group. The deviations or special features of
such plywood panels are to be recorded in the test
For timber of the strength group F2: certificate.
2
at least 1.2 N/mm

10.6.3 Moisture test - Stamping by the manufacturer:
10.6.3.1 The two kiln-dried samples are used for - Sign or mark of the manufacturing shop
determining the moisture content of plywood. They shall
be examined in accordance with ISO 16979. The - Size and thickness of the panel the plywood
moisture content of the plywood is to be 5 - 12 % ex thickness is given in mm, the length and
works. width of the panel in cm. The first dimension
indicates the length of the panel in the
10.6.3.2 Measurements of the moisture content of longitudinal fibre direction of the outer layers.
plywood by means of electrical measuring instruments
can only be approved if check measurements using the - Timber used for the outer and inner layers
kiln-dried samples have shown approximately identical (separated by a dash).
values.
- Bonding type: "BFU 100"
10.6.4 Determination of specific weight
The panels may be stamped neutrally, i. e. without the
10.6.4.1 For the determination of the specific weight of manufacturer's details, if explicitly so required by the
the plywood panels, the two kiln-dried samples are to be customer.
measured and weighed as precisely as possible in dry-
air conditions before the kiln-drying. - Stamping by TL:
10.6.5 Inspection of the plywood scarf jointing - A rectangular TL stamp, with the following
details
The plywood scarf jointing is to be carried out in
accordance with the conditions specified in E.2. and - Boatbuilding plywood
bonded with glues approved by TL under pressing
power and pressing temperature without any flaws. The - Strength group
bonding of the scarf joint is to be checked by bending
the panels over a test frame or a roller. If the scarf joints - Plywood grade I (or II)
appear to be of doubtful quality, then this bending test is
to be performed for both sides of the panels. - Türk Loydu
10.6.6 Additional tests - Testing date
If for any reason the TL surveyor has any doubts - Respective certificate
regarding the production and in particular the bonding of
the plywood panels and its scarf jointing, then he is to As a rule, the stamping is to be applied on the bottom
be entitled to subject the test batch to additional tests of right of that side of the panel which is of lesser quality (i.
his choice, e. g. prising-open tests, knocking-off tests, e. on the back).
bending tests, warping tests, soaking tests etc.
11.2 In the case of long scarf-jointed panels, the TL
11. Marking and stamping stamp is to be made on both ends of the panel.
11.1 All boatbuilding plywood panels inspected by 11.3 Since inspection is only carried out randomly,
TL surveyors and found to be in order are to be the inspector is entitled to reject panels which have
provided with the following stamping to identify the already been stamped, if they should prove to be
plywood type, grade and production: defective.

C,D Section 12 –Wooden Materials 12-11
12. Certificates Table 12.3 Minimum number and thickness of the

veneer layers
12.1 Türk Loydu issues certificates for boatbuilding
plywood panels which have been tested and approved, Minimum
Plywood thickness
and these certificates are given to the manufacturer or number of Remarks
[mm]
veneer layers
customer.
Up to 2 3 No layer is
From 2 to 6 5 to be
12.2 The certificate shows, among other things, the thicker than
From 6 to 14 7 2 mm
plywood types, the number of plywood panels
Over 14 ≥9
inspected, the stamp and, if requested, the average
values of the test results.
2. Structure
13. Storage of the plywood panels

2.1 The selection of the timber and the structure of
the panels (number of veneer layers) are to be
13.1 Finished plywood panels which are placed in
appropriate for the field of application.
storage is to be kept in closed rooms and stored hori-
zontally.
2.2 The veneer layers are to be symmetrical
around the middle layer, both with respect to the grain
13.2 The plywood panels are only to be placed in
as well as to the thickness of the layers.
horizontal stores that are at least 30 cm above the
ground and from the walls, in order to avoid the effects
2.3 The thicknesses are to be selected in such a
of moisture.
way that, as far as possible, the same strength is
ensured in the longitudinal and lateral direction. TL
13.3 The individual stacks are to be protected
reserves the right to exclude any panels with an
against moisture from one side by covering panels.
unsuitable structure from the testing.
13.4 Non-compliance with these storage 2.4 Table 12.3 gives a list of the required minimum
requirements can lead to previous tests being declared number and thickness of the veneer layers
invalid.
2.5 Birch, beech, alder, okume (gaboon) or other
timber may be used, provided that the properties of the
D. Plywood for Aircraft respective timber strength group are ensured.
1. General 2.6 Only binding agents (adhesives) authorized by

TL may be used.
1.1 The plywood consists of at least three
transversely veneer layers (Table 12.3). The bonding is 2.7 Surface treatment
with curable synthetic resin adhesives. The resistance
of the adhesives to water and weather is to be 2.7.1 The panels may be manufactured as
demonstrated by long-term and outdoor testing. unsanded, lightly sanded, scoured, smoothed, resined
or unresined.
1.2 Independence of the testing by Türk Loydu, the
manufacturer is obliged to carry out his own shop-based 2.7.2 The outer layers are stil to be thick enough
quality control of all working steps continually, the after processing so that reliable subsequent processing
selection of the wood and its processing during is ensured.
3. Veneer Joints
1.3 The points listed under B.2 are to be taken into
account. 3.1 Unless otherwise agreed between contractor

12-12 Section 12 –Wooden Materials D
and manufacturer, panels bonded with synthetic-resin 4.3 Other types of wood may only be used for
adhesive may have veneer joints parallel to fibre making plywood panels upon agreement with TL. The
direction in the middle and outer layers. manufacturer is always to remain responsible for the
correct selection of the quality and type of wood.
3.2 The joints are to be sealed perfectly and bond
the veneers to each other by butt joints. The joints are 5. Plywood Grades
to be glued on a suitable joint bonding machine.
5.1 Plywood of the two strength groups is
3.3 The joints of the various veneer layers are to subdivided into two grades after inspecting its external
be staggered. and internal quality. In relation to their respective
groups, grades I and II are identical with regard to type
3.4 The strips of veneer of the outer layers are to of wood, strength, production and bonding. They differ
be put together so that they match with regard to timber insofar that the panels of grade I can be used
and color. completely, while the panels of grade II are restricted to
partial use because of local manufacturing defects or
3.5 Paper or plastic adhesive strips may not be timber flaws.
used to secure or repair inner veneer layers.
5.2 The defects of grade II are to be limited to one
3.6 Metal clamps used for securing purposes may third of the panel area. Two thirds of the panel area to
only be positioned on the edges of the panels. They are be free of defects and suitable for use. The defects are
on no account to remain on the panels when they are identified during inspection by marking.
cut to standard dimensions.
5.3 The visible side of the plywood panel is to be
4. Strength Groups manufactured virtually without any defects and,
furthermore, the quality, color and grain is to be com-
4.1 With regard to their suitability for the production bined in such a manner that they match. The hidden-
of aviation plywood, the timbers listed in Table 12.4 surface may have small color differences or slight
currently approved; these have been divided into two blemishes which do not influence the strength of the
strength groups. panel.
4.2 In the case of panels over 3 mm thick, these

values may be reduced by a maximum of 10 %.
Table 12.4 Strength groups
Mean tensile strength of plywood MPa

2
[N/mm ]
Timber Strength group
Long. + transv.
Longitudinal Transverse
(added)
Birch ≥ 70 ≥ 45 ≥ 140
Beech F1 ≥ 70 ≥ 45 ≥ 140
Alder ≥ 70 ≥ 45 ≥ 140
Okume (Gaboon) ≥ 45 ≥ 30 ≥ 90
F2
Poplar ≥ 45 ≥ 30 ≥ 90

D Section 12 –Wooden Materials 12-13
6. Defects - Unbonded, open and badly closed joints
6.1 The following wood and production defects are - Folds and shakes, breaks, peeling defects and
not permissible in the outer and inner veneer layers: bubbles as well as other such defects which
decrease the strength of the panel.
- Loose, pith knots, rotten knots, holes in the
middle layers, (Up to three instances of damage, folds or
shakes less than 30 mm from the edge of the
- Firm knots over 6 mm diameter, panel do not have to be taken into consideration
if they are not on opposite sides of the panel.)
- In the case of three-ply panels, more than four
2
knots per m in one layer, - Corrugated or bent panels
- A distance of less than 200 mm between the - Areas without binding agent, e.g. damage to the
knots, film of glue, insofar as these areas were not
covered
- In the case of five- or multi-ply panels, more than
six knots in one layer and less than 150 mm - Heavy glue bleeding on more than one side of a
distance between the knots. panel
If the panel sizes are different to those specified 7. Testing
above, the number of the permissible knots

7.1.1 In general, the finished plywood panels are
changes in accordance with the area. Knots up
tested and approved at the manufacturing shop by a
to 30 mm from the edge do not have to be taken
surveyor of TL.
into consideration.
7.1.2 The inspection of finished plywood panels

- Short-grained, curly-grained and cross-grained
outside of the manufacturing shop is carried out by TL
wood, variegated appearance and
only by way of exception and under stricter testing
discolorations, and mould stains if they decrease
conditions.
the strength and bending capability significantly.
7.1.3 TL reserves the right to also monitor the

Small signs of mould stains as well as bark
production of the plywood panels in the manufacturing
specks do not have to be taken into
shop.
consideration.
7.2 Inspection of the plywood panels

Short-grained or curly-grained wood covers such
wood whose grain is interrupted and which has 7.2.1 With respect to structure, and in particular
different growth directions. bonding, all plywood panels are examined by TL and
carefully tested after their completion by a TL surveyor.
- Knot and shake scars and intergrown knots. The panels are assigned, depending on the plywood
type and quality, to the appropriate plywood strength
Furthermore, the following manufacturing errors are not group and grade. They are then graded and provided
allowed: with the appropriate group and grade stamp.
- Joints which transgress the defined type, and 7.2.2 The plywood panels submitted to TL for
inserted pieces (shims) inspection shall be examined, pre-graded, finished and
then divided into test batches or orders by the

manufacturer prior to TL inspection. Panels with faulty monitored continuously by suitable, automatic facilities
gluing are examined more closely to determine whether or supervision, then it is not necessary to take test
they are only limited locally or are present over the panels from each test batch.
whole panel. If the latter is true, the entire test batch is
tested with special care. If there are several such panels 7.4.5.2 It is sufficient to select approximately 2 % (by
in a test batch, then the entire batch is rejected. If leaky number) of the panels from the current production to be
joints or blocking cracks are found at the plywood edges used as samples.
of the inner layers, then these defects are not to be
plugged before the TL inspection and decision of the TL 7.4.5.3 It is to be ensured that test panels cover all
surveyor as to whether these defects can be corrected, plywood thicknesses and types.
or whether the panel is to be rejected or assigned to
grade II. 7.4.5.4 If production problems occur, or if the TL
surveyor has the impression that the production is not
7.3 Grading of the plywood panels always reliable, then the surveyor can insist on the
selection of a greater number of test panels.
7.3.1 Grading the panels are to be in accordance
with the differences between grades I and II specified in 7.4.5.5 If one or several test panels should exhibit
D,5. The panels are marked with the appropriate grade inadequate values during the inspection, then an
stamp. additional two panels from the same test batch are to be
tested. If, once again, the minimum requirements are
7.4 Sampling not satisfied during this inspection, then the complete
test batch is to be rejected.
7.4.1 For the inspection of the plywood panels, test
panels are taken from the test batch submitted for 7.5 General quality of the panels
inspection and provided with a sample number.
7.5.1 The general quality at the panels are to be
7.4.2 Test pieces of approx. 25 cm length and 100 determined by an external examination.
cm width are removed from these sample panels and
provided with the sample number of the test panel. 7.5.2 The internal quality is to be examined against
the light provided by a suitable source of illumination of
7.4.3 From these test pieces, the required samples sufficient intensity in a well darkened room.
are prepared and again provided with the sample
number of the test panel. 7.5.3 All panels up to a thickness which allows
examination against light are to be subject to this
7.4.4 If only a few panels of a particular plywood inspection:
type, or very thick and large panels, are submitted for
inspection, and if the effort involved in cutting these - Light timber, e.g. birch: up to 3.0 mm thickness,
panels appears to be too great, then samples can also
be taken from pieces cut off the edge of these panels. - Darker timber, such as beech or okumé
For this purpose, it is necessary, when trimming these (gaboon): up to 1.5 mm thickness.
panels, to put the edge cuttings aside.
7.6 Thickness deviations
7.4.5 The number of test panels is determined
according to the following factors: Deviations in production, especially with regard to the
thickness, are to comply with the requirements of the
7.4.5.1 If continuous inspections by TL in the manu- customer. If no other specifications exist, then the
facturing shop show that the production of the plywood values listed in B.2 are to be used.
panels appears to be reliable, and if the production is

7.7 Moisture test
7.7.1 Two kiln-drying samples are used for

determining the moisture of plywood. This is to be done
in accordance with EN 322. The moisture content of the
plywood is to be 5 - 12 % ex works.
7.7.2 Measurements of the moisture content of

plywood by means of electrical measuring instruments
can only be approved if check measurements using the
kiln-dried samples have shown approximately identical
values.
Fig. 12.2 Longitudinal sample for a 3-ply plywood

7.8 Tensile strength
panel
7.8.1 The strength of at least three samples parallel

to and three samples at right angles to the fibre
direction of the outer layers of each test panel is to be
determined by means of tensile testing in a calibrated
testing machine.
7.8.2 The tensile strength is to be determined in

accordance with DIN 52377, using the test pieces
specified therein.
7.8.3 The average value of the results for the same

test panel is taken as the result of the test.
7.9 Tensile lap-shear test Fig. 12.3 Transverse sample for a 5-ply plywood
panel
7.9.1 The tensile lap-shear test is to be carried out in
accordance with DIN 53255.
7.9.2 The tensile lap-shear strength is to be deter-

mined with at least five samples from each test panel in
a wet condition by shearing off the bonded area in a
calibrated testing machine, as well as with two boiling
samples of 10 cm x 10 cm dimensions:
- Samples for 3-ply panels in accordance with Fig.

12.2.
- Samples for 5-ply panels in accordance with

Figs. 12.3 and 12.6.
- Samples for 7-ply panels in accordance with

Figs. 12.4 and 12.7.
panel
- Samples for 9-ply panels in accordance with Fig.

12.5.

large enough so that the layers do not detach

themselves too easily. See Table 12.5 for
recommended lengths.
7.9.4 Adhesive samples of 5-ply and multi-ply panels

having thin veneer thickness which cannot, or cannot
easily, be penetrated in accordance with Figs. 12.6 and
Fig. 12.5 Transverse sample for a 9-ply plywood 12.7, is to be prepared in accordance with Figs. 12.3,
panel 12.4 and 12.6; however, the fibres of the outer layers
are to be in the transverse direction in the case of 5-ply
panels, and parallel to the longitudinal direction of the
sample in the case of 7-ply panels. Routing of three or
four layers is to be performed on each side.
7.9.5 The samples shall have been immersed in

water prior to the test for a sufficient period of time to
ensure complete soaking.
panel Recommended values for soaking at room temperature
(15 - 20 °C):
- 24 hours for samples up to 2 mm thickness,
- For thicknesses greater than 2 mm, the required

time is determined by linear extrapolation.
Soaking of the samples may be substituted by three

Fig. 12.7 Transverse sample for a 7-ply plywood hours of boiling (three-hour immersion in boiling water).
panel
7.9.6 The strength after soaking or after boiling of
7.9.3 Recommended values for the routing the samples is to be determined in a wet state and shall
2
lengths of the adhesive samples be at least 2 N/mm .
The tested bonding area is to be small enough so that 7.9.7 Isolated values may be up to 10 % below this
no wood shake occurs, and on the other hand is to be requirement.
Table 12.5 Recommended values for routing lengths
Panel thickness = s in mm Up to 0.8 12 1.5 3 4 5 6 8 10-14 16-20
Cutting length = ℓ mm 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
Glue surface for the samples acc. Fig. 12.2, 12.3, 12.4 and 12.5 = Cutting length 1 x width of sample,
Glue surface for the samples acc. Fig. 12.6 and 12.7 = 2 x cutting length 1 x width of sample.

7.9.8 In addition, a three-hour boiling test is to be PH = Bonded with phenolic resin

performed twice on two 10 cm x 10 cm samples from
each test panel. The samples are to be first boiled for M = Bonded with melamine resin
three hours in water and then dried at 60 °C. After this,
they are again to be boiled for three hours, cooled in R = Bonded with resorcinol resin
warm water for two hours at 20 °C and then, in a wet
state, is to either be manually or with suitable equipment As an alternative, the type of bonding can be identified
bent several times back and forth until they break. In by "BFU 100".
doing so, there shall be no sign of loosening of the
individual veneer layers, no embrittlement or 8.1.2 Stamping by Türk Loydu
unfavourable appearance of the glue joint.
- A stamp that identifies the grade TL 1 or 2, the
7.9.9 If the TL surveyor notices anything unusual in number of the test batch and the year of testing
this respect, the Surveyor is then to increase the
number of the tests and carry them out on the panels in - The stamps are to be applied by means of a
question. roller stamp diagonally across the panel on the
side of lesser quality.
7.9.10 In the case of bonding with phenolic resin,
boiling tests may be omitted at the discretion of the TL 8.2 Since inspection is only carried out randomly,
surveyor. the surveyor is entitled to reject panels which have
already been stamped, if they should prove to be
7.10 Additional tests defective.
7.10.1 If the TL surveyor has any doubts regarding 8.3 TL is entitled to stop providing stamps if
the production and, in particular, the correct bonding of production defects occur continually.
the plywood panels and its scarf jointing, then the
Surveyor is authorized to subject the test batch to 9. Certificates
additional tests.
9.1 Türk Loydu issues certificates for tested and
For example: prising-open tests, knocking-off tests, approved plywood panels, and these certificates are
bending tests, warping tests, soaking tests etc. handed over to the manufacturer or customer.
8. Marking and Stamping 9.2 The certificate specifies, among other things,
the plywood type, the number of plywood panels
8.1 Each panel which satisfies these Rules and is inspected, the stamping and, if requested, the average
approved is to be provided with the following stamp: values of the test results.
8.1.1 Stamping by the manufacturer: 10. Storage of the Plywood Panels
- Sign or mark of the manufacturer, 10.1 Finished plywood panels placed in storage are
to be kept in closed rooms.
- Thickness of the panel in mm and the timber
used. 10.2 The plywood panels are only to be placed in
horizontal stores that are at least 30 cm above the
- Letters which identify the type of bonding e.g. ground and from the walls, in order to avoid the effects
of moisture.
T = Bonded with Tego film

12-18 Section 12 –Wooden Materials D,E
10.3 The individual stacks are to be protected sequent volume contraction, it is recommended that the
against moisture from one side by covering panels. timber be dried to an average moisture content that is
the same as, or just below, the average moisture
10.4 Non-compliance with these storage content of the component,
requirements can lead to previous tests being declared
invalid. 1.6 If adhesives on a formaldehyde basis are used
(e.g. for boatbuilding timber), then a pre-drying time for
the moist joining surface for 5 - 10 minutes may be
E. Joining of Wood Materials necessary to enable low-molecular substances to
escape.
1. Laminated and Multilayered Components
1.7 Sufficiently long clamping times is to be
1.1 In order to reduce variations in the character- adhered to, depending on the bonding temperature. In
istic values of wood and therefore to arrive at reason- the case of curved or welded parts, the clamping time
able safety factors to be applied in designing structural shall be extended accordingly.
elements, the wood is homogenized by means of lami-
nation. Laminated components are bonded components 2. Scarf Jointing
consisting of individual layers (at least three) of sawn
timber which have the same grain direction. 2.1 The joint ends are to be precisely joined in
order to avoid faulty gluing or other defects.
1.2 Multilayered components are bonded compo-
nents in which the individual layers (at least three)
consist of sawn timber and have different grain
directions. The thickness of the individual laminates de-
pends on the shape of the components to be laminated.
However, the laminate thicknesses shall not, if possible,
be less than 5 mm and are to not exceed 25 mm in the
case of curved parts. In the case of straight parts, the
laminate thickness is not to be more than 40 mm.
1.3 Adhesives may only be used that are

resistant to cold and boiling water and that in the
bonded joint have the same strength as that of the wood
(see also C. and D.). A precondition for the carrying out
of gluing procedures is the availability in the workshops
of temperature and humidity controls as well as Figure 12.8 Scarf joints across the thickness
clamping facilities.
1.4 The moisture of the wood is to be 12 -15 °% 2.2 Fig. 12.8.A illustrates the correct method. Fig.
at the time of bonding; but must not exceed 18 %. 12.8.B depicts the incorrect method; it is especially
Efforts are to be made to keep the glued joint as thin as unsuitable, as faulty gluing occurs frequently because of
possible (0.1 - 0.2 mm). insufficient pressing power. The method illustrated in
Fig. 12.8.C is also wrong and causes a variety of
1.5 Since transverse compressive stresses during defects. In this case, particularly when sanding plywood
subsequent swelling of the wood are less damaging panels down until they are smooth, the outer layers are
than transverse tensile stresses brought about by sub sanded away excessively.

E,F,G Section 12 –Wooden Materials 12-19
2.3 The minimum pressing power is not to fall 1.2 A general description of the core material is
2
below 4 kg/cm . to be provided. The basic properties are to be verified
through the test certificate of a recognized testing body
2.4 Glued scarf-jointing of solid wood is to have a
chamfer length which is eight times the panel thickness. 2. Specification
2.5 For glued scarf-jointing of plywood, the ratio of 2.1 The following details are required for a general
the plywood thickness to chamfer length is to be as description:
follows.
- Commercial name,
- For panels up to 10 mm: at least 1:10
- Treatment of the wood,
- For panels over 10 mm: at least 1:8
- Storage conditions
2.6 Further information for other bonding methods
see related standards. 2.2 Through the test certificate of a recognized
testing body, the following values are to be verified:
F. Wood Protection - Raw density (DIN 52182), 3 samples
1. All timbers (with the exception of the timber of - Moisture content (ISO 16979), 3 samples
the durability group I, Table 12.2) are to be protected by
several coats of suitable protective paint, or by means
- Compressive strength II, ⊥ (DIN 52185) 6
samples
of impregnation with a proven wood preservative,
against fungi and insect infestation. Impregnation is the
- Modulus of elasticity (compression) II, ⊥ (DIN
preferred method for interior surfaces of the boat's
52185), 6 samples
components which are exposed to water or weather
(outer e.g. skin, deck, superstructure) and which have - Shear strength (DIN 53294), 6 samples
received a coat of paint impervious to vapor pressure.
- Shear modulus (DIN 53294), 6 samples
2. All plywood parts are to be protected by sev-
eral coats of paint or varnish. Special attention is to be II is parallel to the grain, and
paid to plywood edges and drill-holes by pretreating
them with recognized and proven edge protection ⊥ is perpendicular to the grain of the wood)
coatings.
2.3 The following is to apply as minimum
properties:
G. Requirement for the Core Materials of
3
Sandwich Laminates Cross-Cut Balsa Wood (1) - Apparent density 96 kg/m
1. General - Compressive strength II 5.0 MPa
- Compressive strength ⊥ 10.4 MPa

1.1 For material approval, the basic conditions
listed in Section 13, is to apply.
- Modulus of elasticity (compression) II 2275MPa
(1) Cross – cut or cross-grained wood is timber which

has been cut cross the grain.

12-20 Section 12 –Wooden Materials G
- Modulus of elasticity (compression) ⊥ 35 MPa 2.5 The tests are to be performed on samples
which exhibit none of the flaws which are still
- Shear strength 1.1 MPa permissible for processing. The surfaces must be plane
and sanded. As the testing environment, the standard
- Shear modulus 105 MPa
climate 23/50 (23 °C / 50 % relative humidity) is to be
used.
2.4 The moisture content is to be 12 ±2 %.

Section 13 - Fibre Reinforced Plastics 13-1
SECTION 13
FIBRE REINFORCED PLASTICS
Page
A. REQUIREMENTS FOR MATERIALS AND PRODUCTION ............................................................................... 13-2
1. Definitions
2. Materials
3. Approval of Materials
4. Requirements for Manufacturers
5. Guidelines for Processing
6. Manufacturing Surveillance
B. INSPECTION AND TESTING OF FIBRE COMPOSITE MATERIALS ............................................................. 13-10
1. Requirements
C. REPAIR OF COMPONENTS ........................................................................................................................... 13-19
1. General
2. Procedure
3. Documentation

13-2 Section 13 – Fibre Reinforced Plastics A
A. Requirements for Materials and Production requirement, a distinction is made between laminating
resin and coating resin. Compatibility shall be
1. Definitions demonstrated for the combination of gelcoat and
laminating resin if the basic formulation of the resins are
1.1 Fibre-reinforced plastics (FRP) not the same.
Heterogeneous materials, consisting of a thermosetting 2.1.1 Gelcoat and topcoat resin

resin as the matrix and an embedded reinforcing
material. Gelcoat and topcoat resins is to protect the surface of
the laminate from mechanical damage and
1.2 Thermosetting resin environmental influences.
Two-component mixture consisting of resin and hard- Therefore, in a cured stage, the resin is to have a high
ener as well as possible additives. resistance to existing media (e.g. fuel, river and sea
water), to maritime and industrial environments), and to
1.3 Reinforcing materials abrasion, in addition to low water absorption
capabilities. Thixotropic agents and coloring pigments
Materials generally in the form of fibre products which are the only permitted additives for gelcoat resins. In
are embedded in a matrix in order to improve certain topcoat resins, additives for low styrene evaporation are
properties. In doing so, fibres of different materials also permitted.
displaying isotropic or anisotropic properties are
processed in the form of semi-finished textile products 2.1.2 Laminating resin
(mats, rovings, fabrics, non-wovens). For special
requirements, mixtures of different fibre materials are Laminating resins are to have good impregnation char-
also used (hybrids). acteristics when being processed. In a cured stage, they
are to be resistant to fuels, river and sea water, and
1.4 Prepreg exhibit a high resistance to ageing. Furthermore,
adequate resistance to hydrolysis is to be ensured when
Reinforcing material which is pre-impregnated with a used with permissible additives and filling materials.
thermosetting resin which can be processed without any When using unsaturated polyesters (UP) as the resin,
further addition of resin or hardener. the resistance to hydrolysis is to be significantly higher
than that of standard UP resin (for example through the
1.5 Laminate use of a resin with an isophtalic acid basis).
A moulded part which is manufactured by placing layers 2.1.3 Additives

of reinforcing material on top of each other together with
the thermosetting resin. 2.1.3.1 All additives (catalysts, accelerators, filling
materials, coloring pigments etc.) are to be suitable for
1.6 Sandwich laminate the thermosetting resin and are to be compatible with it
as well as the other additives, such that a complete
Two laminate layers connected together by means of an curing of the resin can be ensured. The additives are to
intermediate core of a lighter material. be dispersed carefully throughout the resin, in
accordance with the guidelines of the manufacturer.
2. Materials
2.1.3.2 Catalysts, which initiate the hardening process,
2.1 Thermosetting resin and accelerators, which control the working time (pot
life, gel-time) and the cure time, are to be used in
Depending on the purpose, and consequently the accordance with the processing guidelines provided by

A Section 13 - Fibre Reinforced Plastics 13-3
the manufacturer. For cold-setting systems, catalysts on mats. Different materials and/or filament thicknesses
are to be proportioned in such a way that complete are possible in the individual layers.
curing is ensured between temperatures of 16 °C and
25 °C. Cold-setting systems that are to cure at 2.2.2 Fibre surface treatment with sizing, coupling
temperatures outside of this range, as well as warm- agents or finish is to be matched to the thermosetting
curing systems, may be used after consultation with TL. resin, in order to ensure adequate material properties,
also under the influence of media.
2.1.3.3 Filling materials are not significantly to impair
the properties of the cured resin. The type and quantity 2.2.3 Only low-alkaline aluminium boron silicate
of the filling materials s to be approved by TL and is not glass may be used for glass fibres (alkali oxide content
to lead to non-compliance with the minimum properties ≤ 1%), e.g. E-glass in accordance with VDE 0334/Part
of the resin In general, the proportion of filling materials 1, 9.72, Section 4.
in the laminating resin compound is not to exceed 12 %
by weight (including a maximum of 1,5 % by weight of 2.3 Core materials for sandwich constructions
the thixotropic agent). If a smaller value is specified by
the manufacturer, this value is to apply. The proportion 2.3.1 It is to be demonstrated that the core materials
of thixotropic agent in the gelcoat resin compound is not used are suitable for the intended purpose. They are not
to exceed 3 % by weight. Laminates used for fuel and to impair the curing of the laminating resin.
water tanks are not to contain filling materials.
2.3.2 The joining surfaces of local reinforcements
2.1.3.4 Coloring pigments are to be climate-proof and made of metallic materials (e.g. inlets, connections) are
consist of inorganic or non-fading organic dyes. The to be cleaned in the same manner as for a gluing
maximum permissible proportion is not to exceed the process, in order to ensure optimal bonding (cf. DIN
value specified by the manufacturer; if no value is 53281).
specified, then it is not to exceed 5 % by weight.
2.3.3 Core materials other than those listed below
2.2 Reinforcing materials may be used, provided that they are suitable for the
intended purpose and that this is accepted by TL
2.2.1 Various types of reinforcing materials with beforehand.
filaments of glass or carbon are available:
2.3.4 Rigid foam materials
Roving: A large number of parallel filaments placed
together with or without twisting. Rigid foam materials which are used as core material
for sandwich laminates, or as shear webs, are to be of a
Mat: Irregular layering of continuous filaments (fleeces), closed-cell type and have high resistance against the
or chopped rovings (minimum 50 mm long) which are laminating resin or the adhesive, as well as against
joined together by means of a binder. ageing, fuels, river and sea water. A low water absorp-
tion capability is required, together with a minimum
Fabric: Rovings woven together by means of the apparent density of 60 kg/m3.
weaving techniques used in the textile industry, such as
binding cloth, satin, body, atlas etc. Different materials It is to be ensured that the allowable temperature of
and/or filament thicknesses are possible for warp and foam material is not exceeded during the curing reaction
weft. (exothermic reaction).
Non-woven fabric: Unidirectional layers of fibres which 2.3.5 End-grained balsa wood
are laid on each other in an arbitrary manner. The
layers are fixed by thin fibre strands, either together or End-grained balsa wood used as core material for

13-4 Section 13 - Fibre Reinforced Plastics A
sandwich laminates are to fulfill the following require- 3. Approval of Materials

ments. It is to
3.1 All materials to be used during production of
- have immediately been treated after felling components from FRP are first to be assessed and ap-
against attack by fungi and insects, proved by TL. Approval by other organizations can be
recognized following agreement by TL, provided that
- be sterilized and homogenized, the tests required for approval are in accordance with o
TL requirements.
- be kiln-dried within 10 days after felling, and
3.2 The manufacturer and/or supplier of the ma-
- have an average moisture content of maximum terial is to apply to TL for approval
12 %.
3.3 Approval is granted if the material fulfils the
2.4 Prepregs requirements of TL. For this purpose, specific tests are
necessary, and they are either to be carried out under
Fibre reinforcements pre-impregnated with laminating supervision of TL or the results are to be documented in
resin shall satisfy the requirements placed on their the report of a recognized testing institute.
components. In addition, a minimum resin content of 35
% by volume is to be ensured, as well as adequate tack 3.4 Before production starts, the required material
at the processing temperature. approvals are to be submitted to TL. If no approvals, or
not all required approvals have been obtained, then as
2.5 Adhesives an exception and following agreement with TL, proof of
the properties of the basic material can be
2.5.1 When bonding fibre-reinforced plastics to- demonstrated as part of material testing of the compo-
gether, or with other materials, only solvent-free adhe- nent laminate.
sives are to be used. Preference is to be given to two-
component reaction adhesives, if possible with the 3.5 The packaging or wrapping material is to bear
same basis as the laminating resin. a reference to the approval.
2.5.2 Laminates are only to be bonded in the cured 4. Requirements for Manufacturers
state. Hot-setting adhesives generally attain a higher
strength; however, the maximum allowable temperature 4.1 General
of the materials to be bonded is not to be exceeded.
This applies especially when using single-component 4.1.1 Manufacture of FRP-components is only to be
hot-melt adhesive. performed by workshops which are approved by TL for
the manufacture of components made from fibre-
2.5.3 The adhesives are to be used in accordance reinforced thermosetting resins.
with the processing guidelines issued by the manufac-
turer. They are not to affect the materials to be bonded 4.1.2 The manufacture of FRP-components is only
and exhibit a high resistance to humidity and ageing. to be carried out by persons with sufficient professional
The influence of the operating temperature on the knowledge. This professional knowledge is in general to
adhesive strength is to be small. be verified by certificates of the corresponding training
courses. If such certificates are not available, the
2.5.4 Adhesives are to be usable within a minimum minimum requirement is to consist of training completed
temperature range of -20° to +60°C. for a technical profession, in conjunction with internal
training and several months of experience.

4.1.3 The shop approval is granted by TL on the 4.2.2 In order to control the climatic conditions,
basis of the written application and the report submitted thermographs and hydrographs are to be provided. The
by the TL surveyor. The report deals with the following equipment is to be set up following agreement with TL,
points: their number and arrangement depending on op-
erational conditions. The equipment is to be calibrated
- General information on the shop, in accordance with statutory regulations. The recordings
are to be kept for at least 10 years and submitted to TL
- Personnel, on request.
- Internal quality management, 4.2.3 Ventilation facilities are to be arranged in such a

manner that no inadmissible amounts of solvents are
- Incoming inspection, removed from the laminate, and also that no inadmis-
sible workplace concentrations (MAK values) occur.
- Storage of the materials in the shop and during
field work, 4.2.4 The workplaces are to be illuminated
adequately and suitably, but at the same time
- Mechanical processing capabilities, precautionary measures shall be taken to ensure that

the controlled curing of the laminating resin compound
- Production equipment. is neither impaired through sunlight nor lighting

equipment.
4.1.4 All manufacturing facilities, store-rooms and

their operational equipment are to fulfill the require- 4.3 Storage-rooms
ments of the responsible safety authorities and profes-

4.3.1 Laminating resins are to be stored in
sional employers liability insurance associations. The
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. If no
manufacturer is exclusively responsible for compliance
such instructions are provided, then they are to be
with these requirements.
stored in dark, dry rooms at a temperature between 10
°C and 18°C. The temperature of the storage-rooms is
4.1.5 The danger of contamination of laminating
to be recorded continuously by means of thermographs.
materials is to be minimized through separation of
production facilities from store-rooms.
4.3.2 Prepregs are to be stored in special cold-
4.1.6 During laminating and bonding in the storage rooms in accordance with the manufacturer's
laminating shop, no dust-generating machinery is to be instructions.
operated nor any painting or spraying operations carried
out. As a matter of principle, such work is to take place 4.3.3 Hardeners, catalysts and accelerators are to
in separate rooms. be stored separately in well-ventilated rooms in accor-
dance with the manufacturer's instructions. If no in-
4.2 Laminating workshops
structions are provided, they are to be stored in dark,
4.2.1 Laminating workshops are to be closed spaces dry rooms at temperatures between 10 °C and 18 °C.
capable of being heated and having supply and exhaust

ventilation. During laminating and curing, a room 4.3.4 Reinforcing materials, fillers and additives are
temperature of between 16 °C and 25 °C and a to be stored in closed containers, in dry and dustfree
maximum relative humidity of 70 % is to be maintained, conditions.
provided that the manufacturer of the laminating resin

compound does not specify otherwise. 4.3.5 Storage is to be arranged in such a way that
the identification of the materials, their storage
conditions and maximum period of storage (expiry date)

as prescribed by the manufacturer are clearly visible. 5.2 Requirements for moulds
Materials whose duration of storage exceeds the expiry
5.2.1 The moulds are to be made of a suitable mate-
date are to be removed immediately from the stores.
rial that, on the one hand, has adequate stiffness to
prevent inadmissible deformations while laminating or
4.3.6 Quantities of materials due to be processed
curing, and on the other hand has no influence on the
are to be brought to the production shops as early as
curing of the laminate. Moulds made of FRP may be
possible to ensure complete adjustment to the process-
used only after complete curing and subsequent
ing temperature (Δt≤2°C), with the containers remaining
tempering.
closed.
5.2.2 In the case of moulds for products which are

4.3.7 Materials taken from the stores and partially
made using vacuum bags, absolute air tightness of the
used are only to be replaced in the stores in special
mould is additionally to be ensured.
cases (e.g. hot-curing prepregs) and with the consent of
TL.
5.2.3 The surface of the moulds is to be as smooth
5. Guidelines for Processing as possible and shall have no sharp edges. The mould
is to be designed in such a way as to permit flawless
5.1 General removal of the product from the mould.
5.1.1 As a matter of principle, only materials 5.2.4 Before commencing with the laminating, the
approved by TL are to be used. In addition to the choice surface of the components is to be treated with a suf-
of suitable and approved materials, special care is to be ficient quantity of a suitable release agent and brought
taken when working with them because of the great up to the temperature required for lamination. The
influence on the properties of the product. surfaces are to be dry and free of dust. It is not permis-
sible to use release agents with a silicon base.
5.1.2 For the preparation and processing of the resin
compounds and reinforcing material, these rules, the 5.3 Building up the laminate
instructions issued by the material manufacturers and
the regulations of the local authorities are also to be 5.3.1 If the surface protection is to be achieved by
observed. providing a gelcoat, then the gelcoat resin compound is
to be applied with a uniform thickness of between 0,4
5.1.3 Resin, hardener and resin additives are to be and 0,6 mm, using a suitable process.
mixed in such a way as to ensure a uniform distribution
and to minimize the amount of air introduced into the 5.3.2 The first laminate layer is to be applied as soon
mixture as far as possible. A degassing of the resin as possible after application of the gelcoat. A fibre mat
compound may be necessary in individual cases. or fabric with low weight per unit area and a high resin
content is to be used (e.g. for glass fibres: a maximum
5.1.4 During lamination, the processing time of the of 450 g/m2 and a maximum of 30 % glass by weight).
prepared resin compound specified by the manufacturer
is not to be exceeded. If such a time is not specified, the 5.3.3 The laminate is to be built up in accordance
pot-life is to be determined by means of a preliminary with the approved technical documentation, whereby TL
test and the processing time then established in is to be consulted about the method.
consultation with TL.
Air is to be removed adequately from the reinforcing

5.1.5 It is not possible to cover all types of moulds layers and these layers are to be compacted in such a
and processing methods in detail. Deviations are manner to ensure that the required proportion of resin is
therefore possible for special cases with the consent of achieved. Resin enrichment is to be avoided.
TL.

5.3.4 The maximum thickness of the material that 5.3.9 Different components may be laminated
can be cured at one time is determined by the maximum together only while they are not fully cured. Special
permissible heat development. In the case of vacuum attention is to be paid to crossings of laminates.
bagging, as a rule, the decisive factor is the maximum
number of layers from which air can still be totally 5.3.10 Parallel or insert linings are to be free of all
removed. moisture and pollution (dirt). Their bonding surfaces with
the laminate are to be prepared in a suitable manner
5.3.5 If a laminating process is interrupted for a (roughening, coupling agent or similar).
period causing the base laminate resin to exceed the
point of gelation, a test is to be performed to verify 5.4 Glass-fibre resin spraying
adhesion between the base laminate and the top
laminate. Glass-fibre resin spraying, a partly mechanical method
of lamination by hand, requires fulfilment of the following
For each resin system, under the given processing specific requirements:
conditions, the permissible period of interruption of the
laminating process is to be determined. In the event of 5.4.1 The equipment to be used is to be demon-
this period being exceeded, the laminate is to be strated before use and its suitability proven.
thoroughly ground in order to provide a surface
exhibiting adequate adhesion properties after removal 5.4.2 The qualification of the fibre-resin sprayer, and
of the dust. For UP resins on an orthophthalic acid and where appropriate his assistant, is to be demonstrated
standard glycol basis not containing any skin-forming to TL by means of procedure test.
agents a 48 h interruption on the laminating process
may, without any further proof being furnished, be 5.4.3 The equipment is to be calibrated in accor-
considered uncritical with respect to lamination. dance with the guidelines of the manufacturer.
5.3.6 When grinding laminates containing resins with Calibration is to be checked regularly before fibre-resin
low styrene evaporation as the matrix system, the spraying, but the very least at the beginning of every
surface is to be removed down to the mat layer. In order production day.
to ensure that no skin-forming agent elements (e.g.
paraffins) will be left on the surface, the surface is finally 5.4.4 The length of a roving cut is to be between 25
to be polished using new abrasive paper. The same mm. and 50 mm.
procedure is also to be applied when treating the
surfaces of materials to be bonded. 5.4.5 A powder-bound textile glass mat of maximum
2
450 g/m is to be used for the first laminate layer. The
5.3.7 Transitions between different thicknesses of glass part of this layer (to be applied manually) is to be
laminate is to be made gradually. A minimum value (for less than 30 % by weight.
2
glass fabric in the fibre direction) of 25 mm per 600 g/m
reinforcing material can be used. In the transition region 5.4.6 The glass weight per unit area of the spray
from a sandwich construction to a solid laminate, the laminate layer of a combined laminate is to not exceed
core material is to be tapered with a gradient of not 1150 g/m2.
more than 1 : 3.
5.4.7 After a maximum of 1150 g/m2 of fibres have
5.3.8 If cutting of reinforcing layers is unavoidable in been sprayed, air is to be removed and the composite is
the case of complicated mouldings, then the cut edges is to be compacted.
to overlap, or reinforcement strips are to be provided. In
the butt or seam region of laminates, every reinforcing 5.4.8 Tests are to be performed on a regular basis to
2.
layer is to overlap by at least 25 mm. per 600 g/m check whether a uniform laying up of the reinforced

layers as well as a uniform distribution of percentage Note :

glass weight has been achieved. TL reserves the right Particularly in the case of highly thixotropic adhesives, prior
to demand test pieces to check the resulting mechanical proof of their suitability is to be given with due consideration
properties. of the production process.
5.5 Curing and tempering 5.6.1.2 A specification for production and testing is to
be compiled for the adhesive joints of load-bearing
5.5.1 Completed components may only be taken structures. In particular, the nominal values and
from the moulds after adequate curing of the tolerances of adhesive-layer thicknesses as well as the
thermosetting resin compounds. The required cure time maximum size and extent of permissible flaws is to be
generally depends on the manufacturer's instructions. defined. The adhesive layer thicknesses, tolerances and
Otherwise, a minimum cure time of 12 hours at 20 °C the maximum size and extent of permissible flaws is to
shall be observed for cold-setting systems. be considered during the computational verification of
the adhesive joint.
5.5.2 Resin systems which cure under pressure, UV
radiation and/or increased temperature are to be treated 5.6.1.3 Only adhesives with confirmed properties may
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. be used for bonding. The adhesives may not have any
negative effects on the materials to be joined.
5.5.3 Immediately after curing, the components
should receive post-treatment at increased temperature 5.6.1.4 The possibility of contact corrosion (bond-line
(tempering). The tempering time depends on the resin corrosionis to be countered by suitable means.
in question and the temperature attained within the
component during tempering, whereby this is to be 5.6.1.5 If FRP components are to be bonded and a
below the temperature for dimensional stability under resin system differing from the laminating system is
heat and is to be agreed on with TL. Cold-setting used, the components are to be totally cured before
systems which are not subsequently tempered is to be bonding.
stored for 30 days at a temperature of 16 °C, and for
correspondingly shorter periods at temperatures up to 5.6.2 Assembly process
25 °C. This period can be shortened with the consent of
TL, provided the relevant manufacturer's specifications 5.6.2.1 The various surface pretreatments for synthetic
regarding post-curing are available, or post-curing materials and metals are for example compiled in VDI
values exist which are supported by experimental 2229 and VDI 3821.
results. If such values are not available, then in general
the following tempering conditions can be used 5.6.2.2 The surfaces of the materials to be bonded
(polyester/epoxy resin): together are to be dry and free of release agents (wax,
grease, oil etc.), impurities (dust, rust etc.) and solvents.
at least 16 h at 40 °C / 50 °C or Especially when using solvents for cleaning purposes,
at least 9 h at 50 °C / 60 °C compatibility with the material and sufficient ventilation
time is to be ensured.
5.6 Adhesive bonding
5.6.2.3 Smooth surfaces are to be roughened either
5.6.1 Adhesive joints mechanically (rough-grinding, sand-blasting etc.) or
chemically by etching. It is absolutely necessary that
5.6.1.1 Adhesive joints for load-bearing parts are layers on the surface of the materials to be bonded that
generally to be verified by tests to be agreed on for exert a negative effect on the bonding process (e.g.
each individual case, unless comparable experience is skin-forming additives in polyester resins or residues of
available. peel ply in the case of FRP, or oxide layers in the case
of aluminium) be removed.

5.6.2.4 In many cases, an increase in the strength of (external) surveillance. In the sense of these rules, third-
the bonded connection can be achieved by the use of party surveillance means periodic and random checks
specially matched primers. The use of primers is by TL of the internal surveillance as well as of the
particularly recommended for bonded joints which later component quality.
in service are relatively heavily stressed by environ-
mental influences. 6.1.3 TL reserves the right to carry out inspections in
the production facilities without giving prior notice. The
5.6.2.5 The adhesive is to be processed in accordance manufacturer is to grant inspectors access to all areas
with the manufacturer's instructions; the proportion of used for production, storage and testing and is to
fillers may not exceed the permitted limit. When mixing present all documentation concerning records and tests
the adhesive, its constituents are to be mixed in such a carried out.
way that they are evenly distributed, care being taken to
beat in as little air as possible. 6.1.4 The scope of third-party surveillance can be
reduced in the case of production facilities that have a
5.6.2.6 The adhesive is to be applied evenly and as certified quality management system.
bubble-free as possible to the materials to be joined. If
highly thixotropic adhesives are used, it is advisable to 6.2 Incoming inspection
apply a thin undercoat of the corresponding pure resin
to the surfaces to be joined. 6.2.1 The characteristic values and properties of the
materials are to be verified by the manufacturer by
5.6.2.7 Following application of the adhesive, the means of inspection documents.
materials to be joined are to be brought together without
delay and fixed in place. The following inspection documents according to EN
10204 (ISO 10474) are required as a minimum:
5.6.2.8 A loading of the adhesive joint before the
adhesive has cured sufficiently is inadmissible. For all EN 10204-2.2 Fibre products, gelcoat resins, paints
adhesive joints with thermosetting adhesives, EN 10204-2.3 Laminating resins, prepregs, core
subsequent tempering of the joint is recommended; in materials, adhesives
the case of cold-curing adhesives, tempering is
necessary as a rule. 6.2.2 During the incoming inspection, the goods are
at least to be checked for any damage and for com-
5.6.2.9 After curing, the adhesive joint is to be pro- pliance of the details in the certificates with the
tected by suitable means against penetration by extra- requirements. Material values are to be checked by ran-
neous media (e.g. moisture). dom sampling.
6. Manufacturing Surveillance 6.2.3 The goods are to be stored in accordance with

the requirements of the manufacturer and these Rules.
6.1 General
6.3 Production surveillance
6.1.1 For components made of FRP, manufacturing
surveillance consists of the quality control of the basic 6.3.1 Details of the production process are to be laid
materials, production surveillance and the quality down by specifications which also contain specimen
inspection of the finished components. documents for production and testing of the compo-
nents. The tasks and responsibility of the production
6.1.2 In the case of manufacturing surveillance, a and quality control departments are to be defined
distinction is made between internal and third-party clearly.

13-10 Section 13 - Fibre Reinforced Plastics A,B
6.3.2 As the work progresses, the individual 6.4.3 Following agreement with TL, individual or
production steps are to be signed by the employees random tests are to be carried out on finished
responsible for each stage on the basis of the components under static and/or dynamic loads.
prescribed documentation.
6.3.3 The individuals entrusted with production are B. Inspection and Testing of Fibre Composite
to be trained in accordance with their task, and work Materials
under professionally qualified supervision. In the case of
adhesive joints, the responsible supervisors are to have 1. Requirements
an appropriate qualification in adhesives, and the
individuals performing the work are to have undergone 1.1 General
suitable training.
1.1.1 In accordance with the Rules and Guidelines of
6.3.4 The batch numbers of the materials used in the TL, the materials used for manufacturing components
component are to be given in the production made of FRP under the supervision of TL is to be
documentation, in order that they can be traced back to approved by TL. Approvals are granted for the following
the manufacturer if need be. Reinforcing layers materials:
introduced into the laminate are to be checked off
immediately during the production process, with - Gelcoat and/or laminating resins,
indication of the fibre direction.
- Reinforcing materials,
6.3.5 From every batch of reaction resin compound,
a sample is to be taken and tested. If mixing is - Prepregs,
performed continuously, one sample per batch and
production step is sufficient. These samples are to be - Core materials,
randomly checked for their degree of curing. The results
are to be recorded. - Adhesives.
6.3.6 On request by TL, reference laminates of 1.1.2 Applications for approval by Türk Loydu Head
about 50 x 50 cm is to be produced in parallel. This is to Office TL is to be made by the material manufacturer or
result in confirmation of the material values used as a an agent. Together with the application, the following is
basis for the strength calculations. to be submitted :
6.4 Structural tests - Product description,
6.4.1 During production and on completion of - Safety data sheet,

production, the component is to be subjected to visual
inspections. In particular, attention is to be paid to voids, - Storage and processing instructions,
delamination, warping, discoloration, damage etc. In
addition, the general quality, e. g. surface finish, is to be - Copy of the test certificate of a recognized test-
assessed. ing body, i.e. an accredited testing laboratory
or a notified testing body,
6.4.2 By means of suitable testing procedures, the
quality of the components is to be determined, if possible - A declaration in writing by the applicant that the
during production, and at the latest on completion of tested materials comply with those for which
production. Special attention is to be paid to the bonding the approval is requested, and that the sample
and to the degree of curing of the component. is manufactured in accordance with the Rules
and Guidelines of TL,

B Section 13 - Fibre Reinforced Plastics 13-11
1.1.3 The tests are to be carried out in accordance 1.1.10 The approval refers only to the approved
with the standards mentioned in this rule. However, material. The applicability of this material in connection
comparable standards of other countries are also ac- with other approved materials is to be demonstrated
ceptable after agreement with TL in each individual independently by the manufacturer, or the user, in a
case. suitable manner. In cases of doubt, TL reserves the
right to require a check of the properties of the material
1.1.4 The minimum properties required by TL for the combination.
tests TL are to be fulfilled by all specimens.
1.2 Thermosetting resins
1.1.5 In the case of inadequate test results of
individual specimens, attention is to be paid to the 1.2.1 General
following (for a basic number of 6 tests):
1.2.1.1 The basic requirements listed under 1,1. apply
- If one or two specimens yield inadequate for material approval.
results, the tests are to be repeated with twice
as many specimens. 1.2.1.2 A general description of the thermosetting
resin, its processing conditions as well as the properties
- If the test results are inadequate for three or of resin in the processing state is to be submitted. The
more specimens, the test can be repeated on basic properties of the cured thermosetting resin are to
newly produced specimens, provided that TL be verified by the test certificate of a recognized testing
agrees to this. body. These values are to fulfill specified minimum
requirements.
- If even one sample yields inadequate results
while repeat-testing, then approval is not 1.2.1.3 Cold-setting unsaturated polyester (UP) resins
possible. and cold-setting epoxy (EP) resins are specifically
described below. Other types of resins can also be
1.1.6 If the material fulfils the TL requirements, then approved after consultation with TL, whereby the
a statement of material approval is issued by TL. This is required minimum properties are specified by TL on an
generally valid for four years, whereby extensions are individual basis. However, they are at least to comply
possible. with those of UP resins.
1.1.7 TL is to be notified immediately of all 1.2.2 Description

modifications or other changes to the material.
Decisions regarding the further validity of the material 1.2.2.1 A description of the thermosetting resin is to
approval is made on an individual basis. be submitted in order to allow an unequivocal
identification:
1.1.8 A constant material quality is to be provided by
the manufacturer through suitable QM measures. If this - Resin type and state,
is not ensured, TL reserves the right to suspend, or
withdraw, the approval. - Purpose,
1.1.9 TL reserves the right to demand and/or carry - Manufacturer,

out spot tests of the material properties during the
period required for material approval. If, in doing so, - Trade name.
there is no adequate comparison with the required
values, the material approval can be suspended or 1.2.2.2 In addition, the following is to be indicated:
withdrawn by TL.

13-12 Section 13 - Fibre Reinforced Plastics B
- Storage conditions, - Strength and modulus of elasticity in bending,
- Environmental conditions for processing, - Dimensional stability under heat.
- Type and proportion of allowed additives, 1.2.4.2 For gelcoat and topcoat resins, the following
additional information is to be submitted:
- Curing conditions, tempering.
- Abrasion resistance
1.2.3 Properties in the processing state and (ISO 9352) 3 samples
during curing
- Resistance against seawater, fuels, hydraulic
1.2.3.1 The properties are to be determined in oil, weak acids and alkalis (DIN EN ISO 175)
accordance with the following standards:
1.2.4.3 With regard to the properties, the following is to
- Density (DIN EN ISO 1675) be verified by the test certificate of a recognized testing
body. For this purpose, specimens are to be used which
- Viscosity (DIN 53015 - DIN EN ISO 2555) are produced in accordance with the submitted
processing guidelines. The specimens are to be cured
- Reactivity: and tempered for 16 h at 40 °C (polyester resins) or 16
h at 50 °C (epoxy resins). For gelcoat and topcoat
UP resins: acid number resins, only the first four properties are to be verified:
(DIN EN ISO 2114)
- Density (DIN EN ISO 1183, method A), 3
EP resins: epoxy equivalent specimens
(DIN EN ISO 3001)
- Water absorption (following DIN EN ISO 175,
- WP resins: Monomer proportion (DIN EN ISO Specimen 50 mm x 50 mm x 4), 3 specimens
3251)
- Dimensional stability under heat
- Gel time (temperature increase) (DIN EN ISO 75-2, method A), 3 specimens
(DIN 16945, Section 6.2, 6.3 - DIN EN ISO
2535) - Tensile strength, fracture strain, modulus of elas-
ticity in tension (DIN EN ISO 527-2, test piece 1
- Curing shrinkage (DIN 16945, Section 6.5) B), 6 specimens
1.2.4 Properties in the cured state - Bending strength

(DIN EN ISO 178), 6 specimens
1.2.4.1 The following properties are to be submitted for
all thermosetting resins in the cured state: - Modulus of elasticity in bending (DIN EN ISO
178), 3 specimens
- Density,
1.2.4.4 The mechanical properties are normally
- Water absorption, determined at standard climate 23/50 (23 °C / 50 %
relative humidity). If the intended operating temperature
- Strength, modulus of elasticity in tension, and range of the resin is not between - 20 °C and + 50 °C,
tensile fracture strain, further testing temperatures are to be agreed on with
TL.

1.2.4.5 The testing speed in the case of tensile and gelcoat resins may be determined by the applicant.
bending tests is to be selected in such a way that a
specimen or edge-fibre strain of about 1 % / min is - The abrasion resistance determined in the test
ensured. This is to be documented in the test report. (sliding abrasion rate) shall be adequate.
The modulus of elasticity is to be determined as a
secant modulus between 0,05 % and 0,25 % strain. The - The properties stipulated in DIN ISO 175 are to
water absorption is to be specifically determined at 23°C be determined after 24 h and 168 h at 23 °C.
after 24 ± 1 h and 168 ± 2 h. Taking these properties into account and
following agreement between TL and the
1.2.5 Minimum properties applicant, the following classification is made:
1.2.5.1 For resin products consisting of UP resins, the  Resistant,

following minimum properties are specified for use as
laminating resins (values for gelcoat resins in brackets):  Conditionally resistant,
Tensile strength: 40 MPa (-)  Not resistant.
Fracture strain %2,0 (%3,0) 1.3 Reinforcing materials
Modulus of elasticity 2700 Mpa [N/mm2] (-) 1.3.1 General

(tension)
1.3.1.1 The basic requirements listed under 1.1 apply
2]
Bending strength 80 MPa [N/mm (-) for material approval.
Dimensional stability under heat: 60°C (60°C) 1.3.1.2 A general description of the reinforcing
material and of the filament is to be provided. Basic
The water absorption after 168 h is not to exceed 70 mg properties of laminate specimens taken from the
for laminating resins and 60 mg for gelcoat resins. reinforcing material are to be verified by the test
certificate of a recognized testing body. These values
1.2.5.2 The following minimum properties apply to are to fulfill specified minimum requirements.
resin products consisting of EP resins :
1.3.1.3 The following applies to fibre reinforcements
Tensile strength: 55 MPa [N/mm2] (-) made of glass and carbon. Products with other
reinforcing fibres, e.g. aramide, can also be approved,
Fracture strain %2,5 (%3,5) following agreement with TL, whereby the minimum
properties are then specified on an individual basis.
Modulus of elasticity 2700 MPa[N/mm2] (-)
1.3.1.4 Due to the great number of the fibre reinforcing
2]
Bending strength: 100 MPa [N/mm (-) products on the market, only the most common ones
can be listed. Products not covered (e.g. complexes,
Dimensional stability hybrids), can also be approved, following agreement
under heat: 70°C (70°C) with TL.
The water absorption after 168 h for laminating and 1.3.2 Description
gelcoat resins is to not exceed 50 mg.
1.3.2.1 A description is necessary which allows an
1.2.5.3 The abrasion resistance properties and the unequivocal identification of the reinforcing material:
resistance properties to extraneous media in the case of

- Fibre material, a recognized testing body.
- Reinforcement type (mat, fabric etc.), 1.3.3.2 Mats (continuous and chopped-strand mats)
- Manufacturer, - Fibre length (for chopped-strand mats),
- Trade name. - Linear density of the fibre (ISO 1889),
1.3.2.2 In addition, the following is required: - Weight per unit area (ISO 3374),
- Form of supply, - Layer thickness (ISO 3616),
- Storage conditions, - Binder (see 1.3.3.5).
- Processing instructions. 1.3.3.3 Fabric
1.3.2.3 The filament and its treatment/sizing is to be - Linear density of the fibres, warpwise and
submitted: weftwise (ISO 1889),
- Filament diameter (ISO 1888 - ISO 137), - Count, warpwise and weftwise (DIN EN 1049-2),
- Coupling agreed or sizing, - Weight per unit area (ISO 3374),
- Resin compatibility. - Fabric thickness (ISO 4603),
In the case of glass fibre products, the average filament - Weave (DIN 61101-1).
diameter is to be at maximum 19 µm.
1.3.3.4 Non-woven fabric
1.3.2.4 In the case of reinforcing products consisting of
a combination of different fibre materials and/or - Lay up,
filaments, all fibre types are to be indicated.
- Weight per unit area of the individual layers and of
1.3.2.5 If, in the case of textile glass reinforcing the non-woven fabric (ISO 3374),
products, no E-glass or R-glass is used in accordance
with DIN 1259-1, then an alkali oxide content (DIN ISO - Non-woven fabric thickness (ISO 4603),
719) of less than 1 % is to be verified by means of a test
certificate from a recognized testing body. - Binder (see 3.3.5).
1.3.3 Properties of the reinforcing products In addition if a non-woven fabric contains mat or fabric
layers, then the linear density and, where appropriate,
1.3.3.1 Rovings the fibre length is to be indicated.
- Number of the filaments in the roving 1.3.3.5 A difference is to be made between chemical
and mechanical bond types. In the case of chemical
- Roving fineness (ISO 4602) bond types, the binder, the percentage weight (glass
ISO 1887, carbon DIN 29965) and its solubility (ISO
When rovings are used as gun rovings (ISO 3375), the 2558) is to be indicated. In the case of mechanical bond
stiffness is to be additionally verified by the certificate of types, the type of weave is to be indicated.

1.3.3.6 In the case of reinforcing products with 1.3.4.6 The specimens are to be tested in accordance
different fibre materials, the percentages of materials with ISO 291 after at least 16 h under standard climate
used in the respective reinforcing directions is to be conditions.
indicated.
1.3.4.7 The following properties are to be verified by
1.3.4 Laminate properties of the reinforcing the test certificate of a recognized testing body:
products
- Fibre content (ISO 1887, carbon DIN EN
1.3.4.1 For laminate production, it is strongly 2564), 3 specimens,
recommended that TL-approved cold-setting UP resins
are to be used. After curing, the specimens are to be - Tensile strength, fracture strain, modulus of
tempered for 16 h at 40 °C. If, for special reasons, other elasticity in tension (DIN EN ISO 527-4, test
(also warm-setting) thermosetting resins are to be used, piece III), 6 specimens,
then this is to be agreed in advance by TL.
- Bending strength, modulus of elasticity in
1.3.4.2 For rovings, tensile test specimens are to be bending (DIN EN ISO 14125, Method A), 6
prepared for all fibre materials in accordance with DIN specimens.
29965, Section 4.1.3.5. The test certificate of a
recognized testing body is to all be submitted to verify Deviating from the standard the modulus of elasticity in
the tensile strength, the fracture strain and the modulus tension is to be determined as a secant modulus
of elasticity as the mean values from six tests carried between 10 % and 50 % of the fracture strain.
out in accordance with DIN 65382. Furthermore, the
tensile strength and the modulus of elasticity is to ll be In addition, for carbon fibres, the compressive strength
determined in accordance with ISO 527-1,4,5 on flat and the modulus of elasticity in compression is to be
specimens prepared for testing under tension. demonstrated.
1.3.4.3 For all other reinforcing products, laminate test 1.3.4.8 The testing speeds are to be selected in such
panels are to be prepared in accordance with DIN EN a way to ensure a strain rate of 1 % / min in the test
2374, Section 5.3 (Method C). In doing so, the piece or the edge fibre. The testing speed is to be
reinforcing products are to be arranged in identical indicated.
alignment. Depending on number of the reinforcing
directions, the laminates are to have approximately the 1.3.4.9 Testing is to be carried out in a standard
following thicknesses: unidirectional laminates 2 mm, climate 23/50 (23 °C / 50 % relative humidity). If the
bidirectional laminates 4 mm. and multi-directional operating temperatures of the fibres are not between
laminates 5 mm. -20 °C and +50 °C, then additional testing temperatures
is to be agreed on with TL.
1.3.4.4 Appropriate test panels are to be prepared by
fibre resin spraying for the use of gun rovings. The 1.3.5 Minimum properties
length of the gun rovings in this case is to be 35 mm.
1.3.5.1 For approval, fibre reinforced products are to
1.3.4.5 The gun prescribed number of specimens is to fulfill specified minimum values for the mechanical
be cut out of the test panels for each test. In doing so, properties. The influence of the fibre volume content
specimens are to be taken from each reinforcing on the properties has been taken into account when
direction of the laminate in order to test the mechanical specifying the values. The values refer to the 0° direc-
properties. For products with randomly distributed tion in the case of a uniform lay up. If necessary, a
reinforcing directions, specimens are to be taken from correction to the actual lay up is to be done.
any two directions, but at right angles to each other.

1.3.5.2 The minimum values of all mechanical in accordance with ISO 3375 is to not be below 130
properties to be verified are determined by means of the mm.
following equation together with the values given in
Table.13.1: 1.3.5.7 The linear relationship between the property
and fibre volume content assumed when specifying
    minimum values does not apply for all properties, and
Xmin    Xref   
  0,4   are therefore not to be used to extrapolate measured
values.
Xmin = Minimum required value,
1.4 Prepregs
Xref = Reference value for fibre volume content
=0,4, 1.4.1 General
 = Factor for lay-up, 1.4.1.1 The basic requirements listed under 1.1 are to
apply for material approval.
 = Fibre volume content 0,2 ≤  ≤ 0,6.

1.4.1.2 Since prepregs are based on resin systems
which cure under heat, consultation with TL concerning
Deviations from the above specification are allowed for
the curing process of the resins is required.
laminates with glass mats or gun rovings; in these
cases, the minimum values for a percentage fibre
1.4.1.3 The testing of cured prepreg laminates is
weight content of 0,25 ≤  ≤ 0,35: are:
identical with the laminate testing of fibre reinforced
products. Taking into account the resin system, the
- Tensile strength:
minimum characteristic values are to be agreed on with
TL.
RZ = 1278 2 - 510+123 [MPa],
1.4.1.4 Unidirectional non-woven prepregs and woven

- Young’s modulus (tension),
prepregs are considered within the framework of these
Rules. Other prepregs can also be approved, following
E = (37 -4,75)103 [MPa],
agreement with TL.
- Bending strength,
1.4.2 Prepreg properties
RB = 502 2 + 106,8 [MPa],

1.4.2.1 A description is necessary which allows an
unequivocal identification of the prepreg:
1.3.5.3 In the case of multidirectional lay up of the
reinforcing products, the values are to be proved at - Fibre material,
least for one direction (preferably 0°).
- Resin system,
1.3.5.4 For reinforcing products with different fibre
materials in one direction, the values of the material with - Reinforcement type,
the lower minimum properties are to be fulfilled.
- Trade name,
1.3.5.5 The minimum values for fabric are 95 % of the
specified values for 0° / 90° lay up. - Manufacturer,
1.3.5.6 The stiffness of the gun rovings to be verified - Storage conditions, processing guidelines.

Table 13.1 Coefficients for the determination of the minimum properties

Fibre Properties Xref [MPa]
0° 0°/90° 0°/±45° 0°/90°/±45°
Tensile strength 500 1,00 0,55 0,50 0,45
Glass Young’s Modulus of elasticity 26.000 1,00 0,67 0,57 0,55
Bending strength 650 1,00 0,55 0,45 0,40
Tensile strength 900 1,00 0,55 0,50 0,45
Modulus of elasticity 80.000 1,00 0,55 0,45 0,42
Carbon Bending strength 725 1,00 0,55 0,45 0,40
Compressive strength 600 1,00 0,55 0,50 0,45
Modulus of elasticity compression 70.000 1,00 0,55 0,50 0,45
1.4.2.2 The following properties are to be submitted for 1.5.1.2 A general description of the core material is to
the non-cured prepreg material: be submitted. The basic properties are to be verified by
the test certificate of a recognized testing body.
- Mass per unit area (DIN EN 12127)
1.5.1.3 Rigid foam materials and cross-grained balsa
- Resin percentage b y weight (DIN 29971, are considered specifically as a core material within the
Section 5.1.1.4) framework of these Rules. Cores made of other
materials can also be approved, following agreement
- Layer thickness (DIN 53885) with TL.
- Resin flux percentage by weight (DIN 65090, 1.5.2 Rigid foams

Section 5.1.1)
1.5.2.1 The following information is necessary for a
1.4.2.3 The following are necessary for the reinforcing general description:
material:
- Basic material and additives,
- Filament diameter (ISO 1888 - ISO 137),
- Trade name,
- Count (DIN EN 1049-2),
- Manufacturer,
- Bond type (only woven prepregs).
- Resin systems suitable for bonding/coating,
1.5 Core materials
- Storage conditions.
1.5.1 General
1.5.2.2 The manufacturer is to provide details of the
1.5.1.1 The basic requirements listed under 1.1 are to maximum permissible processing temperatures and the
apply for material approval. operating temperature limits. The long-term operating
temperature is to at least cover the range -20 °C to +50
°C.

1.5.2.3 The test certificate of a recognized testing 1.5.3.2 Adhesion of balsa wood is not to be impaired
body verifying the following properties is to be by impregnation.
submitted:
1.6 Adhesives
- Apparent density (ISO 845);
sample thickness ≥ 25 mm, 3 specimens 1.6.1 General
- Water absorption (ISO 2896), 3 specimens 1.6.1.1 The basic requirements listed under 1.1 are to
apply for material approval.
- Compressive strength (ISO 844), 6 specimens,
vertical to the plane of the test panel 1.6.1.2 A general description of the adhesive is to be
provided. Basic properties of the cured adhesive are to
- Modulus of elasticity (compression) (ISO 844), be verified by the test certificate of a recognized testing
3 specimens, test piece III, vertical to the plate body.
plane of the panel
1.6.1.3 The following specifically considers cold-
- Shear strength (DIN 53294), 6 specimens setting and hot-setting thermosetting adhesives as well
as hot-melt adhesives. Other adhesives, provided that
- Shear modulus (DIN 53294), 6 specimens they can be used for processing of FRP (e.g. expansion
adhesives) can also be used, following agreement with
1.5.2.4 The specimens are to be tested without foam TL.
skin. The testing shall take place in a standard climate
23/50 (23°C/50 % relative humidity). Testing procedures 1.6.2 Description
are given mainly for rigid foams, whereas in the case of
tough foams TL is to be consulted if there is any doubt. 1.6.2.1 A description of the adhesive is to be
submitted in order to allow an unequivocal identification
1.5.2.5 The following minimum properties are specified of the adhesive:
for an apparent density of 60 kg/m3 and 200 kg/m3.
- Type of adhesive,
60 kg/m3 200 kg/m3
Compressive strength - Manufacturer,
0,6 3,5
[MPa]
Modulus of elasticity - Trade name,
40 200
(compression) [MPa]
Shear strength [MPa] 0,5 2,6 - Storage conditions,
Shear modulus [MPa] 15 65
Water absorption (vol.%) - Processing and curing guidelines,
2 2
(after 28 days)
- Volume shrinkage after exceeding the gel point,

1.5.2.6 In the case of other apparent densities, linear
interpolation of the densities are to be used to deter- - Glass transition temperature (ISO 11357-2).
mine strengths and moduli.
1.6.2.2 In the case of adhesive films with backing,
1.5.3 Cross-grained balsa wood the backing material is to be specified.
1.5.3.1 The requirements for cross-grained balsa 1.6.3 Properties of the adhesive
wood are specified in Section 12.
1.6.3.1 In the processing state, the following

B,C Section 13 - Fibre Reinforced Plastics 13-19
information is to be provided: directly tested specimens as well as specimens tested

after wet storage:
- Density (DIN EN ISO 1675)
- Tensile lap-shear strength: 12 MPa
- Viscosity (DIN 53019)
- Peeling resistance: 2 N/mm
1.6.3.2 In the case of two-component thermosetting
resins which cure at room temperatures, the pot life - Dimensional stability under heat: 65 °C
(DIN 16945, Section 6.3) is to also be indicated.
1.6.5.2 Strain in creep is to be below 0.18 mm. in the
1.6.4 Properties in the cured state long-duration shear tension test for an adhesive layer
thickness of 0,5 mm. and below 1 mm. for an adhesive
1.6.4.1 The following mechanical properties are to be layer thickness of 3 mm.
verified by the certificate of a recognized testing body
(on 6 specimens respectively):
C. Repair of Components
- Tensile lap-shear strength (DIN EN 1465),
1. General
- Peeling resistance (ISO 11339)
1.1 Requirements for operation and personnel
- Dimensional stability under heat (DIN EN ISO
75-2, Method A) 1.1.1 Repairs are only to be performed by workshops
which are approved by TL for the repair of components
In addition, a long-duration shear tension test (based on made from fibre-reinforced thermosetting resins.
DIN EN 1465) is to be carried out. In doing so, the
sample is subject to loads in a standard climate 23 °C / 1.1.2 The shop approval for manufacturing
50 % relative humidity at 60 % of the mean tensile lap- components made of fibre-reinforced plastics using the
shear strength for 192 ± 2 h. hand lay-up method includes approval for repairing the
parts within that production facility. For repairs outside
1.6.4.2 The testing is to be carried out for two different of the production facility (i.e. in the field), an extension
conditioning states of the specimens: of the shop approval is required.
- 24 ± 1 h after curing at 23 °C and storage at 50 1.1.3 The repairs are only to be carried out by
% relative humidity persons with proven professional knowledge. This
professional knowledge is in general to be verified by
- 1000 ± 12 h storage in distilled water at 23 °C certificates of the corresponding training courses. If
such certificates are not available, the minimum
1.6.4.3 For each test and conditioning state, speci- requirement is to consist of training completed for a
mens with adhesive layer thicknesses of 0,5 mm and 3 technical profession, in conjunction with internal training
mm are to be used. and several months of experience.
1.6.4.4 All tests are all to be carried out in a standard 1.1.4 The head of the repair team is responsible for
climate 23 °C / 50 % relative humidity. In addition, the proper execution of the repair and is to be named
tensile lap-shear strength is to be verified at 50 °C. explicitly in the shop approval. His professional
knowledge is to be verified by certificates of the cor-
1.6.5 Minimum properties responding training courses and professional
experience of several years. In addition, a procedure
1.6.5.1 The following properties are to be achieved for

13-20 Section 13 - Fibre Reinforced Plastics C
test - to be carried out at the shop under supervision of 1.2.5 Materials approved by TL are only to be used
TL - is required. for the repair.
1.1.5 The shop approval is granted by TL Head Office 1.2.6 The thermosetting resins used for repair is to
on the basis of the information to be submitted with be at least equivalent to the original thermosetting resin
related form and the report submitted by the TL surveyor. used for production. To ensure low residual stresses in
The related form deals with the following points: the area to be repaired, the use of fast-setting highly
reactive thermosetting resins is to be avoided. Unless
- General information on the shop, the original thermosetting resin is used, the elongation
at break of the thermosetting resins used for the repair
- Personnel, is to be at least 2,5 %.
- Internal quality management, 1.2.7 If the materials and laminates used for the
repair are not identical to those employed when the
- Incoming inspection, component was manufactured, compatibility and
equivalence of that particular combination of materials
- Storage of the materials for repair in the shop to the original ones are to be verified with respect to
and during field work, their properties.
- Mechanical processing capabilities, 2. Procedure
- Production equipment. 2.1 Preparation
1.2 Prerequisites 2.1.1 Damaged material, or material which no longer

exhibits complete bonding, is to be removed from the
1.2.1 In the case of repairs which affect the area to be repaired.
structural integrity of the component, a repair plan is to
be established and approved by TL before starting to 2.1.2 The region adjacent to the damaged area is to
any repair work. If the same repair is to be carried out be chamfered. The chamfer ratio (chamfer length Is to
several times, a general repair plan can be established chamfer thickness ts) depends on the tensile strength of
and submitted to TL for approval. the repair material, (Mat) in the chamfer direction, and
the permissible shear stress (). The minimum chamfer
1.2.2 Repairs to the gelcoat resin and (minor) ratio is to be calculated by means of the following
repairs which do not fall under 1.2.1 are to be formula:
standardized and approved by TL according to the
standardized procedure.  Mat ls
 x
 ts
1.2.3 For the approval of a repair according to 1.2.1,
x=1 for hand laminate,
all design and repair drawings needed to assess the
repair of the component are to be submitted to TL. The
x = 1,05 in case of tempering,
repair plan will be examined by TL and approved if
found suitable.
x = 1,15 for curing under vacuum and tempering.
.
1.2.4 A report is required for each repair and has to
The permissible shear stress is to be 9 N/mm2 for
be signed by the head of the repair team.
repairs in the shop and 7 N/mm2 for repairs in the field.

C Section 13 - Fibre Reinforced Plastics 13-21
2.1.3 The minimum overlap length for each layer is 2.1.11 The component temperature, at least within
not to be less than 10 mm on all sides. the repair area, is to be kept within the range permitted
in 2.2.1.
2.1.4 Due to the required draping ability (for curved
surfaces and in the chamfered joint area; see Fig. 13.1), 2.1.12 The mixing ratio of resin to hardener is to be
the weight per unit area of the reinforcing materials maintained as precisely as possible (in the case of
used for repair work is as far as possible, not to exceed epoxy resins, the relative deviation from the mixing ratio
600 g/m2 per layer (more layers with less weight per unit shall not exceed 3 %). The actual mixing ratio and the
area are better than only a few layers with a high weight quantities used is to be recorded in a dosing report.
per unit area).
2.2 Execution
2.2.1 During the repair work and the curing period, a

surrounding air and a component temperature between
16 and 25 °C as well as a maximum relative humidity of
Figure 13.1 Chamfered joint area for a repair 70 % is to be maintained. If the resin or adhesive
(schematic) manufacturer has not specified other permissible
values, these values are to apply.
2.1.5 In order that the stress magnification
associated with a chamfered joint is as low as possible, 2.2.2 Calibrated thermometers and hygrometers are
at least three reinforcing layers should be used for each to be used for monitoring in the vicinity of the repair or
area to be repaired. at a position agreed upon with TL.
2.1.6 The area to be repaired is to be cleaned and 2.2.3 It is to be ensured that no changes in elonga-
grinded thoroughly, e.g. by using sandpaper with a tion occur in the laminate during the repair.
grain of 80 or 120.
2.2.4 The lay-up at the prepared area to be repaired
2.1.7 If the laminate has been in direct contact with is to be performed by means of the hand lay-up method,
water for a lengthy period, the laminate is to be dried as far as possible in the same sequence that was
properly before repair work is started. applied for the original laminate. The fibre orientation is
to be identical.
2.1.8 As far as possible, the area to be repaired is to
be relieved of the stress caused by its own weight. In 2.2.5 Attention is to be paid for providing good
the case of repairs performed in the field, special impregnation of the reinforcing material. Voids are to be
arrangements are to be taken if necessary to prevent avoided.
the occurrence of external loads (e.g. caused by
vibration). 2.2.6 A mat or fabric with a weight per unit area of
approx. 225 g/m2 maximum 450 g/m2 for boats) and a
2.1.9 For repairs in the field, the workplace is to be low percentage fibre weight content (approx. 30 %) is to
arranged in such a way that good accessibility to the be used as the final layer.
area to be repaired and sufficient illumination are both
ensured. 2.2.7 The laminate is to be given sufficient surface
protection by means of a coating resin. If the repair
2.1.10 For repairs in the field, measures are to be areas are subjected to increased moisture levels, a high
taken against moisture as well as direct UV radiation. resistance to hydrolysis is required of the coating resin.
2.2.8 If unsaturated polyester or vinyl resins are

13-22 Section 13 - Fibre Reinforced Plastics C
used for the topcoat, inhibition problems are to be - Designation of the component and, if
avoided by excluding atmospheric oxygen (e.g. by applicable, its identification number,
adding paraffin or using foil coverings). - Date and location of the repair (address of the
shop or location in the field),
2.3 Curing
- Start time of repair,
2.3.1 During the curing process, it is to be ensured
that no changes in elongation take place in the lami- - Position and type of damage,
nate.
- Repair plan and approval No.,
2.3.2 Repaired components are only to be subjected
to loads or put into further operation after the thermo- - Climatic conditions during repair and the curing
setting resin has cured sufficiently. period (and the wind speed, in case the work
was not performed within a closed room),
2.3.3 If no explicit values are quoted for the curing
process by the manufacturer of the thermosetting resin - Materials used (with batch number),
system, the following time periods is to apply for cold-
setting resin systems: - Mixing ratios for thermosetting resin systems;
dosing report,
- For a constant temperature of 16 °C: at least
72 h, - Lay up (number of layers and orientation),
- For a constant temperature of 25 °C: at least - Any deviations from the repair plan,
38 h.
- Duration of the repair,
2.3.4 If the repaired component was tempered
during manufacture, the area to be repaired is also to - Curing time,
be tempered after setting, if no proof is provided to
show that this is not necessary. - Signature of the head of the repair team.
3. Documentation Note:
To assist in describing and explaining the repair, sketches or
3.1 Repair report pictures may be added to the repair report.
3.1.1 The repair report is at least to contain the

following points:

Section 14 – Fittings and Pressed Parts, Bolts and Nuts 14-1
SECTION 14
FITTINGS AND PRESSED PARTS, BOLTS AND NUTS
A. PRESSED PARTS............................................................................................................................................... 14- 2

1. Scope
2. Requirements to be met by manufacturers
3. Requirements applicable to the starting plates
4. Dimensions, dimensional and geometrical tolerances
5. Principles governing hot forming and heat treatment
6. Heat treatment after hot forming
7. Heat treatment after cold forming
8. Testing
9. Marking
10. Certificates
B. PIPE FITTINGS……………………………………….............................................................................................. 14- 5
1. Scope
2. Starting materials
3. Manufacture
4. Heat treatment
5. Requirements applicable to properties
6. Testing
7. Marking
C. BOLTS AND NUTS …………………………………………................................................................................... 14- 8
1. Scope
2. Materials
3. Manufacture
4. Requirements applicable to the material
5. Testing of bolts
6. Testing of nuts
7. Proof of chemical composition
8. Non-destructive tests
9. Retests
10. Marking

14-2 Section 14 – Fittings and Pressed Parts, Bolts and Nuts A
A. Pressed Parts 4. Dimensions, dimensional and geometrical

tolerances
1. Scope
These are governed by the relevant standards and/or
1.1 These Rules are applicable to the testing of the information in the order documents. The manufac-
pressed parts for pressure vessels, e.g. pressed heads turer shall keep relevant documents ready for the test-
and shell components fabricated from ferritic or aus- ing.
tenitic steel plates by hot forming or by cold forming
followed by heat treatment. They are also applicable to 5. Principles governing hot forming and heat
the method of heat treatment which may be required treatment
after forming has been carried out.
5.1 The manufacturer of the finished part shall
1.2 These Rules are also applicable to pressed have available suitable equipment for the proper exe-
parts made from individual parts by welding and sub- cution of the necessary heat treatments. Preliminary
sequent forming. Testing of these welded joints before proof of this shall be submitted to the Surveyor.
and after forming is to be carried out according to TL
Welding Rules. 5.2 The heat treatment equipment shall be fitted
with a sufficient number of calibrated temperature
2. Requirements to be met by manufacturers measuring devices, and fixed items of plant shall be
Manufacturers wishing to supply products in accordance

with these Rules shall be approved by TL. This is additionally equipped with automatic recording in-
conditional upon their fulfilling the manufacturing and struments which are to be recalibrated at regular inter-
quality control requirements specified in Section 1, C. vals.
and furnishing proof of this to TL prior to the
commencement of supplies. Tests of product suitability
5.3 As far as possible, all parts shall be heated or
shall additionally be performed on selected products.
annealed in their entirety. With the consent of the
Surveyor, this Rule may be waived where only local
3. Requirements applicable to the starting
forming is performed. In these cases the heat treatment
plates
shall, however, embrace the whole area of deformation.
3.1 The grades of steel from which the starting

plates are made shall be specified in the order. In 5.4 The temperatures, holding times and heating
selecting them, care shall be taken to ensure that they and cooling rates shall be determined by reference to
fulfill the requirements to be met by the base material the data contained in the standards or manufacturer's
concerned after forming and, where applicable, heat specifications in accordance with the material and the
treatment. component concerned. The manufacturer is required to
guarantee compliance with the conditions
3.2 The plates may be supplied in the stipulated
final heat-treated condition or in another condition which 5.5 Where the testing of finished parts is allowed
facilitates the subsequent forming. In the latter case, to be carried out on separate test sections, provision
testing of the starting plates - if required - shall be
shall be made to ensure that these receive the same
performed using test specimens which have undergone
heat treatment as the finished part. For this purpose, the
the heat treatment intended for the finished part. The
test sections shall be laid on top of the corresponding
condition of supply of the plates and the method of heat
finished parts for the annealing operation.
treatment of the test specimens shall be indicated in the
test certificate.

A Section 14 – Fittings and Pressed Parts, Bolts and Nuts 14-3
6. Heat treatment after hot forming and is ended above 750 °C for stabilized steels and
steels with a carbon content of C ≤ 0,03 % or above 875
6.1 Ferritic steels °C for non-stabilized steels with a carbon content of C
≤0,08, followed by rapid cooling to ambient temperature.
6.1.1 Hot forming shall normally be followed by
renewed heat treatment as prescribed for the base 6.3 Clad plates
material concerned.
Where parts are made of clad plates, the nature of the
This Rule may be waived in the case of normalized and heat treatment is governed by the base material, see
air-quenched and tempered steels with the exception of 6.1. Where the cladding material requires a heat
the steels tough at sub-zero temperatures, provided that treatment different from that of the base material, the
the hot forming operation is begun and ended within the details of this shall be specified by the manufacturer of
temperature range specified for this purpose in the the material and made known to TL.
standard or the manufacturer's material specification. In
this case, the renewed heat treatment can be dispensed 7. Heat treatment after cold forming
with for normalized steels while tempering can suffice

7.1 Ferritic steels
for air quenched and tempered steels.
All plates shall be in the prescribed condition of supply

6.1.2 For the steels tough at sub-zero temperatures,
before cold forming is carried out, see the individual
preliminary proof shall be furnished that the intended
Rules in Section 4. Due to the changes in material
heat treatment imparts to the finished part the neces-
properties which may result from cold forming and
sary impact energy at the specified test temperature. If
ageing, the following procedure applies:
this is the case, then, subject to the conditions
mentioned in 6.1.1, subsequent heat treatment may be
7.1.1 Pressed parts for pressure vessels operated at
dispensed with for normalized steels, while subsequent
ambient temperatures or feedstock temperatures down
tempering may suffice for air quenched and tempered
to - 10 °C shall, if the degree of deformation exceeds 5
(normalized and tempered) steels, and in the case of 5
% (wall thickness s > 0,05 ∙ Dm for cylindrical shell rings
% and 9% nickel steels calling for triple heat treatments
and sphere segments), be subjected to heat treatment
(12 Ni 19 and X 8 Ni 9), the second normalizing and
(normalizing or quenching and tempering) in
tempering operation may be sufficient.
accordance with the relevant standards or material
specifications.
6.1.3 For water-quenched and tempered steels, the
nature of the heat treatment to be applied after hot
7.1.2 Pressed parts for pressure vessels operated at
forming shall be specially determined.
charging media temperatures below - 10 °C shall,
6.1.4 The exceptional provisions set out in 6.1.1 and

- if the degree of deformation exceeds 2 % in the
6.1.2 may also be applied where local hot forming is
case of steel grades conforming to EN 10028-2,
performed, provided that, prior to forming, the plates
EN 10028-3, EN 10028-4 and EN 10028-6, with
were in a heat-treated condition appropriate to the
the exception of 12Ni14, 12Ni19, X7Ni9 and
material.
X8Ni9,
6.2 Austenitic steels

- if the degree of deformation exceeds 5 % in the
case of steel grades 12Ni14, 12Ni19, X7Ni9 and
After hot forming, parts made of austenitic steels shall
X8Ni9 conforming to EN 10028-4,
be subjected to renewed heat treatment which shall
normally comprise solution annealing and quenching.
be subjected to heat treatment (normalizing or quench-
This Rule may be waived where the forming operation is
ing and tempering) in accordance with the relevant
begun in the temperature range from 1150 to 1000 °C
standards or material specifications.

14-4 Section 14 – Fittings and Pressed Parts, Bolts and Nuts A
7.1.3 Pressed parts for gas tanks with design tem- 7.2.2.1 in the case of austenitic steels with required
peratures below 0 °C shall be treated in accordance minimum elongation values A5 of ≥ 30 % in respect of
with 7.1.2 the initial material, the degree of deformation does not
exceed 15 % or proof is furnished that the residual
7.1.4 Cold-formed heads, including those fabricated elongation capacity A after cold forming is at least 15 %.
from welded round blanks, shall be heat treated For size ranges in which the required minimum
(normalized or quenched and tempered) in accordance elongation values A are less than 30 %, proof that the
with the relevant standards or material specifications. residual elongation capacity A is 15 % is deemed to
have been furnished if an elongation A of ≥ 30 % is
7.1.5 The stipulations of 7.1.1, 7.1.2 and 7.1.4 may shown in the acceptance test certificate;
be relaxed if proof is furnished that the properties of the
materials make them able to withstand the stresses 7.2.2.2 in the case of degrees of deformation higher
prevailing while the pressure vessel is in service than 15 %, proof is furnished that the residual elonga-
tion capacity after cold forming is at least 15 %;
7.1.6 Cold-formed dished heads made of steel
grades S235 JR, S235 J0, S235 J2 and S235 J2+N 7.2.2.3 in the case of dished, ellipsoidal and hemi-
according to EN 10025-2, P235 GH and P265 GH to EN spherical heads, the following elongations A5 are shown
10028-2, P275 N according to EN 10028-3, as well as in the acceptance test certificates for the starting
of other steel grades of comparable strength, do not materials:
require heat treatment if the temperature of the charging
media is -10 °C or above, the design temperature does - ≥ 40 % for nominal wall thicknesses ≤ 15 mm at
not exceed 120 °C according to TL Construction Rules design temperatures down to -196 °C
and the nominal wall thickness is ≤ 8 mm.
- ≥45 % for nominal wall thicknesses > 15 mm at
7.1.7 If the acceptable degrees of deformation are design temperatures down to -196 °C,
exceeded in cold forming, heat treatment shall as a rule
be performed before welding. - ≥ 50 % at design temperatures below -196 °C.
7.1.8 In the case of clad pressure vessels or pres- 7.2.2.4 in the case of pressure vessel components,
sure vessel components, heat treatment shall be per- except heads, which are operated at design tempera-
formed in accordance with the base material, unless tures below -196 °C, the degree of deformation does
special conditions have to be agreed with regard to the not exceed 10 %.
cladding
7.3 Clad plates
7.2 Austenitic steels
Cold-formed finished parts made of clad plates are
7.2.1 Acceptable heat treatments are solution an- subject to the conditions stated in 7.1 for the base
nealing with quenching or, for stabilized steels (excep- material concerned.
tion: Mo-alloyed stabilized steels with more than 0,03 %
C) and steels with carbon contents of C ≤ 0,03 %, 8. Testing
stabilization annealing.
8.1 Test of mechanical and technological
See AD Merkblatt HP 7/3. properties
7.2.2 Heat treatment of solution annealed and 8.1.1 The testing of pressed parts shall comprise
quenched or stabilization annealed material after cold tensile and notched bar impact tests performed on
forming may be dispensed with if: specimens taken from the finished parts after the final

A,B Section 14 – Fittings and Pressed Parts, Bolts and Nuts 14-5
heat treatment transverse to the original rolling direction verification of the dimensions.
of the plate. A tolerance of up to 20° from the required
specimen orientation can be tolerated. For this purpose, the manufacturer shall give the Sur-
veyor the measuring records.
The necessary test sections, the quantity of which is
specified in Table 14.1, shall be taken from surplus
9. Marking
material at the edges of the pressed parts or from cut-
outs.
Each part shall be marked by the manufacturer with the
manufacturer's mark, the material designation, the heat
8.1.2 Where stress relief heat treatment is sufficient number and the specimen number.
after forming, the test section may be removed from the
test piece beforehand and subjected to the same
10. Certificates
annealing treatment.
10.1 In the case of pressed parts which are heat

8.1.3 Where Table 14.1 specifies testing by test
treated after forming, the manufacturer shall certify the
batches, a test batch may only comprise items made
proper execution of the heat treatment stating the
from plates originating from the same heat which have
temperatures, the holding times and the type of cooling
been pressed and heat treated in the same way. The
applied.
wall thicknesses of items within a test batch may vary
by 20 % from the mean wall thickness.
10.2 In the case of pressed parts which may be
supplied in the hot pressed condition, the manufacturer
The number of sets of specimens shall be determined
shall certify that the forming operation was begun and
as follows:
ended within the specified temperature limits and shall
- up to 10 items: 1 set of specimens indicate the standard or material specification
- up to 25 items: 2 sets of specimens applicable. In addition, the method of cooling and the
- over 25 items: 3 sets of specimens. condition in which the starting material was supplied
shall also be stated.
8.1.4 Where individual testing of the pressed parts is

prescribed, testing of the starting material by TL may be
dispensed with. B. Pipe Fittings
1. Scope
8.1.5 Instead of individual testing of the pressed
parts, TL may agree to testing by rolled plate (1 set of
These Rules are applicable to saddles, T-shaped fit-
specimens per starting plate) provided that the manu-
tings, tapered transition pieces and pipe elbows for
facturer of the pressed parts demonstrates to TL by a
welding into pipelines which are fabricated from pipe or
preliminary test of the manufacturing method used that
plate sections made of ferritic or austenitic steels.
the requirements can be met and products with constant
characteristics can be manufactured. In this case, the
2. Starting materials
starting plates shall be tested.
Suitable plates or pipes are to be selected as starting

8.2 Test of surface finish and dimensions materials in accordance with Section 1 or 2. Unless
otherwise stipulated by TL, the starting materials shall
The surface finish and dimensions of each finished part be ordered with inspection certificates conforming to EN
shall be checked by the manufacturer. The parts shall 10204-3.1 from manufacturers approved by TL.
then be submitted to the Surveyor for final testing and

14-6 Section 14 – Fittings and Pressed Parts, Bolts and Nuts B
3. Manufacture Rules or other relevant standards or material

specifications.
3.1 Pipe fittings may be hot or cold formed from
sections of pipe. They may also be made from sections 4.2 In the case of ferritic steels for which normal-
of plate hot or cold formed into one or more shells and izing is prescribed and which undergo hot forming,
welded together. subsequent heat treatment may be dispensed with if a
corresponding structure can be achieved by the hot
3.2 Proof shall be furnished to TL, as a preliminary
forming operation. In the same circumstances temper-
measure, of the suitability of the process and, for fittings
ing may be sufficient for steels for which quenching and
welded together from individual components, the
tempering is prescribed.
characteristics of the welded joints.
4.3 Cold formed parts are generally required to

For this purpose, the manufacturer shall send a process
undergo renewed heat treatment following the forming
description containing all the details required for
operation. If such treatment is not to be applied, the
evaluating the process to TL for consideration. The
manufacturer shall prove that the finished part retains
nature and scope of the procedure approval inspection
the required characteristics.
shall be determined by TL from case to case.
4.4 Where fittings are welded together from hot or

4. Heat treatment
cold formed components, the nature of the heat
treatment shall be determined at the time of the proce-
4.1 All fittings shall be in the heat-treated or hot-
dure approval test.
worked state specified for the material according to TL
Tablo 14.1 Scope of tests on pressed parts made from plate
Base material
Extent of tests on
Grades of steel according to Test performed on
pressed parts
Section 1 (1)
All unalloyed steels with a minimum tensile

C,E Starting plate Not required
strength ≤ 410 N/mm
2
Unalloyed and fine-grained structural steels with a

Starting plate
minimum tensile strength 410 < Rm ≤ 510 N/mm ,
2
C,E Testing by batches
pressed part
and ReH ≤ 355 N/mm , also 0,3 %-Mo alloy steels
2
2
Fine-grained structural steels, ReH > 355 N/mm 1 set of specimens from
E Pressed part
each pressed part (2)
High-temperature CrMo alloy steels 1 set of specimens from
E Pressed part
Steels tough at sub-zero temperatures 1 set of specimens from
F Pressed part
Austenitic stainless steels:
≤20 Starting plate Not required
Thickness [mm] G Starting plate
>20 Testing by batches
pressed part
Clad plates The extent of the test depends on the base
H
material
(1) Pressed parts which are designed for the manufacture of tanks carrying pressure-liquefied ammonia are subject to F.8.2.2.
(2) Testing by rolled plate may be agreed if the conditions specified in 8.1.5 are satisfied..

B Section 14 – Fittings and Pressed Parts, Bolts and Nuts 14-7
4.5 If the starting material is in the prescribed heat- Unalloyed steel fittings from the same heats which have
treated condition, in the case of pipe elbows been heat-treated separately but in the same way may
manufactured from ferritic or austenitic steels the be tested together if the uniformity of the fittings has
following procedure may be applied: been proved to the Surveyor by means of a hardness
test on 10 %, but at least 3, of the fittings.
If these elbows are produced by cold bending with
bending radii of rm ≥ 1,3 ∙ da, subsequent heat treatment Table 14.2 Test batches for fittings
is not required if the outside diameter da is ≤ 133 mm.
The same applies to all elbows manufactured with Size da
No. of fittings per test batch (1)
bending radii of rm ≥ 2,5 ∙ da. [mm]
< 100 ≤ 200
The exceptions are steel pipes tough at sub-zero tem- ≥ 100 < 225 ≤ 100
peratures with wall thicknesses > 2,5 mm. and cold-bent ≥ 225 < 350 ≤ 50
pipes which have to be heat treated due to corrosive ≥ 350 ≤ 25
attack or because stressed parts have to be welded on (1) Test batches apply to 90-degree elbows.
The number of elbows per test batch is halved in the case
outside the neutral zone.
of 180-degree elbows and doubled in the case of 45-degree
elbows.
5. Requirements applicable to properties
6.2.2 The scope of the mechanical tests is as shown

In the finished state, the fittings shall possess all the
in Table 14.3.
required characteristics specified for the starting mate-
rial used (pipe or plate).
For preparing the test specimens, either additional
fittings shall be provided or fittings of excess length shall
6. Testing
be manufactured. Tensile and notched bar impact tests
may be performed on either tangential or longitudinal
6.1 Inspection and dimensional check
test specimens depending on the geometry of the
fittings; the specimens shall be prepared from the
All fittings shall be inspected and their dimensions
hardest and softest fittings determined in the hardness
checked in the condition of supply. For this purpose, the
tests. The required values shall be the definitive values
surface of the fittings shall be in a condition appropriate
for the starting materials.
for inspection which enables major defects to be
detected.
6.2.3 In the case of steels tough at sub-zero tem-
peratures, the notched bar impact test shall be per-
6.2 Testing of materials
formed at the appropriate test temperature.
6.2.1 For performing the mechanical tests, the

6.2.4 In the case of austenitic or austenitic-ferritic
fittings shall be divided into test batches in accordance
stainless steel fittings for use on chemical tankers, each
with Table 14.2.
heat and heat treatment batch shall be tested by the
manufacturer for resistance to intercrystalline corrosion
A test batch in accordance with Table 14.2 consists of
in accordance with ISO 3651-2 or an equivalent
fittings made of the same materials and having the
standard and a test certificate shall be issued.
same dimensions, and, in the case of alloy steel fittings
with a da > 100 mm, originating from the same heat. If
6.2.5 Alloy steel fittings shall be subjected to
final heat treatment is necessary, testing shall also be
appropriate testing by the manufacturer to verify the use
performed by heat treatment batches.
of the correct material.

14-8 Section 14 – Fittings and Pressed Parts, Bolts and Nuts B,C
Table 14.3 Classification into test groups and scope of tests
Scope of tests per test batch

Notched bar
Test groups Size da [mm] Material impact test (2)
Hardness test
Tensile test (set of
(1) specimens = 3
specimens)
I < 100 unalloyed 1 (4)
II < 100 alloyed 10% (3) min. on 1 (4)

3 fiting
unalloyed Rm<500
III ≥ 100 2 2 sets, only if less
N/mm
than 10 fittings 1
2 specimens only
≥ 100 set
10% (3) min. on if less than 10
IV ≤ 225
unalloyed Rm≥500 3 fittings fittings 1 specimen
(DN ≤ 200) 2
N/mm or alloyed
> 225
V %100 (5)
(DN > 200)
(1) With austenitic steels, the hardness test is dispensed with if the geometry allows tensile tests to be performed.
(2) The notched bar impact test is only performed in the case of materials for which minimum values for the absorbed energy are stated for the
starting material. Furthermore, specimens are only taken where the wall thickness is > 6 mm and the geometry allows this to be done.
(3) Starting with the second batch of a complete final inspection, the scope of hardness testing may be reduced by half if the hardness values
measured for the first batch lie within the specified strength range.
(4) The tensile test is to be carried out on the starting pipe.
(5) For elbows made of 16 Mo 3, 13 Cr Mo 4-5 and 10 Cr Mo 9-10 conforming to EN 10028-2, the scope of hardness testing specified for test
group IV is applicable.
6.2.6 Welded alloy steel fittings with nominal bores > - Heat number or code, if the starting material
75 mm. shall be subjected by the manufacturer to had a corresponding marking.
random radiographic inspection of the welds. Unless

stipulated in the specification or the order, the number
C. Bolts and Nuts
of fittings to be tested shall be agreed with the Surveyor.
These shall be selected in such a way that every size of 1. Scope
fitting is included.
1.1 These Rules are applicable to the
7. Marking manufacture, the mechanical properties and the testing
of bolts and nuts for
The fittings shall be marked as follows:
- Boilers, vessels, equipment and pipelines,
- Manufacturer's symbol,
- Diesel engines, gears, shafting and propellers,
- Material designation,
- Where applicable, quality level in the case of Other components of the machinery plant for which
boiler tubes, proof of quality is required as specified in the
Construction Rules.

C Section 14 – Fittings and Pressed Parts, Bolts and Nuts 14-9
1.2 The choice of bolts and nuts, together with the Surface smoothing and rolling of the thread are not
form of the requisite material test certificate is set out in regarded as cold forming within the meaning of this
the individual Chapters of the Construction Rules and paragraph.
shall be stated in the purchase order.
3.2 Bolts and nuts shall be in the heat-treated
2. Materials condition specified for the material in order to achieve
the minimum values. The material shall not undergo
2.1 Bolts and nuts are to be selected in accor- unacceptable embrittlement up to the maximum
dance with recognized standards or the manufacturer's temperature occurring in service. In the case of steels
material specifications which have been approved by tough at sub-zero temperatures, it shall exhibit
TL. The steels used in the manufacture of bolts shall toughness even at the minimum design temperature. In
have a guaranteed impact energy. Under these condi- the case of quenched and tempered steels, the
tions, the following materials may be considered: tempering temperature shall always be a reasonable
amount above the maximum in-service temperature.
2.1.1 Bolts and nuts conforming to ISO 898 (EN

20898-1 and -2) up to M39 threads. Exempted thereof 4. Requirements applicable to the material
are bolts of strength categories for which the standard
gives no data in respect of impact energy. 4.1 Chemical composition
2.1.2 Steels conforming to EN 10269 in conjunction The chemical composition shall satisfy the stipulations
with DIN 267-13. according to Section 6.B., Table 6.2 and the relevant
standards or specifications respectively.
2.1.3 Steels conforming to DIN 267-13.
2.1.4 Stainless steels conforming to ISO 3506-1 and
-2.. 4.2.1 Bolts and nuts conforming to the standards
specified in 2.1.1 to 2.1.4 shall meet the mechanical
2.2 Bolts and nuts conforming to other standards properties set out in these standards.
or the manufacturer's material specifications may be
used, provided that TL has confirmed their suitability for 4.2.2 Steels tough at sub-zero temperatures for bolts
the intended application. Unless otherwise specified, the and nuts which are to be used in the construction of gas
materials shall satisfy the requirements of 4.2.2, 4.2.3 tanks shall achieve an impact energy of at least 41
and 4.2.4. Joules at the prescribed test temperature using
longitudinal Charpy V-notch specimens. The test
2.3 Free cutting steels with a high sulphur, phos- temperature is to be determined in accordance with
phorous or lead content may not be used. Section 6, F.
3. Manufacture 4.2.3 Steels for bolts and nuts with threads exceed-
ing M39 as well as according to 2.2 shall have the
characteristic values of the material and shall satisfy the
3.1 Bolts and nuts may be manufactured by hot
following conditions in testing at room temperature with
or cold forming or by machining. Cold formed bolts shall
longitudinal specimens.
be subjected to subsequent heat treatment. The same
applies to hot formed bolts and nuts with the exception
- Elongation A5 ≥ %14,
of those made of quenched and tempered steels,
provided that the latter are to be used at normal ambient
- Impact energy using Charpy V-notch specimens ≥
temperatures and the hot forming process results in a 52 Joules for quenched and tempered steels and
uniform structure. ≥ 40 Joules for unalloyed steels.
14-10 Section 14 – Fittings and Pressed Parts, Bolts and Nuts C
4.2.4 Steels for bolts and nuts intended for engine properties shall suffice. In this case steel bars from the
foundation and with threads exceeding M39 as well as same heat and with the same diameter and heat
according to 2.2 shall have the characteristic values of treatment are to be grouped into test batches of 5000
the material and shall meet the requirements in testing kg. maximum. The performance of the tensile and
at room temperature with longitudinal specimens
notched bar impact tests require one set of test
according to Section 6, Table 6.5 and Table 6.6.
specimens to be taken from each test batch.
4.2.5 Steels or semi-finished products for foundation

5.5 Where machining is followed by heat treat-
bolts of propulsion plants may be rolled as well as
ment, testing shall be performed in the same way as on
forged, but shall meet the requirements of 4.2.4.
the corresponding formed bolts as per 5.2.
For threads exceeding M39 semi-finished products are

to be used. 5.6 The surface finish, dimensions and compliance
with tolerances shall be verified by the Surveyor on at
4.2.6 The impact energy values shall be average least 20 bolts and on at least 10 bolts in the case of
values obtained with three test specimens. Of these batch sizes of ≤ 200. The manufacturer shall supply the
only one specimen may have a value which is below the gauges and callipers necessary for this purpose.
average value but not less than 70 % of the average
value. Table 14.4Batch sizes for the testing of mechanical
properties
5. Testing of bolts
No. of sets of specimens
Quantity
5.1 The manufacturer shall demonstrate the for mechanical testing
chemical composition of each heat according to C.7. ≤ 200 1
> 200 to ≤ 400 2
5.2 Tensile testing shall be performed on bolts > 400 to ≤ 800 3
and, for thread diameters ≥ 16 mm, the notched bar > 800 to ≤ 1200 4
impact test shall also be carried out. > 1200 to ≤ 1600 5
> 1600 to ≤ 3500 6
For preparing the specimens, bolts of the same type > 3500 7
and strength category or made from the same material
shall be grouped into test batches in accordance with
Table 14.4.
If proof is furnished that the bolts in a delivery originate

from one heat and have undergone the same heat
treatment, testing of four sets of specimens is sufficient,
regardless of the quantity supplied.
5.3 For the tensile test, specimens may be

Figure 14.1 Turned specimen
machined from the sample material, or turned
specimens of the type shown in Figure 14.1 may be
used.
5.7 The uniformity of the delivery is to be dem-
onstrated by the manufacturer by means of hardness
5.4 Where no heat treatment is performed
tests. For this purpose, at least 20 bolts from each test
following machining and the starting material is in the
batch are to be tested, and at least 10 bolts in the case
final heat treated condition, testing of the starting
of quantities ≤ 200. The results of the test are to be
material with regard to demonstrating mechanical submitted to the Surveyor.

C Section 14 – Fittings and Pressed Parts, Bolts and Nuts 14-11
5.8 For bolts calculated for elevated temperature 7. Proof of chemical composition
application on the basis of their high-temperature
mechanical characteristics, the 0,2 % or 1 % proof 7.1 For each delivery, the manufacturer shall
stress shall be proved by a high-temperature tensile test provide the surveyor with a certificate giving the results
performed on one specimen from each batch. The test of the chemical analysis, heat numbers, dimensions and
shall be performed at the temperature which approxi- the as-delivered condition of the starting material
mates most closely to the level of the operating tem-
processed by him. The name of the steel producer shall
perature, rounded off to the nearest 50 °C.
also be indicated in the certificate.
The test may be dispensed with in the case of bolts to

7.2 Alloy steel bolts and nuts shall be subjected by
recognized standards, the high-temperature mechanical
the manufacturer to appropriate tests for use of the
properties of which are regarded as proven.
correct material.
6. Testing of nuts
8. Non-destructive tests

The manufacturer shall apply a suitable method of crack
detection to the following bolts:
The chemical composition shall satisfy the stipulations
according to Section 6, B., Table 6.2 and the relevant
standards or specifications respectively. - Turbine casing bolts,
6.2 Nuts with nominal thread diameters of up to - Bolts in main steam lines with temperatures > 350
and including 39 mm are to be subjected to the expan- °C,

sion test using a mandrel with a 1:100 taper, see Figure
14.2. Before testing, the nuts are to be drilled out to the - Propeller blade fixing bolts,
thread outside diameter. The expansion shall be at least
6 % for nuts with a depth of ≥ 0,8 ∙ nominal thread and, for diesel engines with cylinder diameters > 400
diameter d (at least 4 % for nuts with a depth of ≥0,5 to mm, the following bolts:
<0,8 d). The numbers of test specimens shown in Table
8.4 are applicable, but for quantities of ≤200 at least 2 - Main bearing bolts,
nuts shall be tested.
- Connecting rod bolts,
6.3 Nuts with nominal thread diameters > 39 mm
are to be subjected to testing of the starting material as - Cross-head bearing bolts,
specified in 5.2 rather than the expansion test.
- Cylinder cover bolts.

6.4 The uniformity of the delivery is to be dem-
onstrated by the manufacturer by means of hardness
tests. For this purpose, at least 20 nuts from each test
9. Retests
batch are to be tested, and at least 10 nuts in the case
of quantities ≤ 200. The results of the test are to be
9.1 Where one of the test specimens required for
submitted by the Surveyor.
carrying out testing of mechanical properties does not
satisfy the specified conditions, two additional test
6.5 The surface finish, dimensions and compliance
specimens or test sets of each are to be taken which
with tolerances shall be verified by the Surveyor in the
shall satisfy the requirements. If these test samples also
same way as described in 5.5.
fail to meet the requirements, the test batch shall be
regarded as unacceptable. The manufacturer may,

14-12 Section 14 – Fittings and Pressed Parts, Bolts and Nuts C
however, heat treat the batch again and present it for

retesting. If, however, these test specimens still fail to
meet the requirements, the test batch shall be rejected
for once and for all.
9.2 Where one of the test specimens required for

carrying out hardness testing, non-destructive testing to
check for surface defects, or for carrying out a di-
mensional check fails to meet the requirements, a
further random sample of 20 specimens (or 10 speci-
mens in the case of batch sizes of ≤ 200) shall be taken
of which all the test specimens shall satisfy the
requirements. Otherwise the entire test batch shall be
regarded as unacceptable. For the hardness test, the
manufacturer may present this batch for retesting once
he has carried out a further heat treatment. If these test
specimens still fail to satisfy the requirements, the entire
batch shall be rejected for once and for all.
10. Marking
10.1 Bolts and nuts are to be marked with the

manufacturer's symbol and with the strength category or Test mandrel for 6% expansion (1.06 d)
the steel grade, as well as with the heat number in the or 4% expansion (1.04 d) of the nut
case of bolts of M52 size and above.

d = nominal thread diameter
Bolts of M52 size and above are to be individually m = nominal depth of nut
marked with the TL stamp, which in all other cases is to

be applied to the packing label.
10.2 Steel bars over 25 mm. in diameter for the

machining of bolts and nuts are to be marked at one
end with the manufacturer's symbol, the steel grade and
the TL stamp, and alloy steel bars are to be additionally
marked with the heat number. Where the diameter of
the steel bars is 25 mm. or less, it is sufficient to apply
the corresponding markings to the label attached to the
bundle of bars.
Test arrangement
Figure 14.2 Expansion testing of nuts

Chapter 2 Material 2021 JAN

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chapter 2 Material 2021 JAN

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chapter 2 Material 2021 JAN

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chapter 2 – Material

Once downloaded, this document will become UNCONTROLLED. Please check

Section 2 – Mechanical and Technological Testing Procedures

Section 3 – Rolled Steel Plates, Sections and Bars

Section 4 – Steel Pipes and Fittings

Section 5 – Steel Forgings

Section 6 – Steel Castings

Section 7 – Iron Castings

Section 8 – Aluminium Alloys

Section 9 – Copper Alloys

Section 10 – Materials for Equipment

Section 11 – Materials for Propeller

Section 12 – Wooden Materials

Section 13 – Fibre Reinforced Plastics

Section 14 – Fittings and Pressed Parts, Bolts and Nuts

Revision RCS No. EIF Date*

Section 03 04/2022 01.07.2022

Section 02 05/2021 01.01.2022

Section 05 05/2021 01.01.2022

Section 06 05/2021 01.01.2022

Section 10 05/2021 01.01.2022

Section 13 05/2021 01.01.2022

Section 03 03/2021 01.07.2021

Section 05 03/2021 01.07.2021

Section 11 03/2021 01.07.2021

MANUFACTURE, TESTING AND CERTIFICATION

TÜRK LOYDU - MATERIAL – JANUARY 2021

A. General other relevant rules. Optional or additional conditions

1.3 Materials, test specimens and mechanical 1. Manufacture

The purchaser is to supply the manufacturer with all 3. Condition of Supply

TÜRK LOYDU - MATERIAL – JANUARY 2021

products are to be supplied in the finished condition D. Inspection and Testing

4. Defects 1.4 The surveyor is to be given the opportunity to

2.1 For the purpose of test sampling the following

TÜRK LOYDU - MATERIAL - JANUARY 2021

2.1.4 Test specimen, part of sample with specified 4. Retesting

TÜRK LOYDU - MATERIAL – JANUARY 2021

4.3 If unsatisfactory results are obtained from 5.4 Non-destructive examination

TÜRK LOYDU - MATERIAL - JANUARY 2021

TÜRK LOYDU - MATERIAL – JANUARY 2021

2. Works’ Certificates 2.2 Manufacturer's inspection certificate

- Newbuilding and project number respectively, - Dimension and indication of product,

- Material grade, type and specification, - Weight of products,

TÜRK LOYDU - MATERIAL - JANUARY 2021

By agreement, the results may also be attested using

TÜRK LOYDU - MATERIAL – JANUARY 2021

MECHANICAL AND TECHNOLOGICAL TESTING PROCEDURES

TÜRK LOYDU - MATERIAL – JANUARY 2021

A. General be calibrated in accordance with ISO 7500-1 or other

2. Preparation of Test Specimens 1. Tensile Test Specimens

3.2 Testing machines are to be maintained in a

TÜRK LOYDU - MATERIAL - JANUARY 2021

a=t 1.2.3 Aluminium alloys

b = 25 mm Flat tensile test specimens are to be used for specified

TÜRK LOYDU - MATERIAL – JANUARY 2021

For small size bars and similar products, the test

1.2.7 Grey cast iron

Round non-cylindrical machined test specimen is to be

Figure 2.3 Full cross-section specimen